Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds Third Edition Solution Manual John G. Ratcliffe

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Contents 1 Euclidean Geometry 1 1.1 Euclid’s Parallel Postulate ......................................................................... 1 1.2 Independence of the Parallel Postulate ..................................................... 1 1.3 Euclidean n-Space ....................................................................................... 3 1.4 Geodesics ...................................................................................................... 9 1.5 Arc Length.................................................................................................. 15 2 Spherical Geometry 22 2.1 Spherical n-Space....................................................................................... 22 2.2 Elliptic n-Space ......................................................................................... 26 2.3 Spherical Arc Length ................................................................................ 31 2.4 Spherical Volume ....................................................................................... 31 2.5 Spherical Trigonometry .............................................................................. 36 3 Hyperbolic Geometry 42 3.1 Lorentzian n-Space .................................................................................... 42 3.2 Hyperbolic n-Space.................................................................................... 48 3.3 Hyperbolic Arc Length ............................................................................. 54 3.4 Hyperbolic Volume .................................................................................... 56 3.5 Hyperbolic Trigonometry ........................................................................... 62 4 Inversive Geometry 71 4.1 Reflections ................................................................................................... 71 4.2 Stereographic Projection............................................................................ 74 4.3 Möbius Transformations............................................................................. 76 4.4 Poincar´e Extension ..................................................................................... 80 4.5 The Conformal Ball Model ....................................................................... 85 4.6 The Upper Half-Space Model .................................................................. 89 4.7 Classification of Transformations .............................................................. 94 5 Isometries of Hyperbolic Space 107 5.1 Topological Groups .................................................................................. 107 5.2 Groups of Isometries................................................................................ 113 5.3 Discrete Groups ........................................................................................ 123

i

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

5.4 5.5

Discrete Euclidean Groups...................................................................... 126 Elementary Groups .................................................................................. 134

6 Geometry of Discrete Groups 137 6.1 The Projective Disk Model.................................................................... 137 6.2 Convex Sets .............................................................................................. 140 6.3 Convex Polyhedra..................................................................................... 145 6.4 Geometry of Convex Polyhedra .............................................................. 147 6.5 Polytopes ................................................................................................... 149 6.6 Fundamental Domains ............................................................................. 155 6.7 Convex Fundamental Polyhedra ............................................................. 157 6.8 Tessellations .............................................................................................. 162 7 Classical Discrete Groups 166 7.1 Reflection Groups..................................................................................... 166 7.2 Simplex Reflection Groups...................................................................... 169 7.3 Generalized Simplex Reflection Groups ................................................ 175 7.4 The Volume of a Simplex ........................................................................ 178 7.5 Crystallographic Groups ......................................................................... 180 7.6 Torsion-Free Linear Groups .................................................................... 182 8 Geometric Manifolds 185 8.1 Geometric Spaces ..................................................................................... 185 8.2 Clifford-Klein Space-Forms.................................................................... 188 8.3 (X, G)-Manifolds ..................................................................................... 193 8.4 Developing ................................................................................................. 194 8.5 Completeness ............................................................................................ 198 9 Geometric Surfaces 202 9.1 Compact Surfaces .................................................................................... 202 9.2 Gluing Surfaces ........................................................................................ 202 9.3 The Gauss-Bonnet Theorem................................................................... 204 9.4 Moduli Spaces .......................................................................................... 206 9.5 Closed Euclidean Surfaces ...................................................................... 212 9.6 Closed Geodesics ...................................................................................... 215 9.7 Closed Hyperbolic Surfaces .................................................................... 220 9.8 Hyperbolic Surfaces of Finite Area ........................................................ 224 10 Hyperbolic 3-Manifolds 231 10.1 Gluing 3-Manifolds .................................................................................. 231 10.2 Complete Gluing of 3-Manifolds ............................................................ 236 10.3 Finite Volume Hyperbolic 3-Manifolds .................................................. 237 10.4 Hyperbolic Volume .................................................................................. 242 10.5 Hyperbolic Dehn Surgery ........................................................................ 248

11 Hyperbolic n-Manifolds 252 11.1 Gluing n-Manifolds .................................................................................. 252

ii

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

11.2 Poincar´e’s Theorem ................................................................................. 256 11.3 The Gauss-Bonnet Theorem................................................................... 258 11.4 Simplices of Maximum Volume .............................................................. 260 11.5 Differential Forms .................................................................................... 265 11.6 Simplicial Volume .................................................................................... 271 11.7 Measure Homology................................................................................... 274 11.8 Mostow Rigidity ....................................................................................... 284 12 Geometrically Finite n-Manifolds 288 12.1 Limit Sets .................................................................................................288 12.2 Limit Sets of Discrete Groups ................................................................ 289 12.3 Limit Points ............................................................................................. 295 12.4 Geometrically Finite Discrete Groups ................................................... 298 12.5 Nilpotent Groups ..................................................................................... 303 12.6 The Margulis Lemma .............................................................................. 304 12.7 Geometrically Finite Manifolds .............................................................. 311 12.8 Arithmetic Hyperbolic Groups ............................................................... 315 13 Geometric Orbifolds 320 13.1 Orbit Spaces ............................................................................................. 320 13.2 (X, G)-Orbifolds .................................................................................... 321 13.3 Developing Orbifolds ................................................................................ 326 13.4 Gluing Orbifolds ....................................................................................... 329 13.5 Poincar´e’s Theorem ................................................................................. 336

iii

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 1

Euclidean Geometry 1.1

Euclid’s Parallel Postulate

1.2

Independence of the Parallel Postulate

Exercise 1.2.1 Let P be a point outside a line L in the projective disk model.

Show that there exists two lines L1 and L2 passing through P parallel to L such that every line passing through P parallel to L lies between L1 and L2. The two lines L1 and L2 are called the parallels to L at P . All the other lines passing through P parallel to L are called ultraparallels to L at P . Conclude that there are infinitely many ultraparallels to L at P .

Solution: The lines L1 and L2 are the two lines passing through P that end at the two ideal endpoints of L. See Figure 1.2.1. There are obviously infinitely many lines in the projective disk model passing through P lying between L1 and L2, and so there are infinitely many ultraparallels to L at P .

Exercise 1.2.2 Prove that any triangle in the conformal disk model, with a vertex at the center of the model, has angle sum less than 180 ○.

Solution: Let ∆ be a triangle with vertices A, B, C in the conformal disk model with C the center of the model. The sides AC and BC of ∆ are Euclidean line segments. Let L be the hyperbolic line passing through the points A and B. Then L is a circular arc that is orthogonal to the circle at infinity. The hyperbolic half-plane bounded by L that does not contain ∆ is Euclidean convex, since it is the intersection of two disks. Therefore, side AB of ∆ is a circular arc that is contained in the corresponding Euclidean triangle ∆′ with vertices A, B, C. The angle of ∆ at A is the angle between side AC and the Euclidean tangent line T to the circular arc AB at A. The angle between line T and the Euclidean line segment AB at A is positive. Hence, the angle of ∆ at A is less than the angle of ∆′ at A. Likewise, the angle of ∆ at B is less than the angle of ∆′ at

1

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

B. Therefore, the sum of the angles of ∆ is less than the sum of the angles of ∆′, and so the sum of the angles of ∆ is less than 180○.

Exercise 1.2.3 Let u, v be distinct points of the upper half-plane model. Show how to construct the hyperbolic line joining u and v with a Euclidean ruler and compass.

Solution: If Re(u) = Re(v), draw the vertical ray L starting at Re(u) and passing through u and v. Otherwise, draw the Euclidean line segment S joining the points u and v. Construct the Euclidean perpendicular bisector M of the line segment S. Let w be the point of intersection of M and the real axis. Then u w = the semi-circle L centered at w passing through the | — | v | w—. Draw | points u and v with endpoints on the real axis. Then in either case L is the hyperbolic line joining u to v.

Exercise 1.2.4 Let φ(z) = az+b with a, b, c, d in R and ad —bc > 0. Prove that cz+d φ maps the complex upper half-plane bijectively onto itself.

Solution: Observe that ac|z|2 + adz + bcz + bd az + b cz + d · = cz + d cz + d |cz + d|2 2 ac|z| + (ad + bc)Re(z) + (ad — bc)Im(z)i + bd = |cz + d|2 Hence, we have

az + b (ad — bc)Im(z) = > 0. cz + d |cz + d|2 Therefore φ maps the complex upper half-plane into itself.

Define real numbers a′, b′, c′, d′ by the matrix equation Im

a′ c′

b′ d′

−1

a b c d

=

.

Observe that '

c

'

z+b a c'az+d '

+b

a'z+b' c'z+d'

+d =

since

a c '

aa'z+ab' c'z+d'

=

b d

ca'z+cb' c'z+d'

+

bc'z+bd' c'z+d'

+

dc'z+dd' c'z+d'

(aa′ + bc′)z + (ab′ + bd′)

=

(ca′ + dc′)z + (cb′ + dd′) z,

a′ c′

b′ d′

'

=

1 0 0 1

.

Let ψ(z) = acz+b 'z+d.' Then φ(ψ(z)) = z, and by reversing the roles of φ and ψ, we have ψ(φ(z)) = z. Therefore φ maps the complex upper half-plane bijectively onto itself with inverse ψ.

2

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

2 Exercise 1.2.5 Show that the intersection of the hyperboloid x— y2— z2 = 1 with a Euclidean plane passing through the origin is either empty or a hyperbola.

Solution: The equation of a plane passing through the origin is ax + by + cz = 0, with (a, b, c) /= (0, 0, 0).

Assume first that a = 0. Then by+cz = 0. Now, the hyperboloid x2 — y2 — z2 = 1 is symmetric with respect to the x-axis. Hence, we can rotate the normal vector (b, c) in the yz-plane so that b = 0. Then z = 0 is the equation of the plane and the intersection with the hyperboloid is the hyperbola x2 — y2 = 1 in the xy-plane.

Now assume a /= 0. Then we can normalize the normal vector (a, b, c) so that a = 1. Then the plane has the equation x+by +cz = 0. Next, we rotate the normal vector (1, b, c) about the x-axis so that c = 0. Then the plane has the equation x + by = 0. Hence, the intersection of the plane with the hyperboloid 2 2 satisfies the equation b2y— y2— z2 = 1. Now, the equation (b— 1)y2— z2 = 1 2 has a real solution if and only if b > 1. The intersection of the plane with the hyperboloid is the set {(—by, y, z) : (b2 — 1)y2 — z2 = 1}.

Let u = ( √−b , √ 1

, 0) and v = (0, 0, 1). Then {u, v} is an orthonormal basis √ for the plane x + by = 0. Let w = b2 + 1y. Then the intersection is the set b2+1

b2+1

{wu + zv :

b2−1 b2+1

w2 — z2 = 1}.

Hence, the intersection is either empty or a hyperbola.

1.3

Euclidean n-Space

Exercise 1.3.1 Let v0, . . . , vm be vectors in Rn such that v1 — v0, . . . , vm — v0 are linearly independent. Show that there is a unique m-plane of En containing v0, . . . , vm. Conclude that there is a unique 1-plane of En containing any two distinct points of En. Solution: The vectors v0, . . . , vm are contained in the m-plane P = v0 + Span{v1 — v0, . . . , vm — v0}.

Suppose v0, . . . , vm are contained in the m-plane a+V with V an m-dimensional vector subspace of Rn. Then vi — v0 is in V for each i = 1, . . . , m. Hence V = Span{v1 — v0, . . . , vm — v0}, since v1 — v0, . . . , vm — v0 are linearly independent. As v0 is in a + V , we have that v0 = a + v for some v in V . Hence v0 — a is in V . Therefore a + V = v0 + V .

Thus, the m-plane P = v0 + V is unique.

3

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 1.3.2 A line of En is defined to be a 1-plane of En. Let x, y be distinct points of En. Show that the unique line of En containing x and y is the set {x + t(y — x) : t ∈ R}.

The line segment in En joining x to y is defined to be the set {x + t(y — x) : 0 ≤ t ≤ 1}.

Conclude that every line segment in En extends to a unique line of En. Solution: This follows from Exercise 1.3.1, since {x + t(y — x) : t ∈ R} = x + Span{y — x}.

Exercise 1.3.3 Two m-planes of En are said to be parallel if and only if they are cosets of the same m-dimensional vector subspace of Rn. Let x be a point of En outside of an m-plane P of En. Show that there is a unique m-plane of En containing x parallel to P .

Solution: Suppose P = a+V with V an m-dimensional vector subspace of Rn. The cosets of V partition Rn. Hence, there is a unique coset b + V containing x. Then Q = b + V is the unique m-plane of En containing x parallel to P .

Exercise 1.3.4 Two m-planes of En are said to be coplanar if and only if there is an (m + 1)-plane of En containing both m-planes. Show that two distinct m-planes of En are parallel if and only if they are coplanar and disjoint.

Solution: Suppose P and Q are distinct parallel m-planes of En. Then P = a + V and Q = b + V with V an m-dimensional vector subspace of Rn and b —a not in V . Let W = Span {b —a, V }. Then dim W = dim V + 1. Observe that P, Q ca + W . Hence P and Q are coplaner and disjoint, since they are distinct cosets of V .

Conversely, suppose P and Q are coplaner and disjoint. Then P, Qc c + W with W an (m + 1)-dimensional vector subspace of Rn, and suppose P = a + U and Q = b + V , with U and V m-dimensional vector subspaces of Rn. By replacing P and Q with P —c and Q —c, we may assume that c = 0. Now a + U c W implies a is in W and so U c W . Likewise b is in W and V c W .

By replacing P and Q with P — a and Q —a, we may assume a = 0. Now U and b + V are disjoint and so b is not in V . Then W = Span{b, V}. Suppose there is a u in U that is not in V . Write u = tb + v with t in R and v in V .

Then t /= 0. Hence tu = b + yt and so U meets b + V , which is a contradiction.

Therefore U c V , and so U = V , since dim U = dim V . Hence P and Q are parallel.

4

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 1.3.5 The orthogonal complement of an m-dimensional vector subspace V of Rn is defined to be the set V ⊥ = {x ∈ Rn : x · y = 0 for all y in V }.

Prove that V ⊥ is an (n —m)-dimensional vector subspace of Rn and that each vector x in Rn can be written uniquely as x = y + z with y in V and z in V ⊥.

In other words, Rn = V ⊕ V ⊥.

Solution: Let v1, . . . , vm be a basis of V . Extend v1, . . . , vm to a basis v1, . . . , vm, . . . , vn of Rn. By the Gram-Schmidt process, we may assume that v1, . . . , vn is an orthonormal basis. Then we have Span{vm+1, . . . , vn} c V ⊥. Σn Let z be in V ⊥. Then there are coefficients c1, . . . , cn such that z = i=1 civi.

As z · vi = 0 for each i = 1, . . . , m, we have that ci = 0 for each i = 1, . . . , m.

Hence z is in Span{vm+1, . . . , vn}. Therefore, we have V ⊥ = Span{vm+1, . . . , vn}. Σn Thus dim V ⊥n= n — m. civi.

If x is in R . Then there are coefficients c1, . . . , cn such that x = i=1 Σm Σn Let y = i=1 civi and z = civi. Then x = y + z with y in V and z i=m+1 ⊥ ′ ′ ′ in V . Suppose x = y + z with y in V and z′ in V ⊥. As y′· vi = ci = y · vi for each i = 1, . . . , m, we have that y′ = y, and as z·′ vi = ci = z · vi for each i = m + 1, . . . , n, we have that z′ = z. Thus y and z are unique.

Exercise 1.3.6 Let P be a subset of En. Prove that P is a hyperplane of En if and only if there is a unit vector u in Rn, which is unique up to sign, and a real number s such that P = {x ∈ En : u · x = s}.

Solution: Suppose P is a hyperplane of En. Then there exists a∈ En and an (n —1)-dimensional vector subspace V of Rn such that P = a + V . Let u be a unit vector which is orthogonal to V . Then V = ⟨u⟩⊥ = {x ∈ En : u · x = 0}.

Hence P

=

a+V

n

= {a + x ∈ E : u · x = 0} n = {x ∈ E : u · (x — a) = 0} n

= {x ∈ E : u · x = u · a}.

Conversely, suppose u is a unit vector in En and s is a real number such that P = {x ∈ En : u · x = s}.

5

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Then su ∈ P . Hence, we have P — su = {x — su ∈ En : u · x = s} = {x ∈ En : u · (x + su) = s} = {x ∈ En : u · x = 0} = ⟨u⟩⊥.

Hence P —su is an (n 1)-dimensional subspace V of Rn by Exercise 1.3.5.

— Therefore P = su+V , and so P is a hyperplane of En. Moreover u is orthogonal to V , and so u is unique up to sign.

Exercise 1.3.7 A line and a hyperplane of En are said to be orthogonal if and only if their associated vector spaces are orthogonal complements. Let x be a point of En outside of a hyperplane P of En. Show that there is a unique point y in P nearest to x and that the line passing through x and y is the unique line of En passing through x orthogonal to P .

Solution: Suppose P = x0 + V with V an (n 1)-dimensional vector subspace — of Rn. By replacing P with P — x0 and x with x —x0, we may assume that x0 = 0. Write x = y + z with y in V and z in V ⊥. Suppose v is in V . Then |x — v|2 = |y + z — v|2 = |y — v|2 + |z|2.

Hence | x —v |is a minimum if and only if v = y. Therefore y is the nearest point of V to x.

Now L = x +Span {y —x }is the line passing through x and y. As x— y = z, we have that Span{ y— x } = V ⊥. Hence L is orthogonal to P . Now suppose N is a line passing through x orthogonal to P . Then N = x + W with W a 1-dimensional vector subspace of Rn such that W and V are orthogonal. Then W = V ⊥, and so N = L. Thus L is unique.

Exercise 1.3.8 Let u0, . . . , un be vectors in Rn such that u1—u0, . . . , un—u0 are linearly independent, let v0, . . . , vn be vectors in Rn such that v1 —v0, . . . , vn —v0 are linearly independent, and suppose that ui u| j =| v— | — i vj | for all i, j. Show that there is a unique isometry φ of En such that φ(ui) = vi for each i = 0, . . . , n.

Solution: Define a linear transformation A : Rn → Rn by A(ui — u0) = vi — v0 for each i = 1, . . . , n.

Define φ : En → En by the formula φ(x) = v0 + A(x — u0).

Then φ(ui) = vi for each i = 0, 1, . . . , n.

Let u′i = ui — u0 for i = 1, . . . , n, and let vi′ = vi — v0 for i = 1, . . . , n. Then ′ Au i = vi′ and |u′i| = |vi′| for each i = 1, . . . , n. Moreover |u′i — u′j | = |vi′ — vj′ | for all i, j. Hence u′i · u′j = vi′ · vj′ for all i, j.

6

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Let x be in Rn. Then there are coefficients c1, . . . , cn in R such that x=

n Σ

ciu′i.

i=1

Then we have

n

Ax =

Σ

n

ciAu′i =

i=1

Σ

civi′.

i=1

Observe that |Ax|2

=

n Σ

2

civi′

i=1 n Σ

=

! , n Σ cjvj′ ·

civi′

i=1

=

j=1

n n Σ Σ i=1 j=1 n Σ n Σ

=

cicjvi′ · vj′ cicju′i · u′j =

|x|2.

i=1 j=1

Hence, we have |Ax — Ay| = |A(x — y)| = |x — y|.

Therefore A is an isometry of En. Hence φ is an isometry of En. Let ψ : En → En be an isometry such that ψ(ui) = vi for each i = 0, 1, . . . , n.

Define B : Rn → Rn by the formula B(x) = ψ(x + u0) — v0.

Then B(0) = ψ(u0) — v0 = 0. Hence B is an orthogonal transformation by Theorem 1.3.5. Moreover, B(ui — u0) = ψ(ui) — v0 = vi — v0 = A(ui — u0) for each i = 1, . . . , n. As u1 — u0, . . . , un — u0 form a basis of Rn, we deduce that B = A. Therefore ψ = φ, and so φ is unique.

Exercise 1.3.9 Prove that Em and En are isometric if and only if m = n.

Solution: Let φ : Em → En be an isometry. By replacing φ with φ — φ(0), we may assume that φ(0) = 0. Then |φ(x)| = |x| for all x in Em. Hence |φ(x) — φ(y)| = |x — y| implies that φ(x) · φ(y) = x · y for all x, y in Em. In particular, φ(ei) · φ(ej) = ei ·ej = δij for all i, j. Hence {φ(e1), . . . , φ(em)} is an orthonormal set of vectors of En. Therefore ≤ m n. Likewise n≤ m. Thus m = n.

7

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 1.3.10 Let be the norm of a positive definite inner product ⟨ , ⟩ on an n-dimensional real vector space V . Define a metric d on V by the formula d(v, w) = v — w . Show that d is a metric on V and prove that the metric space (V, d) is isometric to En. Solution: Observe that d(v, w)2 = v — w = ⟨v — w, v — w⟩ ≥ 0 with equality if and only if v = w. Moreover, d(v, w)2 = ⟨v — w, v — w⟩ = ⟨w — v, w — v⟩ = d(w, v)2.

Furthermore, d(u, w)

= =

u—w u—v+v—w

≤ u—v + v—w = d(u, v) + d(v, w).

Thus d is a metric on V .

Let v1, . . . , vn be a basis for V . By the Gram-Schmidt process, we may assume that the basis is orthonormal with respect to the inner product ⟨ , ⟩.

Define a linear isomorphism φ : En → V by the formula φ(x) =

n Σ

xivi.

i=1

Observe that 2

φ(x)

2

n ¨Σ xivi = ¨ ¨ i=1 + n * n Σ Σ = xivi, xjvj

= =

i=1 n n ΣΣ i=1 j=1 n Σ n Σ

j=1

xixj⟨vi , vj⟩ xixj(ei · ej)

i=1 j=1

=

x·x

=

|x|2.

Hence, we have d(φ(x), φ(y)) = φ(x) — φ(y) = φ(x — y) = |x — y|.

Thus φ is an isometry.

8

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 1.3.11 A group G acts on the right of a set X if there is a function from X × G to X, written (x, g) '→xg, such that for all g, h in G and x in X, we have (1) x· 1 = x and (2) (xg)h = x(gh). Prove that if G acts on the left of a set X, then G acts on the right of X by xg = g−1x.

Solution: If x ∈X and g, h ∈ G, then (1) x · 1 = 1−1 · x = 1 · x = x, and (2) (xg)h = h−1(g−1x) = (h−1g−1)x = (gh)−1x = x(gh).

1.4

Geodesics

Exercise 1.4.1 A subset X of En is said to be affine if and only if X is a totally geodesic metric subspace of En. Prove that an arbitrary intersection of affine subsets of En is affine.

Solution: Let {Xi}i∈I be a collection of affine subsets of En. Suppose that x and y are distinct points in ∩Xi. Let L be the line of En containing x and y. Then L c Xi for each i, since Xi is affine for each i. Hence L c ∩Xi. Thus ∩Xi is affine.

Exercise 1.4.2 An affine combination of points v1, . . . , vm of En is a linear combination of the form t1v1 ·+· · + tmvm such that t1 +· · · + tm = 1. Prove that a subset X of En is affine if and only if X contains every affine combination of points of X. Solution: Suppose that X contains every affine combination of points of X. Let x and y be distinct points of X. Then (1 —t)x + ty is in X for each t in R. Therefore X contains the line through x and y, and so X is affine.

Conversely, suppose X is affine. Let v = t1v1 + · · · + tmvm be an affine combination of points v1, . . . , vm of X. We prove that v is in X by induction on m. If m = 1, then v = v1 is in X. Now suppose m > 1 and X contains every affine combination of m — 1 points of X. There is an i such that ti /= 1, and by reindexing if necessary, we may assume that tm /= 1. Observe that ! m −1 Σ t v = (1 — tm) vi + tmvm. i 1 — t m i=1 Now, we have m−1

m−1

Σ

ti 1 Σ 1 — tm = ti= = 1.

1 — t 1 — t 1 — tm m m i=1 i=1

Σm−1 ti Hence, the point i=1 1−t vi is in X by the induction hypothesis. Therem fore v is in X, since X is affine.

Exercise 1.4.3 The affine hull of a subset S of En is defined to be the intersection A(S) of all the affine subsets of En containing S. Prove that A(S) is the set of all affine combinations of points of S. 9

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: The set A(S) is nonempty, since En is affine. Hence S c A(S).

The set A(S) is affine by Exercise 1.4.1. Hence A(S) contains the set AC(S) of ΣA all affine i=1 siui and Σ m combinations of points of S by Exercise 1.4.2. Let u = v = j=1 tjv j be affine combinations of points of S. Observe that A

(1 — t)u + tv =

Σ

m

Σ

(1 — t)siui +

i=1

ttjvj

j=1

and A

Σ

m

(1 — t)si +

i=1

Σ

A

ttj = (1 — t)

j=1

Σ

m

si + t

i=1

Σ

tj = (1 — t) + t = 1.

j=1

Hence (1—t)u+tv is in AC(S) and so AC(S) is affine. Therefore A(S) c AC(S).

Thus A(S) = AC(S).

Exercise 1.4.4 A set {v0, . . . , vm} of points of En is said to be affinely independent if and only if t0v0 + · · · + tmvm = 0 and t0 + · · · + tm = 0 imply that ti = 0 for all i = 0, . . . , m. Prove that {v0, . . . , vm} is affinely independent if and only if the vectors v1 — v0, . . . , vm — v0 are linearly independent.

Solution: Let {v0, . . . , vm} be an affinely independent set of points of En. Suppose that c1, . . . , cm are real numbers such that m Σ

ci(vi — v0) = 0.

i=1

Then we have —

m Σ

! ci v0 +

i=1

and

civi = 0

i=1

m

—

m Σ

Σ

! ci +

i=1

m

Σ

ci = 0.

i=1

Hence ci = 0 for i = 1, . . . , m. Thus v1—v0, . . . , vm—v0 are linearly independent.

Conversely, suppose that v1 — v0, . . . , vm — v0 are linearly independent and we have m m Σ Σ tivi = 0 and ti = 0.

Then t0 = —

Σm

i=0

i=0

i=1 ti. Hence, we have m Σ

ti(vi — v0) = 0.

i=1

Therefore ti = 0 for i = 1, . . . , m, and so t0 = 0. Thus v0, . . . , vm are affinely independent.

10

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 1.4.5 An affine basis of an affine subset X of En is an affinely independent set of points{ v0, . . . , vm} such that X is the affine hull of{ v0, . . . , vm}.

Prove that every nonempty affine subset of En has an affine basis.

Solution: Let X be a nonempty affine subset of En. Then X has a point v0.

Let U = X —v0. We claim that U is a vector subspace of Rn. Now 0 = v0— v0 is in U .

Suppose u is in U and t is in R. Then u+v0 is in X. Hence t(u+v0)+(1—t)v0 is in X, since X is affine. Therefore tu + v0 is in X. Hence tu is in U .

Suppose u and v are in U . Then (u + v0) + (v + v0) — v0 is in X, since X is affine. Hence u + v + v0 is in X, and so u + v is in U . Thus U is a vector subspace of Rn. Let u1, . . . , um be a basis for U , and let vi = ui + v0 for i = 1, . . . , m. Then vi is in X for each i and ui = vi —v0 for each i = 1, . . . , m. Hence v0, . . . , vm are affinely independent by Exercise 1.4.4. Observe that m Σ

U=

} ciui : ci ∈ R

i=1

and m Σ

X

=

v0 +

} ciui : ci ∈ R

i=1

m Σ

=

v0 +

ci(vi — v0) : ci ∈ R

i=1 m

=

1—

Σ

m

ci v 0 +

i=1

Σ

}

} civi : ci ∈ R

i=1

c A({v0, . . . , vm}) c X. Therefore X = A({v0, . . . , vm}). Thus {v0, . . . , vm} is an affine basis for X. Exercise 1.4.6 Prove that a nonempty subset X of En is affine if and only if X is an m-plane of En for some m.

Solution: Suppose X = a + V is an m-plane of En. Let a + v and a + w be distinct points of X. Then (1— t)(a + v) + t(a + w) = a + t(w — v) is in X. Hence X is affine.

Conversely, if X is affine, then the first part of the solution of Exercise 1.4.5 shows that X is an m-plane of En for some integer m.

Exercise 1.4.7 A function φ : En → En is said to be affine if and only if φ((1 — t)x + ty) = (1 — t)φ(x) + tφ(y) for all x, y in En and t in R. Show that an affine transformation of En maps affine sets to affine sets and convex sets to convex sets.

11

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let φ : En →En be affine. Suppose X is an affine subset of En. Let x and y be points of X. Then (1— t)φ(x) + tφ(y) = φ((1— t)x + ty) is in φ(X). Hence φ(X) is affine. Likewise, if C is a convex subset of En, then φ(C) is convex.

Exercise 1.4.8 Prove that a function φ : En →En is affine if and only if there is an n × n matrix A and a point a of En such that φ(x) = a + Ax for all x in En. Solution: Let ψ = φ — φ(0). If t is in R and v and w are in En, then we have ψ(tv)

= φ(tv) — φ(0) = φ((1 — t)0 + tv) — φ(0) = (1 — t)φ(0) + tφ(v) — φ(0) = t(φ(v) — φ(0)) = tψ(v).

and ψ(v + w)

=

φ(v + w) — φ(0)

= φ( 12(2v) + 12(2w)) — φ(0) = 21 φ(2v) + 12φ(2w) — φ(0) = 12 (ψ(2v) + φ(0)) + 12(ψ(2w) + φ(0)) — φ(0) = ψ(v) + 1 φ(0) + ψ(w) + 1 φ(0) — φ(0) 2

2

= ψ(v) + ψ(w).

Thus ψ is linear.

Exercise 1.4.9 Prove that every open ball B(a, r) and closed ball C(a, r) in En is convex.

Solution: Let x and y be points of C(a, r) in En, and let t be a real number such that 0 ≤ t ≤ 1. Then we have |(1 — t)x + ty — a| = |(1 — t)x + ty — ((1 — t)a + ta)| = |(1 — t)x — (1 — t)a + ty — ta| ≤ |(1 — t)x — (1 — t)a| + |ty — ta| = (1 — t)|x — a| + t|y — a| ≤ (1 — t)r + tr = r.

Thus (1 — t)x + ty is in C(a, r). Moreover, if x and y are in B(a, r), then (1 — t)x + ty is in B(a, r). Therefore B(a, r) and C(a, r) are convex.

Exercise 1.4.10 Prove that an arbitrary intersection of convex subsets of En is convex.

Solution: See the solution of Exercise 1.4.1.

12

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 1.4.11 A convex combination of points v1, . . . , vm of En is a linear combination of the form t1v1 ·+· · + tmvm such that t1 + · · · + tm = 1 and ti≥ 0 for all i = 1, . . . , m. Prove that a subset C of En is convex if and only if C contains every convex combination of points of C. Solution: See the solution of Exercise 1.4.2.

Exercise 1.4.12 The convex hull of a subset S of En is defined to be the intersection C(S) of all the convex subsets of En containing S. Prove that C(S) is the set of all convex combinations of points of S. Solution: See the solution of Exercise 1.4.3.

Exercise 1.4.13 Let S be a subset of En. Prove that every element of C(S) is a convex combination of at most n + 1 points of S. Solution: Suppose v1, . . . , vm are points of S with m > n + 1 and suppose v=

m Σ

tivi

m Σ

with

i=1

ti = 1 and ti > 0 for all i.

i=1

Consider the set X of all points x = (x1, . . . , xm) in Em such that m

v=

Σ

m

xivi

and 1 =

i=1

Σ

xi.

i=1

These two equations determine a linear system of n+1 equations in m unknowns.

Therefore X is a k-plane of Em of dimension k ≥ m — (n + 1) ≥ 1. Hence X contains a line L passing through the solution x0 = (t1, . . . , tm). Now L lies in the hyperplane m Σ P = {x ∈ Em : xi = 1} i=1

and meets the interior of the (m — 1)-simplex ∆ = {x ∈ Em :

m Σ

xi = 1 and xi ≥ 0 for all i}

i=1

at the point x0. Hence L must meet the boundary of ∆ and so there is a point x in Em such that v=

m Σ i=1

xivi

with

m Σ

xi = 1 and xi ≥ 0 for all i,

i=1

and xi = 0 for some i. Thus v is a convex combination of m — 1 points of S. It follows that v is a convex combination of at most n + 1 points of S.

13

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 1.4.14 Let K be a compact subset of En. Prove that C(K) is compact.

Solution: Let { v i } i∞= 1 be an infinite sequence of points of C(K). We will prove that {v i } i∞= 1 has a convergent subsequence in C(K). By Exercise 1.4.13, there are n + 1 points ui0, . . . , uin of K and n + 1 real numbers ti0, . . . , tin such that vi =

n Σ

tijuij

with

j=0

m Σ

tij = 1 and tij ≥ 0 for all i, j.

j=0

By passing to convergent subsequences, we may assume that {u ij } ∞ i=1 converges to a point uj of K for each j = 0, . . . , n. The n-simplex ∆ = {(t0, . . . , tn) :

n Σ

tj = 1 and tj ≥ 0 for all j}

j=0

is compact. Hence, by passing to a convergent subsequence, we may assume that the sequence of points {(t ij )} i∞=1 converges to the point (tj) of ∆. Then {v i } i∞=1 converges to v=

n Σ j=0

tjuj with

n Σ

tj = 1 and tj ≥ 0 for all i.

j=1

Hence v is in C(K). Thus C(K) is compact.

Exercise 1.4.15 Let C be a convex subset of En. Prove that for all r > 0, the r-neighborhood N (C, r) of C in En is convex.

Solution: Suppose x and y are points in N (C, r). Then there are points a and b in C such that x is in B(a, r) and y is in B(b, r). Now, the point (1 — t)a + tb is in C for 0 ≤ t ≤ 1. Observe that (1 — t)x + ty — (1 — t)a + tb

= |(1 — t)(x — a) + t(y — b)| ≤ (1 — t)|x — a| + t|y — b| < (1 — t)r + tr = r.

Thus (1 —t)x + ty is in B((1 — t)a + tb, r). Hence (1 —t)x + ty is in N (C, r).

Therefore N (C, r) is convex.

Exercise 1.4.16 A subset of S of En is locally convex if and only if for each x in S, there is an r > 0 so that B(x, r) ∩S is convex. Prove that a closed, connected, locally convex subset of En is convex.

Solution: Let S be a closed, connected, locally convex subset of En. Define an equivalence relation on S by x ~y if and only if x can be joined to y by a polygonal path in S. The equivalence classes are open in S, since S is locally convex. Hence S has only one equivalence class, since S is connected.

14

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Let x be a fixed point of S. If r > 0, let P (x, r) be the set of all points of S that can be joined to x be a polygonal path in S of length at most r. There exists r > 0 such that P (x, r) is star-shaped from x, since S is locally convex.

Let s be the supremum of the set of all r > 0 such that P (x, r) is star-shaped from x. Then 0 < s ≤ ∞.

Suppose s < ∞. Let y be in P (x, s) with x /= y. Then there is a sequence of distinct points x = x0, x1, . . . , xm = y such that [xi−1, xi] c S for each i and m Σ

|xi — xi−1| ≤ s.

i=1

Let {y i } i∞= 1 be a sequence of points on [xm−1, y] converging to y with |y —yi| > 0 for all i. Then yi is in P (x, ri) with ri < s for each i. Hence [x, yi] c S for each i. Now (1 — t)x + tyi converges to (1 — t)x + ty for each t such that 0 ≤ t ≤ 1, and so [x, y] c S, since S is closed. Hence P (x, s) is star-shaped from x.

Let {y i } i∞= 1 be a sequence of points of P (x, s) converging to a point y of S. Then [x, yi] c S and |x —yi | ≤ s for all i. Now (1 —t)x + tyi converges to (1 — t)x + ty for each t such that 0 ≤ t ≤1, and so [x, y] cS, since S is closed.

Moreover| x— y| ≤ s. Hence y is in P (x, s). Thus P (x, s) is closed in S. Now P (x, s) is bounded, and so P (x, s) is compact. Hence, there exists r > 0 such that B(y, r) ∩ S is convex for each y in P (x, s). Suppose z is in P (x, s+ r )—P (x, s). Let y be a point of P (x, s) nearest to z. Then |y —z| ≤ r/2, 2 since there is a polygonal path from x to z of length at most s + 2r. We claim that y is on the line segment [x, z]. On the contrary, suppose that y is not on [x, z]. Then [x, y] and [y, z] form an angle α less than π at y. Let w be a point on [x, y] such that 0 <| w— |y < r. As B(y, r) ∩ S is convex, [w, z]c S. Now [w, y] and [y, z] form the angle α < π at y. Hence, we have |w — z| < |w — y| + |y — z|.

Moreover α ≥ π/2, since y is a nearest point of [w, y] to z. Hence |w—y| < |w—z|.

Let y′ be the point on [w, z] such that |w — y| = |w — y′|. Then y′ is in P (x, s).

Now |w — y′| + |y′ — z| = |w — z| < |w — y| + |y — z| implies that |y′ —z |< y| z—, which contradicts the fact that y is a nearest | point of P (x, s) to z. Therefore y is on [x, z], and so [x, z] = [x, y] ∪ [y, z] c S. Hence P (x, s+ r 2) is star-shaped from x in S, but this contradicts the supremacy of s. Therefore s = ∞, and so S is star-shaped from x. As x is an arbitrary point in S, we conclude that S is convex.

1.5

Arc Length

Exercise 1.5.1 Let γ : [a, b] → X be a curve in a metric space X and let P, Q be partitions of [a, b] such that Q refines P . Show that l(γ, P ) ≤ l(γ, Q).

15

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let P = t0{, . . . , tm ,} and suppose Q refines P . By induction, we may assume that Q is obtained from P by adding one point t. Then there is an index j such that Q = {t0, . . . , tj−1, t, tj, . . . , tm}.

Observe that m Σ l(γ, P ) = d(γ(ti−1), γ(ti)) i=1

=

j−1 Σ i=1

≤

m Σ

d(γ(ti−1), γ(ti)) + d(γ(tj−1), γ(tj)) +

d(γ(ti−1), γ(ti))

i=j+1

j−1 Σ

d(γ(ti−1), γ(ti)) + d(γ(tj−1), γ(t)) + d(γ(t), γ(tj)) + i=1 m

Σ

d(γ(ti−1), γ(ti)) = l(γ, Q).

i=j+1

Exercise 1.5.2 Let γ : [a, b] → X be a rectifiable curve in a metric space X. For each t in [a, b], let γa,t be the restriction of γ to [a, t]. Define a function λ : [a, b] → R by λ(a) = 0 and λ(t) = |γa,t| if t > a. Prove that λ is continuous.

Solution: Let ϵ > 0. As γ is uniformly continuous, there is a δ > 0 such that t| —s | < δ implies that | γ(t) —γ(s) |< ϵ/2. Let P = {t0, . . . , tm } be a partition of [a, b] such that |γa,b| — l(γ, P ) < ϵ/2.

Then we have m Σ |γti−1,ti | — d(γ(ti−1), γ(ti)) < ϵ/2. i=1

Hence, for each i, we have |γti−1,ti | — d(γ(ti−1), γ(ti)) < ϵ/2.

Let t be a point of [a, b]. By refining P , if necessary, we may assume that t = ti for some i and |P | < δ. If a ≤ s < t and t — s ≤ ti — ti−1, then we have λ(t) — λ(s) = |γs,t| ≤ |γti−1,ti | < ϵ/2 + d(γ(ti−1), γ(ti)) < ϵ/2 + ϵ/2 = ϵ.

If t < s ≤ b and s — t ≤ ti+1 — ti, then we have λ(s) — λ(t) = |γt,s| ≤ |γti,ti+1 | < ϵ/2 + d(γ(ti), γ(ti+1)) < ϵ/2 + ϵ/2 = ϵ.

16

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Thus, if |t — s| < |P |, then |λ(t) — λ(s)| < ϵ. Therefore λ is continuous.

Exercise 1.5.3 Let γ : [a, b] →X be a curve from x to y in a metric space X with x = / y. Prove that γ| |= d(x, y) if and only if γ maps [a, b] onto a geodesic segment joining x to y and d(x, γ(t)) is a nondecreasing function of t.

Solution: Suppose γ maps [a, b] onto a geodesic segment [x, y] and d(x, γ(t)) is a nondecreasing function of t. Let P = {t0, . . . , tm } be a partition of [a, b].

By Theorem 1.4.2, we have l(γ, P ) =

m Σ

d(γ(ti−1, γ(ti)) = d(x, y).

i=1

Hence |γ| = d(x, y).

Conversely, suppose |γ| = d(x, y). Let s and t be real numbers such that a ≤ s < t ≤ b. Then s and t determine a partition P of [a, b]. Now we have d(x, y) ≤ l(γ, P ) ≤ |γ| = d(x, y).

Hence d(x, y) = l(γ, P ). Therefore, we have d(x, y) = d(x, γ(s)) + d(γ(s), γ(t)) + d(γ(t), y).

Likewise, we have d(x, y) = d(x, γ(t)) + d(γ(t), y).

Hence, we have d(x, γ(s)) ≤ d(x, γ(s)) + d(γ(s), γ(t)) = d(x, γ(t)).

Therefore, the function β : [a, b]→ [0, l], with l = d(x, y), defined by the formula β(t) = d(x, γ(t)) is nondecreasing. The function β is a continuous closed surjection and so β is an identification. Hence γ : [a, b] → X induces a map α : [0, l] → X such that γ = αβ.

Suppose s and t are real numbers such that 0≤ s < t ≤ l. Then there are s and t in [a, b] such that β(s) = s and β(t) = t. Then we have d(α(s), α(t)) = d(γ(s), γ(t)) = d(x, γ(t)) — d(x, γ(s)) = β(t) — β(s) = t — s.

Thus α is a geodesic arc. Hence γ maps [a, b] onto a geodesic segment from x to y with d(x, γ(t)) an increasing function of t.

Exercise 1.5.4 Prove that a geodesic section in a metric space X can be subdivided into a finite number of geodesic segments.

17

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let γ : [a, b] → X be an injective geodesic curve. For each t in [a, b], there exists rt > 0 such that γ preserves distances in B(t, rt). As [a, b] is compact, there exists r > 0 such that γ preserves distances in B(t, r) for each t in [a, b]. Let a = t0 < t1 < · · · < tm = b be a partition of [a, b] such that ti — ti−1 < 2r for each i. Then γ preserves distances on [ti−1, ti].

Thus γ restricted to [ti−1, ti] is a geodesic arc γi : [ti−1, ti] → X for each i = 1, . . . , m. Hence, the geodesic section γ([a, b]) can be subdivided into the geodesic segments γ([t0, t1]), γ([t1, t2]), . . . , γ([tm−1, tm]).

Exercise 1.5.5 Let γ = (γ1, . . . , γn) be a curve in En. Prove that γ is rectifiable in En if and only if each of its component functions γi is rectifiable in R. Solution: Let P = {t0, . . . , tm} be a partition of [a, b]. Then we have m Σ

γi(tj) — γi(tj−1)

l(γi, P ) =

j=1 ,

≤

Σ m u Σ , n j=1

k=1

2

γk(tj) — γk(tj−1)

m Σ

γ(tj) — γ(tj−1)

= j=1

= l(γ, P ) m n Σ Σ = γk(tj) — γk(tj−1) ek ≤ =

j=1 k=1 n m Σ Σ j=1 k=1 n Σ m Σ

γk(tj) — γk(tj−1) γk(tj) — γk(tj−1)

=

k=1 j=1

n Σ

l(γk, P ).

k=1

Σ Hence |γi| ≤ |γ| ≤ n k=1 |γk| for each i, and so γ is rectifiable if and only if γi is rectifiable for each i.

Exercise 1.5.6 Define γ : [0, 1] → R by γ(0) = 0 and γ(t) = t sin (1/t) if t > 0.

Show that γ is a nonrectifiable curve in R. Solution: Let m be an even positive integer, and let ti = 2 (m−i)π for i = 2 1, 2, . . . , m — 1. Then P = {0, , 2 , . . . , 2 , 1} is a partition of [0, 1]. (m−1)π

(m−2)π

Observe that m−1 Σ

l(γ, P ) ≥

γ(ti) — γ(ti−1) i=1

18

π

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

, m −2 Σ

4 (m — i)π i=1

=

+

2 π

i odd

= >

2 π 2 π

2 2 2 1 + + + ··· + 3 5 m—1 1 1 1 1 1 + + + ··· + + 2 3 4 m—1 m

.

Hence l(γ, P ) → ∞ as m → ∞. Thus γ is nonrectifiable.

Exercise 1.5.7 Let γ : [a, b] → X be a curve in a metric space X. Define γ−1 : [a, b] → X by γ−1(t) = γ(a + b — t). Show that |γ−1| = |γ|.

Solution: Let P = {t0, . . . , tm} be a partition of [a, b], and let P −1 = {a + b — tm, . . . , a + b — t0}.

Then P −1 is a partition of [a, b]. Observe that m Σ

γ(ti) — γ(ti−1)

l(γ, P ) = i=1 Σ m

γ(a + b — (a + b — ti)) — γ(a + b — (a + b — ti−1))

= i=1 Σ m

γ−1(a + b — ti) — γ−1(a + b — ti−1)

= i=1

m Σ

γ−1(a + b — tm−i) — γ−1(a + b — tm−i+1)

= i=1

=

l(γ−1, P −1).

Hence |γ| ≤ |γ−1|. Now as l(γ−1, P ) = l(γ, P −1), we have |γ−1| ≤ |γ|, and so |γ−1| = |γ|.

Exercise 1.5.8 Let γ : [a, b] → X be a curve in a metric space X and let η : [a, b] → [c, d] be an increasing homeomorphism. The curve γη−1 : [c, d] → X is called a reparameterization of γ. Show that |γη−1| = |γ|.

Solution: Let P = {t0, . . . , tm} be a partition of [a, b]. Then ηP = {η(t0), . . . , η(tm)}

19

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

is a partition of [c, d]. Observe that m Σ

γ(ti) — γ(ti−1)

l(γ, P ) = i=1 Σ m

γη−1(η(ti)) — γη−1(η(ti−1))

= i=1

l(γη−1, ηP ).

= Hence |γ| ≤ |γη−1|. Likewise

l(γη−1, Q) = l(γ, η−1Q) implies that |γη−1| ≤ |γ|, and so |γη−1| = |γ|.

Exercise 1.5.9 Let γ : [a, b] → En be a C1 curve. Show that γ has a reparameterization, given by η : [a, b] → [a, b], so that γη−1 is a C1 curve and (γη−1)′(a) = 0 = (γη−1)′(b).

Conclude that a piecewise C1 curve can be reparameterized into a C1 curve.

Solution: By reparameterizing γ via the affine transformation α : [a, b] defined by t a α(t) = — , b—a b—a we may assume that a = 0 and b = 1.

Now let p(x) = a3x3 + a2x2 + a1x + a0

→ [0, 1]

be a cubic polynomial such that p(0) = 0 and p′(0) = 0. Then a0 = 0 and a1 = 0. Assume p′(1) = 0. Then 3a3 + 2a2 = 0, and so a2 = —3a3/2. Assume p(1) = 1. Then a3 — 3a3/2 = 1, whence —a3/2 = 1, and so a3 = —2. Thus p(x) = —2x3 + 3x2.

Observe that p′(x) = —6x2 + 6x = 6x(1 — x), and so p′(x) > 0 for 0 < x < 1. Hence p is increasing on (0, 1). Now p′′(x) = —12x + 6.

As p′′(0) = 6, we have that p has a local minimum at 0. As p′′(1) = —6, we have that p has a local maximum at 1. Therefore p is increasing on [0, 1]. Hence p has an inverse η : [0, 1] → [0, 1]. Now γη−1 = γp is a C1 curve with (γη−1)′ = (γ′η−1)(η−1)′ = (γ′p)p′ and (γη−1)′(0) = (γ′p)p′(0) = 0 and (γη−1)′(1) = (γ′p)p′(1) = 0.

20

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 1.5.10 Let X be a subset of En. Prove that if X is a path metric space with the Euclidean metric, then the closure X of X in En is convex.

Solution: We prove the contrapositive statement. Assume that X is not convex. Then there exist u, v∈ X such that [u, v]/c X. Hence, there exists w ∈ (u, v) such that w /∈ X. As X is closed, there exists r > 0 such that B(w, r) ∩X = .∅Hence r ≤d(w, u) and r ≤ d(w, v).

Now, there exists x, y∈ X such that x∈ B(u, r) and y∈ B(v, r). Let P be the hyperplane of En such that w∈ P and [u, v]⊥ P . Then B(u, r) and B(v, r) lie in opposite sides of P , and so x and y lie in opposite sides of P . The r-neighborhood N ([u, v], r) is convex, and so [x, y] c N ([u, v], r). As P ∩B(w, r) separates N ([u, v], r) and [x, y] is connected, the set P ∩ B(w, r) contains a point z of (x, y). As X is closed, there exists s > 0 such that B(z, s) ∩ X = ∅. Let Q be the hyperplane of En such that z ∈ Q and [x, y] ⊥ Q. Then x and y lie in opposite sides of Q. Let γ : [a, b] → X be a curve from x to y. Then there exists c ∈ (a, b) such that γ(c) ∈ Q. We have that |γ|

|γa,c| + |γc,b| ≥ d(x, γ(c)) + d(γ(c), y) √ √ ≥ d(x, z)2 + s2 + d(y, z)2 + s2. =

Hence, we have that inf{|γ| : γ is a curve in X from x to y} √ √ ≥ d(x, z)2 + s2 + d(y, z)2 + s2 > d(x, z) + d(y, z) = d(x, y).

Thus X is not a path metric space.

21

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 2

Spherical Geometry 2.1

Spherical n-Space

Exercise 2.1.1 Show that the metric topology of Sn determined by the spherical metric is the same as the metric topology of Sn determined by the Euclidean metric.

Solution: Let x and y be points of Sn. Let s = θ(x, y) and let r = |x — y|. As 1 2 x · y = 1 — |x — y| , 2 we have that cos s = 1 — 21 r2. Hence, we have r=

√

2(cos s — 1) and s = cos−1 1 — 21 r2 .

Hence, we have BS(x, s) = BE x,

√

2(cos s — 1)

and BE(x, r) = BS x, cos−1 1 — 12 r2 .

Therefore, the metric topology of Sn determined by the spherical metric is the same as the metric topology of Sn determined by the Euclidean metric.

Exercise 2.1.2 Let A be a real n × n matrix. Prove that the following are equivalent: 1. A is orthogonal.

2. |Ax| = |x| for all x in Rn. 3. A preserves the quadratic form f (x) = x12 + · · · + x2n.

22

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Suppose A is orthogonal. Then Ax· Ax = x ·x, and so |Ax 2| = x| 2.| Hence| Ax| = x| |for all x in Rn. Thus (1) implies (2).

Conversely, suppose (2) holds. Then we have 2x · y

= |x|2 + |y|2 — |x — y|2 = |Ax|2 + |Ay|2 — |A(x — y)|2 = |Ax|2 + |Ay|2 — |Ax — Ay)|2 = 2Ax · Ay.

Thus (2) implies (1).

Now | Ax| = |x | for all x in Rn if and only if | Ax| 2 = |x |2 for all x in Rn which is the case if and only if f A = f . Thus (2) and (3) are equivalent.

Exercise 2.1.3 Show that every matrix in SO(2) is of the form cos θ sin θ

— sin θ cos θ

.

Solution: Suppose A is in SO(2) and A=

a c

b d

.

Then the columns of A form an orthonormal basis of R2 by Theorem 1.3.3. As (a, c) is a unit vector, there is a real number θ such that (a, c) = (cos θ, sin θ). As (b, d) is a unit vector orthogonal to (a, c), we have that (b, d) = ±(— sin θ, cos θ).

Finally, ad — bc = 1 implies that (b, d) = (— sin θ, cos θ).

Exercise 2.1.4 Show that a curve α : [a, b] → Sn is a geodesic arc if and only if there are orthogonal vectors x, y in Sn such that α(t) = (cos(t — a))x + (sin(t — a))y

and b — a ≤ π.

Conclude that Sn, with n > 0, is geodesically connected but not geodesically convex.

Solution: Suppose α(t) = (cos(t—a))x+(sin(t — a))y with b —a ≤ π and x and y orthogonal vectors in Sn. Let s and t be real numbers such that a ≤ s ≤ t ≤ b.

Then we have cos θ(α(s), α(t)) = α(s) · α(t) = cos(s — a) cos(t — a) + sin(s — a) sin(t — a) = cos(t — s).

As 0 ≤ t — s ≤ π and 0 ≤ θ(α(s), α(t)) ≤ π, we have that θ(α(s), α(t)) = t — s.

Hence α is a geodesic arc.

Conversely, suppose α : [a, b] → Sn is a geodesic arc. Then b — a = θ(α(b), α(a)) ≤ π.

23

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

By Theorem 2.1.4, we have that α satisfies the differential equation α′′ + α = 0 and there are orthogonal vectors x and y in Sn such that α(t) = (cos(t — a))x + (sin(t — a))y for all t in [a, b), and therefore, also for t = b by continuity.

We now show that Sn is geodesically connected. Let x and y be distinct points of Sn. Then x and y lie on a great circle of Sn, and so we may assume n = 1. By rotating S1, we may assume x = e1 and by reflecting in the x-axis, if necessary, we may assume that y lies in the first or second quadrant. Let θ be the angle such that y = (cos θ, sin θ) with 0 < θ ≤ π. Then α : [0, θ] → S1 defined by α(t) = (cos(t))e1 + (sin(t))e2 is a geodesic arc from x to y. Thus Sn is geodesically connected. Note that Sn is not geodesically convex, since antipodal points of Sn are joined by more than one geodesic segment.

Exercise 2.1.5 Prove Theorem 2.1.5. Conclude that Sn is geodesically complete.

Solution: Let λ : R → Sn be a geodesic line. By Theorem 2.1.4, we have that λ satisfies the differential equation λ′′ + λ = 0. Hence, we have λ(t) = (cos(t))λ(0) + (sin(t))λ′(0).

Differentiating the equation λ(t)· λ(t) = 1 yields the equation λ(t) · λ′(t) = 0.

Hence, we have 2 2 2 ′ 2 |λ(t)| = cos t + (sin t)|λ (0)| , and so |λ′(0)| = 1.

Conversely, if λ(t) = (cos(t))x +(sin(t))y with x and y orthogonal vectors in Sn, then λ′′ + λ = 0, and so λ is locally a geodesic arc by Theorem 2.1.4, and therefore λ is a geodesic line.

Exercise 2.1.6 A great m-sphere of Sn is the intersection of Sn with an (m+1)dimensional vector subspace of Rn+1. Show that a subset X of Sn, with more than one point, is totally geodesic if and only if X is a great m-sphere of Sn for some m > 0.

Solution: Let X be a great m-sphere of Sn with m > 0. By applying an orthogonal transformation, we may assume X = Sm. Then X is totally geodesic, since Sm is geodesically connected and geodesically complete.

Conversely, suppose X is totally geodesic. Now X contains at least two points and so X contains a great circle of Sn. Hence X contains a great msphere S with m > 0 and as large as possible. We claim that X = S. On the contrary, suppose that x is a point of X that is not in S. Let V be the (m + 1)-dimensional vector subspace of Rn+1 such that S = Sn∩ V . Let W be the vector subspace of Rn+1 spanned by V and x. Then dim W = m + 2. Let w be a point of Sn ∩W . Then there exist a unit vector v in V and coefficients a and b such that w = av + bx. As X is totally geodesic, X contains a great circle 24

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

C that contains v and x. Let U be the 2-dimensional vector subspace of Rn+1 such that C = Sn ∩U . Now as w is in Sn ∩U , we have that w is in C, and so w is in X. Therefore Sn ∩ W c X. Now Sn ∩W is a great (m + 1)-sphere of Sn which contradicts the maximality of m. Thus, we must have X = S. Exercise 2.1.7 Let u0, . . . , un be linearly independent vectors in Sn, and let v0, . . . , vn be linearly independent vectors in Sn, and suppose that θ(ui, uj) = θ(vi, vj) for all i, j. Show that there is a unique isometry φ of Sn such that φ(ui) = vi for each i = 0, . . . , n.

Solution: Now θ(ui, uj) = θ(vi, vj) for all i, j if and only if | ui—uj | = |vi —vj | for all i, j by Formula 2.1.7. Hence, there is a unique isometry ψ of En+1 such that ψ(ui) = vi for all i and ψ(0) = 0 by Exercise 1.3.8. Therefore ψ restricts to a unique isometry φ of Sn such that φ(ui) = vi for all i.

Exercise 2.1.8 Prove that every similarity of Sn is an isometry.

Solution: Suppose φ : Sn → Sn is a similarity with scale factor k > 0. Then θ(φ(x), φ(—x)) = kθ(x, —x) = kπ ≤ π, and so k ≤ 1. Now φ−1 is a similarity with scale factor k−1. As above, we have k−1 ≤ 1, and so k = 1. Thus φ is an isometry.

Exercise 2.1.9 A tangent vector to Sn at a point x of Sn is defined to be the derivative at 0 of a differentiable curve γ :—[ b, b] → Sn such that γ(0) = x. Let n n Tx = Tx(S ) be the set of all tangent vectors to S at x. Show that Tx = {y ∈ Rn+1 : x · y = 0}.

Conclude that Tx is an n-dimensional vector subspace of Rn+1. The vector space Tx is called the tangent space of Sn at x.

Solution: Let γ : [—b, b] → Sn be a differentiable curve such that γ(0) = x.

Differentiating the equation γ(t) · γ(t) = 1 yields the equation γ′(t) · γ(t) = 0.

In particular, γ′(0) · γ(0) = 0, and so γ′(0) · x. Hence Tx c {y ∈ Rn+1 : x · y = 0}.

Suppose y is in Rn+1 and x · y = 0. First assume that y = 0. Let γ(t) = x for all t. Then γ′(0) = 0, and so y is in Tx. Now assume y /= 0. Define γ(t) = cos(|y|t) x + sin(|y|t) y/|y|.

Then γ(0) = x and |γ(t)| = 1 for all t. Moreover γ′(t) = —|y| sin(|y|t) x + |y|(cos(|y|t) y/|y|.

Hence γ′(0) = y. Therefore y is in Tx. Thus Tx = {y ∈ Rn+1 : x · y = 0}.

25

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 2.1.10 A coordinate frame of Sn is a n-tuple (λ1, . . . , λn) of functions such that 1. the function λi : R → Sn is a geodesic line for each i = 1, . . . , n; 2. there is a point x of Sn such that λi(0) = x for all i; and 3. the set {λ′1(0), . . . , λ′n(0)} is an orthonormal basis of Tx(Sn).

Show that the action of I(Sn) on the set of coordinate frames of Sn, given by φ(λ1, . . . , λn) = (φλ1, . . . , φλn), is transitive.

Solution: For each i = 1, . . . , n, let ϵi : R → Sn be defined by ϵi(t) = cos(t) en+1 + sin(t) ei.

Then ϵ′i(0) = ei for each i. Let (λ1, . . . , λn) be a coordinate frame based at x in Sn. Let A be the orthogonal matrix with column vectors λ′1(0), . . . , λ′n(0), x.

Then we have Aϵi(0) = Aen+1 = x = λi(0) for all i, and we have Aϵ′i(0) = Aei = λ′i(0) for all i. Hence Aϵi = λi for each i.

Therefore I(Sn) acts transitively on the set of coordinate frames of Sn.

2.2

Elliptic n-Space

Exercise 2.2.1 Prove that dP is a metric on P n .

Solution: Observe that dP (±x, ±y) = min{dS(x, y), dS(x, —y)} ≥ 0 with equality if and only if either x = y or x = —y. Thus dP ( ±x, ±y) ≥ 0 with equality if and only if{± x } = {± y}.

Next, observe that dP (±x, ±y) = min{dS(x, y), dS(x, —y)} = min{dS(y, x), dS(—y, x)} = min{dS(y, x), dS(y, —x)} = dP (±y, ±x).

Next, observe that dP (±x, ±z) = min{dS(x, z), dS(x, —z)} ≤

min{dS(x, y) + dS(y, z), dS(x, y) + dS(y, —z)}

= =

dS(x, y) + min{dS(y, z), dS(y, —z)} dS(x.y) + dP (±y, ±z).

26

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Likewise, we have dP (±x, ±z) ≤ dS(x, —y) + dP (±y, ±z).

Hence, we have dP (±x, ±z) ≤ min{dS(x, y), dS(x, —y)} + dP (±y, ±z), and so we have the triangle inequality dP (±x, ±z) ≤ dP (±x, ±y) + dP (±y, ±z).

Therefore dP is a metric on P n .

Exercise 2.2.2 Let η : Sn →P n be the natural projection. Show that if x is in Sn and r > 0, then η(B(x, r)) = B(η(x), r).

Solution: Suppose dS(x, y) < r. Then we have dP (±x, ±y) = min{dS(x, y), dS(x, —y)} < r.

Hence dP (η(x), η(y)) < r. Thus η(B(x, r)) c B(η(x), r).

Now suppose dP±( x,± y) < r. Then either dS(x, y) < r or dS(x,— y) < r.

Hence, either y is in B(x, r) or— y is in B(x, r). Therefore± y is in η(B(x, r)).

Thus η(B(x, r)) = B(η(x), r).

Exercise 2.2.3 Show that η maps the open hemisphere B(x, π/2) homeomorphically onto B(η(x), π/2). Conclude that η is a double covering.

Solution: Let y and z be distinct points of B(x, π/2). Then we have dS(y, z) ≤ dS(y, x) + dS(x, z) < π.

Hence y and z are not antipodal. Therefore η(y) = η(z). Thus η maps B(x, π/2) bijectively onto B(x, π/2). Moreover η is an open map by Exercise 2.2.2. Hence η maps B(x, π/2) homeomorphically onto B(η(x), π/2).

Now η−1(B(η(x), π/2)) is the disjoint union of B(x, π/2) and B(— x, π/2) and η maps B( —x, π/2) homeomorphically onto B(η(x), π/2). Therefore η is a double covering.

Exercise 2.2.4 Show that η maps B(x, π/4) isometrically onto B(η(x), π/4).

Solution: Let y an z be points of B(x, π/4). Then we have dP (η(y), η(z)) = dP (±y, ±z) = min{dS(y, z), dS(y, —z)}.

Now, we have dS(y, z) ≤ dS(y, x) + dS(y, z) < π/2.

Whereas, we have dS(y, —z) ≥ d(z, —z) — d(y, z) ≥ π/2.

Hence dP (η(y), η(z)) = dS(y, z). Thus η maps B(x, π/4) isometrically onto B(η(x), π/4).

27

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 2.2.5 Prove that the geodesics of P n are the images of the great circles of Sn with respect to η.

Solution: Let λ : R →Sn be a geodesic line. Then ηλ : R → P n is a geodesic line, since η is a local isometry by Exercise 2.2.4. Therefore, the images of the great circles of Sn with respect to η are geodesics of P n .

Conversely, let λ : R → P n be a geodesic line. Then λ lifts to a geodesic line λ̃ : R → Sn by covering space theory. Hence, the geodesics of P n are the images of the geodesics of Sn with respect to η : Sn → P n .

Exercise 2.2.6 Show that P 1 is isometric to 12S1.

Solution:

Define ψ : 1 S1 → P 1 by ψ( 1 ei8) = η(ei8/2) with 0 ≤ θ < 2π.

2

Suppose 0 ≤ θ < φ < 2π. Then we have dP (ψ( 1 ei8), ψ( 1 eiφ)) 2

2

2

=

dP (η(ei8/2), η(eiφ/2))

=

min{dS(ei8/2, eiφ/2), dS(ei8/2, —eiφ/2)}

= min{ φ2— 82, π — ( φ2 — 82 )} = =

1

2

1

2

min{φ — θ, 2π — (φ — θ)} dS(ei8, eiφ) = dS( 1 ei8, 1 eiφ).

2

2

Thus ψ is an isometry.

Exercise 2.2.7 Show that the complement in P 2 of an open ball B(x, r), with r < π/2, is a Möbius band.

Solution: We may assume that x = η(e3). Let R = S2 — B(e3, r) ∪ B(—e3, r) .

Then η restricts to a double covering from R to P 2 — B(e3, r). The region R is a band about the equator of S2. The space P 2 — B(e3, r) is obtained from the region R by identifying antipodal points. Cut R into two regions R+ and R− along the intersection with the great circle S(e2, e3) passing through e2 and e3.

Here R+ = {y ∈ R : y1 ≥ 0}. Then P 2 — B(e3, r) is obtained from the region R+ by identifying antipodal points of the two geodesic segments R∩ + S(e2, e3).

This quotient space is equivalent to the usual quotient space for a Möbius band obtained by identifying two opposite sides of a rectangle by the antipodal map with respect to the center of the rectangle.

Exercise 2.2.8 Let x be a point of P 3 at a distance s > 0 from a geodesic L of P 3. Show that there is a geodesic L′ of P 3 passing through x such that each point in L′ is at a distance s from L. The geodesics L and L′ are called Clifford parallels.

Solution: It suffices to solve the corresponding problem in S3. Let L = λ(R) with λ(t) = (cos(t))e1 + (sin(t))e2. Let x be a point of S3 at a distance s > 0 28

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

from L. The maximum value of s is π/2 which occurs when x is orthogonal to each point of L, that is, when x1 = x2 = 0. Then x is on L′ = µ(R) where µ(t) = (cos(t) e3 + sin(t))e4. Moreover, each point of L′ is at a distance π/2 from L. Now assume that s < π/2. Then x2 + x2 > 0. Observe that 1

2

cos θ(λ(t), x) = λ(t) · x = (cos(t))x1 + (sin(t))x2.

To find the distance of x to L, we need to maximize the function f (t) = λ(t)· x in order to minimize θ(λ(t), x). Now f ′(t) =— (sin(t))x1 + (cos(t))x2. Hence f ′(t) = 0 implies (cos(t))x2 = (sin(t))x1. Therefore tan(t) = x2/x1. Hence, we have x1 x2 √ cos(t) = √ 2 and sin(t) = . x1 + x22 x12 + x22 Now f ′′(t) = —(cos(t))x1 — (sin(t))x2 x12 + x22 = —√ 2 x + x22 q 1 = — x21 + x22 > 0. √ Hence f (t) has a lo cal maximum when t = t0 satisfies cos(t0) = x1/ x21 + x22 √ and sin(t0) = x2/ x21 + x2.2 This means that the nearest point of L to x is found by projecting x to the x1x2-plane√ and then normalizing the vector x1e1 + x2e2 to the unit vector (x1e1 + x2e2)/ x21 + x2.2 Observe that x21 x22 √ √ λ(t0) · x = + = x12 + x22 x21 + x22

q 2 2 x1 + x2.

Consider the geodesic line µ : R → S3 defined by µ(t) = (cos(t))x +(sin(t))y with y orthogonal to x. We want to find y so that each point of L′ = µ(R) is at a distance s from L. This is the case if and only if for each t, we have (cos(t))x1 + (sin(t))y1

2

+ (cos(t))x2 + (sin(t))y2

2

= x12 + x22.

Let x = x1e2 + x2e2. Then the above equation can be rewritten in the form (cos2(t))|x|2 + 2(cos(t) sin(t))(x · y) + (sin2(t))|y|2 = |x|2.

The above equation holds for all t if and only if x · y = 0 and |x| = |y|. Hence, there are two possibilities for y. Let x̂ = x3e3 + x4e4. For these two possibilities | |. Hence, there are two possibilities for for y, we also have x̂ ·yˆ = 0 and |x̂ |= yˆ yˆ. Therefore, there are four possibilities for y, which can be paired off into two pairs of antipodal points, and so there are two possibilities for L′.

29

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

n Exercise 2.2.9 Let S+ = {x ∈ Sn : xn+1 > 0}. Define φ : Sn+ → Rn by

φ(x1, . . . , xn+1) = (x1/xn+1, . . . , xn/xn+1).

Show that φ is inverse to ν : Rn → Sn. Conclude that ν maps Rn homeomorphically onto S+n .

Solution: Observe that if x is in Rn, then φν(x) = φ =

x + en+1 |x + en+1| √ √ x xn √ 1 |x|2 + 1, . . . , √ |x|2 + 1 |x|2 + 1 |x|2 + 1

= x.

While if y is S+n , then νφ(y) = ν(y1/yn+1, . . . , yn/yn+1)

=

q (y1/yn+1, . . . , yn/yn+1, 1)/ (|y|2/y2n+1 ) + 1 q (y1, . . . , yn, yn+1)/ |y|2 + y2n+1

=

(y1, . . . , yn, yn+1)

=

=

y.

Thus φ = ν−1.

Exercise 2.2.10 Define an m-plane Q of P n to be the image of a great msphere of Sn with respect to the natural projection η : Sn→ P n . Show that the intersection of a corresponding m-plane Q of Rn with Rn is either an m-plane of En or the empty set, in which case Q is an m-plane at infinity in Pn−1.

Solution: Let Q be an m-plane of P n and let S = η−1(Q). Then S is a great m-sphere of Sn. Hence, there is an (m + 1)-dimensional vector subspace V of Rn+1 such that S = Sn ∩V . Consider ην : Rn → P n . The intersection of the m-plane of Rn with Rn corresponding to Q is the set (ην)−1(Q). Observe that (ην)−1(Q) = ν−1η−1(Q) = ν−1(S) n = ν−1(S ∩ S+ ) n = φ(S ∩ S+ ) n = φ(Sn ∩ V ∩ S+ ) = φ(Sn+∩ V ).

If V c Rn, then S c Sn−1, and so Q corresponds to an m-plane at infinity in Pn−1. Suppose V /c Rn. Extend φ : Sn+ → Rn to a map φˆ : Un+1 → Rn by the same formula. Let P = {x ∈ R n+1 : xn+1 = 1}. Observe that φ(Sn+∩ V ) = φˆ(U n+1 ∩ V ) = φˆ(P ∩ V ) and φˆ vertically projects the m-plane ∩P V of En+1 to an m-plane of En. Hence, the set (ην)−1(Q) is an m-plane of En. 30

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

2.3

Spherical Arc Length

2.4

Spherical Volume

Exercise 2.4.1 Show that the spherical coordinates of a vector x in Rn+1 satisfy the system of Equations (2.4.1).

Solution: Observe that x1 = e1 · x = |x| cos θ1 = ρ cos θ1 and = e2 · x = e2 · (x1e1 + x2e2 + · · · + xn+1en+1)

x2

= e2 · (x2e2 + · · · + xn+1en+1) = = =

|x2e2 + · · · + xn+1en+1| cos θ2 q |x| 2— x 21cos θ2 √ ρ 1 — cos2 θ1 cos θ2 = ρ sin θ1 cos θ2.

Suppose 2 < i < n and Equations 2.4.1 hold for indices j < i. Then we have xi = ei · x = ei · (x1e1 + x2e2 + · · · + xn+1en+1) = ei · (xiei + · · · + xn+1en+1) = |xiei + · · · + xn+1en+1| cos θi q = |x|2 — (x21 + x22 + · · · + x2i−1) cos θi q = ρ2 — ρ2(cos2 θ1 + sin2 θ1 cos2 θ2+· · ·+sin2 θ1· · · sin2 θi−2 cos2 θi−1) cos θi q = ρ 1 — (cos2 θ1 + sin2 θ1 cos2 θ2 +· · ·+ sin2 θ1 · · · sin2 θi−2 cos2 θi−1) cos θi q = ρ sin2 θ1 — (sin2 θ1 cos2 θ2 + · · · + sin2 θ1 · · · sin2 θi−2 cos2 θi−1) cos θi q = ρ sin θ1 1 — (cos2 θ2 + · · · + sin2 θ2 · · · sin2 θi−2 cos2 θi−1) cos θi = ρ sin θ1 sin θ2 · · · sin θi−1 cos θi. q q Next xn = x2n + x2n+1 cos θn and xn+1 = xn2 + x2n+1 sin θn with q q x2 + x2 = |x|2 — (x2 + · · · + x2 ) = ρ sin θ1 · · · sin θn−1. n

n+1

1

n−1

Hence, we have xn xn+1

= ρ sin θ1 sin θ2 · · · sin θn−1 cos θn = ρ sin θ1 sin θ2 · · · sin θn−1 sin θn.

31

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 2.4.2 Show that the spherical coordinate transformation satisfies the Equations (2.4.2)-(2.4.4).

Solution: Observe that (1)

∂x ∂ρ

=

x ρ

=

x |x|

.

Next, observe that ∂x ∂θi

=

—ρ (sin θ1 sin θ2 · · · sin θi−1 sin θi)ei +ρ (sin θ1 sin θ2 · · · sin θi−1 cos θi cos θi+1)ei+1 . +ρ (sin θ1 sin θ2 · · · sin θi−1 cos θi sin θi+1 · · · sin θn−1 cos θn)en +ρ (sin θ1 sin θ2 · · · sin θi−1 cos θi sin θi+1 · · · sin θn−1 sin θn)en+1.

Hence, we have ∂x ∂θi

= ρ sin θ1 sin θ2 · · · sin θi−1 (sin2 θi + cos2 θi cos2 θi+1 + · · · + cos2 θi sin2 θi+1 · · · sin2 θn−1 cos2 θn + cos2 θi sin2 θi+1 · · · sin2 θn−1 sin2 θn)1/2 = ρ sin θ1 sin θ2 · · · sin θi−1 (sin2 θi + cos2 θi cos2 θi+1 + · · · + cos2 θi sin2 θi+1 · · · sin2 θn−1)1/2 = ρ sin θ1 sin θ2 · · · sin θi−1.

Thus, equation (2), that is, (2.4.3) holds.

Next, observe that ∂x ∂ρ

·

∂x ∂θ1

= —ρ cos θ1 sin θ1 +ρ sin θ1 cos θ1 cos2 θ2 . +ρ sin θ1 cos θ1 sin2 θ2 · · · sin2 θn−1 cos2 θn +ρ sin θ1 cos θ1 sin2 θ2 · · · sin2 θn−1 sin2 θn = —ρ cos θ1 sin θ1 +ρ sin θ1 cos θ1 cos2 θ2 . +ρ sin θ1 cos θ1 sin2 θ2 · · · sin2 θn−1 = —ρ cos θ1 sin θ1 + ρ cos θ1 sin θ1 = 0.

32

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Now suppose i > 1. Then we have ∂x

·

∂x

∂ρ ∂θi

2

2

= —ρ sin θ1 · · · sin θi−1 cos θi sin θi +ρ sin2 θ1 · · · sin2 θi−1 cos θi sin θi cos2 θi+1 . +ρ sin2 θ1 · · · sin2 θi−1 cos θi sin θi sin2 θi+1 · · · sin2 θn−1 cos2 θn +ρ sin2 θ1 · · · sin2 θi−1 cos θi sin θi sin2 θi+1 · · · sin2 θn−1 sin2 θn = —ρ sin2 θ1 · · · sin2 θi−1 cos θi sin θi +ρ sin2 θ1 · · · sin2 θi−1 cos θi sin θi cos2i+1 . +ρ sin2 θ1 · · · sin2 θi−1 cos θi sin θi sin2i+1 · · · sin2 θn+1 = —ρ sin2 θ1 · · · sin2 θi−1 cos θi sin θi +ρ sin2 θ1 · · · sin2 θi−1 cos θi sin θi =

0.

Next, suppose i < j. Let si abbreviate sin θi and ci abbreviate cos θi. Then we have ∂x ∂x 2 2 2 2 2 · = —ρ s1 · · · si−1cisisi+1 · · · sj−1cjsj ∂θi ∂θj +ρ2s2 · · · s2 cisis2 · · · s2 sjcjc2 1

i−1

i+1

j−1

j+1

.

2 +ρ2s21 · · · si−1 cisis2i+1 · · · s 2j−1 sjcjs2j+1 · · · s 2n−1 cn2 2 +ρ2s21 · · · si−1 cisis2i+1 · · · s 2j−1 sjcjs2j+1 · · · s 2n−1 s2n 2 = —ρ2s12 · · · si−1 cisis2i+1 · · · s 2j−1 cjsj 2 2 2 +ρ s · · · s cisis2 · · · s2 sjcjc2

1

i−1

i+1

j−1

j+1

.

2 +ρ2s21 · · · si−1 cisis2i+1 · · · s 2j−1 sjcjs2j+1 · · · s 2n−1 2 = —ρ2s12 · · · si−1 cisis2i+1 · · · s 2j−1 cjsj 2 2 2 +ρ s · · · s cisis2 · · · s 2 sjcj

1

=

i−1

i+1

j−1

0.

Thus, the orthogonal conditions (2.4.4) hold.

Exercise 2.4.3 Show that the element of spherical arc length dx in spherical coordinates is given by dx2 = dθ12 + sin2 θ1dθ22 + · · · + sin2 θ1 · · · sin2 θn−1dθ2n.

33

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Observe that n+1 Σ

dx2 =

dx2i

i=1 n +1 Σ

n ∂x Σ i

i=1

j=1

=

∂θj

n+1 n n Σ ΣΣ

= i=1 j=1 k=1 +1 n n n ΣΣ Σ

= j=1 k=1 i=1 n n Σ Σ

=

2

dθj

∂x i ∂θj

∂x i dθjdθk ∂θk

∂xi ∂θj

∂x i dθjdθk ∂θk

∂x ∂θ

·

j

j=1 k=1

∂x ∂θ

dθjdθk

k

Σ n ∂x 2

= j=1 n

=

Σ j=1

dθj2

∂θj

j

sin2 θ1 · · · sin2 θj−1 dθ2.

Exercise 2.4.4 Let B(x, r) be the spherical disk centered at a point x of S2 of spherical radius r. Show that the circumference of B(x, r) is 2π sin r and the area of B(x, r) is 2π(1—cos r). Conclude that B(x, r) has less area than a Euclidean disk of radius r.

Solution: We may assume that x = e1. Then B(x, r) = {x ∈ S2 : θ1 < r}.

The circumference of B(x, r) satisfies θ1 = r. Therefore, by Exercise 2.4.3, the circumference of B = B(x, r) is given by ∫ |dx| = ∂B

∫ 2π sin r dθ2 = 2π sin r.

0

By Formula 2.4.5, the area of B is given by ∫ g−1(B)

∫ 2π ∫ r sin θ1 dθ1 dθ2

=

0

∫ 2π

0

sin θ1 dθ1 dθ2

— cos θ1

= 0

∫ 2π

r 0

dθ1

(1 — cos r) dθ2 = 2π(1 — cos r).

= 0

34

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 2.4.5 Show that (1)

Vol(S 2n−1) =

(2)

Vol(S 2n) =

2πn (n — 1)!

,

2n+1πn .

(2n — 1)(2n — 3) · · · 3 · 1

Solution: Let n be an integer greater than one. Integration by parts yields ∫ π ∫ π π sinn θ dθ = — cos θ sinn−1 θ 0 + (n — 1) cos2 θ sinn−2 θ dθ 0 0 ∫ π = (n — 1) (1 — sin2 θ) sinn−2 θ dθ ∫0 π ∫π n−2 n = (n — 1) sin θ dθ — (n — 1) sin θ dθ.

0

0

Hence, we have ∫ π n

∫ π sinn−2 θ dθ,

sinn θ dθ = (n — 1) 0

0

and so

∫ π

sinn θ dθ =

n—1

∫ π sinn−2 θ dθ.

n

0

0

Hence, we have (

∫π

∫π ∫ 0π sin θ dθ dθ 0

sin θ dθ =

n−1 n n−1 n

n−3 ··· n−2 n−3 ··· n−2

=

n−1 n n −1 n

n−3 · · · 23 2 n−2 n−3 1 n−2 · · · 2 π

n

0

2 3 1 2

if n is odd, if n is even.

if n is odd, if n is even.

We prove the formulas for the volume of Sn by induction on n. If n = 1, then Vol(S1) = 2π, and so Formula (1) holds for n = 1. Suppose Formula (1) holds for n ≥ 1. By Formula 2.4.5, we have ∫ π sin2n−1 θ1 dθ1 Vol(S2n−1) Vol(S2n) = 0

= = =

(2n — 2)(2n — 4) · · · 2 2πn 2 (2n — 1)(2n — 3) · · · 3 (n — 1)!

2n−122πn (2n — 1)(2n — 3) · · · 1 2n+1πn .

(2n — 1)(2n — 3) · · · 1

35

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Therefore, Formula (2) holds. Now suppose that Formula (2) holds for n

By Formula 2.4.5, we have ∫ π sin2n−1 θ1 dθ1 Vol(S2n) Vol(S2n+1) =

≥ 1.

0

= =

2n+1πn (2n — 1)(2n — 3) · · · 1 π (2n — 1)(2n — 3) · · · 1 (2n)(2n — 2) · · · 2 n+1 n+1 n+1 2π 2 π . = 2nn! n!

Thus, Formula (1) holds with n replaced by n+1. This completes the induction.

2.5

Spherical Trigonometry

Exercise 2.5.1 Let α, β, γ be the angles of a spherical triangle and let a, b, c be the lengths of the opposite sides. Show that (1)

(2)

cos a = cos b cos c + sin b sin c cos α, cos b = cos a cos c + sin a sin c cos β, cos c = cos a cos b + sin a sin b cos γ, cos α = — cos β cos γ + sin β sin γ cos a, cos β = — cos α cos γ + sin α sin γ cos b, cos γ = — cos α cos β + sin α sin β cos c.

Solution: Formulas (1) follow from the first law of cosines, Theorem 2.5.3, and Formulas (2) follow from the second law of cosines, Theorem 2.5.4.

Exercise 2.5.2 Let α, β, π/2 be the angles of a spherical right triangle and let a, b, c be the lengths of the opposite sides. Show that (1)

cos c = cos a cos b,

(2)

cos c = cot α cot β,

(3)

sin a = sin c sin α,

(4)

sin a = tan b cot β,

sin b = sin c sin β, (5)

cos α = cos a sin β,

sin b = tan a cot α, (6)

cos α = tan b cot c,

cos β = cos b sin α,

cos β = tan a cot c.

Solution: By the third Formula (1) of Exercise 2.5.1, we have (1)

cos c = cos a cos b + sin a sin b cos π/2 = cos a cos b.

By the third Formula (2) of Exercise 2.5.1, we have cos π/2 = — cos α cos β + sin α sin β cos c.

36

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Hence, we have (2)

cos c = (cos α cos β)/(sin α sin β) = cot α cot β.

By the law of sines, Theorem 2.5.2, we have sin b sin a = = sin β sin α

sin c sin π/2

.

Hence, we have (3) sin a = sin c sin α and sin b = sin c sin β.

By the first Formula (1) of Exercise 2.5.1, we have cos a = cos b cos c + sin b sin c cos α.

Applying Formula (1) yields cos c/ cos b = cos b cos c + sin b sin c cos α.

Hence, we have (6)

cos α

= = = =

(cos c/ cos b) — cos b cos c sin b sin c cos c — cos2 b cos c cos b sin b sin c sin2 b cos c cos b sin b sin c sin b cos c = tan b cot c. cos b sin c

Likewise, we have (6) cos β = tan a cot c.

From (3) and (6), we have sin β = sin b/ sin c and cos β = tan a cot c. Hence cot β =

sin a cos c sin c cos a sin c sin b

=

sin a cos a cos b = sin a cot b. cos a sin b

Thus, we have (4) sin a = tan b cot β and likewise sin b = tan a cot α.

From (4) and the law of sines, we have sin a = tan b cot β =

sin b cos β sin a cos β sin b cos β = = . sin β cos b sin α cos b cos b sin β

Hence, we have (5) cos β = sin α cos b and likewise cos α = sin β cos a.

Exercise 2.5.3 Prove that two spherical triangles are congruent if and only if they have the same angles.

Solution: An orthogonal transformation preserves angles, and so congruent spherical triangles have the same angles. Conversely, suppose two triangles have the same angles. By Formulas (1) of Exercise 2.5.1, the corresponding sides of both triangles have the same lengths, and so the triangles can be made to correspond under an isometry of S2 by Exercise 2.1.7.

37

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 2.5.4 A subset C of Sn is said to be spherical convex if [x, y]c C for each pair of distinct nonantipodal points x, y of C. Prove that every closed hemisphere of Sn is spherical convex.

Solution: Let v be a point of Sn. The closed hemisphere centered at v is H(v) = {x ∈ Sn : x · v ≥ 0}. Let x, y be distinct nonantipodal points of H(v).

Then [x, y] = {(tx + (1 — t)y)/|tx + (1 — t)y| : 0 ≤ t ≤ 1}.

Observe that (tx + (1 — t)y) · v = tx · v + (1 — t)y · v ≥ 0.

Hence [x, y] c H(v). Therefore H(v) is spherical convex.

Exercise 2.5.5 Prove that every spherical triangle is spherical convex.

Solution: Let T (x, y, z) be a spherical triangle. Then T (x, y, z) is the intersection of the closed hemispheres H(x, y, z), H(y, z, x) and H(z, x, y) of S2.

Clearly, the intersection of spherical convex subsets of S2 is spherical convex.

Hence T (x, y, z) is spherical convex by Exercise 2.5.4.

Exercise 2.5.6 Let T (x, y, z) be a spherical triangle. Prove that T (x, y, z) is disjoint from its antipodal image —T (x, y, z).

Solution: Label T (x, y, z) as in Figure 2.5.1 and consider Figure 2.5.3. The vertices of the lune L(α) are ±x with x on top. As a, b, c < π, the triangle T (x, y, z) lies in L(α) at a positive distance above the bottom vertex —x. See Figure 2.5.4. As the antipodal map is an isometry of S2, the triangle —T (x, y, z) lies in —L(α) at a positive distance from the top vertex x. Now L(α) ∩—L(α) = {±x}, and so T (x, y, z) is disjoint from —T (x, y, z).

Exercise 2.5.7 Let T (x, y, z) be a spherical triangle. Prove that T (x, y, z) is contained in an open hemisphere of S2.

Solution: Consider Figure 2.5.4. Let v be the center of the Lune L(α). Then T (x, y, z) meets ∂H(v) only at the vertex x. Hence, we can move v slightly on S2 in the direction towards x to v′ so that T (x, y, z) lies in the interior of H(v′).

Exercise 2.5.8 Let a, b, c be the sides of a spherical triangle. Prove that a + b + c < 2π.

Solution: The angles of the polar triangle of the triangle are π — a, π — b, π — c.

By Theorem 2.5.5, we have π — a + π — b + π — c > π.

Hence 2π > a + b + c.

38

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 2.5.9 Let α and β be two angles of a spherical triangle such that α ≤β π/2 ≤ and let a be the length of the side opposite α. Prove that a≤ π/2 with equality if and only if α = β = π/2.

Solution: By the first formula of Exercise 2.5.1(2), we have cos a =

cos α + cos β cos γ sin β sin γ

.

Now cos α ≥ cos β ≥ 0 and | cos β cos |γ ≤ cos β with | cos γ| < 1. Hence, we have cos α + cos β cos γ≥ 0 with equality if and only if α = β = π/2. Therefore cos a≥ 0 with equality if and only if α = β = π/2. Thus a ≤ π/2 with equality if and only if α = β = π/2.

Exercise 2.5.10 Let α and β be two angles of a spherical triangle and let a and b be the lengths of the opposite sides. Prove that ≤ α β if and only if a≤ b and that α = β if and only if a = b.

Solution: Assume first that α ≤ β ≤π/2. Then sin α ≤sin β. Hence, we have sin a≤ sin b by the law of sines. Now a≤ π/2 by Exercise 2.5.9. Therefore a ≤ b. If α = β, then b ≤π/2 by Exercise 2.5.9, and so a = b by the law of sines, Theorem 2.5.2.

Assume next that α < π/2 < β. Let T (x, y, z) as in Figure 2.5.1. Let w be the point on [x, z] so T (x, y, w) is a right triangle with right angle at y. Let the sides of T (x, y, w) opposite x and y have length d and e, respectively. Note that T (x, y, z) is subdivided into the triangles T (x, y, w) and T (w, y, z) joined along sides of length d. Let the side of T (w, y, z) opposite y have length f . By the first case applied to the triangle T (x, y, w), we have d < e. By the triangle inequality applied to T (w, y, z), we have a ≤ d + f < e + f = b.

Assume now that π/2≤ α ≤β. Consider the triangle T ′ = T (x, y,— z). The angles of T ′ at x, y, π α, π π β≤ π— α ≤ π/2.

— z are — — β, γ, respectively, with — Let a′ and b′ be lengths of the sides of T ′ opposite x and y, respectively. Then b′ ≤ a′ by the first case applied to T ′. As a′ = π —a and b′ = π —b, we have a ≤ b. If α = β, then π — β = π — α ≤ π/2, and so b′ = a′ and a = b.

Conversely, suppose a ≤ b. Then π —b ≤ π —a. Hence β′ ≤ α′ for the polar triangle. Therefore b′ ≤ a′ for the polar triangle by the converse. Hence π —β ≤ π — α. Thus α ≤ β. Moreover, if a = b, then α = β by the same argument with inequality replaced by equality.

Exercise 2.5.11 Let T (x, y, z) be a spherical triangle labeled as in Figure 2.5.1 such that α, β < π/2. Prove that the point on the great circle through x and y nearest to z lies in the interior of the side [x, y].

Solution: Let x′ be a point in the geodesic interval [x, y). Then [x′, z] c T (x, y, z) by Exercises 2.5.5 and 2.5.6. The points x′, y, z are noncollinear, since x, y, z are noncollinear. Let α′ and γ′ be the angles of T (x′, y, z) at x′ and z,

39

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

respectively, and let b′ and c′ be the lengths of the sides of [x′, z] and [x′, y] of T (x′, y, z) opposite β and γ′, respectively. By Exercise 2.5.1(1), we have that ′

cos α =

cos a — cos b′ cos c′ sin b′ sin c′

=√

y · z — (x′ · z)(x′ · y) √ .

1 — (x′ · z) 2 1 — (x′ · y)2

Hence α′ is a continuous function of x′ over [x, y) such that α′ = α < π/2 when x′ = x. By Exercise 2.5.1(2), we have that cos α′ = — cos β cos γ′ + sin β sin γ′ cos a. and so α′ limits to π—β > π/2 as c′ (and therefore γ′) goes to zero. By the intermediate value theorem, there is a value of x′ such that α′ = π/2. We now fix x′ at this value. Then x′ is in the interior of [x, y]. We have that b′ < π/2

by Exercise 2.5.9. Hence dS(x′, z) < π/2 < dS(—x′, z). If w is an point on the great circle S(x, y) with w/= ±x′, then dS(w, z) > dS(x′, z) by the Exercise 2.5.2(1). Therefore x′ is the nearest point of S(x, y) to z.

Exercise 2.5.12 Let α, β, γ be real numbers such that 0 < α ≤ β ≤ γ < π.

Prove that there is a spherical triangle with angles α, β, γ if and only if β — α < π — γ < α + β.

Solution: Suppose α, β, γ are the angles of a spherical triangle. We have π < α + β + γ by Theorem 2.5.5. Hence π — γ < α + β. The complementary triangle in the lune of S2 formed by the sides b and c of T has angles α, π — β, π — γ.

Hence π < α + π — β + π — γ, and so β — α < π — γ.

Conversely, suppose α, β, γ are real numbers such that 0 < α ≤ β ≤ γ < π and β — α < π — γ < α + β. Then cos(β — α) > cos(π — γ). Hence, we have cos α cos β + sin α sin β > — cos γ.

Therefore cos α cos β + cos γ > — sin α sin β, and so

cos α cos β + cos γ sin α sin β

> —1.

Suppose α + β ≤ π. Then cos(α + β) < cos(π — γ). Hence, we have cos α cos β — sin α sin β < — cos γ.

Therefore cos α cos β + cos γ < sin α sin β, and so

cos α cos β + cos γ

< 1. sin α sin β Now suppose α + β > π. As α + β < π + γ, we have cos(α + β) < cos(π + γ).

Hence, we have cos α cos β — sin α sin β < — cos γ.

40

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Therefore cos α cos β + cos γ < sin α sin β, and so

cos α cos β + cos γ sin α sin β

< 1.

Thus, in either case, there is a real number c such that 0 < c < π and cos c =

cos α cos β + cos γ sin α sin β

.

Let x and y be points of S2 such that dS(x, y) = c. Let Sx and Sy be the great circles passing through the points x and y, respectively, that make an angle α, β, respectively, with [x, y] on the same side of S(x, y). Now Sx /= Sy, since x /= ±y. Hence Sx and Sy intersect at two points ±z. Now, the points ±z are not on S(x, y), since Sx∩ S(x, y) = ± x and Sy ∩ S(x, y) = ±y. Choose the signs of ±z so that z is on the same side of S(x, y) as α and β. Then x, y, z are spherically noncollinear, and so form a spherical triangle T (x, y, z) with angles α, β at x, y, respectively. The angle γ′ of T (x, y, z) at z satisfies cos γ′ = — cos α cos β + sin α sin β cos c = cos γ, and so γ′ = γ. Thus T (x, y, z) has angles α, β, γ.

41

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 3

Hyperbolic Geometry 3.1

Lorentzian n-Space

Exercise 3.1.1 Let A be a real n × n matrix. Prove that the following are equivalent: 1. A is Lorentzian.

2.

Ax = x for all x in Rn.

2 2 2 3. A preserves the quadratic form q(x) = —x 1 + x2 + · · · + x n.

Solution: Suppose that A is Lorentzian. Then Ax ◦ Ax = x ◦ x for all x in Rn. Hence Ax 2 = x 2 for all x, and so Ax = x for all x in Rn. Thus (1) implies (2).

Conversely, suppose (2) holds. Then we have 2x ◦ y

2

=

x

=

Ax

+ y 2

2

— x—y

+ Ay

2

= Ax + Ay = 2Ax ◦ Ay.

2

2

— A(x — y)

2

2

— Ax — Ay)

2

Hence A is Lorentzian. Thus (2) implies (1).

2 2 Now Ax = x for all x in Rn if and only if Ax = x for all x in Rn which is the case if and only if qA = q. Thus (2) and (3) are equivalent.

Exercise 3.1.2 Let A be a Lorentzian n × n matrix. Show that A−1 = JA t J. Solution: By Theorem 3.1.4, we have AtJA = J. Hence JA t JA = I. Therefore A−1 = JA t J. Exercise 3.1.3 Let A = (aij) be a matrix in O(1, n — 1). Show that A is positive (negative) if and only if a11 > 0 (a11 < 0).

42

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: The matrix A is positive if and only if A maps positive time-like vectors to positive time-like vectors. By continuity, this is the case if and only if Ae1 is positive time-like, which is the case if and only if a11 > 0. Likewise A is negative if and only if a11 < 0.

Exercise 3.1.4 Let A = (aij) be a matrix in O+(1, n —1). Prove that a11 ≥ 1 with equality if and only if A is orthogonal.

Solution: Now Ae1 ◦ Ae1 = e1 ◦ e1 = —1. Hence, we have 2

2

2

—a11 + a21 + · · · + an1 = —1.

Therefore, we have a211 = 1 + a221 + · · · + a2n1 .

Hence a11 ≥ 1 with equality if and only if a21 = a31 = · · · = an1 = 0.

Now A is orthogonal if and only if A−1 = At. Hence A is orthogonal if and only if At = JAtJ or equivalently A = JAJ. Observe that

JAJ = .

a11 —a21

—a12 a22

··· ···

—a1n a2n

.

—an1

. an2

···

. ann

..

Hence A = JAJ if and only if a21 = a31 = · · · = an1 = 0 and

a12 = a13 = · · · = a1n = 0.

Therefore, if A is orthogonal, then a11 = 1.

Conversely, suppose a11 = 1. Then a21 = a31 =· · · = an1 = 0. By Theorem 3.1.4, we have (a11, a12, . . . , a1n) ◦ (a11, a12, . . . , a1n) = —1, and so —a211 +a 212 +· · · +a21n = —1. Hence a12 = a13 = · · · = a1n = 0. Therefore A is orthogonal.

Exercise 3.1.5 Show that O(n the mapping

— 1) is isomorphic to O+(1, n — 1) ∩ O(n) via

, 1 0 ··· 0 . .

0 A '→ . . .

A 0

43

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let A be a matrix in O(n — 1). Define , 1 0 ··· 0 . .

Aˆ = . 0 . . .

A 0 Then ^tJ A A , , 1 0 ··· 0 —1 0 · · · 0 .. 0 .. 0 = . . . .

At .

A 0 0

 t J A =

.

= J.

Therefore Aˆ is Lorentzian; moreover A is obviously orthogonal. The mapping A '→ Aˆ is obviously a monomorphism from O(n — 1) to O+(1, n — 1) ∩ O(n). By Exercise 3.1.4, every matrix in O+(1, n — 1) ∩ O(n) is of the form Aˆ for some A in O(n — 1). Hence, the mapping A '→ Aˆ is an isomorphism from O(n — 1) to O+(1, n — 1) ∩ O(n).

Exercise 3.1.6 Show that O+(1, n—1) is naturally isomorphic to the projective Lorentz group PO(1, n — 1) = O(1, n — 1)/{±I}.

Solution: Define φ : O+(1, n — 1) → O(1, n — 1)/{±I} by φ(A) = ±A. Then φ is obviously a homomorphism. Now φ(A) = ±I if and only if A = I, since —I is negative. Thus φ is a monomorphism. If A is negative, then —A is positive, and so φ(—A) = ±A. Hence φ is an epimorphism. Thus φ is an isomorphism.

Exercise 3.1.7 Show that every matrix in SO+(1, 1) is of the form cosh s sinh s Solution: Let A =

sinh s cosh s

.

a b

be in SO+(1, 1). The columns vectors of A form c d a Lorentz orthonormal basis of R2 by Theorem 3.1.3. Hence —a2 + c2 = —1 or equivalently a2 — c2 = 1. Consequently, there is a real number s such that (a, c) = (cosh s, sinh s). Likewise —b2 + d2 = 1 implies (b, d) = ±(sinh t, cosh t) for some real number t. Now (a, c) ◦ (b, d) = 0 implies — cosh s sinh t + sinh s cosh t = 0.

Hence tanh s = tanh t, and so s = t. Finally ad— bc = 1 implies that (b, d) = (sinh t, cosh t).

44

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 3.1.8 The Lorentzian complement of a vector subspace V of Rn is defined to be the set V L = {x ∈ Rn : x ◦ y = 0 for all y in V }.

Show that V L = J(V ⊥) and (V L)L = V .

Solution: Now x ◦ y = 0 if and only if Jx · y = 0. Hence, we have V L = J−1(V ⊥) = J(V ⊥).

Therefore, we have (V L)L

= J((V L)⊥) = J((J(V ⊥))⊥) = J(((JV )⊥)⊥) = JJV = V.

Exercise 3.1.9 Let V be a vector subspace of Rn. Prove that the following are equivalent: 1. The subspace V is time-like.

2. The subspace V L is space-like.

3. The subspace V ⊥ is space-like.

Solution: Suppose V is time-like. Then V has a time-like vector x. Let y be a nonzero vector in V L. Then x ◦y = 0, and so y is space-like by Theorem 3.1.5.

Hence V L is space-like. Thus (1) implies (2).

Suppose V is space-like. Now V L = J(V ⊥) by Exercise 3.1.8. Hence 2 dim V L = n— dim V . Let x be in V∩ V ⊥. Then x ◦x = 0, and so x = 0.

Hence x = 0, since V is space-like. Therefore V and V L span Rn. Hence, there 2 ◦ is an x in V and a y in V L such that e1 = x + y. Then e1 e1 = x + y .

— ≥ 2 2 2 2 Hence 1 = x + y . As x 0, we must have y < 0. Therefore y is time-like, and so V ⊥ is time-like.

Now suppose V L is space-like. Then (V L)L = V by Exercise 3.1.8. Hence V is time-like. Thus (2) implies (1).

As V L = J(V ⊥), we have JV L = V ⊥. Now x is space-like if and only if Jx is space-like. Therefore V L is space-like if and only if V ⊥ = JV L is space-like.

Exercise 3.1.10 Let V be a 2-dimensional time-like subspace of Rn. Show that V ∩ Cn−1 is the union of two lines that intersect at the origin.

Solution: By Theorem 3.1.6, we may assume that V = ⟨e1, e2⟩. Then we have V ∩ Cn−1

= {x1e1 + x2e2 : —x12 + x22 = 0} =

{x1e1 ± x1e2 : x1 ∈ R},

which is the union of two lines that intersect at the origin.

45

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 3.1.11 Let V be a vector subspace of Rn. Prove that V is light-like if and only if V ∩ Cn−1 is a line passing through the origin.

2

Solution: Suppose V is light-like. Then x ≥ 0 for all x in V and x = 0 for some nonzero x in V . Suppose x, y are in V , with x, y /= 0 and x = 0 = y .

We claim that x and y are linearly dependent. By multiplying by —1 if necessary, we may assume that x1, y1 > 0. Now x + y is in V and x + y is nonspace-like by Theorem 3.1.2. Moreover x + y is not time-like, since V is light-like. Therefore x and y are linearly dependent by Theorem 3.1.2. Hence V∩ Cn−1 is a 1dimensional vector subspace of Rn. Conversely, suppose V ∩ Cn−1 is a line passing through the origin. Then V contains a nonzero light-like vector x. Therefore V is not space-like. Suppose V contains a time-like vector y. Then ⟨x, y ⟩is a 2-dimensional time-like vector subspace, and so ⟨ x, y⟩ ∩ Cn−1 is the union of two lines that intersect at the origin by Exercise 3.1.10, which is a contradiction. Therefore V is not time-like.

Hence V must be light-like.

Exercise 3.1.12 Let V be a vector subspace of Rn, and let A be a matrix in O+(1, n — 1). Show that A(V L) = (AV )L. Solution: We have that V L = {x ∈ Rn : x ◦ y = 0 for all y ∈ V }. Hence AV L

= {Ax ∈ Rn : x ◦ y = 0 for all y ∈ V } = {Ax ∈ Rn : Ax ◦ Ay = 0 for all y ∈ V } = {x′ ∈ Rn : x′ ◦ y′ = 0 for all y′ ∈ AV } = (AV )L.

Exercise 3.1.13 Show that O+(1, n — 1) acts transitively on 1. the set of m-dimensional space-like subspaces of Rn, and 2. the set of m-dimensional light-like subspaces of Rn. Solution: 1. Let V and W be m-dimensional space-like subspaces of Rn. Then V L and W L are (n— m)-dimensional time-like subspaces of Rn. Hence, there is an A in O+(1, n — 1) such that AV L = W L by Theorem 3.1.6. Therefore L L (AV ) = W by Exercise 3.1.12. Hence AV = W by Exercise 3.1.8.

2. Let V be an m-dimensional light-like subspace of Rn. Now V contains a nonzero light-like vector x. Suppose y is a space-like vector in V . Consider the equation x + ty

2

= 0 with t in R, or equivalently 2tx ◦ y + t2 y

2

= 0.

By Theorem 3.1.2, this equation has a unique solution t = 0, and so t = —2(x ◦ y)/ y 46

2

= 0.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Therefore x ◦ y = 0. Hence V = ⟨x⟩L. As —x12 + |x|2 = 0 and x12 + |x|2 > 0, we have that |x| > 0. By Theorem 1.3.4, there is a matrix A in O(n — 1) such that Ax = |x|e2. Let , 1 0 ··· 0 0 Aˆ = . .. ..

A 0 Then Aˆ is in O(n) and so A is in O+(1, n — 1). Now Aˆx = x1e1 + |x|e2. We may suppose that x1 > 0. Then we have AˆV = Aˆ⟨x⟩L = (Aˆ⟨x⟩)L = ⟨x1e1 + |x|e2⟩L = ⟨e1 + e2⟩L. Hence O+(1, n —1) acts transitively on (n — 1)-dimensional light-like subspaces of Rn. Now suppose that m < n—1. Let W = e ⟨ 1, V ⟩. Then W is an (m + 1)dimensional time-like vector subspace of Rn. By Theorem 3.1.6, there is a matrix A in O+(1, n — 1) such that AW = ⟨e1, e2, . . . , em+1⟩.

Now AV is an m-dimensional light-like subspace of ⟨e1, . . . , em+1⟩ . Hence, by the previous case for n = m + 1, we obtain the desired result.

Exercise 3.1.14 Let v be a space-like vector in Rn. The Lorentzian reflection of Rn in the hyperplane ⟨v⟩L of Rn is the map ρy : Rn → Rn defined by x◦v ρ (x) = x — 2 v. y v◦v Prove that ρy is a positive Lorentz transformation that fixes each point of ⟨v⟩L and maps v to —v.

Solution: The map ρy is a Lorentz transformation, since x◦v y◦v v y—2 v v◦v v◦v x◦v y◦v (x ◦ v)(y ◦ v) = x◦y—2 (v ◦ y) — 2 (x ◦ v) + 4 v◦v v◦v v◦v = x ◦ y.

ρy(x) ◦ ρy (y) =

x—2

If x ∈ ⟨v⟩L, then x ◦ v = 0, and so ρy(x) = x. Hence ρy fixes each point of ⟨v⟩L. The hyperplane ⟨v⟩L is time-like, since ⟨v⟩ is space-like by Exercises 3.1.8 and 3.1.9. The Lorentz transformation ρy is positive, since ρy fixes each positive time-like vector of ⟨v⟩L. Finally ρy(v) = v — 2v = —v.

47

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

3.2

Hyperbolic n-Space

Exercise 3.2.1 Show that the metric topology of Hn determined by the hyperbolic metric is the same as the metric topology of Hn determined by the Euclidean metric.

Solution: Let x be in Hn. Then cosh dH (e1, x) = —e1 ◦ x = x1.

Whereas |x — e1| 2

2

= (x1 — 1) + |x| 2 = (x1 — 1)2 + x2 — x2 + |x|2 1

1

= 2x21 — 2x1.

Let s = dH (e1, x). Then s = cosh−1 x1. Let r = |x — e1|. Then we have 2x21 — 2x1 — r2 = 0.

Hence, we have x1 =

1+

Therefore, we have −1

s = cosh √

and we have r=

√

1 + 2r2

.

2 ! √ 1 + 1 + 2r2 2

.

2 cosh2 s — 2 cosh s.

Hence, in Hn, we have that {BE(e1, r) : r > 0} = {BH (e1, s) : s > 0}.

If A is in O+(1, n — 1), then A is continuous with respect to both the Euclidean and hyperbolic metrics. Moreover O +(1, n— 1) acts transitively on Hn. Therefore, the metric topology on Hn determined by the hyperbolic metric is the same as the metric topology on Hn determined by the Euclidean metric.

Exercise 3.2.2 Prove that Hn is homeomorphic to En. Solution: Define p : Hn → Rn by p(x) = x = (x2, . . . , xn+1).

Define q : Rn → Hn by √ q(y) = ( 1 + |y|2, y1, . . . , yn).

48

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Then we have q(y)

2

= —(1 + |y|2) + |y|2 = —1,

and so q is well defined. Now pq is the identity map of Rn and √ qp(x) = ( 1 + |x|2, x2, . . . , xn+1) = (x1, x2, . . . , xn+1) = x, and so qp is the identity map of Hn. Thus p is a homeomorphism with p−1 = q.

Exercise 3.2.3 Show that every hyperbolic line of Hn is the branch of a hyperbola whose asymptotes are 1-dimensional light-like vector subspaces of Rn+1.

Solution: The group O+(1, n) acts transitively on the set of 2-dimensional time-like subspaces of Rn+1 by Theorem 3.1.6. Hence, we may suppose that n = 1. Then the line is H1 which is a branch of the hyperbola defined by the equation x12 — x22 = 1. The asymptotes of the hyperbola are the lines x1 = ±x2 which are 1-dimensional light-like subspaces of R2.

Exercise 3.2.4 Prove that Hn is hyperbolic convex.

Solution: Let x and y be distinct points of Hn. Then x and y determine a unique hyperbolic line L(x, y) of Hn. By Corollary 4, we may assume n = 1.

Now H1 is parametrized by the geodesic line λ(t) = (cosh t, sinh t). Hence, there exists distinct real numbers a and b such that λ(a) = x and λ(b) = y. By transposing x and y, if necessary, we may that a < b. Then α : [a, b] → H1, defined by α(t) = λ(t), is a geodesic arc from x to y by Theorem 3.2.4. Moreover α is the unique geodesic arc from x to y, since α is the unique solution of the differential equation α′′ —α = 0 such that α(a) = x and α′(a) = (sinh a, cosh a).

Exercise 3.2.5 Prove that Hn is geodesically complete.

Solution: Let α : [a, b] → Hn be a geodesic are. By Theorem 3.2.4, there are Lorentz orthogonal vectors x and y in Hn such that α(t) = cosh(t — a) x + sinh(t — a) y.

Extend α to a map λ : R → Hn by the formula λ(t) = cosh(t — a) x + sinh(t — a) y.

Define µ : R → Hn by µ(t) = λ(t + a). Then µ is a geodesic line by Theorem 3.2.5. The translation t '→ t —a is an isometry of E1. Hence, the relation λ(t) = µ(t a) —implies that λ is a geodesic line. Moreover λ is the unique geodesic line extending α, since λ is the unique solution of the differential equation λ′′ — λ = 0 satisfying the initial conditions λ(a) = x and λ′(a) = y. Hence Hn is geodesically complete.

49

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 3.2.6 Two hyperbolic lines of Hn are said to be parallel if and only if there is a hyperbolic 2-plane containing both lines and the lines are disjoint.

Show that for each point x of Hn outside a hyperbolic line L, there are infinitely many hyperbolic lines passing through x parallel to L. Solution: Let L = V H ∩n with V a 2-dimensional time-like subspace of Rn+1.

Let W = x, ⟨ V .⟩ Then W is a 3-dimensional time-like subspace of Rn+1. Since + O (1, n) acts transitively on the 3-dimensional time-like subspaces of Rn+1, we may assume that n = 2. Likewise, we may assume that V =⟨ e1, e2⟩ . Let θ be an angle with π/4 < θ < 3π/4. and let Y8 be the 1-dimensional subspace of R3 defined by Y8 = ⟨(cos θ)e1 + (sin θ)e2⟩.

Then Y8 is space-like. Let U8 = x, ⟨ Y8 .⟩ Then U8 is a 2-dimensional time-like subspace of R3. Hence K8 = H2 ∩U8 is a hyperbolic line passing through x.

Observe that K8 ∩ L = H2 ∩ U8 ∩ V = H2 ∩ Y8 = ∅.

Hence K8 is parallel to L. Thus, there are infinitely many lines in H2 passing through x parallel to L. Exercise 3.2.7 Prove that a nonempty subset X of Hn is totally geodesic if and only if X is a hyperbolic m-plane of Hn for some m.

Solution: Suppose P is an m-plane of Hn. Then there is an (m + 1)dimensional time-like subspace V of Rn+1 such that P = V∩ Hn. Let x and y be distinct points of P . Then ⟨x, y ⟩is a 2-dimensional time-like subspace of V .

Hence L = ⟨ x, y⟩ ∩ Hn is a hyperbolic line in P containing both x and y. Thus P is totally geodesic.

Conversely, suppose that X is totally geodesic. As X is nonempty, X contains a 0-plane. Hence X contains an m-plane P with m as large as possible. We claim that X = P . On the contrary, suppose x is a point of X— P . Let V be the (m + 1)-dimensional time-like vector subspace of Rn+1 such that P = V∩ Hn. Let W = x, ⟨ V .⟩Then W is an (m + 2)-dimensional time-like subspace of Rn+1.

Let w be a point of W ∩Hn. Then there exists a vector v of V and coefficients a and b such that w = av + bx.

Assume first that v is time-like. By replacing a by —a and v by —v, if necessary, we may assume that v is positive time-like. By replacing a by a|||v||| 2 and v by v/|||v ||| , we may assume that v = —1. Now X is totally geodesic and so X contains the hyperbolic line L passing through v and x. Let U be the ∩n. Then w is in U ∩ Hn, 2-dimensional subspace of Rn+1 such that L = UH and so w is in X. 2 Now assume that v ≥ 0. Then |v1 | ≤ | v|. Let y be a point of V ∩ Hn. Let c be a positive integer such that c>

|av| — av1 . y1 — |y| 50

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Then we have cy1 — c|y| > |av| — av1.

Hence, we have av1 + cy1 > |av| + |cy| ≥ |av + cy|.

Hence av + cy is a positive time-like vector in V . By Theorem 3.1.2, w + cy = (av + cy) + bx is positive time-like. Hence (w + cy)/||| w + cy||| is in X by the time-like case.

Now y is in V ∩Hn = P . Hence X contains the hyperbolic line passing through (w + cy)/|||w + cy||| and y. Therefore X contains⟨ w + cy,⟩ y∩ Hn. Hence X contains w, since w = (w + cy) — cy. Thus W cX, and we have a contradiction to the maximality of P . Therefore P must be all of X, and so X is an m-plane of Hn. Exercise 3.2.8 Prove that H1 is isometric to E1, but Hn is not isometric to En for n > 1.

Solution: Define λ : E1 → H1 by λ(t) = (cosh t)e1 + (sinh t)e2.

Then if s < t, we have cosh dH (λ(s), λ(t))

=

—λ(s) ◦ λ(t)

= — (cosh s)e1 + (sinh s)e2 ◦ (cosh t)e1 + (sinh t)e2 = cosh s cosh t — sinh s sinh t = cosh(t — s).

Therefore dH (λ(s), λ(t)) = t —s. Thus λ preserves distances. Moreover λ is surjective, and so λ is an isometry.

Now suppose n > 1. The 2-planes of Hn are characterized isometrically as the totally geodesic subsets of Hn that are separated by a hyperbolic line.

Hence En and Hn are not isometric for each n > 1 by Exercise 3.2.6, since for each point x of En outside a line L of En, there is a unique line of En passing through x parallel to L by Exercise 1.3.3.

Exercise 3.2.9 Show that the matrix in Exercise 3.1.7 acts on H1 as a hyperbolic translation by a distance |s|.

Solution: The map λ : R →H1 defined by λ(t) = (cosh t, sinh t) is a geodesic line. We have that cosh s sinh s sinh s cosh s

cosh t sinh t

=

cosh s cosh t + sinh s sinh t sinh s cosh t + cosh s sinh t

=

cosh(s + t) sinh(s + t)

The distance from λ(t) to λ(s + t) is |s + t — t| = |s|.

51

= λ(s + t).

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 3.2.10 Let u0, . . . , un be linearly independent vectors in Hn, and let v0, . . . , vn be linearly independent vectors in Hn, and suppose that η(ui, uj) = η(vi, vj) for all i, j. Prove that there is a unique hyperbolic isometry φ of Hn such that φ(ui) = vi for each i = 0, . . . , n.

Solution: There is a unique linear transformation A : Rn+1 → Rn+1 such that Aui = vi for each i. Let x be a vector in Rn+1. Then there are real coefficients Σn c0, . . . , cn such that x = i=0 ciui. Observe that Σ n 2 ¨ ¨ Ax 2 = civi i=0

= = = =

n Σ n Σ i=0 j=0 n Σ n Σ i=0 j=0 n Σ n Σ i=0 j=0 n Σ n Σ

cicjvi ◦ vj cicj(— cosh η(vi, vj)) cicj(— cosh η(ui, uj)) cicjui ◦ uj

i=0 j=0 n Σ

=

¨

2

ciui¨

=

x

2

.

i=0

Hence A is a positive Lorentz transformation by Exercise 3.1.1. By Theorem 3.2.3, the restriction of A to Hn is the unique isometry φ of Hn such that φ(ui) = vi for each i = 0, . . . , n.

Exercise 3.2.11 A tangent vector to Hn at a point x of Hn is defined to be the derivative at 0 of a differentiable curve γ— : [ b,→ b] Hn such that γ(0) = x. n Let Tx = Tx(H ) be the set of all tangent vectors to Hn at x. Show that Tx = {y ∈ Rn+1 : x ◦ y = 0}.

Conclude that Tx is an n-dimensional space-like vector subspace of Rn+1. The vector space Tx is called the tangent space of Hn at x.

Solution: Let γ : [ — b, b] → Hn be a differentiable curve such that γ(0) = x.

Differentiating the equation γ(t) ◦ γ(t) = —1 yields the equation γ′(t) ◦ γ(t) = 0.

Hence γ′(0) ◦ x = 0. Therefore Tx c ⟨x⟩L. 52

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Conversely, suppose y is in ⟨x⟩L. Assume first that y = 0. Then γ(t) = 0 for all t implies γ′(0) = 0, and so y = 0 is in Tx. Now assume y /= 0. As x ◦ y = 0, we have that y is space-like by Theorem 3.1.1. Define γ : [—1, 1] → Hn by γ(t) = cosh y t x + sinh y t y/ y .

Then we have γ′(t) = y

sinh y t x + cosh y t y.

Hence γ′(0) = y. Therefore Tx = ⟨x⟩L = {y ∈ Rn+1 : x ◦ y = 0}.

Hence Tx is an n-dimensional space-like subspace of Rn+1 by Exercise 3.1.9.

Exercise 3.2.12 A coordinate frame of hyperbolic n-space Hn is an n-tuple of functions (λ1, . . . , λn) such that 1. the function λi : R → Hn is a geodesic line for each i = 1, . . . , n; 2. there is a point x of Hn such that λi(0) = x for all i; and 3. the set {λ′1(0), . . . , λ′n(0)} is a Lorentz orthonormal basis of Tx(Hn).

Show that the action of I(Hn) on the set of coordinate frames of Hn, given by φ(λ1, . . . , λn) = (φλ1, . . . , φλn), is transitive.

Solution: Define ϵi : R → Hn by ϵi(t) = (cosh t)e1 + (sinh t)ei for each i = 1, . . . , n. Then ϵ′i(0) = ei for each i. Hence (ϵ1, . . . , ϵn) is a coordinate frame of Hn based at e1.

Let (λ1, . . . , λn) be a coordinate frame of Hn based at x. Let A be the positive Lorentzian matrix whose column vectors are x, λ′1(0), . . . , λ′n(0). Then Aϵi(0) = x = λi(0) for each i and Aϵ′i(0) = λ′i(0) for each i. Hence Aϵi = λi for each i, and so A(ϵ1, . . . , ϵn) = (λ1, . . . , λn).

Therefore I(Hn) acts transitively on the set of all coordinate frames of Hn. Exercise 3.2.13 Let P be the hyperplane of Hn Lorentz orthogonal to a spacen like vector v of Rn+1. The reflection of Hn in P is the map ρ : H→ Hn obn+1 n+1 tained by restricting the Lorentzian reflection ρy : R → R . See Exercise 3.1.14. Given y ∈ Hn, prove that if y ∈ P , then ρ(y) = y, and if y /∈P , then P is the Lorentz orthogonal bisector of the geodesic segment [y, ρ(y)].

Solution: The map ρ fixes each point of P , since P = ⟨v⟩L ∩ Hn and ρy fixes each point of ⟨v⟩L by Exercise 3.1.14.

Suppose y /∈ P . By Theorem 3.2.11, there is a unique hyperbolic line N passing through y and Lorentz orthogonal to P . Let x = P ∩ N , and let 53

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

λ : R →Hn be a geodesic line such that λ(R) = N and λ(0) = x. Then P is Lorentz orthogonal to λ′(0). Hence λ′(0) is a multiple of v. Now ρλ : R→ Hn is a geodesic line with ρλ(0) = x and (ρλ)′(0) = ρyλ′(0) = —λ′(0) by Exercise 3.1.14. Hence ρλ(t) = λ( —t), and so ρ acts on N as a reflection about the point x. The isometry ρ maps the geodesic segment [x, y] to the geodesic segment [x, ρ(y)]. Therefore P is the Lorentz orthogonal bisector of the geodesic segment [y, ρ(y)].

Exercise 3.2.14 Let P be the hyperplane of Hn Lorentz orthogonal to a spacelike vector v of Rn+1. The closed half-space of Hn bounded by P with inward normal vector v is the set H(P, v) = {x ∈ Hn : x ◦ v ≥ 0}.

Prove that H(P, v) is hyperbolic convex.

Solution: Let x and y be distinct points of H(P, v). Then there is a unique geodesic segment [x, y] in Hn joining x to y by Exercise 3.2.4. We have that [x, y] = { (1 — t)x + ty /|||(1 — t)x + ty||| : 0 ≤ t ≤ 1}.

Now, as (1 — t)x + ty ◦ v = (1 — t)x ◦ v + ty ◦ v ≥ 0, we have that [x, y] c H(P, v). Therefore H(P, v) is hyperbolic convex.

3.3

Hyperbolic Arc Length

Exercise 3.3.1 Let x, y, z be distinct points of H1 with y between x and z.

Prove that dL(x, z) > dL(x, y) + dL(y, z).

Solution: The vectors x — y and y — z, are space-like. As y is between x and z, either x2 < y2 < z2 or x2 > y2 > z2. Hence x2 — y2 and y2 — z2 have the same parity. Therefore θ(x — y, y — z) < π/2 and θ(J(x — y), y — z) < π/2. Hence (x — y) ◦ (y — z) = J(x — y) · (y — z) > 0.

By applying a Lorentz transformation of R2, we may assume that y = e1. Then x1 — y1 > 0 and y1 — z1 < 0, and so x — y and y — z are linearly independent.

By Theorem 3.2.7, we have (x — y) ◦ (y — z) > x — y

y—z .

Hence, we have x—z

2

=

(x — y) + (y — z)

=

x—y

2

+ 2(x — y) ◦ (y — z) + y — z

2

>

x—y

2

+ 2 x—y y—z + y—z

2

=

x—y + y—z 54

2

2

.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Thus, we have dL(x, z) > dL(x, y) + dL(y, z).

Exercise 3.3.2 Prove that a curve γ : [a, b] → Hn is rectifiable in Hn if and only if γ is rectifiable in En+1.

Solution: Let γ : [a, b] → Hn be a curve. Assume that γ is rectifiable in En+1.

Let x and y be points of Hn. Then we have η(x, y) ≤ x — y ≤ |x — y|.

Hence, if P is a partition of [a, b], we have lH (γ, P ) ≤ lL(γ, P ) ≤ lE(γ, P ) ≤ |γ|.

Therefore γ is rectifiable in Hn with γ ≤ | γ |.

Conversely, suppose γ is rectifiable in Hn. Let x and y be points of Hn. Then we have x1 = —x ◦ e1 = cosh(η(x, e1)).

Hence, we have x1 — y1 = cosh(η(x, e1) — cosh(η(y, e1)).

By the mean value theorem, there is a real number s such that η(y, e1) ≤ s ≤ η(x, e1) and x1 — y1 = sinh(s) η(x, e1) — η(y, e1) .

Next, we have η(x, e1) ≤ η(x, y) + η(y, e1), and so we have η(x, e1) — η(y, e1) ≤ η(x, y).

Hence, we have

x1 — y1 ≤ sinh(s) η(x, y).

The function η(γ(t), e1) is a continuous function of t and so it attains a maximum value m on [a, b]. Let P be a partition of [a, b]. Then we have lE(γ1, P ) ≤ sinh(m) lH (γ, P ) ≤ sinh(m) γ .

Hence, the first component γ1 of γ is rectifiable in E1.

Let x and y be points of Hn. Then we have |x — y|2 = x — y 55

2

+ 2|x1 — y1|2.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Hence, we have

|x — y| ≤ x — y +

√

2 |x1 — y1|.

Let P be a partition of [a, b] such that if Q ≤ P , then γ — lL(γ, Q) < 1.

For all Q ≤ P , we have lE(γ, Q)

≤ ≤

√ lL(γ, Q) + 2 lE(γ1, Q) √ γ + 1 + 2 |γ1|.

Thus γ is rectifiable in En+1.

3.4

Hyperbolic Volume

Exercise 3.4.1 Show that the hyperbolic coordinates of a positive time-like vector x in R1,n satisfy the system of Equations (3.4.1).

Solution: Observe that x1 = —e1 ◦ x = — e1

x cosh η(e1, x) = ρ cosh η1

and x2

= e2 ◦ x = e2 ◦ (x1e1 + x2e2 + · · · + xn+1en+1) = e2 ◦ (x2e2 + · · · + xn+1en+1) = x 2e2 + · · · + xn+1en+1 cos η2 q = x 2 + x21 cos η2 q = —ρ2 + ρ2 cosh2 η1 cos η2 q = ρ —1 + cosh2 η1 cos η2 = ρ sinh η1 cos η2.

Suppose 2 < i < n and Equations 2.4.1 hold for indices j < i. Then we have xi = ei ◦ x = ei ◦ (x1e1 + x2e2 + · · · + xn+1en+1) = ei ◦ (xiei + · · · + xn+1en+1) = xiei + · · · + xn+1en+1 cos ηi q 2 = x 2 + x21— x22— · · · — xi−1 cos ηi =

(—ρ2 + ρ2 cosh2 η1 — ρ2 sinh2 η1 cos2 η2 — · · · 56

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

=

—ρ2 sinh2 η1 sin2 η2 · · · sin2 ηi−2 cos2 ηi−1)1/2 cos ηi ρ(—1 + cosh2 η1 — sinh2 η1 cos2 η2 — · · · 2 2 2 2 1/2 cos ηi — sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηi−2 cos ηi−1)

=

ρ(sinh2 η1 — sinh2 η1 cos2 η2 — · · ·

=

— sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηi−2 cos ηi−1) cos ηi q ρ sinh η1 1 — cos2 η2 — · · · — sin2 η2 · · · sin2 ηi−2 cos2 ηi−1) cos ηi

2

2

2

2

1/2

= ρ sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηi−1 cos ηi. q q Next xn = x2n + x2n+1 cos ηn and xn+1 = x2n + x2n+1 sin ηn with q

q x2n + x2n+1

=

2 x 2 + x2 1— x2 2— · · · — xn−1

= ρ sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηn−1.

Hence, we have = ρ sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηn−1 cos ηn = ρ sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηn−1 sin ηn.

xn xn+1

Exercise 3.4.2 Show that the hyperbolic coordinate transformation satisfies (3.4.2)-(3.4.5).

Solution: Observe that (1)

∂x ∂ρ

=

x ρ

=

x

. |||x|||

Next, observe that ∂x =

∂η1

ρ (sinh η1)e1 + ρ (cosh η1 cos η2)e2 + · · ·

+ ρ (cosh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηn−1 cos ηn)en + ρ (cosh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηn−1 sin ηn)en+1.

Hence, we have (2)

∂x 2 2 2 ¨ ∂η ¨ = ρ (— sinh η1 + cosh η1 cos η2 + · · · 1

+ cosh2 η1 sin2 η2 · · · sin2 ηn−1 cos2 ηn + cosh2 η1 sin2 η2 · · · sin2 ηn−1 sin2 ηn)1/2 = ρ (— sinh2 η1 + cosh2 η1 cos η2 + · · · + cosh2 η1 sin2 η2 · · · sin2 ηn−1)1/2 = ρ (— sinh η1 + cosh2 η1)1/2 = ρ.

57

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Let i > 1. Then we have ∂x = —ρ (sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηi−1 sin ηi)ei ∂ηi + ρ (sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηi−1 cos ηi cos ηi+1)ei+1 . +

ρ (sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηi−1 cos ηi sin ηi+1 · · · sin ηn−1 cos ηn)en

+

ρ (sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηi−1 cos ηi sin ηi+1 · · · sin ηn−1 sin ηn)en+1.

Hence, we have ∂x

¨ ∂η ¨ = ρ sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηi−1 i

(sin2 ηi + cos2 ηi cos2 ηi+1 + · · · + cos2 ηi sin2 ηi+1 · · · sin2 ηn−1 cos2 ηn + cos2 ηi sin2 ηi+1 · · · sin2 ηn−1 sin2 ηn)1/2 = ρ sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηi−1 (sin2 ηi + cos2 ηi cos2 ηi+1 + · · · + cos2 ηi sin2 ηi+1 · · · sin2 ηn−1)1/2 = ρ sinh η1 sin η2 · · · sin ηi−1.

Thus, equation (3), that is, (3.4.4) holds.

Next, observe that ∂x ∂ρ

◦

∂x ∂η1

—ρ cosh η1 sinh η1

=

+ρ sinh η1 cosh η1 cos2 η2 . +ρ sinh η1 cosh η1 sin2 η2 · · · sin2 ηn−1 cos2 ηn +ρ sinh η1 cosh η1 sin2 η2 · · · sin2 ηn−1 sin2 ηn —ρ cosh η1 sinh η1

=

+ρ sinh η1 cosh η1 cos2 η2 . +ρ sinh η1 cosh η1 sin2 η2 · · · sin2 ηn−1 —ρ cosh η1 sinh η1 + ρ cosh η1 sinh η1

=

=

0.

Now suppose i > 1. Then we have ∂x ∂ρ

◦

∂x ∂ηi

2

2

= —ρ sinh η1 · · · sin ηi−1 cos ηi sin ηi + ρ sinh2 η1 · · · sin2 ηi−1 cos ηi sin ηi cos2 ηi+1 .. +ρ sinh2 η1 · · · sin2 ηi−1 cos ηi sin ηi sin2 ηi+1 · · · sin2 ηn−1 cos2 ηn 58

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

+ρ sinh2 η1 · · · sin2 ηi−1 cos ηi sin ηi sin2 ηi+1 · · · sin2 ηn−1 sin2 ηn =

—ρ sin2 η1 · · · sin2 ηi−1 cos ηi sin ηi 2 +ρ sinh2 η1 · · · sin2 ηi−1 cos ηi sin ηi cosi+1 . +ρ sinh2 η1 · · · sin2 ηi−1 cos ηi sin ηi sin2i+1 · · · sin2 ηn+1

= —ρ sinh2 η1 · · · sin2 ηi−1 cos ηi sin ηi +ρ sinh2 η1 · · · sin2 ηi−1 cos ηi sin ηi = 0.

Next, suppose i < j. Let sh1, si, ci abbreviate sinh η1, sin ηi, cos ηi, respectively. Then we have ∂x ∂ηi

◦

∂x ∂ηj

2

=

2 2

2

2

2

+ρ2sh2s2 · · · s2 cisis2

· · · s2

—ρ sh1s2 · · · si−1cisisi+1 · · · sj−1cjsj 1 2

i−1

i+1

j−1

sjcjc2

j+1

. +ρ2sh21s22 · · · s2i−1 cisis2i+1 · · · s 2j−1 sjcjs2j+1 · · · s 2n−1 cn2 +ρ2sh21s22 · · · s2i−1 cisis2i+1 · · · s 2j−1 sjcjs2j+1 · · · s 2n−1 s2n 2 = —ρ2sh12s22 · · · si−1 cisis2i+1 · · · s 2j−1 cjsj +ρ2sh2s2 · · · s2 cisis2 · · · s2 sjcjc2

1 2

i−1

i+1

j−1

j+1

. +ρ2sh21s22 · · · s2i−1 cisis2i+1 · · · s 2j−1 sjcjs2j+1 · · · s 2n−1 2 = —ρ2sh12s22 · · · si−1 cisis2i+1 · · · s 2j−1 cjsj 2 +ρ2sh21s22 · · · si−1 cisis2i+1 · · · s 2j−1 sjcj

=

0.

Thus, the orthogonal conditions (3.4.5) hold.

Exercise 3.4.3 Show that the element of hyperbolic arc length dx in hyperbolic coordinates is given by dx

2

= dη21 + sinh2 η1dη22 + · · · + sinh2 η1 sin2 η2 · · · sin2 ηn−1dη2n.

Solution: Observe that dx

2

2

2

2

= —dx1 + dx2 + · · · + dxn+1 =

n Σ ∂x1

—

2

dηj

∂ηj Σ n Σ n ∂x1 j=1

= —

j=1 k=1

∂ηj

n +1 Σ

n ∂x Σ i

i=2

j=1

+ ∂x1 ∂ηk 59

2

dηj

∂ηj

dηjdηk

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

n+1 n n Σ ΣΣ

∂x i ∂ηj

+ i=2 j=1 k=1 nΣnΣ

=

—

∂x 1 ∂ηj

∂x ∂η

◦

j=1 k=1

=

n n Σ Σ

n +1 Σ ∂x ∂x 1 i + ∂ηk ∂η j i=2

∂x ∂η

j

j=1 k=1

∂x i dηjdηk ∂ηk ∂x i dηjdηk ∂ηk

dηjdηk

k

Σ n ¨ ∂x ¨2 2

= j=1

¨ ∂ηj ¨ dηj n

2

= dη 1 +

Σ

sinh2 η1 sin2 η2 · · · sin2 ηj−1 dηj2.

j=2

Exercise 3.4.4 Let B(x, r) be the hyperbolic disk centered at a point x of H2 of radius r. Show that the circumference of B(x, r) is 2π sinh r and the area of B(x, r) is 2π(cosh r — 1). Conclude that B(x, r) has more area than a Euclidean disk of radius r.

Solution: We may assume that x = e1. Then B(x, r) = {x ∈ H2 : η1 < r}.

The circumference of B(x, r) satisfies η1 = r. Therefore, by Exercise 3.4.3, the circumference of B = B(x, r) is given by ∫ ∫ 2π dx = sinh r dη2 = 2π sinh r. ∂B

0

By Formula 3.4.6, the area of B is given by ∫ ∫ 2π ∫ r sinh η1 dη1 dη2 = sinh η1 dη1 dη2 h−1(B)

0

∫ 2π =

0

∫ 2π

0 r

cosh η1 0 dη2 (cosh r — 1) dη2 = 2π(cosh r — 1).

= 0

Exercise 3.4.5 Let B(x, r) be the hyperbolic ball centered at a point x of H3 of radius r. Show that the volume of B(x, r) is π(sinh 2r — 2r).

Solution: We may assume that x = e1. Then B(x, r) = {x ∈ H3 : η1 < r .}

By Formula 3.4.6, the volume of B = B(x, r) is given by ∫ h−1(B)

sinh2 η1 sin η2 dη1 dη2 dη3

60

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

∫ 2π ∫ π ∫ r sinh2 η1 sin η2 dη1 dη2 dη3 ∫π ∫r 2 = 2π sinh η1 dη1 sin η2 dη2 0 0 π∫ r = 2π — cos η1 sinh2 η1 dη1 0 0 ∫r 2 sinh η1 dη1. = 4π =

0

0

0

0

Integration by parts yields ∫r sinh2 η1 dη1

∫r

r

—

= cosh η1 sinh η1

0

∫ r 0

cosh r sinh r —

cosh2 η1 dη1 0

(1 + sinh2 η1) dη1 ∫ r = cosh r sinh r — r — sinh2 η1 dη1.

=

0

0

Hence

∫r 2

sinh η1 dη1 = 0

1 2

cosh r sinh r —

r 1 sinh 2r — r .

2 = 4 2

Therefore, we have Vol(B(x, r)) = π(sinh 2r — 2r).

Exercise 3.4.6 Let B(x, r) be the hyperbolic ball centered at a point x of Hn of radius r. Show that ∫ r n−1 Vol(B(x, r)) = Vol(S ) sinhn−1 η dη.

0

Solution: We may assume that x = e1. Then B(x, r) = x { ∈ Hn : η1 < r . }

By Formula 3.4.6, we have Vol(B(x, r)) ∫ = sinhn−1 η1 sinn−2 η2 · · · sin ηn−1 dη1 · · · dηn h−1(B) ∫ 2π ∫ π ∫ π∫ r · · · sinhn−1 η1 sinn−2 η2 · · · sin ηn−1 dη1 · · · dηn = 0

0

∫ 2π ∫ π = =

0

∫ π

0

sinn−2 η2 · · · sin ηn−1 dη2 · · · dηn ··· 0 0 0 ∫ r n−1 Vol(S ) sinh n−1 η1 dη1.

∫ r sinhn−1 η1 dη1 0

0

Exercise 3.4.7 Prove that every similarity of Hn, with n > 1, is an isometry.

61

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let φ : Hn → Hn be a similarity with scale factor k > 0. We claim that φ maps hyperbolic lines to hyperbolic lines. Let λ : R → Hn be a geodesic line. Define ψ : R → R by ψ(t) = t/k. Then ψ is a similarity of E1. Observe that φλψ : R → Hn is a geodesic line, since if s < t in R, then we have dH (φλψ(s), φλψ(t)) = kdH (λψ(s), λψ(t)) = kdH (λ(s/k), λ(t/k)) = k(t/k — s/k) = t — s.

Hence φ(λ(R)) = φλψ(R) is a hyperbolic line of Hn. Therefore φ maps a totally geodesic subspace of Hn to a totally geodesic subspace of Hn. Hence, by Exercise 3.2.7, φ maps 2-planes to 2-planes. By composing φ with an isometry of Hn, we may assume that φ(⟨e1, e2⟩ ∩ Hn) = ⟨e1, e2⟩ ∩ Hn. Hence, we may assume that n = 2.

Now, by composing φ with an isometry of H2, we may assume φ(e1) = e1.

Then φ(B(e1, r)) = B(e1, kr) and φ(S(e1, r)) = S(e1, kr). Let γ : [0, 2π]→ H2 be defined by γ(η) = (cosh r, sinh r cos η, sinh r sin η).

Then γ parameterizes the circumference S(e1, r) of B(e1, r). Now φγ = k γ , and so the circumference of φ(B(e1, r)) is 2πk sinh r by Exercise 3.4.4. On the other hand, the circumference of B(e1, kr) is 2π sinh kr. Hence, we have that 2πk sinh r = 2π sinh kr, and so k sinh r = sinh kr for all r > 0. Differentiating twice, we have k sinh r = k2 sinh kr = k3 sinh r, and so k2 = 1. Therefore k = 1. Thus φ is an isometry.

3.5

Hyperbolic Trigonometry

Exercise 3.5.1 Let α, β, γ be the angles of a hyperbolic triangle and let a, b, c be the lengths of the opposite sides. Show that (1)

(2)

cosh a = cosh b cosh c — sinh b sinh c cos α, cosh b = cosh a cosh c — sinh a sinh c cos β, cosh c = cosh a cosh b — sinh a sinh b cos γ, cos α = — cos β cos γ + sin β sin γ cosh a, cos β = — cos α cos γ + sin α sin γ cosh b, cos γ = — cos α cos β + sin α sin β cosh c.

62

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Formulas (1) follow from the first law of cosines, Theorem 3.5.3, and Formulas (2) follow from the second law of cosines, Theorem 3.5.4.

Exercise 3.5.2 Let α, β, π/2 be the angles of a hyperbolic right triangle and let a, b, c be the lengths of the opposite sides. Show that (1)

cosh c = cosh a cosh b,

(2)

cosh c = cot α cot β,

(3)

sinh a = sinh c sin α, sinh b = sinh c sin β,

(4)

cos α = tanh b coth c, cos β = tanh a coth c,

(5)

sinh a = tanh b cot β, sinh b = tanh a cot α,

(6)

cos α = cosh a sin β, cos β = cosh b sin α.

Solution: By the third Formula (1) of Exercise 3.5.1, we have (1)

cosh c = cosh a cosh b — sinh a sinh b cos π/2 = cosh a cosh b.

By the third Formula (2) of Exercise 3.5.1, we have cos π/2 = — cos α cos β + sin α sin β cosh c.

Hence, we have (2)

cosh c = (cos α cos β)/(sin α sin β) = cot α cot β.

By the law of sines, Theorem 3.5.2, we have sinh a sin α

=

sinh b sin β

=

sinh c sin π/2

.

Hence, we have (3) sinh a = sinh c sin α and sinh b = sinh c sin β.

By the first Formula (1) of Exercise 3.5.1, we have cosh a = cosh b cosh c — sinh b sinh c cos α.

Applying Formula (1) yields cosh c/ cosh b = cosh b cosh c — sinh b sinh c cos α.

63

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Hence, we have (4)

cos α

= = = =

cosh b cosh c — (cosh c/ cosh b) sinh b sinh c cosh2 b cosh c — cosh c cosh b sinh b sinh c sinh2 b cosh c cosh b sinh b sinh c sinh b cosh c = tanh b coth c. cosh b sinh c

Likewise, we have (4) cos β = tanh a coth c.

From (3) and (4), we have sin β = sinh b/ sinh c and cos β = tanh a coth c.

Hence cot β =

sinh a cosh c sinh c cosh a sinh c sinh b

=

sinh a cosh a cosh b = sinh a coth b. cosh a sinh b

Thus, we have (5) sinh a = tanh b cot β and likewise sinh b = tanh a cot α.

From (5) and the law of sines, we have sinh a = tanh b cot β =

sinh b cos β sinh a cos β sinh b cos β = = . sin β cosh b sin α cosh b cosh b sin β

Hence, we have (6) cos β = sin α cosh b and likewise cos α = sin β cosh a.

Exercise 3.5.3 Let α, β, 0 be the angles of an infinite hyperbolic triangle with just one ideal vertex and let c be the length of the finite side. Show that sinh c =

cos α + cos β sin α sin β

.

(3.1)

Solution: By Theorem 3.5.7, we have cosh c =

1 + cos α cos β sin α sin β

.

Hence, we have sinh2 c

= = = =

cosh2 c — 1 1 + 2 cos α cos β + cos2 α cos2 β — sin2 α sin2 β sin2 α sin2 β 1 + 2 cos α cos β + cos2 α cos2 β — (1 — cos2 α)(1 — cos2 β) sin2 α sin2 β cos2 α + 2 cos α cos β + cos2 β = sin2 α sin2 β

64

cos α + cos β sin α sin β

2

.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 3.5.4 Let α, π/2, 0 be the angles of an infinite hyperbolic right triangle T with just one ideal vertex and let c be the length of the finite side. The angle α = Π(c) is called the angle of parallelism of T . Show that (1) (2) (3)

sin α = sech c, cos α = tanh c, tan α = csch c.

(3.2) (3.3) (3.4)

Solution: By Exercise 3.5.3, we have sinh c = cot α, and so (3) tan α = csch c.

As sinh2 c = cot2 α, we have cosh2 c— 1 = cot2 α, and so cosh2 c = cot2 α + 1 = csc2 α. Hence sin2 α = sech2 c, and so (1) sin α = sech c. Multiplying (1) by cot α = sinh c gives (2) cos α = tanh c.

Exercise 3.5.5 Prove that two generalized hyperbolic triangles are congruent if and only if they have the same angles.

Solution: Suppose that two generalized hyperbolic triangles T and T ′ have the same angles. Let x, y, z be the vertices of T and let x′, y′, z′ be the vertices of T ′ labeled so that the angle of T at x, y, z equals the angle of T ′ at x′, y′, z′, respectively. By the second law of cosines, Theorems 3.5.4 and 3.5.7, the corresponding sides of the triangles have the same length. If the triangles are finite, then the triangles are congruent by Exercise 3.2.10.

Suppose both triangles have just one ideal vertex, say z and z′. By Theorem 3.1.6 and Exercise 3.2.10, we may assume that x = x′ and y = y′ and x and y lie on the hyperbolic line L =⟨ e1, e2⟩ ∩ H2. If T and T ′ lie on the same side of L, then the unbounded sides of T and T ′ agree, and so T = T ′. Otherwise, the reflection of H2 in the line L, corresponding to the Lorentzian matrix , A=

1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 —1

,

maps T to T ′.

Suppose both triangles have just one actual vertex, say x and x′. By Theorem 3.1.6, we may assume that x = e1 = x′. See Figure 3.5.2. By applying a rotation of H2 about e1, corresponding to the Lorentzian matrix , 1 0 A= 0 cos θ 0 sin θ

0 sin — θ cos θ

,

we can map T to T ′.

Now suppose both triangles are ideal. We may assume that T has ideal vertices determined by the light-like vectors (1,± 1, 0) and (1, 0, 1). By Theorem 3.1.6, we may assume that T ′ has ideal vertices determined by the light-like vectors (1, ±1, 0) and (1, cos θ, sin θ) with 0 < θ < π or π < θ < 2π. By applying the reflection of H2 in the hyperbolic line with ideal endpoints (1, ± 1, 0) to T ′, if π < θ < 2π, we may assume 0 < θ < π.

65

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Consider the Lorentzian matrix , cosh s A= sinh s 0 Then

, A

,

1 ±1 0

= ,

and A

1 0 1

sinh s 0 cosh s 0 0 1

cosh s ± sinh s sinh s ± cosh s 0 , =

, = (cosh s ± sinh s) ,

cosh s sinh s 1

.

= cosh s

1 tanh s sech s

1 ±1 0

.

Now tanh2 s + sech2 s = 1 and t = tanh s takes on all values in the open interval —1 < t < 1. Therefore, there is a value of s such that (tanh s, sech s) = (cos θ, sin θ). For this value of s, the isometry of H2 corresponding to A maps T to T ′.

Exercise 3.5.6 Let α and β be two angles of a hyperbolic triangle and let a and b be the lengths of the opposite sides. Prove that ≤ α β if and only if a≤ b and that α = β if and only if a = b.

Solution: Suppose α ≤ β. By the law of sines, we have sinh a sin α

=

sinh b sin β

.

If β ≤ π/2, then sin α ≤ sin β. If β > π/2, then α < π/2 and β — π/2 < π/2 — α, since α + β < π. Hence cos(β — π/2) > cos(π/2 — α), and so sin α < sin β.

Therefore sinh a ≤ sinh b, and so a ≤ b. Moreover, if α = β, then a = b.

Conversely, suppose a ≤ b. Then sinh a ≤ sinh b and so sin α ≤ sin β. By the previous argument, α ≤ β. Moreover, if a = b, then α = β.

Exercise 3.5.7 Let T (x, y, z) be a hyperbolic triangle labeled as in Figure 3.5.1 such that α, β < π/2. Prove that the point on the hyperbolic line through x and y nearest to z lies in the interior of the side [x, y].

Solution: Let z′ be the image of z under the reflection of H2 in the line L(x, y).

Then L(x, y) is the perpendicular bisector of the geodesic segment [z, z′] by Exercise 3.2.13. Let w be the point of intersection of [z, z′] and L(x, y). Then w is the point of L(x, y) nearest to z by the hyperbolic theorem of Pythagoras, Formula 3.5.7.

Each nonright angle of a hyperbolic right triangle is less than π/2, since the sum of the angles is less than π. Hence w does not lie outside of [x, y], otherwise, we would have a right triangle with angle — π α or π— β greater than π/2. Moreover, w /= x or y, since α, β < π/2. Hence w lies in the interior of [x, y].

66

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 3.5.8 Let α, β, γ be nonnegative real numbers such that α+β+γ < π.

Prove that there is a generalized hyperbolic triangle with angles α, β, γ.

Solution: By Theorem 3.5.6, we may assume that at least one angle, say γ, is zero. Observe that the proof of Theorem 3.5.6 extends to the case γ = 0 and α, β > 0. The case β = γ = 0 and α > 0 is clear from Figure 3.5.2, and the case α = β = γ = 0 is obvious.

Exercise 3.5.9 Prove that a hyperbolic convex quadrilateral Q with angles γ, π/2, π/2, π/2 exists if and only if 0 ≤ γ < π/2.

Solution: Let Q be a such a quadrilateral. Subdivide Q, from the vertex with angle γ to the opposite vertex, into two triangles Δ1 and Δ2 with angles α1, β1, π/2 and α2, β2, π/2, respectively, so that α1 + α2 = γ and β1 + β2 = π/2.

Then αi + βi < π/2 for i = 1, 2 by Corollary 1. Adding these two equations gives γ + π/2 < π, and so 0 ≤ γ < π/2.

Conversely, let γ be an angle such that 0 ≤ γ < π/2. Then there exists a generalized hyperbolic triangle Δ1 with angles γ/2, π/4, π/2 by Exercise 3.5.8. Let Δ2 be the hyperbolic triangle obtained by reflecting Δ1 across its hypotenuse. Then Q = Δ1 ∪Δ 2 is a hyperbolic convex quadrilateral with angles γ, π/2, π/2, π/2.

Exercise 3.5.10 Let γ be an angle such that 0 ≤γ < π/2, and let a and b be positive real numbers. Prove that there exists a hyperbolic convex quadrilateral Q as in Figure 3.5.7 if and only if cos γ = sinh a sinh b.

Solution: Let Q be such a quadrilateral. If γ > 0, then cos γ = sinh a sinh b

by Theorem 3.5.9. Hence, we may assume that γ = 0. Subdivide Q, from the vertex with angle 0 to the opposite vertex, into two infinite triangles Δ1 and Δ2 with angles 0, α, π/2 and 0, β, π/2, respectively, so that α + β = π/2. By Formula 3.5.20, we have that sinh a = cot α and sinh b = cot β. As tan(α + β) =

tan α + tan β 1 — tan α tan β

,

we have that tan α tan β = 1, and so sinh a sinh b = cot α cot β = 1 = cos 0.

Conversely, let γ be an angle such that 0 ≤ γ < π/2, and let a and b be positive real numbers such that cos γ = sinh a sinh b. Assume first that γ = 0.

Then we can reverse the above argument to construct Q. Now assume that γ > 0. Let Δ1 be a hyperbolic triangle with angles α1, β, π/2, and let a, b, c be the lengths of the opposite sides. Then cos β = tanh a coth c by Formula 3.5.12. Let Δ2 be a hyperbolic triangle with angles α2, π/2 —β, π/2, and let b, b2, d be the lengths of the opposite sides. Then cos(π/2 — β) = tanh b coth d by Formula 3.5.12.

We claim that there is a value of β such that c = d. Observe that c = d ⇔ tanh c = tanh d ⇔ coth c = coth d 67

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

cos β cos(π/2 — β) = tanh a tanh b sin β cos β = ⇔ tanh a tanh b tanh b ⇔ tan β = . tanh a We can solve the last equation for β so that 0 < β < π/2. For this value of β, we have c = d. Thus, we can construct a hyperbolic convex quadrilateral Q, with angles γ′, π/2, π/2, π/2 such that γ′ = α1 + α2 and a, b are the lengths of the sides opposite γ′, by gluing togetherΔ 1 and Δ2 along their hypothenuses. By Theorem 3.5.9, we have that cos γ′ = sinh a sinh b = cos γ. By Exercise 3.5.9, we have that 0 ≤ γ′ < π/2. Hence γ′ = γ. ⇔

Exercise 3.5.11 Let γ be an angle such that 0 ≤γ ≤π/2, and let a, b, c′ be positive real numbers. Prove that there exists a hyperbolic convex pentagon P as in Figure 3.5.8 if and only if the equation in Theorem 3.5.10 holds.

Solution: Let P be such a pentagon. Then the equation in Theorem 3.5.10 holds by Theorem 3.5.10.

Conversely, suppose that the equation in Theorem 3.5.10 holds. Let γ1 be an angle such that 0 ≤ γ1 ≤ γ/2 with γ1 = 0 if and only if γ = 0. Let γ2 = γ — γ1.

Let a1 = a and a2 = b. Let ci be a real numbers such that cos γi = sinh ai sinh ci for i = 1, 2. By Exercise 3.5.10, there exists hyperbolic convex quadrilateral Qi with three right angles and fourth angle γi and lengths of opposite sides ai and ci for i = 1, 2. Let di be the length of the side of Qi adjacent to angle γi and opposite the side of length ai for i = 1, 2. By Theorem 3.5.8, we have that cosh di = cosh ai/ sin γi for i = 1, 2.

Without loss of generality we may assume that a ≤ b. If γ = 0, then γi = 0, and so di = ∞ for i = 1, 2. Assume γ > 0. Observe that the continuous function sin γ1/ sin γ2 of the variable γ1 takes on the value 0 when γ1 = 0 and 1 when γ1 = γ/2. Hence, by the intermediate value theorem, there is a value of γ1 in the interval (0, γ/2] such that sin γ1/ sin γ2 = cosh a/ cosh b. Then d1 = d2.

We may assume that Q1 and Q2 are adjacent and share vertices with angles γ1 and γ2. Then P = Q1 ∪ Q2 is a hyperbolic convex pentagon with four right angles and fifth angle γ = γ1 + γ2. The side opposite to γ has length c = c1 + c2 and the adjacent sides have lengths a and b. We have that cosh a cosh b + cos γ cosh c = sinh a sinh b

by Theorem 3.5.10. By assumption, we have that cosh c′ =

cosh a cosh b + cos γ sinh a sinh b

Therefore c = c′, and P is the desired pentagon.

Exercise 3.5.12 Prove that two right-angled hyperbolic convex hexagons are congruent if and only if they have the same three lengths for alternate sides.

68

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Suppose a, b, c are the lengths of alternate sides of two right-angled hyperbolic hexagons. Let a′, b′, c′ be the lengths of the opposite sides of the first hexagon. Then the second hexagon has a′, b′, c′ as the lengths of the opposite sides by the law of sines for right-angled hexagons (Theorem 3.5.11).

Let u be the vertex between the sides of length b′ and a of the first hexagon, let v be the vertex between the sides of length a and c′ of the first hexagon, and let w be the vertex between the sides of length c′ and b of the first hexagon.

Let x, y, z be the corresponding vertices of the second hexagon. Then d(u, w) = d(x, y) by the hyperbolic theorem of Pythagoras (Formula 3.5.7). Hence, there is an isometry φ of H2 such that φ(u) = x, φ(v) = y, φ(w) = z by Exercise 3.2.10. Then φ maps the corresponding sides of the first hexagon onto the corresponding sides of the second hexagon, since φ preserves right angles and lengths. Thus, the first hexagon is congruent to the second hexagon via φ.

Exercise 3.5.13 Let P be an hyperbolic convex n-gon in H2 with angles θ1, . . . , θn at its vertices some of which may be ideal. Prove that the hyperbolic area of P is given by the formula Area(P ) = (n — 2)π — (θ1 + · · · + θn).

Solution: We may assume that the angles θ1, . . . , θn occur in this order around ∂P . Let vi be the vertex of P with angle θi for each i. Let c be a point in the interior of P . As P is hyperbolic convex, P contains the geodesic segment [c, vi] if vi is an actual vertex or P contains the geodesic ray [c, vi) if vi is an ideal vertex. These geodesic segments and rays subdivide P into n generalized hyperbolic triangles T1, . . . , Tn such that Ti has angle αi at vertex vi, angle βi at vertex vi+1, with vn+1 = v1, and angle γi at c for each i. By Theorem 3.5.5, Area(P ) = =

n Σ i=1 n Σ

Area(Ti) (π — (αi + βi + γi)

i=1

= nπ — α1 + βn +

n Σ (αi + βi−1) — 2π i=2

= (n — 2)π — (θ1 + · · · + θn).

Exercise 3.5.14 Prove that there exists a hyperbolic convex regular n-gon in H2 with angles equal to θ if and only if 0≤θ < 1—

2 π. n

Note that (1 — 2/n)π is the angle of a Euclidean convex regular n-gon.

69

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let P be a hyperbolic convex regular n-gon in H2 with angles equal to θ. As Area(P ) > 0, we have that (n — 2)π — nθ > 0 by Exercise 3.5.13, and so 0 ≤ θ < (1 —2/n)π.

Conversely, suppose 0 ≤ θ < (1— 2/n)π. Then θ + 2π/n < π. Hence, there exists a generalized hyperbolic triangle T with angles θ/2, θ/2, 2π/n. The triangle T is isosceles by Formulas 3.5.4 and 3.5.5. Let c be the vertex of T with angle 2π/n. Then we can form a regular n-gon P in H2 with angles equal to θ by joining together n copies of T obtained by rotating T around the point c by a multiple of 2π/n. The polygon P is hyperbolic convex by Exercise 3.2.14, since P is the intersection of the n half-planes containing P and bounded by a side of P .

Exercise 3.5.15 Let θ1, . . . , θn be real numbers with 0≤ θi < π for each i.

Prove that there exists a hyperbolic convex n-gon P in H2 with angles θ1, . . . , θn occurring in this order around ∂P if and only if θ1 + · · · + θn < (n — 2)π.

Solution: Let P be such a polygon. As 0 < Area(P ), we have that 0 < (n — 2)π — (θ1 + · · · θn)

by Exercise 3.5.13, and so θ1 + · · · + θn < (n — 2)π.

Conversely, suppose θ1 + · · · + θn < (n — 2)π. Let Δi be a generalized hyperbolic triangle with angles αi, θi/2, π/2, with αi > 0, and let bi be the length of the side of Δi opposite the angle θi/2. By Formula 3.5.16, we have that sin αi cosh bi = cos(θi/2). As αi increases over the interval (0, π/2 — θi/2), the length bi decreases continuously over the interval (0, +∞). Hence, we may assume that all the lengths bi have the same value b for any positive value of b.

Reflect Δi across its hypothenuse to obtain a triangle Δ′i and quadrilateral Qi = Δi ∪Δ′i with angles 2αi, π/2, θi, π/2. We may assume that all the Qi have the same vertex v with angle 2αi and Qi+1 is adjacent to Qi rotating in the positive direction around v for each i. Then P = Q1 ∪· · · ∪ Qn will be a polygon with angles θ1, . . . , θn occuring in this order around ∂P if α1 ·+· · + αn = π.

Consider the function n Σ cos(θi/2) , f (b) = sin−1 cosh b i=1 which equals α1 + · · · + αn when b > 0. Then f decreases continuously and f (b) → 0 as b → +∞. Moreover f (0) =

n Σ π — θi i=1

2

= nπ — (θ1 + · · · + θn) /2 > π.

Hence, by the intermediate value theorem, there is a positive value of b such that f (b) = π, and so α1 + · · · + αn = π.

The sides of P are tangent to the circle S(v, b). Clearly P is the intersection of the n half-planes containing P and bounded by a side of P , and so P is hyperbolic convex by Exercise 3.2.14.

70

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 4

Inversive Geometry 4.1

Reflections

Exercise 4.1.1 Prove Theorem 4.1.1.

Solution: We have ρ(x) = x + 2(t — a · x)a.

(1) Therefore ρ(x) = x if and only if a · x = t or equivalently x is in P (x, t).

(2) Observe that ρ2(x) = ρ(x + 2(t — a · x)a) = x + 2(t — a · x)a + 2(t — a · (x + 2(t — a · x)a)a) = x + 2(t — a · x)a + 2(t — a · x — 2(t — a · x))a = x + 2(t — a · x)a + 2(—t + a · x)a = x.

(3) Moreover, |ρ(x) — ρ(y)| 2

= |x + 2(t — a · x)a — y — 2(t — a · y)a| 2 2

= |x — y — 2a · (x — y)a| = |x — y|2 — 4a · (x — y)a · (x — y) + 4(a · (x — y))2 = |x — y|2.

Hence |ρ(x) — ρ(y)| = |x — y|, and so ρ is an isometry.

Exercise 4.1.2 Show that the reflections of En in the planes P (a, t) and P (b, s) commute if and only if either P (a, t) = P (b, s) or a and b are orthogonal.

Solution: Let ρa(x) = x + 2(t —a · x)a and ρb(x) = x + 2(s —b · x)b. Then we have ρbρa(x) = ρb(x + 2(t — a · x)a) = x + 2(t — a · x)a — 2(s — b · (x + 2(t — a · x)a))b = x + 2(t — a · x)a — 2(s — b · x)b — 4(t — a · x)(a · b)b.

71

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Likewise, we have ρaρb(x)x + 2(t — a · x)a — 2(s — b · x)b — 4(s — b · x)(a · b)a.

Hence, we have ρbρa(x) — ρaρb(x) = 4(a · b) (t — a · x)b — (s — b · x)a .

Hence ρa and ρb commute if and only if either a·b = 0 or (t—a·x)b = (s—b·x)a for all x in En. The second condition is equivalent to (b, s) = ±(a, t). Therefore ρa and ρb commute if and only if either a and b are orthogonal or P (a, t) = P (b, s).

Exercise 4.1.3 Show that a real n × n matrix A preserves angles between nonzero vectors if and only if there is a positive scalar k such that| Ax | = k| x| for all x in En. Solution: Let k be a positive scalar. Then the following are equivalent: (1) |Ax| = k|x| for all x in En. (2) | k1 Ax| = |x| for all x in E n.

(3) k1 A is orthogonal (by Exercise 2.1.2).

(4) A preserves angles (by Lemma 1 of §4.1).

Exercise 4.1.4 Let U be an open connected subset of En and let φ : U→ En be a C1 function such that φ′(x) is nonsingular for all x in U . Show that φ either preserves orientation or reverses orientation.

Solution: The function f : U → R defined by f (x) = det φ′(x) is a continuous 1 function of x, since φ is a C function. The function f has no zeros, since φ′(x) is nonsingular for each x in U . Suppose φ does not preserve orientation nor reverse orientation. Then f takes on both positive and negative values. Hence U = f −1(( —∞, 0)) ∪f −1((0, ∞)) is a disconnection of U which contradicts the fact that U is connected. Hence f either preserves orientation or reverses orientation.

Exercise 4.1.5 Let U be an open connected subset of C. Prove that a function φ : U → C is conformal if and only if either φ is analytic and φ′(z) /= 0 for all z in U or φ is analytic and φ′(z) /= 0 for all z in U .

Solution: Suppose φ : U → C is conformal. Let x and y be the real and imaginary parts of z so that z = x + iy. Consider φ to be a function of x and y. Then there is a function κ : U →R+ such that k(z)−1φ′(z) is an orthogonal matrix for each z in U . Let u and v be the real and imaginary components of φ so that φ = u + vi. Then we have ∂u ∂u ! φ′(z) =

∂x

∂y

∂y ∂x

∂y ∂y

72

.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

By Exercise 4.1.4, φ either preserves orientation or reverses orientation. Suppose φ preserves orientation. Then det φ′(z) > 0 for all z in U . Now for each z in U there is an angle θ such that cos θ — sin θ sin θ cos θ

k(z)−1 φ′(z) = Hence, we have

∂u ∂x

=

∂v

and

∂y

∂u

= —

∂y

.

∂v ∂x

.

Thus φ satisfies the Cauchy-Riemann differential equations.

Let a be a point of U . As φ is differentiable as a function of x and y, we have φ(a + z) — φ(a) = φ′(a)(z) + |z|E(a, z) with E(a, z) → 0 as z → 0. Hence, we have φ(a + z) — φ(a) φ′(a)(z) |z| = + E(a, z). z z z Observe that ∂u ∂x ∂y ∂x

φ′(a)(z) =

∂y — ∂x

!

∂u ∂x

x

!

y

∂u x — ∂y y ∂x ∂x ∂y x + ∂u y ∂x ∂x

=

∂u ∂v +i (x + iy) ∂x ∂x ∂u ∂v +i z. ∂x ∂x

= = Hence, we have

φ(a + z) — φ(a) ∂u ∂v = +i . z→0 z ∂x ∂x Thus φ is analytic in U . Now, we have lim

det φ′(a) =

∂u ∂x

2

+

∂v ∂x

2

> 0,

and so ∂u + i ∂y∂x/= 0. Thus φ′(a) /= 0 for each a in U . ∂x Now suppose φ reverses orientation. Then det φ′(z) < 0 for all z in U . Let ψ(z) = z be complex conjugation. Then we have ψ′(z) =

1

0

0 —1

73

,

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

and so ψ is conformal. Now φ = ψφ, and so φ′(z) = ψ′(φ(z))φ′(z). Therefore φ is conformal and det φ′(z) = — det φ′(z) > 0. Hence φ is analytic in U and φ′(z) =/ 0 by the first case.

Conversely, suppose φ is analytic in U and φ′(z) = 0 for all z in U . Then φ satisfies the Cauchy-Riemann differential equations ∂u ∂v ∂u ∂v = and = — . ∂y ∂x ∂x ∂y Now we have φ(a + z) — φ(a) = φ′(a)(z) + |z|E(a, z) with E(a, z) → 0 as z → 0. Observe that φ′(a)(z) = = = =

∂u ∂v +i z ∂x ∂x ∂u ∂v +i (x + iy) ∂x ∂x ∂u x — ∂y y ∂x ∂x ∂y x + ∂uy ∂x ∂x ! ∂y ! ∂u x — ∂x ∂x ∂y ∂x

∂u ∂x

y

=

∂u ∂x

∂u ∂y

∂y ∂x

∂y ∂y

!

x y

! .

Therefore φ is differentiable as a function of x and y. Moreover, we have 2

∂u

det φ′(a) =

+

∂x

∂v ∂x

2

> 0,

Hence, the matrix ′

−1/2

(det φ (a))

∂u ∂x

— ∂y ∂x

∂y ∂x

∂u ∂x

!

is orthogonal; moreover, the partial derivatives of φ are continuous, since φ is analytic. Thus φ is conformal.

Now suppose φ is analytic and φ′(z) = 0 for all z in U . Then φ is conformal by the previous case. Hence φ = ψφ is conformal.

4.2

Stereographic Projection

Exercise 4.2.1 Derive Formula 4.2.1.

Solution: Observe that π(x) = x +

|x|2 — 1 |x|2 + 1

74

(en+1 — x)

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

= = =

|x|2 — 1 en+1 |x|2 + 1 2 |x|2 — 1 x+ en+1 2 |x|2 + 1 |x| + 1 2x1 2xn |x|2 — 1 , . . . , , .

1 + |x|2 1 + |x|2 |x|2 + 1

x 1—

|x|2 — 1 |x|2 + 1

+

Exercise 4.2.2 Let U be a subset of Eˆ n containing ∞ . Show that U is open in Eˆ n if and only if U is of the form Eˆ n — K, where K is a compact subset of En. Solution: Let U be a subset of Ê n containing ∞. Suppose that U is open in Ê n . Then π̂ ( U ) is an open subset of Sn containing en+1. Now Sn — π̂ ( U ) is a closed subset of Sn, and so Sn — π̂ ( U ) is compact. Hence π̂ − 1 (S n — π̂ ( U )) is compact, since π̂ : Ê n → Sn is a homeomorphism. Observe that π̂−1 (S n — π̂ (U )) = Ê n — U = En — U. Therefore En — U is compact.

Conversely, suppose that K is a compact subset of En. Then K is a compact subset of Ê n , since Ê n is Hausdorff. Therefore U = Ê n — K is an open subset of Ê n containing ∞.

Exercise 4.2.3 Let η : En → En be a homeomorphism and let ηˆ : Ê n → Ê n be the extension obtained by setting ηˆ(∞) = ∞. Prove that ηˆ is a homeomorphism.

Solution: By definition, ηˆ is continuous on En. To see that ηˆ is continuous at ∞, let V be an open subset of Eˆ n containing∞ . Then K = Eˆ n— V is a compact subset of Eˆ n by Exercise 4.2.2. Hence η−1(K) is a compact subset of En. Therefore U = Eˆ n — η−1(K) is an open subset of Eˆ n containing ∞.

Observe that ηˆ(U ) = Eˆ n — K = V . Thus ηˆ is continuous at ∞. Likewise ηˆ−1 is continuous at ∞. Therefore ηˆ is a homeomorphism.

Exercise 4.2.4 Prove that the Euclidean metric on En does not extend to a metric dˆ on Ê n so that the metric space (Ê n , dˆ) is compact or connected.

Solution: Suppose dˆ is a metric on Ê n that extends the Euclidean metric dE on En. Then dˆ is unbounded, since dE is unbounded. Therefore (Ê n , dˆ) is not compact.

We claim that Bdˆ(∞, r) = {∞} for some r > 0. On the contrary, suppose there is a point xi in Bdˆ(∞, 1/i) ∩ En for each i = 1, 2, Then we have dˆ(xi, xj) ≤ dˆ(xi, ∞) + dˆ(∞, xj) ≤ 2/i for each ≥ j i. Hence| xi—xj | 2/i ≤ for each j ≥i. Therefore {xi }is a Cauchy sequence in En, and so converges to a point of En which is a contradiction.

Therefore Bdˆ(∞, r) = {∞} for some r > 0, and so ∞ is an isolated point of (Ê n , dˆ). Therefore (Ê n , dˆ) is not connected.

75

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 4.2.5 Let P (a, t) be a hyperplane of En. Show that the extended plane Pˆ(a, t) is homeomorphic to Sn−1.

Solution: By Corollary 3 of §1.3, there is an isometry φ : En → En that maps P (a, t) onto P (en, 0). Then φ extends to a homeomorphism φˆ : Ê n → Ê n

by Exercise 4.2.3. Moreover φˆ maps Pˆ(a, t) onto Pˆ(en, 0). Now stereographic projection π̂ : Ê n→ Sn−1 maps En−1 = Pˆ(en, 0) homeomorphically onto Sn−1.

Hence πˆ φˆ maps Pˆ(a, t) homeomorphically onto Sn−1.

4.3

Möbius Transformations

Exercise 4.3.1 Show that a Möbius transformation of Ê n either preserves or reverses orientation depending on whether it is the composition of an even or odd number of reflections. Let M 0 (Ê n ) be the set of all orientation-preserving Möbius transformations of Ê n . Conclude that M 0 (Ê n ) is a subgroup of M(Ê n ) of index two.

Solution: By Theorem 4.1.5, every reflection reverses orientation. Therefore, a Möbius transformation φ of Ê n either preserves or reverses orientation depending on whether φ is the composition of an even or odd number of reflections.

Define h : M(Ê n ) →S0 by h(φ) = 1 if and only if φ preserves orientation. Then h is an epimorphism with ker(h) = M 0 (Ê n ). Hence M 0 (Ê n ) has index two in M(Ê n ).

Exercise 4.3.2 A linear fractional transformation of the Riemann sphere Ĉ is a continuous map φ : Ĉ → Ĉ of the form φ(z) = az+b , where a, b, c, d are in C cz+d and ad — bc /= 0. Show that every linear fractional transformation of Ĉ is an orientation-preserving Möbius transformation of Ĉ .

Solution: The map ξ(z) = az + b with a = 0 is the composition of the rotation θ(z) = (a/ |a |)z followed by the magnification µ(z) = |a |z followed by the translation τ (z) = z + b. Therefore ξ(z) is a Euclidean similarity and so ξ is a Möbius transformation by Theorem 4.3.2. Moreover ξ is orientationpreserving, since θ, µ, and τ are orientation-preserving. Next, observe that η(z) = 1/z = z/ z| 2| is the composition of the inversion σ(z) = z/ |z |2 followed by the reflection ρ(z) = z. Therefore η is an orientation-preserving Möbius transformation.

If c = 0, then φ(z) = (a/d)z + (b/d) is an orientation-preserving Möbius az+b transformation by the first case. Now suppose c /= 0. Then φ(z) = cz+d is the composite of χ(z) = cz + d followed by η(z) = 1/z followed by ζ(z) = (b — (ad/c))z + (a/c), since az + b (b — (ad/c)) (a/c)(cz + d) = + . cz + d cz + d cz + d Thus φ is an orientation-preserving Möbius transformation.

76

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 4.3.3 Let LF(Ĉ) be the set of all linear fractional transformations of Ĉ . Show that LF(Ĉ) is a group under composition.

Solution: Observe that 1z +0 ι(z) = z =

0z +1

and 1 — 0 /= 0.

Hence, the identity transformation is in LF(Ĉ).

Suppose φ(z) = az+b and ψ(z) = ez+f are in LF(Ĉ ). Then we have cz+d

gz+h

e

az+b cz+d

+f

g

az+b cz+d

+h

ψ(φ(z)) = = =

e(az + b) + f (cz + d) g(az + b) + h(cz + d) (ea + fc)z + (eb + fd) (ga + hc)z + (gb + hd)

.

Moreover (ea + fc)(gb + hd) — (eb + fd)(ga + hc) = egab + fgbc + ehad + fhcd — egab — fgad — ehbc — fhcd = fg(bc — ad) + eh(ad — bc) = (eh — fg)(bc — ad) /= 0.

Thus ψφ is in LF(Ĉ ). Now let e = d, f = —b, g = —c, h = a. Then we have ψφ(z) =

(ad — bc)z + (bd — bd) = z. (ac — ac)z + (ad — bc)

Therefore φ has an inverse and φ−1 = ψ. Thus LF(Ĉ) is a group.

Exercise 4.3.4 Let GL(2, C) be the group of all invertible complex 2× 2 matrices, and let PGL(2, C) be the quotient group of GL(2, C) by the normal subgroup {kI : k ∈ C∗}. Show that the map Ξ : GL(2, C) → LF(Ĉ), defined by a b (z) = az + b , Ξ c d cz + d induces an isomorphism from PGL(2, C) to LF(Ĉ).

Solution: Observe that Ξ

e f g h

a b c d

(z) = Ξ =

ea + fc eb + fd ga + hc gb + hd (ea + fc)z + (eb + fd) (ga + hc)z + (gb + hd)

= Ξ

77

e f g h

Ξ

a c

b d

(z)

(z).

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Hence Ξ is a homomorphism. Moreover Ξ is obviously onto.

Suppose we have Ξ

a c

b d

(z) = z.

Then az+b = z. Hence c = 0 = b and a/d = 1. Therefore cz+d a b c d

=a

1 0 0 1

with a /= 0.

Thus ker(Ξ) = {kI : k ∈ C∗}. Hence Ξ induces an isomorphism from PGL(2, C) to LF( Ĉ).

Exercise 4.3.5 Let ρ(z) = z be complex conjugation. Show that M(Ĉ) = LF(Ĉ) ∪ LF(Ĉ)ρ.

Deduce that LF(Ĉ) = M0 (Ĉ).

Solution: By Exercise 4.3.2, we have LF(Ĉ) cM(Ĉ ). Now ρ is a reflection and so ρ is a Möbius transformation. Therefore⟨ LF(Ĉ), ⟩ρc M(Ĉ ).

Suppose σ is a reflection in a line L. Then there is a Euclidean isometry φ of C such that φ(L) = R. By composing φ with ρ, if necessary, we may assume that φ is orientation-preserving. Then φ(z) = az + b for some a and b in C such that |a | = 1. Hence φ is in LF(Ĉ ). Now σ = φ−1ρφ. Therefore σ is in LF(Ĉ ⟨ ), ρ⟩ .

Suppose σ is an inversion in a circle S(a, r). Then σ is the composition of the translation τ (z) = z — a followed by the inversion z '→ 1/z = z/ z| 2|, followed by the reflection ρ(z) = z, followed by the magnification µ(z) = r2z, followed by the translation τ −1(z) = z + a. Therefore σ is in LF(Ĉ), ρ ⟩. Hence ⟨LF(Ĉ), ρ ⟩ ⟨ ⟩ = M(Ĉ ). contains all the reflections and inversions of Ĉ . Therefore⟨ LF(Ĉ), ρ az+b Now if φ(z) = cz+d is in LF(Ĉ ), then ρφρ(z) = ρ

az + b cz + d

az + b = cz + d.

Hence ρLF(Ĉ)ρ = LF(Ĉ). Therefore LF(Ĉ) is a normal subgroup of ⟨LF(Ĉ), ρ⟩.

The index of LF(Ĉ ) in ⟨LF(Ĉ), ρ⟩ is 2, since ρ has order 2. Therefore M(Ĉ) = ⟨LF(Ĉ), ρ⟩ = LF(Ĉ) ∪ LF(Ĉ)ρ.

All the elements of LF(Ĉ) are orientation-preserving by Exercise 4.3.2, and so all the elements of LF(Ĉ)ρ are orientation-reversing. Therefore M0 = LF(Ĉ).

Exercise 4.3.6 Let φ(z) = az+b be a linear fractional transformation of Ĉ with cz+d φ(∞) /= ∞. Show that the isometric circle of φ is the set 1} z ∈ C : |cz + d| = |ad — bc| 2 .

78

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Observe that φ−1(∞) = —d/c. Let σ be the inversion in the circle S(—d/c, 1). Then we have d z + d/c σ(z) = — + . c |z + d/c|2 Observe that az+ad/c

ad

φσ(z) =

= = = =

— c + |z+d/c|2 + b cz+d —d + |z+d/c| 2 + d bc−ad + az+ad/c c |z+d/c|2 cz+d |z+d/c|2 (bc−ad) 2 c

|z + d/c| + acz+ad c

cz + d (bc — ad) |z + d/c|2 a + c cz + d c (bc — ad) (cz + d) a + . c |c|2 c

Therefore k = |bc — ad|/|c|2. Thus, the isometric circle of φ is √ 1} S(—d/c, k) = z ∈ C : |cz + d| = |ad — bc| 2 .

Exercise 4.3.7 Let φ be a Möbius transformation of Ê n with φ(∞) /= ∞, and let Σφ be the isometric sphere of φ. Prove that φ(Σφ) = Σφ−1 .

Solution: By Theorem 4.3.3, there is a unique reflection σ in a Euclidean sphere Σ and a unique Euclidean isometry ψ such that φ = ψσ; moreover Σ = Σφ. Observe that φ−1 = σψ−1 = ψ−1ψσψ−1. Now ψσψ−1 has order 2 and fixes every element of ψ(Σ), and so ψσψ−1 is the reflection in the sphere ψ(Σ) by Theorem 4.3.6. Therefore Σφ−1 = ψ(Σ) by Theorem 4.3.3. Now ψ(Σ) = ψσ(Σ) = φ(Σ). Therefore Σφ−1 = φ(Σφ).

Exercise 4.3.8 Let φ be a Möbius transformation of Ê n with φ( ∞ )/=∞, and let φ′(x) be the matrix of partial derivatives of φ. Prove that the isometric sphere of φ is the set {x ∈ En : φ′(x) is orthogonal}.

Solution: Write φ = ψσ, with σ the reflection in the isometric sphere S(a, r) of φ, and ψ a Euclidean isometry. Then φ′ = ψ′(σ)σ′. Now ψ′(σ(x)) is an orthogonal matrix for all x, and so we may assume that φ = σ.

Let τ (x) = x + a and let σr be the reflection in the sphere S(0, r). Then σ = τσrτ −1. Hence σ′(x) = σr′ (x — a). From the proof of Theorem 4.1.5, we have that ′

σr(x — a) =

r2 2 (I — 2A) with A = (xixj/|x| ); |x — a|2 79

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

moreover I—2A is orthogonal. Hence σ′(x) is orthogonal if and only if| x—a| = r, that is, if and only if x is in S(a, r).

4.4

Poincaré Extension

Exercise 4.4.1 Identify the upper half-plane U 2 with the set of complex numbers {z ∈ C : Im z > 0}.

Show that a linear fractional transformation φ of Ĉ leaves U 2 invariant if and only if there exists real numbers a, b, c, d, with ad — bc > 0, such that φ(z) =

az + b cz + d

.

Solution: Let φ(z) = az+b with a, b, c, d in C and ad — bc /= 0. Suppose cz+d 2 2 φ(U ) = U . As φ : Ĉ → Ĉ is a homeomorphism, we deduce that φ(R̂ ) = R̂ .

Assume first that c = 0. Then φ(z) = (a/d)z + (b/d) with d = 0. Now φ(0) = b/d is in R and φ(1) = (a/d) + (b/d) is in R. Hence a/d is in R. Thus φ(z) =

(a/d)z + (b/d) 0z+1

with a/d, b/d, 0, 1 in R. As φ(i) = (a/d)i+(b/d) is in U 2, we must have a/d > 0.

Hence (a/d) 1— (b/d) 0 > 0.

Now assume c /= 0. By dividing a, b, c, d by c, we may assume that c = 1.

Then we have az + b . φ(z) = z+d a+b Now φ(∞) = a is in R, φ(0) = b/d is in R̂ , and φ(1) = 1+d is in R̂ .

If d = 0, then a + b is in R, and so b is in R. If d = —1, then b is in a+b R. Now suppose d /= 0, —1. Then k = b/d and l = 1+d are in R. Moreover k = φ(0) /= φ(1) = l. Now b = kd and a + b = l + dl. Hence a + kd = l + dl.

Therefore d(k — l) = l — a. Hence d = A−a , and so d is in R. Therefore b is in

k —A

R. Thus, for all d, we have a, b, 1, d in R. Moreover φ(i) =

ai + b a + bd + (ad — b)i = , i+d 1 + d2

and so ad — b 1 > 0.

Conversely, suppose a, b, c, d are in R with ad — bc > 0. Then φ(U 2) = U 2

by Exercise 1.2.4.

Exercise 4.4.2 Let φ be in LF(Ĉ). Show that there are complex numbers a, b, c, d such that φ(z) = az+b cz+d and ad — bc = 1.

80

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Suppose φ(z) = az+b with a, b, c, d in C with ad — bc /= 0. Let cz+d 1/2 D = (ad — bc) . Then we have a

b

φ(z) = D z + D c d z+D D

with

a b c d ad — bc = 1.

— = DD DD D2

Exercise 4.4.3 Let SL(2, C) be the group of all complex 2×2 matrices of determinant one, and let PSL(2, C) be the quotient of SL(2, C) by the normal subgroup {± I .}Show that the inclusion of SL(2, C) into GL(2, C) induces an isomorphism from PSL(2, C) to PGL(2, C). Deduce that PSL(2, C) and LF(Ĉ) are isomorphic groups.

Solution: Let ι : SL(2, C) → GL(2, C) be the inclusion, and let π : GL(2, C)→ PGL(2, C) be the natural projection. Then πι is onto, since if A is in GL(2, C) and D = (det A)1/2, then (1/D)A is in SL(2, C) and πι((1/D)A) = π(A).

Suppose A is in ker(πι). Then A = kI for some k in C. As det A = 1, we have that k2 = 1, and so k = ± 1. Thus πι induces an isomorphism from PGL(2, C) onto PGL(2, C).

Exercise 4.4.4 Identify the open unit disk B2 with the open unit disk in C, {z ∈ C : |z| < 1}.

Show that the standard transformation η : U 2 → B2 is given by η(z) =

iz + 1 z+i

.

Solution: Observe that η(z)

= =

σρ(z) σ(z)

2(z — i) |z — i|2 2 = i+ z+i i(z + i) 2 = + z+i z+i = i+

=

iz + 1 z+i

.

Exercise 4.4.5 Let φ(z) = az+b be in LF(Ĉ ) normalized so that ad — bc = 1. cz+d 2 Show that φ leaves B invariant if and only if c = b and d = a.

81

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Suppose c = b and d = a. Then φ(z) = az+b with |a|2 — |b|2 = 1. bz+a Suppose |z| < 1. Then we have |bz + a| 2 — |az + b|2

=

|bz| 2 + 2Re(bza) + |a| 2— |az| 2— 2Re(azb) — |b|2

= (|a|2 — |b|2)(1 — |z|2) = 1 — |z|2 > 0.

Hence | az + b| < |bz + a |. Therefore |φ(z) | < 1. Thus φ leaves B2 invariant.

Conversely, suppose φ leaves B2 invariant. The φ leaves S1 invariant. Therefore| φ(1)| = 1 and| φ( — 1) | = 1. Hence | a+b | 2 |= c+d | 2 and |— a+b | 2 =|—c+d | 2.

Therefore, we have 2

2

2

2

|a| + 2Re(ab) + |b| = |c| + 2Re(cd) + |d| and

2

2

|a|2 — 2Re(ab) + |b| = |c|2 — 2Re(cd) + |d| .

Hence Re(ab) = Re(cd) and |a|2 + |b|2 = |c|2 + |d|2.

Next, we have |φ(i)| = 1. Hence |ai + b|2 = |ci + d|2, and so 2

2

2

2

|a| — 2Re(aib) + |b| = |c| — 2Re(cid) + |d| .

Hence Im(ab) = Im(cd). Therefore ab = cd.

Now |φ(0)| < 1 implies |b| < |d |, and so d /= 0. Suppose b /= 0 and set w = 2 a/d = c/b. Then ad —bc = 1 implies w| d| 2—w |b| 2 = 1, and so w(| d | — |b| 2) = 1.

Therefore w > 0.

Next |a|2 + |b|2 = |c|2 + |d|2 implies w2|d|2 + |b|2 = w2|b|2 + |d|2. Hence 2 (w — 1)(|d|2 — |b|2) = 0. Therefore w = 1. Thus c = b and d = a as desired.

If b = 0, then the equations ab = cd and ad — bc = 1 imply c = 0; moreover |a|2 = |d|2 implies d = a.

Exercise 4.4.6 Identify upper half-space U 3 with the set of quaternions {z + tj : z ∈ C and t > 0}.

Let φ(z) = az+b be a linear fractional transformation of Ĉ normalized so that cz+d ad — bc = 1. Show that the Poincar´e extension of φ is given by φ˜(w) = (aw + b)(cw + d)−1, where w = z + tj.

Solution: First assume that c = 0. As ad = 1, we have a = d−1. Hence φ(z) = a2z + ab is a Euclidean similarity a2 z |a|2

2

φ(z) = |a|

+ ab.

The Poincar´e extension of φ is given by 2 φ˜(z + tj) = |a|

a2 |a|2 82

z + tj

+ ab.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Observe that φ˜(w) = a2z + |a|2tj + ab a2z + ataj + ab aza + atja + ba

= =

= (a(z + tj) + b)a = (aw + b)d−1.

Now assume that c = 0. Then φ = ψσ where σ is the reflection in the isometric circle| cz +d| = 1 centered at—d/c of radius 1/| c| and ψ is a Euclidean isometry of C. Then we have d 1 (z + d/c) σ(z) = — + . c |c|2 |z + d/c|2 Observe that ψ(z) = φσ(z) =

−ad + 1 az+ad/c + b c |c|2 |z+d/c|2 —d + |c|2cz+d |z+d/c|2 + d

=

bc−ad + az+ad/c c |cz+d|2 cz+d |cz+d|2 2

|cz+d| + acz+ad c = — c cz + d (cz + d) a c a—d = — + c c = — cz + c .

The Poincar´e extensions of σ and ψ are given by d 1 (w + d/c) σ̃ (w ) = — + c |c|2 |w + d/c|2

and

c a—d ψ˜(w) = — z + tj + . c c

Observe that φ˜(w) =

ψ˜ (σ̃ (w )) = ψ˜ — d + 1 (w + d/c) c |c|2 |w + d/c|2 cd c (z + d/c) 1 tj a—d = — + + 2 2 2 2 c c c|c| |w + d/c| |c| |w + d/c| c a (cz + d) tj = — + c c|cw + d|2 |cw + d|2 = c−1(a|cw + d|2 — cz — d + ctj)/|cw + d|2 = c−1(a(cw + d)(wc + d) — zc — d + tjc)/|cw + d|2 83

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

= c−1((acw + ad)(wc + d) — wc — d)/|cw + d|2 = c−1(acwwc + adwc + acwd + add — wc — d)/|cw + d|2 = c−1(acwwc + (ad — 1)wc + acwd + (ad — 1)d)/|cw + d|2 = c−1(acwwc + bcwc + acwd + bcd)/|cw + d|2 = (awwc + bwc + awd + bd)/|cw + d|2 = (aw + b)(wc + d)/|cw + d|2 = (aw + b)(cw + d)−1.

Exercise 4.4.7 Prove that Poincar´e extension induces a monomorphism Υ : M(Bn−1) → M(Bn) mapping M(Bn−1) onto the subgroup M̃(Bn−1) of elements of M(Bn) that leave Bn−1 and each component of Bn — Bn−1 invariant.

Solution: Let φ be in M(Bn−1). Then φ is a Möbius transformation of Ê n − 1 such that φ(Bn−1) = Bn−1. Assume first that φ(0) = 0. Then φ is orthogonal

by Theorem 4.4.8. Hence φ˜ is orthogonal, and so φ̃(B n ) = Bn and φ˜ leaves each component of Bn— Bn−1 invariant.

Now assume φ(0) /= 0. Then φ is not orthogonal by Theorem 4.4.8. Hence,

by Theorem 4.4.7, we have φ = ψσ where ψ is orthogonal and σ is the reflection in the isometric sphere Σ of φ and Σ is orthogonal to Sn−1. Now φ˜ = ψ˜ σ˜ and σ̃ is the reflection in the sphere Σ̃ with equator Σ. Hence Σ̃ is orthogonal to Sn. Now ψ˜ is orthogonal. Hence φ̃(B n ) = Bn and φ˜ leaves each component of Bn — Bn−1 invariant. Thus, Poincar´e extension induces a monomorphism Υ : M(Bn−1) → M(Bn).

Let ψ be in M(Bn) such that ψ leaves each component of B—n Bn−1 invariant. Then ψ(Bn−1) = Bn−1. Now ψ(Ê n−1 ) is a sphere of Ê n by Theorem 4.3.4. Hence ψ(Ê n−1 ) = Ê n−1 , since Ê n−1 is the unique sphere of Ê n containing Bn−1. Therefore ψ is the Poincar´e extension of the restriction of ψ to Ê n − 1

by Theorem 4.4.1. Hence Υ maps M(Bn−1) onto the subgroup of M(Bn) of elen ments φ such that φ(Bn−1) = Bn−1 and φ leaves each component of B— Bn−1 invariant.

Exercise 4.4.8 Let S(a, r) be a sphere of En that is orthogonal to Sn−1. Prove that the intersection S(a, r) ∩ Sn−1 is the (n — 2)-sphere S(a/|a|2, r/|a|) of the hyperplane P (a/|a|, 1/|a|).

Solution: Observe that the following are equivalent: 1. The point x is in S(a, r) ∩ Sn−1.

2. |x — a| = r and |x| = 1.

3. |x|2 + 2x · a + |a|2 = r2 and |x| = 1.

4. 1 + 2x · a + r2 + 1 = r2 and |x| = 1.

84

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

5. x · a = 1 and |x| = 1.

6. x · a/|a| = 1/|a| and |x| = 1.

7. The point x is in P (a/|a|, 1/|a|) ∩ Sn−1.

Therefore, we have S(a, r) ∩ Sn−1 = P (a/|a|, 1/|a|) ∩ Sn−1.

Now ta · a = 1 if and only if t = 1/|a|2, and so the point a/|a|2 lies on the hyperplane P (a/|a|, 1/|a|). Observe that the following are equivalent: 1. The point x is in Sn−1 ∩ P (a/|a|, 1/|a|).

2. |x| = 1 and x · a = 1.

3. |x|2 — 2x · a/|a|2 + 1/|a|2 = 1 — 2x · a/|a|2 + 1/|a|2 and x · a = 1.

4. |x — a/|a|2|2 = 1 — 2/|a|2 + 1/|a|2 and x · a = 1.

5. |x — a/|a|2|2 = 1 — 1/|a|2 and x · a = 1.

6. |x — a/|a|2|2 = (|a|2 — 1)/|a|2 and x · a = 1.

7. |x — a/|a|2|2 = r2/|a|2 and x · a = 1.

8. |x — a/|a|2| = r/|a| and x · a = 1.

9. The point x is in S(a/|a|2, r/|a|) ∩ P (a/|a|, 1/|a|).

Therefore, we have P (a/|a|, 1/|a|) ∩ Sn−1 = P (a/|a|, 1/|a|) ∩ S(a/|a|2, r/|a|).

Thus S(a, r) ∩ Sn−1 is the (n — 2)-sphere S(a/|a|2, r/|a|) of the hyperplane P (a/|a|, 1/|a|) of En.

4.5

The Conformal Ball Model

Exercise 4.5.1 Show that if x is in Bn, then d (0, x) = log B

1 + |x| 1 — |x|

.

Solution: By Theorem 4.5.1, we have 2|x|2 cosh dB(0, x) = 1 +

1 — |x|

85

2 =

1 + |x|2 1 — |x|2

.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

√ Now cosh−1 s = log s + s2 — 1 for s ≥ 1. Hence, we have s !

1 + |x|2 (1 + |x|2)2 dB(0, x) = log + —1 1 — |x|2 (1 — |x|2)2 ! s 2 2 2 2 1 + |x|2 (1 + |x| ) — (1 — |x| ) 2 2 = log + 1 — |x|2 (1 — |x| ) ! s 1 + |x|2 4|x|2 + 2 2 = log 1 — |x|2 (1 — |x| ) 1 + |x|2 =

log

=

log

2|x| + 1 — |x|2 (1 — |x|2 (1 + |x|)2 = log 1 — |x|2

1 + |x|

.

1 — |x|

Exercise 4.5.2 Let b be a nonzero point of Bn. Show that the hyperbolic translation τb of Bn acts as a hyperbolic translation along the hyperbolic line passing through 0 and b.

Solution:

By Formula 4.5.5, we have τb(x) =

(1 — |b|2)x + (|x|2 + 2x · b + 1)b |b|2|x|2 + 2x · b + 1

.

Let x = tb with —1/|b| < t < 1/|b|. Then we have (1 — |b|2)tb + (t2|b|2 + 2t|b|2 + 1)b τb(tb) =

t2|b|4 + 2t|b|2 + 1 t |b|2 + t|b|2 + t + 1 b 2

=

(t|b|2 + 1)2 t |b|2(t + 1) + (t + 1) 2

= =

b

(t|b|2 + 1)2 (t2 |b| 2 + 1)(t + 1)b (t|b|2 + 1)2

=

(t + 1)b t|b|2 + 1

.

Therefore τb maps the line (—b/|b|, b/|b|) isometrically onto itself and τb(—b) = 0 and τb(0) = b. Therefore τb acts as a translation along the line (—b/|b|, b/|b|).

Exercise 4.5.3 Let b be a point of Bn and let A be in O(n). Show that 1. τb−1 = τ−b, 2. AτbA−1 = τAb.

86

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Observe that τ−bτb

= σ−b∗ ρ−b∗ σb∗ ρb∗ = σ−b∗ ρbσb∗ ρb−1 = σ−b∗ σ−b∗ = id.

and AτbA−1

Aσb∗ ρb∗ A−1 Aσb∗ A−1Aρb∗ A−1

= =

= σAb∗ ρAb∗ = σ(Ab)∗ ρ(Ab)∗ =

τAb.

Exercise 4.5.4 Show that SB(0, r) = S(0, tanh(r/2)).

Solution: Let SB(0, r) = S(0, s). By Exercise 4.5.1, we have 1+s r = log .

1—s Solving for s, we have that s=

er — 1 er + 1

=

er/2 — e−r/2 er/2 + er/2

= tanh(r/2).

Exercise 4.5.5 Prove that the hyperbolic and Euclidean centers of a sphere of Bn coincide if and only if the sphere is centered at the origin.

Solution: Let b ∈ Bn with b /= 0. Now we have SB (b, r) = τ b(S B(0, r) = τ (S(0, s)) = S b

τb(sb/|b|) + τb(—sb/|b|) ′ ,s .

2

By the solution of Exercise 4.5.2, we have τ b(sb/|b|) + τ (—sb/|b|) b 2

s + 1 b |b|

=

s|b| + 1 s +1 |b|

= s

= =

|b|

+

−s + 1 |b|

b

—s|b| + 1

! /2

−s +1 |b| 2 1 — s2|b|2

1 — s|b| +

1 + s|b|

b

+ 1 — s2 — s|b| — s + 1 — s2 + s|b| b |b|

(2 — 2s2)b 2 1 — s2|b|2

2 1 — s2|b|2 (1 — s2)b = .

1 — s2|b|2

As (1 — s2)/(1 — s2 |b|2) < 1, the Euclidean center of SB(b, r) does not coincide with its Euclidean center.

87

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 4.5.6 Prove that the metric topology on Bn determined by dB is the same as the Euclidean topology on Bn. Solution: Every open ball BB(b, s) is a Euclidean open ball B(a, r), and every Euclidean open ball B(a, r) contained in Bn is an open ball BB(b, s) by Theorem 4.5.4.

Exercise 4.5.7 Prove that all the horospheres of Bn are congruent.

Solution: Let Σ be the horosphere based at a point b in Sn−1 such that Σ passes through 0. Then the translation τsb, with —1 < s < 1, maps Σ to the horosphere based at b passing through sb. Thus, all the horospheres based at b are congruent.

If A is an orthogonal transformation of Rn, then A(Σ) is a horosphere based at Ab in Sn−1 passing through 0. Now O(n) acts transitively on Sn−1 and so all horospheres are congruent.

Exercise 4.5.8 Let b be a point of Bn not on a hyperbolic m-plane P of Bn. Prove that there is a unique point a of P nearest to b and that the hyperbolic line passing through a and b is the unique hyperbolic line of Bn passing through b orthogonal to P . Hint: Move b to the origin.

Solution: We may assume that b = 0. Then P is the intersection with Bn of an m-sphere S that is orthogonal to Sn−1. The hyperbolic distance from 0 to x in Bn is an increasing function of |x | by Exercise 4.5.1, and so we may work with the Euclidean metric.

Let V be the (m + 1)-dimensional plane of En that contains S. Then V is orthogonal to Sn−1, and so 0 is in V . Therefore V is a vector subspace of Rn. We may assume that V = Rm+1.

Let a and r be center and radius of S. Then r2 = |a |2 —1 by Theorem 4.4.2. The unique nearest point of S to 0 is (| a| —r)a/ a| |. Moreover, the line passing through 0 and (| a| —r)a/ a| |is the unique line passing through 0 that is orthogonal to P , since a line passing through 0 is orthogonal to P if and only if its Euclidean extension passes through a.

Exercise 4.5.9 Let b be a point of Bn not on a horosphere Σ of Bn. Prove that there is a unique point a of Σ nearest to b and the hyperbolic line passing through a and b is the unique hyperbolic line of Bn passing through b orthogonal to Σ.

Solution: We may assume that b = 0. Let Σ be a horosphere based at a in Sn−1 with Σ passing through the point sa with s = 0. Then the nearest point of Σ to 0 is sa and the line passing through 0 and sa is the unique line passing through 0 that is orthogonal to Σ, since a line passing through 0 is orthogonal to Σ if and only if its Euclidean extension passes through a.

Exercise 4.5.10 Show that every isometry of B2 is of the form z '→

az + b bz + a

or z '→

az + b bz + a 88

where |a|2 — |b|2 = 1.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution:

By Theorem 4.5.2, the isometries of B2 are the restrictions of elements of M(B2). By Exercise 4.3.5, we have M ( Ĉ ) = LF(Ĉ) ∪ LF(Ĉ)ρ where ρ(z) = z. Now let φ(z) = az+b be in LF(Ĉ ) normalized so that ad — bc = 1. cz+d 2 Then φ leaves B invariant if and only if c = b and d = a by Exercise 4.4.5.

Hence, every isometry of B2 is of the desired form.

4.6

The Upper Half-Space Model

Exercise 4.6.1 Show that if x = sen and y = ten, then dU (x, y) = | log(s/t)|.

Solution: Suppose s > t. By Theorem 4.6.1, we have |sen — ten|2 cosh dU (sen, ten) = 1 +

2st (s — t)2 = 1+ 2st

Hence, we have dU (sen, ten) = log =

log

s2 + t2 2st s2 + t2 2st

+ r +

2

=

log

s + t2

r

2st 2s2 = log 2st s = log = t

+

s2 + t2

=

2st

!

(s2 + t2)2 4s2t2 (s2 — t2)2 4s2t2

.

1 !

s2 — t2 2st

log

s t

.

If s < t, then we have d (se , te ) = d (te , se ) = log U

n

n

U

n

n

t

= — log

s

s

= log

t

Exercise 4.6.2 Show that if —1 < s < 1 and x is in U n , then 1+s x. η−1τ sen η(x) = 1—s Solution: We have that η−1τsen η = =

η−1σ(sen)∗ ρ(sen)∗ η η−1σ(sen)∗ ηη−1ρ(sen)∗ η

= ρσσ(sen)∗ σρρσρ(sen)∗ σρ = ρσ0ρρσ1ρ = σ0σ1 89

s t

.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

where σ1 is the reflection in S(0, 1) and√σ 0 is the reflection in S(0, r) where r = |σ(b)| and b is the point of S (sen√ )∗, |(sen)∗|2 — 1 qnearest to √ 0.

Now (sen)∗ = sen/s2 = en/s and |(sen)∗|2 — 1 = 1 — 1 = 1 — s2/s. s2 √ Let t = 1 — s2. Then b = esn — st en = 1s−t en and σ(b) = en +

2(b — en) |b — en|2 2( 1−t — 1)en s

= en + =

en +

=

en +

=

2 | 1−t s — 1| 2en

(1 — t — s)/s 2sen

1—t—s 1 — t — s + 2s en 1—t—s

Hence, we have r=

=

1—t+s en .

1—t—s

1—t+s t—1—s = .

1—t—s t—1+s

Now we have σ0σ1(x) = σ0 = = = = = =

x |x|2

t—1—s t—1+s

2

, x

1

|x|2

|x|2

t—1—s 2 x t—1+s t2 — 2t(1 + s) + (1 + s)2

x t2 + 2t(s — 1) + (s — 1)2 1 — s2 — 2t(s + 1) + (s + 1)2

x 1 — s2 + 2t(s — 1) + (s — 1)2 2 + 2s — 2t(s + 1) x 2 — 2s + 2t(s — 1) (1 + s)(1 — t) 1+s x = x.

(1 — s)(1 — t) 1—s

Exercise 4.6.3 Let x be in U n . Show that the nearest point to x on the positive nth axis is |x|en and we have cosh dU (x, |x|en) = |x|/xn.

90

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: By Theorem 4.6.1, we have |x — ten|2 cosh du(x, ten) = 1 +

2txn |x|2 — 2txn + t2 = 1+ 2txn

2

=

|x|2 + t2 .

2txn

2

| +t . Then we have Consider f (t) = |x2tx n

2txn(2t) — 2xn(|x|2 + t2)

′

f (t) =

4t2x2n 4t xn — 2xn|x|2 — 2t2xn 4t2x2n 2 2t xn — 2xn|x|2 t2 — |x|2 = .

4t2 x2n 2t2xn 2

= =

Hence f ′(t) = 0 if and only if t = x| . | Thus x |en| is the nearest point on the positive nth axis to x. Moreover cosh dU (x, |x|en) =

|x|2 + |x|2 |x| = . xn 2|x|xn

Exercise 4.6.4 Let ρ be the nearest point retraction of U n onto the positive nth axis defined by ρ(x) = |x|en. Prove that for all x, y in U n , we have dU (ρ(x), ρ(y)) ≤ dU (x, y) with equality if and only if either x = y or x and y lie on the nth axis.

Solution: Observe that cosh dU (ρ(x), ρ(y)) = cosh dU (|x|en, |y|en) =

1+

= 1+ = ≤ = ≤

|x|en — |y|en 2|x||y| |x| — |y|

2

2

2|x||y| |x|2 — 2|x||y| + |y|2 1+ 2|x||y| 2 |x| — 2x · y + |y|2 1+ 2|x||y| |x — y|2 1+ 2|x||y| |x — y|2 1+ = cosh dU (x, y).

2xnyn 91

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Thus dU (ρ(x), ρ(y)) ≤ dU (x, y) with equality if and only if either x = y or x and y lie on the nth axis.

Exercise 4.6.5 Show that every isometry of U 2 is of the form z '→

az + b cz + d

or z '→

a(—z) + b , c(—z) + d

where a, b, c, d are real and ad — bc = 1. Conclude that the group I 0(U 2) of orientation-preserving isometries of U 2 is isomorphic to PSL(2, R).

Solution: By Theorem 4.6.2, the isometries of U 2 are the restrictions of elements of M(U 2). By Exercises 4.3.5 and 4.4.1, every element of M0(U 2) is of the form φ(z) = az+b cz+d with a, b, c, d in R and ad — bc = 1. Let ρ(z) = —z. Then ρ is in M(U 2) and ρ is orientation-reversing by Theorem 4.1.5. Hence, if ψ is in M(U 2) — M0(U 2), then ψ = (ψρ)ρ with ψρ in M0(U 2). Therefore ψ is of the form ψ(z) = a(−z)+b with a, b, c, d in R and ad — bc = 1. c(−z)+d Exercise 4.6.6 Show that SU (a, r) = S(a(r), an sinh r), where a(r) = (a1, . . . , an−1, an cosh r).

Solution: By Theorem 4.6.1, we have cosh dU (a, x) = 1 +

|a — x|2 2anxn

.

Let a = a — anen. Then we have |a|2 — 2a · x + |x|2 2 2 = |a| — 2a · x + |x| .

2anxn 2anxn Observe that the following are equivalent: cosh r = 1 +

1. 2anxn cosh r = |a|2 — 2a · x + |x|2.

2. |a|2 + a2n(cosh2 r — sinh2 r) — 2(a + an cosh r en) · x + |x|2 = 0.

3. |a|2 + a2 cosh2 r — 2(a + an cosh r en) · x + |x|2 = a2 sinh2 r. n

n

4. |a + an cosh ren — x|2 = a2n sinh2 r.

Thus, we have SU (a, r) = S(a + an cosh r en, an sinh r).

Exercise 4.6.7 Prove that the metric topology on U n determined by dU is the same as the Euclidean topology.

92

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: By Exercise 4.6.6, every open ball BU (a, r) is a Euclidean open ball B(a + an cosh r en, an sinh r). Conversely, given an open ball B(b, s) in U n , let √ a = b and an = nb2— s2, and let r = sinh−1(s/an). Then BU (a, r) = B(b, s).

Thus, every Euclidean open ball in U n is a hyperbolic open ball. Hence, the metric topology determined by dU is the same as the Euclidean topology.

Exercise 4.6.8 Prove that all the horospheres of U n are congruent.

Solution: Let Σ be a horosphere of U n based at a point b in En−1. Then φ(x) = x — b is a Möbius transformation of U n and φ(Σ) is a horosphere based at 0. Let σ1 be the reflection in the sphere S(0, 1). Then σ1 is a Möbius transformation of U n and σ1φ(Σ) is a horosphere based at ∞. Hence σ1φ(Σ) = P (en, t) for some t > 0. Let ψ(x) = x/t. Then ψ is a Möbius transformation of U n and ψσ1φ(Σ) = P (en, 1). Thus, every horosphere of U n is congruent to Σ1 = P (en, 1).

Exercise 4.6.9 Prove that any Möbius transformation φ of U n that leaves the horosphere Σ1 = {x ∈ U n : xn = 1} invariant is a Euclidean isometry of En. Solution: Let φ be a Möbius transformation of U n such that φ(Σ1) = Σ1.

Then φ(∞) = .∞ Hence φ is a Euclidean similarity of En by Theorem 4.4.4.

Therefore φ(x) = a+kAx for some a in En, some constant k > 0, and orthogonal transformation A of En. Now a is in En−1 and Aen = en by Theorem 4.4.1.

Hence, we have φ(en + En−1) = a + kAen + kA(En−1 = a + ken + En−1 = en + En−1.

Therefore a+ken —en is in En−1, and so k = 1. Thus φ is a Euclidean isometry.

Exercise 4.6.10 Show by changing coordinates that every Möbius transformation of U n preserves hyperbolic volume.

Solution: Assume first that φ(∞ ) = ∞ . Then φ is a Euclidean similarity

by Theorem 4.4.4. Hence φ(x) = a + kAx with a in En−1 and Aen = en by Theorem 4.4.1. Now φ′(x) = kA, and so det φ′(x) = kn. Let y = φ(x). Then yn = kxn and dy1, · · · dyn (yn )n

kn dx1 · · · dxn =

(kxn )n

dx1 · · · dxn =

(xn )n

.

Thus φ preserves hyperbolic volume by Theorem 4.6.7.

Now assume that φ(∞ ) /= ∞. Then φ = ψσ where σ is the reflection in the isometric sphere Σ of φ and ψ is a Euclidean isometry by Theorem 4.4.4.

Moreover, Σ is orthogonal to En−1 and ψ leaves U n invariant. By conjugating φ by a Euclidean similarity that leaves U n invariant, we may assume that σ = σ1, the reflection in S(0, 1).

93

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

′ (x) = By the proof of Theorem 4.1.5, we have that σ 1

1

(I —2A) where A = (xixj/|x| ). Moreover I — 2A is orthogonal. Hence det σ1′ (x) = 1/|x|2n.

Let y = σ1(x). Then yn = xn/|x|2 and |x|2

2

dy1, · · · dyn 1 dx1 · · · dxn dx1 · · · dxn = = . n (yn) |x|2n (xn/|x|2)n (xn)n Thus σ1 preserves hyperbolic volume by Theorem 4.6.7, and so φ preserves hyperbolic volume.

4.7

Classification of Transformations

Exercise 4.7.1 Prove that every nonidentity element of LF(Ĉ) has just one or two fixed points in Ĉ .

Solution: Let φ(z) = az+bcz+d with ad—bc /= 0. Then the following are equivalent: 1. φ(z) = z.

2. az+b = z. cz+d 3. az + b = cz2 + dz.

4. cz2 + (d — a)z — b = 0.

Thus, if c /= 0, then φ has one or two fixed points by the quadratic formula. If c = 0, then φ has two fixed points z = b/(d — a) and ∞, unless, a = d, in which case φ has one fixed point ∞.

Exercise 4.7.2 Let z1, z2, z3 be distinct points of Ĉ and let w1, w2, w3 be distinct points of Ĉ . Show that there is a unique element φ of LF(Ĉ ) such that φ(zj) = wj for j = 1, 2, 3.

Solution: Assume first that z1, z2, z3 are in C. Then φ(z) =

z — z2 z — z3

z1 — z3 z1 — z2

is an element of LF(Ĉ ) such that φ(z1) = 1, φ(z2) = 0, and φ(z3) = ∞. If z1, z2, or z3 = ∞, then φ(z) given by z — z2 , z — z3

z1 — z3 , z — z3

z — z2 , z1 — z2

respectively, has the same properties.

Let ψ be an element of LF(Ĉ ) such that ψ(w1) = 1, ψ(w2) = 0, and ψ(w3) = ∞. Then ψ−1φ is an element of LF(Ĉ) such that ψ−1φ(zj) = wj for j = 1, 2, 3.

Suppose φ1 and φ2 are elements of LF(Ĉ) such that φi(zj) = wj for i = 1, 2 and j = 1, 2, 3. Then φ2−1φ1(zj) = zj for j = 1, 2, 3. Hence φ2−1φ1 = id by Exercise 4.7.1. Thus φ1 = φ2.

94

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 4.7.3 For each nonzero k in C, define µk in LF(Ĉ) by µk(z) = kz if k /= 1, and µ1(z) = z + 1. Prove that each nonidentity element of LF(Ĉ) is conjugate to µk for some k.

Solution: Let φ be a nonidentity element of LF(Ĉ). Then φ has either one or two fixed points by Exercise 4.7.1. Suppose that φ has two fixed points z1 and z2. By Exercise 4.7.2, there is a ψ in LF(Ĉ) such that ψ(z1) = 0 and ψ(z2) = ∞.

Then ψφψ−1 fixes 0 and ∞. Hence ψφψ−1(z) = kz for some nonzero k in C. Now φ /= id implies ψφψ−1 /= id, and so k /= 1. Thus ψφψ−1 = µk.

Now suppose that φ has only one fixed point z1. By Exercise 4.7.2, there is a ψ in LF(Ĉ) such that ψ(z1) = ∞ . Then ψφψ−1 fixes∞ . Hence ψφψ−1(z) = az + b for some nonzero a, b in C. Now az + b = z has a solution unless a = 1.

Hence ψφψ−1(z) = z + b. Let κ(z) = z/b. Then κψφψ−1κ−1(z) = z + 1. Thus (κψ)φ(κψ)−1 = µ1.

Exercise 4.7.4 Show that µk and µk−1 are conjugate in LF(Ĉ) for each nonzero k in C. Solution: This is clear if k = 1, and so we may assume that k = 1. Let σ(z) = 1/z. Then we have σµkσ−1(z)

=

σµk(z−1)

= =

σ(kz−1) k−1z = µk−1 (z).

Hence µk and µk−1 are conjugate.

Exercise 4.7.5 Let φ be a nonidentity element of LF(Ĉ). Show that 1. φ˜ is an elliptic transformation of U 3 if and only if φ is conjugate to µk with k = ei8 for some angle θ ∈ (0, π], 2. φ˜ is a parabolic transformation of U 3 if and only if φ is conjugate to µ1, 3. φ˜ is a hyperbolic translation of U 3 if and only if φ is conjugate to µk for some k ∈ R with k > 1.

Solution: There exists a nonzero k in C such that φ is conjugate to µk by Exercise 4.7.3. Then φ is conjugate to µk in M 0 (Ĉ ) by Exercise 4.3.5. Hence φ˜ is conjugate to µ̃ k in M0(U 3) by Corollary 1 of §4.4. Now µ̃ k is elliptic (resp. parabolic) if and only if |k| = 1 and k /= 1 (resp. k = 1) by Lemma 1. Suppose |k| = 1 and k /= 1. Then k = ei8, with |θ| ∈ (0, π]. Thus φ˜ is elliptic if and only if φ is conjugate to µk with k = ei8 for some angle θ ∈ (0, π] by Exercise 4.7.4.

For 2r > 0, let σr be the reflection in the sphere S(0, r) defined by σr(x) = 2 2 r x/ x| |. Then µr2 = σrσ1. Hence µ̃ r 2 = σ̃ r σ̃ 1 . Therefore µ̃ r 2 (x) = r x.

Suppose φ˜ is a hyperbolic translation. Then φ˜ is conjugate to µ̃ k in M(U 3) for some k > 1. Therefore φ˜ is conjugate to µ̃ k in M0(U 3), since µ̃ k commutes with the reflection in the plane P (e1, 0). Hence φ is conjugate to µk in M 0 (Ĉ ) 95

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

by Corollary 1 of §4.4. Therefore φ is conjugate to µk in LF(Ĉ) by Exercise 4.3.5.

Conversely, suppose that φ is conjugate to µk in LF(Ĉ) for k > 1. Then φ˜ is conjugate to the magnification µ̃ k in M0(U 3) by Corollary 1 of 4.4. § Hence φ˜ is a hyperbolic translation.

Exercise 4.7.6 Let φ be a nonidentity element of LF(Ĉ) such that φ˜ is an elliptic transformation of U 3. Show that the fixed set of φ˜ in U 3 is a hyperbolic line L. The hyperbolic line L is called the axis of φ˜.

Solution: There is an element ψ of LF(Ĉ ) such that φ = ψµkψ−1 with k = ei8 for some θ ∈ (0, π] by Exercise 4.7.5(1). Hence φ˜ = ψ˜ µ̃ k ψ˜ − 1 by Corollary 1 of §4.4. The fixed set of µ̃ k is the hyperbolic line (0, ∞). Therefore, the fixed set of φ˜ in U 3 is the hyperbolic line L = ψ˜ (0, ∞) .

Exercise 4.7.7 Let φ be a nonidentity element of LF(Ĉ) such that φ˜ is an elliptic transformation of U 3. Show that the axis L of φ˜ can be oriented so that φ˜ acts on U 3 as a hyperbolic rotation around L by an angle θ, with 0 < θ≤ π, according to the right-hand rule. The angle θ is called the angle of rotation of φ˜.

Solution: Let ψ be as in the solution of Exercise 4.7.6. Then φ˜ = ψ˜ µ̃ k ψ˜ − 1 with k = ei8 and θ ∈ (0, π]. Now µ̃ k acts on U 3 as a hyperbolic rotation about the hyperbolic line (0, ∞) by an angle θ according to the right-hand rule where (0,∞) is oriented in the direction from 0 to ∞. As ψ˜ is orientationpreserving, φ˜ = ψ˜ µ̃ k ψ˜ − 1 implies that φ˜ acts on U 3 as a hyperbolic rotation around L = ψ˜ (0, ∞) by an angle θ according to the right-hand rule where L is oriented in the direction from ψ(0) to ψ(∞).

Exercise 4.7.8 Let φ(z) = az+b cz+d

with a, b, c, d in C and ad — bc = 1. Define

tr2(φ) = (a + d)2.

Show that two nonidentity elements φ, ψ of LF(Ĉ) are conjugate if and only if tr2(φ) = tr2(ψ).

Solution: Let φ and ψ be nonidentity elements of LF(Ĉ). Suppose that φ and ψ are conjugate in LF(Ĉ). Let φ(z) = az+b with ad—bc = 1 and let ψ(z) = ez+f cz+d

gz+h

e f is conjugate to ± with eh — fg = 1. Then ± in PSL(2, C) g h e f

by Exercise 4.4.3. Hence in SL(2, C). is conjugate to ± g h c d Therefore a + d =± (e + f ), since the trace of a matrix is a conjugacy invariant.

Hence tr2φ = tr2ψ.

Conversely, suppose that tr2φ = tr2ψ. By Exercise 4.7.3, we have that φ is conjugate to µk for some nonzero k in C and ψ is conjugate to µA for some nonzero l in C. Now tr2µ1 = 22 = 4 and if k /= 1, then µk = k1/2z/k−1/2 with a b c d a b

96

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

k1/2k−1/2 = 1, and so tr2µk = (k1/2 + k−1/2)2 = k + 2 + k−1. Thus tr2µk = k + 2 + k−1 for all nonzero k. As tr2φ = tr2ψ, we have that tr2µk = tr2µA by the 2 first part of the solution. Hence k +k−1 = l+l−1, and so k— (l+l−1)k +1 = 0.

Therefore √ (l + l−1) ± (l + l−1)2 — 4 k = 2 √ 1 − (l + l ) ± (l — l−1)2 = 2 (l + l−1) ± (l — l−1) = = l, l−1.

2 Now µA and µA−1 are conjugate by Exercise 4.7.4. Thus φ and ψ are conjugate, since µk and µA are conjugate.

Exercise 4.7.9 Let φ be a nonidentity element of LF(Ĉ). Show that 1. φ˜ is an elliptic transformation of U 3 if and only if tr2(φ) is in [0, 4); 2. φ˜ is a parabolic transformation of U 3 if and only if tr2(φ) = 4; 3. φ˜ is a hyperbolic translation of U 3 if and only if tr2(φ) is in (4, +∞).

Solution: By Exercise 4.7.5(1), we have that φ˜ is an elliptic transformation of U 3 if and only if φ is conjugate to µk with k = ei8 for some angle θ ∈ (0, π].

1 1 For such a k, we have that µk(z) = kz = k 2 z/k− 2 , and so 2

1

−1 2

tr (µk) = (k 2 + k

2

) =k+2+k

−1

= 2 + 2 cos θ.

As θ varies over the interval (0, π], we have that cos θ varies over the interval [—1, 1), and so 2 + 2 cos θ varies over the interval [0, 4). Hence φ˜ is an elliptic transformation of U 3 if and only if tr2(φ) is in [0, 4) by Exercise 4.7.8.

By Exercise 4.7.5(2), we have that φ˜ is a parabolic transformation of U 3 if and only if φ is conjugate to µ1. Now tr2(µ1) = 22 = 4. Hence φ˜ is a parabolic transformation of U 3 if and only if tr2(φ) = 4 by Exercise 4.7.8.

By Exercise 4.7.5(3), we have that φ˜ is a hyperbolic translation of U 3 if and only if φ is conjugate to µk for some k ∈ R with k > 1. For such a k, we have 1 1 that µk(z) = kz = k 2 z/k− 2 , and so 2

1

tr (µk) = (k 2 + k

−1 2 2

) = k+2+k

−1

.

As k varies over the interval (1, +∞), we have that k + k−1 varies over the interval (2, +∞), and so k + 2 + k−1 varies over the interval (4, + ∞). Hence φ˜ is a hyperbolic translation of U 3 if and only if tr2(φ) is in (4, +∞ ) by Exercise 4.7.8.

Exercise 4.7.10 Let φ be a nonidentity element of LF(Ĉ) such that φ˜ is an elliptic transformation of U 3 with angle of rotation θ. Prove that tr2(φ) = 4 cos2(θ/2).

97

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: We have that φ is conjugate to µk with k = ei8 for some angle θ ∈(0, π] by Exercise 4.7.5(1). By the solution of Exercise 4.7.7, the angle of rotation of φ˜ is θ. By Exercise 4.7.8 and the solution of Exercise 4.7.9, we have that tr2(φ) = tr2(µk) = 2 + 2 cos θ = 4 cos2(θ/2).

Exercise 4.7.11 Let φ ∈ LF(Ĉ) such that φ˜ is a hyperbolic translation of U 3 with translation length s. Prove that tr2(φ) = 4 cosh2(s/2).

Solution: We have that φ is conjugate to µk for some k∈ R with k > 1.

By Exercise 4.7.8 and the solution of Exercise 4.7.9, we have that tr2(φ) = tr2(µk) = 2 + k + k−1 = 2 + es + e−s = 2 + 2 cosh s = 4 cosh2(s/2).

Exercise 4.7.12 Prove that the fixed set in Bn of an elliptic transformation of Bn is a hyperbolic m-plane.

Solution: Let φ be an elliptic transformation of Bn. Then φ fixes a point b of Bn. Now τ −b1φτb fixes 0, and so there is an orthogonal transformation A of En such that τ b−1φτb = A. The fixed set of A is the eigenspace E(1) of 1, and so Bn ∩E(1) is an m-plane P of Bn with m = dim E(1). The fixed set of φ is τb(P ), since φ = τbAτ −b1. Hence, the fixed set of φ is a hyperbolic m-plane of Bn. Exercise 4.7.13 Let u{0, . . . , un be } an affinely independent set of n + 1 unit vectors of En and let φ and ψ be Möbius transformations of Bn, with n > 1, such that φ(ui) = ψ(ui) for i = 0, . . . , n. Prove that φ = ψ.

Solution: Observe that ψ−1φ(ui) = ui for i = 0, 1, . . . , n. Hence ψ−1φ is elliptic, since ψ−1φ has at least three fixed points in Sn−1. By Exercise 4.7.12, the fixed set of ψ−1φ is a hyperbolic m-plane. Therefore, the fixed set of ψ−1φ in Sn−1 is an (m —1)-sphere Σ of Sn−1. Now there is an m-plane P of En such that Σ = Sn−1 ∩ P . Hence u0, . . . , un lie in P . Therefore m = n, since u0, . . . , un are affinely independent. Hence ψ−1φ = id, and so φ = ψ.

Exercise 4.7.14 Let φ be a Möbius transformation of U n . Prove that φ is parabolic if and only if there is a hyperbolic 2-plane of U n on which φ acts as a parabolic translation.

Solution: Suppose φ is parabolic. Then there is a Möbius transformation ψ of U n such that ψφψ−1 = a + A˜, where a/= 0 in En−1 and A is an orthogonal transformation of En−1 such that Aa = a, by Theorem 4.7.3. Let P be the vertical 2-plane of U n bounded by the line ⟨a⟩. Then a + A˜ leaves P invariant and for each x in P , we have (a + A˜)x = a + x, and so a + A˜ acts as a parabolic translation on P . Therefore φ acts as a parabolic translation on the hyperbolic 2-plane ψ−1(P ) of U n .

Conversely, suppose that φ acts as a parabolic translation on a hyperbolic 2-plane P . Then φ fixes a point a of P ∩ Ê n− 1 . By conjugating φ, we may assume that a = ∞. Then P is a vertical 2-plane of U n and φ acts on P as a 98

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

nontrivial horizontal translation. Now φ is the Poincar´e extension of a Möbius transformation φ of Ê n− 1 , and φ acts as a nontrivial translation on the Euclidean line L that bounds P . Therefore φ is an isometry of En−1 by Theorem 4.3.2.

Moreover φ does not fix a point of En−1, since φ maps each hyperplane Q of En−1 that is perpendicular to L off itself. Therefore φ is parabolic by Theorem 4.7.2.

Exercise 4.7.15 Let φ be a Möbius transformation of U n . Prove that φ is hyperbolic if and only if there is a hyperbolic line of U n on which φ acts as a nontrivial hyperbolic translation.

Solution: Suppose φ is hyperbolic. Then φ acts as a nontrivial hyperbolic translation on its axis.

Conversely, suppose there is a hyperbolic line L of U n on which φ acts as a nontrivial hyperbolic translation. Then φ maps each hyperplane P of U n that is Lorentz orthogonal to L off itself. Therefore φ does not fix a point of U n , and so φ is not elliptic. Now φ fixes the two endpoints of L, and so φ is not parabolic. Therefore φ is hyperbolic Exercise 4.7.16 Let a be the point of Sn−1 fixed by a parabolic transformation φ of Bn. Prove that if x is in Bn, then φm(x) a →as m → ∞. In other words, a is an attractive fixed point.

Solution: Suppose ψ = a + A˜ with a = 0 in En−1 and A an orthogonal transformation of En−1 such that Aa = a. Let x be a point of U n , and let m be a positive integer. We claim that limm→∞ ψm(x) = ∞. As ψ(∞) = ∞, we may assume that x /= ∞. Then ψm(x) = ma + Ã m x. Now |ma| = |ψm(x) — Ã m x| ≤ |ψm(x) + |Ã m x|.

Hence | ψm(x)| ≥ m| a| — |x |. Therefore limm→∞ ψm(x) = ∞.

Now suppose ψ is a parabolic transformation of U n with fixed point b of Ê n − 1 . Then there is a Möbius transformation φ of U n such that φψφ−1 = a + A˜ with a /= 0 in En−1 and A an orthogonal transformation of En−1 such that Aa = a by Theorem 4.7.3. Hence limm→∞(φψφ−1)m(x) = ∞ for each x in U n . Therefore limm→∞ φψmφ−1(x) = φ(b) for each x in U n . Hence limm→∞ φψm(y) = φ(b) for each y in U n . As φ−1 : Ê n → Ê n is continuous, limm→∞ ψm(y) = b for each y in U n .

Now suppose φ is a parabolic transformation of Bn with fixed point a in n−1 S . Let η : U n → Bn be the standard transformation. Then η−1φη is a parabolic transformation of U n with fixed point η−1(a) in Ê n − 1 . Hence limm→∞(η−1φη)m(y) = η−1(a) for each y in U n . Therefore limm→∞ φm(x) = a for each x in Bn. Exercise 4.7.17 Let a and b be the points of Sn−1 fixed by a hyperbolic transformation ψ of Bn, and let L be the axis of ψ. Suppose that ψ translates L in the direction of a. Prove that if x is in Bn and x/= b, then ψm(x) → a as m → ∞. In other words, a is an attractive fixed point and b is a repulsive fixed point.

99

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Suppose ψ = k A˜ with k > 1 and A an orthogonal transformation of En−1. Let x be a point of U n , with x =/ 0, ∞ , and let m be a positive integer.

Then ψm(x) = k m à m x. Now |ψm(x)| = |k m à m x| = k m |à m x| = km|x|.

Hence limm→∞ ψm(x) = ∞.

Now suppose ψ is a hyperbolic transformation of U n with fixed points a and b of Ê n−1 . Then there is a Möbius transformation φ of Un such that φψφ−1 = k A˜ with k > 1 and A an orthogonal transformation of En−1 by Theorem 4.7.5. We may assume that φ(a) = ∞ and φ(b) = 0. Then limm→∞(φψφ−1)m(x) = ∞ for each x /= 0 in U n . Hence limm→∞ φψmφ−1(x) = φ(a) for each x /= 0 in U n . Therefore limm→∞ φψm(y) = φ(a) for each y /= b in U n . Hence limm→∞ ψm(y) = a for each y /= b in U n .

Exercise 4.7.18 Let A be in O+(n, 1) and let A be the restriction of A to Hn. Prove that 1. A is elliptic if and only if A leaves invariant a 1-dimensional time-like vector subspace of Rn,1; 2. A is parabolic if and only if A is not elliptic and A leaves invariant a unique 1-dimensional light-like vector subspace of Rn,1; 3. A is hyperbolic if and only if A is not elliptic and A leaves invariant two 1-dimensional light-like vector subspaces of Rn,1.

Solution: 1. By definition, A is elliptic if and only if A fixes a point a of Hn. If A fixes the point a of Hn, then A fixes each point of the 1-dimensional time-like subspace⟨ a⟩ of Rn,1.

Suppose A⟨a ⟩= a⟨ .⟩ Then Aa = ta for some t > 0. Hence Aa = ta , and so a = t a , whence t = 1. Therefore A fixes the point a of Hn if and only if A ⟨a ⟩ = a⟨ .⟩ Thus A is elliptic if and only if A leaves invariant a 1-dimensional time-like vector subspace of Rn,1.

3. By Theorem 4.7.5, we have that A is hyperbolic if and only if A acts as a nontrivial translation along a hyperbolic line L of Hn. Now an isometry of H1 is either elliptic or hyperbolic. Hence A is hyperbolic if and only if A is not elliptic and A leaves invariant a 2-dimensional time-like vector subspace of Rn,1.

Therefore A is hyperbolic if and only if A is not elliptic and A leaves invariant two 1-dimensional light-like vector subspaces of Rn,1 by Exercises 3.1.10 and 3.1.11.

2. Now suppose A is parabolic. By Exercise 4.7.14, we have that A leaves invariant a hyperbolic 2-plane P of Hn and A acts as a parabolic translation of P . Hence, we may assume that n = 2. Then A is a 3× 3 matrix, and so A has a real eigenvalue λ. Let v be an eigenvector for λ. Then v is not time-like by (1). Suppose v is space-like. Then ⟨v L⟩ is time-like by Exercises 3.1.8 and 3.1.9, ⟨ ⟩v L∩ H2 as and A leaves ⟨v⟩L invariant. Hence A acts on the hyperbolic line either an elliptic or hyperbolic isometry, which is a contradiction. Hence v must 100

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

be light-like. Thus A leaves the 1-dimensional light-like subspace⟨ v⟩ invariant.

Now A does not leave another 1-dimensional light-like subspace⟨ w⟩ invariant, otherwise A would leave invariant the 2-dimensional time-like subspace ⟨v, w⟩ , in which case, A would be either elliptic or hyperbolic. Hence A is not elliptic and A leaves invariant a unique 1-dimensional light-like subspace.

Conversely, if A is not elliptic and A leaves invariant a unique 1-dimensional light-like subspace, then A is not hyperbolic by (3), and so A must be parabolic.

Exercise 4.7.19 Let A be in O+(n, 1). Prove that A is elliptic if and only if A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a block diagonal matrix D with first block a matrix B ∈ O(n) and second block the 1 × 1 matrix (1).

Solution: Suppose A is elliptic. Then A fixes a point a of Hn. By Corollaries 3 and 4 of §3.2, there is a matrix C in O+(n, 1) such that Ca = en+1. Let D = CAC−1. Then Den+1 = en+1. Hence D leaves ⟨e1, . . . , e⟩n = ⟨ en+1⟩ L invariant by Exercise 3.1.12. Therefore D is a block diagonal matrix with first block a matrix B ∈ O(n), since DJD−1 = J, and second block the 1× 1 matrix (1).

Conversely, if there is a a matrix C in O+(n, 1) such that D = CAC−1 is a block diagonal matrix D with first block a matrix B∈ O(n) and second block the 1× 1 matrix (1). Then AC−1en+1 = C−1Den+1 = C−1en+1, and so A is elliptic.

Exercise 4.7.20 Let A be in O+(n, 1). Prove that A is hyperbolic if and only if A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a block diagonal matrix D with first block a matrix B ∈ O(n — 1) and second block the 2 × 2 matrix cosh s sinh s

sinh s cosh s

for some s > 0.

Solution: Suppose A is hyperbolic. Then A acts as a nontrivial translation along a hyperbolic line L of Hn. Now, there is a 2-dimensional time-like vector subspace V of Rn+1 such that L = V ∩ Hn. By Theorem 3.1.6, there is a matrix C in O+(n, 1) such that CV = ⟨en, en+1⟩. The matrix D = CAC−1 acts on ⟨en, en+1⟩ via a 2 × 2 matrix as above by Exercise 3.2.9. By conjugating by the Lorentzian reflection ρy with v = en, if necessary, we may assume that s > 0.

The matrix D leaves ⟨e1, . . . , en−1 ⟩ = e⟨n, en+1 L⟩ invariant by Exercise 3.1.12.

Hence D is a block diagonal matrix with first block a matrix ∈B O(n— 1), since DJD−1 = J, and second block a 2 × 2 matrix as above with s > 0.

Conversely, suppose that A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a block diagonal matrix D with first block a matrix B∈ O(n — 1) and second block a 2× 2 matrix as above. Then A acts as a hyperbolic translation on the hyperbolic line ⟨en, en+1⟩ ∩ Hn by Exercise 3.2.9. Therefore A is hyperbolic by Exercise 4.7.15.

Exercise 4.7.21 Let f be the parabolic transformation of U 2 defined by f (z) = z+1, and let η : U 2 → B2 be the standard transformation. Show that g = ηfη−1 is the Möbius transformation of B2 defined by (1 + i/2)z + (1/2) . g(z) = (z/2) + (1 — i/2) 101

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: By Exercise 4.4.4, we have that η(z) = (iz + 1)/(z + i). Observe that i 1

1 i

—i/2 1/2

1 1 0 1

1/2 —i/2

=

1 + i/2 1/2

1/2 1 — i/2

.

Hence g = ηfη−1 has the desired form by Exercise 4.3.4.

Exercise 4.7.22 Let ζ : B2 → H2 be stereographic projection, and let g be as in Exercise 4.7.21. Show that the matrix C∈ O+(2, 1) extending ζgζ−1 is given by , 1 —1 1 1 1/2 1/2 C= 1 —1/2 3/2 .

Solution: From Formulas 4.5.2 and 4.5.3, we have that Ae3 = ζgζ−1(e3) = ζg(0) = ζ(2/5, 1/5) = (1, 1/2, 3/2).

Therefore, we have , a11 a12 1 A=

a21 a22 1/2 a31 a32 3/2

.

The map f in Exercise 4.7.21 fixes ∞, and so g fixes i. Consequently (0, 1, 1) is an eigenvector of A. This, together with the fact that the second and third columns of A are Lorentz orthogonal, implies that , a11 —1 1 a21 1/2 1/2 A= . a31 —1/2 3/2 Finally, the first column of A can be derived from the information that the columns of A are Lorentz orthogonal and det A = 1.

Exercise 4.7.23 Let A be in O+(n, 1). Prove that A is parabolic if and only if A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a block diagonal matrix D with first block a matrix B ∈ O(n — 2) and second block the 3 × 3 matrix C from the last exercise.

Solution: Suppose that A is parabolic. Then A leaves invariant a hyperbolic 2-plane P of Hn on with A acts as a parabolic translation by Exercise 4.7.14. Now there is a 3-dimensional time-like vector subspace V of Hn such that P = V ∩ Hn. By Theorem 3.1.6, there is a matrix M in O+(n, 1) such that MV = ⟨en−1, en, en+1⟩. Then D = MAM −1 acts on the hyperbolic 2-plane ⟨en−1, en, en+1⟩ ∩ Hn as a parabolic translation. By Exercises 4.7.5(2), 4.7.21 ⟨ en−1, en, en+1⟩ via the matrix C and 4.7.22, we may assume that D acts on from Exercise 4.7.22.

The matrix D acts on ⟨e1, . . . , en−2⟩ = ⟨en−1, en, en+1⟩L by Exercise 3.1.12.

Hence D is a block diagonal matrix with first block a matrix B ∈ O(n — 2), since DJD = J, and second block the 3 × 3 matrix C from Exercise 4.7.22.

102

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Conversely, suppose that A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a block diagonal matrix D with first block a matrix B∈ O(n — 2) and second block the 3× 3 matrix C from Exercise 4.7.22. Then A leaves invariant a hyperbolic 2-plane P of Hn on with A acts as a parabolic translation by Exercises 4.7.21 and 4.7.22.

Therefore A is parabolic by Exercise 4.7.14.

Exercise 4.7.24 Let A be in O+(n, 1) and let Fix(A) be the vector subspace of Rn+1 consisting of all the vectors fixed by A. Prove that 1. A is elliptic if and only if Fix(A) is time-like, 2. A is parabolic if and only if Fix(A) is light-like, 3. A is hyperbolic if and only if Fix(A) is space-like.

Solution: Suppose A is elliptic. Then there is a point a of Hn such that Aa = a. As a is time-like, Fix(A) is time-like. Conversely, suppose that Fix(A) is time-like. Then there is a time-like vector v of Rn+1 such that Av = v. By replacing v by — v, if necessary, we may assume that v is positive time-like.

Then a = v/ |||v ||| is in Hn and Aa = a, and so A is elliptic.

Suppose A is hyperbolic. By Exercise 4.7.20, we may assume that A is a block diagonal matrix with first block B in O(n — 1) and second block the 2 ×2 matrix cosh s sinh s

sinh s cosh s

for some s > 0.

Let v ∈ Fix(A) with v /= 0. The above 2 × 2 matrix fixes the point (vn, vn+1), and so (vn, vn+1) = (0, 0). Hence v is space-like. Therefore Fix(A) is space-like.

Conversely, suppose that Fix(A) is space-like. Then A is not elliptic. On the contrary, suppose A is parabolic. By Exercise 4.7.23, we may assume that A is a block diagonal matrix with first block a matrix B in O(n — 2) and second block the matrix C of Exercise 4.7.22. Then A fixes the light-like vector en + en+1 which is a contradiction. Therefore A is hyperbolic.

Exercise 4.7.25 Let A be in O+(n, 1) such that A is either elliptic or parabolic.

Prove that all the eigenvalues of A have absolute value 1.

Solution: Suppose that A is elliptic. Then A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a matrix in O(n + 1) by Exercise 4.7.19. All the eigenvalues of an orthogonal matrix have absolute value 1. Hence, all the eigenvalues of A have absolute value 1.

Suppose that A is parabolic. By Exercise 4.7.23, the matrix A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a block diagonal matrix D with first block a matrix B ∈ O(n — 2) and second block the 3× 3 matrix C from Exercise 4.7.22. All the eigenvalues of C are equal to 1. Hence, all the eigenvalues of A have absolute value 1.

Exercise 4.7.26 Let A be in O+(n, 1) such that A is hyperbolic. Prove that all the eigenvalues of A have absolute value 1 except for the eigenvalues es and e−s where s is the translation length of A. 103

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: By Exercise 4.7.20, the matrix A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a block diagonal matrix D with first block a matrix B ∈ O(n — 1) and second block the 2 × 2 matrix cosh s sinh s for some s > 0.

C = sinh s cosh s The eigenvalues of C are e±s where s is the translation length of A by Exercise 3.2.9. Therefore, all the eigenvalues of A have absolute value 1 except for the eigenvalues es and e−s where s is the translation length of A. Exercise 4.7.27 Let A be in O+(n, 1) with A = I. Prove that A is a parabolic translation if and only if all the eigenvalues of A are 1.

Solution: Suppose that A is a parabolic translation. By Exercise 4.7.23, the matrix A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a block diagonal matrix D with first block a matrix B ∈ O(n — 2) and second block the 3 × 3 matrix C from Exercise 4.7.22. We have that B = I, since A is a parabolic translation. Therefore, all the eigenvalues of A are 1.

Conversely, suppose all the eigenvalues of A are 1. Then A is either elliptic or parabolic by Exercise 4.7.26. On the contrary, suppose that A is elliptic.

Then A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a matrix in O(n + 1) by Exercise 4.7.19.

An orthogonal matrix all of whose eigenvalues are 1 is the identity matrix I. Therefore A = I, which is not the case. Hence A is parabolic. By Exercise 4.7.23, the matrix A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a block diagonal matrix D with first block a matrix B∈ O(n — 2) and second block the 3 ×3 matrix C from Exercise 4.7.22. As all the eigenvalues of B are 1, we have that B = I, and so A is a parabolic translation.

Exercise 4.7.28 Let A be in O+(n, 1). Prove that A is a hyperbolic translation if and only if all the eigenvalues of A are 1 except for two eigenvalues λ±1 with λ > 1.

Solution: Suppose that A is a hyperbolic translation. By Exercise 4.7.20, the matrix A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a block diagonal matrix D with first block a matrix B ∈ O(n — 1) and second block the 2 × 2 matrix C =

cosh s sinh s

sinh s cosh s

for some s > 0.

We have that B = I, since A is a hyperbolic translation. The eigenvalues of C are e±s where s is the translation length of A by Exercise 4.7.26. Hence, all the eigenvalues of A are 1 except for two eigenvalues λ±1 with λ > 1.

Conversely, suppose that all the eigenvalues of A are 1 except for two eigenvalues λ±1 with λ > 1. Then A is hyperbolic by Exercise 4.7.25. By Exercise 4.7.20, the matrix A is conjugate in O+(n, 1) to a block diagonal matrix D with first block a matrix B∈ O(n — 1) and second block the 2× 2 matrix C above.

We have that B = I, since all the eigenvalues of B are 1. Therefore A is a hyperbolic translation.

104

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 4.7.29 Let A be in O+(n, 1). Prove algebraically that A is either an elliptic, parabolic, or hyperbolic isometry of Hn. Solution: The proof is by induction on n. Assume first that n = 1. Suppose det A = 1. By Exercise 3.1.7, there is a real number s such that cosh s sinh s

A =

sinh s cosh s

.

Observe that (1, ±1) are eigenvectors with eigenvalues cosh± s sinh s. Hence A leaves invariant the two 1-dimensional light-like vector subspaces⟨ (1,± 1)⟩ of R1,1. If s = 0, then A = I, and so A is elliptic. Suppose s =/ 0. Then cosh s ± sinh s = / 1, and so A has no nonzero fixed points. Hence A is not elliptic. Therefore A is hyperbolic by Exercise 4.7.18. thatNow suppose det A = — 1. By Exercise 3.1.7, there is a real number s such —1 0 0 1

A =

A =

— cosh s sinh s

and so

cosh s sinh s

sinh s cosh s

— sinh s cosh s

,

.

Now A(x, y) = (x, y) implies (sinh s)x + (cosh s)y = y. Hence y =

— sinh s x. cosh s — 1

Moreover y2 — x2 = 1 implies that the following are equivalent: sinh2 s — (cosh s — 1)2 (cosh s — 1)2

x2 = 1,

sinh2 s — cosh2 s + 2 cosh s — 1 2 x = 1, (cosh s — 1)2 2 cosh s — 2 2 x = 1, (cosh s — 1)2 r cosh s — 1 x=± .

2 r

whence y=√

∓ sinh s 2(cosh s — 1)

Hence (x, y) =

=∓

cosh s + 1 2

.

r r cosh s — 1 cosh s + 1 — , 2 2

is a fixed point of A. Therefore A is elliptic, and in fact, a reflection.

105

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Now assume that n > 1 and the result is true for all dimensions less than n.

We claim that A leaves invariant a proper vector subspace of Rn+1. Let f (x) be the minimal polynomial of A. Assume first that f is not irreducible over R. Then f = gh with g and h positive degree monic polynomials over R. Now g(A) is noninvertible, and so kerg(A) is a proper subspace of Rn+1. If x is in kerg(A), then g(A)(Ax) = Ag(A)(x) = 0, and so A leaves kerg(A) invariant.

Now assume f is irreducible over R. Then f is either linear or quadratic.

Assume that the roots of f are complex. Then f is quadratic and has roots λ and λ. The roots of f are the eigenvalues of A. By Exercise 3.1.2, we have that λ = λ−1, and so |λ| = 1. Therefore λ = a + bi with a and b in R and a2 + b2 = 1 and b /= 0. Now f (x) = (x — a)2 + b2. Let K = (A — aI)/b. Then we have K2 = (A — aI)2/b2 = —b2I/b2 = —I and A = aI + bK. Next, we have (aI + bK)(aI — bK) = a2I + b2I = I, and so A−1 = aI — bK. By Exercise 3.1.2, we have A−1 = JAtJ = J(aI + bKt)J = aI + bJKtJ. Hence JK t J = —K. We now switch to R1,n. Then k11 = 0. Hence a11 = a.

By Exercise 3.1.4, we have a11≥1, but a < 1, and so we have a contradiction.

Therefore, the roots of f are real, and so A leaves invariant a 1-dimensional subspace of Rn+1. Thus A leaves invariant a proper subspace V of Rn+1.

Let m = dim V . Assume first that V is time-like. If m = 1, then A fixes V , and so A is elliptic. Hence, we may assume that m > 1. By Theorem 3.1.6, there is a B in O+(1, n) such that BV = R1,m−1. Then BAB−1(R1,m−1) = R1,m−1, and so by the induction hypothesis and Exercise 4.7.18, we deduce that BAB−1 is either elliptic, parabolic, or hyperbolic. Hence A is either elliptic, parabolic, or hyperbolic.

Assume next that V is space-like. Then V L is time-like, and A leaves V L invariant. Therefore A is either elliptic, parabolic, or hyperbolic by the previous case.

Assume now that V is light-like. Then V ∩Cn is a 1-dimensional light-like subspace of R1,n by Exercise 3.1.11. As ACn = Cn, we have that A leaves invariant the 1-dimensional light-like subspace V ∩ Cn of R1,n. Hence A is either elliptic, parabolic, or hyperbolic by Exercise 4.7.18. This completes the induction.

106

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 5

Isometries of Hyperbolic Space 5.1

Topological Groups

Exercise 5.1.1 Prove that R and R+ are isomorphic topological groups.

Solution: The exponential map exp : R →R+ is a continuous homomorphism with a continuous inverse log : R+→R. Therefore exp is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Exercise 5.1.2 Prove that R/2πZ and S1 are isomorphic topological groups.

Solution: Define φ : R →S1 by φ(θ) = exp(iθ). Then φ is a continuous surjective homomorphism with ker(φ) = 2πZ. Hence φ induces a continuous −1

isomorphism φ : R/2πZ → S1. Now φ −1

arg z mod 2π. Therefore φ topological groups.

−1

: S1 → R/2πZ is defined by φ (z) =

is continuous, and so φ is an isomorphism of

Exercise 5.1.3 Prove that C∗ and R+ × S1 are isomorphic topological groups.

Solution: Define η : C∗ → R+ by η(z) = z | . | Then η is continuous and η−1(η(z)) = zS1 for each z in C∗. Define σ : R+ → C∗ by σ(x) = x. Then ησ(x) = x for each x in R+. Now φ : R+× S1 → C∗ defined by φ(x, z) = xz is a homeomorphism by Theorem 5.1.5. Moreover φ is a homomorphism, and so φ is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Exercise 5.1.4 Prove that S1 and SO(2) are isomorphic topological groups.

Solution: Define ψ : S1 → SO(2) by ψ(ei8) =

cos θ — sin θ sin θ cos θ 107

.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Then ψ is continuous by Exercise 5.1.2. Moreover ψ is a bijection by Exercise 2.1.3. The map ψ is a homeomorphism, since S1 is compact and SO(2) is Hausdorff. Observe that ψ(ei8eiφ) = ψ(ei(8+φ)) cos(θ + φ) — sin(θ + φ) = sin(θ + φ) cos(θ + φ) = = =

cos θ cos φ — sin θ sin φ — sin θ cos φ — cos θ sin φ sin θ cos φ + cos θ sin φ cos θ cos φ — sin θ sin φ cos θ — sin θ cos φ — sin φ sin φ cos φ sin θ cos θ ψ(ei8)ψ(eiφ).

Therefore ψ is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Exercise 5.1.5 Prove that R and SO+(1, 1) are isomorphic topological groups.

Solution: Define ψ : R → SO+(1, 1) by cosh s sinh s sinh s cosh s

ψ(s) =

.

Then ψ is continuous and a bijection by Exercise 3.1.7. Now, the inverse ψ−1

a c

b d

= cosh−1 a,

is continuous, and so ψ is a homeomorphism. Observe that ψ(s + t) = = = =

cosh(s + t) sinh(s + t) sinh(s + t) cosh(s + t) cosh s cosh t + sinh s sinh t sinh s cosh t + cosh s sinh t sinh s cosh t + cosh s sinh t cosh s cosh t + sinh s sinh t cosh s sinh s cosh t sinh t sinh s cosh s sinh t cosh t ψ(s)ψ(t).

Therefore ψ is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Exercise 5.1.6 Prove that if z, w are in Cn, then z w| ∗ | ≤ | z| |w |with equality if and only if z and w are linearly dependent over C. Solution: Observe that |z ∗ w| = |z1w1 + · · · + znwn| ≤ |z1w1| + · · · + |znwn| ≤ |z1| |w1| + · · · + |zn| |wn| = (|z1|, . . . , |zn|) · (|w1|, . . . , |wn|) ≤ |z| |w|.

108

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

If z = aw for some a in C, then |z ∗ w| = |aw ∗ w| = |a| |w|2 = |aw| |w| = |z| |w|.

Likewise, if w = bz for some b in C, then |z ∗ w| = |z| |w|.

Conversely, suppose| z∗ w| = | z| |w|. Then ( |z1 |, . . . ,| zn |) and ( |w1 |, . . . ,| wn| ) are linearly dependent over R by Theorem 1.3.1. Suppose w/= 0. Then there is a real number t such that (|z1|, . . . , |zn|) = t(|w1|, . . . , |wn|).

The equation |z1w1 + · · · + znwn| = |z1w1| + · · · + |znwn| implies that each nonzero zjwj points in the same direction from the origin, and so there is a unit complex number u such that zjwj = |zjwj|u for each j. Then zj|wj|2 = |zj| |wj|uwj for each j. Hence, if wj /= 0, we have zj = (|zj|/|wj|)uwj = tuwj, while if wj = 0, then zj = 0, and so zj = tuwj. Hence z = tuw. Likewise, if z /= 0, then w = bz with b in C, and so z and w are linearly dependent over C. Exercise 5.1.7 Let A be a complex n× n matrix. Show that| Az| ≤ | A| |z | for all z in Cn. Solution: Observe that |Az|

2

=

n Σ

a1jzj, . . . ,

j=1

= ≤

j=1

n n Σ Σ i=1 n

n Σ

2

aijzj

j=1 n

ΣΣ

|aijzj|2

i=1 j=1

= ≤

n Σ n Σ |aij|2|zj|2 i=1 j=1 n Σ n Σ

|aij|2|z|2

i=1 j=1

≤

n Σ n Σ

|aij|2 |z|2

i=1 j=1

=

|A|2|z|2.

Hence |Az| ≤ |A| |z|.

109

2

anjzj

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 5.1.8 Let A, B be complex n×n matrices. Prove that |AB| ≤ |A| |B|.

Solution: Observe that |AB|2 = =

2

(aij)(bij) n Σ aijbjk

2

j=1

=

n Σ n n Σ Σ i=1 k=1

≤

2

aijbjk

j=1

n Σ n Σ n Σ

|aijbjk|2

i=1 k=1 j=1

= = = ≤

n Σ n Σ n Σ |aij|2|bjk|2 i=1 k=1 j=1 n Σ n Σ n Σ

|aij|2|bjk|2

j=1 i=1 k=1 n Σ

n Σ

j=1

k=1

n Σ

n Σ

|aij| 2

i=1

|A| 2

j=1

n Σ

|bjk|2

|bjk|2

k=1 n n Σ Σ

=

|A|2

=

|A|2|B|2.

|bjk|2

j=1 k=1

Therefore |AB| ≤ |A| |B|.

Exercise 5.1.9 Let A, B be complex n × n matrices. Prove that |A ± B| ≤ |A| + |B|.

Solution: The inequalities |A ± B| ≤ |A| + |B| follow from the triangle in2 equality in Cn .

Exercise 5.1.10 Prove Theorem 5.1.2.

Solution: Suppose A is unitary. Then for all i and j, we have (Aei) ∗ (Aej) = ei ∗ ej = δij.

Hence, the columns of A form an orthonormal basis of Cn.

110

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Conversely, suppose the columns of A form an orthonormal basis of Cn. Then n Σ

(Az) ∗ (Aw) = A n

=

=

Σ

∗A

ziei i=1

ziAei ∗

i=1 n Σ n Σ

wjej j=1

n

Σ

n Σ

wjAej

j=1

ziAei ∗ wjAej

i=1 j=1 n Σ n Σ

ziwjAei ∗ Aej

= =

i=1 j=1 n Σ n Σ

ziwjδij

i=1 j=1 n Σ

ziwi = z ∗ w.

= i=1

Hence A is unitary. Thus (1) and (2) are equivalent. Now (2), (3) and (4) are equivalent, since AtA = I if and only if At = A−1 if and only if AAt = I. Clearly (4) and (5) are equivalent.

Exercise 5.1.11 Prove that a complex n × n matrix A is unitary if and only if |Az| = |z| for all z in Cn. Solution: If A is unitary, then |Az|2 = Az ∗ Az = z ∗ z = |z| 2 , and so |Az| = |z| for all z in Cn. Conversely, suppose |Az| = |z| for all z in Cn. Then we have |Az — Aw|2 = |A(z — w)|2 = |z — w|.

Hence |Az|2 — Az ∗ Aw — Aw ∗ Az + |Az| 2= |z| 2— z ∗ w — w ∗ z + |w| 2.

Therefore Az ∗ Aw + Az ∗ Aw = z ∗ w + z ∗ w, and so Re(Az ∗ Aw) = Re(z ∗ w).

Likewise Re(Aiz ∗ Aw) = Re(iz ∗ w), and so Re(i(Az ∗ Aw)) = Re(i(z ∗ w)).

Hence Im(Az ∗ Aw) = Im(z ∗ w).

Therefore Az ∗ Aw = z ∗ w. Thus A is unitary.

111

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 5.1.12 Let A be a complex 2 × 2 matrix. Show that 2| det A| ≤ |A|2. a b Solution: Let A = with a, b, c, d in C. Then we have c d 2| det A| = 2|ad — bc| ≤ 2(|ad| + |bc|) = 2|a| |d| + 2|b| |c| 2

≤ |a|2 + |d|2 + |b|2 + |c|2 =

|A| .

Exercise 5.1.13 Let A be in SL(2, C). Prove that the following are equivalent: 1. A is unitary; 2. |A|2 = 2; 3. A is of the form Solution: Let A =

a

b

—b a

.

a b

with ad — bc = 1. Suppose A is unitary. Then c d the rows of A are orthonormal, and so |A|2 = |a|2 + |b|2 + |c|2 + |d|2 = 2.

Thus (1) implies (2).

Suppose |A|2 = 2. Then we have 2 = 2|ad — bc| ≤

2|ad| + |bc|

= 2|a| |d| + 2|b| |c| ≤ |a|2 + |d|2 + |b|2 + |c|2

=

2.

Hence (|a| — |d|)2 = 0 and (|b| — |c|)2 = 0, and so |a| = |d| and |b| = |c|.

Now |ad — bc| = |ad| + |bc| implies that ad, 0, bc are collinear in C with 0 between ad and bc. Hence ad — bc = 1 implies that ad and bc are real. As |a| = |d| and |b| = |c|, we have d = a and c = —b. Therefore a b A= .

—b a Thus (2) implies (3).

Now suppose c = —b and d = a. Then |a|2 + |b|2 = ad — bc = 1, | — b|2 + |a | = |b|2 + |a|2 = 1, a(—b) + ba = —ab + ba = 0.

Hence (3) implies (1) by Theorem 5.1.2.

112

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 5.1.14 Let π : SL(2, C) → P√SL(2, C) be the quotient map. Prove that π maps any open ball of radius 2 homeomorphically onto its image.

Deduce that π is a double covering. √ √ Solution: Let A ∈ SL(2, C). S√uppose B ∈ B(A, 2). Then —B /∈ B(A, 2), since otherwise |B — (—B)| < 2 2, but by Exercise 5.1.12, we have √ |B — (—B)| = |2B| = 2|B| ≥ 2 2. √ √ Therefore π maps B(A, 2) bijectively onto π(B(A, 2)). √ 2) The quotient map π is an open by Lemma 2 of §5.1, and so π maps B(A, homeomorphically onto its image. Observe that √ √ √ π−1 π(B(A, 2)) = B(A, 2) ∪ B(—A, 2) √ √ and B(A, 2) ∩ B(—A, 2) = ∅. Hence π is a double covering.

Exercise 5.1.15 Prove that PSL(2, C) and PGL(2, C) are isomorphic topological groups.

Solution: Define φ : SL(2, C)→ GL(2, C) by φ(A) = A. Then φ induces a continuous homomorphism φ : PSL(2, C) → PGL(2, C). Define ψ : GL(2, C) → SL(2, C) by ψ(A) = (det A)−1/2A. Then ψ induces a function ψ : PGL(2, C) → PSL(2, C) that is inverse to φ. Therefore φ is an isomorphism. Now ψ is continuous at A when det A /∈(0, ∞ ), and so ψ is continuous at A when det A/∈ (0, ∞ ). Define ψ′ : GL(2, C) → SL(2, C) by ψ′(A) = i( — det A)−1/2A. Then ψ′ also induces ψ. Now ψ′ is continuous at A when det /∈ A ( —∞ , 0), and so ψ is continuous at A when det A/∈ ( —∞ , 0). Therefore ψ is continuous. Hence φ is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Exercise 5.1.16 Prove that GL(n, C) is homeomorphic to C∗ × SL(n, C).

Solution: Define η : GL(n, C) → C∗ by η( A) = det A. Then η is a homomorphism with ker(η) = SL(n, C). Hence η−1 η(A) = A SL(n, C) for each A in GL(n, C). Define σ : C∗ →GL(n, C) by σ(z) = diag(z, 1, . . . , 1). Then σ is a → GL(n, C) continuous right inverse of η. Hence, the function φ :×C∗ SL(n, C) defined by φ(z, A) = σ(z)A is a homeomorphism by Theorem 5.1.5.

5.2

Groups of Isometries

Exercise 5.2.1 Let ξ : X → Y be an isometry of finitely compact metric spaces. Prove that the function ξ∗ : I(X)→ I(Y ), defined by ξ∗(φ) = ξφξ−1, is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Solution: The function ξ∗ is an isomorphism. Moreover ξ∗ is continuous, since composition with a continuous function is continuous with respect to the compact-open topology. Now ξ−1 = (ξ−1)∗, and so ξ−1 is also continuous. ∗ ∗ Therefore ξ∗ is an isomorphism of topological groups.

113

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 5.2.2 Let X be a metric space. Prove that φi → φ in S(X) if and only if φi(x) → φ(x) for each point x of X. Solution: If φi → φ in S(X), then obviously φi(x) → φ(x) for each point x of X. Conversely, suppose φi(x) → φ(x) for each point x of X. Let x and y be distinct points of X. Let k be the scale factor of φ, and let ki be the scale factor of φi for each index i. Then d(φi(x), φi(y)) → d(φ(x), φ(y), and so kid(x, y) →kd(x, y). Hence ki →k.

Let K be a compact subset of X, and let ϵ > 0. On the contrary, suppose that {φi} does not converge uniformly on K. Then there is a subsequence {φij } of {φi} and a sequence of points {xj} of points of K such that for each j, d(φij (xj), φ(xj)) ≥ ϵ.

By passing to a subsequence, we may assume that {xj} converges to a point x in K, since K is compact. Choose j large enough so that kij ≤ 2k, d(xj, x) < ϵ/8k, and d(φij (x), φ(x)) < ϵ/2. Then we have d(φij (xj), φ(xj))

= d(φij (xj), φij (x)) + d(φij (x), φ(x)) + d(φ(x), φ(xj) = kij d(xj, x) + d(φij (x), φ(x)) + k d(x, xj) < є + є + є < ϵ.

4

2

8

which is a contradiction. Thus φi → φ uniformly on K, and so φi → φ.

Exercise 5.2.3 Let X be a finitely compact metric space. Prove that S(X) is a topological group.

Solution: The composition map (φ, ψ) '→ φψ is continuous, since X is locally compact. We may prove that the inversion map φ '→ φ−1 is continuous using sequences. Suppose that φi → φ in S(X). Then φi(x) → φ(x) for each x in X. Let k be the scale factor of φ, and let ki be the scale factor of φi for each i.

Then ki →k.

Let ϵ > 0, and let x be a point of X, and let y = φ−1(x). Then there is an integer l such that for all i ≥ l, we have ki > k/2 and d(φi(y), φ(y)) < kϵ/2.

Then for all i ≥ l, we have d(φ−1(x), φ−1(x)) = k−1d(x, φiφ−1(x)) i

i

= k−i1d(φφ−1(x), φiφ−1(x)) = k−i1d(φ(y), φi(y)) = kk−i 1ϵ/2 < ϵ.

Therefore φ−1(x) → φ−1(x). Hence φ−1 → φ−1 by Exercise 5.2.2. Thus S(X) i

i

is a topological group.

Exercise 5.2.4 Let S(En)0 be the subgroup of S(En) of all similarities that fix the origin. Prove that the map Ψ : R×+ O(n)→ S(En)0, defined by Ψ(k, A) = kA, is an isomorphism of topological groups.

114

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Define η : S(En)0 → R+ by η(ψ) = |ψ(e1)|. Then η is continuous.

Define µ : R+ × En → En by µ(k, x) = kx. Then µ is continuous, and so µ̂ : R+ → S(En)0 defined by µ̂(k)(x) = kx is also continu ous. The map µ̂ is a right inverse for η. For each ψ in S(En)0, we have η−1 η(ψ) = ψ O(n).

Therefore, the map Ψ : R×+ O(n) →S(En)0 defined by Ψ(k, A) = kA is a homeomorphism by Theorem 5.1.5. Now Ψ is obviously a homomorphism, and so Ψ is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Exercise 5.2.5 Prove that the function Φ : E×n R× O(n)→ S(En), defined + by the formula Φ(a, k, A) = a + kA, is a homeomorphism.

Solution: Let e : S(En) → En be the evaluation map defined by e(φ) = φ(0). n Then e is continuous. Define τ : E× En → En by τ (a, x) = a + x. Then τ is n n continuous, and so τˆ : E → S(E ) defined by τˆ(a)(x) = a+x is also continuous.

The map τˆ is a right inverse for e. Let S(En)0 be the group of similarities of En that fix the origin. For each ψ in S(En), we have e−1(e(ψ)) = ψS(En)0.

Therefore, the map χ : En× S(En)0 → S(En), defined by χ(a, ψ) = a + ψ, is a homeomorphism by Theorem 5.1.5.

By Exercise 5.2.4, the map Ψ : R+×O(n) → S(En)0 defined by Ψ(k, A) = kA is an isomorphism of topological groups. Hence, the map Φ : En × R+ × O(n) → S(En), defined by Φ(a, k, A) = a + kA, is a homeomorphism, since it is the composition of I × Ψ : En × R+ × O(n) → En × S(En)0 followed by χ : En × S(En)0 → S(En).

Exercise 5.2.6 Let E(n) be the group of all real (n + 1) ×(n + 1) matrices of the form , a1 . .

A Aa = . an. . , 0 ··· 0 1 where A is an n×n orthogonal matrix and a is a point of En. Prove that the function η : I(En) →E(n), defined by η(a + A) = Aa, is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Solution: The function η is a bijection by Theorem 1.3.5. Let a + A and b + B be in I(En). Then we have η (a + A)(b + B)

= η(a + Ab + AB) , . = . , =

. .

a1 +

AB an + 0

···

0 a1

A 0 ··· 0 115

. an 1

Σn

j=1 a1jbj

Σ n.

j=1 anjbj

, . . . .

. .

1

b1 B 0 ··· 0

. . . bn 1

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

= η(a + A)η(b + B).

Therefore η is an isomorphism.

The map φ : En × O(n) →E(n) defined by φ(a, A) = Aa is a homeomorphism, and so η : I(En) → E(n) is a homeomorphism by Theorem 5.2.4. Thus η is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Exercise 5.2.7 Let Ξ : SL(2, C) → LF(Ĉ ) be defined by Ξ

a c

b d

(z) =

az + b

.

cz + d

Prove that Ξ is continuous. Here SL(2, C) has the Euclidean metric topology and LF(Ĉ) has the compact-open topology.

Solution: Define Ξ : SL(2, C) × Ĉ → Ĉ by a c

Ξ

b d

,z

=

az + b . cz + d

Then Ξ is continuous, and so Ξ : SL(2, C) → LF(Ĉ) defined by Ξ

a c

b d

(z) =

az + b cz + d

is continuous.

Exercise 5.2.8 Prove that a homomorphism η : G → H of topological groups is continuous if and only if η is continuous at the identity element 1 of G. Solution: Suppose η : G →H is continuous at 1 in G. Let g be an element of G, and let V be an open neighborhood of η(g) in H, Then η(g)−1V is an open neighborhood of 1 in H. Hence, there is an open neighborhood U of 1 in G such that η(U ) c η(g)−1V . Now gU is an open neighborhood of g in G and η(gU ) = η(g)η(U ) c η(g)η(g)−1V = V. Hence η is continuous at g. Thus g is continuous.

Exercise 5.2.9 Let φ(z) = az+b be in LF(Ĉ ) with ad — bc = 1 and d /= 0. cz+d Show that 1. d2 = 2. cd =

1

—

φ(1)−φ(0) 1

φ(∞)−φ(0)

1 φ(∞)−φ(0)

,

,

3. b/d = φ(0), 4. ad =

φ(∞)

φ(∞)−φ(0)

.

116

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Observe that φ(0) = b/d, φ(∞) = a/c, and φ(1) = (a + b)/(c + d).

Hence, we have a+b

φ(1) — φ(0) = = =

—

b

c+d d d(a + b) — b(c + d) (c + d)d ad + bd — bc — bd = (c + d)d

and φ(∞) — φ(0) =

a c

Hence, we have

—

b d

1 φ(∞) — φ(0)

and

1 φ(1) — φ(0)

Therefore

—

1

=

1 (c + d)d

ad — bc 1 = . cd cd

= cd.

2

φ(∞) — φ(0)

= (c + d)d — cd = d .

a φ(∞) = (cd) = ad. φ(∞) — φ(0) c

Exercise 5.2.10 Prove that Ξ in Exercise 5.2.7 induces an isomorphism from PSL(2, C) to LF(Ĉ) of topological groups.

Solution: By Exercise 5.2.7, the map Ξ : SL(2, C) → LF(Ĉ) induces a continuous isomorphism Ξ : PSL(2, C) → LF(Ĉ). The inverse is the map Φ : LF(Ĉ) → PSL(2, C) defined by Φ(φ) = ±

a b c d

az+b where φ(z) = cz+d with ad — bc = 1. We need to prove that Φ is continuous.

By Exercise 5.2.8, it suffices to prove that Φ is continuous at id. Let

({0}, C) = {φ ∈ LF(Ĉ ) : φ(0) ∈ C}.

Then ({0}, C) is an open neighborhood of id in LF(Ĉ). Now, the evaluation maps φ '→ φ(0), φ '→ φ(∞), φ '→ φ(1) are continuous maps from LF(Ĉ) to Ĉ . Hence, the map δ : ({ 0} , C) → C defined by δ(φ) = d 2is a continuous by Exercise 5.2.9(1).

The function z1/2 is discontinuous along the ray (0, +∞), while —i(—z)1/2 is discontinuous along the ray (—∞, 0). The set N = δ−1(C — (—∞, 0]) is an

117

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

open neighborhood of id in LF(Ĉ) and d = —i(δ(φ))1/2 is a continuous function from N to C. By Exercise 5.2.9, we have a =

φ(∞) d(φ(∞) — φ(0))

,

b = φ(0)d,

c=

1 d(φ(∞) — φ(0))

.

Hence, the map φ '→

a c

b d

is a continuous function from N to SL(2, C). Hence, the map φ '→ ±

a c

b d

is a continuous function from N to PSL(2, C). Therefore Φ is continuous at id. Thus Φ is continuous by Exercise 5.2.8. Hence Ξ is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Exercise 5.2.11 Prove that Ξ in Exercise 5.2.7 together with Poincar´e extension induces an isomorphism from PSL(2, C) to M0(U 3) of topological groups.

Conclude that PSL(2, C) is isomorphic to the group I0(U 3) of orientationpreserving isometries of U 3 as topological groups.

Solution: By Exercise 5.2.10, the function Ξ induces an isomorphism from PSL(2, C) to LF(Ĉ) of topological groups. We have that LF(Ĉ) = M 0 (Ĉ ) by Exercise 4.3.5. The topology on M0(U 3) is such that Poincar´e extension induces an isomorphism from M 0 (Ĉ ) to M0(U 3) of topological groups. Therefore Ξ together with Poincar´e extension induces an isomorphism from PSL(2, C) to M0(U 3) of topological groups. The restriction map ρ : M0(U 3→ ) I0(U 3) is an isomorphism of topological groups by Theorem 5.2.11. Therefore PSL(2, C) is isomorphic to I0(U 3) as topological groups.

Exercise 5.2.12 Let φ(z) = az+b be in LF(Ĉ ) with ad — bc = 1. Prove that cz+d a b φ̃ (j ) = j in U 3 if and only if the matrix is unitary. c d Solution: Observe that the following statements are equivalent: 1. φ̃(j) = j, 2. (aj + b)(cj + d)−1 = j, 3. aj + b = j(cj + d), 4. aj + b = cj2 + dj, 5. c = —b and d = a.

6. A is unitary by Exercise 5.1.13.

118

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 5.2.13 Prove that PSU(2) and SO(3) are isomorphic topological groups.

Solution: Define Φ : SU(2) → LF(Ĉ ) by a c

Φ

b d

(z) =

az + b

.

cz + d

Then Φ is continuous by Exercise 5.2.7. Hence Φ induces a continuous map Φ : PSU(2) →LF(Ĉ). Let Π : LF(Ĉ) →M0(U 3) be Poincar´e extension. Then Π is an isomorphism of topological groups. Now ΠΦ maps PSU(2) isomorphically onto the stabilizer M0(U 3)j of j in M0(U 3).

Let η : U 3 → B3 be the standard transformation. Then we have η(j)

= σρ(j) = σ(—j) 2(—j — j) = j+ | — j — j|2 4j = j— | — 2j|2 = j — j = 0.

Now η∗ : M0(U 3) → M0(B3) is an isomorphism of topological groups that maps M0(U 3)j onto M0(B3)0 = SO(3) and η∗ΠΦ : PSU(2) →SO(3) is a continuous isomorphism.

The quotient map π : SU(2) → PSU(2) is a double covering by Exercise 5.1.14. Hence PSU(2) is Hausdorff. Therefore PSU(2) is compact by Theorem 5.1.3. Now SO(3) is Hausdorff, and so η∗ΠΦ : PSU(2) → SO(3) is a homeomorphism. Thus η∗ΠΦ is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Exercise 5.2.14 Let H be the set all matrices of the form

a

b

with —b a a, b in C. Show that H, with matrix addition and multiplication, is isomorphic to the ring of quaternions H via the mapping a

b

'→ a + bj.

—b a Solution: Define φ : H → H by φ

z w —w z

= z + wj.

Then φ is obviously an additive homomorphism. Observe that φ

u —v

v u

z —w

w z

=

119

φ

uz — vw —vz — uw

uw + vz —vw + uz

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

= uz — vw + (uw + vz)j = uz + vjwj + uwj + vjz = (u + vj)(z + wj) u v z w = φ φ —v u —w z

.

Hence φ is a ring homomorphism. Moreover φ is a bijection, and so φ is an isomorphism of rings.

Exercise 5.2.15 Prove that SU(2) and the group S3 of unit quaternions are isomorphic topological groups.

Solution: Define Φ : SU(2) → S3 by Φ

a

b

—b a

= a + bj.

Observe that |a|2 + |b|2 = 1 by Exercise 5.1.13, and so Φ is well defined. The map Φ is continuous and an isomorphism by Exercise 5.2.14. Moreover Φ−1 is continuous. Hence Φ is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Exercise 5.2.16 Prove that the map χ : S3 → SO(3), defined by χ(a + bj)(z + tj) = (a + bj)(z + tj)(a + bj), with z in C and t in R, induces an isomorphism from S3{± / I} to SO(3) of topological groups.

Solution: The map Ψ : S3/{±I} → PSU(2) defined by Ψ(±(a + bj)) = ±

a b —b a

is an isomorphism of topological groups by Exercise 5.2.14. By the solution of Exercise 5.2.13, we have an isomorphism of topological groups η∗ΠΦ : PSU(2) → SO(3), and so η∗ΠΦΨ : S3/ {± I } → SO(3) is an isomorphism of topological groups. Observe that az + b ΦΨ(±(a + bj))(z) =

—bz + a

,

and so ΠΦΨ(±(a + bj))(w) = (aw + b)(—bw + a)−1 where w = z + ty with t > 0.

Now η∗ : M0(U 3)j → SO(3) is defined by η∗φ = ηφη−1, with η = σρ, w√ here ρ is the reflection of Ê 3 in Ĉ and σ is the reflection of Ê 3 in the sphere S(j, 2).

Let φ be in M0(U 3)j. Then φ(w) = (aw + b)(—bw + a)−1 120

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

with a, b in C and |a|2 + |b |2 = 1 by Exercises 5.2.12 and 5.1.13. Here w = z + tj with t > 0. Observe that ηφη−1(1) = σρφρσ(1) = σρφρ j +

2(1 — j)

|1 — j|2 = σρφρ(j + (1 — j)) =

σρφ(1) a+b σρ —b + a a+b σ —b + a

= = =

j+

a+b −b+a

2

a+b

=

— j 2

—j

−b+a a+b 2 −b+a — 2j j+ 2 a+b +1 −b+a 2 2 a −b

— 2j

2

= j+

|a−b|2 |a+b|2 +1 |a−b|2

2(a2 — b2) — 2|a — b|2j |a + b|2 + |a — b|2 2 = j + a — b2 — |a — b|2j = a2 — b2 + (ab + ab)j = j+

and ηφη−1(i) = σρφρσ(i) = σρφρ j +

2(i — j)

|i — j|2 = σρφρ(j + (i — j)) = = = =

σρφ(i) ai + b σρ —bi + a ai + b σ —bi + a j+

2

ai+b −bi+a ai+b −bi+a

121

— j 2

—j

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

= j+

2 (ai+b)(a+bi) — 2j |a+bi|2 |ai+b|2 |a+bi|2

+1

2(a2 + b2)i — 2|a + b|2j |ai + b|2 + |a + bi|2 2(a2 + b2)i — 2|a + b|2j = j+ 2 + abi — abi + abi — abi = j + (a2 + b2)i — j + (ab — ab)ij = j+

= (a2 + b2)i + (ab — ab)ij and ηφη−1(j) = σρφρσ(j) = = = = =

=

=

σρφρ(∞) σρφ(∞) a σρ —b a σ —b a —j −b j+ 2 a — j −b 2 a — 2j j + −b 2 a +1 −b 2 (−ab) 2j |b|2 — j + |a|2 +1 |b|2

2

(2ab + 2|b|2j) |a|2 + |b|2 = j — 2ab — 2|b|2j = —2ab + (|a|2 — |b|2)j.

=

j—

Define χ : S3 → SO(3) by χ(a + bj)(z + tj) = (a + bj)(z + tj)(a + bj) = (az — bt + (bz + at)j)(a + bj) = a2z — b2z — 2abt + (abz + abz + (|a|2 — |b|2)t)j.

Hence χ(a + bj) is a linear transformation of R3. Observe that |χ(a + bj)(z + tj)| = |(a + bj)(z + ty)(a + bj)| = |a + bj| |z + tj| |a + bj| = |z + ty|.

122

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

3 Hence χ(a + bj) is in O(n). The determinant function det χ : S→ {±} is 3 3 continuous, and det χ(1) = 1, and so det χ(S ) = 1. Hence χ(S ) c SO(3).

The map χ : S3 → SO(3) induces a map χ : S3/ {± I } → SO(3). For w = 1, i, j, we have

χ(±(a + bj))(w) = η∗ΠΦΨ(±(a + bj))(w).

Hence χ = η∗ΠΦΨ. Thus χ is an isomorphism of topological groups.

Exercise 5.2.17 Let L be a Euclidean diameter of Bn with n > 1, let C be the Euclidean cylinder with axis L of radius r < 1, and let a be a point of ∂C∩ Bn. Prove that there is a sphere S(b, s) that is orthogonal to Sn−1 and tangent to ∂C at a. Conclude that C ∩ Bn is the intersection of all the closed half-spaces of Bn that contain C ∩Bn, and therefore C ∩Bn is hyperbolic convex by Exercise 3.2.14.

Solution: The line L and the point a lie on a 2-plane of En. Hence, by symmetry, we may assume that L lies on the 2nd-axis and ai = 0 for i = 3, . . . , n.

Let S(b, s) be a sphere that is orthogonal to S1. Then | b| 2 = 1 + s2 by Theorem 4.4.2(3). In order for S(b, s) to be tangent to ∂C at a, we must have |a — b| = s and the radius from a to b must be perpendicular to L, that is, b2 = a2 and bi = 0 for i = 3, . . . , n.

Hence 1 + |a — b|2 = |b|2, and so 1 + |a|2 — 2a · b = 0. Therefore 1 + a2 — a2 — 2a1b1 = 0.

1

Solving for b1, we obtain

2

1 + a2 — a2 b1 =

1

2a1

2

.

Thus S(b, s) exists.

We conclude that C ∩Bn is the intersection of all the closed half-spaces of n B that contain C∩ Bn and are tangent to ∂C∩ Bn. Therefore C∩ Bn is hyperbolic convex by Exercise 3.2.14.

5.3

Discrete Groups

Exercise 5.3.1 Prove that a subgroup Γ of R+ is discrete if and only if there is a k > 0 such that Γ = {km : m ∈ Z}.

Solution: The map exp : R → R+ is an isomorphism of topological groups by Exercise 5.1.1. A subgroup Γ of R is discrete if and only if Γ = {mx : m ∈ Z} for some x in R by Theorem 5.3.2. Now exp(Γ) = {emx : m ∈ Z}. Hence, a subgroup H of R+ is discrete if and only if H = {km : m ∈ Z} for some k > 0.

Exercise 5.3.2 Prove that a subgroup Γ of S1 is discrete if and only if Γ is the group of nth roots of unity for some n.

123

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let Γ be a discrete subgroup of S1. Then Γ is a finite subgroup of S1, since S1 is compact. Let φ : R → S1 be defined by φ(θ) = exp(iθ).

Then φ is a homomorphism. Let θ1, . . . , θk be the numbers in [0, 2π) such that φ(θ1), . . . , φ(θk) are the elements of Γ. Then we have k

φ−1(Γ) = ∪ (θj + 2πZ). j=1

The subgroup φ−1(Γ) of R is clearly discrete, and so φ−1(Γ) = {mθ0 : m ∈ Z} for some θ0 by Theorem 5.3.2. Therefore Γ is the finite cyclic group generated by φ(θ0). Let n be the order of φ(θ0). Then φ(θ0) is a primitive nth root of unity, since φ(θ0)n = 1 and φ(θ0) generates a cyclic group of order n. Therefore Γ is the group of nth roots of unity.

Exercise 5.3.3 Prove that every finite group of order n + 1 is isomorphic to a subgroup of O(n). Hint: Consider the group of symmetries of a regular nsimplex inscribed in Sn−1.

Solution: Let ∆ be a regular n-simplex inscribed in Sn−1. Let φ be a symmetry of ∆. Then φ is an isometry of En such that φ(∆) = ∆. Hence φ(Sn−1) is an n-sphere of En that contains the vertices v0, . . . , vn of ∆. Let σ be the reflection of Ê n in Sn−1. Then φσφ−1 is the reflection of Ê n in φ(Sn−1). Now σ(vi) = vi = φσφ−1(vi) for each i = 0, . . . , n. Therefore σ = φσφ−1 by Exercise 4.7.13. By the comparing the fixed sets of σ and φσφ−1, we have that φ(Sn−1) = Sn−1. Therefore φ is an orthogonal transformation. Hence Sym(∆) is a subgroup of O(n). Now Sym(∆) is isomorphic to the symmetric group Sn+1.

By Cayley’s theorem, every group of order n + 1 is isomorphic to a subgroup of Sn+1.

Exercise 5.3.4 Prove that the projective modular group PSL(2n, Z) = SL(2n, Z)/{±I} is a discrete subgroup of PSL(2n, R) and of PSL(2n, C).

Solution: Now SL(2n, Z) is a discrete subgroup of SL(2n, C) by Theorem 5.3.3.

Hence SL(2n, Z) is closed in SL(2n, C) by Lemma 3 of § 5.3, and so PSL(2n, Z) is closed in PSL(2n, C). Let π : SL(2n, C) → PSL(2n, C) be the quotient map.

Then π is open by Lemma 2 of§5.1. Hence PSL(2n, Z) has the quotient topology from SL(2n, Z). Now π−1(±A) = {— A, A }is open in SL(2n, Z), and so ± A is open in PSL(2n, Z). Therefore PSL(2n, Z) is a discrete subgroup of PSL(2n, C) and of PSL(2n, R).

Exercise 5.3.5 Prove that the elliptic modular group, of all linear fractional transformations φ(z) = az+b cz+d with a, b, c, d integers and ad — bc = 1, is a discrete subgroup of LF(Ĉ) that corresponds to the discrete subgroup PSL(2, Z) of PSL(2, C).

124

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: By Exercise 5.2.10, we have an isomorphism of topological groups Ξ : PSL(2, C) → LF(Ĉ). Now Ξ maps PSL(2, Z) isomorphically onto the elliptic modular group. By Exercise 5.3.4, we have that PSL(2, Z) is a discrete subgroup of PSL(2, C), and so the elliptic modular group is a discrete subgroup of LF(Ĉ).

Exercise 5.3.6 Prove that Picard’s group PSL(2, Z[i]) = SL(2, Z[i])/ {± I} is a discrete subgroup of PSL(2, C).

Solution: By Theorem 5.3.3, we have that SL(2, Z[i]) is a discrete subgroup of SL(2, C). Then PSL(2, Z[i]) is a discrete subgroup of PSL(2, C) by the same argument as in the solution of Exercise 5.3.4.

Exercise 5.3.7 Let G be a group acting on a set X. Prove that 1. the G-orbits partition X; 2. the function φ : G/Gx → Gx, defined by φ(gGx) = gx, is a bijection for each x in X. Solution: 1. As x = 1 · x, we have that X = ∪{ Gx : x ∈ X }. Suppose z is in Gx ∩Gy. Then there exists g, h in G such that gx = z = hy. Then y = h−1z = h−1gx. Hence y is in Gx, and so Gyc Gx. Likewise Gx c Gy, and so Gx = Gy. Thus, the G-orbits partition X. 2. The function φ : G/Gx →Gx defined by φ(gGx) = gx is well defined, since if gGx = hGx, then h−1g is in Gx, and so hx = hh−1gx = gx. The map φ is clearly surjective. Suppose gx = hx. Then h−1gx = x, and so h−1g is in Gx. Hence hGx = hh−1gGx = gGx, and so φ is injective. Thus φ is a bijection.

Exercise 5.3.8 Prove that a discrete group Γ of isometries of a finitely compact metric space X is countable.

Solution: Let Γ be a discrete group of isometries of a finitely compact metric space X. Let x be a point of X. For each positive integer n, let Γn = {φ ∈ Γ : φ(x) ∈ C(x, n)}.

Then Γn is finite, since Γ is discontinuous by Theorem 5.3.5. As Γ = ∪n∞= 1 Γ n , we have that Γ is countable.

Exercise 5.3.9 Let Γ be the group generated by a magnification of En. Prove that 1. Γ is a discrete subgroup of S(En); 2. Γ does not act discontinuously on En; 3. Γ acts discontinuously on En — {0}.

125

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let µ be a magnification of En. Then there is a k > 1 such that µ(x) = kx for each x in En. 1. The function Φ : En × R+ × O(n) → S(En) defined by Φ(a, l, A) = a + lA is a homeomorphism by Exercise 5.2.5. The group generated by k is a discrete subgroup of R+, and so Γ is a discrete subgroup of S(En).

2. The group Γ fixes the compact set {0}, and so Γ is not discontinuous.

3. Let K be a compact subset of En— 0 { }. Then there are real numbers r and s, with 0 < r < s and Kc B(0, s) — B(0, r). Now there is an integer N such that kmr > s for all m > N . Then we have µm(K) c B(0, kms) — B(0, kmr) c En — B(0, s), and so µm(K) ∩K = for ∅ all m > N . Likewise, there is an integer M such that kms < r for all m < M . Then we have µm(K) c B(0, kms) — B(0, kmr) c B(0, r), and so µm(K) ∩ K = ∅ for all m < M . Therefore µm(K) ∩ K /= ∅ only for M ≤ m ≤ N . Thus Γ acts discontinuously on En — {0}.

Exercise 5.3.10 Let X = Sn, En, or Hn. Prove that a subgroup Γ of I(X) is discrete if and only if every Γ-orbit is a discrete subset of X. Solution: The proof is by induction on n. The result is true for n = 0.

Assume n > 0, and the result is true for —n 1. Let x = en if X = Sn or Hn, and let x = 0 if X = En. Let r = π/2 if X = Sn, let r = 1 if X = En, and if X = Hn, let r be such that S(x, r) in Hn is a Euclidean sphere of radius 1. Then each orbit of the stabilizer subgroup Γx acting on S(x, r) is a discrete subset of S(x, r), and so by the induction hypothesis, Γx is a discrete subgroup of I(S(x, r)). Therefore Γx is finite.

Let η : Γ → Γx be the evaluation map, defined by η(φ) = φ(x). Then η is continuous. Now x is open in Γx. Hence η−1(x) = Γx is open in Γ. As 1 is open in Γx, we have that 1 is open in Γ. Therefore Γ is discrete by Lemma 1 of §5.3.

5.4

Discrete Euclidean Groups

Exercise 5.4.1 Prove Formulas 5.4.2, . . . , 5.4.6.

Solution: 1. If x /= 0, we have |Ax|

= |A(|x|x/|x|)| = |x| |A(x/|x|)| ≤ |x| A .

Thus | Ax| ≤ A | x| in general.

2. If x is in Sn−1, then by (1), we have |ABx| ≤ A |Bx| ≤ A 126

B .

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Hence AB ≤ A B .

3. If x is in Sn−1, then by the triangle inequality and (1), we have |(A ± B)x| = |Ax ± Bx| ≤ |Ax| + |Bx| ≤

A + B .

Hence A ± B ≤ A + B .

4. We have = sup{|BAx| : x ∈ Sn−1} = sup{|Ax| : x ∈ Sn−1} =

BA

A

and = sup{|ABx| : x ∈ Sn−1}

AB

= sup{|Ay| : y = Bx, x ∈ Sn−1} = sup{|Ay| : y ∈ Sn−1} = A .

5. By (4), we have BAB−1 — I

BAB−1 — BIB−1 B(A — I)B−1 =

= =

A—I .

Exercise 5.4.2 Let A be a complex n × n matrix. Prove that |A|2 = tr(AAt).

Solution: Observe that tr(AAt) = tr (aij)(aji) n Σ = tr aikajk k=1 n Σ n Σ

=

i=1 k=1 n Σ n Σ

=

aikaik |aik|2 = |A|2.

i=1 k=1

Exercise 5.4.3 Let A and B be complex n × n matrices. Show that if B is unitary, then |BA| = |A| = |AB| and |BAB−1 — I| = |A — I|.

Solution: Suppose B is unitary. By Exercise 5.4.2, we have | BA| 2

=

tr BA(BAt)

= tr BA(BA)t = tr BAAtBt = tr BAAtB−1 = tr AAt 127

= |A|2

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

and | AB| 2

tr AB(ABt)

=

= tr AB(AB)t = tr ABBtAt −1

= tr ABB At =

tr AAt

=

|A|2.

Therefore |BA| = |A| = |AB|. Hence, we have |BAB−1 — I|

= =

|BAB−1 — BIB−1| |B(A — I)B−1| = |A — I|.

Exercise 5.4.4 Let A be an orthogonal n × n matrix and let θ1, . . . , θm be the angles of rotation of A. Show that if θi < π for each i, then m Σ

|A — I|2 =

4(1 — cos θi).

i=1

Solution: By Exercise 5.4.3, we may assume that A is in the block diagonal form of Theorem 5.4.2. Then we have |A — I| 2 =

m Σ

|B(θi) — I|2.

i=1

If θi = 0, then |B(θi) — I|2 = 0. If 0 < θi < π, then |B(θi) — I| 2

=

cos θi — 1 — sin θi sin θi cos θi — 1

2

= 2(cos θi — 1)2 + 2 sin2 θi = 4(1 — cos θi).

Hence, we have |A — I| 2 =

m Σ

4(1 — cos θi).

i=1

Exercise 5.4.5 Let A be√an orthogonal n × n matrix. Show that if |A — I| < r ≤ 2, then A — I < r/ 2.

Solution: By Exercise 5.4.3, we may assume that A is in the block diagonal form of Theorem 5.4.2. Then we have |A — I| 2 =

m Σ i=1

128

|B(θi) — I|2.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

If θi = π, then |B(θi) — I |2 = 4. Hence |A — I | < 2 implies that θi < π for each i. By Exercise 5.4.4, we have |A — I| 2 =

m Σ

4(1 — cos θi).

i=1

Suppose θ1 ≤ θ2 ≤ · · · ≤ θm. As |A — I| < r, we have 4(1 — cos θm) < r2. Hence 2(1 — cos θm) < r2/2. The√refore A — I 2 < r2/2 by the proof of Lemma 1 of §5.4, and so A — I < r/ 2.

Exercise 5.4.6 Prove that the order of the group Γ0 in Example 2 is 2nn!.

Solution: Let A be in Γ0. Then the entries of A are 1, — 0, 1 and only one nonzero entry occurs in each column or row; moreover, each such matrix is in Γ0. The number of possibilities for the first column is 2n, the number of possibilities for the second column is 2(n —1), . . . , the number of possibilities for the last column is 2. Therefore, the total number of possibilities for A is 2n2(n — 1) · · · 2 = 2nn!.

Exercise 5.4.7 Show that kn(1/2) in Lemma 7 satisfies the bounds 2nn! ≤ 2 kn(1/2) ≤ (3n)n .

Solution: Let Γ be the group in Example 2 of §5.4. Then Γ has a normal abelian subgroup N that contains all the translations in Γ with [Γ : N ] ≤ kn(1/2) by Theorem 5.4.3. Suppose φ = a + A is in N . Then A is in Γ0. Now φ(b + I)φ−1 = Ab + I. As N is abelian, we have φ(ei + I)φ−1 = ei + I for each i. Therefore Aei = ei for each i, and so φ is a translation. Thus N is the group T of translations of Γ. By Exercise 5.4.6, we have 2nn! = |Γ0| = [Γ : T] ≤ kn(1/2).

By the proof of Lemma 6, we have that kn(1/2) is at most the minimum number of open balls of radius 1/4, with respect to th√e metric d(A, B) = A—B , that cover O(n). By Exercise 5.4.5, if |A — I| < 2/4, then A — I <√1/4.

Hence kn(1/2) is at most the minimum number of open balls of radius 2/4, with respect to the Euclidean metric, that cover O(n). n2 As the column vectors of A in O(n) are unit vectors, O(n) c [—1, √ 1] . Let 2 l > 0. Half the length of the diagonal of the cube [—l, l]n is d = n2l2 = nl.

A √ √ Now nl < 2/4 if and only if 1/l > 2 2n. Mark off k consecutive intervals of length 2l on [—1, ∞) starting at —1. They subdivide [—1, 1] if a √ n d only if k2l = 2, that is, k = 1/l. Let l = 1/(3n). Then 1/l = k = 3n > 2 2n. The subdivision of 2[—1, 1] 2into k intervals2 of length 2l induces √a subdivision of the cube [—1, 1]n into kn cubes. The kn open balls of radius 2/4 centered at the √ 2 2 centers of the cubes cover [—1, 1]n , since dA < 2/4. Thus kn(1/2) ≤ (3n)n .

Exercise 5.4.8 Let φ be a parabolic isometry of En and let L be a line of En on which φ acts as a nontrivial translation. Show that the vector v such that φ(x) = x + v for all x on L is uniquely determined by φ. The vector v is called the translation vector of φ.

129

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let φ be a parabolic isometry of En. By conjugating φ be a translation, as in the proof of Theorem 4.7.3, we may assume that φ = a + A with a = 0 and Aa = a. Then φ translates along the 1-dimensional vector subspace ⟨a⟩ spanned by the vector a. Now let L be a line of En on which φ acts as a translation. Then L = {b + tc : t∈ R } for some b, c ∈ En with c = / 0.

We can choose c so that φ(b + tc) = b + (t + 1)c for all t. Then c is a translation vector for φ and a + Ab + tAc = b + (t + 1)c. For t = 0, we have a + Ab = b + c.

Hence tAc = tc, and so Ac = c, Now Ab — b = c — a, and so (A — I)b = c — a.

The image of A — I is the orthogonal complement W of the fixed space V of A. Therefore c — a is in V ∩ W = {0}, and so a = c.

Exercise 5.4.9 Let Γ be a discrete subgroup of I(En). Prove that the subgroup T of translations of Γ has finite index in Γ if and only if every isometry φ = a+A in Γ has the property that its O(n)-component A has finite order.

Solution: Suppose [Γ, T] is finite. If φ = a + A is in Γ and τ = b + I is in T, then φτφ−1 = Ab + I. Hence T is a normal subgroup of Γ. Let k = | Γ/T| . If φ = a + A is in Γ, then φk is in T, and so a + Aa +· · · + Ak−1a + Ak is in T. Hence Ak = I, and so A has finite order.

Conversely, suppose that every element φ = a + A in Γ has the property that A has finite order. By Theorem 5.4.6, the group Γ has a free abelian subgroup H of rank m and of finite index such that H acts effectively on an m-plane P as a discrete group of translations. By conjugating Γ by a translation τ = b + I, we may assume that 0 is in P . Observe that τφτ −1

= (b + I)(a + A)(—b + I) = (b + I)(a — Ab + A) = b + a — Ab + A,

and so the property that A has finite order does not change.

Let φ = a + A be in H. As φ(0) is in P , we have that a is in P . Moreover, if b is in P , then φ(b) = a + b, and so Ab = b. Therefore A fixes P pointwise. Let φ1 = a1 + A1, . . . , φm = am + Am be a set of free generators of H. Then there exists a positive integer k such that Ak = I for each i. Now φk, . . . , φk are i

1

m

translations that generate a free abelian subgroup K of H of index km. Hence [Γ : K] = [Γ : K][H : K] < ∞. As K ≤ T ≤ Γ, we have that [Γ : T] < ∞.

Exercise 5.4.10 Let Γ be a discrete subgroup of I(En). Prove that any two m-planes of En satisfying (2) and (3) of Theorem 5.4.6 are parallel.

Solution: Let P and Q be m-planes of En satisfying (2) and (3) of Theorem 5.4.6. Let H be as in Theorem 5.4.6 and let φ1 = a1 + A1, . . . , φm = am + Am be free generators of H. By conjugating Γ by a translation, we may assume 0 is in P . Now φi(0) = ai is in P for each i and φi(x) = x + ai for each x in P and each i. Hence Aix = x for each x in P . Thus P c Fix(Ai) for each i. Moreover a1, . . . , am are linearly independent by Corollary 3.

130

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Let b be a point of Q, and let τ (x) = x — b. Then Q — b satisfies (2) and (3) of Theorem 5.4.6 for τ Γτ −1. Observe that τφiτ −1

= (—b + I)(ai + Ai)(b + I) = (—b + I)(ai + Aib + Ai) = ai + Aib — b + Ai,

Therefore Q — b c Fix(Ai) for each i as before. Hence φi acts as a translation by ai on Q— b. Therefore ai is in Q — b for each i. Hence P = Q — b, and so Q = P + b. Thus Q is a coset of P , and so P and Q are parallel.

Exercise 5.4.11 Let I0(C) be the group of orientation preserving Euclidean isometries of C. Show that every element of I 0(C) is of the form φ(z) = az + b with a in S1 and b in C. Solution: Every element of I0(C) is of the form b + A with b in C and A in SO(2). Now we have cos θ — sin θ A= sin θ cos θ for some angle θ. Hence, for z = x + iy, we have Az

=

cos θ — sin θ sin θ cos θ

=

(cos θ)x — (sin θ)y (sin θ)x + (cos θ)y

x y

= (cos θ + i sin θ)(x + iy) = ei8z.

Therefore b + Az = az + b with a in S1.

Exercise 5.4.12 Determine all the discrete subgroups of I0(C).

Solution: Let m be as in Theorem 5.4.6. Assume first that m = 0. Then Γ is finite, and so Γ fixes a point of C. By conjugating Γ, we may assume that Γ fixes 0. Then every element of Γ is of the form φ(z) = az for some a in S1.

Hence Γ = ⟨b ⟩where b = exp(i2π/n) for some positive integer n by Exercise 5.3.2.

Now assume m = 1. Then Γ leaves invariant a line of C. By conjugating Γ, we may assume that Γ leaves R invariant. Hence, every element of Γ is of the form φ(z) = az + b with b in R and a = ±1. Let T be the group of translations of Γ. Then T corresponds to an infinite discrete subgroup of R, and so T is an infinite cyclic group by Theorem 5.3.2. The index of T in Γ is 1 or 2, since h : Γ → {±1} defined by h(φ) = a, where φ(z) = az + b, is a homomorphism with kernel T. Suppose [Γ : T] = 2. Let ψ(z) = — z + b be in Γ and let τ (z) = z + d be a generator of T. Then τ and ψ generate Γ. Observe that ψτψ−1(z) = ψτ (—z + b) = ψτ (—z + b + d) = z — b — d + b = τ −1(z).

131

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Therefore ψτψ−1 = τ −1, and so ψτ = τ −1ψ. Hence, every nontranslation of Γ is of the form τkψ(z) = —z + b + kd for some integer k.

Conversely, let b and d be real numbers with d/ = 0. Let ψ(z) = —z + b and τ (z) = z + d, and let Γ = ⟨τ, ψ ⟩. Then ψτ = τ −1ψ, and so every nontranslation in Γ is of the form τkψ(z) = — z + b + kd for some integer k. Observe that the orbit Γb/2 = dZ + b/2 is discrete and Γb/2 = {ι, ψ} is finite, and so Γ is discrete

by Lemma 7 of §5.3.

Now assume that m = 2. Then the group T of translations of Γ corresponds to a lattice subgroup of E2 by Theorems 5.3.2 and 5.4.6. Hence T is generated by two linearly independent translations τ1(z) = z + b1 and τ2(z) = z + b2. Let h:Γ → S1 be the homomorphism defined by h(φ) = a where φ(z) = az + b.

Then ker(h) = T, and so h(Γ) is finite . Hence h(Γ) = ⟨c ⟩ where c = exp(i2π/n) for some positive integer n by Exercise 5.3.2.

We claim that n ≤6. On the contrary, assume that n > 6. Then arg(c) < 60○. Now, the orbit T0 is a closed discrete subset of C, and so there is a nonzero point b of T0 nearest to 0. Let τ (z) = z + b. Then τ is in T. Let ψ(z) = cz + d be in Γ. Then we have ψτψ−1(z) = ψτ (c−1z — c−1d) = ψ(c−1z — c−1d + b) = z — d + cb + d = z + cb.

Hence cb is in T0. Now T0 is a subgroup of C. Hence cb — b is in T0. Now |cb — b| 2

= |cb| 2 — 2cb · b + |b|2 = 2|b|2 — 2|b|2 cos θ(cb, b) =

2|b|2(1 — cos(arg(c)) < |b|2.

Hence cb — b = 0, and so c = 1, which is a contradiction. Thus n ≤ 6.

Assume n = 2. Then c = —1. Let ψ(z) = —z + d be in Γ. Then ψ, τ1, τ2 generate Γ. Conversely, let ψ, τ1, τ2 be as above, and let Γ = ⟨ψ, τ1, τ2 ⟩. Then ψτi = τ −1ψ for i = 1, 2. Hence, every nontranslation in Γ is of the form τ k τ k ψ 1 2

i

with k, l in Z. Observe that the orbit Γd/2 = b1Z + b2Z + d/2 is discrete and Γd/2 = ι,{ ψ }is finite, and so Γ is discrete by Lemma 7 of §5.3.

Now assume n≥ 3. Let b be a nonzero point of T0 nearest to 0. Then cb is in T0. We claim that b and cb generate T0. Observe that b and cb are linearly independent over R, since arg(c) = 2π/n for n = 3, 4, 5, 6. Let v be in T0. As b and cb span C over R, there are real numbers r1 and r2 such that v = r1b + r2cb.

Let ni be the integer nearest to ri for i = 1, 2. Then v = (n1 + s1)b +(n2 + s2)cb with |si| ≤ 1/2 for i = 1, 2. Now we have |v — n1b — n2cb|

=

|s1b + s2cb|

< |s1b| + |s2cb| ≤ |b|, since b and cb are linearly independent. Hence v — n1b — n2cb is a point of T0 nearer to 0 than b, and so v — n1b — n2cb = 0. Thus v = n1b + n2cb. Therefore 132

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

T0 = ⟨b, cb⟩. Let ψ(z) = cz + d be in Γ, let τ1(z) = z + b and τ2(z) = z + cb.

Then Γ is generated by τ1, τ2 and ψ.

Conversely, suppose Γ is the group generated by τ1, τ2 and ψ as above. Then ψτ1ψ−1 = τ2. Let τ3 = ψτ2ψ−1. Then we have τ3(z)

=

ψτ2ψ−1(z)

= ψτ2(c−1z — c−1d) = ψ(c−1z — c−1d + cb) = z — d + c2b + d = z + c2b.

If n = 3, then √

c2 = exp(i4π/3) = — 12 — 23 i = —1 — — 21 +

√

3 i 2

= —1 — c,

and so τ3 = —τ1 — τ2. If n = 4, then c2 = exp(i4π/4) = —1, and so τ3 = —τ1.

If n = 5, we will derive a contradiction below. If n = 6, then √

√

c2 = exp(i4π/6) = —2 1 + 2 3 i = —1 + 21 + 23 i = —1 + c, and so τ3 = —τ1 + τ2. Thus τ⟨1, τ2 is⟩ a normal subgroup of Γ and every nontranslation of Γ is of the form τ k τ Aψm for some integers k, l, m. Now we 1 2 have that ψ(z) = cz + d = z if and only if z(c — 1) = —d, that is, z = —d/(c — 1).

Let a = —d/(x —1). Then the orbit Γa = bZ + cbZ + a is discrete and Γa = ⟨ψ ⟩ is finite, since ψn(z)

cnz + cn−1d + · · · + cd + d

=

z + (cn−1 + · · · + c + 1)d cn — 1 d = z+ c—1 = z. =

Therefore Γ is discrete by Lemma 7 of §5.3.

It remains to show that n = 5 is not possible. Assume n = 5. Now b, cb, c2b are in T0, and so c2b + b = (c2 + 1)b is in T0. Observe that |c2 + 1|2

= |c 2— (—1)| 2 = |c2|2 — 2c2 · (—1) + | — 1|2 2 = 2 1 — cos θ(c , —1) = 2 1 — cos(π — 4π/5) = 2 1 — cos(π/5) = 2 1— = 2— =

1+√5

√ 1+ 5 2

√ 3— 5 2 133

4

<

1.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Hence (c2 + 1)b is a nonzero point of T0 nearer to 0 than b, which is a contradiction. Thus n = 5 is not possible.

5.5

Elementary Groups

Exercise 5.5.1 Let G be an elementary subgroup of M(Bn) of hyperbolic type.

Prove that G has a hyperbolic element and that every element of G is either elliptic or hyperbolic.

Solution: We pass to the upper half-space model U n . By Theorem 5.5.6, we may assume that G is a subgroup of S(En−1)∗. Let φ be in G. If φ permutes 0, , then φ fixes a point on the nth axis L, and so φ is elliptic. If φ fixes { ∞} both 0 and ∞ , then φ = kA for some k > 0 and A in O(n— 1). If k = 1, then φ is elliptic, and if k =/ 1, then φ is hyperbolic. Thus, every element of G is either elliptic or hyperbolic.

On the contrary, assume that every element of G is elliptic. Then the subgroup H of G, fixing 0 and ∞, fixes L pointwise. Therefore H is elliptic. As G is hyperbolic, there is an element φ in G— H. Now φ fixes a point x in L. As H has index 2 in G, we have that G fixes x, which is a contradiction. Therefore G has a hyperbolic element.

Exercise 5.5.2 Let Γ be a discrete elementary subgroup of M(Bn) of parabolic type. Prove that Γ has a parabolic element and every element of Γ is either elliptic or parabolic.

Solution: We pass to the upper half-space model U n . Then Γ is conjugate to an infinite discrete subgroup of I(En) that leaves En−1 invariant by Theorem 5.5.5. Now Γ has a parabolic element by Theorem 5.4.5 and every element of Γ is either elliptic or parabolic by Lemma 1 of §4.7.

Exercise 5.5.3 Let φ, ψ be elliptic elements in M(Bn) such that φ and ψ commute. Prove that either Fφc Fψ or Fψ cFφ or Fφ and Fψ intersect orthogonally.

Solution: By Formula 4.7.1, we have that Fψφψ−1 = ψFφ, and so ψFφ = Fφ.

Now Fφ is the closure in Bn of an m-plane of Bn. Suppose that Fψ is not contained in Fφ. Then Fψ ∩ Bn is not contained in Fφ. Let x be a point of Fψ ∩ Bn not in Fφ, Conjugate ⟨φ, ψ⟩ so that x = 0. Then ψ is in O(n), and so ψ preserves Euclidean distances. Hence ψ must fix the point y of Fφ ∩ Bn nearest to 0. Therefore, the line L through 0 and y is part of Fψ. Thus, either Fφ c Fψ or Fφ and Fψ intersect orthogonally.

Exercise 5.5.4 Let G be an abelian subgroup of M(Bn). Prove that 1. G is of elliptic type if and only if every element of G is elliptic, 2. G is of parabolic type if and only if G has a parabolic element, and 134

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

3. G is of hyperbolic type if and only if G has a hyperbolic element.

Solution: 1. If G is of elliptic type, then clearly every element of G is elliptic.

Conversely, suppose every element of G is elliptic. Choose φ in G such that dim Fφ is as small as possible. If ψ is in G, then ψ(Fφ) = Fφ, since φ and ψ commute. Hence ψ fixes a point of Fφ ∩ Bn by Exercise 5.5.3. Therefore, by induction on n, we deduce that G fixes a point of Fφ, and so G is of elliptic type.

2. If G has a parabolic element, then G must be of parabolic type by part (1) and Exercise 5.5.1. Conversely, suppose G is of parabolic type. Then we may assume that G is a subgroup of S(En−1) which fixes no point of En−1 by Theorem 5.5.3. On the contrary, assume that G has a hyperbolic element ψ.

Then φ(Fψ) = Fψ for all φ in G, since G is abelian, but this contradicts the fact that G is of parabolic type. Hence G contains a parabolic element by part (1).

3. If G is of hyperbolic type, then G has a hyperbolic element by Exercise 5.5.1. Conversely, suppose G has a hyperbolic element ψ. Then φ(Fψ) = Fψ for all φ in G, since G is abelian. Hence G is not of parabolic type. Now G is not of elliptic type by part (1), and so G is of hyperbolic type.

Exercise 5.5.5 Let φ, ψ be in M(Bn) such that φ and ψ have a common fixed point in Bn. Prove that the commutator [φ, ψ] is either elliptic or parabolic.

Solution: Let x in Bn be a common fixed point of φ and ψ. Then [φ, ψ] fixes x. Hence, if x is in Bn, then [φ, ψ] is elliptic. Now assume that x is in Sn−1.

We pass to the upper half-space model and conjugate⟨ φ, ψ ⟩ so that x = ∞ .

Then we have φ = a + kA and ψ = b + lB for some a, b in En−1, some k, l in R+ and some A, B in O(n) that fix en. Observe that [φ, ψ] = φψφ−1ψ−1 = φψ(—k−1A−1a + k−1A−1)(—l−1B−1b + l−1B−1) = φ(b + lB)(—k−1A−1a — k−1l−1A−1B−1b + k−1l−1A−1B−1) =

(a + kA)(b — lk−1BA−1a — k−1BA−1B−1b + k−1BA−1B−1)

=

a + kAb — lABA−1a — ABA−1B−1b + ABA−1B−1.

Hence [φ, ψ] is a Euclidean isometry, and so [φ, ψ] is either elliptic or parabolic.

Exercise 5.5.6 Let G be a subgroup of M(Bn) with no nonidentity elliptic elements. Prove that G is elementary if and only if any two elements of G have a common fixed point.

Solution: Suppose that G is elementary. We may assume that G is nontrivial.

Then G is either of parabolic or hyperbolic type. If G is of parabolic type, then all the elements of G have a common fixed point. If G is of hyperbolic type, then the union of all the finite orbits of G consists of two points u, v of Sn−1.

There is no element in G that transposes u and v, since such an element would be elliptic. Therefore, all the elements of G fix both u and v.

135

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Conversely, suppose that any two elements of G have a common fixed point.

If G is trivial, then G is elementary of elliptic type. Let φ be a nonidentity element of G. If φ is parabolic, then φ has a unique fixed point u, and so every element of G fixes u. Therefore G is elementary of parabolic type by Exercise 5.5.1.

Suppose φ is hyperbolic. Let ψ be any element of G. Then [φ, ψ] = 1

by Exercise 5.5.5 and the parabolic case. Therefore G is abelian, and so G is elementary of hyperbolic type by Exercise 5.5.4.

136

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 6

Geometry of Discrete Groups 6.1

The Projective Disk Model

Exercise 6.1.1 Show that the hyperbolic angle between any two geodesic lines of Dn intersecting at the origin conforms with the Euclidean angle between the lines. In other words, Dn is conformal at the origin.

Solution: Let L and M be two geodesic lines of Dn that intersect at the origin.

Let V be the subspace of Rn+1 spanned by L and en+1 and let W be the subspace of Rn+1 spanned by M and en+1. Then V and W are 2-dimensional time-like vector subspaces of Rn+1 that intersect along the (n + 1)st axis. Observe that µ(L) = Hn ∩V and µ(M ) = Hn ∩W , and the hyperbolic angle between L and M is equal to the hyperbolic angle between µ(L) and µ(M ).

Now µ(L) and µ(M ) intersect at en+1 and the hyperbolic angle between µ(L) and µ(M ) is the Euclidean angle between µ(L) and µ(M ) which is the angle between V and W . The angle between V and W is the Euclidean angle between L and M . Therefore, the Euclidean angle between L and M is the hyperbolic angle between L and M , and so Dn is conformal at the origin.

Exercise 6.1.2 Let P be a hyperplane of Dn. Prove that the intersection of all the hyperplanes of Rn that are tangent to Sn−1 at a point of P∩ Sn−1 is a point of Rn called the pole of P . See Figure 1.2.2.

Solution: Assume first that 0 is in P . Let u be a point of P∩ Sn−1. Then —u is in P ∩Sn−1 and the tangent hyperplanes to Sn−1 at ± u are parallel and so intersect in Rn at the (n—2)-plane of Pn−1 represented by the great (n— 1)sphere of Sn−1 parallel to the tangent hyperplanes at±u. The intersection of all these (n—2)-planes of Pn−1 is the point of Pn−1 represented by the great 0sphere of Sn−1 determined by the normal line to P at 0. Thus, the intersection

137

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

∩ Sn−1 is of all the hyperplanes of Rn that are tangent to Sn−1 at a point of P n −1 a point of P .

Now assume that 0 is not in P . A point x of Rn lies in the tangent hyperplane of Sn−1 at a point u of P∩ Sn−1 if and only if (x—u) · u = 0, that is, x · u = 1.

Let P (a, t) be the hyperplane of Rn extending P . Then t/= 0 and a· y = t for · u = 1 for all u in P ∩ Sn−1. Thus a/t is in the all y in P (a, t), and so (a/t) intersection of all the hyperplanes of Rn that are tangent to Sn−1 at a point of P ∩Sn−1.

Now suppose x is in the intersection of all the hyperplanes of Rn that are tangent to Sn−1 at a point of P ∩ Sn−1. Then x · u = 1 for all u in P ∩ Sn−1.

Let v be the point of P ∩ Sn−1 opposite u. Then x · v = 1, and so x · (1 — s)u + sv = (1 — s)x · u + sx · v = 1 for all s in R. Hence x · y = 1 for all y in P (a, t). Therefore P (a, t) = P (x/|x|, 1/|x|).

Hence x = a/t. Thus, the intersection of the tangent hyperplanes of Sn−1 at the points of P ∩ Sn−1 is the point a/t of Rn. Exercise 6.1.3 Prove that a line L of Dn is orthogonal to a hyperplane P of Dn if and only if the projective line extending L passes through the pole of P .

Solution: Let P be a hyperplane of Dn, and let L be a line of Dn that intersects P at a single point x. As Dn is homogenous, there is an isometry φ of Dn such that φ(x) = 0. The isometry φ extends to a projective transformation φ of Rn by Theorem 6.1.2. The projective transformation φ maps a tangent hyperplane of Sn−1 to a tangent hyperplane of Sn−1, and so φ maps the pole of P to the pole of φ(P ). . Let L be the projective line of Rn extending L. Then φ(L) is the projective line of Rn extending φ(L). Now φ(P ) and φ(L) are obviously orthogonal if and only if φ(L) passes through the pole of φ(P ), and so P and L are orthogonal if and only if L passes through the pole of P .

Exercise 6.1.4 Prove that the correspondence between a hyperplane of Dn and its pole gives a one-to-one correspondence between the set of hyperplanes of Dn and the points of Rn — Dn. Solution: Let v be a point of Rn — Dn. The set of all points x that satisfy the equation v · x = 1 is the hyperplane P (v/|v|, 1/|v|) with normal vector v passing through the point v/|v|2 of Dn. Let Q = P (v/|v|, 1/|v|) ∩ Dn. Then Q is the unique hyperplane of Dn with pole v. Hence, there is a one-to-one n correspondence between the points of R— Dn and the hyperplanes of Dn that do not contain 0.

138

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

The hyperplanes of Dn that contain 0 are in one-to-one correspondence with their normal lines at 0, which, in turn, are in one-to-one correspondence with the points of Pn−1. Thus, the correspondence between a hyperplane of Dn and its pole gives a one-to-one correspondence between the set of hyperplanes of Dn and the points of Rn — Dn. Exercise 6.1.5 Let x be a point of Dn. Define an inner product ⟨ Rn by 1−|x|2+x2 i if i = j, (1−|x|2)2 ⟨e , e ⟩ = i

j x

xixj (1−|x|2)2

,

⟩x on

if i /= j.

Let κ, λ : R → D be geodesic lines such that κ(0) = x = λ(0), and let u = κ′(0) and v = λ′(0). Show that the hyperbolic angle θ between κ and λ is given by the formula cos θ = ⟨u, v⟩x. n

Solution: Let κ, λ : R → Dn be geodesic lines such that κ(0) = x = λ(0), and let u = κ′(0) and v = λ′(0). Let µ : Dn → Hn be gnomonic projection. Then µκ, µλ : R → Hn are geodesic lines such that µκ(0) = µ(x) = µλ(0).

The hyperbolic angle θ between κ and λ is the hyperbolic angle between µκ and µλ. Hence, we have cos θ = (µκ)′(0) ◦ (µλ)′(0) = µ′(κ(0))κ′(0) ◦ µ′(λ(0))λ′(0) = µ′(x)u ◦ µ′(x)v.

Now we have

x + en+1 µ(x) = √ .

1 — |x|2

Hence, we have , . . µ′(x) = . .

1−|x|2+x12 (1−|x|2)3/2 x2 x1 (1−|x|2)3/2

x1x2 (1−|x|2)3/2 1−|x|2+x2 2 (1−|x|2)3/2

.

.

xn x1 (1−|x|2)3/2 x1 (1−|x|2)3/2

xn x2 (1−|x|2)3/2 x2 (1−|x|2)3/2

··· ···

··· ···

⟨ei, ej⟩x = µ′(x)ei ◦ µ′(x)ej.

.

. ..

1−|x|2+x2 n . .

Define an inner product ⟨ , ⟩x on Rn by

139

x1xn (1−|x|2)3/2 x2 xn (1−|x|2)3/2

(1−|x|2)3/2 xn (1−|x|2)3/2

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Then we have ⟨ei, ei⟩x = = =

(1 — |x|2 + xi2)2 + (x1xi)2 + · · · + (xnxi)2 — x4i — x2i (1 — |x|2)3 2 2 2 (1 — |x| ) + 2xi (1 — |x|2) + x2i|x|2 — x2i (1 — |x|2)3 1 — |x|2 + x2i .

(1 — |x|2)2

If i /= j, we have ⟨ei, ej⟩x

=

(1 — |x|2 + xi 2)2xixj + (1 — |x|2 + xj2)2xjxi

(1 — |x|2)3 (x1xi)(x1xj) + · · · + (xnxi)(xnxj) + (1 — |x|2)3 —(xixi)(xixj) — (xjxj)(xjxi) — xixj + (1 — |x|2)3 xixj(1 — |x|2 + x2 + 1 — |x|2 + x2 + |x|2 — x2 — x2 — 1) i j i j = (1 — |x|2)3 xixj = .

(1 — |x|2)2

Therefore, we have cos θ = µ′(x)u ◦ µ′(x)v = ⟨u, v⟩x.

6.2

Convex Sets

Exercise 6.2.1 Let C be a convex subset of X that is not a pair of antipodal points of Sn. Prove that C is connected.

Solution: This is clear if dim C = 0, so assume dim C > 0. On the contrary, suppose C is disconnected. Then we have C =U ∪V with U and V nonempty disjoint open subsets of C. Let x be a point of U and let y be a point of V . As dim C > 0, we may assume that x and y are nonantipodal. Then x, y are a proper pair of points, and so C contains the geodesic segment [x, y]. Now [x, y] =

[x, y] ∩ U ∪ [x, y] ∩ V

implies that [x, y] is disconnected, which is a contradiction. Thus C is connected.

140

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 6.2.2 Let C be a nonempty convex subset of X. Show that (1) (C○) = C = C, (3) ∂C○ = ∂C = ∂C, ○ (5) dim C = dim C = dim C.

(2) (4)

(C○)○ = C○ = (C)○, ⟨C○⟩ = ⟨C⟩ = ⟨C⟩,

Solution: 1. As C○ c C, we have C○ c C; moreover C c C○ by Theorem 6.2.2. Therefore (C○) = C. Now C = C, since C is closed.

2. We have (C○)○ = C○, since C○ is open in ⟨ C⟩. Now C c C, and so ○ C c (C)○. Let x be a point of (C)○. Then there is an r > 0 such that B(x, r) ∩C⟨ ⟩ cC. Suppose on the contrary that x is in ∂C. Then there is a side S of C containing x by Theorem 6.2.6. Let m— 1 = dim S, and let P be an m-plane of⟨ C⟩ containing ⟨ S⟩ and a point of C○. Then C ∩P is contained in one of the closed half-spaces of P bounded by⟨ S⟩ by Theorem 6.2.5, but P contains points of B(x, r) on both sides of ⟨S ⟩which is a contradiction. Therefore x must be in C○. Thus (C)○ c C○, and so C○ = (C)○.

3. By (1) and (2), we have ∂C○ = C○ — (C○)○ = C — C○ = ∂C. and ∂C = C — (C)○ = C — C○ = ∂C. 4. As C○ c C c C, we have ⟨C○ ⟩ c ⟨C ⟩ c ⟨C ⟩. Now since C = C○ and c ⟨C○ ⟩, and so ⟨C ⟩ c ⟨C○ ⟩. Therefore⟨ C○⟩ = ⟨ C⟩ = ⟨C ⟩.

5. (5) follows from (4).

⟨C○ ⟩is closed, C

Exercise 6.2.3 Let P be a hyperplane of X. An open half-space of X bounded

by P is a connected component of X —P . A closed half-space of X bounded by P is the topological closure of an open half-space of X bounded by P . Prove that every open half-space of X and every closed half-space of X is convex.

Solution: Assume first that X = En. By Exercise 1.3.6, there exists a unit vector u in En and a real number s such that P = {x ∈ En : u · x = s}.

Let H+ = {x ∈ En : u · x > s}. If x, y ∈ H+ and 0 ≤ t ≤ 1, then u · ((1 — t)x + ty) = (1 — t)u · x + tu · y > (1 — t)s + ts = s.

Hence H+ is convex, and so H+ is connected. Likewise H− = {x ∈ En : u·x < s} is convex and connected. As En —P is the union of the disjoint, open, connected sets H+ and H−, we deduce that H+ and H− are the connected components of En — P . Thus, every open half-space of En is convex, and every closed half-space of En is convex by Theorem 6.2.1.

141

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Next, assume that X = Sn. Let u be a vector in Sn orthogonal to P . Then P = {x ∈ Sn : u · x = 0}. Let H+ = {x ∈ Sn : u · x > 0}. Then H+ does not contain a pair of antipodal points ±x. Let x, y ∈ H+. Then [x, y] = {((1 — t)x + ty)/|(1 — t)x + ty| : 0 ≤ t ≤ 1}.

If 0 ≤ t ≤ 1, then u · ((1 — t)x + ty) = (1 — t)u · x + tu · y > 0, and so [x, y] c H+. Hence H+ is convex, and so H+ is connected by Exercise 6.2.1. Likewise H− = {x ∈ En : u·x < 0} is convex and connected. As Sn —P is the union of the disjoint, open, connected sets H+ and H−, we deduce that H+ and H− are the connected components of Sn — P . Thus, every open half-space of Sn is convex, and every closed half-space of Sn is convex by Theorem 6.2.1.

Now, assume that X = Hn. Let u be a vector in Hn Lorentz orthogonal to P . Then P = {x ∈ Hn : u ◦ x = 0}. Let H+ = {x ∈ Hn : u ◦ x > 0}. Let x, y ∈ H+. Then [x, y] = {((1 — t)x + ty)/|||(1 — t)x + ty||| : 0 ≤ t ≤ 1}.

If 0 ≤ t ≤ 1, then u ◦ ((1 — t)x + ty) = (1 — t)u ◦ x + tu · y > 0, and so [x, y] c H+. Hence H+ is convex, and so H+ is connected. Likewise H− = {x ∈ Hn : u ◦ x < 0} is convex and connected. As Hn — P is the union of the disjoint, open, connected sets H+ and H−, we deduce that H+ and H− are the connected components of Hn— P . Thus, every open half-space of Hn is convex, and every closed half-space of Hn is convex by Theorem 6.2.1.

Exercise 6.2.4 Let C be a closed proper subset of X. Prove that C is convex if and only if C is the intersection of all the closed half-spaces of X that contain C. Solution: First assume that C is the intersection of all the closed half-spaces of X that contain C. Each closed half-space of X is convex by Exercise 6.2.3.

Therefore C is convex, since it is the intersection of convex sets.

Conversely, suppose that C is convex. Let K be the intersection of all the closed half-spaces of X that contain C. Clearly Cc K. Let x be a point of X —C. We claim that x /∈K. As C is closed there is a point y of C that is nearest to x. Let r = d(x, y). Then B(x, r) c X — C. First assume that X = Sn and d(x, y)≥ π/2. Then B(x, π/2)c X — C. Hence C c C( —x, π/2). As x /∈C( —x, π/2), we have that x /∈ K. Hence, we may assume d(x, y) < π/2 when X = Sn. We return to the general case with this last assumption. Let H be the closed half-space of X containing y in ∂H such that [x, y] is orthogonal to ∂H and x ∈ X — H. Then y is the nearest point of ∂H to x by the theorem of 142

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Pythagoras. Hence y is the nearest point of H to x, since a geodesic arc from x to a point in H○ must meet ∂H. Therefore B(x, r) c X — H. We claim that C c H. On the contrary, suppose there is a point z of C in X —H. Then y and z are a proper pair, since z/∈ ∂H. Now [y, z]c C, since C is convex, but [y, z] meets B(x, r), since B(x, r) is tangent to ∂H at y, which is a contradiction. Therefore C c H, and so x /∈ K. Hence X — C c X — K, and so K c C. Thus C = K. Exercise 6.2.5 Let C be a closed convex subset of Sn. Prove that C is contained in an open hemisphere of Sn if and only if C does not contain a pair of antipodal points.

Solution: If C is contained in an open hemisphere of Sn, then clearly C does not contain a pair of antipodal points. Conversely, suppose C does not contain a pair of antipodal points. The proof is by induction on n. If n = 0, then C is a single point and the result is clear. Now suppose n > 0 and the result is true in dimensions less than n. Now C is not Sn, and so C is contained in a closed hemisphere H of Sn by Exercise 6.2.4. Then C∩ ∂H is a closed convex subset of ∂H that does not contain any antipodal points. By the induction hypothesis, there is a closed hemisphere K of ∂H such that C ∩ ∂H c K○. We now rotate H slightly about the (n — 2)-sphere ∂K so that K moves away from C to obtain a closed hemisphere H′ of Sn such that C c (H′)○.

Exercise 6.2.6 Let C be a subset of Sn or Hn. Define K(C) to be the union of all the rays in En+1 from the origin passing through a point of C. Prove that C is a convex subset of Sn or Hn if and only if K(C) is a convex subset of En+1.

Solution: Suppose C is a convex subset of Sn. Let x and y be distinct points of K(C). If x and y are linearly dependent, then [x, y] c K(C) by definition.

Hence, we may assume that x and y are linearly independent. Now x/| x| , y/ |y | is a proper pair of points of C, and so the geodesic segment [x/| x| , y/|y |] is contained in C. This implies that the angle between the rays from 0, determined by x and y, is in K(C), and so [x, y] c K(C). Thus K(C) is convex.

Conversely, suppose K(C) is convex. Let x, y be a proper pair of points of C. Then [x, y] c K(C). Now [x, y] does not contain 0, since x /= —y. Hence z/| z| is in C for all z in [x, y]. Therefore, the geodesic segment [x, y] in Sn is contained in C. Thus C is convex in Sn. Suppose C is a convex subset of Hn. Let x and y be distinct points of K(C). If x and y are linearly dependent, then [x, y] c K(C) by definition.

Hence, we may assume that x and y are linearly independent. Then x and y are positive time-like and x/ ||| x|||, y/|||y||| are distinct points of C. Hence, the geodesic segment [x/ x , y/||| y|||] is contained in C. This implies that the ||| ||| angle between the rays from 0, determined by x and y, is in K(C), and so [x, y] c K(C). Thus K(C) is convex.

Conversely, suppose K(C) is convex. Let x, y be distinct points of C, Then [x, y] c K(C). Now all the points of [x, y] are positive time-like by Theorem 143

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

3.1.1. Hence z/|||z ||| is in C for all z in [x, y]. Therefore, the geodesic segment [x, y] in Hn is contained in C. Thus C is convex in Hn. Exercise 6.2.7 Let C be a bounded convex subset of Sn or Hn. Prove that T is a side of K(C) if and only if there is a side S of C such that T = K(S).

Solution:

Clearly we have K(C)○

=

K(C○) — {0}

=

K((C)○) — {0}

and ∂K(C)

=

K(C) — K(C)○

=

K(C) — K((C)○) — {0}

=

K(∂C) = K(∂C).

Therefore ∂K(C) is the union of the rays from 0 through the points of ∂C. As a ray is convex, each ray from 0 through a point of ∂C is contained in a side of K(C). Let T be a side of K(C). Then T is a union of rays from 0 through points of ∂C. Therefore T = K(T∩X) with T ∩ X a nonempty subset of ∂C. The set T ∩X is convex in X, since T is convex in En+1. Hence, there is a side S of C such that T∩ X c S. Now T = K(T ∩X) cK(S) and K(S) is a convex subset of ∂K(C), and so T = K(S).

Conversely, let S be a side of C. Then K(S) is a nonempty convex subset of ∂K(C). Let T be the side of K(C) containing K(S). Then there is a side S′ of C such that T = K(S′). As K(S) c K(S′), we have S c S′, and so S = S′.

Thus K(S) is a side of K(C).

Exercise 6.2.8 Let C be a bounded, m-dimensional, convex, proper subset of X with m > 0. Prove that ∂C is homeomorphic to Sm−1.

Solution: We may assume that m = n. If X = En or Hn, then C is a bounded subset of X, since C is bounded. If X = Sn, then C is a proper subset of Sn, since ∂C = ∂C is nonempty. Therefore C is contained in a closed hemisphere H of Sn by Exercise 6.2.4.

Let x be a point of C○. Then there is an r > 0 such that C(x, r)c C○. Let y be a point of S(x, r). If X = En or Hn, let R(x, y) be the geodesic ray from x passing through y. If X = Sn, let R(x, y) be the geodesic segment from x to —x passing through y. If X = En or Hn, then R (x, y) meets X — C, since n — x is in S— C is bounded. If X = Sn, then R(x, y) meets — Sn C, since C. Therefore R(x, y) must meet ∂C at a point z, since R(x, y) is connected. The point z is unique by Theorem 6.2.2.

If z is a point of ∂C, then the geodesic segment [x, z] meets S(x, r) in a unique point y, since [x, z] is connected and d(x, z) > r. Thus, the map φ : ∂C → S(x, r) defined by φ(z) = y as above is a bijection. The map φ is clearly continuous and ∂C is compact, and so φ is a homeomorphism.

144

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

6.3

Convex Polyhedra

Exercise 6.3.1 Let P be a subset of Sn or Hn. Prove that P is a compact convex polyhedron in Sn or Hn if and only if K(P ) is a convex polyhedron in En+1. See Exercises 6.2.6 and 6.2.7. You may use Theorem 6.4.1.

Solution: Suppose P is a compact convex polyhedron in Sn or Hn. Then P is a closed nonempty convex subset of Sn or Hn with only finitely many sides.

Hence K(P ) is a closed nonempty convex subset of En+1 with only finitely many sides by Exercises 6.2.6 and 6.2.7. Therefore K(P ) is a convex polyhedron in En+1.

Conversely, suppose K(P ) is a convex polyhedron in En+1. Then K(P ) has only finitely many sides, since all the sides of K(P ) are incident with 0. Let L(0) be the link of 0 in K(P ). Then L(0) is a convex spherical polyhedron by Theorem 6.4.1, and so L(0) is compact. The link L(0) radially projects onto P , and so P is compact. Therefore P is a compact nonempty convex subset of Sn or Hn with only finitely many sides by Exercises 6.2.6 and 6.2.7. Therefore P is a compact convex polyhedron in Sn or Hn. Exercise 6.3.2 Let Hbe a family of closed half-spaces of X such that ∂ H = = .∅ Prove that ∩H is a convex { ∂H : H ∈ H} is locally finite and ∩H / polyhedron in X. Solution: Let C = ∩H . Then C is a nonempty closed convex subset of X. Let S be a side of C, and let x be a point of S○. There is an r > 0 such that B(x, r) meets only finitely many members ofH ∂ = {∂H : H ∈ H} . By shrinking B(x, r), we may assume that B(x, r) meets just the members of H ∂ that contain x. As x ∈ ∂C, there is a point y in B(x, r) such that y is not in C. Hence y is not in H for some H inH. Hence [x, y] meets ∂H. Therefore B(x, r) meets ∂H, and so x is in ∂H, Now each diameter of B(x, r)∩ S must lie in ∂H, and so S c ∂H. As ∂H ∩ C is a convex subset of C, there is a side T of C such that ∂H ∩ C c T , As S c T , we have that S = T . Therefore S = ∂H∩ C. Now as {∂H ∩ C : H ∈ H} is locally finite, the set of sides of C is locally finite, and so C is a convex polyhedron in X. Exercise 6.3.3 Let P be an infinite sided convex polygon in E2 all of whose vertices lie on H1. Show that the family of lines{⟨ S⟩ : S is a side of P} is not locally finite at the origin. √ 2 The hyperbola H1 has the equation y— x2 = 1. Hence y = 1 + x2 Solution: √ and y′ = x/ 1 + x2. The equation of the tangent line to H1 at (x0, y0) is x0 y — y0 = √ (x — x0).

1 + x20 The y-intercept is y0 — √

x02

q = 2

1 + x0

2

1 + x0 — √ 145

x02 1 + x02

= √

1 1 + x20

.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Therefore, the y-intercept goes to zero as x0 goes to infinity.

The slope of a side S with vertices (x0, y0) and (x1, y1), with 0 < x0 < x1, is greater than the slope of the tangent line at (x0, y0). Hence, the y-intercept of the line ⟨S ⟩is less than the y-intercept of the tangent line to H1 at (x0, y0).

Therefore, the set of lines{⟨ S⟩ : S is a side of P} is not locally finite at the origin.

Exercise 6.3.4 Let P be an m-dimensional convex polyhedron in X. Prove that P is compact and P /= ⟨P ⟩ if and only if ∂P is homeomorphic to Sm−1.

Solution: Suppose P is compact and P /= ⟨P ⟩. Then ∂P is homeomorphic to Sm−1 by Exercise 6.2.8. Conversely, suppose ∂P is homeomorphic to Sm−1.

If m = 1, then P is a geodesic segment, and so P is compact. If m > 1 and X = En or Hn, then the same argument as in the proof of Theorem 6.3.6 shows that P is compact; moreover, P /= ⟨P ⟩, since P is bounded. If X = Sn, then P is compact; moreover, P /= ⟨P ⟩, since ∂P is nonempty.

Exercise 6.3.5 Let P be a convex polyhedron in En or Hn. Prove that P is compact if and only if P does not contain a geodesic ray.

Solution: If P is compact, then P is bounded, and so P can not contain a geodesic ray. Conversely, suppose P does not contain a geodesic ray. We may assume that dim P = n. Let x be a point of P ○. Then there is an r > 0 such that C(x, r) c P ○. Let φ : ∂P →S(x, r) be the radial projection map as in Exercise 6.2.8. Then φ is a continuous bijection.

Let z be a point of ∂P , and let s > 0 be such that s < d(x, z) — r. Then φ maps B(z, s) ∩ ∂P onto an open ball in S(x, r), and so φ is an open map.

Therefore φ is a homeomorphism. Hence ∂P is compact. Therefore ∂P c C(x, t) for some t > 0. Then P c C(x, t), and so P is bounded. Thus P is compact.

Exercise 6.3.6 Let P be a convex polyhedron in En. Prove that P is compact if and only if the volume of P in ⟨P ⟩ is finite.

Solution: We may assume that dim P = n. If P is compact, then P is bounded, and so Vol(P ) is finite. Conversely, suppose Vol(P ) is finite. On the contrary, suppose P is not compact. Then P contains a geodesic ray R starting at a point x in P ○ by the argument in Exercise 6.3.5. Let r > 0 such that B(x, r) c P ○. Then P contains the cone from each point of R to B(x, r).

Therefore P contains N (R, r). As Vol(N (R, r)) is infinite, Vol(P ) is infinite, which is a contradiction. Thus P must be compact.

Exercise 6.3.7 Let P be an m-dimensional convex polyhedron in Sn such that the intersection of all the sides of P is a great k-sphere Σ of Sn. Let Σ′ be the great (m — k — 1)-sphere of ⟨P ⟩ that is pointwise orthogonal to Σ. Prove that 1. P ∩ Σ′ is an (m — k — 1)-dimensional convex polyhedron in Sn. 2. If (m — k — 1) > 0, then T is a side of P ∩ Σ′ if and only if there is a side S of P such that T = S ∩ Σ′.

146

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

3. P ∩ Σ′ is contained in an open hemisphere of Sn. Solution: We may assume that m = n. Now P ∩Σ′ is a closed convex subset of Sn, since P and Σ′ are closed convex subsets of Sn. Let x be a point of P ○, and let y be a point of Σ nearest to x. Then the geodesic segment [x, y] is orthogonal to Σ and the half-open geodesic segments (y, x] and [x, — y) are in P ○

by Theorem 6.2.2. Hence, the midpoint z of the great semi-circle [y, x] ∪ [x,—y] is in P ○. The point z is in P ○ ∩ Σ′. Therefore P ○ ∩ Σ′ is not empty.

Now P ○ ∩ Σ′ c (P ∩ Σ′)○. Let x be a point in (P ∩Σ′)○. Then there is an r > 0 such that B(x, r) ∩ Σ′ c P ∩ Σ′.

Let y be a point of Σ nearest to x. Then for each point z in B(x, r), the geodesic segments [y, z] and [z,— y] are in P . Therefore x is in P ○. Hence P ○ ∩ Σ′ = (P ∩ Σ′)○. Therefore ∂P ∩ Σ′ = ∂(P ∩ Σ′).

Suppose n— k —1 = 0. Then k = n — 1. Hence P has just one side. Therefore P is a closed hemisphere of Sn and P ∩ Σ′ is the center of P .

Now suppose n — k — 1 > 0. Then k < n — 1, and so P has at least two sides. Let S be a side of P . Then Σ is a proper face of S. By the first argument S○ ∩ Σ′ is not empty. Hence, there is a side T of P ∩ Σ′ such that S ∩ Σ′ c T .

Now T is a convex subset of ∂P , and so there is a side S′ of P such that T c S′.

As T c Σ′, we have T c S′ ∩ Σ′. Hence S○ ∩ Σ′ c S′ ∩ Σ, and so S = S′.

Therefore S ∩ Σ′ is the side T of P ∩ Σ′. As ∂P ∩ Σ′ = ∂(P ∩ Σ′), every side T of P ∩ Σ′ is of the form S ∩ Σ′ for some side S of P . Thus T is a side of P ∩ Σ′ if and only if there is a side S of P such that T = S ∩ Σ′. Hence P ∩ Σ′ has only finitely many sides. Thus P ∩ Σ′ is an (n — k — 1)-dimensional convex polyhedron in Sn. Now, the intersection of the sides of P ∩ Σ′ is Σ ∩ Σ′ = ∅.

Therefore P ∩ Σ′ is contained in an open hemisphere of Sn by Theorem 6.3.16.

6.4

Geometry of Convex Polyhedra

Exercise 6.4.1 Let x be a point of an m-dimensional convex polyhedron P in X, with m > 0, let r be a real number such that 0 < r < π/2 and r is less than the distance from x to any side of P not containing x, let L(x) = P∩ S(x, r), and let F (x) be the carrier face of x in P . Prove that 1. L(x) is a great (m — 1)-sphere of S(x, r) if and only if x is in P ○; 2. the intersection of all the sides of L(x) is a great (k — 1)-sphere of S(x, r) if and only if dim F (x) = k with 0 < k < m; 3. L(x) is contained in an open hemisphere of S(x, r) if and only if x is a vertex of P .

Solution: We may assume that m = n. If x is in P ○, then L(x) = P ∩ S(x, r) = S(x, r). If x is in ∂P , then by Theorems 6.3.14 and 6.4.1, the intersection of all the sides of L(x) is the set ∩{S ∩ S(x, r) : S ∈ S(x)} = ∩{S : S ∈ S(x)} ∩ S(x, r) = F (x) ∩ S(x, r).

147

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

If dim F (x) = k with 0 < k < n, then F (x) ∩ S(x, r) c F (x)○, and so F (x) ∩S(x, r) is a great (k —1)-sphere of S(x, r). If x is a vertex of P , then F (x) ∩S(x, r) = , and ∅ so the intersection of all the sides of L(x) is empty. By Theorem 6.3.16, we deduce (1), (2), and (3).

Exercise 6.4.2 Let P be a convex polyhedron in Bn with only finitely many sides. Prove that every ideal point of P is a horopoint of P .

Solution: Let u be an ideal point of P . We pass to the upper half-space model U n of hyperbolic space and position P so that u =∞ . Then P has only finitely many hemispherical sides, and so a sufficiently high closed horoball C based at ∞ meets just the vertical sides of P . Thus u = ∞ is a horopoint of P .

Exercise 6.4.3 Find an example of a convex polygon in D2 of finite area with an infinite number of sides. √ Solution: Let P be a convex polygon in D2 with sides [0, 2 — 1], [0, i) and [zj, zj+1] for j = 1, 2, . . . with {z j } j∞= 1 an infinite sequence of complex numbers √ √ on the circle S(—1, 2) such that z1 = 2 — 1 and Im(zj+1) > Im(zj) for each j and zj →i as j → ∞. Then P is a subset of the right triangle T with vertex 0 and ideal vertices 1 and i. Hence Area(P ) < Area(T ) = π/2.

Exercise 6.4.4 Let P be a convex polyhedron in Bn such that P has finite volume in ⟨P ⟩. Prove that P is has finitely many sides if and only if every ideal point of P is a horopoint of P .

Solution: We may assume that dim P = n. Suppose P has only finitely many sides. Let u be an ideal point of P . Then there is an r > 0 such that B(u, r) in En meets just the sides of P incident with u. Then a horoball based at u contained in B(u, r) meets just the sides of P incident with u. Thus u is a horopoint of P .

Conversely, suppose every ideal point of P is a horopoint of P . Let u be an ideal point of P . Let C be a closed horoball based a u such that C meets just the sides of P that are incident with u. As P has finite volume, P∩ C has finite volume. Let Σ = ∂C. By passing to the upper half-space model U n of hyperbolic space and positioning P so that u =∞ , we see that Vol(P∩ Σ) is finite in Σ. Hence P ∩ Σ is compact by Exercise 6.3.6. Therefore u is an ideal vertex of P . We pass to the projective disk model Dn of hyperbolic space.

Then P is a convex polyhedron in En by Theorem 6.4.6. Therefore P has only finitely many sides, since P is compact. Hence P has only finitely many sides

by Theorem 6.4.2.

Exercise 6.4.5 Let P be an m-dimensional convex subset of Hn with m > 1.

Prove that P is a convex finite-sided polyhedron in Hn such that P has finite volume in ⟨P ⟩ if and only if K(P ) is a convex polyhedron in En+1. See Exercise 6.2.6.

148

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Clearly K(P )○ = K(P ○) — {0} and K(∂P ) c ∂K(P ). Suppose x is a point of ∂K(P ) — {0}. Then there is a sequence { x i } i∞= 1 of points of K(P )○ converging to x. Let R be the ray from 0 through x, and let Ri be the ray from 0 through xi for each i. Then Ric K(P ○) for each i and{ Ri}converges to R. Therefore R is in ∂K(P ). Hence ∂K(P ) is a union of rays from the origin.

As gnomonic projection µ : Dn → Hn is an isometry, the convex geometry of K(P ) ∩ P (en, 1) is the same as µ−1(P ) in En. By Theorem 6.4.2, we have ∂K(P ) = K(∂P ) ∪ {light rays corresponding to the ideal points of µ−1(P )}.

Moreover, the sides of K(P ) correspond to the sides of µ−1(P ) in En. Suppose that P is a finite-sided convex polyhedron such that P has finite volume in ⟨P ⟩. By Theorems 6.4.6, 6.4.7, and 6.4.8, we have that µ−1(P ) has only finitely many ideal points. Hence µ−1(P )) has only finitely many sides by Theorem 6.4.2. Therefore K(P ) has only finitely many sides. Hence K(P ) is a convex polyhedron in En+1.

Conversely, suppose K(P ) is a convex polyhedron in En+1. Then K(P ) has only finitely many sides, since every side of K(P ) is incident with 0. Therefore K(P ) ∩ P (en, 1) has only finitely many sides, and so µ−1(P ) has only finitely many sides. Therefore µ−1(P ) is a convex polyhedron in En. Hence P has only finitely many sides and P has finite volume in ⟨P ⟩ by Theorem 6.4.8.

6.5

Polytopes

Exercise 6.5.1 Prove that a subset S of En is an m-simplex if and only if S is the convex hull of an affinely independent subset {v0, . . . , vm} of En. Solution: Suppose S is an m-simplex with vertices v0, v1, . . . , vm. Then S is the convex hull of {v0, v1, . . . , vm}, since S is a polytope. Hence ⟨S⟩ is the affine hull of {v0, v1, . . . , vm}. Therefore v0, v1, . . . , vm are affinely independent, since dim⟨S⟩ = m.

Conversely, suppose v0, . . . , vm are affinely independent. Let S = C({v0, . . . , vm}).

We prove that S is an m-simplex with vertices v0, . . . , vm by induction on m. This is certainly true if m = 0, so assume m > 0 and the convex hull C( v{0, . . . , vˆi, . . . , vm}) is an (m —1)-simplex Si with vertices v0, . . . , vˆi, . . . , vm for each i. Now we have m

S=

Σ

m

tivi : ti ≥ 0 for each i and

i=0

Σ

} ti = 1 .

i=0

Hence, we have m

∂S =

Σ

m

tivi : ti ≥ 0 for each i,

i=0

Σ i=0

149

} ti = 1, and tj = 0 for some j .

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Therefore, we have ∂S = S0 ∪ S1 ∪ · · · ∪ Sm. Σm Suppose x is in S○, and y is in Sk — Sj. Then x = i=0 tivi with ti > 0 Σm Σm j for all i /= j, tj = 0 and ti = 1, and y = sivi with si ≥ 0 for all i, i=0 i=0 Σm sk = 0, s j > 0, and i=0 si = 1. Let t be in R with 0 < t < 1. Then we have (1 — t)x + ty =

m Σ

(1 — t)ti + tsi vi

i=0

Σm with (1 — t)ti + tsi > 0 for each i and i=0(1 — t)ti + si = 1. Hence (1 — t)x + ty is in S○. Therefore Sj is a maximal convex subset of ∂S for each j. Hence S is a convex polyhedron with exactly m + 1 sides, S0, . . . , Sm. Now Sj is an (m — 1)-simplex with vertices v0, . . . , v̂ j , . . . , vm for each j. Hence v0, . . . , vm are the vertices of S. Therefore S is a convex polytope with exactly m + 1 vertices.

Thus S is an m-simplex.

Exercise 6.5.2 An edge of a convex polyhedron P in X is a 1-face of P . Prove that an m-dimensional polytope in X, with m > 1, has at least m(m + 1)/2 edges and at least m(m + 1)/2 ridges.

Solution: By Theorem 6.5.2, an m-dimensional polytope P in X has at least m + 1 vertices. By Theorem 6.3.12, each vertex of P is a side of at least m edges of P . Each edge has two vertices and so P has at least (m + 1)m/2 edges.

By Theorem 6.5.3, the polytope P has at least m + 1 sides and each side of P has at least m sides. Now each ridge of P is a side of just two sides of P by Theorem 6.3.5. Hence P has at least (m + 1)m/2 ridges.

Exercise 6.5.3 Prove that an m-simplex in X has m+1 k-faces for each k = k+1 0, . . . , m.

Solution: Let ∆ be an m-simplex in X. Then ∆ is the convex hull of its vertices v0, . . . , vm. If m = 0, then ∆ has only one face, itself, and 11 = 1. Hence, we may assume that m > 0. Then the sides of ∆ are{ C({v0, . . . , vˆi, . . . , vm} ) : i = 0, 1, . . . , m } , and so each side of ∆ is an (m— 1)-simplex by Exercise 6.5.1. It follows by induction that the k-faces of ∆ are the convex hulls of all the sets of k + 1 of the vertices of ∆. Hence ∆ has m+1 k-faces. k+1 Exercise 6.5.4 Let P be a polytope in X. Prove that the centroid of P is in P ○.

Solution: Let v1, . . . , vk be the vertices of a polytope P in En. Let ci be the centroid of the set {v1, . . . , vi}. Let Fi be the smallest face of P that contains {v1, . . . , vi}. We prove that ci is in Fi○ by induction on i. This is certainly true for i = 1, so suppose i > 1 and ci−1 is in Fi○—1. Now observe that ci =

1 i—1 ci−1 + vi i i 150

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

is a convex combination of ci−1 and vi. If Fi−1 = Fi, then ci−1 is in Fi○, and so ci is in Fi○. Suppose Fi−1 /= Fi. Then Fi−1 is the smallest face of Fi that contains {v1, . . . , vi−1}, since the intersection of two faces of P is a face of P .

Hence Fi−1 is a proper face of Fi. Let S be a side of Fi containing ci−1. Then Fi○ meets S at ci−1, and so Fi−1 c S. Hence vi is not in S. Therefore ci−1 —1 and vi are not in the same side of Fi. Hence ci is in Fi○ by Theorem 6.2.7. Thus ck is in P ○.

The proof for the cases X = Hn or Sn is the same except that we replace the equation 1 i—1 ci = ci−1 + vi i i with the observation that ci is in the open geodesic segment (ci−1, vi).

Exercise 6.5.5 Prove that the centroid of a regular polytope P in X is the only point of ⟨P ⟩ fixed by all the symmetries of P in ⟨P ⟩.

Solution: On the contrary, suppose x is another point of⟨ P⟩ that is fixed by the group Γ of symmetries of P in⟨ P⟩. Then Γ fixes the geodesic L through x and the centroid c of P . The geodesic L intersects ∂P in a point y. Let F be the k-face of P such that y is in F ○. As Γ acts transitively on the set of k-faces of P , we have a contradiction, since P has at least two k-faces by Theorem 6.5.3.

Exercise 6.5.6 Let ∆ be an m-simplex in En with m > 0. Prove that ∆ is inscribed in a sphere of ⟨∆⟩.

Solution: The proof is by induction on m. This is clear if m = 1. Assume m > 1 and the result is true for (m— 1)-simplices. Let S be a side of ∆. Then S is an (m —1)-simplex. Hence S is inscribed in a (m— 2)-sphere Σ of⟨ S⟩ . Let v be the vertex of ∆ opposite S. Let φ be a Möbius transformation of Ê n such that φ(⟨ ∆⟩ ) = ⟨∆ ⟩ and φ(v) = ∞. Then φ(Σ) is an (m —2)-sphere of⟨ ∆⟩ . Let Q be the (m—1)-plane of⟨ ∆⟩ containing φ(Σ), and let Σ′ = φ − 1 (Q̂). Then Σ′ is an (m —1)-sphere of ⟨∆ ⟩containing Σ and v, and so ∆ is inscribed in Σ′.

This completes the induction.

Exercise 6.5.7 Let P be a polytope in X that is inscribed in a sphere Σ of ⟨P ⟩. Prove that Σ is unique.

Solution: Assume first that X = En. The proof is by induction on m. This is clear if m = 1. Assume m > 1 and the result is true for polytopes of dimension m — 1. Let S be a side of P . Then S is a polytope of dimension m— 1. Now S is inscribed in the (m —2)-sphere Σ′ = Σ ∩ ⟨S ⟩ of ⟨S ,⟩ and so Σ′ is unique by the induction hypothesis. Let v be a vertex of P that is not in S. Let φ be a Möbius transformation of Ê n such that⟨φ(⟩ P ) = ⟨ P⟩ and φ(v) = ∞ . Then φ(Σ′) is an (m — 2)-sphere in⟨ P⟩ . Hence, there is a unique (m— 1)-plane Q of ⟨P ⟩ containing φ(Σ′). Therefore Σ = φ − 1 (Q̂) is the unique sphere of ⟨ P ⟩ containing Σ′ and v. This completes the induction.

If X = Bn or Sn, then the result follows by a similar argument, since n B c En and Sn c En+1.

151

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 6.5.8 Prove that the group of symmetries of a regular n-simplex in X is isomorphic to the group of permutations of its vertices.

Solution: Let ∆ be a regular n-simplex in X. Then ∆ has n + 1 vertices v0, . . . , vn. Let Fi = C({v0, . . . , vi}) for each i = 0, . . . n. Then (F0, . . . , Fn) and ({v1}, F1, . . . , Fn) are flags of ∆ and so there is a symmetry g of ∆ such that g(F0, . . . , Fn) = ({v1}, F1, . . . , Fn) Then gv0 = v1. Now F1 = C({v0, v1}) and F2 = C({v0, v1, v2}). As gF1 = F1 and gF2 = F2, we have that gv1 = v0 and gv2 = v2. Likewise gFi−1 = Fi and gFi = Fi implies that gvi = vi for each i = 2, . . . , n. Hence g fixes v2, . . . , vn.

Thus g restricts to the transposition of v0 and v1 on {v0, . . . , vn} . Likewise, every transposition of two vertices of ∆ is induced by a symmetry of ∆. Hence, restriction maps the group of symmetries Γ of ∆ onto the group of permutations of the set of vertices of ∆. The only symmetry of ∆ that fixes all the vertices of ∆ is the identity, since ∆ is the convex hull of its vertices. Therefore Γ is isomorphic to the group of permutations of the set of vertices of ∆.

Exercise 6.5.9 Let P and Q be combinatorially equivalent, n-dimensional, regular polytopes in X. Prove that P and Q are similar if and only if the dihedral angle of P is equal to the dihedral angle of Q. Solution: If P and Q are similar in X, then the dihedral angle between adjacent sides of P is equal to the dihedral angle between adjacent sides of Q. Conversely, suppose that the dihedral angle between adjacent sides of P is equal to the dihedral angle between adjacent sides of Q. The proof is by induction on n. If n = 1, then P and Q are similar in X. Now assume n = 2.

Let m be the number of sides of P and Q, and let θ be the dihedral angle of P and Q. Then barycentric subdivision subdivides P and Q into 2m right triangles with angles π/2, θ/2, π/m. As all these triangles are similar, we deduce that P and Q are similar.

Now assume n > 2 and the result is true in dimension n — 1. By the induction hypothesis, all the links of the vertices of P that are at a equidistance from the the vertices of P are congruent to all the links of the vertices of Q at the same equidistance from the vertices of Q. The dihedral angles between adjacent sides of a side of P (resp. Q) are the dihedral angles between adjacent sides of a side of a link of a vertex of P (resp. Q). Hence, the sides of P are similar in X to the sides of Q by the induction hypothesis. Let S be a side of P and let T be a side of Q. Then there is a similarity g of X such that g(⟨ P⟩ ) = ⟨ Q⟩ , gS = T , and gP lies in the half-space of⟨ Q⟩ bounded by⟨ T⟩ that contains Q. Then gP = Q by the same argument as in the last paragraph of the proof of Theorem 6.5.15.

Exercise 6.5.10 Prove that a subset P of En is a polytope if and only if P is the convex hull of a nonempty finite set of points of En. Solution: If P is a polytope in En, then by definition P has only finitely many vertices and P is the convex hull of its vertices.

152

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Conversely, suppose x1, . . . , xk are points of En and P = C({ x1, . . . , xk} ).

Then P is a compact convex subset of En. Let S be a side of P , and let S0 = S ∩ {x1, . . . , xk}. We claim that S = C(S0). As S0 c S and S is convex, we have that C(S0) c S. Let x be a point of S, let S1 be a minimal subset of {x1, . . . , xk} such that x is in C(S1), and let m = dim C(S1). Then |S1| ≥ m + 1, and |S1| ≤ m + 1 by Exercise 1.4.13, and so |S1| = m + 1.

Hence S1 is affinely independent, and so C(S1) is an m-simplex by Exercise 6.5.1. The point x is in C(S1)○, since S1 is minimal. Let r > 0 be such that B(x, r) ∩⟨ C(S1) C(S ⟩ c1). Then C(S1) S , csince ⟨ ⟩ otherwise we could derive a contradiction from Theorem 6.2.5 applied to a plane spanned by S and a point of C(S 1 )—⟨S⟩. Hence C(S1) c P ∩⟨S⟩ = S. Therefore S1 c S. Hence S1 c S0, and so x is in C(S0). Therefore S c C(S0), and so S = C(S0).

Now {x1, . . . , xk }has only finitely many subsets, and so P has only finitely many sides. Therefore P is a convex polyhedron in En. As P is compact, P is a polytope by Theorem 6.5.1.

Exercise 6.5.11 Let P be a regular polytope in X. Prove that the dual P ′ of P is a regular polytope in X whose dual P ′′ is combinatorially equivalent to P .

Solution: We may assume that dim P = n. We prove by induction on n that P ′ is a regular polytope such that the sides of P ′ are in one-to-one correspondence with the vertices of P in such a way that if v is a vertex of P and Cy is the set of all the centroids of the sides of P that contain v, then C(C y) is the side of P ′ corresponding to v. If n = 1, then P ′ = P and the result is clear. Assume n > 1 and the result is true for all (n — 1)-dimensional regular polytopes in X. Let a be the centroid of P , and let c be the centroid of a side S of P . Every symmetry of S in ⟨ S⟩ extends to a unique symmetry of P . Let b be the point of ⟨S ⟩ nearest to a. Then all the symmetries of P that leave S invariant fix both a and b. Hence b = c by Exercise 6.5.5 applied to S. Therefore [a, c] is normal to⟨ S⟩ . Let r = d(a, c) and let C be the set of centroids of the sides of P . Then C(a, r) — C c P ○, since C is the set of nearest points of ∂P to a. Note that S(a, r) is the inscribed sphere of P .

Let v be a vertex of P , let S be a side of P containing v, let c be the centroid of S, and let s = d(c, v). The points a, c, v form a right triangle in X. If X = Sn, then P is contained in an open hemisphere of Sn, and so r < π/2 and s < π/2.

Therefore d(a, v) > r, s by the theorem of Pythagoras in X (Formula (1) of Exercises 2.5.2 and 3.5.2). Now S(a, r) is tangent to⟨ S⟩ at c and S(v, s) is normal to ⟨ S⟩ at c, and so S(a, r) and S(v, s) are orthogonal at c.

Let L(v) = P ∩ Σ be a link of v in P with Σ a sphere centered at v such that Σ c X —C(a, r). Then L(v) is an (n —1)-dimensional regular polytope in Σ. Hence L(v)′ is an (n — 1)-dimensional regular polytope in Σ by the induction hypothesis. Every symmetry of a side S∩ Σ of L(v) extends to a unique symmetry of the side S of P that fixes v. Every symmetry of S that fixes v also fixes each point of [c, v], and so [c, v] ∩ Σ is the centroid d of S ∩ Σ

by Exercise 6.5.5 applied to S ∩ Σ. Let Dy be the set of centroids of the sides of L(v). Then Dy is the set of vertices of L(v)′.

153

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Let Cy be the set of centroids of the sides of P that contain v. Each c in Cy lies on the (n — 2)-sphere S(a, r) ∩ S(v, s). Hence Cy lies in the hyperplane ⟨S(a, r)∩ S(v, s)⟩ of X. The hyperplane ⟨S(a, r)∩ S(v, s)⟩ is orthogonal to [a, v].

Radial projection from v mapsDy bijectively onto Cy. Hence, radial projection from v maps L(v)′ bijectively onto C( C y). Therefore C( C y) is a regular (n— 1)dimensional polytope in X which is combinatorial equivalent to L(v)′.

Now S(v, s)∩B(a, r) c P ○. Hence, if x is in S(v, s)∩B(a, r), then [x, v) c P ○

by Theorem 6.2.7. Therefore S(a, r) ∩ B(v, s) c P ○. Let c be a centroid of a side of P . Then c is in S(a, r), but c is not in S(a, r) ∩ B(v, s). Let Hy be the closed half-space of X bounded by ⟨ C( C y)⟩ opposite to v. Then c is in Hy. Hence P ′ c Hy. Therefore C(Cy) c ∂P ′.

The vertices of L(v) are of the form E ∩Σ where E is an edge of P containing v. By the induction hypothesis, the sides of L(v)′ are in one-to-one correspondence with the vertices of L(v) in such a way that if E ∩ Σ is a vertex of L(v) and Dy(E ∩ Σ) is the set of all the centroids of the sides of L(v) that contain E ∩ Σ, then C(Dy(E ∩ Σ)) in Σ is the side of L(v)′ corresponding to E ∩Σ. Consequently the sides of C( yC) are in one-to-one correspondence with the edges of P that contain v in such a way that if E is an edge of P that contains v and CE is the set of all the centroids of the sides of P that contain E, then C( CE) in X is the side of C(C y) corresponding to E. Let E be an edge of P containing v and let w be the other vertex of E. The hyperplanes ⟨C(Cy)⟩ and ⟨C(Cw)⟩ are orthogonal to [a, v] and [a, w], respectively.

Hence, the hyperplanes ⟨C(Cy)⟩ and ⟨C(Cw)⟩ are distinct. Now ⟨C(CE)⟩ is a hyperplane of both ⟨ C( C ⟩y) and ⟨ C( C w⟩) , and ⟨so CC( ⟩ y∩) ⟨ C( C w⟩) =⟨ C(C E) ⟩ .

Hence, a geodesic segment from the centroid v′ of C( C y) to a point x of the side C( CE) cannot be extended in P ′ past x. Therefore C(Cy) is a maximal convex subset of ∂P ′. Thus C(C y) is a side of P ′.

Now P ′ is a polytope in X by Exercise 6.5.10. All the sides of P ′ that are adjacent to C(Cy) are of the form C( Cw) where w is a vertex of P that is joined to v be an edge E of P . Hence, every side of P ′ is of the form C(Cy) for some vertex v of P by Lemma 3 of 6.5.

Thus, the sides of P ′ are in one-to-one § correspondence with the vertices of P in such a way that if v is a vertex of P , and Cy is the set of centroids of the sides of P that contain v, then C(Cy) is the side of P ′ corresponding to v.

The group of symmetries of P acts transitively on the set of vertices of P , and so all the sides of P ′ are congruent regular polytopes in X. Sides C(Cy) and C(Cw) of P ′ are adjacent if and only if v and w are the vertices of an edge E of P , and if C(C y) and C(C w) are adjacent, then C( C y)∩ C( C w) = C(C E).

The group of symmetries of P acts transitively on the set of edges of P , and so all the dihedral angles between adjacent sides of P ′ are equal. Therefore P ′ is regular by Theorem 6.5.15. This completes the induction.

Every symmetry of P permutes the centroids of the sides of P , and so every symmetry of P is a symmetry of P ′. Hence, every symmetry of P fixes the centroid of P ′. Therefore a is the centroid of P ′ by Exercise 6.5.5. Hence, the centroid of L(v)′ is the centroid of L(v) which is [a, v]∩ Σ. Now, the symmetries of L(v) are symmetries of L(v)′ and the symmetries of L(v) correspond to the 154

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

symmetries of P that fix v. The symmetries of P that fix v permute the vertices Cy of C(Cy), and so the symmetries of P that fix v restrict to symmetries of C( Cy). Hence, all the symmetries of P that fix v fix the centroid of C(C y).

Now, the set of points fixed by all the symmetries of P that fix v is the geodesic L(a, v). Therefore, the centroid v′ of C( C y) is [a, v]∩ ⟨ C( Cy) ;⟩ in other words, the centroid of L(v)′ radially projects from v to the centroid v′ of C( C y). Thus, the centroids of the sides of P ′ radially project from a to the vertices of P .

By Theorems 6.5.14 and 6.5.15, we may assume that c P En and the centroid n ′′ of P is 0. Then P is similar to P in E via a magnification. Hence P ′′ is combinatorially equivalent to P .

Exercise 6.5.12 Let P be a regular ideal polytope in Dn. Prove that all the sides of P are congruent regular ideal polytopes and all the links of ideal vertices of P are similar regular polytopes.

Solution: The proof that all the sides of P are congruent regular ideal polytopes is the same as in the proof of Theorem 6.5.14. For each ideal vertex v of P , let C(v) be a closed horoball based at v such that C(v) meets just the sides of P that are incident with v. As the group Γ of symmetries of P in P transitively on the ideal vertices of P , we can choose the horoballs ⟨ acts ⟩ C(v) : v is an ideal vertex of P } to be invariant under Γ. Let Σ(v) = ∂C(v) { for each v. Then L(v) = P ∩Σ(v) is a link of v in P for each v. The similarity type of L(v) does not depend on the choice of C(v). By Theorem 6.4.5, we have that (v, F1, . . . , Fm) is a flag of P if and only if (F1 ∩ Σ(v), . . . , Fm ∩ Σ(v)) is a flag of L(v). As Γ acts transitively on the set of flags of P , we deduce that all the links L(v), with v an ideal vertex of P , are congruent regular polytopes.

Therefore, all the links of ideal vertices of P are similar regular polytopes.

6.6

Fundamental Domains

Exercise 6.6.1 Let R be a fundamental region for a group Γ of isometries of a metric space X, and let R̂ be the topological interior of R. Prove that R̂ is the largest fundamental region for Γ containing R. Solution: The set R̂ is open by definition. As R ∩ gR c ∂R for each g /= 1 in Γ, we have that R̂ ∩ g R̂ = ∅ for each g /= 1 in Γ. Therefore, the members of { g R̂ : g ∈ Γ} are mutually disjoint. Now as R c R̂ c R, we have that R̂ = R. Therefore X = ∪{ g Rˆ : g ∈Γ . }Thus R̂ is a fundamental region for Γ that contains R. Suppose R′ is a fundamental region for Γ that contains R. Then Rc R′. ′ R is a / = R′. Then R— We claim that R = R′. On the contrary, suppose R ′ — nonempty open subset of X. Hence, there is a point x in R R and an element g /= 1 in Γ such that x is in gR. Then x is in gR′. Now R′ ∩gR′ c ∂R′ by Theorem 6.6.4. Hence x is in ∂R′, which is a contradiction. Therefore R = R′.

Hence R′ c R̂ . Thus R̂ is the largest fundamental region for Γ containing R. 155

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 6.6.2 Let Γ be a group of isometries of a connected metric space X with a locally finite fundamental region R. Prove that Γ is generated by the set {g ∈ Γ : R ∩ gR /= ∅}.

Solution: Define an equivalence relation on X by x ~ y if and only if there is a finite sequence of elements g0, g1, . . . , gm of Γ such that x is in g0R, we have gi−1R ∩giR =/ for ∅ i = 1, . . . , m, and y is in gmR. Each equivalence class is a union of members of{ gR : g ∈Γ , }and so the equivalence classes are closed sets, since R is locally finite. Therefore, there is only one equivalence class, since X is connected.

Let g /= 1 in Γ. Then there is a finite sequence g0, g1, . . . , gm of elements of X such that 1g0 = 1, we have gi−1R ∩ giR /= ∅ for i = 1, . . . , m, and g = gm.

Now R ∩ g− giR /= ∅, and g = (g0−1g1)(g1−1g2) · · · (g−1 1gm), and so the set i−1

m−

{g ∈ Γ : R ∩ gR /= ∅} generates Γ.

Exercise 6.6.3 Let Γ be a discontinuous group of isometries of a connected metric space X with a fundamental region R such that R is compact. Prove that (1) the group Γ is finitely generated, and (2) the group Γ has only finitely many conjugacy classes of elements with fixed points.

Solution: The map κ : R/Γ →X/Γ in Theorem 6.6.7 is a continuous bijection from a compact space to a Hausdorff space, and so is a homeomorphism.

Therefore R is locally finite by Theorem 6.6.7. As R is compact and Γ is discon/ ∅}is finite. Therefore Γ is finitely generated tinuous, the set{ g∈ Γ : R ∩ gR =

by Exercise 6.6.2.

Suppose g in Γ fixes a point of X. Then g is conjugate in Γ to an element h such that h fixes a point of ∂R by Theorem 6.6.5. Now h is in the finite set { Γ ∈ : R gR ∩ = /. Therefore ∅} g Γ has only finitely many conjugacy classes of elements with fixed points.

Exercise 6.6.4 Let Γ be the subgroup of I(C) generated by the translations of C by 1 and i. Find a fundamental domain for Γ that is not locally finite.

Solution: Let R be the region bounded by the curves x/(x + 1), with x≥ 0, and (x — 1)/x, with x 1, ≥ and the line segment [0, 1]. Then R is a fundamental domain for Γ and R is not locally finite at any point on the line y = 1.

Exercise 6.6.5 Let Γ be a discontinuous group of isometries of a metric space X that has a fundamental region. Prove that the set of points of X that are not fixed by any g /= 1 in Γ is an open dense subset of X. Solution: Let S be the set of all points of X that are not fixed by any g /= 1 in Γ. Suppose x is in S. Let r = dist(x, Γ — {x})/2. Then r > 0, since Γ is discontinuous. Now B(x, r) ∩ B(gx, r) = ∅ for each g /= 1 in Γ. Hence B(x, r) c S. Thus S is open. Let R be a fundamental region for Γ. Then gR c S for all g in Γ. Now we have S m ∪ gR m ∪ gR = X. g ∈Γ

g ∈Γ

Therefore S is dense in X. 156

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 6.6.6 Prove that the set Hg(a) used in the definition of a Dirichlet domain is open.

Solution: Suppose x is in Hg(a). Then d(x, a) < d(x, ga). Let r = 12 d(x, ga) — d(x, a) .

Suppose y is in B(x, r). Then we have d(y, a) ≤ d(y, x) + d(x, a) < r + d(x, a) = 1 d(x, ga) + 1 d(x, a).

2

2

Now we have d(x, ga) ≤ d(x, y) + d(y, ga) < r + d(y, ga).

Hence d(x, ga) — r < d(y, ga), and so 1

2

d(x, ga) + 1 d(x, a) < d(y, ga).

2

Therefore d(y, a) < d(y, ga), Thus y is in Hg(a), and so B(x, r) c Hg(a).

Therefore Hg(a) is open.

Exercise 6.6.7 Let D(a) be a Dirichlet domain, with center a, for a group Γ as in Theorem 6.6.14. Prove that if x is in ∂D(a), then ∂D(a)∩ Γx is a finite set of points that are all equidistant from a.

Solution: First of all ∂D(a) ∩ Γx is finite by Theorem 6.6.8. Each point of ∂D(a) ∩ Γx is a nearest point of Γx to a by Theorem 6.6.14. Therefore, all the points of ∂D(a) ∩ Γx are equidistant to a.

6.7

Convex Fundamental Polyhedra

Exercise 6.7.1 Let Γ be a discrete group of isometries of X, and let f be an isometry of X. Prove that X/Γ and X/f Γf −1 have the same volume.

Solution: Let R be a proper fundamental region for Γ. Then R is open in X, and so f R is open in X. The members of {gR : g ∈ Γ} are mutually disjoint.

Hence, the members of {fgf −1f R : g ∈ Γ} are mutually disjoint. Therefore, the members of {hf R : h ∈ f Γf −1} are mutually disjoint. Now observe that X

= ∪{gR : g ∈ Γ} = f ∪ {gR : g ∈ Γ} =

∪{fgf −1f R : g ∈ Γ}

= ∪{hf R : h ∈ f Γf −1} = ∪{hf R : h ∈ f Γf −1}.

157

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Thus f R is a fundamental region for f Γf −1. Moreover Vol(∂(f R)) = Vol(f∂R) = Vol(∂R) = 0.

Hence f R is a proper fundamental region for f Γf −1. Finally we have Vol(X/f Γf −1) = Vol(f R) = Vol(R) = Vol(X/Γ).

Exercise 6.7.2 Let Γ be an elementary discrete group of isometries of Hn. Prove that Hn/Γ has infinite volume.

Solution: Assume first that Γ is of elliptic type. Then Γ is finite by Theorem 5.5.2. By Theorem 6.7.3, we have Vol(Hn/Γ) = Vol(Hn)/|Γ| = ∞.

Now assume that Γ is of parabolic type. We pass to the upper half-space model U n of hyperbolic n-space. By Theorem 5.5.5 and Exercise 6.7.1, we may assume that Γ is the Poincar´e extension of an infinite discrete subgroup of I(En−1). Let R be a proper fundamental region for Γ in En−1. Then R× (0, ∞) is a proper fundamental region for Γ in U n . By Theorem 4.6.7, we have ∫ dx1 · · · dxn Vol R × (0, ∞) = (xn)n R×(0,∞) ∫ ∞ dxn = Vol(R) = ∞. (xn)n 0 Now assume that Γ is of hyperbolic type. By Theorems 5.5.7 and 5.5.8, we may assume that Γ has a subgroup H of finite index such that H is generated by a hyperbolic transformation h whose axis is the positive nth axis (0, ∞ ) of U n .

1 − Suppose h(en) = ten. By replacing h with h , if necessary, we may assume that t > 1. Then a proper fundamental region for H is the region R bounded the hyperpla nes of U n orthogona l to (0, ∞) at en and ten. As R contains the halfspace B 21 (1 + t)e1, (t — 1)/2 ∩ U n , we deduce that Vol(R) = ∞. By Theorem 6.7.3, we have that Vol(X/Γ) = Vol(X/H)/[Γ : H] = ∞.

Exercise 6.7.3 Let a and b be distinct points of X, and let P = {x ∈ X : d(x, a) = d(x, b)}.

Prove that P is the unique hyperplane of X that bisects and is orthogonal to every geodesic segment in X joining a to b.

158

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: First assume that X = En. Then the following are equivalent: 1. |x — a| = |x — b|, 2. |x — a|2 = |x — b|2, 3. |x|2 — 2x · a + |a|2 = |x|2 — 2x · b + |b|2, 4. x · (b — a) = (|b|2 — |a|2)/2.

Thus P is the hyperplane of En with normal vector b — a that passes through the midpoint (a + b)/2 of [a, b]. Thus P is the perpendicular bisector of [a, b].

Now assume that X = Sn. Then the following are equivalent: 1. θ(x, a) = θ(x, b), 2. cos θ(x, a) = cos θ(x, b), 3. x · a = x · b, 4. x · (b — a) = 0.

Thus P is the intersection of the n-dimensional vector subspace of Rn+1 orthogonal to b— a with Sn. Hence P is a great (n —1)-sphere of Sn. The midpoint of a geodesic segment joining a to b is equidistant from a to b, and so P bisects every geodesic segment of Sn joining a to b.

Let α : [0, θ(a, b)] → Sn be a geodesic arc from a to b. Then α(t) = (cos t)a + (sin t)u with u = b — (a · b)a /|b — (a · b)a|.

Now we have α′(t) = (— sin t)a + (cos t)u.

Hence, we have α′(θ(a, b)/2) =

— sin(θ(a, b)/2) a + cos(θ(a, b)/2) u r r 1 — cos θ(a, b) 1 + cos θ(a, b) = — a+ u 2 2 r r 1—a·b 1+a·b = — a+ u.

2 2

Now we have |b — (a · b)a| 2 = 1 — 2(a · b)2 + (a · b)2 = 1 — (a · b)2 .

Hence, we have r 1—a·b ′ α (θ(a, b)/2) 2

= =

√ 1 — (a · b)2 b — (a · b)a (1 — a · b)a √ — + 2 2 1 — (a · b)2 —a + (a · b)a b — (a · b)a b—a + = .

2 2 2 159

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Therefore α′(θ(a, b)/2) is normal to P . Thus P is the perpendicular bisector of every geodesic segment in Sn joining a to b.

Assume now that X = Hn. Then the following are equivalent: 1. η(x, a) = η(x, b), 2. cosh η(x, a) = cosh η(x, b), 3. x ◦ a = x ◦ b, 4. x ◦ (b — a) = 0.

Now b—a is space-like. Thus P is the intersection of the n-dimensional time-like vector subspace of Rn+1 Lorentz orthogonal to—b a with Hn. Hence P is a hyperplane of Hn that bisects the geodesic segment [a, b] in Hn joining a to b.

Let α : [0, η(a, b)] → Sn be a geodesic arc from a to b. Then α(t) = (cosh t)a + (sinh t)v with v = b + (a ◦ b)a / b + (a ◦ b)a .

Now we have α′(t) = (sinh t)a + (cosh t)v.

Hence, we have α′(η(a, b)/2) =

sinh(η(a, b)/2) a + cosh(η(a, b)/2) v r cosh η(a, b) — 1 cosh η(a, b) + 1 = a+ v 2 2 r r —a ◦ b — 1 —a ◦ b + 1 = a+ v.

2 2 r

Now we have b + (a ◦ b)a

2

= —1 + 2(a ◦ b)2 — (a ◦ b)2 = —1 + (a ◦ b)2.

Hence, we have r —a ◦ b — 1 ′ α (η(a, b)/2) 2

√ (a ◦ b)2 — 1 b + (a ◦ b)a √ — + 2 2 (a ◦ b)2 — 1 —(a ◦ b)a — a b + (a ◦ b)a b—a + = .

2 2 2 (a ◦ b + 1)a

= =

Therefore α′(η(a, b)/2) is Lorentz normal to P . Thus P is the perpendicular bisector of [a, b].

160

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 6.7.4 √Let Γ be the subgroup of I(C) generated by the translations of C by 1 and 1 + 3 i. Determine the Dirichlet polygon of Γ with center 0 in C. 2

Solution:

2

Now 1 and 1 + 2

√

3

i generate a lattice subgroup of C, and so a

2

fundamental domain for Γ is the parallelogram P with sides [0, 1] and [0, 1 + 2 √ The angle of P at 0 is π/3, and so Area(P ) = sin(π/3) = 3/2.

√3 2

i].

√

Let f (z) = z + 1 and g(z) = z + 12 + 23 i. Then the six lines Pf , Pf−1 , Pg, Pg−1 , Pgf−1 , Pfg−1√ bound a regular hexagon H with center 0 and side midpoints ± 1 , ± 1 ± 3 i. Now H ∩ P is the union of the two triangles T1 and 2 4 4 √ T2, with vertex 0, of the barycentric subdivision of Δ(0, 1, 1 + 3 i). Therefore 2 2 √ √ Area(H ∩ P ) = 21( 3/2)/3 = 3/12. The triangles T1 and T2 are two of the √ triangles of the barycentric subdivision of H, and so Area(H) = 6( 3/12) = √ 3/2. As D(0) c H, and Area(D(0)) = Area(H), we have that D(0) = H. Exercise 6.7.5 Let T be the generalized hyperbolic triangle in Figure 6.7.1.

Prove that T is the Dirichlet polygon for PSL(2, Z) with center ti for any t > 1.

Solution: Let g be an element of PSL(2, Z). Then g acts on U 2 as a linear fractional transformation gz = az+b cz+d with a, b, c, d in Z and ad — bc = 1. We claim that gT ○ ∩ T = ∅ for each g /= 1 in PSL(2, Z). Assume first that c = 0.

Then ad = 1, and so a = d = ±1. Hence gz = z + b, and so gT ○ ∩ T = ∅ if b /= 0.

Now assume c /= 0. Observe that gz

= = = =

az + b cz + d cz + d cz + d (az + b)(cz + d) |cz + d|2 ac|z|2 + adz + bcz + bd |cz + d|2 (adz + bcz) + (ac| z| 2 + bd) |cz + d|2

.

Hence Im(gz) = Im(z)/|cz + d|2. Assume |z| > 1 and |Re(z)| < 1/2. As cd /= 0, we have |cz + d|2

2

2

2

= c |z| + 2cd Re(z) + d > c2 — |cd| + d2 = (|c| — |d|)2 + |cd| ≥ 1.

Therefore |cz + d|2 > 1. Hence Im(gz) < Im(z). We have that gz is not in T , since otherwise, we would have Im(g−1(gz)) ≤ Im(gz) for the same reason, which is not the case. Thus gT ○ ∩ T = ∅.

161

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Let gz = z + 1 and suppose t > 1. Then Pg(ti) is the line x = 1/2 and Pg−1 (ti) is the line x = — 1/2. Let hz = — 1/z. Then h(ti) = — 1/(ti) = i/t.

Now we have dU (ti, i) = log t = dU (i, i/t), and so Ph(ti ) is the semi-circle |z| = 1 and Im(z) > 0. Hence D(ti) c T for each t > 1. Now D(ti) = T , since otherwise there would be a point z in T ○ — D(ti), but then there would be a g /= 1 in Γ such that gz is in D(t), whence gz is in gT ○ ∩ T , which is a contradiction. Thus T = D(ti) for each t > 1.

6.8

Tessellations

Exercise 6.8.1 Let S be a side of an exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron P for Γ. Show that S′ = S if and only if gS has order 2 in Γ.

Solution: If S′ = S, then the side-pairing relation determined by S is gS2 = 1, and so gS has order 2, since P ∩ gS(P ) = S. Conversely, suppose gS has order 2. Then gS' = g−S1 = gS. Hence, we have S′ = P ∩ gS' (P ) = P ∩ gS(P ) = S.

Exercise 6.8.2 Prove that if X = En or Hn, with n > 1, then the element gS1 · · · gSl in Theorem 6.8.7 fixes a point of R. Solution: Let g = gS1 · · · gSl . Then gR = R by Theorem 6.8.7(4). Let x be a point of R, and let k be the order of g. Then g permutes the points x, gx, . . . , gk−1x of R, and so g fixes the centroid y defined by y = (x + gx + · · · + gk−1x)/k if X = En or y = (x + gx + · · · + gk−1x)/k if X = Hn. Now y is in R, since R is convex by Exercises 1.4.11 and 6.2.6.

Exercise 6.8.3 Find an example for the case of X = S2 in Theorem 6.8.7 such that the element gS1 · · · gSl does not fix a point of R. Solution: The set R is a 0-dimensional convex subset of S2, and so R is either a point or a pair of antipodal points. In order for g· S· 1· gSl not to fix a point of R, the set R must be a pair of antipodal points. Then S is a great semi-circle, P is a lune, and l = 1. We take , 0 —1 0 1 0 0 gS = .

0 0 —1 and P to be the quarter lune {(x, y, z) ∈ S2 : x ≥ 0 and y ≥ 0}. Then gS has order 4 and interchanges the antipodal points (0, 0, ±1) of R. 162

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 6.8.4 Let Γ be the discrete group of isometries of E2 generated by the translations of E2 by e1 and e2. Then P = [0, 1]2 is an exact, convex, fundamental polygon for Γ. Find all the cycles of sides of P and the corresponding cycle relations of Γ.

Solution: Let L be the left side of P , let S be the bottom side of P , let R be the right side of P , and let T be the top side of P . Then the cycles and their relations are given in the following table: cycles

cycle relations

{S, L, T, R} {S, R, T, L} {L, T, R, S} {L, S, R, T } {T, R, S, L} {T, L, R, S} {R, S, L, T } {R, T, L, S}

gSg L gT gR = 1 gS g RgT gL = 1 gL g T gR gS = 1 gL g S gRgT = 1 gT g RgS gL = 1 gT g L gR gS = 1 gR g S gL gT = 1 gR g T gL gS = 1

Exercise 6.8.5 Let P be an exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron for a discrete group Γ of isometries of X with| Γ| > 2. If X = S1, let m = 1, otherwise let m be the number of ridges of P . Prove that P has exactly 2m cycles of sides.

Solution: Assume that X = S1. As Γ | >| 2, the geodesic segment P has two sides. Each cycle of sides is determined by a side of P , and so P has exactly 2 cycles of sides. Now assume that P has a ridge. Then n > 1 and each cycle of sides is determined by a ridge R of P and a side S of P that contains R. A ridge of P is contained in exactly two sides of P by Theorem 6.3.5. Hence, each ridge of P determines exactly two cycles of sides. Therefore P has exactly 2m cycles of sides.

Exercise 6.8.6 Let R be a ridge of an exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron A P for Γ and let S and T be the two sides of P such that R = S ∩ T . Let {Si}i=1 be the cycle of sides of P determined by R and S. Show that {SA′ , SA′−1, . . . , S1}′ is the cycle of sides P determined by R and T . Conclude that the cycle transformation of {SA′ , SA′−1, . . . , S1′ } determined by R and T is the inverse of the cycle transformation of {Si}A i=1 determined by R and S. Solution: We have gSl+1 (SA′+1 ∩ SA+2) = SA′ ∩ SA+1.

Hence, we have

gS1 (S1′ ∩ S2) = SA′ ∩ S1.

163

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

′ Therefore SA∩ S1 = R. Hence T = SA′ . Let T1 = T . Then T1′ = SA. Now we have gSl (SA′ ∩ S1) = SA′−1 ∩ SA.

Hence, we have

gSl' (SA′−1 ∩ SA) = R.

Therefore SA′−1 is the side of P adjacent to T1′ such that gT1 (T1′ ∩ SA′−1) = R. Hence T2 = SA′−1.

Suppose Ti = SA′−i+1 and Ti−1 = SA′−i+2. Then gSl−i+1 (SA′−i+1 ∩ SA−i+2) = SA′−i ∩ SA−i+1.

Hence, we have gS '

l−i+1

(SA−i+1 ∩ SA′−i) = SA−i+2 ∩ SA′−i+1.

Therefore SA′−i is the side of P adjacent to Ti′ = SA−i+1 such that gTi (Ti′ ∩ SA′−i) = Ti′—1 ∩ Ti. Hence Ti+1 = SA′−i. Therefore Ti = SA′−i+1 for each i≥ 1. Hence TA = S1′ . Now we have gS1 (S1′ ∩ S2) = R = SA′ ∩ S1.

Hence, we have

gS1' (S1 ∩ SA′ ) = S2 ∩ S1′ .

Therefore SA′ is the side of P adjacent to TA′ = S1 such that gTl (TA′ ∩ SA′ ) = TA′—1 ∩ TA. Therefore TA+1 = SA′ = T and TA′ ∩ TA+1 = S ∩ SA′ = R. Thus, the cycle of sides determined by R and T is {SA′ , SA′−1, . . . , S1′ }. Now 1 ' gSl' gSl−1 · · · g1S' = gS−l1gS−l−1 · · · gS−11 = (gS 1gS 2 · · · gSl )−1.

Hence, the cycle transformation of the cycle of sides {S′

}A−1 determined by

A−i i=0

A

R and T is the inverse of the cycle transformation of the cycle of sides{ Si }i=1 determined by R and S. Exercise 6.8.7 Let R be a side of a side S of an exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron P for Γ and let R′ be the side of S′ such that gS(R′) = R. Let {Si}A i=1 be the cycle of sides of P determined by R and S. Show that {S2, . . . , SA, S1} is the cycle of sides of P determined by R′ and S2. Conclude that the cycle transformation of {S2, . . . , SA, S1} determined by R′ and S2 is conjugate in Γ to the cycle transformation of {Si}A i=1 determined by R and S.

164

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: We have

gS1 (S1′ ∩ S2) = R,

and so R′ = S1′ ∩ S2. Let T1 = S2. Then T1′ = S2′ . Now we have gS2 (S2′ ∩ S3) = S1′ ∩ S2 = R′.

Therefore S3 is the side of P adjacent to T1′ such that gT1 (T1′ ∩ S3) = R′.

Hence T2 = S3.

Suppose Ti = Si+1 and Ti−1 = Si. Then we have gSi+1 (Si′+1 ∩ Si+2) = Si′ ∩ Si+1.

Therefore Si+2 is the side of P adjacent to Ti′ = Si′+1 such that gTi (Ti′ ∩ Si+2) = Ti′—1 ∩ Ti. Hence Ti+1 = Si+2. Therefore Ti = Si+1 for all i ≥ 1. Hence, we have Ti+A = Si+A+1 = Si+1 = Ti and l is the least such integer. Therefore {Ti}A i=1 is the cycle of sides determined

by R′ and T1. Hence {S2, S3, . . . , SA, S1} is the cycle of sides determined by R′ and S2. Observe that gS2 · · · gSl gS1 = gS−11(gS 1 · · · gSl )gS 1 , and so the cycle transformation of {S2, . . . , SA, S1} is conjugate to the cycle transformation of {Si}A i=1 .

Exercise 6.8.8 Let Γ and P be as in Exercise 6.8.4. Write down the group presentation for Γ described in Remark §6.8 and simplify it to a presentation for Γ with only two generators and one relation.

Solution: We continue with the notation in the solution of Exercise 6.8.4. Then the presentation for Γ described in Remark §6.8 has generators gS, gL, gT , gR, and relations the 8 cycle relations in the solution of Exercise 6.8.4, and the 4 side-pairing relations gSgT = 1, gT gS = 1, gRgL = 1, gLgR = 1.

We eliminate the generators gT and gL. There is only one cycle of ridges, and so we can eliminate all1 the cycle relations except for one. We keep gSgRgT gL = 1 and replace gT by g− and gL by g−1 to obtain the presentation for Γ with two S R generators gS and gR, and one relation gSgRg−1g−1 = 1.

S

165

R

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 7

Classical Discrete Groups 7.1

Reflection Groups

Exercise 7.1.1 Let Γ be a discrete reflection group with respect to a polyhedron P . Prove that P is the Dirichlet polyhedron for Γ with center any point of P ○.

Solution: Let a be a point in P ○. For each side S of P , we have PgS (a) = ⟨S⟩.

By Theorem 6.3.2, we have P = ∩{HgS (a) : S is a side of P }. Hence D(a) c P ○.

As D(a) is convex, D(a) = (D(a))○, and so D(a) is the largest fundamental domain for Γ containing D(a) by Exercise 6.6.1. Therefore D(a) = P ○, and so D(a) = P . Thus P is the Dirichlet polyhedron for Γ centered at a.

Exercise 7.1.2 Let Γ be a discrete reflection group with respect to a polyhedron P . Prove that the inclusion of P into X induces an isometry from P to X/Γ.

Solution: By Exercise 7.1.1, we have that P is the Dirichlet polyhedron for Γ with respect to any center x in P ○. Hence d(x, y)≤ d(x, gy) for all y in P and g in Γ by Theorem 6.6.14. Let ι : P→ X be the inclusion and let π : X→ X/Γ be the natural projection. Then we have dΓ(πι(x), πι(y)) = dist(Γx, Γy) = dist(x, Γy) = d(x, y).

Now suppose x, y are in P . Then there is a sequence {x i } i∞= 1 in P ○ such that xi → x. Then we have dΓ(πι(x), πι(y)) = lim dΓ(πι(xi), πι(y)) = lim d(xi, y) = d(x, y). i→∞

i→∞

Thus πι : P → X/Γ is a distance preserving bijection, and so πι : P→ X/Γ is an isometry.

Exercise 7.1.3 Let Γ be the group generated by two reflections of E1 or H1 about the endpoints of a geodesic segment. Show that Γ has the presentation (S, T ; S2, T 2).

166

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let S and T be the sides of the line segment, and let gS and gT be the reflections of E1 or H1 in S and T . Let G = (S, T ; S2, T 2). Every element of G is of the form (ST )k or (ST )kS for some k in Z. Let φ : G →Γ be defined by φ(S) = gS and φ(T ) = gT . Then φ is an epimorphism. Now φ((ST )kS) reverses orientation, and so φ((ST )kS) /= 1. If k /= 0, then φ((ST )k) is a nonidentity translation, and so φ((ST )k) /= 1. Therefore φ is an isomorphism.

Exercise 7.1.4 Let Γ be the group generated by two reflections of S1 about the endpoints of a geodesic segment of length π/k for some integer k > 1. Show that Γ has the presentation (S, T ; S2, T 2, (ST )k).

Solution: Let S and T be the sides of the geodesic segment, and let gS and gT be the reflections of S1 in S and T . Let G = (S, T ; S2, T 2, (ST )k).

Every element of G is of the form (ST )A or (ST )AS for some l in Z. Let φ : G →Γ be defined by φ(S) = gS and φ(T ) = gT . Then φ is an epimorphism.

Now φ((ST )AS) reverses orientation, and so φ((ST )AS) = 1. If l is in Z, then φ((ST )A) is a rotation by an angle of 2πl/k, and so φ((ST )A) = 1 if and only if k divides l. Therefore φ is an isomorphism.

Exercise 7.1.5 Prove that a reducible Coxeter group G is the direct product of the irreducible Coxeter groups represented by the connected components of the Coxeter graph of G. Solution: Let G = (Si; (SiSj)kijk, i, j ∈ I) be a Coxeter group. Suppose m ij I = ⊕k=1Ik a nQd Gk = (Si; (SiSj) , i, j ∈ Ik) are the irreducible components m of G. Let πA : Gk → GA be the natural projection for each l = 1, . . . , m. k=1 Qm Define φ : G → k=1 Gk by πkφ(Si) = Si if i is in Ik and πkφ(Si) = 1 otherwise.

Then φ is an epimorphism.

For each k = 1, . . . , m, let ιk : Gk → G be the homomorphism defined by ιk(Si) = Si for each i in Ik. Then πkφιk is the identity map of Gk for each k.

Therefore πkφ : G → Gk maps ⟨Si : i ∈ Ik⟩ isomorphically onto Gk. Suppose φ(g) = 1. We can write g = g1g2 · · · gm with gk in ⟨Si : i ∈ Ik⟩ for each k. Now φ(g) = 1 implies that φ(gk) = 1 for each k, and so gk = 1 for each k, since πQk φ : G → Gk maps ⟨Si : i ∈ Ik⟩ isomorphically onto Gk. Therefore m φ : G → k=1 Gk is an isomorphism.

Exercise 7.1.6 Prove that the group Γ in Example 1 is an elementary 2-group of rank n + 1.

Solution: The polyhedron P is a right-angled n-simplex. Hence, the Coxeter graph of Γ is n+1 disjoint vertices. Therefore Γ is isomorphic to × S0 ×·S·0 ·× S0 n + 1 times by Exercise 7.1.5. Thus Γ is an elementary 2-group of rank n + 1.

Exercise 7.1.7 Let G be a finite subgroup of a discrete reflection group Γ with respect to an n-dimensional convex polyhedron P in En or Hn. Prove that G is conjugate in Γ to a subgroup of the pointwise stabilizer of a face of P . Conclude that if every face of P has a vertex, then G is conjugate in Γ to a subgroup of the stabilizer Γy of a vertex v of P .

167

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: The group G fixes a point w of En or Hn by Theorems 5.5.1 and 5.5.2. Now there is a point x of P and an element h of Γ such that hw = x.

Then hGh−1 fixes the point x of P . If G = {1 }, then hGh−1 fixes P pointwise.

Assume G = / 1{ ,} then x is in ∂P , since no nonidentity element of Γ fixes a point of P ○.

Let r > 0 be such that C(x, r) meets just the sides of P containing x. Let S (x) be the set of sides of P that contain x, and let Γ(x) be the group generated by all the reflections in the sides inS (x). Then Γ(x) restricts to a discrete reflection group with respect to P∩ S(x, r). Hence C(x, r) c ∪{gP : g∈ Γ(x) } .

Suppose f is an element of Γ such that fx = x. Then f C(x, r) = C(x, r), and so f (C(x, r) ∩P ) cC(x, r). Hence f = g for some g in Γ(x). Therefore Γ(x) contains the stabilizer of x in Γ. Hence hGh−1 c Γ(x).

Let F (x) be the carrier face of x in P . Then F (x)∩{ = S : ∈S S (x)} by Theorem 6.3.14. For each S in S(x), the reflection in S fixes F (x) pointwise.

Therefore Γ(x) fixes F (x) pointwise. Hence Γ(x) is the pointwise stabilizer of F (x), since Γ(x) contains the stabilizer of x in Γ.

Exercise 7.1.8 Let P be an n-dimensional convex polyhedron in Sn all of whose dihedral angles are at most π/2. Prove that P has at most n + 1 sides.

Solution: The proof is by induction on n. If n = 1, then P has either no sides if P = S1, one side if P is a great semi-circle, or two sides if P is a geodesic segment of length less than π/2.

Now assume n = 2. By Theorem 6.3.16, we deduce that P has either no sides if P = S2, one side if P is a closed hemisphere, two sides if P is a lune, or P is contained in an open hemisphere of S2 and P has at least three sides by Theorem 6.3.7. Let k ≥ 3 be the number of sides of P . Then P is subdivided into k—2 triangles. Let θ1, . . . , θk be the angles of P . By Theorem 2.5.1, we have θ1 + θ2 + · · · + θk > (k —2)π. Now θi ≤π/2 for each i. Hence (k—2)π < kπ/2.

Therefore k— 2 < k/2. Hence k/2 < 2, and so k < 4. Thus P is a triangle.

Now assume n > 2 and the result is true in dimensions less than n. If P = Sn, then P has no sides. Suppose the intersection of all the sides of P is a k-sphere Σ. Let x be a point in Σ, and let L(x) be a link of x in P . Then all the dihedral angles of L(x) are at most π/2, and so L(x) has at most n-sides.

As L(x) meets every side of P , we conclude that P has at most n sides. Thus,

by Theorem 6.3.16, we may assume that P is contained in an open hemisphere of Sn. Let k be the number of sides of P . Then k ≥n + 1 by Theorem 6.3.7.

Let x be a point in the interior of an (n — 3)-face F of P , and let L(x) be a link of x in P . First assume n = 3. Then F is a vertex and L(x) is a triangle by the induction hypothesis and Exercise 6.4.1(3). By the second law of cosines, all the sides of L(x) have normalized length at most π/2. Hence, all the sides of P have angles at most π/2. Now all the sides of P are contained in an open hemisphere of S3, and so all the sides of P are triangles by the induction hypothesis and Theorem 6.3.7. There are three sides of P incident with x. The opposite edges of these sides are the edges of a fourth side of P , since the link of each vertex of P is a triangle. Thus P has four sides, and so P is a tetrahedron.

168

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Now assume n > 3. Then the intersection of all the sides of L(x) is L(x)∩ F

by Theorem 6.3.14 and 6.4.1, and L(x)∩ F is a great (n —4)-sphere of S(x, r) where L(x) = P ∩S(x, r) by Exercise 6.4.1(2). Let Q be the great 3-sphere of Sn that is orthogonal to F at x. Then L(x) ∩Q is a spherical polygon in S(x, r) whose angles are equal to the dihedral angles of L(x). Hence L(x)∩ Q is a triangle by the induction hypothesis. By the second law of cosines, all the sides of L(x) ∩Q have normalized length at most π/2. Hence, all the sides of P have dihedral angles at most π/2. Now all the sides of P are contained in an open hemisphere of Sn, and so all the sides of P are (n— 1)-simplices by the induction hypothesis and Theorems 6.3.7 and 6.5.4.

Let v be a vertex of P , and let L(v) be a link of v in P . Then L(v) is an (n —1)-simplex by the induction hypothesis, Theorems 6.3.7 and 6.5.4, and Exercise 6.4.1(3). Hence, there are n sides of P incident with v. The opposite sides of these n sides are the sides of an (n + 1)st side of P , since the link of each vertex of P is an (n— 1)-simplex. Thus P has n + 1 sides, and so P is an n-simplex by Theorem 6.5.4.

Exercise 7.1.9 Let P be an n-dimensional convex polyhedron in Sn all of whose dihedral angles are at most π/2. Prove that P is contained in an open hemisphere of Sn if and only if P is an n-simplex.

Solution: Suppose P is contained in an open hemisphere. Then P has at least n + 1 sides by Theorem 6.3.7. Therefore P has exactly n + 1 sides by Exercise 7.1.8. Now P is a polytope by Theorem 6.3.18. Hence P is an n-simplex by Theorem 6.5.4.

Conversely, suppose P is an n-simplex. Then P is a polytope by definition, and so P is contained in an open hemisphere of Sn by Theorem 6.5.1.

Exercise 7.1.10 Let Γ be a discrete reflection group with respect to an ndimensional convex polyhedron P in X. Prove that every link of a vertex of P is an (n — 1)-simplex. Conclude that the stabilizer Γy of a vertex v of P is a finite spherical (n — 1)-simplex reflection group.

Solution: Let v be a vertex of P , and let L(v) = P ∩ S(v, r) be a link of v in P . Then L(v) is contained in an open hemisphere of S(v, r) by Exercise 6.4.1.

All the dihedral angles of P are submultiples of π by Theorem 7.1.2. Therefore, all the dihedral angles of L(v) are submultiples of π by Theorem 6.4.1. Hence L(v) is an (n — 1)-simplex by Exercise 7.1.9. The stabilizer Γy restricts to a discrete reflection group with respect to L(v). Hence Γy is a finite spherical (n — 1)-simplex reflection group.

7.2

Simplex Reflection Groups

Exercise 7.2.1 Prove that G0(2, 3, 4) is a symmetric group on four letters and G0(2, 3, 5) is an alternating group on five letters.

169

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: The group G0(2, 3, 4) is the group of orientation-preserving symmetries of a regular octahedron P . Each side of P has an antipodal opposite side.

Let P be the set of four pairs of opposite sides of P . The group G0 acts on the set P. The 12 edges of P pair off into 6 pairs of antipodal opposite edges.

Each pair of opposite edges of P is the intersection of two adjacent pairs of opposite sides. There are 42 = 6 pairs of distinct elements of P. Thus, any two distinct pairs of opposite sides of P are adjacent along a pair of opposite edges.

The 180○ rotation about the perpendicular bisector of a pair of opposite edges transposes the two pairs of opposite sides of P that are adjacent along the pair of opposite edges. Hence G0 transposes every pair of distinct elements of P. The symmetric group S4 is generated by its transpositions. Hence, the homomorphism φ : G0 → Perm(P), defined by φ(g) = g∗, where g∗({S, —S}) = {gS, —gS}, is onto. As G0 has order 24 = 4!, we deduce that φ is an isomorphism. Thus G0(2, 3, 4) is a symmetric group on four letters.

The group G0(2, 3, 5) is the group of orientation-preserving symmetries of a regular dodecahedron P . Now P has 30 edges which are divided into 15 pairs of antipodal opposite edges. These 15 pairs of opposite edges are further divided into a set f of five triples of pairs such that perpendicular bisectors of the pairs in each triple are mutually orthogonal. The group G0 acts on the setf . The 20 vertices of P pair off into 10 pairs of antipodal opposite vertices. Each vertex of P is incident with three edges of P no two of which belong to the same triple in f . Hence, each pair of opposite vertices of P is the intersection of three 5 triples in f . There are 3 = 10 triples of distinct elements of f . Thus, any three distinct triples in fintersect along a pair of opposite vertices. The 120○ rotation about the line joining a pair of opposite vertices cyclically permutes the three triples in f that intersect along the pair of opposite vertices. Hence G0 cyclically permutes every triple of distinct elements of f .

The alternating group A5 is generated by its 3-cycles. Hence, the natural homomorphism φ : G0 → Perm(f ) is onto. As G0 has order 60 = 5!/2, we deduce that φ is an isomorphism from G0 to the even permutations of f . Thus G0(2, 3, 5) is an alternating group on five letters.

Exercise 7.2.2 Prove that T (2, 3, 7) is the triangle of least area among all the hyperbolic triangles T (a, b, c).

Solution: We may assume that 2 ≤ a ≤ b ≤ c. We have Area(T (a, b, c)) = π —

π π π + + a b c

=π 1—

1 1 1 + + a b c

.

1 1 Thus, we need to maximize + 1 . Now 3 ≤ 1 + 1 + 1 < 1. Hence c > 3.

1 + b c b c c a If a ≥ 4, the largest 1 + 1 +a 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 can be 3, 1the 1 11 a b + + can be is 1 + 1 + c = . Ifisb 4 + 4 + 4 = 4 . If1 a + =1 + canlargest be is ≥ 5, the largest a a b c 3 3 4 12 b c 1 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 19 + + = 10. If b = 4, the largest a + b + c can be is + + = . If

2

5

5

1

1

1

1

1

1

41

2

4

5

20

b = 3, the largest a + b + c can be is 2 + 3 + 7 = 42 . Thus T (2, 3, 7) is the triangle of least area among all the hyperbolic triangles T (a, b, c).

170

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 7.2.3 Prove that G(2, 4, 6) contains the group Γ in Example 3 of §7.1 as a normal subgroup of index 12.

Solution: Let Δ be the top right 30○ - 45○ right triangle in Figure 7.1.2. Let T, L, R be the sides of Δ opposite the 30○, 45○, and 90○ angle. Let gT , gL, gR be the reflections in the sides T, L, R, respectively. Now gT is the reflection in the top side of the regular hexagon P , and so gT is in Γ. The product gLgR is a 60○ rotation about the center of P . Hence (gLgR)kgT (gLgR)−k, for k = 0, 1, . . . , 5, are the reflections in the sides of P . Therefore Γ is a subgroup of G. If S is a side of P and gS is the reflection in the side S, then gLgSg−1 and gRgSg−1 are L R reflections in sides of P , since gL and gR are symmetries of P . Therefore Γ is a normal subgroup of G. The regular hexagon P in Figure 7.1.2 is subdivided into 12 triangles congruent to Δ. Therefore [G : Γ] = 12 by Theorem 6.7.3.

Exercise 7.2.4 Prove that the group of symmetries of an (n + 1)-dimensional, Euclidean, regular polytope inscribed in Sn is isomorphic to a spherical, nsimplex, reflection group.

Solution: Let Γ be the group of symmetries of an (n + 1)-dimensional Euclidean regular polytope P inscribed in Sn. Let ∆ be an (n + 1)-simplex in the barycentric subdivision of P . The vertices of ∆ can be ordered v0, . . . , vn+1 so that vk is the centroid of a k-face Fk of P for each k = 0, . . . , n + 1, and Fk is a side of Fk+1 for each k = 0, . . . , n. Thus ∆ corresponds to the flag (F0, . . . , Fn+1) of P . Let ∆′ be another (n + 1)-simplex in the barycentric subdivision of P , and let (F0′ , . . . , Fn′ +1) be the corresponding flag of P . Then there is a unique symmetry g of P such that g(F0, . . . , Fn+1) = (F0′ , . . . , Fn′ +1). Let vk′ be the centroid of Fk′ for each k. Then v0′ , . . . , vn′ +1 are the vertices of ∆′ and gvk = vk′ for each k. Hence g∆ = ∆′. Therefore ∆ is a fundamental polyhedron for the ˆ be the n-simplex action of Γ on P . Regard Γ as a subgroup of I(Sn). Let ∆ n ˆ is a in S obtained by radially projecting ∆ from the origin onto Sn. Then ∆ n fundamental polygon for the action of Γ on S . ˆ by We now prove that Γ is a discrete reflection group with respect to ∆ induction on n. This is clear if n = 0, so assume n > 0 and the result is true for n —1. Let ∆1 be the side of ∆ opposite the origin. Then ∆1 is an n-simple in the barycentric subdivision of a side S of P . By the induction hypothesis, the group of symmetries of S is generated by the reflections in the sides of ∆1 that contain the centroid of S. Each of these reflections extends to a symmetry of P that is a reflection in a side of ∆ containing the origin. Let ∆2 be the side of ∆1 opposite the centroid of S. Then ∆2 is an (n —1)-simplex in the barycentric subdivision of a side R of S. Let T be the side of P adjacent to S along R. Now ∆ corresponds to the flag (F0, . . . , Fn−2, R, S, P ). There is a symmetry g of P that maps this flag to the flag (F0, . . . , Fn−2, R, T, P ). Now Fn−1 = R and vk is the centroid of Fk for k = 0, . . . , n — 1, and v0, . . . , vn−1 are the vertices of ∆2. Hence gvk = vk for each k = 0, . . . , n— 1, and so g fixes ∆2 pointwise.

Therefore g is the reflection in the side of ∆ opposite the centroid of S. Thus, the reflections in all the sides of ∆ containing the origin are symmetries of P .

171

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

ˆ of Sn. Therefore Γ is a discrete reflection group with respect to the n-simplex ∆ Thus Γ is a spherical n-simplex reflection group.

Exercise 7.2.5 Prove that the regular tessellations of Sn correspond under radial projection to the (n+1)-dimensional, Euclidean, regular polytopes inscribed in Sn. Solution: Let P be an (n + 1)-dimensional Euclidean regular polytope inscribed in Sn. Then the sides of P are congruent n-dimensional Euclidean regular polytopes. The sides of P radially project from the origin to congruent n-dimensional regular polytopes in Sn. Thus P corresponds, under radial projection from the origin, to a regular tessellation of Sn. Conversely, suppose P is a regular tessellation of Sn. We shall prove that P corresponds, under radial projection from the origin, to an (n + 1)-dimensional Euclidean regular polytope inscribed in Sn by induction on n. This is clear if n = 0, so assume n > 0 and the claim is true in dimension n 1.— Let P be the convex hull in En+1 of the vertices of the polytopes in P . Then P is an (n + 1)-dimensional polytope in En+1 whose sides correspond, under radial projection from the origin, to the polytopes in P . Hence, the sides of P are congruent n-dimensional Euclidean regular polytopes.

Let v be a vertex of P and let r > 0 be such that S(v, r) meets just the sides of P containing v. Then P ∩ S(v, r) is a link of v in P . Let Py be the set of polytopes inP that contain v. If Q is inP y, then Q∩ S(v, r) is a link of v in Q. Hence Q ∩ S(v, r) is an (n —1)-dimensional regular polytope in S(v, r) ∩ Sn by Theorem 6.5.14. Therefore Py restricts to a regular tessellation of S(v, r) ∩Sn. By the induction hypothesis, this tessellation corresponds, under radial projection, to an n-dimensional Euclidean regular polytope inscribed in S(v, r) ∩Sn. Consequently, the link P ∩ S(v, r) of v in P is a regular polytope in S(v, r). Therefore, all the dihedral angles of P between adjacent sides that contain v are the same; moreover, this is true for each vertex of P .

Let w be a vertex of P adjacent to v, that is, v and w are the vertices of an edge E of P . Then E is contained in a ridge R of P by Theorem 6.3.12. Hence, all the dihedral angles of P between adjacent sides that contain v or w are the same. It follows from Lemma 3 of §6.5 and induction on dimension that for any two vertices u and v of P , there is a sequence E1, . . . , EA of edges of P such that u is a vertex of E1, the edges Ei and Ei+1 meet along a common vertex for each i = 1, . . . , l— 1, and v is a vertex of EA. Hence, by induction on l, all the dihedral angles of P between adjacent sides are the same. Therefore P is a regular polytope by Theorem 6.5.15. This completes the induction.

Exercise 7.2.6 Prove that the group of symmetries of a regular tessellation of X is an n-simplex reflection group.

Solution: Let Pbe a regular tessellation of X. Let P be a polytope in P , and let f be either a symmetry of P or a reflection of X in a side of P . We claim that f is a symmetry of P. Let Q be a polytope in P. we need to show that f Q is in P. By Theorem 6.8.2, there is a sequence P1, . . . , Pm in P such that 172

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

P = P1, the polytopes Pi−1 and Pi share a common side for i > 1, and Pm = Q. We may assume that m is as small as possible. Then Pi−1 /= Pi for i > 1. We prove that f Q is in P by induction on m. Suppose m = 1. Then P = Q. If f is a symmetry of P , then f P = P , and so f Q is in P. If f is a reflection in a side of P , then f P is in P by Lemma 2 of §6.5, and so f Q is in P. Now assume m > 1, and the claim is true for sequences of length m — 1. Then f Pm−1 is in P by the induction hypothesis. Hence f Q is in P by Lemma 2 of §6.5. This completes the induction. Thus f is a symmetry of P. Let P and Q be in P. We claim that there is a symmetry h of P such that hP = Q. Let P1, . . . , Pm be in P such that P = P1, the polytopes Pi−1 and Pi share a common side for i > 1, and Pm = Q. We prove the claim by induction on m. This is clear if m = 1, so assume m > 1 and the claim is true for sequences of length m — 1. Then there is a symmetry g of P such that gP = Pm−1. Let f be the reflection in the side Pm−1 ∩ Q of Pm−1. Then h = fg is a symmetry of P and hP = fgP = f Pm−1 = Q. This completes the induction. Thus, there is a symmetry h ofP such that hP = Q. Let ∆ be an n-simplex in the barycentric subdivision of P , and let ∆′ be an n-simplex in the barycentric subdivision of Q. Then ∆ is a fundamental polyhedron for the action of the group of symmetries of P on P . Hence, there is a unique symmetry g ofP such that g∆ = ∆′. Therefore ∆ is a fundamental polyhedron for the group Γ of symmetries ofP . All the reflections in the sides of ∆ are in Γ, and so Γ is a discrete reflection group with respect to ∆. Thus Γ is an n-simplex reflection group.

Exercise 7.2.7 Let A be a Gram matrix for two n-simplices ∆1 and ∆2 in X. Prove that ∆1 and ∆2 are similar in X. Solution: Assume first that X = Sn. Let v1j, . . . , vn+1,j be the unit normal vectors of the sides S1j, . . . , Sn+1,j of ∆j directed into ∆j for j = 1, 2. Let Bj be the (n + 1) (n × + 1)-matrix whose column vectors are v1j, . . . , vn+1,j t −1 t for j = 1, 2. Then 1BtB1 = A = B2 tB2. Hence (B ) B2 B2B−11 = I, that is, 1 (B2B1−1)tB2B1−1 = I. Therefore B2B1−1 is orthogonal and B2B1−1vi1 = vi2 for each i = 1, . . . , n + 1. For j = 1, 2, we have ∆j = {x ∈ Sn : x · vij ≥ 0 for i = 1, . . . , n + 1}, and so B2B1−1(∆1) = ∆2. Thus ∆1 and ∆2 are congruent in Sn. Assume now that X = En. Let v1j, . . . , vn+1,j be the unit normal vectors of the sides S1j, . . . , Sn+1,j of ∆j directed into ∆j for j = 1, 2. By translating ∆1 and ∆2, we may assume that the vertex of ∆j opposite the side Sn+1j is the origin for j = 1, 2. Now, the links of the origin in ∆j have the same Gram matrix, and so by the spherical case, we may assume that vi1 = vi2 for i = 1, . . . , n. Let vi = vij for i = 1, . . . , n. nThen v1, . . . , vn is a basis of Rn. Let u1, . . . , un be the orthonormal basis of E obtained from v1, . . . , vn by the Σj Gram-Schmidt process. Then uj = i=1 cijvi for some coefficients cij for each index j.

173

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Now we have vn+1,1 =

n Σ

(vn+1,1 · uj )uj

j=1

=

j n Σ Σ

cij (vn+1,1 · vi)uj

j=1 i=1

= =

j n Σ Σ

cij (vn+1,2 · vi)uj

j=1 i=1 n Σ

(vn+1,2 · uj )uj

=

vn+1,2.

j=1

Let vn+1 = vn+1,j. Now ⟨ Sn+1,j ⟩ = {x ∈En : x ·vn+1 ≥ — tj }for some tj > 0 for j = 1, 2. Moreover, for j = 1, 2, we have ∆j = {x ∈ En : x · vi ≥ 0 for i = 1, . . . , n and x · vn+1 ≥ —tj}.

Hence ∆1 and ∆2 are equivalent under a change of scale. Thus ∆ 1 and ∆2 are similar in En. Assume now that X = Hn. Let v1j, . . . , vn+1,j be the Lorentz unit normal vectors of the sides S1j, . . . , Sn+1,j of ∆j directed into ∆j for j = 1, 2. Let Bj be the (n + 1) ×(nt + 1)-matrix whose column vectors are v1j, . . . , vn+1,j for j = 1, 2. Then B JB 1 = A = B t JB 2 . Hence (Bt)−1BtJB2B−1 = J, that is, 1

2

1

2

1

(B2B1−1)tJB2B1−1 = J. Therefore B2B1−1 is Lorentzian and B2B1−1vi1 = vi2 for each i = 1, . . . , n + 1. For j = 1, 2, we have ∆j = {x ∈ Hn : x ◦ vij ≥ 0 for i = 1, . . . , n + 1}, and so B2B1−1(∆1) = ∆2. Thus ∆1 and ∆2 are congruent in Hn. Exercise 7.2.8 Prove that every Euclidean or hyperbolic simplex reflection group is irreducible.

Solution: Let Γ be a discrete reflection group with respect to an n-simplex ∆ in En or Hn. On the contrary, suppose that Γ is reducible. Then the Coxeter graph of Γ is disconnected. Hence, the sides of ∆ can be ordered so that the standard Gram matrix A of Γ is a block diagonal matrix of the form A =

B 0

0 C

.

By Theorem 7.2.5, we have that det A ≤ 0. Now det A = det B det C. Hence, either det B ≤ 0 or det C ≤ 0. We may assume that det B ≤ 0. By Theorem 7.2.5, the matrix An+1 obtained by deleting the last row and last column form A is positive definite. Moreover An+1 is the standard Gram matrix of a spherical (n —1)-simplex reflection group. By repeating this argument again and again, we deduce that B is positive definite, and so det B > 0, which is a contradiction.

Thus Γ is irreducible.

174

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 7.2.9 Prove that every hyperbolic n-simplex reflection group is nonelementary when n > 1.

Solution: Let Γ be a hyperbolic n-simplex reflection group. Then Vol(X/Γ) is finite, since an n-simplex has finite volume. Therefore Γ is nonelementary by Exercise 6.7.2.

7.3

Generalized Simplex Reflection Groups

Exercise 7.3.1 Prove that PSL(2, Z) is isomorphic to the subgroup of orientationpreserving isometries of a reflection group with respect to a triangle T (2, 3, ∞).

Solution: The triangle T in Figure 6.7.1 is a fundamental polygon for the discrete group PSL(2, Z) of isometries of U 2. The imaginary axis of C subdivides T into two triangles of the form T (2, 3, ∞). One of these triangles is the triangle √

T ′ with vertices i, 12 + 32 i, ∞. Let f be the reflection of C in the imaginary axis. Then the other triangle is f T ′.

Let Γ be the discrete reflection group with respect to T ′. Then {1, f } is a set of coset representatives for the group Γ0 of orientation-preserving isometries of ′ gT ′ Γ. By the argument in the proof of Theorem 6.7.3, we deduce that T = T ∪ is a fundamental polygon for Γ0. Let g be the reflection of C in the line x = 1/2, and let h be the reflection of U 2 in the line with endpoints— 1 and 1. The group PSL(2, C) is generated by the horizontal translation gf and the 180○ rotation fh about i by Theorem 6.8.3. Therefore PSL(2, Z) c Γ0, and so PSL(2, Z) = Γ0, since they have the same fundamental polygon.

Exercise 7.3.2 Prove that Γ3 is a hyperbolic, noncompact tetrahedron, reflection group.

Solution: Let Γ be the subgroup of O+(3, 1) of all the matrices with integral entries. Clearly Γ acts on the set S = H3 ∩Z4. The point e4 = (0, 0, 0, 1) is in S. The stabilizer of e4 in Γ is isomorphic to O(3) ∩ GL(3, Z), which is the group of symmetries of the cube with vertices±( 1, ± 1,±1). This group is a spherical triangle reflection group of type T (2, 3, 4) with Coxeter graph .

. 4

.

A fundamental domain in E3 is the region satisfying the inequalities z > 0, x > y, and y > z.

The points of S — e {4 }nearest to e4 are the eight points (± 1,± 1, ±1, 2).

Let A be the Lorentzian matrix that represents the reflection of H3 that maps e4 to (1, 1, 1, 2), and let a be a Lorentz unit normal vector of the 3-dimensional vector subspace of R4 fixed by A. Then Ax = x — (2a ◦ x)a. Therefore e4 + 2a4a = (1, 1, 1, 2).

175

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

√ Hence 2a42 = 1, and so a4 = ± 2/2. Thus √ √ √ √ a = ±( 2/2, 2/2, 2/2, 2/2), and so

. 0 —1 —1 1 .

—1 0 —1 1 .

A = . .

—1 —1 0 1 —1 —1 —1 2 The fixed space of A is the hyperplane w = x + y + z. Let T be the region of H3 bounded by the planes z = 0, x = y, y = z, and w = x + y + z. Then T satisfies the inequalities 0 ≤ z ≤ y ≤ x and w ≥ x + y + z and the equation x2 + y2 + z2 — w2 = —√1. The√bounding plan√es of T√have inward Lorentz unit √ normal √ vectors √ ( 1 / 2, —√1/ 2, 0, 0), (0, 1/ 2, —1/ 2, 0), (0, 0, 1, 0), and (—1/ 2, —1/ 2, —1/ 2, —1/ 2). If u and v are two of these vectors, then the dihedral angle θ between the corresponding planes satisfies u ◦v = — cos θ.

Hence, the Gram matrix of T is , 1 —1 0 0 2 −1 . 1 . √ — 1 1 .

2 .

2 −1 −1 1 √ 0 √ 2 2 −1 0 0 √2 1 which corresponds to the Coxeter graph .

. 4

. 4

.

Thus T is a noncompact generalized hyperbolic tetrahedron all of whose dihedral angles are submutiples of π by Theorem 7.3.2. Let Γ1 be the discrete reflection group with respect to T .

Let (x, y, z, w) be a point of S ∩ T . Then 0 ≤ z ≤ y ≤ x and w ≥ x + y + z.

Hence, we have w2 ≥ (x + y + z)2 = x2 + y2 + z2 + 2xy + 2yz + 2xz, and so

w2 — (x2 + y2 + z2) ≥ 2xy + 2yz + 2xz.

Therefore 1 ≥ 2(xy + yz + xz), and so xy + yz + xz = 0. Therefore y = z = 0. Now w2 — x2 = 1 implies x = 0 and w = 1. Thus S ∩ T = {e4}.

Now Γ1 c Γ, since the four reflections that generate Γ1 are in Γ. Let g be an element of Γ. Then there is an f in Γ1 such that fge4 = e4. Thus fg is in the stabilizer of e4 in Γ. As this stabilizer is a subgroup of Γ1, we have that g is in Γ1. Hence Γ = Γ1. Thus Γ is a discrete reflection group with respect to the tetrahedron T .

176

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 7.3.3 Construct the Coxeter graphs of all the hyperbolic, noncompact 4-simplex, reflection groups.

Solution: The Coxeter graph of a hyperbolic noncompact 4-simplex reflection group is obtained from the Coxeter graph of a Euclidean 3-simplex reflection group by adding a new vertex and edges from the new vertex. There are three Euclidean 3-simplex reflection groups. Their Coxeter graphs are . . /.

4 4 4 . ./ . . . . . @ @.

From the 4-cycle, we obtain the Coxeter graphs . /@ ./ @. @ / @./

. /@ 4 ./ @. @ / @./

.

. /@ ./ . @. @ / @./

.

that satisfy the four conditions at the end of §7.3. From the linear graph, we obtain the Coxeter graphs . .\ 4 / 4 / \ 4 4 4 4 ./ . . . . . . . . .

Q /\.

Q / Q./ From the star graph, we obtain the Coxeter graphs . .

.

4

.

4

.

.

.

4

.

.

.

together with the previously obtained graphs 4 .

4 .

.

.

.

4

. /@ ./ @. @ / @./

Thus, there are a total of 9 hyperbolic noncompact 4-simplex reflection groups.

177

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 7.3.4 Prove that the Coxeter graph of a hyperbolic, noncompact nsimplex, reflection group, with n ≥2, is obtained from the Coxeter graph of a Euclidean (n — 1)-simplex reflection group by adding a new vertex and at most three new edges from the new vertex.

Solution: Let G be the Coxeter graph of a hyperbolic noncompact n-simplex reflection group with n ≥ 2. Then G is obtained from the Coxeter graph G0 of a Euclidean (n — 1)-simplex reflection group by adding a new vertex vn+1 and k new edges from vn+1. Now G0 is either a cycle or a tree, and so χ(G0) = 0 or 1. Hence χ(G) = 1 — k or 2 — k. Let v0 be a vertex of G0 which is an endpoint of G0 if G0 is a tree. Then v0 has at most 3 adjoining edges in G if G0 is a cycle or at most 2 adjoining edges in G if G0 is a tree. Let G1 be the graph obtained from G by deleting v0 and its adjoining edges. Then χ(G1) ≤ 3 — k. Now G1 is the connected graph of either a Euclidean or spherical (n — 1)-simplex reflection group. Hence G1 is either a cycle or a tree. Therefore χ(G 1) ≥ 0, and so k ≤ 3.

The case k = 3 occurs for the top right most graph in Figure 7.3.5.

Exercise 7.3.5 Prove that each label of the Coxeter graph of a hyperbolic, noncompact n-simplex, reflection group, with n ≥ 4, is at most 4.

Solution: Let G be the Coxeter graph of a hyperbolic noncompact n-simplex reflection group. Then G is obtained from the Coxeter graph G0 of a Euclidean (n — 1)-simplex reflection group by adding a new vertex vn+1 and at most 3 new edges from vn+1 by Exercise 7.3.4. The Coxeter graph of every Euclidean (n — 1)-simplex reflection group, with n ≥ 4, is either a cycle or a tree with edge labels at most 4. Hence, the edge labels of G0 are at most 4. Now G0 has n ≥ 4 vertices, and so G0 has a vertex v0 that is not joined to vn+1. If G0 is a tree, we may assume that either v0 is an endpoint of G0 or if vn+1 is adjacent to each endpoint of G0, then v0 is adjacent to an endpoint of G0. Let G1 be the graph obtained from G by removing v0 and its adjoining edges. Then G1 is connected.

Now G1 is either a cycle or a tree. By Exercise 7.3.3, we may assume n ≥ 5.

From Figures 7.2.7 and 7.2.8, we see that every edge label of G1 is at most 4.

Thus, all the edge labels of G are at most 4.

7.4

The Volume of a Simplex

Exercise 7.4.1 Let A be a real nonsingular symmetric matrix. Prove that A is positive definite if and only if A−1 is positive definite.

Solution: Suppose A is positive definite. Then A is symmetric, and so A−1 is symmetric. Suppose y /= 0, and let x = yA−1. Then we have yA−1yt = (xA)A−1(xA)t = xAA−1Atxt = xAxt > 0.

Hence A−1 is positive definite. Conversely, if A−1 is positive definite, then A = (A−1)−1 is positive definite.

178

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 7.4.2 Let ∆ be an n-simplex in En with vertices 0, u1, . . . , un, and let B be the n × n matrix whose column vectors are u1, . . . , un. Prove that 1

| det B|. n!

Solution: Assume first that ui = ei for each i. Then Vol(∆) = 1/n! by Lemma 2 of §7.2 and induction on n. Now consider the general case. Then Bei = ui for each i, and so B−1ui = ei for each i. By changing variables via B−1, we have ∫ ∫ 1 dx = Vol(∆) = | det B| dy = | det B|. n!

B−1(∆) ∆ Vol(∆) =

Exercise 7.4.3 Let ∆ be a generalized n-simplex in Hn with n > 1. Prove that Vol(∆) is a continuous function of the dihedral angles of ∆.

Solution: It follows from inequalities (7.2.1) and Theorem 7.3.1 that the set K of all lexigraphically ordered m-tuples of entries c = (cij), with≤ i j, of inverses C of Gram matrices A of generalized n-simplices ∆ in Hn is the intersection of the closed set L = {c ∈ Rm : cii ≤ 0 for each i } and an open subset M of Rm. By Lemma 1 of §7.4, we have √ ∫ — det C Vol(∆) = eΦ(c,y)/2 dy. n−1

2 2 Γ( For c = (cij)i≤j in K, let

n+1 2 )

Q

∫ eΦ(c,y)/2 dy.

F (c) = Q

We claim that F (c) is continuous in the region K. Let c0 = (cij)i≤j be a point in K, and let {cA} be an infinite sequence in K converging to c0. Now there is an r > 0 such that Y [cij — r, cij + r] c M. i≤j

Moreover, if cii < 0, we may assume that cii + r ≤ 0. Let Iij = Q [ c i i — r, cii] if i = jQand cii = 0 and let Iij = [cij — r, cij + r] otherwise. Then i≤j Iij c K and i≤j Iij contains an open neighborQ hood of c0 in K. Hence, we may assume, without loss of generality, that cA is in i≤j Iij for all l. Let c′0 = (max Iij)i≤j.

Then for all l and y, we have exp Φ(cA, y)/2

≤ exp Φ(c′0, y)/2 .

Hence, by the Lebesgue dominated convergence theorem, we have lim F (cA) = F (c0).

A→∞

179

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Therefore F (c) is continuous in K as claimed.

Let N be the set of all lexigraphically ordered m-tuples of entries a = (aij)i≤j of Gram matrices A of generalized n-simplices ∆ in Hn. Then c(a) is continuous in the region N where (cij) = (aij)−1. Hence F (c(a)) Vol(∆) = n−1 n+1 √ 2 2 Γ( 2 ) — det A is continuous function of a in the region N . If A = (aij) = (— cos θij) is a standard Gram matrix of ∆. Then a = (aij)i≤j is a continuous function of θ = (θij)i<j. Hence Vol(∆) is a continuous function of θ.

7.5

Crystallographic Groups

Exercise 7.5.1 Prove that a discrete group Γ of isometries of En is crystallographic if and only if En/Γ has finite volume. See Exercise 6.3.6.

Solution: Let Γ be a discrete group of isometries of En and let P be a convex fundamental polyhedron for Γ in En. Then Γ is crystallographic if and only if P is compact by Theorem 7.5.1. By Exercise 6.3.6, we have that P is compact if and only if the volume of P is finite. As Vol(En/Γ) = Vol(P ), we have that Γ is crystallographic if and only if En/Γ has finite volume.

Exercise 7.5.2 Prove that a discrete group Γ of isometries of En is crystallographic if and only if the translation vectors of its parabolic elements span Rn. See Exercise 5.4.8.

Solution: If Γ is crystallographic, then the translation vectors of the translations in Γ span Rn by Theorem 7.5.2. Conversely, suppose Γ is a discrete group of isometries such that the translation vectors of its parabolic elements span Rn. By Theorem 5.4.5, the group Γ has a free abelian subgroup H of rank m and of finite index such that H acts as translations on an m-plane P of Rn. By conjugating Γ by a translation, we may assume that P is a vector subspace of Rn. Now if φ is a parabolic element of Γ, then φk is in H for some positive integer k, since H is of finite index in Γ. If v is the translation vector of φ, then kv is the translation vector of φk. Therefore, the translation vectors of the parabolic elements of H also span Rn. The translation vectors of the parabolic elements of H all lie in P , and so P = Rn. Therefore, the group of translations of Γ is of finite index and has maximal rank n. Thus Γ is crystallographic by Theorem 7.5.2.

Exercise 7.5.3 Let Γ be a crystallographic group. Prove that an element g of Γ is a translation if and only if g has only finitely many conjugates in Γ.

Solution: Suppose g = a + I is a translation in Γ. Let h = b + B be in Γ.

Then we have hgh−1 = (b + B)(a + I)(—B−1b + B−1) = (b + b)(a — B−1b + B−1) = Ba + I. 180

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Now B is in the point group Π of Γ, which is a finite group. Therefore g has only finitely many conjugates in Γ.

Conversely, suppose g = a + A is in Γ with A = I. As the translation vectors of the translations of Γ span Rn, there is a translation f = b + I in Γ such that (I — A)b /= 0. Then for each positive integer k, we have f k gf −k

= (kb + I)(a + A)(—kb + I) = (kb + I)(a — kAb + A) = kb + a — kAb + A = k(I — A)b + a + A.

Therefore g has infinitely many conjugates in Γ.

Exercise 7.5.4 Let Γ be a crystallographic group. Prove that an element a+A of Γ is a translation if and only if A — I < 1.

Solution: If a + A is a translation, then A — I = 0 < 1. Conversely, suppose a + A is an element of Γ such that A — I < 1. As Γ is crystallographic, there is a basis {v1, . . . , vn} of Rn such that vi + I is in Γ for each i. Now a + A and vi + I commute for each i by Lemma 5 of §5.4. Hence, for each i, we have vi + I

=

(a + A)(vi + I)(a + A)−1

= (a + Avi + A)(—A−1a + A−1) = Avi + I. Therefore Avi = vi for each i, and so A = I. Thus a + A is a translation.

Exercise 7.5.5 Let a + A be an element of a crystallographic group Γ such that A /= I. Prove that the largest angle of rotation of A is at least π/3.

Solution: By Exercise 7.5.4, we have that A — I ≥ 1. Hence, by Lemma 1 of §5.4, we have 2(1 — cos θm) ≥ 1. Therefore cos θm ≤ 1/2. Thus θm ≥ π/3.

Exercise 7.5.6 Verify that G∗ in the proof of Lemma 8 is a group.

Solution: The multiplication in G∗ = Zn × Q is defined by (a, q)(b, r) = (a + qb + mf (q, r), qr) where m = | Q| and xqxr = ιf (q, r)xqr with η(xq) = q and x1 = 1. Hence f (1, r) = 0 = f (q, 1) for all q, r in Q. Therefore, we have (a, q)(0, 1)

=

(a + q · 0 + mf (q, 1), q)

=

(a, q)

(0, 1)(b, r)

=

(0 + 1 · b + mf (1, r), r)

=

(b, r).

Thus (0, 1) is an identity element for G∗.

181

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Next, observe that (a, q)(—q−1a — q−1mf (q, q−1), q−1)

=

(a — qq−1a — qq−1mf (q, q−1) + mf (q, q−1), qq−1) Therefore (—q−1a

= (0, 1).

— q−1mf (q, q−1), q−1) is a right inverse of (a, q).

Next, observe that (a, q)(b, r) (c, s) = (a + qb + mf (q, r), qr)(c, s) = (a + qb + mf (q, r) + qrc + mf (qr, s), qrs) = (a + qb + qrc + mqf (r, s) + mf (q, rs), qrs) = (a, q)(b + rc + mf (r, s), rs) = (a, q) (b, r)(c, s) .

Thus, the associative law holds for G∗. Therefore G∗ is a group.

Exercise 7.5.7 Prove that the group G∗ in the proof of Lemma 8 is isomorphic to the splitting group of G when G is crystallographic.

Solution: Suppose G is crystallographic. Let Gs∗ be the splitting group of G. 1 Define φ : G∗ → Gs∗ by φ(a, q) = ι(a) m xq. Then we have φ (a, q)(b, r)

=

φ(a + qb + mf (q, r), qr)

=

ι(a + qb + mf (q, r)) m , xqr

1 1

= ι(a + qb) m ιf (q, r)xqr 1

= ι(a + qb) m xqxr 1

1

= ι(a) m xqxq−1ι(q, b) m xqxr 1

=

1

ι(a) m xqι(b) m xr

= φ(a, q)φ(b, r).

Thus φ is a homomorphism.

The map φ is an epimorphism, since we have 1 φ(a, 1) = ι(a) m for all a in Zn and φ(0, q) = xq for all q in Q. 1 m xq = 1.

To see that φ is an monomorphism, suppose φ(a, q) = 1.

Then ι(a) 1 m Hence η(xq) = 1, and so q = 1 and xq = 1. Therefore ι(a) = 1. Hence a = 0 and (a, q) = (0, 1). Thus φ is a monomorphism, and so φ : G∗→ Gs∗ is an isomorphism.

7.6

Torsion-Free Linear Groups

Exercise 7.6.1 Let Γ be a group with a torsion-free subgroup of finite index.

Prove that Γ has a torsion-free normal subgroup of finite index.

Solution: Let H be a torsion-free subgroup of Γ of finite index. The number of conjugates of H in Γ is [Γ : NΓ(H)]≤ [Γ : H] < ∞ . Hence H has finitely many conjugates in Γ, say g1Hg1−1, . . . , g n Hg n− 1 . Let N = g1Hg1∩−1· · · ∩ gnHgn. Then N is a normal subgroup of Γ. As the intersection of two subgroups of Γ of finite index is of finite index in Γ, we deduce that N is of finite index in Γ.

182

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 7.6.2 Let Γ be a group with a torsion-free subgroup of finite index.

Prove that there is an upper bound on the set of finite orders of elements of Γ.

Solution: By Exercise 7.6.1, the group Γ has a normal torsion-free subgroup N of finite index. Let n = |Γ/N |and let g have finite order in Γ. As gn ≡ 1 mod N, we have that gn is in N. Therefore gn = 1, since N is torsion-free. Hence, the order of g divides n. Thus n is an upper bound for the set of finite orders of elements of Γ.

Exercise 7.6.3 Let A be a finitely generated subring of C. Prove that every subgroup of PSL(2, A) has a torsion-free normal subgroup of finite index.

Solution: Let Γ be a subgroup of PSL(2, A), and let π : SL(2, A)→ PSL(2, A) be the natural projection. Then Γ̃ = π−1(Γ) has a torsion-free normal subgroup Ñ of finite index by Theorem 7.6.7. Now— I is not in Ñ , since—I has order 2.

Hence π maps Ñ isomorphically onto N = π (Ñ ). Therefore N is a torsion-free normal subgroup of Γ of finite index.

Exercise 7.6.4 Prove that every finitely generated subgroup of PSL(2, C) has a torsion-free normal subgroup of finite index.

Solution: Let Γ be a finitely generated subgroup of PSL(2, C), and let π : SL(2, C) →PSL(2, C) be the natural projection. Then Γ̃ = π−1(Γ) is a finitely generated subgroup of SL(2, C), and so Γ̃ has a torsion-free normal subgroup Ñ of finite index by Corollary 4 of§7.6. Now —I is not in Ñ , since —I has order 2.

Hence π maps Ñ isomorphically onto N = π (Ñ ). Therefore N is a torsion-free normal subgroup of Γ of finite index.

Exercise 7.6.5 Prove that a group Γ is residually finite if and only if the intersection of all its normal subgroups of finite index is {1}.

Solution: Suppose Γ is residually finite, and on the contrary there is g /= 1 in the intersection of all the normal subgroups of Γ of finite index. Then there exists a normal subgroup N of Γ of finite index such that g/∈ N, which is a contradiction. Hence, the intersection of all the normal subgroups of Γ of finite index is {1 }.

Conversely, suppose that the intersection of all the normal subgroups of Γ of finite index is {1 }. Let g =/ 1 be an element of Γ. Then g is not in the intersection of all the normal subgroups of Γ of finite index. Hence, there is a normal subgroup N of Γ of finite index such that g/∈ N. Therefore Γ is residually finite.

Exercise 7.6.6 Any group Γ is a topological group with the profinite topology which has as a basis of open neighborhoods of 1, the collection of all normal subgroups of finite index in Γ. Prove that a group Γ is residually finite if and only if Γ with the profinite topology is Hausdorff.

183

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Suppose Γ is residually finite. As Γ is a topological group with respect to the profinite topology, it suffices to show that 1 and g = 1 can be separated be disjoint open sets. Let N be a normal subgroup of Γ of finite index such that g /∈N. Then N and Ng are disjoint open neighborhoods of 1 and g.

Hence Γ, with the profinite topology, is Hausdorff.

Conversely, suppose that Γ, with the profinite topology, is Hausdorff. Let g = 1 be an element of Γ. Then there exist disjoint open neighborhoods U and V of 1 and g. As V g−1 is an open neighborhood of 1, there exists a normal subgroup N of Γ of finite index such that N c V g−1, and so Ng c V . Observe that g /∈ N, since 1 /∈ V . Therefore Γ is residually finite.

Exercise 7.6.7 Prove that a group Γ is residually finite if and only if Γ with the profinite topology is totally disconnected.

Solution: Suppose that Γ is residually finite. As Γ is a topological group with respect to the profinite topology, it suffices to show that the connected component C of 1 is{ 1} . On the contrary, suppose that g/ = 1 is in C. Let N be a normal subgroup of Γ of finite index such that g/∈ N. The open set N is also closed in Γ, since each coset of N is open, and so Γ— N is open.

Hence (C∩N) (C ∪ (Γ∩N))—is a disconnection of C, which is a contradiction.

Therefore C = {1}, and so Γ is totally disconnected.

Conversely, suppose that Γ, with the profinite topology, is totally disconnected. Let C be the intersection of all the normal subgroups of Γ of finite index.

We claim that C is connected. On the contrary, suppose that C is disconnected.

Then there exist open subsets U and V of Γ such that C = (C ∩ U∪) (C∩ V ) and (C ∩U ) ∩(C V∩ ) = and ∅ both C U∩ and C V∩are nonempty. We may assume 1∈ C ∩ U . Let g be an element of C ∩V . As V is an open neighborhood of g in Γ, there exists a normal subgroup N of Γ of finite index such that Ng c V . Now g ∈ C c N, and so 1 ∈ N c V . Hence 1 ∈ C ∩V , which is a contradiction. Therefore C is connected. Hence C ={ 1}, since Γ is totally disconnected. Therefore Γ is residually finite by Exercise 7.6.5.

184

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 8

Geometric Manifolds 8.1

Geometric Spaces

Exercise 8.1.1 Prove that elliptic n-space P n is an n-dimensional geometric space.

Solution: 1. Let ±x and ±y be distinct points in P n . By replacing y with —y, if necessary, we may assume that dS(x, y) ≤ dS(x,— y). Now y/= —x, since ±x = / ±y. Hence, there is a unique geodesic segment [x, y] in Sn joining x to y.

We have that dS(—y, x) + dS(x, y) = dS(—y, y) = π.

Hence dS(x, y) ≤ π/2, since dS(x, y) ≤ dS(x, —y). If w, z are points of [x, y], then dS(w, z)≤ π/2, and so dS(w, z)≤ dS(w, — z). Therefore, the natural projection η : Sn → P n maps [x, y] isometrically onto a geodesic segment of P n joining ±x to ± y. Thus P n is geodesically connected.

2. Let α : [a, b] → P n be a geodesic arc. Then α lifts to a geodesic curve α̃ : [a, b] → Sn, since η : Sn → P n is a local isometry. The curve α̃ extends to a unique geodesic line λ̃ : R →Sn. Hence λ = η λ̃ is a unique geodesic line extending α. Thus P n is geodesically complete.

3. Define ϵ : En → Sn by ϵ(0) = en+1 and ϵ(x) = (cos |x|)en+1 + (sin |x|)x/|x| for x /= 0.

Then ϵ satisfies Axiom 3 for a geometric space with k = π/2. By Exercise 2.2.4, we have that η : Sn→ P n maps B(en+1, π/4) isometrically onto B(± en+1, π/4).

Define ϵ : En → P n by ϵ = ηϵ. Then ϵ satisfies Axiom 3 with k = π/4.

4. Let ±x and ±y be distinct points of P n . We may assume dS(x, y) ≤ dS(x, — y). As Sn is homogeneous, there is an isometry φ of Sn such that φ(x) = y. Let ± w be a point of P n . Then φ(—w) = —φ(w), since φ is the restriction of an orthogonal transformation of En. Hence φ induces a map φ : P n → P n defined by φ(±w) = ±φ(w).

185

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Let ±z be another point of P n . We may assume dS(w, z) ≤ dS(w, —z).

Then dS(w, z) ≤ π/2, and so dS(φ(w), φ(z)) ≤ π/2. Therefore dS(φ(w), φ(z)) ≤ dS(φ(w), —φ(z)). Hence, we have dP (φ(±w), φ(±z)) = dP (±φ(w), ±φ(z)) = dS(φ(w), φ(z)) = dS(w, z) = dP (±w, ±z).

Thus φ is an isometry of P n . Moreover ±φ( x) ± = φ(x) =±y. Hence P n is n homogeneous. Thus P is a geometric space.

Exercise 8.1.2 Prove that the n-torus T n = En/Zn is an n-dimensional geometric space.

Solution: 1. That T n is geodesically connected follows from Exercise 8.1.4, since T n is an En-space-form.

2. Let α : [a, b] → T n be a geodesic arc. Then α lifts to a geodesic curve α̃ : [a, b]→ En, since the quotient map π : En → T n is a local isometry. The curve α̃ extends to a unique geodesic line λ̃ : R→ En. Hence λ = π λ̃ is a unique geodesic line extending α. Thus T n is geodesically complete.

3. The n-cube [—1/2, 1/2]n is a Dirichlet domain, centered at 0, for Γ = Zn. Hence π : En → T n maps B(0, 1/2) homeomorphically onto B(Γ0, 1/2). We now show that π maps C(0, 1/4) isometrically onto C(Γ0, 1/4). Let x and y be points of C(0, 1/4). Suppose g is in Γ and g /= 1. Then we have 1

≤

dE(0, g0)

≤

dE(0, x) + dE(x, gy) + dE(gy, g0)

≤

4 + dE(x, gy) + 4 .

1

1

Hence dE(x, gy) ≥ 1/2 ≥ dE(x, y). Therefore dE(x, y) = distE(x, Γy). Hence, we have dΓ(π(x), π(y)) = distE(Γx, Γy) = distE(x, Γy) = dE(x, y).

Hence π maps C(0, 1/4) isometrically onto C(0, 1/4). Thus π satisfies Axiom 3 for a geometric space with k = 1/4.

4. Let Γx and Γy be distinct points of T n . Choose x and y so that dE(x, y) = dΓ(Γx, Γy). Let τ be the translation of En by y— x. Then τ (x) = y. Let Γw be a point of T n . Then τ (gw) = gτ (w) for each g in Γ, since the elements of Γ are translations. Hence τ induces a map τ : T n→ T n defined by τ (Γw) = Γτ (w).

Let Γz be another point of T n . We choose z so that dE(w, z) = distE(w, Γz).

Then dE(τ (w), τ (z)) = distE(τ (w), Γτ (z)). Hence, we have dΓ(τ (Γw), τ (Γz)) = dΓ(Γτ (w), Γτ (z)) = distE(τ (w), Γτ (z)) = dE(τ (w), τ (z)) = dE(w, z) = distE(w, Γz) = dΓ(Γw, Γz).

186

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Thus τ is an isometry of T n . Moreover τ (Γx) = Γτ (x) = Γy. Hence T n is homogeneous. Thus T n is a geometric space.

Exercise 8.1.3 A metric space X is said to be locally geodesically convex if for each point x of X, there is an r > 0 such that any two distinct points in B(x, r) are joined by a unique geodesic segment in X. Prove that every geometric space is locally geodesically convex.

Solution: Let k be as in Axiom 3 for a geometric space. Let x and y be points of X such that d(x, y) < k. We now show that there is a unique geodesic segment in X joining x to y. Let l = d(x, y), and let α : [0, l]→ X be a geodesic arc from x to y. The arc α extends to a unique geodesic line λ : R→ X. As X is homogeneous, we may assume that the map ϵ : En→ X in Axiom 3 satisfies ϵ(0) = x. By Theorem 8.1.1, there is a point u of Sn−1 such that λ(t) = ϵ(tu) for all t. In particular, α(t) = ϵ(tu) for all t in [0, l]. Thus α depends only on x and y = ϵ(lu).

Let r = k/2, and let y and z be points in B(x, r). Then we have d(y, z) ≤ d(y, x) + d(x, z) < r + r = k.

Hence, there is a unique geodesic segment in X joining y to z. Thus X is locally geodesically convex.

Exercise 8.1.4 Let X be a geometric space. Prove that every X-space-form is geodesically connected.

Solution: Let X/Γ be an X-space-form, and let Γx and Γy be distinct points of X/Γ. Let l = dΓ(Γx, Γy). Then l = dist(x, Γy). Now B(x, l+1) contains only finitely many points of the orbit Γy, since C(x, l + 1) is compact by Theorem 8.1.2. Hence, there is an element g of Γ such that l = d(x, gy).

Let α : [0, l] → X be a geodesic arc from x to gy, and let π : X → X/Γ be the quotient map. We now show that πα : [0, l] → X/Γ is a geodesic arc from Γx to Γy. Suppose 0 ≤ s < t ≤ l. Then we have dΓ(πα(s), πα(t)) ≤ d(α(s), α(t)) = t — s, since π does not increase distances. Now observe that l = dΓ(πα(0), πα(l)) ≤ dΓ(πα(0), πα(s)) + dΓ(πα(s), πα(t)) + dΓ(πα(t), πα(l)) ≤ s + (t — s) + (l — t) = l.

Therefore dΓ(πα(s), πα(t)) = t —s. Thus πα is a geodesic arc from Γx to Γy, and so X/Γ is geodesically connected.

Exercise 8.1.5 Let X be a simply connected geometric space, let X/Γ be an X-space-form, and let N (Γ) be the normalizer of Γ in I(X). Prove that I(X/Γ) is isomorphic to N (Γ)/Γ.

187

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let φ be in N (Γ). Then as in the proof of Theorem 8.1.5, the isometry φ induces an isometry φ of X/Γ. Thus, we have a function χ : N (Γ)→ I(X/Γ) defined by χ(φ) = φ. The function χ is obviously a homomorphism.

Let ξ be an isometry of X/Γ. The proof of Theorem 8.1.5 shows that ξ lifts to an isometry ξ˜ of X that normalizes Γ. Hence χ(ξ˜) = ξ. Thus χ is onto.

Now χ(φ) = id if and only if φ = id if and only if πφ = π if and only if φ is a covering transformation of π if and only if φ is in Γ by Theorem 8.1.3. Thus kerχ = Γ. Hence χ induces an isomorphism from N (Γ)/Γ onto I(X/Γ).

8.2

Clifford-Klein Space-Forms

Exercise 8.2.1 Show that E1/2πZ is isometric to S1.

Solution: Define ϵ : E1 →S1 by ϵ(θ) = exp(iθ). Then ϵ is an epimorphism of topological groups. Now ker ϵ = 2πZ. Hence ϵ induces an isomorphism of topological groups ϵ : E1/2πZ →S1.

Let θ +2πZ and φ+2πZ be elements of E1/2πZ. By replacing φ with φ+2πn for some integer n, we may assume that φ is in the interval (θ — π, θ + π]. Then |θ — φ| ≤ π. Let Γ = 2πZ. Observe that dS(ϵ(θ + 2πZ), ϵ(φ + 2πZ)) = dS(ϵ(θ), ϵ(φ)) = dS(exp(iθ), exp(iφ)) = |θ — φ| = distE(θ, φ + 2πZ) = dΓ(θ + 2πZ, φ + 2πZ).

Thus ϵ is an isometry and E1/2πZ is isometric to S1.

Exercise 8.2.2 Prove that the lens spaces L(p, q) and L(p′, q′) are isometric if and only if p = p′ and either q ≡ ±q′ (mod p) or qq′ ≡ ±1 (mod p).

Solution: Let L(p, q) = S3/Γp,q. Then Γp,q is generated by !

2πi 0 e p Ap,q = .

2πiq 0 e p Now L(p, q) and L(p′, q′) are isometric if and only if Γp,q and Γp',q' are conjugate in O(4) by Theorem 8.1.5. As | Γp,q | = p, we have that Γp,q and Γp',q' are conjugate only if p = p′. Thus, we may assume that p = p′.

Now Γp,q and Γp,q' are conjugate in O(4) if and only if Ap,q is conjugate to A kp,q ' in O(4) for some integer k that is relatively prime to p. The eigenvalues of the rotation corresponding to Ap,q are exp(±2πi/p) and exp(±2πiq/p).

Now Ap,q and Akp,q' are conjugate in O(4) if and only if they have the same eigenvalues, that is, if and only if 2πi

2πiq

2πik

{e ± p , e± p } = {e± p , e± 188

2πikq' p

}.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

This is the case if and only if either k ≡ ±1 mod p and q ≡ ±q′ mod p or k ≡ ±q mod p and qq′ ≡ ±1 mod p. Thus L(p, q) and L(p, q′) are isometric if and only if either q ≡ ±q′ mod p or qq′ ≡ ±1 mod p.

Exercise 8.2.3 Show that the volume of a spherical space-form Sn/Γ is given by the formula Vol(Sn/Γ) = Vol(Sn)/|Γ|.

Solution: Let R be a proper fundamental domain for Γ. Then we have Vol(Sn) = Vol ∪ gR = |Γ|Vol(R) = |Γ|Vol(Sn/Γ). g∈Γ

Thus Vol(Sn/Γ) = Vol(Sn)/|Γ|.

Exercise 8.2.4 Show that the Klein bottle group Γ of Example 4 is a torsionfree discrete subgroup of I(E2).

Solution: Let γ = ρτ1. Then γτ2γ−1 = τ −1 and γ2 = τ 2. Hence, we have a 2

short exact sequence

ι Γ 0 —→ Z —→

η

—→

1

Z —→ 0

with ι(1) = τ2 and η(γ) = 1. Therefore Γ is torsion-free. The free abelian group T of rank two generated by τ1 2 and τ2 has index two in Γ. Therefore Γ is a discrete subgroup of I(E2) by Theorem 5.4.5.

Exercise 8.2.5 Let En/Γ be a noncompact Euclidean space-form such that Γ is nontrivial and the subgroup T of translations of Γ is of finite index in Γ. Prove that En/Γ is finitely covered by a Euclidean space-form isometric to T m × En−m, where T m is a Euclidean m-torus with 0 < m < n.

Solution: The group T is a normal subgroup of Γ and the finite group Γ/T acts freely on the the space-form En/T as a discrete group of isometries with (En/T)/(Γ/T) isometric to En/Γ. Therefore En/T finitely covers En/Γ by Theorem 8.1.3.

Let V be the vector subspace of Rn spanned by the translation vectors of T, and let m = dim V . The group Γ is torsion-free by Theorem 8.2.1. As Γ is nontrivial, Γ is infinite. Hence T is nontrivial, and so m > 0. Now En/T is noncompact, since En/Γ is noncompact, and so m < n.

Let W = V ⊥. Then En = V × W and T acts trivially on the second factor. Therefore En/T is isometric to V/T × W . Hence En/T is isometric to T m × En−m where T m is the Euclidean m-torus V/T. Exercise 8.2.6 Let En/Γ and En/H be Euclidean n-tori with rectangular fundamental polyhedra P and Q, respectively. Prove that En/Γ and En/H are isometric if and only if P and Q are congruent in En.

189

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let v be a vertex of P and let S1, . . . , Sn be the sides of P containing v. Let γi = ai + I be the translations that map Si to the opposite side of P for each i. Then Γ is generated by γ1, . . . , γn. Suppose P and Q are congruent.

Then there is an isometry φ of En such that φ(P ) = Q. Now φ = a + A with a in En and A in O(n). Observe that φγiφ−1 = Aai + I is the translation that maps the side φ(Si) of Q to the opposite side of Q for each i. Therefore H is generated by φγ1φ−1, . . . , φγnφ−1. Hence H = φΓφ−1. Therefore En/Γ and En/H are isometric by Theorem 8.1.5.

Conversely, suppose En/Γ and En/H are isometric. Reindex a1, . . . , an so that |a1| ≤ |a2| ≤ · · · ≤ |an|. Then γ1 = a1 + I is a shortest nonidentity translation in Γ, and γi = ai + I is a shortest nonidentity translation in Γ in a direction orthogonal to a1, . . . ai−1 for each i = 2, . . . , n.

Let w be a vertex of Q and let T1, . . . , Tn be the sides of Q containing w.

Let ηi = bi + I be the translation that maps Ti to the opposite side of Q for each i. Then H is generated by η1, . . . , ηn. We may assume |b1| ≤ |b2| ≤ · · · ≤ |bn|.

Then η1 = b1 + I is a shortest nonidentity translation in H, and ηi = bi + I is a shortest nonidentity translation in H in a direction orthogonal to b1, . . . , bi−1 for each i = 2, . . . , n. Now Γ and H are conjugate in I(En) by Theorem 8.1.5.

Therefore |ai| = |bi| for i = 1, . . . , n. Hence P and Q are congruent.

Exercise 8.2.7 Prove that two Euclidean space-forms En/Γ and En/H are similar if and only if Γ and H are conjugate in S(En).

Solution: Let ψ be a similarity of En with scale factor k such that H = ψΓψ−1.

Then for each g in Γ and x in En, we have ψgx = (ψgψ−1)ψx. Hence ψgx is in the same H-orbit as ψx. Thus ψ induces a homeomorphism ψ : En/Γ → En/H n defined by ψ(Γx) = Hψx. If x and y are in E , then dH(ψ(Γx), ψ(Γy)) = dH(Hψx, Hψy) = dH(ψψ−1Hψx, ψψ−1Hψy) = dH(ψΓx, ψΓy) = k dΓ(Γx, Γy).

Thus ψ is a similarity.

Conversely, suppose that ξ : En/Γ → En/H is a similarity. By Theorem n 8.1.3, the quotient maps π : E→ En/Γ and η : En→En/H are covering n projections. As E is simply connected, ξ lifts to a homeomorphism ξ˜ of En such that ηξ˜ = ξπ. As π and η are local isometries and ξ is a similarity with scale factor k, we have that ξ˜ is a local similarity with scale factor k.

Let x and y be distinct points of En. Then there is a geodesic arc α : [0, l]→ n E from x to y. Now since ξ˜ is a local similarity with scale factor k, the curve ξ˜α is rectifiable and |ξ˜α| = k|α| = k|x — y|.

Therefore |ξ˜(x) — ξ˜(y)| ≤ k|x — y|. Likewise |ξ˜−1(x) — ξ˜−1(y)| ≤ k−1|x — y|.

Hence, we have |x — y| = |ξ˜−1ξ˜(x) — ξ˜−1ξ˜(y)| ≤ k−1|ξ˜(x) — ξ˜(y)|.

190

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Therefore| ξ˜(x)—ξ˜(y)| = k |x —y .| Thus ξ˜ is a similarity of En. By the same argument as in the end of the proof of Theorem 8.1.5, we have that H = ξ˜Γξ˜−1.

Thus Γ and H are conjugate in S(En).

Exercise 8.2.8 Let En/Γ and En/H be Euclidean n-tori with rectangular fundamental polyhedra P and Q, respectively. Prove that En/Γ and En/H are similar if and only if P and Q are similar in En. Solution: Let v be a vertex of P and let S1, . . . , Sn be the sides of P containing v. Let γi = ai + I be the translations that map Si to the opposite side of P for each i. Then Γ is generated by γ1, . . . , γn. Suppose P and Q are similar. Then there is a similarity ψ of En such that ψ(P ) = Q. Now ψ = a+kA with a in En, and k > 0, and A in O(n). Observe that ψγiψ−1 = kAai + I is the translation that maps the side ψ(Si) of Q to the opposite side of Q for each i. Therefore H is generated by ψγ1ψ−1, . . . , ψγnψ−1. Hence H = ψΓψ−1. Therefore En/Γ and En/H are similar by Exercise 8.2.7.

Conversely, suppose En/Γ and En/H are similar. Reindex a1, . . . , an so that |a1| ≤ |a2| ≤ · · · ≤ |an|. Then γ1 = a1 + I is a shortest nonidentity translation in Γ, and γi = ai + I is a shortest nonidentity translation in Γ in a direction orthogonal to a1, . . . ai−1 for each i = 2, . . . , n.

Let w be a vertex of Q and let T1, . . . , Tn be the sides of Q containing w.

Let ηi = bi + I be the translation that maps Ti to the opposite side of Q for each i. Then H is generated by η1, . . . , ηn. We may assume |b1| ≤ |b2| ≤ · · · ≤ |bn|.

Then η1 = b1 + I is a shortest nonidentity translation in H, and ηi = bi + I is a shortest nonidentity translation in H in a direction orthogonal to b1, . . . , bi−1 for each i = 2, . . . , n. Now Γ and H are conjugate in S(En) by Exercise 8.2.7, and so there is a similarity ψ of En with scale factor k such that H = ψΓψ−1.

Therefore k|ai| = |bi| for i = 1, . . . , n. Hence P and Q are similar.

Exercise 8.2.9 Let En/Γ and En/H be compact Euclidean space-forms and let A(Rn) be the group of affine bijections of Rn. Prove that the following are equivalent: 1. En/Γ and En/H are affinely equivalent; 2. Γ and H are conjugate in A(Rn); 3. Γ and H are isomorphic.

Solution: 1. Suppose En/Γ and En/H are affinely equivalent. Then there is a homeomorphism α : En/Γ → En/H that is induced by an affine bijection α of Rn. Let π : En → En/Γ and η : En →En/H be the quotient maps. Then ηα = απ. Let x be in X and g be in Γ. Then we have ηα(gx) = απ(gx) = απ(x) = ηα(x).

Hence, there is an element h of H such that α(gx) = hα(x). Now we have αgα−1α(x) = αgx = hα(x).

191

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Hence αgα−1 = h, since H acts freely on En. Thus αΓα−1c H. Similarly α−1Hφ c Γ. Hence H αΓα c −1. Therefore αΓα−1 = H. Thus Γ and H are n conjugate in A(R ).

2. Clearly if Γ and H are conjugate in A(Rn), then Γ and H are isomorphic.

3. Suppose Γ and H are isomorphic. Then there is an isomorphism ξ : Γ →H. By Theorem 7.5.6, there is an affine bijection α of Rn such that ξ(g) = αgα−1 for each g in Γ. Then αΓα−1 = ξ(Γ) = H. Thus Γ and H are conjugate in A(Rn).

4. Suppose Γ and H are conjugate in A(Rn). Then there is an affine bijection α of Rn such that αΓα−1 = H. Now if g is in Γ, there is an h in H such that αgx = αgα−1α(x) = hα(x).

Hence α induces a homeomorphism α : En/Γ→ En/H such that απ = ηα.

Thus En/Γ and En/H are affinely equivalent.

Exercise 8.2.10 Prove that every elementary hyperbolic space-form has infinite volume.

Solution: Let Hn/Γ be an elementary hyperbolic space-form. Then Γ is an elementary group. If Γ is of elliptic type, then Γ = {1 }, and so we have Vol(Hn/Γ) = Vol(Hn) = ∞.

Suppose Γ is of parabolic type. We pass to the upper half-space model U n , and we may assume that Γ fixes ∞. Then Γ corresponds under Poincar´e extension to an infinite discrete group of isometries of En−1 by Theorem 5.5.5.

Hence Γ acts trivially on the second factor of U n = En−1× R+. Let P be a fundamental polyhedron for the action of Γ on En−1. Then P× R+ is a fundamental polyhedron for the action of Γ on U n and Vol(Un/Γ) = Vol(P × R+) ∫ dx1 · · · dxn = (xn)n P ×R+ ∫ ∫ ∞ dxn = dx1 · · · dxn−1 (x )n 0

P

= Vol(P )

1

—1

n

∞

= ∞.

(n — 1) (xn)n−1 0

Now assume that Γ is of hyperbolic type. Then Γ is an infinite cyclic group generated by a hyperbolic element of I(Un). By Theorem 8.1.5, we may assume that Γ is generated by a Möbius transformation φ of U n defined by φ(x) = kAx with k > 1 and A an orthogonal transformation of En that fixes the n-axis. A fundamental domain for Γ is the region R = {x ∈ U n : 1 < xn < k} and

∫ n

Vol(U /Γ) = R

dx1 · · · dxn (xn)n

∫ dx1 · · · dxn−1

= Rn−1

192

∫k 1

dxn (xn)n

= ∞.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

8.3

(X, G)-Manifolds

Exercise 8.3.1 Prove Corollary 1.

Solution: By Theorem 8.3.5, small metric balls in M are open in M . Hence, metric open sets are open in M . Let V be an open subset of M , and let v be a point of V . Let φ : U→ X be a chart for (M, v). Then U∩V is an open neighborhood of v in M . Hence φ(U ∩ V ) is an open neighborhood of φ(v) in X. Choose r > 0 such that B(φ(v), r) c φ(U ∩ V ). Then φ−1 maps B(φ(v), r) onto B(v, r) by Theorem 8.3.5. Hence B(v, r) c U ∩V . Therefore V is open in the metric topology. Thus, the metric topology is the topology of M .

Exercise 8.3.2 Let γ : [a, b] →M be a curve in a metric (X, G)-manifold.

Prove that the X-length of γ is the same as the length of γ with respect to the induced metric.

Solution: Assume first that γ([a, b]) is contained in a coordinate neighborhood U . Let φ : U → X be a chart for M . Then the X-length of γ is defined to be γ = |φγ|. Now φ is a local isometry by Theorem 8.3.6. Hence |φγ| = |γ| with respect to the induced metric on M . Thus γ = |γ|.

Now assume γ : [a, b] → M is an arbitrary curve. As γ([a, b]) is compact, there is a partition a = t0 < t1 < · · · < tm = b of [a, b] such that γ([ti−1, ti]) is contained in a coordinate neighborhood Ui for each i = 1, . . . , m. Let γi be the restriction of γ to [ti−1, ti]. Then γ =

m Σ

γi =

i=1

m Σ

|γi| = |γ|.

i=1

Thus, the X-length of γ is the same as the length of γ with respect to the induced metric.

Exercise 8.3.3 Let X/Γ be an X-space-form. Show that the induced metric on X/Γ is the orbit space metric dΓ.

Solution: Let Γx and Γy be distinct points of X/Γ. Then there is a g in Γ such that dΓ(Γx, Γy) = d(x, gy). Let α : [0, l] → X be a geodesic arc from x to gy. Then d(x, gy) = |α|. Now πα : [0, l] → X/Γ is a curve from Γx to Γy and |α| = |πα|, since π is a local isometry. Hence |πα| ≥ d(Γx, Γy). Therefore dΓ(Γx, Γy) ≥ d(Γx, Γy).

Next, let γ : [a, b] → X/Γ be a curve from Γx to Γy. Then γ lifts to a curve γ˜ : [a, b] → X from x to hy for some h in Γ. Then |γ| = | γ˜ | ≥ d(x, hy) ≥ dΓ(Γx, Γy).

Hence d(Γx, Γy) ≥ dΓ(Γx, Γy). Thus, the induced metric d on X/Γ is the orbit space metric dΓ.

Exercise 8.3.4 Prove that every metric (X, G)-manifold is locally geodesically convex.

193

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let φ : U →X be a chart for (M, u). Then there is an r > 0 such that φ maps B(u, r) isometrically onto B(φ(u), r) and any two distinct points of B(φ(u), r/2) are joined by a unique geodesic segment in X by Theorem 8.3.6 and Exercise 8.1.3. Let v, w be two distinct points in B(u, r/2). Then φ(v), φ(w) are two distinct points in B(φ(u), r/2). Hence, there is a unique geodesic arc α : [0, l] → X joining φ(v) to φ(w). Now we have d(φ(v), φ(w)) ≤ d(φ(v), φ(u)) + d(φ(u), φ(w)) < r.

Hence l < r. If 0 ≤ s ≤ l/2, then d(φ(u), φ(s)) ≤ d(φ(u), φ(v)) + d(φ(v), φ(s)) < r.

While if l/2 ≤ t ≤ l, then d(φ(u), φ(t)) ≤ d(φ(u), φ(w)) + d(φ(w), φ(t)) < r.

Hence α([0, l]) c B(φ(u), r). Therefore φ−1α : [0, l] →M is a geodesic arc joining v to w in M .

Let β : [0, l]→M be a geodesic arc joining v to w. Then β([0, l]) c B(u, r).

Hence φβ : [0, l]→ X is a geodesic arc joining φ(u) to φ(v). Therefore φβ = α, and so β = φ−1α. Thus β is unique.

Exercise 8.3.5 Prove that any two points of a metric (X, G)-manifold M can be joined by a piecewise geodesic curve in M .

Solution: Define an equivalence relation on M so that two points are equivalent if and only if there is a piecewise geodesic curve joining them. The equivalence classes are open by Exercise 8.3.4. Hence, there is only one equivalence class, since M is connected.

8.4

Developing

Exercise 8.4.1 Prove that an (X, G)-map is a local homeomorphism.

Solution: That an (X, G)-map is a local homeomorphism follows from Theorem 8.4.2.

Exercise 8.4.2 Prove that a composition of (X, G)-maps is an (X, G)-map.

Solution: Suppose ξ : M → N and ζ : N → O are (X, G)-maps. Then ξ and ζ are continuous, and so ζξ : M→ O is continuous. Let φ : U→ X be a chart for M , and let χ : W→ X be a chart for O such that U and (ζξ)−1(W ) overlap. Let u be a point of U∩ ξ−1(ζ−1(W )). Then ξ(u) is in ξ(U ∩ ) ζ−1(W ).

1 − Let ψ : V → X be a chart for (N, ξ(u)). Then U and ξ (V ) overlap at u. Hence ψξφ−1 : φ(U ∩ ξ−1(V )) → ψ(ξ(U ) ∩V ) agrees in a neighborhood of φ(u) with an element of G. Now V and ζ−1(W ) overlap at ξ(u). Hence χζψ−1 : ψ(V ∩ ζ−1(W )) → χ(ζ(V ) ∩ W ) agrees in a neighborhood of ψξ(u) 194

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

with an element of G. Now ψξφ−1(φ(u)) = ψξ(u). Therefore, we have that χ(ζξ)φ−1 = (χζψ−1)(ψξφ−1) agrees in a neighborhood of ψξ(u) with an element of G. Thus ζξ : M → O is an (X, G)-map.

Exercise 8.4.3 Let X be a geometric space and let G be a subgroup of S(X).

Prove that a function ξ : X → X is an (X, G)-map if and only if ξ is in G. Solution: Let ξ : X → X be an (X, G)-map. The identity map ι : X → X is a chart for X. Hence ξ agrees in a neighborhood of each point of X with an element of G. Suppose x and y are distinct points of X. Then there are open subsets W1, . . . , Wm of X such that x is in W1, the sets Wi and Wi+1 overlap for i = 1, . . . , m — 1, the set Wm contains y, and ξ agrees with an element gi of G on Wi for each i, since X is connected. Now gi = gi+1 for each i = 1, . . . , m — 1

by Theorem 8.3.2. Hence ξ agrees with g = g1 on x and y, and therefore, on all of X. Conversely, suppose ξ is in G. The (X, G)-structure on X is defined by an atlas of the form {φx : Ux → X : x ∈ X} where φx is the inclusion of a ball Ux = B(x, r(x)) into X for each x in X. Let φ : U → X be a chart for X. Then φφx−1 : φx(Ux ∩U ) → φ(Ux U ∩ ) agrees in a neighborhood of each point of its domain with an element of G. Consequently φ is the restriction of an element of G, since U is connected. Let ψ : V → X be a chart for X such that U and ξ−1(V ) overlap, then ψξφ−1 : φ(U ∩ ξ−1(V )) → ψ(ξ(U ) ∩ V ) is the restriction of an element of G. Thus ξ : X → X is an (X, G)-map.

Exercise 8.4.4 Let M be an (X, G)-manifold and let κ : M̃ → M be a covering projection. Prove that M̃ has a unique (X, G)-structure so that κ is an (X, G)map.

Solution: Let {φi : Ui → X} be an (X, G)-atlas for M such that Ui is evenly covered by κ for each i. Let {Uij} be the set of sheets over Ui and let κij : Uij → Ui be the restriction of κ. Define φij : Uij → X by φij = φiκij.

Then {φij : Uij → X} is an (X, G)-atlas for M̃ .

Let φij : Uij → X be a chart for M̃ . Then κ maps Uij homeomorphically onto Ui and φijκ−1 : κ(Uij) → X is the chart φi : Ui → X for M . Therefore κ : M̃ → M is an (X, G)-map by Theorem 8.4.2.

Let φ : U → M be a chart for M̃ with respect to an (X, G)-structure for M̃ such that κ is an (X, G)-map. Consider the map φφij−1 : φij(Uij ∩ U ) → φ(Uij ∩ U ).

Now φφ−1 = φκ−1φ−1 and φiκijφ−1 agrees in a neighborhood of each point of ij

ij

i

its domain with an element of G, since κ is an (X, G)-map. Therefore φφij−1 agrees in a neighborhood of each point of its domain with an element of G. Hence φ is in the (X, G)-structure determined by the atlas {φij : Uij → X}.

Therefore M̃ has a unique (X, G)-structure such that κ is an (X, G)-map.

195

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 8.4.5 Let M and N be (X, G)-manifolds, let κ : M̃ → M be a covering projection, and let ξ : M → N and ξ˜ : M̃ →N be functions such that ξ˜ = ξκ. Prove that ξ is an (X, G)-map if and only if ξ˜ is an (X, G)-map.

Solution: If ξ is an (X, G)-map, then ξ˜ is an (X, G)-map by Exercise 8.4.2.

Conversely, suppose ξ˜ is an (X, G)-map. Then ξ is continuous, since κ is an open surjection. Let φ : U→ X be a chart for M and let ψ : V→ X be a chart for N such that U and ξ−1(V ) overlap. Consider the map ψξφ−1 : φ(U ∩ ξ−1(V )) → ψ(ξ(U ) ∩ V ).

We may assume that U is evenly covered by κ. Let Ũ be a sheet over U and let κ1 : Ũ →U be the restriction of κ. Then φ˜ = φκ1 : Ũ → X is a chart for M̃ .

Now we have ψξφ−1 = ψξκ1κ1−1φ−1 = ψ ξ˜φ˜ − 1 and φ(U ∩ ξ−1(V )) = φκ1κ1−1(U ∩ ξ−1(V )) = φ˜ ( U˜ ∩ ξ˜−1(V )) and

ψ(ξ(U ) ∩ V ) = ψ(ξ˜κ1−1(U ) ∩ V ) = ψ(ξ˜(Ũ ) ∩ V ).

˜ ξ˜−1(V ))→ ψ ( ξ˜( Ũ )∩ V ) agrees in a neighborhood The map ψ ξ˜φ˜ − 1 : φ˜ ( U∩ of each point of its domain with an element of G, since ξ˜ is an (X, G)-map.

Therefore ξ is an (X, G)-map.

Exercise 8.4.6 Prove that an (X, G)-map ξ : M →N between metric (X, G)manifolds is a local isometry.

Solution: Let φ : U →X be a chart for M and let ψ : V → X be a chart for N such that U ∩ ξ−1(V ) overlap. Then ψξφ−1 : φ(U ∩ ξ−1(V )) → ψ(ξ(U ) ∩ V ) agrees in a neighborhood of each point of its domain with an element of G. Hence ψξφ−1 is a local isometry. As φ and ψ are local isometries, we have that ξ is a local isometry.

Exercise 8.4.7 Let U be a nonempty, open, connected subset of X = Sn, En, or Hn, and let φ : U →X be a distance preserving function. Prove that φ extends to a unique isometry of X. Solution: Let x be a point of U , let x0 = en if X = Sn or Hn, and let x0 = 0 if X = En. There are isometries f and g of X such that fx0 = x and gφ(x) = x0.

Then gφf : g(U ) → X fixes x0. By the argument in the proof of Theorem 1.3.5, the map gφf agrees in a neighborhood of x0 with an orthogonal transformation.

Thus φ agrees in a neighborhood of each point of its domain with an isometry of X. As U is connected, φ is the restriction of an isometry h of X. The isometry h is unique, since X is a rigid metric space by Theorem 6.6.10.

Exercise 8.4.8 Let X = Sn, En, or Hn, and let ξ : M →N be a function between metric (X, I(X))-manifolds. Prove that ξ is an (X, I(X))-map if and only if ξ is a local isometry.

196

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let φ : U → X be a chart for M and let ψ : V → X be a chart for N such that U ∩ ξ−1(V ) overlap. Consider the function ψξφ−1 : φ(U ∩ ξ−1(V )) → ψ(ξ(U ) ∩ V ).

Suppose ξ is an (X, I(X))-map. Then ξ is a local isometry by Exercise 8.4.6.

Conversely, suppose ξ is a local isometry. Then ξ is continuous and ψξφ−1 is a local isometry, since φ and ψ are local isometries. Hence ψξφ−1 agrees in a neighborhood of each point of its domain with an element of I(X) by Exercise 8.4.7.

Exercise 8.4.9 Let M be a connected (X, G)-manifold and let H be a normal subgroup of G. Prove that the (X, G)-structure of M contains an (X, H)structure if and only if H contains the image of every holonomy for M .

Solution: Suppose the (X, G)-structure of M contains an (X, H)-structure.

Then H contains the image of a holonomy η : π1(M ) → G by Theorem 8.4.5.

If η′ : π1(M ) → G is another holonomy for M , then there is an element g of G such that η′ = g∗η where g∗ : G→ G is defined by g∗(h) = ghg−1. As H is normal in G, we have that H contains the image of η′. Thus H contains the image of every holonomy of M .

Conversely, if H contains the image of every holonomy of M , then the (X, G)structure of M contains an (X, H)-structure of M by Theorem 8.4.5.

Exercise 8.4.10 Let M be a connected (X, G)-manifold and let H be a normal subgroup of G. Suppose that the (X, G)-structure of M contains an (X, H)structure for M . Prove that the set of (X, H)-structures for M contained in the (X, G)-structure of M is in one-to-one correspondence with G/H. Solution: Let Φ = {φi : Ui → X } be an (X, H)-structure for M contained in the (X, G)-structure Φ̂ for M . Define an action of G on the set of (X, H)structures for M contained in Φ̂ by gΦ ={ gφi : Ui → X }. Suppose gΦ = Φ.

Then gφiφi−1 : φi(Ui) → X is the restriction of an element of H, and so g is in H by Theorem 6.6.10. Thus, the stabilizer of Φ is H. Let Ψ = {ψk : Vk → X} be an (X, H)-structure for M which is contained in Φ̂ . Define a function f : M → G/H as follows. Let u be a point of M .

Then there are indices i and k such that u is in Ui ∩ Vk. Now, the function ψkφi−1 : φi(Ui ∩ Vk) → ψk(Ui ∩ Vk) agrees with an element of g of G in a neighborhood of φi(u). Let f (u) = Hg. To see that f is well defined, let j and l be indices such that u is in Uj ∩ VA. Then ψAφj −1 = (ψAψk−1)(ψkφ−i1)(φiφ−1j).

Now ψAψ−1 agrees with an element h of H in a neighborhood of ψk(u) and φiφ−1 k

j

agrees with an element h′ of H in a neighborhood of φj(u). Hence ψAφj−1 agrees with h′gh = h′ghg−1g in a neighborhood of φj(u). Thus f is well defined. Now f is constant, since f is locally constant and M is connected. Say f (M ) = Hg. Then ψkφi −1g−1 : gφi(Ui ∩ Vk) →ψk(Ui ∩ Vk) agrees in a neighborhood of each point of its domain with an element of H for each i and k. Therefore gΦ = Ψ.

Thus G acts transitively on the set of (X, H)-structures for M contained in Φ̂ .

Therefore G/H is in one-to-one correspondence with the set of (X, H)-structures for M contained in Φ̂ .

197

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

8.5

Completeness

Exercise 8.5.1 Prove that every locally compact, homogeneous, metric space X is complete.

Solution: Let x be a point of X. Then there is an ϵ > 0 such that B(x, ϵ) is compact, since X is locally compact. Moreover ϵ does not depend on x, since X is homogeneous. Therefore X is complete by Theorem 8.5.1.

Exercise 8.5.2 Let X be a connected n-manifold with a complete metric.

Prove that a function ξ : X →X is an isometry if and only if it preserves distances. Hint: Use invariance of domain.

Solution: If ξ : X X →is an isometry, then ξ preserves distances by definition.

Conversely, suppose ξ preserves distances. Then ξ is a continuous injection.

Moreover ξ is an open m ap by invariance of domain. Therefore ξ(X) is open in X. Let y0 be a point of ξ(X) in X. Then there is a sequence {y i } i∞= 1 of points of ξ(X) converging to y0. Let xi = ξ−1(yi) for each i ≥ 1. Then {x i } i∞= 1 is a Cauchy sequence in X. Therefore, there is a point x0 of X such that xi → x0.

As ξ is continuous, yi→ ξ(x0). Therefore ξ(x0) = y0. Thus y0 is in ξ(X), and so ξ(X) is closed in X. As X is connected, ξ(X) = X. Thus ξ is a bijection.

Therefore ξ is an isometry.

Exercise 8.5.3 Prove that a local isometry ξ : M →N between metric (X, G)manifolds is an isometry if and only if it is a bijection.

Solution: If ξ : M N→is an isometry, then ξ is a bijection by definition.

Conversely, suppose ξ is a bijection. As ξ is a local isometry, ξ preserves the length of curves. Therefore d(ξ(u), ξ(v)) ≤ d(u, v) for all u, v in M . Likewise d(ξ−1(x), ξ−1(y)) ≤ d(x, y) for all x, y in N . Hence, we have d(u, v) = d(ξ−1ξ(u), ξ−1ξ(v)) ≤ d(ξ(u), ξ(v)) ≤ d(u, v).

Therefore d(ξ(u), ξ(v)) = d(u, v). Thus ξ preserves distances, and so ξ is an isometry.

Exercise 8.5.4 Let M be a metric (X, G)-manifold and let κ : M̃ → M be a covering projection with M̃ connected. Prove that M is geodesically complete if and only if M̃ is geodesically complete.

Solution: Suppose M is geodesically complete. Let α : [a, b] → M̃ be a geodesic arc. Then κα : [a, b] → M is a geodesic curve, since κ is a local isometry. Hence κα extends to a unique geodesic line λ : R → M . The map λ : R → M lifts to a map µ : R → M̃ such that µ(a) = α(a). The map µ is a geodesic line, since κ is a local isometry. The map µ restricted to [a, b] lifts κα, and so µ extends α by the unique path lifting property. If µ′ is another geodesic line extending α, then κµ′ is a geodesic line extending κα. Therefore κµ′ = λ,

198

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

and so µ′ = µ by the unique lifting property. Therefore M̃ is geodesically complete.

Conversely, suppose M̃ is geodesically complete. Let α : [a, b] → M be a geodesic arc. Then α lifts to a geodesic curve α̃ : [a, b]→ M̃ . The curve α̃ extends to a unique geodesic line µ : R→ M̃ . The map λ = κµ is a geodesic line, since κ is a local isometry. The map λ extends α, since κ α̃ = α. If λ′ is another geodesic line extending α, then λ′ lifts to a geodesic line µ′ : R → M̃ such that µ′(a) = α̃ (a). Then µ′ extends α̃ , by the unique path lifting property.

Therefore µ′ = µ. Thus λ′ = κµ′ = κµ = λ. Therefore M is geodesically complete.

Exercise 8.5.5 Prove that a local isometry ξ : M →N between geodesically complete metric (X, G)-manifolds is a covering projection.

Solution: By the same argument as in the proof of Theorem 8.5.6, we have that ξ is onto and if B(x, r) is an open ball in N , then ξ−1(B(x, r)) =

∪

u∈ξ−1(x)

B(u, r).

Let k > 0 be such that if λ : R →X is a geodesic line, then λ restricts to a geodesic arc on — [ k, k]. Let φ : U→ X be a chart for (N, x). Then there is an r > 0 such that r ≤k and φ(U ) contains B(φ(x), r). Now φ maps B(x, r) homeomorphically onto B(φ(x), r) by Theorem 8.3.5 and φ is a local isometry

by Theorem 8.3.6.

Suppose u is in ξ−1(x). We now show that ξ maps B(u, r/2) bijectively onto B(x, r/2). Now ξ maps B(u, r/2) onto B(x, r/2) by the argument in the proof of Theorem 8.5.6. On the contrary, suppose that v, w are distinct points of B(u, r/2) such that ξ(v) = ξ(w). By Theorem 8.5.5, there is a geodesic arc α : [—b, b] → M from v to w. Then we have 2b = d(v, w) ≤ d(v, u) + d(u, w) < r.

Therefore 0 < b < r/2. If t ≤ 0, then d(α(t), u) ≤ d(α(t), v) + d(v, u) < r. If t ≥0, then d(α(t), u) ≤ d(α(t), w) + d(w, u) < r. Therefore α([ —b, b]) c B(u, r), and so ξα([—b, b])c B(x, r). Therefore φξα([—b, b])c B(φ(x), r). Now φξα : [—b, b] → X is a geodesic curve, and so φξα extends to a geodesic line λ : R→ X. As b < k, we have that φξα is a geodesic arc, which is a contradiction. Thus ξ maps B(u, r/2) bijectively onto B(x, r/2).

By the triangle inequality, the balls u ξ−1(x) }are pairwise { B(u, r/4) : ∈ disjoint. Now since ξ maps B(u, r/4) homeomorphically onto B(x, r/4) for each u in ξ−1(x) and ξ−1(B(x, r/4)) = B(u, r/4), ∪ u∈ξ−1(x)

the ball B(x, r/4) is evenly covered by ξ. Thus ξ is a covering projection.

Exercise 8.5.6 Prove that a connected (X, G)-manifold M is complete if and only if every (or some) developing map δ : M̃→ X for M is a covering projection.

199

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let δ : M̃ → X be a developing map for M . Then M̃ is a metric (X, {1})-manifold. Now δ is an (X, {1})-map between metric (X, {1})manifolds. Therefore M̃ is complete if and only if δ is a covering projection by Theorems 8.5.6 and 8.5.7. Thus M is complete if and only if δ is a covering projection.

Exercise 8.5.7 Let X be a simply connected geometric space. Prove that a function ξ : X → X is an isometry if and only if it is a local isometry.

Solution: Let ξ : X → X be a local isometry. Then ξ is a covering projection

by Exercise 8.5.5. Hence ξ is a homeomorphism, since X is simply connected.

Therefore ξ is an isometry by Exercise 8.5.3.

Exercise 8.5.8 Prove that the universal covering space X̃ of a geometric space X is also a geometric space.

Solution: The geometric space X is an (X, I(X))-manifold. Hence X̃ is a metric (X, I(X))-manifold. Therefore X̃ is geodesically complete and geodesically connected by Theorems 8.5.6 and 8.5.5. Thus X̃ satisfies Axioms 1 and 2 for a geometric space.

Let ϵ : En →X be a function with constant k > 0 as in Axiom 3 for a geometric space. Then ϵ lifts to a continuous function ϵ˜ : En→ X̃ with respect to the covering projection κ : X̃ → X. Now B(ϵ(0), k) is evenly covered by κ, since B(ϵ(0), k) is simply connected. Moreover κ−1(B(ϵ(0), k)) =

∪

x˜∈n−1(є(0))

B(ϵ(0), k)

by the proof of Theorem 8.5.6. Furthermore, κ maps B (x̃, k) homeomorphically onto B(ϵ(0), k) for each x̃ in κ−1(ϵ(0)). Therefore ϵ˜ maps B(0, k) homeomorphically onto B(ϵ˜(0), k).

Let u be a point of Sn−1. Define λ̃ : R → X̃ by λ̃ ( t ) = ϵ˜(tu). Then λ = κ λ̃ : R → X is given by λ(t) = ϵ(tu), and so λ is a geodesic line that restricts to a geodesic arc on the interval [—k, k]. Hence λ̃ is a geodesic line, since κ is a local isometry. Suppose —k ≤ s ≤ t ≤ k. Then we have t — s ≥ d(λ̃ (s), λ̃ (t)) ≥ d(κλ̃(s), κλ̃(t)) = d(λ(s), λ(t)) = t — s.

Hence λ̃ restricts to a geodesic arc on — [ k, k]. Thus X̃ satisfies Axiom 3 for a geometric space.

Let x̃ and y˜ be points of X̃ . Then x = κ( x̃ ) and y = κ(y˜) are points of X. As X is homogeneous, there is an isometry ξ of X such that ξ(x) = y. The map ξκ lifts to a map ξ˜ : X̃ → X̃ such that κξ˜ = ξκ and ξ˜ ( x̃ ) = y˜. Then ξ˜ is a local isometry. Now ξ˜ is a covering projection by Exercise 8.5.5, and so ξ is a homeomorphism, since X̃ is simply connected. Therefore ξ˜ is an isometry

by Exercise 8.5.3. Thus X̃ is homogeneous. Hence X̃ satisfies Axiom 4 for a geometric space. Thus X̃ is a geometric space.

200

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 8.5.9 Let M be an (X, I(X))-manifold and let X̃ be the universal covering space of X. Prove that the (X, I(X))-structure of M lifts to an ( X̃ , I(X̃ ))-structure for M .

Solution: Let Φ = {φi : Ui → X} be an (X, I(X))-atlas for M such that Ui is simply connected for each i. Then φi lifts to a map φ˜i : Ui → X̃ with respect to the covering projection κ : X̃ → X for each i. Moreover φ˜i maps Ui homeomorphically onto an open subset of X̃ , since φi(Ui) is evenly covered by κ.

Suppose Ui and Uj overlap. Then we have κφ˜jiφ˜−1 = φjiφ−1κ : φ̃i (U i ∩ Uj) → φj(Ui ∩ Uj).

Let x̃ be a point in φ̃ i (U i ∩Uj). Then x = κ ( x̃ ) is in φi(Ui ∩Uj). Now φjφi−1 agrees with an isometry ξ of X in a neighborhood of x. By the solution of Exercise 8.5.8, the isometry ξ lifts to an isometry ξ˜ of X̃ such that κξ˜ = ξκ and ξ˜( x̃ ) = φ˜j φ̃ − 1 (x̃). Therefore φ˜j φ˜−1 agrees in a neighborhood of x̃ with ξ˜ by the i i unique lifting property. Hence Φ̃ = X̃}is an ( X̃ , I(X̃ ))-atlas for M . { φ˜i : U→ i Thus, the (X, I(X))-structure of M lifts to a ( X̃ , I(X̃ ))-structure of M .

Exercise 8.5.10 Let M be a complete connected (X, I(X))-manifold and let X̃ be the universal covering space of X. Prove that M is ( X̃ , I(X̃ ))-equivalent to an X̃ - space-form.

Solution: The metric on M induced by the (X, I(X))-structure on M is the same as the metric on M induced by the ( X̃ , I(X̃ ))-structure on M , since the covering projection κ : X̃ → X preserves the length of curves. Therefore M is a complete metric ( X̃ , I(X̃ ))-manifold by Theorem 8.5.7. Let δ˜ : M̃ → X̃ be a developing map for M and let η˜ : π1(M )→ I(X̃ ) be the holonomy of M determined by δ˜. Then η˜ maps π1(M ) isometrically onto a freely acting discrete subgroup of Γ of isometries of X̃ and δ˜ induces an ( X̃ , I(X̃ ))-equivalence from M to X̃ / Γ by Theorem 8.5.9.

201

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 9

Geometric Surfaces 9.1

Compact Surfaces

9.2

Gluing Surfaces

Exercise 9.2.1 In the proof of Theorem 9.2.2 that{ φx : U (x, r) → B(x, r)} is an (X, G)-atlas for M , use the 1/4 bounds on r and s to show that there is at most one index j such that the following set is nonempty: P ∩ B(x, r) ∩ Qj ∩ B(yj, s).

Solution: On the contrary, suppose there are two indices j = k, l such that P ∩ B(x, r) ∩ Qj ∩ B(yj, s) is nonempty. Then n > 1 and Qk = P = QA. As B(x, r) ∩ B(yj, s) is nonempty, we have d(x, yj) < r + s. Therefore [x, yj] c B(x, r) ∪ B(yj, s).

As [x, yj] is connected, there is a point zj of [x, yj] which is in B(x, r)∩ B(yj, s) for j = k, l.

Assume first that m = 1. Then we have d(x, yj) = d(x, zj) + d(zj, yj) < 14 d(x, yj) + d(zj, yj).

Hence 43 d(x, yj) < d(zj, yj). Now we have d(x, zj) < 1 d(x, yj) < 1 d(zj, yj).

4

3

Observe that d(yk, yA) ≤ d(yk, x) + d(x, yA) = d(yk, zk) + d(zk, x) + d(x, zA) + d(zA, yA) < 1 d(yk, yA) + 1 d(yk, zk) + 1 d(yA, zk) + 1 d(yk, yA) 4 3 3 4 < 1 d(yk, yA) + 1 d(yk, yA) + 1 d(yA, yk) 2

=

12

12

2

d(yk, yA) 3 202

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

which is a contradiction.

Now assume m = 2. Then x is in the interior of a side S of Pi. If both yk and yA are not in S○, then the same argument as in the case m = 1 leads to a contradiction. Without loss of generality, we may assume that yk is in S○.

Then n = 2 and yA is in (S′)○. Assume first that S′ /= S. Then we have d(x, yA) = d(x, zA) + d(zA, yA) < 1 d(x, yA) + 1 d(x, yA) = 4

1

4

2

d(x, yA)

which is a contradiction. Now assume S = S′. Then the pairing map is the antipodal map by Theorem 9.2.1. Now r, s < π/4, since d(x,— x) = π. Hence, we have d(yk, yA) = d(yk, x) + d(x, yA) < π/2 + π/2 = π which is a contradiction, since yA = —yk.

Now assume that m > 2. Then n ≥ m > 2. Hence x, yk,and yA are vertices.

Because of the 1/4 bounds, we must have yk = x = yA which is a contradiction.

Thus, there is at most one index j such that∩P B(x, r) ∩ Qj ∩B(yj, s) is nonempty.

Exercise 9.2.2 Show that the case n = 2 in Example 5, with a Euclidean 45○-45○ right triangle, yields a Euclidean structure on the Klein bottle.

Solution: Consider the Euclidean triangle ∆( π , π , π ). Construct a square Q 2

4

4

as in Example 5 and consider the side-pairing Φ of Q defined as in Example 5.

The side-pairing Φ is proper, and so the space M obtained from Q by gluing together its sides by Φ is a closed surface with a Euclidean structure by Theorem 9.2.2. Now M is obviously the connected sum of two projective planes, and so M is a Klein bottle.

Exercise 9.2.3 Let P be a convex fundamental polygon for a discrete group Γ of isometries of X and let Sbe the collection of all 1-dimensional convex subsets of ∂P of the form P∩gP for some g in Γ. Prove that P together withS is an abstract convex polygon in X. Solution: 1. Let E be in .SThen E is a closed 1-dimensional convex subset of ∂P , since E = P ∩ gP for some g in Γ.

2. Suppose E and F are in Ssuch that E and F overlap in their interiors.

Now E = P ∩gP for some g in Γ and F = P ∩hP for some h in Γ. Observe that gP and hP overlap in their interiors, and so g = h. Therefore E = F . Thus, two elements ofS meet only along their boundaries.

3. Let x be a point of ∂P . As in the proof of Theorem 6.7.1, there is an r > 0 such that m

B(x, r) ∩ ∂P c ∪ P ∩ giP i=1

with gi /= 1 and x in giP for each i = 1, . . . , m. Hence, there is an index i such that dim P ∩ giP = 1. Therefore x is in an element of S. Thus, the union of the elements of S is ∂P .

203

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

4. The collection {gP : g ∈ Γ} is locally finite, and so {P ∩ gP : g ∈ Γ} is locally finite. Therefore, the collection S is locally finite. Thus P together with the collection S of edges is an abstract convex polygon.

Exercise 9.2.4 Let P be as in Exercise 9.2.3. For each edge E of P , let gE be the element of Γ such that P ∩ gE(P ) = E. Prove that Φ = g{E : E ∈ S} is a Γ-edge-pairing for P .

Solution: Given E in S . Let E′ = gE−1(P ) ∩ P . Then gE(E′) = E and 1 gE' = g−E . Moreover P ∩gE(P ) = E. Thus Φ = gE {: E ∈ S} is a Γ-sidepairing for P .

Exercise 9.2.5 Prove Theorem 9.2.3.

Solution: The proof of Theorem 9.2.3 is the same as the proof of Theorem 9.2.2 except for some minor changes. The term “side” must be replaced by the term “edge” throughout the proof. Let v be a vertex of a polygon P inP , which is in the interior of a side of P . Then θ(P, v) = π. Observe that v cannot be paired to another vertex v′ by φE such that θ(P ′, v′) = π, since otherwise v would be in the interior of the edge P∩ φE(P ′) = E. Hence [v] has at least three elements. Thus, the proof of the case m = 2 is the same.

9.3

The Gauss-Bonnet Theorem

Exercise 9.3.1 Let T be a triangle in X = S2, E2, or H2. Prove that the centroid of T is the intersection of the three geodesic segments joining a vertex of T to the midpoint of the opposite side of T .

Solution: Let v1, v2, v3 be the vertices of T . Assume first that X = E2. Then the centroid c of T is (v1 + v2 + v3)/3. Observe that v1 + v 2 + v 3 1 2 = v1 + 3 3 3

v1 + v2 2

.

Hence c is on the line segment joining v1 to the midpoint of [v2, v3]. Likewise c is on the line segment joining v2 to the midpoint of [v1, v3] and c is on the line segment joining v3 to the midpoint of [v1, v2]. Thus c is the intersection of these three line segments.

Now assume that X = S2. Then the centroid c of T is (v1 + v2 + v3)/3 . |(v1 + v2 + v2)/3| Let T ′ be the Euclidean triangle with vertices v1, v2, v3. The centroid c′ of T ′ is (v1 + v2 + v3)/3, and so c′ projects to c from the origin. By the Euclidean case, c′ is the intersection of the line segments joining a vertex to the midpoint of the

204

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

opposite side of T ′. Now, the midpoint of a side of T ′ projects to the midpoint of the corresponding side of T , since vi · and so

(vi + vj)/2 |(vi + vj)/2|

)/2 θ vi, |((YYii++YYjj )/2|

= vj ·

(vi + vj)/2 |(vi + v j )/2|

,

)/2 = θ vj, |((YYii++YYjj )/2| .

Hence, the line segment joining a vertex to the midpoint of the opposite side of T ′ projects from the origin to the geodesic segment of S2 joining the vertex to the midpoint of the opposite side of T . Therefore c is the intersection of the three geodesic segments of S2 joining a vertex of T to the midpoint of the opposite side of T .

Now assume that X = H2. Then the centroid c of T is (v1 + v2 + v3)/3 . |||(v1 + v2 + v2)/3||| Let T ′ be the Euclidean triangle with vertices v1, v2, v3. The centroid c′ of T ′ is (v1 + v2 + v3)/3, and so c′ projects to c from the origin. By the Euclidean case, c′ is the intersection of the line segments joining a vertex to the midpoint of the opposite side of T ′. Now, the midpoint of a side of T ′ projects to the midpoint of the corresponding side of T , since vi ◦ and so

(vi + vj)/2 |||(vi + vj)/2|||

Yj )/2 η vi, |||((YYii+ +Yj )/2|||

= vj ◦

(vi + vj)/2 |||(vi + v j)/2|||

,

)/2 = η vj, |||((YYii++YYjj )/2||| .

Hence, the line segment joining a vertex to the midpoint of the opposite side of T ′ projects from the origin to the geodesic segment of H2 joining the vertex to the midpoint of the opposite side of T . Therefore c is the intersection of the three geodesic segments of H2 joining a vertex of T to the midpoint of the opposite side of T .

Exercise 9.3.2 Let P be a compact convex polygon in X = S2, E2, or H2 with n ≥3 sides. Prove that the 2nd barycentric subdivision of P divides P into 12n triangles.

Solution: The first barycentric subdivision of P subdivides P into 2n triangles, since each side of P forms the base of two triangles of the barycentric subdivision of P . The 2nd barycentric subdivision of P subdivides each of the triangles of the first barycentric subdivision of P into 6 triangles. Thus, the 2nd barycentric subdivision divides P into 12n triangles.

Exercise 9.3.3 Let P be a compact convex polygon in E2 or H2 as in the proof of Theorem 9.3.1. Prove that each triangle of the barycentric subdivision of P is mapped homeomorphically onto its image in M by the quotient map from P to M .

205

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let T be a triangle of the barycentric subdivision of P . Then one vertex a of T is a vertex of P , a second vertex b of T is a midpoint of a side of P , and the third vertex c of T is the centroid of P . No two points of the geodesic segment [a, b] = T∩ P are identified, and so the quotient map π : P→ M maps T bijectively onto its image. As T is compact and M is Hausdorff, π maps T homeomorphically onto π(T ).

Exercise 9.3.4 Let P be a compact convex polygon in E2 or H2 as in the proof of Theorem 9.3.1. Prove that the 2nd barycentric subdivision of P projects to a triangulation of M .

Solution: Each triangle of the barycentric subdivision of P is mapped homeomorphically onto its image in M by the quotient map π : P → M by Exercise 9.3.3. Hence, each triangle of the 2nd barycentric subdivision of P is mapped homeomorphically onto a triangle in M , and M is the union of these triangles.

Now π maps P ○ bijectively onto its image in M , and so the interiors of the triangles of M are pairwise disjoint.

Let v be a vertex of the 2nd barycentric subdivision of P , and let st(v) be the union of all the triangles of the 2nd barycentric subdivision of P that have v as a vertex. Then st(v) is a polygon; moreover, the polygons st(u) { :u ∈ [v]} are pairwise disjoint. Let st(π(v)) be the union of all the triangles of M that have π(v) as a vertex. Then we have π

u∈

∪ st(u) = st(π(v)) [Y ]

and st(π(v)) is a polygon which is subdivided by triangles of M in such a way that any two triangles meet only in the common vertex π(v) or along a common edge incident with π(v).

Now let T and T ′ be two triangles of M that meet each other. Then T and T ′ share a common vertex w. Hence T and T ′ are triangles in the polygon st(w), and so meet only in the common vertex w or along a common edge incident with w. Thus M is triangulated by the images of the triangles of the 2nd barycentric subdivision of P .

9.4

Moduli Spaces

Exercise 9.4.1 Let Φ and Φ′ be Euclidean structures for M . Prove that Φ̂ and Φ̂ ′ are similar if and only if (M, Φ) and (M, Φ′) are similar metric spaces.

Solution: Suppose that the structures Φ̂ and Φ̂ ′ are similar. Then there is a (E2, S(E2))-equivalence ξ from (M, Φ̂ ) to (M, Φ̂ ′ ). Let φ : U → E2 be a chart for (M, Φ) and let ψ : V→ E2 be a chart for (M, Φ′) such that U and ξ−1(V ) overlap. Then ψξφ−1 : φ(U ∩ ξ−1(V )) →ψ(ξ(U ) ∩V ) agrees in a neighborhood of each point of its domain with an element of S(E2). Now ψ and φ are local isometries. Hence ξ is a local similarity with a locally constant scale factor.

Hence ξ has a constant scale factor k, since ξ is continuous and M is connected.

206

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

If γ : [a, b]→ M is a curve, then ξγ = k γ . Hence d(ξ(u), ξ(v)) ≤ kd(u, v) for all u, v in M . Likewise d(ξ−1(u), ξ−1(v)) ≤ k−1d(u, v) for all u, v in M .

Hence, we have d(u, v) = d(ξ−1ξ(u), ξ−1ξ(v)) ≤ k−1d(ξ(u), ξ(v)) ≤ d(u, v).

Therefore d(ξ(u), ξ(v)) = kd(u, v). Thus ξ is a similarity with scale factor k from (M, Φ) to (M, Φ′).

Conversely, suppose ξ : M→ M is a similarity from (M, Φ) to (M, Φ′). Let φ : U →E2 be a chart for (M, Φ̂ ) and let ψ : V→ E2 be a chart for (M, Φ̂ ′ ) such that U and ξ−1(V ) overlap. By Lemma 1 and Exercise 8.4.7, the map ψξφ−1 : φ(U ∩ ξ−1(V )) →ψ(ξ(U ) V ∩ ) agrees in a neighborhood of each point of its domain with an element of S(E2), since φ and ψ are local similarities.

Hence ξ is a (E2, S(E2))-equivalence from (M, Φ̂ ) to (M, Φ̂ ′ ). Thus Φ̂ and Φ̂ ′ are similar.

Exercise 9.4.2 Let Φ and Φ′ be hyperbolic structures for M . Prove that Φ and Φ′ are similar if and only if (M, Φ) and (M, Φ′) are isometric.

Solution: Suppose that the structures Φ and Φ′ are similar. Then there is a (H2, I(H2))-equivalence ξ from (M, Φ) to (M, Φ′). The same argument as in the solution of Exercise 9.4.1 shows that ξ is an isometry.

Conversely, if ξ : M →M is an isometry from (M, Φ̂ ) to (M, Φ̂ ′ ), then the same argument as in the solution of Exercise 9.4.1 shows that ξ is a (E2, I(E2))equivalence from (M, Φ) to (M, Φ′). Thus Φ and Φ′ are similar.

Exercise 9.4.3 Let Φ and Φ′ be hyperbolic structures for M . Prove that [Φ] = [Φ′] in f(M ) if and only if there is an isometry from (M, Φ) to (M, Φ′) that is homotopic to the identity map of M .

Solution: Suppose [Φ] = [Φ′] in f (M ). Then there is a homeomorphism h of M , which is homotopic to the identity map of M , such that Φ = Φ′h. Let ψ : V → H2 be a chart in Φ′. Then ψh : h−1(V ) → H2 is a chart in Φ. The charts ψ and ψh are local isometries. Hence h is a local isometry from (M, Φ) to (M, Φ′). Therefore h is an isometry from (M, Φ) to (M, Φ′) by Exercise 8.5.3.

Conversely, suppose ξ : M → M is an isometry from (M, Φ) to (M, Φ′) which is homotopic to the identity map of M . Let φ : U→ H2 be a chart for (M, Φ) and let ψ : V → H2 be a chart for (M, Φ′) such that U and ξ−1(V ) overlap. By Exercise 8.4.7, the map ψξφ−1 : φ(U∩ ξ−1(V )) → ψ(ξ(U ) ∩ V ) agrees in a neighborhood of each point of its domain with an element of I(H2), since ψξφ−1 is a local isometry. Hence ψξ is a chart in Φ. Therefore Φ′ξ = Φ.

Hence [Φ′] = [Φ] in f (M ).

Exercise 9.4.4 Let h : M → M be a homeomorphism of a surface M and let α : [0, 1] → M be a curve from u to h(u). Prove that if h is homotopic to the identity map of M , then α∗h∗ is an inner automorphism of π1(M, u).

207

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let H : M × I → M be a homotopy from h to the identity map id of M . Let β : I → M be the curve defined by β(t) = H(u, t). By Theorem 1.8.7 of Spanier’s Algebraic Topology, we have id∗ = β∗h∗ : π1(M, u) → π1(M, u).

Hence, we have

α∗h∗ = α∗β−1β∗h∗ = α∗β−1. ∗

∗

Thus α∗h∗ is the inner automorphism (αβ−1)∗ of π1(M, u).

Exercise 9.4.5 Let M be a closed surface. Prove that the natural action of Hom1(M ) on M is transitive.

Solution: By Theorem 9.3.2, the surface M has either a spherical, Euclidean, or hyperbolic structure. Let u and v be distinct points of M . The geometric surface M is complete, since M is compact. By Theorem 8.5.5, there is a geodesic segment [u, v] in M joining u to v. By Theorem 8.5.9, we may assume that there is a discrete group Γ of isometries of X = S2, E2, or H2 acting freely on X such that M = X/Γ. As M is compact, there is an r > 0 such that the natural projection π : X →X/Γ maps C(x, r) isometrically onto C(π(x), r) for each x in X. We may take r = d(u, v)/n for some large enough positive integer n. Let w be the intersection of [u, v] and S(u, r/2). Define h : M → M to be the identity map outside of B(u, r) and to map each geodesic segment [z, u] by a similarity onto [z, w] for each z in S(u, r). Then h is a homeomorphism of M that maps u to w.

For each t in the interval [0, 1], let wt be the point of [u, v] that is a distance td(u, w) from u, and let ht : M → M be the homeomorphism defined as above so that ht(u) = wt. Then H : M ×I → M defined by H(y, t) = ht(y) is a homotopy from idM to h. Thus h is in Hom1(M ). By repeating this construction, with u replaced by w the first time, 2n times and composing the homeomorphisms, we see that there is a g in Hom1(M ) such that g(u) = v. Thus Hom1(M ) acts transitively on M .

Exercise 9.4.6 Let u be a point of a closed surface M and let h : M→ M be a homeomorphism. Prove that h is homotopic to a homeomorphism g : M → M such that g(u) = u.

Solution: By Exercise 9.4.5, there is an f in Hom1(M ) such that f (h(u)) = u.

Let g = fh. Then g is a homeomorphism of M such that g(u) = u and g is homotopic to h.

Exercise 9.4.7 Prove that Nielsen’s homomorphism ν is surjective if M is a torus.

Solution: We may assume that M = E2/Γ with Γ = ⟨τ1, τ2⟩ where τ1(x, y) = (x + 1, y) and τ2(x, y) = (x, y + 1). Now π1(M ) ~ = Γ by Theorem 8.1.4 and Γ~ = Z ⊕ Z. Hence Aut(π1(M )) ~ = GL(2, Z).

208

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

a b

If A is in GL(2, Z), then A =

with a, b, c, d in Z and ad—bc = ±1. c d Let τ be in Γ. Then τ (x, y) = (x + k, y + l) for some integers k and l. Now we have Aτ

x y

=

x+k y+l

A

=

a c

=

ax + ak + by + bl cx + ck + dy + dl =

b d

x+k y+l

ax + by + ak + bl cx + dy + ck + dl

= τ ′A

x y

where τ ′(x, y) = (x+ak +bl, y +ck +dl). Thus A induces a homeomorphism A : E2/Γ → E2/Γ defined by A(Γv) = ΓAv. Note that A is an affine equivalence.

Now A induces an automorphism A∗ of π1(E2/Γ).

Let α : [0, 1] → E2/Γ be a loop based at Γ0. Then α lifts to a curve α̃ : [0, 1] → E2 such that α̃ ( 0 ) = 0. Let gα be the unique element of Γ such that gα0 = α̃ (1). The isomorphism η : π(E2/Γ, Γ0) → Γ is defined by η([α]) = gα. ˜ Now A∗[α] = [Aα] and Aα = A α̃ . Hence, we have ˜ Aα(1) = Aα̃ (1) = Agα0 = AgαA−1A0 = AgαA−10.

Hence ηA∗ = A∗η where A∗ is conjugation of Γ by A. Recall that A∗(τ ) = Aτ A−1 = τ ′ where τ ′(x, y) = (x + ak + bl, y + ck + dl).

Hence, we have A∗(τ1)(x, y) = (x + a, y + c) and A∗(τ2)(x, y) = (x + b, y + d). ~ GL(2, Z).

Thus A∗ corresponds to A under the isomorphism Aut(π1(M )) = Therefore, the map h '→ h∗ from Hom(M ) to Aut(π1(M )) is surjective. Hence, Nielsen’s homomorphism ν : Map(M ) → Aut(π1(M )) is surjective.

Exercise 9.4.8 Prove that Nielsen’s homomorphism ν is surjective if M is a Klein bottle. See Exercises 9.5.7 and 9.5.8.

Solution: We may assume that M = E2/Γ with Γ = ⟨τ, γ ⟩ where τ (x, y) = (x + 1, y) and γ is the glide reflection defined by γ(x, y) = (1— x, y + 1). Now we have γτγ−1(x, y) = γτ (1 — x, y — 1) = γ(2 — x, y — 1) = (x — 1, y).

Therefore γτγ−1 = τ −1. Hence γτγ−1τ −1 = τ −2. Therefore [Γ, Γ] = ⟨τ 2⟩, since ⟨τ 2⟩ is a normal subgroup of Γ and Γ/⟨τ 2⟩ is abelian.

209

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Observe that we have a short exact sequence 0 → ⟨τ 2⟩ —→ Γ —→ Z2 ⊕ Z → 0. with τ '→ (1, 0) and γ '→ (0, 1). Let α be an automorphism of Γ. Then α(⟨τ 2⟩) = ⟨τ 2⟩, since ⟨τ 2⟩ = [Γ, Γ]. Therefore α induces an automorphism α of Z2 ⊕ Z. Now α(1, 0) = (1, 0). This implies that α(τ ) is in ⟨τ ⟩. Hence α(⟨τ ⟩) = ⟨τ ⟩. Thus ⟨τ ⟩ is a characteristic subgroup of Γ.

Let γ∗ be conjugation of Γ by γ. Then γ∗(τ ) = γτγ−1 = τ −1. Hence, by composing α with γ∗, if necessary, we may assume that α(τ ) = τ .

Next α(0, 1) = (0, ±1) or (1, ±1). Assume first that α(0, 1) = (0, ±1). Then α(γ) = τ 2kγ±1 for some integer k. Observe that (τ −k)∗α(γ)

= (τ −k)∗τ 2kγ±1 = τ −kτ 2kγ±1τkγ∓1γ±1 = τ k τ −kγ±1 = γ±1.

Thus, by composing α with (τ −k)∗, we may assume that α(γ) = γ±1.

Let ρ : E2 → E2 be the reflection defined by ρ(x, y) = (x, —y). Then ρτρ−1 = τ and ργρ−1(x, y) = ργ(x, —y) = ρ(1 — x, —y + 1) = (1 — x, y — 1) = γ−1(x, y).

Thus ργρ−1 = γ−1. Hence ρΓρ−1 = Γ. Therefore ρ induces a homeomorphism ρ : E2/Γ → E2/Γ defined by ρ(Γv) = Γρv. Note that ρ is an isometry.

Now ρ induces an automorphism ρ∗ of π1(M ) that corresponds to conjugation ρ∗ of Γ by ρ. Now ρ∗(τ ) = τ and ρ∗(γ) = γ−1. Therefore ρ∗ = α when α(γ) = γ−1.

Next, assume that α(0, 1) = (1,± 1). Then α(γ) = τ 2k+1γ±1 for some integer k. Observe that (τ −k)∗α(γ)

= = =

(τ −k)∗τ 2k+1γ±1 τ −kτ 2k+1γ±1τkγ∓1γ±1 τk+1τ −kγ±1 = τγ±1.

Thus, by composing α with (τ −k)∗, we may assume that k = 0.

Let τ 1/2 : E2 → E2 be the translation defined by τ 1/2(x, y) = (x + 1/2, y).

Then τ 1/2ττ −1/2 = τ and τ 1/2γτ −1/2(x, y)

= τ 1/2γ(x — 1/2, y) = τ 1/2(1 — x + 1/2, y + 1) = (2 — x, y + 1) = τγ(x, y).

Thus τ 1/2γτ −1/2 = τγ. Hence τ 1/2Γτ −1/2 = Γ. Therefore τ 1/2 induces a homeomorphism τ 1/2 : E2/Γ→ E2/Γ defined by τ 1/2(Γv) = Γτ 1/2v. Note that τ 1/2 is an isometry.

210

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Define a curve β : [0, 1] → E2/Γ by β(t) = Γ(t/2, 0). Then β∗(τ 1/2)∗ is an automorphism of π1(E2/Γ, Γ0). Let δ : [0, 1] → E2/Γ be a loop based at Γ0.

Then β∗(τ 1/2)∗([δ]) = [β(τ 1/2δ)β−1]. Let δ˜ be the lift of δ starting at 0. Then 1/2 β (τ ˜ δ ) β − 1 = β˜(τ 1/2δ˜)(τ 1/2gδτ −1/2β˜−1).

Hence

1/ 2 β (τ ˜ δ )β −1 (1) = τ 1/2gδτ −1/20.

Therefore η(β∗(τ 1/2)∗[δ]) = τ 1/2η[δ]τ −1/2. Thus ηβ∗(τ 1/2)∗ = (τ 1/2)∗η where (τ 1/2)∗ is conjugation of Γ by τ 1/2. Hence τ 1/2 induces an automorphism β∗(τ 1/2)∗ of π1(E2/Γ, Γ0) that corresponds to conjugation (τ 1/2)∗ of Γ by τ 1/2.

Observe that (τ 1/2)∗(τ ) = τ and (τ 1/2)∗(γ) = τγ. Therefore (τ 1/2)∗ = α when α(γ) = τγ. Moreover (ρτ 1/2)∗ = α when α(γ) = τγ−1. Thus, Nielsen’s homomorphism ν : Map(M ) → Out(π1(M )) is surjective. It is worth noting that the proof shows that Out(π1(M )) is a Klein four group.

Exercise 9.4.9 Let M be a closed surface. Prove that Aut(π1(M )) is a countable group. Conclude that Out(π1(M )) is a countable group.

Solution: By Theorem 9.3.2, the surface M has either a spherical, Euclidean, or hyperbolic structure. By Theorem 8.5.9, we may assume that M = X/Γ for some discrete group Γ of isometries of X = S2, E2 or H2 acting freely on X. Then π1(M ) ~ = Γ. As X/Γ is compact, Γ has a compact fundamental polygon

by Theorem 6.6.9. Hence Γ is finitely generated by Theorem 6.8.4. Therefore Aut(Γ) is countable, and so Out(Γ) is countable.

Exercise 9.4.10 Prove that C(π1(M ), I(X)) is the cartesian product I(X)π1(M ) with the product topology.

Solution: Let K be a compact subset of π1(M ) and let U be an open subset of I(X). Let (K, U ) = {φ : π1(M ) → I(X) : φ(K) c U }.

If g is π1(M ), let πg : I(X)π1(M ) → I(X) be the natural projection defined by πg(φ) = φ(g). Now K is finite, since π1(M ) is discrete. Hence, the set (K, U ) =

∩ πg−1(U )

g∈

K

is open in the Cartesian product topology. If g is in π1(M ), then we have that πg−1(U ) = ({g}, U ), and so πg−1(U ) is open in the compact-open topology.

Thus, the compact-open topology on C(π1(M ), I(X)) is the Cartesian product topology on C(π1(M ), I(X)) = I(X)π1(M ).

211

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

9.5

Closed Euclidean Surfaces

Exercise 9.5.1 Let P be the parallelogram in C, with vertices 0, 1, z, w in positive order around P , and let M be the torus obtained from P by gluing the opposite sides of P by tra nslation s. Prove that the class of M in f (T 2) 0 1 = w/|w|2 of U 2 via the bijections of corresponds to the point w · 1 0 Theorems 9.4.4 and 9.5.1.

Solution: Let τ1 and τw be the translations of C by 1 and w, respectively, and let Γ =⟨ τ1, τw⟩ . We may identify M with C/Γ. The identity map I : C → C is a developing map for C/Γ. The holonomy determined by I is the isomorphism η : π1(C/Γ) → Γ of Theorem 8.1.4. Observe that h(η) = (η(τ1)(0), η(τw)(0)) = (1, w).

Now Im(1/w) = Im(w/|w|2) < 0. Hence f (1, w) = 1/w = w/|w|2. Thus, the class of M in f (T 2) corresponds to the point w/|w|2 of U 2.

Exercise 9.5.2 Show that τ1 and γ2 1generate a discrete subgroup of T(C) of index two in the Klein bottle group Γ1. Conclude that Γ1 is a discrete subgroup of I(C).

Solution: Observe that γ2(z) = z + 2i, and so γ2 = τ 2. Therefore τ1 and γ2 1

1

2

1

generate a discrete subgroup of T(C). Now Γ1 = ⟨τ1, γ1 ⟩satisfies the relation γ1τ1γ1−1 = τ1−1, and so Γ1 is the semidirect product of⟨ τ1⟩ and ⟨γ1 ⟩. Hence, we have a short exact sequence 1 → ⟨τ1⟩ —→ Γ1 —→ ⟨γ1⟩ → 1 which is split by the inclusion of ⟨γ1⟩ into Γ1. Hence τ1 and γ21 generate a subgroup of index two of Γ1. Therefore Γ1 is discrete by Lemma 8 of §5.4.

Exercise 9.5.3 Prove that the square P in C, with vertices 0, 1, 1 + i, i, is a fundamental polygon for the Klein bottle group Γ 1.

Solution:

Every element of Γ1 is of the form τ k γ A for some integers k and 1

1

l. The polygons {τ k1γ A1P : k, l ∈ Z} form the tessellation of C by squares with vertices k +li, k +1+li, k +1+(l+1)i, k +(l+1)i. Therefore P is a fundamental polygon for Γ1 by Theorem 6.8.1.

Exercise 9.5.4 Prove that a discrete subgroup Γ of I(C) is isomorphic to Γ1 if and only if there are v, w in C such that v, w are linearly independent over R and Γ is generated by τ and γ defined by τ (z) = z + v and γ(z) = —(v/v)z + v + w.

Solution: Let ξ : Γ1 → Γ be an isomorphism. By Theorem 7.4.4, there is an affine bijection α of C such that ξ(g) = αgα−1. By conjugating Γ by a translation, we may assume that α is a linear transformation. As Γ = αΓ1α−1, 212

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

we have that αP is a fundamental polygon for Γ. Let v = α(1) and w = α(i).

Then v and w are linearly independent. Now ατ1α−1 = τ where τ (z) = z + v and αγ1α−1 = γ with γ a glide-reflection. Observe that γ(0) = γα(0) = αγ1(0) = α(1 + i) = v + w and γ(v) = γα(1) = αγ1(1) = α(i) = w.

Therefore γ(z) = —(v/v)z + v + w.

Conversely, if τ and γ are defined as above, then the parallelogram with vertices 0, v, v + w, w is a fundamental polygon for the discrete group Γ = ⟨τ, γ⟩ which is isomorphic to Γ1 Exercise 9.5.5 Prove that D(K2) is homeomorphic to U 1.

Solution: We take π1(K2) = ⟨τ1, γ1 ⟩. Let η : π1(K2) →I(E2) be a discrete faithful representation and identify E2 with C. Then η(τ1) = τY and η(γ1) = γY,w where τY(z) = z + v and γY,w(z) = —(v/v)z + v + w. Define h : Hom(π1(M ), I(E2)) → C2 by h(η) = (η(τ1)(0), η(γ1)(0)). Then h is continuous. Define h−1 : C∗2 → Hom(π1(M ), I(E2)) by h−1(v, z) = ηY,z−Y where ηY,w(τk1γA)1 = τ k γY A Y,w. Then h−1 is continuous.

Now D(π1(M ), I(E2)) corresponds under h to the subset D of C2 of all pairs (v, z) such that v and z are linearly independent over R. Moreover h maps D(π1(M ), I(E2)) homeomorphically onto D. Let ξ(z) = az+b be an orientation-preserving similarity of C. Then ξτYξ−1(z) = z + av, and so ξτYξ−1 = τaY. Observe that ξγY,wξ−1(z)

=

ξγY,w(a−1 — a−1b)

= ξ — (v/v)(a− 1z — a−1 b) + v + w = —(av/av)(z — b) + av + aw + b.

Let a = v−1 and b = — aw/2. Then ξτYξ−1 = τ1 and ξγY,wξ−1 = γ1,Im(w/Y)i.

Now suppose ξ(z) = z, Then we have ξγY,wξ−1(z)

=

ξγY,w(z)

= ξ — (v/v)z + v + w = —(v/v)z + v + w.

Hence ξγY,wξ−1 = γY,w.

Define f : D → U 1 so that if Im(z/v) > 0, then f (v, z) = Im(z/v) and if Im(z/v) < 0, then f (v, z) = Im(z/v). Then f is continuous and induces a continuous bijection g : S(C)\ D → U 1. As the mapping z '→ (1, z) from U 1 to D is continuous, we see that g−1 is continuous. ThusD(D2) is homeomorphic to U 1.

213

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 9.5.6 Let P be the parallelogram in C, with vertices 0, 1, z, w in positive order around P , and let M be the Klein bottle obtained from P by gluing the opposite sides [0, w] and [1, z] by a translation and [0, 1] and [w, z] by a glide-reflection. Prove that the class of M inf (K2) corresponds to the point Im(w) of U 1 under the composite of the bijections of Theorems 9.4.4 and 9.5.3.

Solution: We take π1(K2) = ⟨τ1, γ1⟩. Then the holonomy η : π1(M ) → I(E2) is defined by η(τ1) = τ1 and η(γ1) = γ1,1+w. Now f (1, 1 + w) = Im(1 + w) = Im(w).

Hence, the class of M in f (K2) corresponds to the point Im(w) of U 1 under the bijections of Theorems 9.4.4 and 9.5.3.

Exercise 9.5.7 Prove that τ1 generates a characteristic subgroup of Γ 1 and that Γ1/⟨τ1⟩ is an infinite cyclic group generated by ⟨τ1⟩γ1.

Solution: From the solution of Exercise 9.4.8, we have that ⟨τ1⟩ is a characteristic subgroup of Γ1 = ⟨τ1, γ1⟩. Now, the relation γ1τ1γ1−1 = τ1−1 implies that Γ1 is a semi-direct product of ⟨τ1⟩ and ⟨γ1⟩. Therefore Γ1/⟨τ1⟩ is an infinite cyclic group generated by ⟨τ1⟩γ1.

Exercise 9.5.8 Prove that Out(Γ1) is a Klein four-group generated by the cosets αInn(Γ1) and βInn(Γ1), where α(τ1) = τ1 and α(γ1) = τ1γ1, and β(τ1) = τ1 and β(γ1) = γ1−1.

Solution: This follows from the solution of Exercise 9.4.8.

Exercise 9.5.9 Prove that Out(π1(K2)) acts trivially on D(K2).

Solution: Let α and β be as in Exercise 9.5.8. We may assume η(τ1) = τ1 and η(γ1) = γ1,w. Then we have h(ηα) = (ηα(τ1)(0), ηα(γ1)(0)) = (η(τ1)(0), η(τ1γ1)(0)) = (τ1(0), τ1(γ1,w(0))) = (1, τ1(1 + w)) = (1, 2 + w).

Now f (1, 2 + w) = Im(2 + w) = Im(1 + w). Hence α acts trivially on D (K2).

Next, we have h(ηβ) = (ηβ(τ1)(0), ηβ(γ1)(0)) = (η(τ1)(0), η(γ1−1)(0)) −1 (0)) = (1, 1 + w). = (τ1(0), γ1,w Now f (1, 1 + w) = Im(1 + w). Hence β acts trivially on D(K2). Therefore Out(π1(K2)) acts trivially on D(K2).

214

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 9.5.10 Let κ : M (K2) → M (T 2) be the function defined by mapping the class of a Klein bottle to the class of its orientable double cover. Prove that κ is well defined and that κ is neither surjective nor injective.

Solution: Let Φ and Φ′ be Euclidean structures for K2 such that Φ̂ and Φ̂ ′ are similar. By Exercise 9.4.1, there is a similarity ξ : (K2, Φ) → (K2, Φ′). Let π : T 2 → K2 be a double covering. Then Φ and Φ′ lift to Euclidean structures Φ̃ and Φ̃ ′ for T 2, respectively, with respect to π → : T 2 K2. The similarity ξ 2 2 ′ ˜ lifts to a bijection ξ : (T , Φ̃→) (T , Φ̃ ) which is a local similarity. From the solution of Exercise 9.4.1, we have that ξ˜ is a similarity. Therefore Φ̃ and Φ̃ ′ are similar by Exercise 9.4.1. Thus, the map κ : M (K2) → M (T 2) is well defined.

Let Pw be the rectangle in C with vertices 0, 1, 1 + w, w in positive order around Pw. Then w is purely imaginary. Let Kw be the Klein bottle obtained from Pw by gluing the opposite sides of Pw as in Exercise 9.5.6. Then the class of Kw in M(K2) corresponds to |w| in U 1 by Exercise 9.5.6. Let Tw be the torus obtained from Pw be gluing the opposite sides of Pw by translations. Then Tw is the double cover of Kw/2. The class of Tw in f (T 2) corresponds to the point w/|w|2 of U 2 by Exercise 9.5.1. Observe that w/|w|2 = w−1 and w−1 ·

0 1 1 0

= w.

Thus, the√c lass of Tw in M(T 2) corresponds to either the point w of the triangle ∆(i, (1 + 3)/2, ∞) if |w| ≥ 1 or to the point w/|w|2 of the triangle ∆ if |w| ≤ 1.

Thus, the image of κ corresponds to the side [i, ∞ ) of ∆. Therefore κ is not surjective.

Suppose |w| > 1. Then the class of Tw in M(T 2) corresponds to the point w in ∆. Let w′ = w/|w|2. Then |w′| = 1/|w| < 1. Hence, the class of Tw' in M(T 2) corresponds to the point w′/|w′|2 = w in ∆. Hence Kw/2 and Kw'/2 represent distinct classes in M(K2) that are mapped to the same element of M(T 2) by κ. Therefore κ is not injective.

9.6

Closed Geodesics

Exercise 9.6.1 Let Bn/Γ be a space-form and let g and h be nonidentity elements of Γ with h hyperbolic. Prove that the following are equivalent: 1. The elements g and h are both hyperbolic with the same axis.

2. The elements g and h are both powers of the same element of Γ.

3. The elements g and h commute.

4. The elements g and h have the same fixed points in Sn−1.

5. The elements g and h have a common fixed point in Sn−1.

215

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: 1. Suppose g and h are hyperbolic with the same axis L. Let π : Bn → Bn/Γ be the quotient map. Then C = π(L) is a closed geodesic of n B /Γ. By Theorem 9.6.2, there is a primitive hyperbolic element f of Γ whose axis projects onto C. By conjugating f by an element of Γ, we may assume that L is the axis of f . By the proof of Theorem 9.6.2, there are nonzero integers k and l such that g = f k and h = f A. Thus (1) implies (2).

2. Clearly (2) implies (3). 3. Suppose g and h commute. Let Fh be the set of fixed points of h in Sn−1. By Formula 4.7.1, we have Fghg−1 = gFh. Hence Fh = gFh. Therefore g leaves the axis L of h invariant. The element g must fix the endpoints of L, since otherwise g would fix a point of L, which is not the case, since Γ acts freely on Bn. Hence g is hyperbolic with the same fixed points as h. Thus (3) implies (4).

4. Clearly (4) implies (5). 5. Suppose g and h have a common fixed point in Sn−1. By Theorem 5.5.4, we deduce that g fixes the endpoints of the axis L of h. Therefore g is hyperbolic with axis L. Thus (5) implies (1).

Exercise 9.6.2 Let Bn/Γ be a compact space-form. Prove that every elementary subgroup of Γ is cyclic.

Solution: By Theorem 9.6.3, every nonidentity element of Γ is hyperbolic. Let H be an elementary subgroup of Γ. Then H is either elliptic or hyperbolic. If H is elliptic, then H is trivial, since Γ acts freely on Bn. If H is hyperbolic, then it follows from the discussion after Theorem 5.5.7 that H is an infinite cyclic group generated by a hyperbolic element of Γ, since Γ acts freely on Bn. Exercise 9.6.3 Let X be a geometric space and let M = X/Γ be a spaceform. Let λ : R →M be a periodic geodesic line with smallest period p.

Prove that there are only finitely many numbers t in the interval [0, p] such that λ(t) = λ(s) with 0 ≤s < t. Conclude that a closed geodesic of M intersects itself only finitely many times.

Solution: Lift λ : R → M , with respect to the quotient map π : X → X/Γ, to a geodesic line λ̃ : R → X. Suppose 0 ≤ s < t ≤ p and λ(s) = λ(t).

Then π λ̃ (s) = πλ̃ (t). Hence, there is an element g of Γ such that g λ̃ (t) = λ̃ (s).

Now since λ([0, p]) is compact and Γ acts discontinuously on X, there are only finitely many elements g of Γ such that g λ̃ (t) = λ̃ ( s) with≤0 s < ≤ t p. By Axioms 3 and 4 of a geometric space, there is a k > 0 such that λ̃ restricted to [r — k, r + k] is a geodesic arc for each r in R. This implies that the geodesic segment g˜([t — k, t+k]) intersects the geodesic segment λ̃ ([s — k, s+k]) in exactly one point by Theorem 8.1.1. This implies that there are at most finitely many pairs s, t with 0≤s < t ≤ p such that g λ̃ (t) = λ̃ ( s) for a particular g in Γ. Thus, there are only finitely many pairs s, t with 0≤ s < t ≤p such that g λ̃ (t) = λ̃(s) for some g in Γ. Therefore, the closed geodesic λ(R) of M intersects itself only finitely many times.

Exercise 9.6.4 Let X = Sn, En, or Hn, and let M = X/Γ be a space-form.

Let π : X →X/Γ be the quotient map. Prove that a closed geodesic C of M is simple if and only if π−1(C) is a disjoint union of geodesics of X. 216

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Suppose C is simple. Then C is a circle. The restriction of π to π−1(C) is a covering projection. Hence π−1(C) is a 1-manifold, and so π−1(C) is a disjoint union of geodesics.

Conversely, suppose C is not simple. Then C crosses itself at a point u.

Hence π−1(C) is not a 1-manifold at the points of π−1(u). Therefore π−1(C) is not a disjoint union of geodesics of X. Thus C is simple if and only if π−1(C) is a disjoint union of geodesics of X. Exercise 9.6.5 Let γ : [0, 1] → M be an essential closed curve in a complete Euclidean n-manifold M . Prove that there is a periodic geodesic line λ : R → M and a unique period p of λ such that γ is freely homotopic to the closed curve λp : [0, 1] → M defined by λp(t) = λ(pt).

Solution: We may assume that M is a space-form En/Γ by Theorem 8.5.9. Let γ˜ : [0, 1] → En be a lift of γ with respect to the quotient map π : En → En/Γ.

As γ is essential, the element f of Γ such that f γ̃ (0) = γ̃ (1) is nontrivial.

Therefore f is parabolic, since Γ acts freely on En. By Theorem 5.4.1, there is a line L of En on which f acts as a nontrivial translation. Let λ̃ : R → En be a geodesic line parameterizing L in the same direction that f translates L. Then λ = π λ˜ is a geodesic line in M . Let p > 0 be such that f λ̃ ( t ) = λ̃ ( t + p).

Applying π, we find that λ(t) = λ(t + p). Thus p is a period for λ.

Define a homotopy H̃ : [0, 1]2 → En from γ˜ to λ̃ p by the formula H̃ (s, t) = (1 — t)γ̃ (s) + tλ̃ p (s).

Observe that f H̃ (0, t) = f ((1 — t)γ̃ (0) + tλ̃ (0)) = (1 — t)f γ̃ (0) + tf λ̃ (0) = (1 — t)γ̃ (1) + tλ̃(p) = H̃ (1, t).

Let H = π H˜ . Then H(0, t) = H(1, t) for all t. Hence γ is freely homotopic to λp via H. We now prove that p is unique. Let µ : R → M be a periodic geodesic line, and let q be a period of µ such that γ is freely homotopic to µq. Let G : [0, 1]2 → M be a homotopy from γ to µq such that G(0, t) = G(1, t) for all t, and let G̃ : [0, 1]2 → En be a lift of G such that G̃ ( s , 0) = γ̃ (s) for all s. As f γ̃ (0) = γ̃ (1), we have that f G̃ (0, t) = G̃ (1, t) for all t by unique path lifting.

Let µ̃ : R → En be the lift of µ such that µ̃ ( 0 ) = G̃ ( 0 , 1). Then G̃ is a homotopy from γ˜ to µ̃ q . Hence, we have f µ̃ (0) = f G̃ (0, 1) = G̃ (1, 1) = µ̃(q).

Now for each integer k, we have that γk is freely homotopic to µkq, and the above argument shows that f k µ̃(0) = µ̃(kq ). Hence, we have f µ̃ ( ( k— 1)q) = µ̃(kq).

Therefore f maps the line segment [µ̃ ((k —1)q), µ̃ (kq )] to the line segment [µ̃ (kq ), µ̃ (( k + 1)q)]. Thus f acts as a translation on the line µ̃ (R). The translation vector of f is unique by Exercise 5.4.8. Hence µ̃ (R ) is parallel to L and p = q. Thus, the period p is unique.

217

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 9.6.6 Let γ : [0, 1] →M be an essential, simple, closed curve in a complete, orientable, Euclidean surface M . Prove that there is a periodic geodesic line λ : R → M and a unique period p of λ such that γ is freely homotopic to the closed curve λp : [0, 1] → M defined by λp(t) = λ(pt). Furthermore p is the smallest period of λ and λp is simple.

Solution: All but the last sentence of the exercise follows from Exercise 9.6.5.

As in the solution of Exercise 9.6.5, let γ˜ : [0, 1]→ E2 be a lift of γ with respect to the quotient map π : E2 → E2/Γ, and let f be the parabolic element of Γ such that f γ̃ (0) = γ̃ (1). Let C = γ([0, 1]). Then C is homeomorphic to S1. Let C˜ be the component of π−1(C) containing γ̃ (0). Then we have C˜ = ∪{f k γ̃([0, 1]) : k ∈ Z} by unique path lifting. As γ represents an element of infinite order in π1(M ), the covering C˜ of C is universal, and so C˜ is homeomorphic to R. Now f is a translation, and so there is a line L of E2, passing through γ̃ (0), on which f acts as a nontrivial translation. Let λ̃ : R →E2 be a geodesic line parameterizing L in the same direction that f translates L such that λ̃ ( 0 ) = γ̃ (0). Then λ = π λ̃ is a geodesic line in M . Let p > 0 be such that f λ̃ ( t ) = λ̃(t + p). Then λ is periodic with period p and γ is freely homotopic to λp by the solution of Exercise 9.6.5.

The 1-manifold C˜ remains a bounded distance from L with f k γ̃(0) = λ̃ (k p) for each integer k. By taking the one-point compactification of E2 and applying the Jordan-Brouwer separation theorem, we deduce that C˜ separates E2 into two components.

Let q be the smallest period of λ. We now show that λq : [0, 1] → M is simple. On the contrary, suppose that λq is not simple. Then λp must cross itself transversely. Hence, there is an element g of Γ and another lift g λ̃ :→R E2 of λ such that the line gL = g λ̃ (R) intersects L at one point. The 1-manifold g C˜ remains a bounded distance from gL, and so g C˜ meets both components of E2 — C˜ . Therefore g C˜ and C˜ must intersect. But C˜ and g C˜ are distinct components of π−1(C), and so they are disjoint, which is a contradiction. Thus λq is simple.

Let m = p/q. Then m is a positive integer and λp = λqm. Assume that m > 1. We shall derive a contradiction. Let g be the element of Γ such that g λ̃ (0) = λ̃ (q ). By unique path lifting, we have that λ̃ q gλ̃ q · · · g m−1 λ̃q = λ̃q .

Therefore, we have g m λ̃(0) = g m−1 λ̃(q) = λ̃ (p) = f λ̃(0).

Hence f = gm. Therefore g is a translation that translates along L a distance q in the same direction as f .

Without loss of generality, we may assume that L is the y-axis of E2. Then ˜ C divides E2 into two components, the left one and the right one. Observe that 218

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

g C˜ is a component of π−1(C) different from C˜ , and so must be in either the left or right component of E2 —C˜ , say g C˜ is in the right component. Likewise g C˜ divides E2 into two components, the left one and the right one. Moreover g maps the right component of E2—C˜ onto the right component of E2 —g C˜ since 2 ˜ g is a vertical translation. Hence g 2 C̃ is in the right component of E— C . By m 2 induction, we have that g C̃ = C˜ is in the right component of E —C˜ , which is a contradiction. Hence m = 1 and p = q. Thus p is the smallest period of λ.

Exercise 9.6.7 Let γ and λp be as in Theorem 9.6.4. Prove that |λp| ≤ |γ|.

Conclude that λp has minimal length in its free homotopy class.

Solution: Let γ˜ : [0, 1] →Hn be a lift of γ with respect to the quotient map π : Hn → Hn/Γ. As γ is hyperbolic, the element h of Γ such that hγ̃ (0) = γ̃ (1) is hyperbolic. Let L be the axis of h in Hn and let λ̃ : R→ Hn be a geodesic line parameterizing L in the same direction that h translates L such that λ̃ ( 0) is the nearest point of L to γ̃ (0). Let p > 0 be such that hλ̃(t) = λ̃ ( t + p) for all t. Then λ̃ (p) is the nearest point of L to γ̃ (1). Observe that |γ|

= | γ̃ | = d(γ̃ (0), γ̃ (1)) ≥ d(λ̃(0), λ̃ (p)) by Exercise 4.6.4. =

p = |λp|.

Thus λp has minimal length in its free homotopy class.

Exercise 9.6.8 Prove that the infimum of the set of lengths of essential closed curves in a compact hyperbolic n-manifold M is positive.

Solution: We may assume that M is a space-form Hn/Γ. Let γ : [0, 1] → M be an essential closed curve in M . Let λp be as in Theorem 9.6.4. Then |λp | ≤ | γ |

by Exercise 9.6.7. As M is compact, there is an r > 0 such that the quotient map π : Hn → Hn/Γ maps B(x, r) isometrically onto B(π(x), r) for each x in Hn. Let π(x) = λ(0). Then we have that |λp| ≥ 2r. Thus 2r is a lower bound for |γ|.

Exercise 9.6.9 Let X be a geometric space and let M = X/Γ be a space-form.

Let λ, µ : R →M be periodic geodesic lines such that λ(R) = µ(R). Prove that there is an isometry ξ of R such that µ = λξ. Conclude that the length of the closed geodesic λ(R) is well defined to be the smallest period of λ.

Solution: By Exercise 9.6.3, there is a real number t1 such that the closed geodesic µ(R) does not intersect itself at µ(t1). There is an isometry ξ of R such that µ(t1) = λξ(t1) and µ and λξ parametrize µ(R) in the same direction. As µ and λξ are local isometries, there is an r > 0 such that the restrictions of µ and λξ to the closed interval [t1—r, t1 + r] are equal geodesic arcs. As M is geodesically complete, µ = λξ.

219

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 9.6.10 Let M = Hn/Γ be a compact hyperbolic space-form. Prove that for each l > 0, there are only finitely many closed geodesics in M of length ≤ l.

Solution: Let C be a closed geodesic in M of length at most l, let P be an n exact convex fundamental polyhedron for Γ, and let π : H→ Hn/Γ be the quotient map. Then there is a point x in P such that π(x) is in C. By Theorem 9.6.2, there is a primitive hyperbolic element h of Γ whose axis L projects onto C and L passes through x. Now, the segment [x, hx] of L projects onto C and d(x, hx) is the length of C. As P is compact and the tessellation gP { : g ∈ Γ} is locally finite, there are only finitely many g in Γ such that hx is in gP for any such x and h, say g1, . . . , gk. Now x is in h−1giP for some i, and so x is in P ∩ h−1giP . As P is compact and Γ is discontinuous, there are only finitely many f in Γ such that P ∩ f P is nonempty, say f1, . . . , fm. Now h−1gi = fj implies that h = gif −j1. Thus, there are only finitely many possibilities for h, and so there are only finitely many possibilities for C.

9.7

Closed Hyperbolic Surfaces

Exercise 9.7.1 Let γ{1 . . . , γk be } a finite set of disjoint, simple, closed curves in a closed orientable surface M , and let M ′ be the compact 2-manifold-withboundary obtained from M by cutting M along the images of γ1, . . . , γk. Prove that γ1, . . . , γk are essential and homotopically distinct if and only if no component of M ′ is a disk or a cylinder. Hint: If γi is null homotopic, then the image of γi bounds a disk in M ; and if γi and γj, with i /= j, are essential and freely homotopic, then the images of γi and γj bound a cylinder in M .

Solution: Let M be a closed orientable surface of genus n > 1. Let γ1, . . . , γk be disjoint, simple, closed curves in M . Now γi is nonessential if and only if γi bounds a disk in M ; and γi and γj, with i = j, are not homotopically distinct if and only if γi and γj bound a cylinder in M . Let M ′ be the 2-manifold-withboundary obtained by cutting M along the image of γi for each i. Then M ′ is compact and orientable. By an inner most disk argument, γi is essential for each i if and only if no component of M ′ is a disk.

Any essential simple closed curve in the interior of a cylinder subdivides the cylinder into two cylinders. Therefore, by an inner most cylinder argument, γ1, . . . , γk are homotopically distinct, essential, simple, closed curves in M if and only if no component of M ′ is a disk or a cylinder.

Exercise 9.7.2 Prove Theorem 9.7.1.

Solution: Regard M to be a sphere with n handles. Let αi be a simple closed curve that goes around the ith handle within the handle. Let M ′ be the surface-with-boundary obtained by cutting M along the image of αi for each i. Then M ′ is a compact orientable surface-with-boundary of genus 0 with 2n boundary components. Regard M ′ to be the surface of a right cylinder with 2n 220

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

circular holes lined up along the length of the cylinder. Let βi′ be a simple closed curve whose image is the intersection of M ′ and a plane perpendicular to the axis of the cylinder midway between the ith and (i + 1)st-boundary components of M ′. Let βi be the corresponding simple closed curve in M . By Exercise 9.7.1, the 3n — 3 curves α1, . . . , αn, β2, . . . , β2n−2 are disjoint, homotopically distinct, essential, simple, closed curves, since they subdivide M into pairs of pants. Thus, there are 3n —3 disjoint homotopically distinct, essential, simple, closed curves in M .

Now suppose γ1, . . . , γk are disjoint, homotopically distinct, essential, simple, closed curves in M . Let M ′ be the 2-manifold-with-boundary obtained by cutting M along the images of γi for each i. By Exercise 9.7.1, no component of M ′ is a disk, since each γi is essential; and no component of M ′ is a cylinder, since the curves are homotopically distinct. If some component Mi′ of M ′ has positive genus, we can cut across the handles of Mi′ to obtain a compact orientable surface-with-boundary of genus zero with at least three boundary components. Thus, by enlarging the list γ1, . . . , γk, if necessary, we may assume that each component of M ′ is a compact orientable surface-with-boundary of genus zero with at least three boundary components. If some component Mi′ of M ′ has more than three boundary components, we cut Mi′ as before into pairs of pants. Thus, by enlarging the list γ1, . . . , γk, if necessary, we may assume that each component of M ′ is a pair of pants.

The Euler characteristic of a pair of pants is —1. Gluing the pairs of pants together along their boundary components to reconstitute M does not change the Euler characteristic, and so χ(M ′) = χ(M ) = 2 — 2n.

Thus M ′ is the disjoint union of 2n — 2 pairs of pants. Hence, we have 3 k = (2n — 2) = 3n — 3.

2 Thus 3n —3 is the maximum number of disjoint, homotopically distinct, essential, simple, closed curves in M . Moreover, the above argument shows that the complement in M of a maximal number of disjoint, homotopically distinct, essential, simple, closed curves in M is the disjoint union of 2n—2 surfaces each homeomorphic to S2 minus three disjoint closed disks.

Exercise 9.7.3 Let P be a pair of pants with boundary circles A, B, C and let α, β : [0, 1] →P be simple curves whose images are geodesic sections that begin in A, end in B, and are otherwise disjoint from A, B, C. Prove that α is freely homotopic to β by a homotopy that keeps the endpoints in A and B. Solution: Let M be the double of P . Then M is a closed hyperbolic surface, and so M is complete. Hence, we may assume that M is a space-form H2/Γ.

Let π : H2 → H2/Γ be the quotient map, and let P˜ be a component of π−1(P ). ˜ Then P is a surface-with-boundary whose boundary is a disjoint union of hyperbolic lines. Let L be a component of ∂P˜. Then P˜ lies in one of the closed half-planes bounded by L, since the interior of P˜ is connected.

221

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Let K be the intersection of all the closed half-planes of H2 bounded by the boundary components of ∂P˜ and containing P˜. Then K is a closed convex ˜ K and P˜ is an subset of H2 whose sides are the components of ∂P . Now Pc open subset of K, since ∂P˜ = ∂K and P˜ is a surface-with-boundary. Moreover P˜ is a closed subset of K, since P˜ is a component of the closed set π−1(P ) of H2. Therefore P˜ = K, since K is connected. Thus P˜ is convex.

Lift α to a curve α̃ : [0, 1] → H2 with respect to π starting in a component ˜ A of ∂P˜ over A. Then the image of α̃ ends in a component B̃ of ∂P˜ over B and otherwise avoids ∂P˜. The hyperbolic lines A˜ and B̃ have a common perpendicular line L that intersects A˜ at x and B̃ at y. Let γ˜ : [0, 1] → H2 be the curve from x to y mapping [0, 1] linearly onto [x, y]. Then γ̃ ([0, 1]) c P˜, since P˜ is convex. Define H̃ : [0, 1]2 → P˜ by the formula H̃ (s, t) =

(1 — t)α̃ (s) + tγ̃ (s) . |||(1 — t)α̃(s) + tγ̃(s)|||

Then α̃ is freely homotopic to γ˜ via H̃ keeping the endpoints in A˜ and B̃ . Let H = π H̃ : [0, 1]2 → P and let γ = π γ˜ : [0, 1]→ P . Then α is freely homotopic to γ via H keeping the endpoints in A and B. The curve γ is simple by Theorem 9.6.5 applied to the double M of P . Therefore, the image of γ is a seam of P .

Thus, we may assume that the images of α and β are seams of P .

Let S be the seam α([0, 1]) of P joining A to B, and let T be a seam of P joining A to C. Let Q be the surface-with-boundary obtained by cutting P along S and T . Then Q is the union of two right-angled hyperbolic hexagons joined along a common side corresponding to a seam of P joining B to C. Observe that Q is isometric to a right-angled convex hyperbolic octagon with sides labeled A1, S1, B1 ∪ B2, S2, A2, T2, C1 ∪C2, T1 around ∂Q. Let R be the seam β([0, 1]). We claim that R does not cross S or T . On the contrary, suppose R crosses S or T . Then R crosses S or T only finitely many times. Let R′ be the image of R in Q. Then R′ is the disjoint union of a finite number of geodesic segments. Say R′ starts on side A1 of Q. Then the first component R1′ of R′ does not end on side S1 or T1 of Q, since R1′ is orthogonal to A1. If R1′ ends on side T2 of Q, then the second component R2′ of R′ starts on side T1 of Q and β becomes trapped in a neighborhood of C in P , since β cannot cross itself, and we have a contradiction. If R1′ ends on side S2 of Q, then R2′ starts on side S1 of Q and β becomes trapped in a neighborhood of B in P , since β cannot cross itself. Observe that R2′ either ends on side B1 ∪ B2 of Q or on side S2 of Q nearer to the side B1 ∪ B2. Hence β spirals a finite number of times in a neighborhood of B in P and the last component Rk′ of R′ starts on side S1 of Q and ends on side B1 ∪ B2 of Q. Now Rk′ forms a right triangle with parts of sides S1 and B1 ∪ B2 of Q. Thus, the angle between Rk′ and B1 ∪ B2 is less than π/2, which is a contradiction, since R is orthogonal to B. Thus R does not cross S or T . Hence R′ is a geodesic segment that starts on side A1 of Q and ends on side B1 ∪ B2 of Q. Assume that R′ /= S1. Then R′, S1, and parts of sides A1 and B1 ∪ B2 of Q form a quadrilateral with four right angles, which contradicts Theorem 3.5.9.

222

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Thus R′ = S1, and so R = S. Thus, the seam of P joining A to B is unique, and so α and β are freely homotopic by a homotopy keeping the endpoints in A and B. Exercise 9.7.4 Let M̃ be a marked, closed, oriented surface of genus n — 1 embedded in R3 so that the βj curves all lie on the xy-plane, the αi curves lie either on the xz-plane or on planes parallel to the yz-plane, and M̃ and its marking are invariant under a 180○ rotation φ about the z-axis and the reflection ρ in the xy-plane. See Figure 9.7.4. Let σ = ρφ and let Γ ={ I, σ} . Prove that M = M̃ /Γ is a closed nonorientable surface of genus n.

Solution: Now σ is a fixed point free involution of M̃ , and so the quotient map π : M̃ → M̃ /Γ is a covering projection. Therefore M is a closed surface. If M were orientable, then every covering transformation of π would be orientationpreserving; but σ is an orientation-reversing covering transformation of π, and so M must be nonorientable. Now we have χ ( M̃ ) = 2 — 2(n — 1) = 4 — 2n.

Hence χ(M ) = 1 2χ ( M̃ ) = 2 — n, and so genus(M ) = 2 — χ(M ) = n.

Exercise 9.7.5 Let l > 0. Prove that M̃ in Exercise 9.7.4 has a hyperbolic structure Φ̃ A whose length-twist coordinates are log l, 0, . . . , log l, 0, and such that φ and ρ are isometries. Conclude that Φ̃ A induces a hyperbolic structure ΦA on M .

Solution: By Theorem 3.5.13, there are 4n —8 congruent right-angled convex hyperbolic hexagons that can be glued together in pairs along alternate sides to give 2n — 4 pairs of pants whose 6n — 12 boundary circles all have length l. Let M̃ ′ be the surface obtained by gluing together the 2n — 4 pair of pants along their boundary circles with zero twist in the same pattern as the pair of pants decomposition of M̃ . By Theorem 9.2.3, the surface M̃ ′ has a hyperbolic structure such that the 3n — 6 circles Ci in M̃ ′, obtained by gluing together in pairs the 6n —12 boundary circles of the 2n —4 pairs of pants, are simple closed geodesics of length l. Both φ and ρ preserve the hexagon decomposition of M̃ , and so there are congruences between the corresponding hexagons of M̃ ′ that extend to isometries φ′ and ρ′ of M̃ ′. Moreover, there are homeomorphisms between the corresponding hexagons of M̃ and M̃ ′ that extend to a homeomorphism h : M̃ → M̃ ′ such that hφ = φ′h and hρ = ρ′h. Furthermore, h maps αi([0, 1]) onto Ci for each i and h maps βj([0, 1]) onto a simple closed geodesic of M̃ ′ which is a union of seams of the pair of pants of M̃ ′ for each j.

Let Φ̃ ′ be the hyperbolic structure of M̃ ′. Then Φ̃ A = Φ̃ ′ h is a hyperbolic structure for M̃ such that h is an isometry from ( M˜ , Φ̃ A ) to ( M˜ ′, Φ̃ ′ ). Let Ai = αi([0, 1]) for each i. Then Ai is a simple closed geodesic of ( M˜ , Φ̃ A ) of length l that represents αi for each i. Moreover, the twist coefficient of Ai is zero for each i. Hence, the length-twist coordinates of Φ̃ A are log l, 0, . . . , log l, 0.

223

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Now since hφ = φ′h and hρ = ρ′h, we deduce that φ and ρ are isometries of ( M˜ , Φ̃ A ). Therefore σ = ρφ is an isometry. Consequently, M = M̃ /Γ has a hyperbolic structure ΦA such that the quotient map π : M̃ → M̃ /Γ is a local isometry.

Exercise 9.7.6 Prove that the moduli space M (M ) of a closed nonorientable surface M of genus n > 2 is uncountable.

Solution: Let MA be the hyperbolic surface (M, ΦA) of Exercise 9.7.5, and let M˜ A be the hyperbolic surface ( M˜ , Φ̃ A ). We may assume that M˜ A is a spaceform H2/ΓA. All the elements of ΓA preserve the orientation of H2, since M˜ A is orientable. By Theorem 8.1.5, the isometry σ of M˜ A lifts to an isometry σA of H2 such that σAΓAσ−A1 = ΓA. The isometry σA fixes no points, since σ fixes no points.

Moreover σA reverses the orientation of H2, since σ is orientation-reversing.

Let HA = ⟨ΓA, σA ⟩. Then ΓA is a subgroup of HA of index two, and so HA is a discrete subgroup of I(H2) that acts freely on H2. We may identify MA = M̃ A /Γ with the space-form H2/HA so that the quotient map π : M˜ A → M̃ A /Γ corresponds to the quotient map πA : H2/ΓA → H2/HA defined by πA(ΓA x) = HA x.

Suppose that MA and Mk are isometric. Then there is an isometry ξ : MA → Mk. The isometry ξ lifts to an isometry ξˆ of H2 such that ξˆHAξˆ−1 = Hk by Theorem 8.1.5. The group ΓA is the subgroup of orientation-preserving isometries of HA. Hence ξˆΓAξˆ−1 = Γk. Therefore ξˆ induces an isometry ξ˜ : H2/ΓA → H2/Γk such that ξ˜(ΓA x) = Γk ξˆ(x). Moreover πkξ˜ = ξπA. Thus M˜ A and M̃ k are isometric.

By Theorem 9.7.4 and Exercise 9.7.5, the hyperbolic surfaces { M̃ A : l > 0} represent an uncountable number of classes in the Teichmüller space f ( M̃ ). The group Ma p ( M̃ ) is countable by Theorem 9.4.3. The quotient map from f ( M˜ ) to M ( M̃ ) induces a bijection from f ( M̃ )/Map(M̃ ) to M ( M̃ ). Therefore, the hyperbolic surfaces { M̃ A : l > 0} represent an uncountable number of classes in the moduli space M ( M̃ ). Now [MA] '→ [ M̃ A ] is a well-defined function from the subset {[MA] : l > 0} of M(M ) onto the subset {[M̃ A ] : l > 0} of M ( M̃ ). Therefore, the hyperbolic surfaces {MA : l > 0} represent an uncountable number of classes in M(M ). Thus M(M ) is uncountable.

9.8

Hyperbolic Surfaces of Finite Area

Exercise 9.8.1 Let C be a cycle of m ideal vertices. Prove that C has 2m cycle transformations associated to its vertices and that all these transformations are conjugates of each other or their inverses. Conclude that if one of these transformations in parabolic, then they are all parabolic.

Solution: Let [v] = {v1, . . . , vm} be a cycle of ideal vertices with v = v1 ' v2 ' · · · ' vm ' v.

224

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Let {Si}mi=1be a corresponding cycle of unbounded sides. Then the cycle transformation of {Si}m i=1 is gS1 · · · gSm . The two sides incident with v are S1 and ′ S m′ . Now v and S m′ determine a cycle of unbounded sides { S m , S m′ −1, . . . , S1′ } ′ ′ as in Exercise 6.8.6. The cycle transformation of { S m , S m −1, . . . , S1′ } is ' gSm' gSm−1 · · · g1S' = (gS1 · · · gSm )−1.

The ideal vertex v2 and the side S2 determine a cycle of unbounded sides {S2, . . . , Sm, S1} as in Exercise 6.8.7. The cycle transformation of the cycle {S2, . . . , Sm, S1} is gS2 · · · gSm gS1 = gS−11(gS 1 · · · gSm )gS1 .

Thus, the cycle [v] determines 2m cycles of unbounded sides {S1, . . . , Sm}, {Si, . . . , Sm, S1, . . . , Si−1}, ′ ′ ′ ′ ′ ′ ′ {Si′−1, Si′ − 2, . . . , S1 , S m , S m −1, . . . , Si }, { S m , S m −1, . . . , S1 }

for i = 2, . . . , m whose transformations are conjugate to either gS1 · · · gSm or (gS1 · · · gSm )−1.

Exercise 9.8.2 Prove that the open horodisk B(v) in Theorem 9.8.4 can be replaced by a smaller concentric open horodisk so that ι maps the cusp B(v)/ΓY isometrically onto its image in M .

Solution: Let C(v) be a smaller concentric open horodisk, let b and c be the circumferences of B(v)/ΓY and C(v)/ΓY, respectively, and let d = dist(∂C(v), ∂B(v)).

Then c = be−d by Lemma 1. The graph of c as a function of d crosses the line c = 2d at a unique value of d, and so we may assume that c = 2d.

Let ι : B(v)/ΓY → M be the embedding of Theorem 9.8.4. We claim that ι maps C(v)/ΓY isometrically onto its image in M . Let π : B(v) → B(v)/ΓY be the quotient map. Let x and y be points in C(v), and let x′ = ιπ(x) and y′ = ιπ(y). We need to show that d(x′, y′) = d(π(x), π(y)). We may assume that d(x, y) = dist(ΓYx, ΓYy) = d(π(x), π(y)) and that dist(x, ∂C(v)) ≤ dist(y, ∂C(v)).

Let z be the point of C(v) on the line passing through y perpendicular to ∂C(v) such that dist(x, ∂C(v)) = dist(z, ∂C(v)).

Then x and z are on the same horocycle based at v. Moreover d(x,≤ z) c/2 = d.

Now C(v) is convex, and so the geodesic segment [x, y] is contained in C(v).

Hence d(x′, y′) ≤ d(x, y), since π and ι are local isometries. On the contrary, 225

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

assume that d(x′, y′) < d(x, y). Then there is a curve γ : [0, 1] → M from x′ to y′ such that |γ| < d(x, y). Observe that |γ|

< d(x, y) ≤ d(x, z) + d(z, y) ≤ d + d(z, y) ≤ dist(y, ∂B(v)) = dist(y′, ∂ιπ(B(v)))

by the proof of Theorem 9.8.5. Therefore γ([0, 1]) c ιπ(B(v)).

Let γ˜ : [0, 1] → B(v) be the lift of ι−1γ : [0, 1] → B(v)/ΓY such that γ̃ (0) = x.

Then there is an element f of ΓY such that γ̃ (1) = fy. Observe that |γ| = | γ˜ | ≥ d(x, fy) ≥ d(x, y), which is a contradiction. Thus, we must have d(x′, y′) = d(x, y) = d(π(x), π(y)).

Thus ι maps C(v)/ΓY isometrically onto its image in M .

Exercise 9.8.3 Construct complete hyperbolic structures of finite area on the once-punctured Klein bottle and on the twice-punctured projective plane by gluing together the sides of the ideal square in Figure 9.8.1.

Solution: To construct a complete hyperbolic structure of finite area on the once-punctured Klein bottle, pair two opposite sides of the ideal square P in Figure 9.8.1 as in Example 1, and pair the other two sides by a 180○ rotation about the center of P followed by the reflection in the corresponding side of P .

There is just one cycle of ideal vertices and all the gluing invariants are zero.

Therefore, the hyperbolic structure of finite area on the once-punctured Klein bottle obtained by gluing together the sides of P is complete by Theorem 9.8.5.

To construct a complete hyperbolic structure of finite area on the twicepunctured projective plane, pair two opposite sides of the ideal square P by a 180○ rotation about the center of P followed by the reflection in the corresponding side of P , and pair the other two sides in the same way. There are two cycles of ideal vertices and all the gluing invariants are zero. Therefore, the hyperbolic structure of finite area on the twice-punctured projective plane obtained by gluing together the sides of P is complete by Theorem 9.8.5.

Exercise 9.8.4 Prove that the group in Example 2 is the group of all linear fractional transformations γ(z) = (az + b)/(cz + d) with a, b, c, d integers such that 1 0 a b ≡ (mod 2). ad — bc = 1 and c d 0 1

226

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let M be the group of all linear fractional transformations γ(z) =

az + b cz + d

with a, b, c, d integers and ad— bc = 1. The group Γ in Example 2 is generated by f (z) = z + 2 and g(z) = z/( —2z + 1), and so Γ is a subgroup of M. By Theorem 6.7.3, we have that Area(U 2/Γ) = [M : Γ] Area(U 2/M).

By Exercise 6.7.5, we have Area(U 2/M) = π — 2π/3 = π/3.

As Area(U 2/Γ) = 2π, we deduce that [M : Γ] = 6.

Now M is isomorphic to PSL(2, Z) with γ(z) = (az + b)/(cz + d) in M a b corresponding to ± c d in PSL(2, Z). Let K be the subgroup of PSL(2, Z) a b of all pairs of matrices ± such that c d a b c d

≡

1 0 0 1

(mod 2).

Then K is the kernel of the homomorphism from PSL(2, Z) to SL(2, Z/2Z) induced by the projection from Z to Z/2Z. Therefore K is a normal subgroup of M of index 6, since SL(2, Z/2Z) =

1 0 0 1

,

1 1 0 1

,

1 0 1 1

0 1 1 0

,

1 1 1 0

,

0 1 1 1

, .

Now Γ corresponds to a subgroup of K which has index 6 in PSL(2, Z).

Therefore Γ corresponds to K. Thus Γ is the group of all linear fractional transformations γ(z) = (az+b)/(cz+d) with a, b, c, d integers such that ad— bc = 1 and a b 1 0 ≡ (mod 2). c d 0 1 Exercise 9.8.5 Explain why the hyperbolic surface illustrated in Figure 9.8.5 is fake.

Solution: The surface has regions of positive curvature.

Exercise 9.8.6 Let M be a surface obtained from a closed surface by removing a finite number of points. Prove that M has a complete hyperbolic structure of finite area if and only if χ(M ) < 0.

227

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let M be a surface obtained from a closed surface by removing a finite number of points. Suppose that M has a complete hyperbolic structure of finite area. Then χ(M ) < 0 by Theorem 9.8.2.

Conversely, suppose χ(M ) < 0. By Theorem 9.3.2, we may assume that M has at least one puncture. Assume first that M is orientable. Regard M to be a sphere with n handles and m punctures. If n = 0, then χ(M ) < 0 implies that m ≥ 3 by Formula 9.1.6. By Example 2, we may assume that if n = 0, then m > 3. By Example 1, we may assume that if n = 1, then m > 1.

Let αi be a simple closed curve that goes around the ith handle within the handle. Let M ′ be the surface-with-boundary obtained by cutting M along the image of αi for each i. Then M ′ is an orientable surface-with-boundary of genus 0 with 2n boundary components and m punctures with 2n + m > 3.

We may regard M ′ to be the surface of a right cylinder with 2n circular holes followed by m punctures all lined up along the length of the cylinder.

If n = 0, the bottom and top of the cylinder are part of M ′. If n > 0, the bottom and top of the cylinder are holes. Let βi′ be a simple closed curve whose image is the intersection of M ′ and a plane perpendicular to the axis of the cylinder midway between the ith and (i + 1)st hole or puncture of M ′ along the cylinder. Let βi be the corresponding simple closed curve in M . The curves α1, . . . , αn, β2, . . . , β2n+m−2 subdivide M into pairs of pants, once-punctured cylinders, and two twice-punctured disks when n = 0. We can put hyperbolic structures on the pairs of pants so that the boundary circles all have the same length l.

Let P be a hyperbolic convex pentagon with four right angles, one ideal vertex, and with the nonadjacent finite sides of length l/2. By gluing together two copies of P along the remaining three sides, we obtain a hyperbolic structure on a once-punctured cylinder so that the boundary circles have length l.

Let Q be a hyperbolic convex quadrilateral with two consecutive right angles and two ideal vertices so that the length of the finite side is l/2. By gluing together two copies of Q along the infinite sides, we obtain a hyperbolic structure on a twice-punctured disk so that the boundary circle has length l. The hyperbolic structures on the pair of pants, once-punctured cylinders, and twicepunctured disks glue up to give a hyperbolic structure on M of finite area which is complete by Theorem 9.8.5.

Assume now that M is nonorientable. Then M is the connected sum of either a projective plane or a Klein bottle with a closed orientable surface of genus n with m punctures. Assume first that M is the connected sum of a projective plane and an orientable surface of genus n with m punctures. If n = 0, then χ(M ) < 0 implies that m ≥ 2 by Formula 9.1.6. By Exercise 9.8.3, we may assume that if n = 0, then m > 2. We move one of the punctures into the projective plane and cut M along a circle separating M into a once-punctured Möbius band M0 and an orientable surface-with-boundary M1 of genus n with one boundary component and m —1 punctures.

Let P be a hyperbolic convex pentagon with four right angles, one ideal vertex and with the nonadjacent finite sides of length l/4. We glue together two copies of P along the finite side, between the sides of length l/4, to form a 228

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

hyperbolic convex hexagon H with four right angles, two opposite ideal vertices, and two finite sides of length l/2. We next glue together the opposite infinite sides of H to obtain a hyperbolic structure on a once-punctured Möbius band so that the boundary circle has length l. We have χ(M1) = 2 — 2n — 1 — (m — 1) = 2 — 2n — m < 0.

By the subdivision argument in the orientable case, we can subdivide M1 into pairs of pants, once-punctured cylinders, and twice-punctured disks. We put hyperbolic structures on these parts as before so that the boundary circles have length l. Then we glue up the hyperbolic structures on these parts and M0 to give a hyperbolic structure on M of finite area which is complete by Theorem 9.8.5.

Assume now that M is the connected sum of a Klein bottle and an orientable surface of genus n with m punctures. By Exercise 9.8.3, we may assume that if n = 0, then m > 1. We cut M along a circle separating M into a Klein bottle M0 with the interior of a disk removed and an orientable surface-with-boundary M1 of genus n with one boundary component and m punctures.

Let P be a hyperbolic pair of pants with boundary circles of length l. Orient P . This orients the boundary circles of P . Glue together two of the boundary circles of P by an orientation-preserving isometry. The resulting space is homeomorphic to M0 and has a hyperbolic structure so that the boundary circle has length l. We have χ(M1) = 2 — 2n — 1 — m = 1 — 2n — m < 0.

By the subdivision argument in the orientable case, we can subdivide M1 into pairs of pants, once-punctured cylinders, and twice-punctured disks. We put hyperbolic structures on these parts as before so that the boundary circles have length l. Then we glue up the hyperbolic structures on these parts and M0 to give a hyperbolic structure on M of finite area which is complete by Theorem 9.8.5.

Exercise 9.8.7 Prove that the once-punctured torus has an uncountable number of nonisometric complete hyperbolic structures of finite area.

Solution: Let l > 0 and let P be a hyperbolic convex pentagon with four right angles, one ideal vertex, and with the nonadjacent finite sides of length l/2. By gluing together two copies of P along the remaining three sides, we obtain a hyperbolic structure on a once-punctured cylinder so that the boundary circles have length l. We next glue together the boundary circles obtain a complete hyperbolic structure on the once-punctured torus of finite area so that the glued up boundary components form a simple closed geodesic of length l.

Let M be a complete hyperbolic surface of finite area which is a oncepunctured torus. Let l > 0. We now prove that there are only finitely many closed geodesics in M of length at most l. Let C be a closed geodesic in M of length at most l. We may assume that M is a space-form H2/Γ with quotient 229

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

map π : H2 → H2/Γ. Let P be an exact convex fundamental polygon for Γ.

Then P has finite area, and therefore, only finitely many sides by Theorem 9.8.1.

As in the proof of Theorem 9.8.6, we can remove open horodisk neighborhoods of each ideal vertex of P to obtain a compact surface-with-boundary M0 with one boundary component. Moreover, there is an ideal vertex v of P and an injective local isometry ι : B(v)/ΓY → M as in Theorem 9.8.4 mapping onto M — M0. Now C is not contained in M — M0, since B(v) does not contain any hyperbolic lines. Hence M0 contains a point of C. Let P0 be P with the open horodisks used to form M0 removed. Then P0 is compact. Now since M0 meets C, there is a point x in P0 such that π(x) is in C. By Theorem 9.6.2, there is a primitive hyperbolic element h of Γ whose axis L projects onto C and L passes through x. Then the segment [x, hx] of L projects onto C and d(x, hx) is the length of C. As P0 is compact and the tessellation { gP : g ∈ Γ }is locally finite, there are only finitely many g in Γ such that hx is in gP for any such x and h, say g1, . . . , gk. Now x is in h−1giP , and so x is in P ∩h−1giP . As P has only finitely many sides and since P is locally finite, there are only finitely many f in Γ such that P ∩f P is nonempty, say f1, . . . , fm. Now h−1gi = fj implies that h = gifj −1. Thus, there are only finitely many possibilities for h, and so there are only finitely many possibilities for C. Let L(M ) be the set of lengths of the closed geodesics of M . Then L(M ) is a countable subset of R+. If M is isometric to M ′. Then L(M ) = L(M ′).

Hence L(M ) is an isometry invariant of M .

We have constructed a complete hyperbolic structure of finite area on the once-punctured torus with a closed geodesic of length l for any l > 0. Hence, the union of all possible sets L(M ) is R+. Therefore, there must be an uncountable number of nonisometric complete hyperbolic structures of finite area on the once-punctured torus, since a countable union of countable sets is countable and R+ is uncountable.

230

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 10

Hyperbolic 3-Manifolds 10.1

Gluing 3-Manifolds

Exercise 10.1.1 Let P be the cube [ —1, 1]3 in E3. Pair the opposite vertical sides of P by horizontal translations and the top and bottom sides of P by a vertical translation followed by a 180○ rotation about the vertical z-axis. Show that this I0(E3)-side-pairing for P is proper.

Solution: It is clear from the side-pairing of the cube P that points within the interior of the sides of P are paired off into cycles of order 2, points in the interior of the edges of P fall into cycles of order 4, and all 8 vertices of P form a cycle. Therefore, all the cycles of points have solid angle sum 4π. Thus, the I0(E3)-side-pairing for P is proper.

Exercise 10.1.2 Prove that the fundamental group of the Poincar´e dodecahedral space has order 120. You may use Theorem 11.2.1.

Solution: Let Γ be the group generated by the I 0(S3)-side-pairing Φ in Example 2. Then Γ is discrete and acts freely on S3, and the Poincar´e dodecahedral space M is isometric to S3/Γ by Theorem 11.2.1. Moreover P is an exact convex fundamental polyhedron for Γ, and so Vol(P ) = Vol(M ) = Vol(S3/Γ) = Vol(S3)/|Γ|.

By Theorems 8.1.5 and 8.5.9, the fundamental group π1(M ) is isomorphic to Γ.

Hence| π1(M )| = |Γ |is finite.

Let Q be a regular 120-cell inscribed in S3. Then radial projection of ∂Q onto S3 gives a regular tessellation of S3 by 120 regular dodecahedra. The Schläfli symbol of Q is {5, 3, 3} . Hence, the link of a vertex of Q is a regular tetrahedron. Therefore 3 dodecahedra meet along each edge of the tessellation of S3. Thus, the 120 regular dodecahedra have dihedral angle 2π/3. The regular dodecahedron P is congruent to the 120 regular dodecahedra, since they have

231

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

the same dihedral angle. Therefore Vol(P ) = Vol(S3)/120. Hence, we have |Γ| = Vol(S 3)/Vol(M ) = Vol(S 3)/Vol(P ) = 120.

Exercise 10.1.3 Prove that the Poincar´e dodecahedral space has the same singular homology as the 3-sphere.

Solution: In Figure 10.1.1, we label the front side of P by F . Label the edge of F , with the arrow, by a, and label the edges around F , in clockwise order, a, b, c, d, e. We orient these edges in clockwise fashion. Label the sides of P adjacent to F along edges a, b, c, d, e, by A, B, C, D, E, respectively. Label the edge between sides A and B by f , between sides B and C by g, between sides C and D by h, between sides D and E by i, and between sides E and A by j. Orient these edges pointing away from F . Label the initial vertices of edges a, b, c, d, e by u, v, w, x, y, respectively. We label the remaining sides, edges, and vertices of P consistent with the side-pairing in Example 2. We orient F with the clockwise orientation. We orient sides A, B, C, D, E with the orientation consistent with F . We orient the remaining sides and edges consistent with the side-pairing.

The cell structure of P determines a cell structure for the Poincar´e dodecahedral space M with one 3-cell, represented by P , six 2-cells, represented by the sides A, B, C, D, E, F of P , ten 1-cells, represented by the edges a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j of P , and five 0-cells, represented by the vertices u, v, w, x, y of P .

We compute the homology of M by computing the homology of the cellular chain complex determined by the above cell decomposition of M , 0 → C 3 —∂→ C 2 —∂→ C 1 —∂→ C0 → 0.

3

2

1

We have ∂3(P ) = A + B + C + D + E + F — A — B — C — D — E — F = 0.

Therefore H3(M ) ~ = Z, and so M is orientable.

Next, observe that ∂2(F ) = a + b + c + d + e, ∂2(A) = —a + j — c — i — f, ∂2(B) = —b + f — d — j — g, ∂2(C) = —c + g — e — f — h, ∂2(D) = —d + h — a — g — i, ∂2(E) = —e + i — b — h — j, and ∂1(a) = u — v, ∂1(b) = v — w, ∂1(c) = w — x, ∂1(d) = x — y, ∂1(e) = y — u, ∂1(f ) = v — y, ∂1(g) = w — u, ∂1(h) = x — v, ∂1(i) = y — w, and ∂1(j) = u — x.

232

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

The matrix for ∂1 is the 5 × 10 matrix 1 0 0 0 —1 0 —1 0 0 1 . —1 1 0 0 0 1 0 —1 0 0 . . 0 —1 1 0 0 0 1 0 —1 0 .. .

0 0 —1 1 0 0 0 1 0 —1 0 0 0 —1 1 —1 0 0 1 0 This matrix row reduces to the matrix , 1 0 0 0 —1 0 —1 0 0 — — — 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 . 0 0 1 0 —1 1 0 —1 —1 .

0 0 0 1 —1 1 0 0 —1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 . ..

0 0

This implies that the group of 1-cycles is generated by the vectors v1

= (1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0),

v2 v3

= (0, —1, —1, —1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0), = (1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0),

v4 v5

= (0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0), = (0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0),

v6

= (—1, —1, —1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1).

The group of 1-boundaries is generated by the vectors u1 u2

= (1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0), = (—1, 0, —1, 0, 0, —1, 0, 0, —1, 1),

u3

= (0, —1, 0, —1, 0, 1, —1, 0, 0, —1),

u4 u5 u6

= (0, 0, —1, 0, —1, —1, 1, —1, 0, 0), = (—1, 0, 0, —1, 0, 0, —1, 1, —1, 0), = (0, —1, 0, 0, —1, 0, 0, —1, 1, —1).

Now we have v1 =

u1,

v2 v3

= —u1 + u3 — u5 — u6, = —u2 + u4 — u6,

v4 v5

= —u2 — u3 + u5, = —u3 — u4 + u6,

v6

= —u1 + u2 — u4 — u5.

233

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Hence H1(M ) ~ = 0. As M is a connected closed orientable 3-manifold, M is a homology 3-sphere by Poincar´e duality.

Exercise 10.1.4 Compute the singular homology of the Seifert-Weber dodecahedral space.

Solution: In Figure 10.1.2, we label the front side of P by F . Label the edge of F , with the arrow, by a, and label the edges around F , in clockwise order, a, b, c, d, e. We orient these edges in clockwise fashion. Label the sides of P adjacent to F along edges a, b, c, d, e, by A, B, C, D, E, respectively. We label the remaining 6 sides of P , and 20 of the remaining 25 edges of P consistent with the side-pairing in Example 3. The remaining 5 edges of P , we label f .

These 5 edges occur alternately in the outer ring of 10 edges in Figure 10.1.2.

We orient these 5 edges in a clockwise fashion with respect to Figure 10.1.2.

We orient F with the clockwise orientation. We orient sides A, B, C, D, E with the orientation consistent with F . We orient the remaining sides and edges consistent with the side-pairing.

The cell structure of P determines a cell structure for the Seifert-Weber dodecahedral space M with one 3-cell, represented by P , six 2-cells, represented by the sides A, B, C, D, E, F of P , six 1-cells, represented by the edges a, b, c, d, e, f of P , and one 0-cell, represented by the vertices of P .

We compute the homology of M by computing the homology of the cellular chain complex determined by the above cell decomposition of M , 0 → C 3 —∂→ C 2 —∂→ C 1 —∂→ C0 → 0.

3

2

1

We have ∂3(P ) = A + B + C + D + E + F — A — B — C — D — E — F = 0.

Therefore H3(M ) ~ = Z, and so M is orientable.

Next, observe that ∂1 = 0 and ∂2(F ) = a + b + c + d + e, ∂2(A) = —a — b + e + f + c, ∂2(B) = —b — c + a + f + d, ∂2(C) = —c — d + b + f + e, ∂2(D) = —d — e + c + f + a, ∂2(E)

=

—e — a + d + f + b.

Hence H0(M ) ~ = Z and H1(M ) has the presentation with generators a, b, c, d, e, f and relations ∂2(A) = 0, . . . , ∂2(F ) = 0.

From the relation ∂2(E) = 0, we have that f = a — b — d + e. We use this relation, to eliminate f . Then H1(M ) is generated by a, . . . , e with relations

234

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

a+b+c+d+e = —2b + c — d + 2e =

0, 0,

2a — 2b — c + e = a — c — 2d + 2e =

0, 0,

2a — b + c — 2d

0.

=

From the first relation, e = —a — b — c — d. We use this relation to eliminate e.

Then H1(M ) is generated by a, b, c, d with relations.

—2a — 4b — c — 3d

=

0,

a — 3b — 2c — d = —a — 2b — 3c — 4d =

0, 0,

2a — b + c — 2d

0.

=

From the second relation, d = a — 3b — 2c. We use this relation to eliminate d.

Then H1(M ) is generated by a, b, c with relations.

—5a + 5b + 5c = 0, —5a + 10b + 5c = 0, 5b + 5c = 0.

Subtracting the first equation from the second gives —5a + 5b + 5c = 0, 5b = 0, 5b + 5c = 0.

Hence, we have 5a = 0, 5b = 0, and 5c = 0. Therefore H1(M ) ~ = Z5 ⊕ Z5 ⊕ Z5

where Z5 = Z/5Z.

Hence coker ∂2 is finite. Therefore ker ∂2 = 0, and so H2(M ) = 0.

Exercise 10.1.5 Prove that there are infinitely many pairwise nonisometric, closed, orientable, hyperbolic 3-manifolds. Hint: See Exercise 7.6.5 and Theorem 11.2.1.

Solution: Let Γ be the group generated by the I0(H3)-side-pairing Φ in Example 3. Then Γ is discrete and acts freely on H3, and the Seifert-Weber dodecahedral space M is isometric to H3/Γ by Theorem 11.2.1. The group Γ is nontrivial, since M is compact. Hence, there is a g /= 1 in Γ. By Exercise 7.6.5, there is a normal subgroup Γ2 of Γ of finite index such that g is not in Γ2. Now M2 = H3/Γ2 is a closed orientable hyperbolic 3-manifold with Vol(M2) = [Γ : Γ2]Vol(M ) by Theorem 6.7.3. By repeating this process, we can construct an infinite sequence M = M1, M2, . . . of closed orientable hyperbolic 3-manifolds such that Vol(Mi) < Vol(Mi+1) for each i. Hence, the manifolds M1, M2, . . . are nonisomorphic by Theorem 8.2.2.

235

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

10.2

Complete Gluing of 3-Manifolds

Exercise 10.2.1 Prove that the similarity type of the link of a cusp point L[v] does not depend on the choice of the horospheres {Σu}.

Solution: Let v be an ideal vertex of a polyhedron PY. Suppose Σ′Y is another horosphere based at v such that Σ′Y meets just the sides of PY incident with v.

Let L′(v) = PY ∩ Σ′Y and let L′[v] be the space obtained by gluing together the polygons {L′(u) : u ∈ [v]} as before. Let fu : Σu → Σ′u be the radial projection.

Define f[Y] : L[v] → L′[v] so that the following diagram commutes fu

L(u) —→

L′(u)

πu ↓

↓ πu′ f[v]

L[v]

—→

L′[v]

for each u in [v]. Then f[Y] is a similarity equivalence.

Exercise 10.2.2 Fill in the details of the proof of Theorem 10.2.3.

Solution: Let Σ′Y be a horosphere based at v contained in B(v). Then ι maps Σ′Y/ΓY injectively into M . Hence ι : B(v)/ΓY → M is an injection. As ι is compatible with the gluing of the polyhedraP , we have that ι is a local isometry.

Exercise 10.2.3 Prove that the horoball B(v) in Theorem 10.2.3 can be replaced by a smaller concentric horoball so that ι maps the cusp B(v)/ΓY isometrically onto its image in M .

Solution: Let b = diam(∂B(v)/ΓY), let C(v) be a small concentric open horoball, let c = diam(∂C(v)/ΓY), and let d be the distance from ∂C(v) to ∂B(v). Then c = be−d by Lemma 1 of §9.8, and so c ≤ b. Choose C(v) so that d ≥ b. Then the same argument as in the solution of Exercise 9.8.2 shows that ι maps C(v)/ΓY isometrically onto its image in M .

Exercise 10.2.4 Prove that a cusp B(v)/ΓY has finite volume.

Solution: Let P be a convex fundamental polygon for ΓY in ∂B(v). Then P is compact by Theorem 6.6.9. We pass to the upper half-space model U 3, and we may assume that v = ∞ and B(v) = {x ∈ U 3 : x3 > 1}. Then we have Vol(B(v)/ΓY) = Vol(P × [1, ∞)) ) ∫ ∞ (∫ dx3 = dx1 dx2 x33 1 ν(P ) ∞

= Area(P )

1 —1 2 x23 1

236

=

1

2

Area(P ).

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 10.2.5 Prove that the hypothesis of finite volume can be dropped from Theorem 10.2.4. Hint: See Theorem 8.5.10.

Solution: If L[v] is incomplete for some cusp point [v] of M , then the same argument as in the proof of Theorem 10.2.4 shows that M is incomplete.

Conversely, suppose that L[v] is complete for each cusp point [v] of M .

Then we can remove disjoint open horoball neighborhoods of each ideal vertex to obtain a 3-manifold-with-boundary M0 in M . For each t > 0, let Mt be the 3manifold-with-boundary obtained by removing smaller horoball neighborhoods bounded by horospheres at a distance t from the original ones. Then M = ∪t≥0Mt with Ms c Mt if s < t. By the same argument as in the proof of Theorem 9.8.5, we have N (Mt, 1) c Mt+1. Let {ui} be a Cauchy sequence in M . Then there is an integer k such that d(ui, uj) < 1 for all i, j ≥ k. As M = ∪t≥0Mt, there is a t ≥ 0 such that {u1, . . . , uk} c Mt. Then Mt+1 contains the sequence {ui}. Thus, it suffices to show that Mt is complete for each t.

As P is a finite family of finite-sided polyhedra, there is an ϵ > 0 such that for each x in a polyhedron in P outside of the horoball neighborhoods used to form Mt the quotient map π : ∪{P : P ∈ P} → M extends to an isometry of C(x, ϵ) onto C(π(x), ϵ). Then Mt is complete by Theorem 8.5.1. Therefore M is complete.

Exercise 10.2.6 State and prove the 3-dimensional version of Theorem 9.8.7.

Solution: Let Φ be a proper I(H3)-side-pairing for a finite-sided convex polyhedron P in H3 of finite volume such that links{ L(u) }for the ideal vertices of P can be chosen so that Φ restricts to a side-pairing for { L(u)} . Then the group Γ generated by Φ is discrete and torsion-free, P is an exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron for Γ, and the inclusion map of P into H3 induces an isometry from the hyperbolic 3-manifold M , obtained by gluing together the sides of P by Φ, to the space-form H3/Γ. For a proof, see the proof of Theorem 11.2.1.

10.3

Finite Volume Hyperbolic 3-Manifolds

Exercise 10.3.1 Determine the class in M(T 2) of the link of the cusp point of the figure-eight knot complement.

Solution: A fundamental polygon for the link of the cusp point of the figureeight knot √ complement is the parallelogram spanned by the vectors 4e1 and 1

3

— 2 e1 + √2 e2. This parallelogram is similar to the one spanned by e1 and — 18 e1 + 83 e2. By Exercise 9.5.1, the class of the link in f (T 2) corresponds to √ √ (— 1 + 3 i)/ 1 = —2 + 2 3 i in U 2. Now we have 8

8

16

√ 1 0 (—2 + 2 3 i) · 2 1

√ √ = —2 + 2 3 i + 2 = 2 3 i.

√ √ Thus, the class of the link in M(T 2) corresponds to 2 3 i in Δ(i, 21 + 23 i, ∞).

237

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 10.3.2 Determine the classes in M (T 2) of the links of the cusp points of the Whitehead link complement.

Solution: The fundamental polygon for the link of the cusp point w of the Whitehead link complement in Figure 10.3.13 is a 1 × 2 rectangle. Hence, the class of the link of the cusp point w in M(T 2) corresponds to 2 i in Δ(i, 1 + √

2

2 i, ∞) by Exercise 9.5.1. The fundamental polygon for the link of the cusp point v in Figure 10.3.13 is the parallelogram spanned by 4e1 and e1+e2, which is similar to the parallelogram spanned by e12 and 1 e1 + 1 e2. By Exercise 9.5.1, the 4 4 1 1 1 class of the link of the cusp point v in f (T ) corresponds to ( 4 + 4 i)/ 8 = 2 + 2 i in U 2. Now we have 3

(—2 + 2 i) ·

1 0 —2 1

= 2 + 2 i — 2 = 2 i.

Thus, the class of the link of the cusp point v in M(T 2) corresponds to 2 i in 1

Δ(i, 2 +

√ 3 2 i, ∞).

Exercise 10.3.3 Draw a picture of each of the 2-cells of the complex K in Figure 10.3.19.

Solution: The 2-cell corresponding to the region A has boundary the arc labeled a, followed by the arc bounding A on the left, followed by the arc labeled c, followed by the arc bounding A on the bottom, followed by the arc labeled b, followed by the arc bounding A on the right.

The 2-cell corresponding to the region B has boundary the arc labeled b, followed by the arc bounding B on the left, followed by the arc labeled a, followed by the arc bounding B on the top, followed by the arc labeled d, followed by the arc bounding B on the right.

The 2-cell corresponding to the region C has boundary the arc labeled c, followed by the arc bounding C on top, followed by the arc labeled b, followed by the arc bounding C on the right, followed by the arc labeled e, followed by the arc bounding C on the left.

The 2-cell corresponding to the region D has boundary the arc labeled f , followed by the arc bounding D on top, followed by the arc labeled a, followed by the arc bounding D on the right, followed by the arc labeled c, followed by the arc bounding D on the left.

The 2-cell corresponding to the region E has boundary the arc labeled f , followed by the arc bounding E on the left, followed by the arc labeled a, followed by the arc bounding E on the right, followed by the arc labeled d, followed by the arc bounding E on top.

The 2-cell corresponding to the region F has boundary the arc labeled e, followed by the arc bounding F on the right, followed by the arc labeled d, followed by the arc bounding F on top, followed by the arc labeled b, followed by the arc bounding F on the left.

The 2-cell corresponding to the region G has boundary the arc labeled e, followed by the arc bounding G on the right, followed by the arc labeled c, 238

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

followed by the arc bounding G on top, followed by the arc labeled f , followed by the arc bounding G on the left.

The 2-cell corresponding to the region H has boundary the arc labeled e, followed by the arc bounding H on the left, followed by the arc labeled d, followed by the arc bounding H on bottom, followed by the arc labeled f , followed by the arc bounding H on the right.

Exercise 10.3.4 Explain how the gluing pattern in Figure 10.3.20 is derived from the splitting of the complex in Figure 10.3.19.

Solution: The 2-cells corresponding to the regions A, B, C, D have a half-twist near the arcs a, b, c, d, e, f . The top diagram in Figure 10.3.20 is obtained by viewing Figure 10.3.19 from the front side after untwisting the half-twists and the bottom diagram in Figure 10.3.20 is obtained by viewing Figure 10.3.19 from the back side after untwisting the half-twists.

Exercise 10.3.5 Prove that the side-pairing of two regular ideal octahedrons described in Figure 10.3.20 induces a complete hyperbolic structure on the complement of the Borromean rings in Ê 3 .

Solution: Let P and P ′ be disjoint regular ideal octahedrons. Choose a set of disjoint links of the ideal vertices of P and P ′ that are invariant under the group of symmetries of P and P ′ and under an isometry of P∪ P ′ that transposes P and P ′. The gluing pattern in Figure 10.3.20 determines a proper side-pairing of {P, P ′ }with each side-pairing map an isometry from P to P ′ or P ′ to P followed by a reflection in a side. Hence, the side-pairing of{ P, P }′ restricts to a side-pairing of the chosen links of the ideal vertices. Therefore, the hyperbolic 3-manifold M obtained by gluing together P and P ′ by the pattern in Figure 10.3.20 is complete by Theorems 10.2.2 and 10.2.4.

Exercise 10.3.6 Construct a complete hyperbolic manifold M by gluing together the sides of a regular ideal tetrahedron. The manifold M is called the Gieseking manifold.

Solution: Label the vertices of a regular ideal tetrahedron T by 1,2,3,4. Glue side A = 123 to side A′ = 324 and side B = 134 to side B′ = 142. The sidepairing maps are a rotation symmetry of T followed by a reflection in a side of T . There is only one cycle of edges and each edge cycle has six points. Hence, the side-pairing is proper.

Choose a set of disjoint links of the ideal vertices of T that are invariant under the group of symmetries of T . The side-pairing of T restricts to a sidepairing of the links of the ideal vertices. Therefore, the hyperbolic 3-manifold M obtained by gluing together the sides of T by the given proper side-pairing is complete by Theorems 10.2.2 and 10.2.4.

Exercise 10.3.7 Show that the link of the cusp point of the Gieseking manifold M is a Klein bottle. Conclude that M is nonorientable. You may use Theorem 11.2.1.

239

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: The link of vertex 1 is an equilateral triangle with oriented edge α on side A running from edge 12 to edge 13 of T , followed by edge β on side B running from edge 13 to edge 14 of T , and followed by edge β′ on side B′ running from edge 14 to edge 12 of T .

The link of vertex 2 is an equilateral triangle with oriented edge γ on side A running from edge 23 to edge 21 of T , followed by edge δ′ on side B′ running from edge 21 to edge 24 of T , and followed by edge γ′ on side A′ running from edge 24 to edge 23 of T .

The link of vertex 3 is an equilateral triangle with oriented edge ϵ on side A running from edge 31 to edge 32 of T , followed by edge α′ on side A′ running from edge 32 to edge 34 of T , and followed by edge ζ on side B running from edge 34 to edge 31 of T .

The link of vertex 4 is an equilateral triangle with oriented edge δ on side B running from edge 41 to edge 43 of T , followed by edge ϵ′ on side A′ running from edge 43 to edge 42 of T , and followed by edge ζ′ on side B′ running from edge 42 to edge 41 of T .

Gluing together the links of the ideal vertices along the pairs of arcs α, α′ and ϵ, ϵ′ and δ, δ′, we obtain a parallelogram with boundary labels in cyclic order β′, ζ′, γ−1, (γ′)−1, ζ−1, β. From the identification pattern of the parallelogram it is clear that the link of the cusp point of the Gieseking manifold M is homeomorphic to P 2#P 2, which is a Klein bottle. By Theorem 10.2.1, some element of the side-pairing Φ is orientation-reversing. In fact, all four elements of Φ are orientation-reversing, and so M is nonorientable by Theorem 11.2.1.

Exercise 10.3.8 Show that the Gieseking manifold double covers the figureeight knot complement.

Solution: Label the vertices of the two tetrahedrons T and T ′ in Figure 10.3.2 by 1,2,3,4 in the same way as for the tetrahedron T ′′ in the solution of Exercise 10.3.6. Here 1 is the top vertex, 2 is the left vertex, 3 is the bottom vertex, and 4 is the right vertex of the tetrahedrons T and T ′ in Figure 10.3.2. Map T to T ′ by the permutation (1423). This map maps a edges to b edges and b edges to a edges and preserves the orientation on edges. Moreover, side A = 123 maps to side D′ = 431, side D = 234 maps to side A′ = 312, side B = 134 maps to side C′ = 412, and side C = 124 maps to side B′ = 432. Thus, this map is consistent with the gluing maps between T and T ′, and so there is an induced map τ on the quotient space.

Now map T to T ′′ by the identity permutation of {1, 2, 3, }4 . This map preserves the orientation on the edges and maps side A of T to side A of T ′′, side B of T to side B of T ′′, side C of T to side B′ of T ′′, and side D of T to side A′ of T ′′. Next, map T ′ to T ′′ by the permutation (1423)−1 = (1324). This map preserves the orientation on the edges and maps side A′ of T ′ to side A′ of T ′′, side B′ of T ′ to side B′ of T ′′, side C′ of T ′ to side B of T ′′, and side D′ of T ′ to side A of T ′′. Hence, the maps from T to T ′′ and T ′ to T ′′ induce a map on quotient spaces which is a two-fold covering projection with covering transformation τ . Thus, the figure-eight knot complement double covers the Gieseking manifold.

240

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 10.3.9 Construct a complete, orientable, hyperbolic manifold M by gluing together two regular ideal tetrahedrons such that M is not homeomorphic to the figure-eight knot complement. The manifold M is called the sister of the figure-eight knot complement. You may use Theorems 11.2.1 and 11.2.2.

Solution: Label the vertices of a regular ideal tetrahedron T by 1,2,3,4 and label the vertices of a regular ideal tetrahedron T ′ disjoint from T by 5,6,7,8.

Glue side A = 123 to side A′ = 657, side B = 134 to side B′ = 587, side C = 124 to side C′ = 865, and side D = 234 to side D′ = 768. Oriented edges labeled a are glued in the following order 12,65,24,78,43,86 and oriented edges labeled b are glued in the following order 13,58,41,75,32,67. Thus, there are two cycles of edges with six edges in each cycle. Thus, the edge cycles have six points. Hence, the side-pairing of {T, T ′ } is proper. The gluing maps are orientation-reversing isometries from T to T ′ or from T ′ to T followed by a reflection in a side of T ′ or T , respectively. Thus, the gluing maps are orientation-preserving.

Choose a set of disjoint links of the ideal vertices of T and T ′ that are invariant under the group of symmetries of T and T ′, respectively, and invariant under an isometry of T ∪ T ′ that transposes T and T ′. Then the side-pairing of {T, T ′ }restricts to a side-pairing of the chosen links of the ideal vertices.

Therefore, the hyperbolic 3-manifold M obtained by gluing together T and T ′ by this proper side-pairing is complete by Theorems 10.2.2 and 10.2.4. Moreover M is orientable by Theorem 11.2.1.

Let P be the convex polyhedron obtained by gluing T to T ′ along the sides A and A′. The side-pairing of {T, T ′} determines a proper side-pairing of P .

By Theorems 8.1.4 and 11.2.2, the fundamental group π1(M ) of M has the presentation (B, C, D; BD−1 C2 D−1 , BC−1BD).

Eliminating D gives the presentation (B, C; B2C−1BC2BC−1B).

Abelianizing the presentation gives (B, C; B5). Therefore H1(M ) ~ = Z5 ⊕ Z. The first homology group of the figure-eight knot group is infinite cyclic, and so the sister M is not homeomorphic to the figure-eight knot complement.

Exercise 10.3.10 Show that the links of the cusp points of the figure-eight knot complement and its sister represent different classes in M(T 2).

Solution: Choose a set of disjoint links of the ideal vertices of T and T ′ as in the solution of Exercise 10.3.9. Label the edges of the links of the ideal vertices of T as in Figure 10.3.3. The side-pairing determines the labelling of the edges of the links of the ideal vertices of T ′. The 8 equilateral √ triangles develop onto a parallelogram spanned by the vectors 2e1 and —e1 + 3 e2. The boundary labels of the parallelogram starting at 0 are ι, ζ, δ, α, ζ−1, ι√−1, α−1, δ−1. This parallelogram is similar to the one spanned by e1 and −1 e1 + 3 e2. By Exercise 2

241

2

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

9.5.1, the class of the link of the cusp point in f (T 2) corresponds to −1 + 2

in U 2. Now we have √ —1 3 ( + i) · 2 2

1 0

=

1 1

—1 2

√ +

3

2

i+1=

1 2

√ +

3

2

√

3

2

i

i.

2 Thus, the √ class of the√ link of the cusp point of the sister in M (T ) corresponds 3 3 1 1 to + i in Δ(i, + i, ∞) whereas the class of the cusp point of the figure2 2 2 2 √ √ eight knot complement corresponds to 2 3 i in Δ(i, 12 + 23 i, ∞) by Exercise 10.3.1.

10.4

Hyperbolic Volume

Exercise 10.4.1 Derive the following formulas in the proof of Theorem 10.4.2 √ tan α tanh a = tan( π2 — β) tanh b = tan γ tanh c = —D/(cos α cos γ).

Solution: From the proof of Theorem 10.4.2, we have cosh2 a = Hence, we have sech2a =

sin2 α cos2 γ sin2 α — cos2 β sin2 α — cos2 β sin2 α cos2 γ

.

.

Therefore sin2 α — cos2 β sin2 α cos2 γ 2 sin α cos2 γ — sin2 α + cos2 β

tanh2 a = 1 — =

sin2 α cos2 γ 2 2 — sin α sin γ + cos β 2

=

sin2 α cos2 γ

Hence, we have

√ tanh a =

Therefore

—D

. sin α cos γ √ —D . tan α tanh a = cos α cos γ √

Likewise tan γ tanh c =

242

—D . cos α cos γ

.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

From the proof of Theorem 10.4.2, we have cosh2 b =

cos2 α cos2 β cos2 γ (sin2 α — cos2 β)(sin2 γ — cos2 β)

.

Hence, we have sech2b =

(sin2 α — cos2 β)(sin2 γ — cos2 β) cos2 α cos2 β cos2 γ

.

Therefore (sin2 α — cos2 β)(sin2 γ — cos2 β) cos2 α cos2 β cos2 γ 2 2 cos α cos β cos2 γ — (sin2 α — cos2 β)(sin2 γ — cos2 β)

tanh2 b = 1 — =

cos2 α cos2 β cos2 γ c α c β c γ — s α s2γ + c2β s2γ + s2α c2β — c4β 2

=

2

2

2

cos2 α cos2 β cos2 γ c α c β c γ — s2α s2γ + c2β — c2β c2γ + s2α c2β — c2β + s2β c2β 2

=

2

2

cos2 α cos2 β cos2 γ c β c γ — s α c β c γ — s2α s2γ — c2β c2γ + s2α c2β + s2β c2β cos2 α cos2 β cos2 γ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 —s α c β + s α c β s γ — s α s γ + s α c β + s β c β cos2 α cos2 β cos2 γ 2 2 2 2 2 — sin α sin β sin γ + sin β cos β 2

= = =

2

2

2

2

cos2 α cos2 β cos2 γ 2

—D sin β . cos2 α cos2 β cos2 γ

=

Hence, we have

√

tanh2 b =

—D sin β . cos α cos β cos γ

Now we have sin( π −β)

sin π cos β−sin β cos π

β tan(2π — β) =cos( 2π −β) = cos 2π cos β+sin π sin β2 = cos sin β .

2

Therefore

2

2

√

D . tan( π2 — β) tanh b = cos α—cos γ

Thus, we have tan α tanh a = tan( π2 — β) tanh b = tan γ tanh c.

243

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 10.4.2 Derive the formula 1 sin(α + δ) a = log 2 sin(α — δ) from the formula tan α tanh a = tan δ.

Solution: From the formula tan α tanh a = tan δ, we have tanh a = tan δ/ tan α.

Hence, we have a = tanh−1(tan δ/ tan α) 1 1 + (tan δ/ tan α) = log 2 1 — (tan δ/ tan α) =

1 tan α + tan δ log 2 tan α — tan δ

=

1 (sin α/ cos α) + (sin δ/ cos δ) log 2 (sin α/ cos α) — (sin δ/ cos δ)

= =

1 2

log

sin α cos δ + sin δ cos α) sin α cos δ — sin δ cos α

1 sin(α + δ) log .

2 sin(α — δ)

Exercise 10.4.3 Deduce from Formula 10.4.8 that the function L(θ) has the Fourier series expansion 1 Σ sin(2nθ) . n2 2 n=1 ∞

L(θ) =

This series converges slowly. A faster converging series for L(θ) is given in Exercise 10.4.4.

Solution: From Formula 10.4.8, we have 2iL(θ) = Li2(e2i8) — Li2(1) + πθ — θ2.

Hence, we have i L(θ) = — Li 2(e2i8) — Li 2(1) + πθ — θ2 .

2

244

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Now we have

∞

Li2(e2i8) = =

2in8

Σe n=1 ∞ Σ n=1 ∞

=

n2 cos(2nθ) + i sin(2nθ) n2 ∞

Σ cos(2nθ) Σ sin(2nθ) +i . n2 n2 n=1

n=1

As L(θ) is real valued, we must have ∞

1 Σ sin(2nθ) L(θ) = . n2 2 n=1 Exercise 10.4.4 Prove that the function L(θ) has the series expansion ∞

L(θ) = θ — θ log(2θ) +

Σ |B2n| (2θ)

2n+1

for 0 < θ < π,

4n (2n + 1)!

n=1

where B2 = 1/6, B4 = —1/30, B6 = 1/42, . . . are Bernoulli numbers, by twice integrating the usual Laurent series expansion for the cotangent of θ.

Solution:

We start with the formula θ cot θ =

∞ Σ

n

(—1) B 2n

n=0

and so cot θ =

∞ Σ

n

(—1) B 2n

n=0

(2θ)2n (2n)!

,

22n 2n−1 θ .

(2n)!

By integrating both sides of the above equation, we obtain ∞

2n 2n

Σ B2n 2 θ log(sin θ) = log θ + (—1)n (2n)! 2n n=1

+ C.

Now C = 0, since lim8→0 log(sin θ/θ) = 0. Adding log 2 to both sides yields ∞ Σ

B2n 22nθ2n (—1)n .

(2n)! 2n n=1

log(2 sin θ) = log(2θ) + Now we have L(θ) = —

∫ 8 log(2 sin θ) dθ 0

=

∞

θ — θ log(2θ) —

Σ n=1

245

2n 2n+1

(— 1)n

B2n 2 θ .

(2n)! 2n(2n + 1)

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Hence, we have L(θ) = θ — θ log(2θ) +

∞ Σ |B2n| (2θ)2n+1 n=1

4n (2n + 1)!

for 0 < θ < π,

where B2 = 1/6, B4 = —1/30, B6 = 1/42, . . . are Bernoulli numbers.

Exercise 10.4.5 Let L be the positive 3rd axis in U 3 and let r be a positive real number. Set C(L, r) = {x ∈ U 3 : dU (x, L) = r}.

Prove that C(L, r) is a cone with axis L and cone point 0, and that the angle φ between L and C(L, r) satisfies the equation sec φ = cosh r.

Solution: By Exercise 4.6.3, we have that C(L, r) = {x ∈ U 3 : cosh r = |x|/x3} which is a cone with axis L and cone point 0. Let x be a nonzero point on C(L, r). Consider the right triangle Δ(0, x3e3, x). The angle of Δ at 0 is φ, and so sec φ = |x|/x3 = cosh r.

Exercise 10.4.6 Let K and L be two nonintersecting and nonasymptotic hyperbolic lines of U 3. Prove that there is a unique hyperbolic line M of U 3 perpendicular to both K and L. Solution: By applying an isometry of U 3, we may assume that L is the positive 3rd axis in U 3. Then K is a semicircle orthogonal to E2 and disjoint from L, since K and L are disjoint and not asymptotic. Let x be a point on K, and let φ be the angle between the Euclidean line segment [0, x] and L. Then cos φ = x3/|x|. Hence φ = arccos(x3/|x|). Now φ goes to π/2 as x3 goes to 0, and so φ achieves its minimum φ0 at a point x0 in K. Let M be the line of U 3 passing through x0 and |x0|e3. Then M is orthogonal to L at |x0 e| 3. Let r0 be such that sec φ0 = cosh r0. Then r0 is the smallest value of r such that K contains a point of C(L, r) by Exercise 10.4.5. Therefore x0 is a nearest point of K to L. The nearest point of L to x0 is |x0|e3 by Exercise 4.6.3. Therefore x0 is the nearest point of K to |x0|e3. Hence M is orthogonal to K at x0 by Exercise 4.6.3.

Now let M ′ be another line that is orthogonal to both K and L. Let x1 be the intersection point of K and M ′. Then |x1|e3 is the intersection point of L and M ′. Let ρ : U 3 → M ′ be the nearest point retraction. Then ρ(x0) = x1 and ρ(|x0|e3) = |x1|e3, since M ′ is orthogonal to K and L. By Exercise 4.6.4, dU (x1, |x1|e3) ≤ dU (x0, |x0|e3).

But dU (x0, |x0|e3) = dist(K, L), and so dU (x1, |x1|e3) = dU (x0, |x0|e3).

Therefore x0 = x1 by Exercise 4.6.4, and so M ′ = M . Thus M is the unique line perpendicular to both K and L. 246

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 10.4.7 Let K, L, M be the perpendicular lines between the opposite edges of an ideal tetrahedron T in B3. Prove that the group Γ of orientationpreserving symmetries of T contains the 180○ rotations about K, L, M . Conclude that K, L, M meet at a common point in T ○ and are pairwise orthogonal and that Γ acts transitively on the set of ideal vertices of T .

Solution: Let κ, λ, µ be the 180○ rotations about K, L, M , respectively. Then κ, λ, µ leave invariant the two edges of T orthogonal to K, L, M , respectively.

Hence κ, λ, µ permute the ideal vertices of T . Thus κ, λ, µ are orientationpreserving symmetries of T . The group Γ of orientation-preserving symmetries of T is finite by Theorem 6.5.13, and so fixes a point b of Bn by Theorem 5.5.1.

As K, L, M are the sets of fixed points of κ, λ, µ, respectively, we conclude that K, L, M meet at the point b.

Now κ, λ, µ each leave invariant the three pairs of opposite edges of T . Hence κ, λ, µ each leave K, L, M invariant by Exercise 10.4.6. Therefore K, L, M are pairwise orthogonal. Now any two ideal vertices of T are transposed by one of κ, λ, µ, and so Γ acts transitively on the ideal vertices of T .

Exercise 10.4.8 Prove that the set of volumes of all the ideal tetrahedra in H3 is the interval (0, 3L(π/3)].

Solution: By Theorem 10.4.10, we have Vol(Tα,2 π −α,2π ) = L(α) + L( π2 — α) + L( π2 ).

Now L(π/2) = 0 by Formula 10.4.9 with θ = 0. As lim L(α) + L( π2 — α) = 0,

α→0

it follows that Vol(Tα, π2−α, π )2 attains arbitrarily small values. Therefore, the set of volumes of all ideal tetrahedra in H3 is the interval (0, 3L(π/3)] by Theorem 10.4.11 and the intermediate value theorem.

Exercise 10.4.9 Prove that a regular ideal hexahedron can be subdivided into five regular ideal tetrahedra. √ Solution: Let l = 1/ 3, and let ( ±l, ± l, l)± be the vertices of a regular ideal hexahedron H in B3. Let T1 be the ideal tetrahedron with vertices equal to (l, l, l) and its three nearest neighbors (—l, l, l), (l, —l, l), (l, l, —l). The link of the vertex (l, l, l) in T1 and in H is an equilateral triangle, and so T1 is regular

by Theorem 10.4.8. Similarly T2, T3, T4 with vertices {(l, —l, —l), (—l, —l, —l), (l, l, —l), (l, —l, l)}, {(—l, l, —l), (l, l, —l), (—l, —l, —l), (—l, l, l)}, {(—l, —l, l), (l, —l, l), (—l, l, l), (—l, —l, —l)},

247

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

respectively, are regular. Slicing T1, . . . , T4 away from H leaves the tetrahedron T5 with vertices {(l, —l, l), (l, l, —l), (—l, l, l), (—l, —l, —l)}, The vertices of T5 are the vertices of a Euclidean regular tetrahedron, and so T5 is regular by Theorem 6.5.19. Thus H can be subdivided into five regular ideal tetrahedra.

Exercise 10.4.10 Find the volume of a regular ideal dodecahedron.

Solution: Let P be a regular ideal dodecahedron. The link of a vertex of P is an equilateral triangle, and so the dihedral angle of P is π/3. Now P is subdivided by barycentric subdivision into 120 copies of an orthotetrahedron T with angles π/5, π/3, π/6. See Figure 7.2.6. Hence Vol(P ) = 120Vol(T ). By Theorem 10.4.6, with δ = π/6 and γ = π/5, we have Vol(T ) =

1 L( 11π ) — L(30π ) + 2L( π3) .

30 4

Thus, we have Vol(P )

=

11π 30 L(30 ) — L(30π ) + 2L(3π )

= 20.580199 . . . .

10.5

Hyperbolic Dehn Surgery

Exercise 10.5.1 Prove that every Euclidean triangle in C is directly similar to a triangle whose vertices are 0, 1, z, where z satisfies the inequalities Im(z) > 0, |z| ≤ 1, and |z — 1| ≤ 1.

Solution: Let T be a Euclidean triangle in C. Clearly T is directly congruent to a triangle T ′ with vertices 0, k, w with k in R and k > 0 and Im(w) > 0 and [0, k] a longest side of T ′. By a change of scale, T ′ is similar to a triangle T ′′ with vertices 0, 1, z and Im(z) > 0 and [0, 1] a longest side of T ′′. Then |[0, z]|, |[1, z]| ≤ |[0, 1]|, and so |z|, |z — 1| ≤ 1.

Exercise 10.5.2 Prove that C∗ is a geometric space with I(C∗) = C∗ u (⟨ι⟩ × ⟨κ⟩), where C∗ acts on itself by multiplication and ι(z) = z−1 and κ(z) = z.

Solution: The exponential map exp : C → C∗ induces an isomorphism exp : C/2πiZ → C∗. We define a metric on C∗ by pushing the Euclidean metric on

248

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

C/2πiZ over to C∗ via exp. If z, w are in C∗, then d(z, w)

= | log(z) — log(w)| = | log(z/w)| = | log |z/w| + i arg(z/w)| √ = (log |z/w|)2 + (arg(z/w))2

where | arg(z/w) | ≤ π. Then exp is an isometry, and it suffices to show that C/2πiZ is a geometric space.

Now C/2πiZ is geodesically connected and geodesically complete by Theorems 8.5.2, 8.5.5, and 8.5.7. Let ϵ : C→ C/2πiZ be the quotient map. By the proof of Theorem 8.1.3, we have that ϵ maps B(0, π/2) isometrically onto B(ϵ(0), π/2) and for each point u of S1 c C, the map λ : R→ C/2πiZ, defined by λ(t) = ϵ(tu), is a geodesic line such that λ restricts to a geodesic arc on [—π/2, π/2].

If a is in C, let τa : C → C be the isometry defined by τa(z) = z + a. Then τa maps cosets of 2πiZ to cosets of 2πiZ, and so τa induces an isometry τ a : C/2πiZ → C/2πiZ defined by τa(z + 2πiZ) = z + a + 2πiZ. If z, w are in C, then τw−z(z + 2πiZ) = w + 2πiZ, and so C/2πiZ is homogeneous. Thus C/2πiZ is a geometric space.

Let φ : C/2πiZ →C/2πiZ be an orientation-preserving isometry. By composing φ with τ a for some a in C, we may assume that φ(2πiZ) = 2πiZ. The map ϵ : C→C/2πiZ is a covering projection by Theorem 8.1.3. By the lifting theorem for covering projections, φ lifts to an orientation-preserving isometry φ˜ : C→ C such that φ˜(0) = 0. Then φ˜ is a rotation such that φ̃(2πiZ) = 2πiZ. Therefore φ˜ =± I. It follows that C∗ is a subgroup of I0(C∗) of index two and I0(C∗) = C∗ u ι⟨ ⟩where ι(z) = z−1.

If z, w are in C∗, then √ d(z, w) = (log| z/w| )2 + (arg(z/w))2 q = (log |z/w|)2 + (arg(z/w))2 √ = (log| z/w| )2 + (— arg(z/w))2 √ = (log |z/w|)2 + (arg(z/w))2 = d(z, w).

Therefore κ(z) = z is an orientation-reversing isometry C of∗ . As (1/z) = 1/z, we have that κι = ικ. As (kz) = kz, we have that κkκ = κ(k). Therefore, we have I(C∗) = C∗ u (⟨ι⟩ × ⟨κ⟩).

249

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 10.5.3 Let M(p,q) be a hyperbolic 3-manifold obtained by hyperbolic (p, q)-Dehn surgery on the figure-eight knot and let M∞ be the complete, hyperbolic, figure-eight knot complement. Prove that Vol(M(p,q)) < Vol(M∞), lim (p,q)→∞

Vol(M(p,q)) = Vol(M∞).

′).

Solution: By the gluing construction, we have Vol(M(p,q)) = Vol(T )+Vol(T √ 3 1 ′ Let w be the edge invariant for T . Then d(w) = (p, q) and d( + i) = ∞.

√

2

2

Hence w /= 21 + 23 i. Therefore T ′ is not regular. Now Vol(M∞) = 2Vol(T0) where T0 is a regular ideal tetrahedron. Hence Vol(M(p,q)) < Vol(M∞) by Theorem 10.4.11.

Let {(pi, q i )} i∞= 1 be an infinite sequence of relatively prime integers such that limi→∞(pi, qi) = ∞. Let Ti and Ti′ be the ideal tetrahedra that glue together to form√M(pi,qi), and let wi be the edge invariant for Ti′. We claim that limi→∞ wi = 1 + 3 i. On the contrary, suppose {wi}∞ does not converge to √

2

i=1

√

2

+ 3 i. Then there exists r > 0, with B( 1 + 3 i, r) c W , and a subsequence 2 2 2 2 √ {wi }∞ , with ij < ij+1 for each j, such that wi /∈ B(1 + 3 i, r) for all j.

1

j

j=1

As Ŵ — B( 1 + 2

√3 2

j

2

2

i, r) is compact, we may assume, by passing to a sub√

∞ converges to a point w in Ŵ — B( 1 + 3 sequence, that {wji }i=1 0 2 2 i, r). As dˆ: Ŵ → Ê 2 is continuous, limj→∞dˆ(wi ) = dˆ(w0) /= ∞. But limj→∞(pi , qi ) = j

1

√3

j

j

∞, which is a contradiction. Thus limi→∞ wi = 2 + 2 i. Hence lim Vol M(pi,qi) = Vol(M∞),

i→∞

since Vol(T ) + Vol(T ′) is a continuous function of the edge invariant w of T ′ by Theorems 10.4.3, 10.4.10, 10.5.1, 10.5.4, and Lemma 2 of §10.5.

Exercise 10.5.4 Prove that infinitely many nonisometric, closed, orientable, hyperbolic 3-manifolds can be obtained from the figure-eight knot by hyperbolic Dehn surgery.

Solution: By Exercise 10.5.3, there is an infinite sequence of pairs of coprime integers {(pi, q i )} i∞= 1 such that for each i, we have Vol M(pi,qi) < Vol M(pi+1,qi+1) .

Hence, the hyperbolic manifolds{M(pi,qi) }i∞= 1 are pairwise nonisometric by Theorems 8.2.2 and 8.5.9.

Exercise 10.5.5 Prove that the Seifert-Weber dodecahedral space cannot be obtained from the figure-eight knot by hyperbolic Dehn surgery.

Solution: Let M(p,q) be the hyperbolic 3-manifold obtained by hyperbolic (p, q)-Dehn surgery on the Figure-eight knot complement. By Exercise 10.5.3, 250

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

we have Vol(M(p,q)) < Vol(M∞). By Theorem 10.4.10, and Formula 10.4.10, we have Vol(M∞) = 6L(π/3) = 2.02988 . . . .

By Example 1 of §10.4, the volume of the Seifert-Weber dodecahedral space M is 11.1906 . . . . Hence, the volume of M is too large to be obtained from M∞ by hyperbolic Dehn surgery.

For an alternate solution, observe that π1(M(p,q)) has a two-generator, tworelator presentation by Van Kampen’s theorem, since π1(M∞) has a two-generator, one-relator presentation. Therefore H1(Mp,q) is generated by two elements.

Hence M is not homeomorphic to M(p,q), since H1(M ) ~ = Z5 ⊕ Z5 ⊕ Z5 by Exercise 10.1.4.

251

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 11

Hyperbolic n-Manifolds 11.1

Gluing n-Manifolds

Exercise 11.1.1 Prove that every facet of an n-dimensional, abstract, convex polyhedron is an (n — 1)-dimensional convex polyhedron.

Solution: Let F be a facet of an abstract n-dimensional convex polyhedron P . Then F is a closed (n — 1)-dimensional convex subset of ∂P . Let x be a point in ∂F . We first show that x is in another facet of P . Let S be the side of P containing F . Assume first that x is in ∂S. Then x is in ∂T for some other side T of P by Theorem 6.3.3. Now T is a union of facets, since the union of the facets of P is ∂P . Therefore x is in another facet F ′ of P . Hence, we may assume that x is in S○. On the contrary, suppose x is not contained in any other facet of P . Since the collection of facets of P is locally finite, there is an r > 0 such that B(x, r) meets only finitely many facets of P . As F is the only facet of P containing x, we can shrink B(x, r) to avoid all the other facets of P , since the facets of P are closed. Therefore, we may assume that B(x,∩r) ∂Pc F . As x is in S○, we may shrink r so that B(x, r)∩ ⟨ S⟩ c S○. Then B(x, r) ∩ ⟨S ⟩ c F .

As ⟨F ⟩= S⟨, we ⟩ have that x is in F ○, which is a contradiction. Therefore x is in another facet of P .

Now suppose B(x, r) meets just the facets F0, . . . , Fm of P , with F = F0.

By shrinking r, we may assume that x is in Fi for each i. Let Si be the side of P containing the convex set F ∩ Fi for each i = 1, . . . , m. Then B(x, r) meets just the sides S1, . . . , Sm of F , since each point of ∂F is in another facet of P .

Thus, the set of sides of P is locally finite. Therefore F is a convex polyhedron.

Exercise 11.1.2 Let P be a convex fundamental polyhedron for a discrete group Γ of isometries of X and let F be the collection of (n — 1)-dimensional convex subsets of ∂P of the form P ∩ gP for some g in Γ. Prove that P together with F is an abstract convex polyhedron in X. Solution: (1) Each facet P ∩gP is a closed (n — 1)-dimensional convex subset of ∂P .

252

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

(2) Let P ∩ gP be a facet and let x be a point of (P ∩ gP )○. Then there is an r > 0 such that B(x, r) ∩ ⟨P ∩ gP ⟩ c P ∩ gP. Let S be the side of P containing P ∩ gP . Then ⟨S⟩ = ⟨P ∩ gP ⟩. Hence B(x, r) ∩ ⟨S⟩ c P ∩ gP c S. Therefore x is in S○.

Now B(x, r) meets only finitely many sides of P , and so we may shrink r so that B(x, r) meets no other side of P . Let H be the open half-space bounded by ⟨S⟩ that contains P . Then B(x, r) ∩ H c P ○. Let T be the side of gP containing P ∩ gP . Then ⟨T ⟩ = ⟨S⟩. Hence B(x, r) ∩ ⟨T ⟩ c P ∩ gP c T. Therefore x is in T ○. We may shrink r so that B(x, r) meets no other side of gP . Let H′ be the open half-space bounded by⟨ T⟩ that contains gP . Then B(x, r) ∩H′ cgP ○. Suppose x is in a facet P ∩ hP . Then B(x, r) contains a point of hP ○ that does not lie in ⟨ ⟩S . As B(x, r)— ⟨S ⟩ cP ○ ∩gP ○, we must have g = h. Thus, two facets meet only along their boundaries.

(3) Let S be a side of P and let x be a point in S○. Then there is an r > 0 such that B(x, r)∩⟨S⟩ c S. By Lemma 1 of §6.7, there is a g1 /= 1 in Γ such that x is in P ∩ g1P . Now B(x, r) meets only finitely many members of {gP : g ∈ Γ}, say P, g1P, . . . , gmP . By shrinking r, we may assume that x is in giP for each i. Then we have m

B(x, r) ∩ ⟨S⟩ c ∪ P ∩ giP i= 1

by Lemma 1 of §6.7. As dim B(x, r)∩⟨S⟩ = n—1, we must have dim(P ∩giP ) = n — 1 for some i. Thus x is in a facet P ∩ giP . Therefore ∪{S○ : S is a side of P } c ∪{P ∩ gP : dim(P ∩ gP ) = n — 1}.

The families {S○ : S is a side of P } and {P ∩ gP : g ∈ Γ} are locally finite.

Hence, the closure of ∪{S○ : S is a side of P } is ∪{S : S is a side of P } and the set ∪{P ∩ gP : dim(P ∩ gP ) = n — 1} is closed. Hence ∂P = ∪{P ∩ gP : dim(P ∩ gP ) = n — 1}.

Thus P together with the set of facets { P ∩ gP : dim(P∩ gP ) = n— 1} is an abstract convex polyhedron in X. Exercise 11.1.3 For each facet F of P in Exercise 11.1.2, let gF be the element of Γ such that P ∩gF (P ) = F . Prove that Φ = {gF : F ∈ F} is a Γ-facet-pairing for P .

Solution: (1) The function gF : X → X is an isometry for each facet F of P .

(2) We have that gF in Γ for each facet F of P .

(3) Let F ′ = P ∩ g−F1(P ) for each facet F of P . Then gF (F ′) = F , and so dim F ′ = n — 1. Hence F ′ is a facet of P for each facet F of P .

(4) As P ∩ gF−1(P ) = F ′, we have that gF ' = g−F1 for each facet F of P .

(5) The polyhedrons P and gF P are situated so that P ∩ gF P = F for each facet F of P . Thus {gF : F ∈ F} is a Γ-facet pairing for P .

253

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.1.4 Prove Theorem 11.1.1.

Solution: The proof of Theorem 11.1.1 is by induction on n and follows the same outline as the proof of Theorem 10.1.2. The only difference is that “side” is replaced by “facet” throughout.

Exercise 11.1.5 Let Γ be the group generated by the opposite side-pairing of the hyperbolic 120-cell P 4. Prove that Γ is a torsion-free subgroup of Γ4 of index 14400. You may use Theorem 11.2.1.

Solution: Let Φ = g{S be } the opposite side-pairing of the regular hyperbolic 120-cell P 4. The Davis 120-cell space M is compact, and so M is complete.

Therefore, the group Γ generated by Φ is discrete, acts freely, and P is a fundamental polyhedron for Γ by Theorem 11.2.1. Hence Γ is torsion-free. Now gS = hSfS where fS is the reflection in the perpendicular bisector of the line segment joining the center of S with the center of S′, and hS is the reflection in the hyperplane ⟨ S ⟩. Now fS is in the group of symmetries of P 4 and hS is in the group of symmetries of the tessellation { gR4 : g∈ Γ }. Hence gS is in the group of symmetries Γ4 of{ gP 4 : g ∈ Γ }.

By Theorem 6.7.3, we have [Γ : Γ4] = Vol(H4/Γ)/Vol(H4/Γ4) = Vol(P 4)/Vol(∆4) = 14, 440, since P 4 is subdivided by barycentric subdivision into 14,400 copies of ∆4.

Exercise 11.1.6 Let P be a finite-sided convex polyhedron in En. Prove that for each r > 0, the set P — N (∂P, r) is either empty or a finite-sided convex polyhedron.

Solution: This is clear if ∂P = ∅, so assume that ∂P /= ∅. For each side S of P , let HS be the closed half-space of ⟨ ⟩P bounded by⟨ ⟩S such that Pc HS.

By Theorem 6.3.2, we have P = ∩{HS : S is a side of P }.

For each side S of P , let KS = HS — N (⟨S⟩, r). Then we have ∩{KS : S is a side of P } c P — N (∂P, r).

Let x be a point of P — N (∂P, r). Given a side S of P , let y be the nearest point of ⟨S⟩ to x. If y is in S, then d(x, y) ≥ r, and so x is in KS. Suppose y is not in S. Then y is not in P , since P ∩ ⟨S⟩ = S. Hence, the line segment [x, y] meets ∂P , and so d(x, y) > r. Therefore x is in KS. Hence ∩{KS : S is a side of P } = P — N (∂P, r).

Therefore P —N (∂P, r) is either empty or a finite-sided convex polyhedron by Exercise 6.3.2.

254

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.1.7 Let P and Q be disjoint, finite-sided, convex, polyhedrons in En. Prove that dist(P, Q) > 0.

Solution: The proof is by induction on m = dim P + dim Q. This is clear if m = 0. Assume m > 0 and the result is true for all nonnegative integers less than m. First assume that ∂P = ∅ = ∂Q. Then P is a p-plane and Q is a q-plane for some nonnegative integers p and q. We may assume that 0 is in P . Let P ⊥ be the orthogonal complement of P , and let π : En→ P ⊥ be the orthogonal projection. Then π maps P to 0 and Q to an k-plane of P ⊥ for some nonnegative integer k. Moreover 0 is not in π(Q), since π−1(0) = P and the planes P and Q are disjoint. Now we have dist(P, Q) ≥ dist(π(P ), π(Q)) = dist(0, π(Q)) > 0.

Next, assume ∂Q /= ∅. If P⟨ and Q⟨ are ⟩ ⟩ disjoint, then by the previous case, we have dist(P, Q) ≥ dist(⟨P ⟩, ⟨Q⟩) > 0.

Hence, we may assume that⟨ P⟩ and⟨ Q⟩ meet. Assume first that P c ⟨ Q⟩ . If x is in P and y is in Q, then the line segment [x, y] contains a point of ∂Q. Hence, we have dist(P, Q) = min{dist(P, T ) : T is a side of Q}, which is positive by the induction hypothesis. Thus, we may assume P /c ⟨Q⟩.

Let V = ⟨P ⟩ ∩ ⟨Q⟩. We may assume that 0 is in V .

Assume first that ∂P = ∅. Then P = ⟨P ⟩. Now dist(V, Q) > 0 by the last case. Let r = dist(V, Q). Then Q c ⟨Q⟩ — N (V, r). We claim that dist(P, ⟨Q⟩ — N (V, r)) > 0.

Assume first that V = {0} . Let ρ : En →C(0, r) be the radial retraction towards 0. Then ρ does not increase distances, since |if| x > r and| |y ≤ r and ρ(x) =/ y, then the angle of the triangle Δ (x, ρ(x), y) at ρ(x) is obtuse, and so x| —y |> ρ(x) y by | — | the law of cosines.

Observe that ρ(P ) is a diametrical p-disk of C(0, r) and ρ( ⟨ Q⟩ — B(0, r)) is a great (q—1)-sphere of S(0, r) that is disjoint from ρ(P ), since V ={ 0} . By compactness, we have dist(P, ⟨Q⟩ — B(0, r)) ≥ dist(ρ(P ), ρ(⟨Q⟩ — B(0, r))) > 0.

Now assume dim V > 0. Let π : En → V ⊥ be the orthogonal projection. Then dist(P, ⟨Q⟩ — N (V, r)) ≥ dist(π(P ), π(⟨Q⟩ — N (V, r))) = dist(π(P ), π(⟨Q⟩) — B(0, r)) > 0.

Now we have dist(P, Q) ≥ dist(P, ⟨Q⟩ — N (V, r)) > 0.

Hence, we may assume that ∂P , ∂Q and V = ⟨P ⟩ ∩ ⟨Q⟩ are nonempty and P /c ⟨Q⟩ and Q /c ⟨P ⟩.

255

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

On the contrary, suppose there are infinite sequences {xi} c P and {yi} c Q such that d(xi, yi) →0. We claim there is a δ > 0 such that dist(xi, ∂P ) ≥ δ for each i. On the contrary, suppose there is no such δ. Then by passing to a subsequence and using the fact that P has finitely many sides, there is a side S of P such that dist(xi, S) → 0. Choose x′i in S such that d(xi, x′i) → 0.

Then we have d(x′i, yi) → 0. By the induction hypothesis, dist(S, Q) > 0, which is a contradiction. Hence, there exists δ > 0 such that dist(xi, ∂P ) ≥ δ and dist(yi, ∂Q) ≥ δ for each i.

Now since dist(⟨P ⟩ — N (V, r), ⟨Q⟩) > 0 for each r > 0, we must have dist(xi, V ) → 0. Choose vi in V such that d(xi, vi) → 0. Then for sufficiently large i, we have d(xi, vi) < δ, and so vi is in P . Now d(vi, yi) → 0, and so for sufficiently large i, we have d(vi, yi) < δ, and so vi is in Q, which is a contradiction, since P and Q are disjoint. Therefore dist(P, Q) > 0.

Exercise 11.1.8 Explain why the argument in the proof of Theorem 11.1.2 breaks down in the hyperbolic case.

Solution: The argument in the proof of Theorem 11.1.2 breaks down in the hyperbolic case, since the distance from F — N (∂F, rk/2) to some side of a polyhedron in P containing F may be zero.

11.2

Poincaré’s Theorem

Exercise 11.2.1 Show that Theorem 11.2.2 does not hold for X = S1 but does hold for X = E1 or H1.

Solution: Let P be a geodesic arc in S1 with sides S and T . Let gS be the rotation of S1 that rotates T to S, and let gT = Sg−1. Then Φ ={ gS, gT} is a proper I0(S1)-side-pairing for P such that the spherical manifold M obtained by gluing together the sides of P by Φ is complete. The group Γ generated by Φ is not discrete if gS has infinite order, that is, if θ(S, T ) is an irrational multiple of π. Thus, theorem 11.2.2 does not hold for X = S1.

Now let P be a geodesic arc in X = E1 or H1 with sides S and T . Let gS −1 be the translation of X that translates T to S, and let gT = g S . Then Φ = g { S, gT }is a proper I0(X)-side-pairing for P such that the (X, I0(X))-manifold M obtained by gluing together the sides of P by Φ is complete. The group Γ generated by Φ is discrete and acts freely, P is an exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron for Γ, and (S, T ; ST, TS) is a presentation for Γ under the mapping S '→ gS and T '→ gT . Thus, theorem 11.2.2 holds for X = E1 or H1.

Exercise 11.2.2 Given a proper I(X)-side-pairing for an n-dimensional convex polyhedron P in X, prove that S′ = S if and only if P is a closed hemisphere of Sn and gS is the antipodal map of Sn. Solution: Suppose S′ = S. Then g−S1 = gS. Let x be a point of S○, and let x′ be the point of S such that gS(x′) = x. Then x′ is in S○. If x and x′ were a 256

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

proper pair of points, then gS would fix the midpoint y of the geodesic segment [x, x′], but y is in S○ by Theorem 6.2.3, and so [y] = {y }and ω̂ [y ] = 1/2, which is a contradiction. Therefore x′ =—x for all x in S○. Hence S is a great (n— 1)sphere of Sn by Theorems 6.3.2 and 6.3.16. Therefore P is a closed hemisphere of Sn and gS = —I. Exercise 11.2.3 Show that the exceptional case k > 2 in part (3) of the proof of Theorem 11.2.2 actually occurs.

Solution: Identify S3 with the unit sphere in C2 given by {(z, w) ∈ C2 : |z|2 + |w|2 = 1}.

Let k > 2 be an integer, and let P = {(z, w) ∈ S3 : z = 0 or 0 ≤ arg z ≤ 2π/k}.

Then P is a convex polyhedron in S3 with exactly two sides S T

= {(z, w) ∈ S3 : z = 0 or arg z = 0}, = {(z, w) ∈ S3 : z = 0 or arg z = 2π/k}.

Moreover S ∩ T = {(z, w) ∈ S3 : z = 0} which is a great 1-sphere of S3. Let gT : S3 → S3 be the rotation defined by gT (z, w) =

2πi

2πi

e k z, e k w

and let gS = gT−1. Then Φ = {gS, gT }is a proper I0(S3)-side-pairing for P such that the spherical 3-manifold obtained by gluing the sides of P by Φ is complete.

Thus, the case k > 2 in part (3) of the proof of Theorem 11.2.2 does occur.

Exercise 11.2.4 Use the gluing pattern for the 3-torus M in Example 1 of §10.1 to find a presentation for π1(M ) using Theorem 11.2.2.

Solution: Let P be a cube in E3. Then P has six sides. The opposite-sidepairing Φ of P by translations has three cycles of edges. By Theorems 8.1.4 and 11.2.2, the fundamental group π1(M ) has a presentation with three generators A, B, C and three relators BCB−1C−1, ACA−1C−1, ABA−1B−1.

Exercise 11.2.5 Use the gluing pattern for the Poincar´e dodecahedral space M in Figure 10.1.1 to find a presentation for π1(M ) using Theorem 11.2.2.

Solution: Let P be the regular dodecahedron in Figure 10.1.1. Then P has 12 sides and 30 edges. The side-pairing Φ has 10 cycles of edges. Label the sides and edges of P as in the solution of Exercise 10.1.3. By Theorems 8.1.4 and 11.2.2, the fundamental group π1(M ) has the presentation with 6 generators A, B, C, D, E, F and 10 relators ADF −1, BEF −1, CAF −1, DBF −1, ECF −1, ACB−1, BDC−1, CED−1, DAE−1, EBA−1.

257

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.2.6 Use the gluing pattern for the Seifert-Weber dodecahedral space M in Figure 10.1.2 to find a presentation for π1(M ) using Theorem 11.2.2.

Solution: Let P be the regular dodecahedron in Figure 10.1.2. Then P has 12 sides and 30 edges. The side-pairing Φ has 6 cycles of edges. Label the sides and edges of P as in the solution of Exercise 10.1.4. By Theorems 8.1.4 and 11.2.2, the fundamental group π1(M ) has the presentation with six generators A, B, C, D, E, F and six relators AB−1D−1EF −1, BC−1E−1AF −1, CD−1A−1BF −1, DE−1B−1CF −1, EA−1C−1DF −1, ACEBD. Exercise 11.2.7 Use the gluing pattern for the figure-eight knot complement M in Figure 10.3.2 to find a presentation for π1(M ) using Theorem 11.2.2.

Solution: Let P be the convex polyhedron obtained by gluing T to T ′ along the sides A and A′. The side-pairing of {T, T ′ }determines a proper side-pairing of P . By Theorems 8.1.4 and 11.2.2, the fundamental group π(M ) has the presentation (B, C, D; BC−1D−1C, BDB−1CD−1).

11.3

The Gauss-Bonnet Theorem

Exercise 11.3.1 Let κ be a real number and let x be a vector in Rn. Prove that det (1 + κ|x|2)I — κ(xixj) = (1 + κ|x|2)n−1.

Solution: Let M = (1 + κ|x|2)I — κ(xixj) . If x = 0, then the result is obviously true, and so we may assume x /= 0. By permuting coordinates, if necessary, we may assume that x1 /= 0. Let M be obtained from M be subtracting xi/x1 times the first row of M from the ith row of M for each i = 2, . . . , n.

Then we have , (1 + κ|x|2) — κx21 —κx1x2 —κx1x3 ··· —κx1xn 2 2 —(x2/x1)(1 + κ|x| ) (1 + κ|x| ) 0 ··· 0 —(x3/x1)(1 + κ|x|2) 0 (1 + κ|x|2) · · · 0 ..

M=. . . . . . .

2 2 —(xn/x1)(1 + κ|x| ) 0 0 · · · (1 + κ|x| ) Now let M̂ be obtained from M by adding xj/x1 times the jth column of M to the first column of M for each j = 2, . . . , n. Then we have , 1 —κx1x2 —κx1x3 ··· —κx1xn 2) 0 (1 + κ|x| 0 · · · 0 .

2 0 0 (1 + κ|x| ) · · · 0 M̂ = . .. . . . . . .

0 0 0 · · · (1 + κ|x|2) Hence det(M ) = det(M ) = d e t ( M̂ ) = (1 + κ|x|2)n−1.

258

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.3.2 Let ∆ be either an n-simplex in Sn, En or a generalized nsimplex in Hn. Prove the case n = 4 of the Schläfli-Peschl formula that for n even, n/2 2i+2 —1 Σ2 W (∆) = 2 B 2i+2 w2i (∆) i+1 i=0

where B2 = 1/6, B4 = —1/30, B6 = 1/42, . . . are Bernoulli numbers.

Solution: On the one hand, we have W (∆) = w0(∆) — w1(∆) + w2(∆) — w3(∆) + w4(∆). Σ 1 { ij } ij Now w3 (∆) = 5/2 and w2 (∆) = 2π i<j θ where θ are the dihedral angles of ∆. Now ∆ has 52 = 10 edges. Let S1, . . . , S5 be th sides of ∆. Then each edge of ∆ is of the form Si1 ∩ Si2 ∩ Si3 with i1 < i2 < i3. Now we have ω̂(∆, Si1 ∩ Si2 ∩ Si3 )

1

=

θ i i + θi i + θi i — π 13 23 4π 1 2 1 1 θ i1i2 + θi1i3 + θi2i3 — , 4π 4

= and so Σ

w1(∆) =

ω̂ (∆, Si1 ∩ Si2 ∩ Si3 )

i1<i2<i3

1 4π

=

Σ

θi1i2 + θi1i3 + θi2i3

i1<i2<i3

—

10 .

4

The last sum has 30 dihedral angle terms and each angle occurs with the same frequency. Hence, we have Σ Σ θi1i2 + θi1i3 + θi2i3 = 3 θij. i<j

i1 < i2 <i3

Therefore, we have w1(∆) =

3 2

w2(∆) — w3(∆).

Hence, we have W (∆) = w0(∆) —

1 2

w2(∆) + w4(∆).

On the other hand, we have 2

2

2i+2

Σ2 i=0

=

—1 B 2i+2 w2i (∆) i+1

2

22 — 1 24 — 1 26 — 1 B2w0(∆) + B4w2(∆) + B6w4(∆) 1 2 3 259

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

3 15 —1 63 1 w0 (∆) + w2 (∆) + 6 2 30 3 42 1 1 1 = 2 w (∆) — w2(∆) + w4(∆) 0 2 4 2 1 = w0(∆) — w2(∆) + w4(∆).

2 = 2

Thus, we have

2

W (∆) = 2

2i+2

Σ2 i=0

w4 (∆)

—1 B 2i+2 w2i (∆). i+1

Exercise 11.3.3 Let θ{ij i<j} be the set of dihedral angles of an ideal 4-simplex ∆ in H4. Prove that 4 πΣ Vol(∆) = π2 — θij .

3 3 i<j Solution: By Lemma 2 of §11.3 and Exercise 11.3.2, we have Vol(∆)

= = = =

11.4

W (∆)Vol(P 4) 1 4 2 w0 (∆) — w2 (∆) + w 4 (∆) π 2 3 1 1 Σ 4 2 0 — θij + 1 π 2 2π i<j 3 4 3 πΣ π — θij .

3 3 i<j

Simplices of Maximum Volume

Exercise 11.4.1 Prove that the volume of a regular Euclidean n-simplex inscribed in Sn−1 is 1 n/2 (n + 1) 2 1+ 1 . n! n 1

1

Solution: The proof is by induction on n. If n = 1, then Vol(∆) = 2 = 2 2 2 2 .

Suppose n > 1 and the result is true for n — 1. Let S be a side of ∆ and let v be the vertex of ∆ opposite S. Let S(a, r) be the circumscribed (n — 2)-sphere of S. From the proof of Lemma 4 of §11.4, we have that a=—

v n

and r =

260

1 1— 2 n

1 2

.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

By the induction hypothesis, we have 1

n−1 2

n—1 1

n−1 2

1

Voln−1(S) = = = =

n2 (n — 1)! n

1 2

(n — 11)! n2 (n — 1)!

1 2

n (n — 1)!

1+ 1+

n—1

n

n−1 2

n−1 2

1—

1

n−1 2

n−1 2

n n−1 2

n—1 n

n—1 1+ 1 n

1 1— 2 n

1 1+ n

1 1+ n

n−1 2

n−1 2

.

By Lemma 2 of §7.2, we have that Vol(∆) =

1 +n1 Voln−1(S) n 1

1

=

1+ n n2 n (n — 1)!

1

=

(n + 1) 2 n!

1+

1

1+ 1 n n 2

n

n−1 2

.

Exercise 11.4.2 Let ∆n be a Euclidean n-simplex inscribed in Sn−1 and let ∆n be a regular Euclidean n-simplex inscribed in Sn−1. Prove that ∗

VolE(∆n) ≤ VolE(∆∗n) with equality if and only if ∆n is regular.

Solution: The proof is by induction on n. The result is clear if n = 1, so assume n > 1 and the result is true for n— 1. Let S be a side of ∆. Without loss of generality, we may assume that S is horizontal with ∆ above S. Let v be the vertex of ∆ opposite S. Let ∆′ be the Euclidean n-simplex with base S and opposite vertex en. By Lemma 2 of §7.2, we have that Vol(∆) ≤ Vol(∆′) with equality if and only if v = en. Hence, we may assume that v = en.

Let S∗ be a regular Euclidean (n — 1)-simplex inscribed in the (n — 1)-sphere Sn−1 ∩ ⟨S⟩. Let ∆′′ be the Euclidean n-simplex with base S∗ and opposite vertex en. By Lemma 2 of 7.2 § and the induction hypothesis, we have that Vol(∆) ≤Vol(∆′′) with equality if and only if S is regular. Hence, we may assume that S is regular.

Let t be the nth coordinate of S. If t > 0, then we can replace S by —S and obtain an n-simplex with greater volume. Hence, we may assume that t ≤ 0.

Let r √b e the radius of the (n — 2)-sphere Sn−1 ∩ ⟨S⟩. Then r2 + t2 = 1, and so t = — 1 — r2. By Lemma 2 of §7.2, we have that √ 1 + 1 — r2 Vol(∆) = Voln−1(S). n 261

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Consider Vol(∆) as a function of r. Observe that Voln−1(S) = rn−1Vol( 1r S) and Sˆ = 1rS is independent of r. Hence, we have 1 Vol(∆) = rn−1 1 + (1 — r2) 2 Vol n−1(Sˆ)/n.

1

Consider the function f (r) = rn−1 1 + (1 — r2) 2 . Then we have 1

1

f ′(r) = (n — 1)rn−2 1 + (1 — r2) 2 + rn−1 — r(1 — r2)− 2 .

The following are equivalent: 1. f ′(r) = 0, 1

1

2. (n — 1) 1 + (1 — r2) 2 — r2(1 — r2)− 2 = 0, 1

3. (n — 1) (1 —r 2) 2 + 1 — r2 — r2 = 0, 1

4. (n — 1)(1 — r2 ) 2 + (n — 1)(1 — r2) — r2 = 0, 1

5. (n — 1)(1 — r2 ) 2 + n(1 — r2) — 1 + r2 — r2 = 0, 1

6. n(1 — r2) + (n — 1)(1 — r2) 2 — 1 = 0, √ 1−n+ (n−1)2+4n 2 1 7. (1 , — r )2 = 2n 1−n+(n+1) 8. (1 2 1 , — r )2 = 2n 1 2 9. (1 — .

1 r )2 = n q Hence r0 = 1 — 1n2 is a critical point of the function f . Now we have 1

1

f ′′(r) = (n — 1)(n — 2)rn−3 1 + (1 — r2) 2 + (n — 1)rn−2 — r(1 — r2)− 2 1

3

— nrn−1(1 — r2)− 2 — rnr(1 — r2)− 2 1

1

n −1 = (n — 1)(n — 2)rn1−3 1 + (1 — r2) 2 — (1 — r2)− 2 3 (n — 1)r nrn−1(1 — r2)− — rn+1(1 — r2)− .

2 2 —

Next, we have f ′′(r0 ) = (n — 1)(n — 2)r0 n−3 1 +

1 n

+ (1 — 2n)r0n−1n — r0n+1n3

= r0n−3 (n — 1)(n — 2) 1 + = rn−3 (n — 1)(n — 2) 1 + 0

—n

1 n 1

n 3

1

2

1— 2 n 262

+ (1 — 2n)nr02 — n3r04 1 + (1 — 2n)n 1 — n2

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

1 1 (n — 1)(n — 2) + (1 — 2n)n 1 — n n 1 1 —n3 1 — 1— 2 n n 1 = rn0−3 1 + (n — 1)(n — 2) + (1 — 2n)(n — 1) n = r0n−3 1 +

—(n — 1)(n — 1)(n + 1) 1 (n — 1) (n — 2) + (1 — 2n) — (n — 1)(n + 1) n 1 = r0n−3 1 + (n — 1) — (n + 1) — (n — 1)(n + 1) n 1 = r0n−3 1 + (n — 1)(n + 1) — 1 — (n — 1) n = —r0n−3(n + 1)2(n — 1) < 0. = r0n−3 1 +

Hence Vol(∆) achieves its maximum value when r = r0. From the proof of Lemma 4 of §4.3, we deduce that ∆ is regular if and only if r = r0. Therefore Vol(∆) ≤ Vol(∆∗) with equality if and only if ∆ is regular.

Exercise 11.4.3 Prove that a regular ideal 4-simplex in B4 has volume 10π 3

1 3

arc sin

—

π2 = .26889 . . . .

3

Solution: Let ∆ be a regular ideal 4-simplex. The link of each ideal vertex of ∆ is a regular Euclidean tetrahedron T . The dihedral angle θ of ∆ is the dihedral angle of T . Without loss of generality, we may assume that T is inscribed in S2. Let v0, . . . , v3 be the vertices of T . From the proof of Lemma 4 of §11.4, we have that vi · vj = —1/3 for i = / j. Hence cos θ = 1/3, and so θ = arccos(1/3).

By Exercise 11.3.3, we have that 4 2 10π 1 π — arccos .

3 3 3 Now sin( π — θ) = cos θ = 1/3. Hence π — θ = arccos(1/3). Therefore Vol(∆) =

2

2

arccos

1 3

=

π 2

— arcsin

1

.

3

Hence, we have Vol(∆)

= =

4

5 10π 1 π2 — π2 + arcsin 3 3 3 3 10π 1 π2 arcsin .

— 3 3 3

263

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.4.4 Fill in the details in the proof of Lemma 7 that if i /= j, then Σ Σ tσ(i)tσ(j) = (n — 1)! tktA. σ

k/=A

Solution: Observe that Σ Σ tσ(i)tσ(j) = σ

Σ

tktA.

k/=A σ:σ(i)=k & σ(j)=A

If σ(i) = k and σ(j) = l, then σ is free to permute the set {0, . . . , n} — {i, j}, and so there are (n — 1)! possibilities for σ. Therefore, we have Σ tktA = (n — 1)! tktA. σ : σ ( i ) = k & σ(j)=A

Hence, we have

Σ

tσ(i)tσ(j) = (n — 1)!

σ

Σ

tktA.

k/=A

Exercise 11.4.5 Let ∆ be a generalized n-simplex in Dn with vertices v0, . . . , vn. Suppose 0 is in the interior of ∆. Let vˆi = vi/|vi| for each i and let ˆ be the ideal n-simplex with vertices vˆ0, . . . , vˆn. Prove that ∆ c ∆ ˆ. ∆ Solution: As 0 is in ∆○, there are real numbers s0, . . . , sn such that si > 0 for each i and n n Σ Σ sivi = 0 and si = 1. i=0

i=0

Suppose x is in ∆. Then there are real numbers t0, . . . , tn such that t≥ i 0 for each i and n n Σ Σ tivi = 0 and ti = 1. i=0

i=0

For any real number t, we have n

Σ

n

tivi =

Σ

n

t ivi + t

i=0 n

i=0

= =

Σ i=0

sivi n

Σ

Σ ti|vi|vˆi + t si|vi|vˆi i=0 i=0 n Σ ti|vi| + tsi|vi| vˆi. i=0

Observe that

n Σ

ti|vi| + tsi|vi|

i=0

264

= 1

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

if and only if

n

t

Σ

n

si|vi| = 1 —

i=0

1—

n Σ

ti|vi|

!, n Σ

n Σ

si|vi|.

i=0

i=0

Now we have

ti|vi|,

i=0

or equivalently t =

Σ

ti|vi| ≤

i=0

n Σ

ti = 1.

i=0

Hence t ≥ 0. Therefore x is a convex combination of vˆ0, . . . , vˆn, and so ∆ c ˆ∆.

11.5

Differential Forms

Exercise 11.5.1 Let x be a point of Hn. Prove that Υx is the Lorentzian matrix of the hyperbolic translation τx of Hn that translates the center en+1 of Hn to x along its axis.

Solution: As Υxen+1 = x, we have that the (n + 1)st column of Υx is x. First consider the case n = 1. By Exercise 3.1.7, we have that Υx is of the form cosh s sinh s

sinh s cosh s

,

and so Υx =

x2

x1

x1

x2

.

As x2 — x2 = —1, we have 1

2

1+

x21 x2 — 1 = 1+ 2 = 1 + x2 — 1 = x2.

1 + x2 1 + x2

Thus Υx is of the desired form.

Now assume n > 1. Assume first that xi = 0 for i = 1, . . . , n — 1. Then by the case n = 1, we have

Υ x

0 0 . 1 . .. . . = 1 0 . 0 0 · · · 0 xn+1 0 · · · 0 xn

with xn+1 = 1 +

0

.

.

.

0 . xn xn+1

x2n .

1 + xn+1

Now consider the general case. If x = en+1, then Υx = I is of the desired form. Hence, we may assume that x /= en+1. Let x = (x1, . . . , xn) in Rn. Then 265

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

x /= 0. Let y = (0, . . . , 0, |x|, xn+1) in Rn+1. Then y ◦ y = |x|2 — x2n+1 = —1, and so y is in Hn. Moreover | y| = |x |. As O(n) acts transitively on S(0, |x |), there is a matrix A = (aij) in O(n) such that Ax = y. Let Aˆ be the corresponding matrix in O(n + 1) such that Aˆen+1 = en+1. Then Aˆx = y. Hence, we have Υx = ΥAˆ−1y =  −1 Υy  = Aˆ t Υ y Aˆ .

Therefore Υx is symmetric, since Υy is symmetric. Hence, the (n + 1)st row of Υx is x.

Suppose i, j < n + 1. As x = Â t y , we have xi

= =

=

e i Aˆ t y (Â e i ) t y

,

(a1i , . . . , ani

.

0

.

.

0 yn

, 0)

. .

=

aniyn.

yn+1 Therefore ani = xi/yn = xi/|x|. Let Υx = (tij). Then we have tij

=

eiΥxej

e i  t Υ y  e j ( ei ) t Υ y  e j , a1j . . . = (Aˆei )t Υ y . . . anj , 0 = =

a1j = (Aˆe )t . i

.

. . an−1,j . yn+1anj ynanj ,

a1j . . .. = (a1i , · · · , ani , 0) . a n−1,j . . yn+1anj ynanj = a1ia1j + · · · + an−1,ian−1,j + aniyn+1anj =

a1ia1j + · · · + an−1,ian−1,j + anianjxn+1.

266

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

If i = j, then we have 2 2 2 = a1i + · · · + an−1,i + ani xn+1

tii

2 = 1 — ani2 + ani xn+1

= 1 + a2ni(xn+1 — 1) = 1 + (x2i /|x|2)(xn+1 — 1) x2i = 1+ (xn+1 — 1) 2 x n+1 — 1 = 1+

x2i . xn+1 + 1

If i /= j, then we have tij

= —anianj + anianjxn+1 anianj(xn+1 — 1) (xixj/|x|2)(xn+1 — 1) xixj (x — 1) n+1 x2n+1 — 1 xixj = 1+ . xn+1 + 1

= = =

Thus Υx = (tij) is of the desired form.

Exercise 11.5.2 Prove that the definition of Tx(φ) by Formula 11.5.11 does not depend on the choice of the extension φx of φ.

Solution: This is clear if D is open, so assume that D is convex. Then D ∩ B(x, rx) is convex, and so x is in (D∩ B(x, rx))○. This implies that the matrix φ˜x′ (x) does not depend on the choice of the extension φx, since φ˜x extends the unique lift φ˜ of φ, such that φ˜(x) = φ̃x (x), over B(x, rx).

Exercise 11.5.3 Verify that (I × pˆ∗) Υ∗ = Υ̂ ∗ ρ ∗ and that (I × i∗) Υ̂ ∗ = Υ∗P. Solution: Observe that if (x, λ) is in Λk(T(Hn)), then (I × pˆ∗)Υ∗(x, λ) = (I × pˆ∗)(x, Υ∗xλ) = (x, pˆ∗Υ∗xλ) and if v1, . . . , vk are in Rn+1, then we have pˆ∗Υ∗xλ(v1, . . . , vk) = Υ∗xλ(pˆ(v1), . . . , pˆ(vk)) = Υ∗xλ(v1, . . . , vk) = λ(Υx(v1, 0), . . . , Υx(vk, 0)).

While Υ̂ ∗ ρ∗ (x, λ) = Υ̂ ∗ (x, ρ∗xλ) = (x, Υ∗xρ∗xλ) = (x, (ρxΥx)∗λ) 267

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

and (ρxΥx)∗λ(v1, . . . , vk) = λ(ρxΥxv1, . . . , ρxΥxvk) =

λ(ρxΥx((v1, 0) + (v1)n+1en+1), . . . , ρxΥx((vk, 0) + (vk)n+1en+1))

= =

λ(ρx(Υx(v1, 0) + (v1)n+1x), . . . , ρx(Υx(vk, 0) + (vk)n+1x)) λ(Υx(v1, 0), . . . , Υx(vk, 0)).

Thus (I × pˆ∗) Υ∗ = Υ̂ ∗ ρ ∗ .

Observe that if (x, λ) is in Hn × Λk(Rn+1), then (I × i ∗ )Υ̂ ∗ (x, λ) = (I × i∗)(x, Υ∗xλ) = (x, i∗Υ∗xλ) = (x, (Υxi)∗λ) and if v1, . . . , vk are in Rn, then we have (Υxi)∗λ(v1, . . . , vk)

=

λ(Υxi(v1), . . . , Υxi(vk))

=

λ(Υx(v1, 0), . . . , Υx(vk, 0)).

While Υ∗P(x, λ) = Υ∗(x, λx) = (x, Υ∗xλx) and Υ∗xλx(v1, . . . , vk)

= λx(Υx(v1, 0), . . . , Υx(vk, 0)) = λ(Υx(v1, 0), . . . , Υx(vk, 0)).

Thus (I × i∗) Υ̂ ∗ = Υ∗P. Exercise 11.5.4 Let ω be a k-form on Hn. Define ω̂ : Hn → Λk(R n+1) by ω̂ (x) = ρ∗xω(x). Prove that ω is C∞ if and only if ω̂ is C∞.

Solution: Let sω : Hn → Λk(T(Hn)) be the section defined by sω(x) = (x, ω(x)).

Then ω is C∞ if and only if sω is C∞. Now sω is C∞ if and only if the map ρ∗sω : Hn → Λ̂k (T(H n )) is C∞. Now we have ρ∗sω(x) = ρ∗(x, ω(x)) = (x, ρ∗x(ω(x))) = (x, ω̂ (x)).

Hence ρ∗sω is C∞ if and only if ω̂ is C∞. Thus ω is C∞ if and only if ω̂ is C∞.

Exercise 11.5.5 Let M = Hn/Γ be a space-form with quotient map π : Hn→ M , and let ω be a k-form on M . Prove that ω is C∞ if and only if the k-form π∗ω on Hn is C∞.

Solution: As sωπ = π∗sπ∗ ω and π and π∗ are surjective C∞ local diffeomorphisms, sω is C∞ if and only if sπ∗ ω is C∞. Therefore ω is C∞ if and only if π∗ω is C∞.

268

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.5.6 Prove that the k-form φ∗ω defined by Formula 11.5.24 is C∞ if ω is C∞.

Solution: Assume first that M = Hn. Let f : D → R be the function such that φ∗ω = fdx1 ∧ · · · ∧ dxk. We need to show that f is C∞. By Exercise 11.5.4, we have that ω̂ : Hn → Λk(Rn+1) is C∞. Hence, there are C∞ maps fi1···ik : H n→ R such that ω̂ =

Σ

fi1···ik dxi1 ∧ · · · ∧ dxik .

i1<···<ik

Observe that f (x) = φ∗ω(x)(e1, . . . , ek) = ω(φ(x))(Tx(φ)e1, . . . , Tx(φ)ek) =

ω(φ(x))(φ′(x)e1, . . . , φ′(x)ek)

= ω̂(φ(x))(φ′ (x)e1 , . . . , φ′(x)ek) Σ fi1···ik (φ(x))dxi1 ∧ · · · ∧ dxik (φ′(x)e1, . . . , φ′(x)ek) = i1<···<ik

=

Σ

fi1···ik (φ(x))pi1···ik (x)

i1<···<ik

where pi1···ik (x) is a polynomial in the partial derivatives of φ at x. Hence f is C∞. Thus φ∗ω is C∞.

Now assume M = Hn/Γ is a space form with quotient map π : Hn → M .

As being C∞ is a local property, we may assume without loss of generality that D is simply connected. Then the C∞ map φ : D → M lifts to a C∞ map φ˜ : D→ Hn with respect to π. Observe that φ̃ ∗ π ∗ ω = (πφ̃) ∗ ω = φ∗ω. Hence, it suffices to show that φ̃ ∗ π ∗ ω is C∞. By Exercise 11.5.5, we have that π∗ω is C∞. Therefore φ̃ ∗ π ∗ ω is C∞ by the case M = Hn. Thus φ∗ω is C∞.

Exercise 11.5.7 Let X be a measurable subset of a space-form M = Hn/Γ.

Prove that the definition of Vol(X) does not depend on the choice of the proper fundamental region R of Γ in Hn. Solution: Let R and S be proper fundamental regions for Γ. Then we have Vol(π−1(X) ∩ R)

=

Vol π−1(X) ∩ R ∩

=

Vol ∪ (π−1(X) ∩ R ∩ gS) g∈Γ Σ Vol(π−1(X) ∩ R ∩ gS)

=

∪ gS

g∈Γ

g∈Γ

=

Σ

Vol(π−1(X) ∩ g−1R ∩ S)

g∈Γ

=

Σ

Vol(π−1(X) ∩ S ∩ gR) = Vol(π−1(X) ∩ S).

g∈Γ

269

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.5.8 Let M = Hn/Γ be a space-form, with quotient map π : Hn→ M , and let X be a measurable subset of Hn such that π is injective on X. Prove that π(X) is measurable in M and Vol(π(X)) = Vol(X).

Solution: Observe that π−1(π(X)) = ∪{gX : g ∈ Γ} and the sets{gX }are pairwise disjoint. Now gX is measurable for each g in Γ.

Hence π−1(π(X)) is measurable, since Γ is countable. Thus π(X) is measurable in M .

Let R be a proper fundamental region for Γ in Hn. Then we have Vol(π(X)) = Vol π−1(π(X)) ∩ R = Vol ∪ gX ∩ R g ∈Γ

= Vol ∪ (g X ∩ R) g ∈Γ Σ = Vol(gX ∩ R) g∈Γ

=

Σ

Vol(X ∩ g−1R)

g∈Γ

=

Σ

Vol(X ∩ gR)

g∈ Γ

= Vol ∪ X ∩ gR g ∈Γ

= Vol X ∩ ∪ gR g ∈Γ

=

Vol(X).

Exercise 11.5.9 Prove Lemma 4.

Solution: Let wi = (ci1, . . . , cin) for i = 1, . . . , n. Define µ : (Rn)n → R by n

µ(w1, . . . , wn) = λ

Σ j=1

n

c1juj, . . . ,

Σ

cnjuj .

j=1

Then µ is in Λn(Rn). Hence µ = c det for some c in R. As µ(e1, . . . , en) = λ(u1, . . . , un), we have that c = λ(u1, . . . , un). Thus λ(v1, . . . , vn) = det(cij)λ(u1, . . . , un).

270

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.5.10 Prove Theorem 11.5.5 Solution: Let σ̃ : ∆n → Hn be a lift of σ with respect to the quotient map π : Hn → M . Then σ̃ is a C∞ map that maps ∆n bijectively onto an n˜ in Hn. Let σ˜ 0 be the restriction of σ̃ to (∆n)○. Then σ˜ 0 is a C∞ simplex ∆ ˜ ○. By Theorem 11.5.1 and Exercise 11.5.8, we have diffeomorphism onto ∆ ∫ ∫ ΩM = σ∗ΩM σ ∫∆n = (πσ̃)∗ ΩM n ∆ ∫ = σ̃ ∗ π ∗ Ω M ∫∆n = σ̃ ∗ Ω n ∫∆n = σ̃ ∗ Ω n ∫ =

(∆n)◦ (∆n)◦

∫

±

=

˜◦ ∆

σ̃ 0∗ Ω n Ωn

˜ ○) = ±Vol(∆ ˜) = ±Vol(∆ ±Vol(∆)

=

with the plus or minus sign according as σ0 preserves or reverses the standard orientation.

11.6

Simplicial Volume

Exercise 11.6.1 Let π : M̃ → M be d-fold covering between closed, connected, orientable n-manifolds. Prove that M̃ = d M .

Solution: The map π : M̃ → M has degree d, and so by Lemma 1, we have d M ≤ M̃ . Σ Let c = rσσ be a cycle in Hn(M, R) representing a fundamental class of M .

Given a singular n-simplex σ : ∆n → M , let σ̃ i : ∆n → M̃ for i = 1, . . . , d be the d lifts of σ. Consider d Σ Σ c˜ = rσ σ̃ i . σ

271

i=1

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Then c˜ is a singular n-chain. Observe that ∂c˜ =

Σ

rσ

σ

=

Σ

rσ

σ

=

Σ

∂ σ̃ i

i=1 d

ΣΣ

n

(—1) j σ̃ i(j )

i=1 j=0 n

d

j=0

i=1

Σ Σ ) rσ (—1)j σ̃ (j i

σ

= =

d Σ

˜c ∂ 0.

Now π∗(c˜) = dc. Hence π∗([c˜]) = d[c]. As π∗ has degree d, we deduce that [c˜] is a fundamental class of M . Now we have M̃

≤ inf{ c˜ : c is a fundamental class of M } = inf{d c : c is a fundamental class of M } = d M .

Therefore M̃ = d M .

Exercise 11.6.2 Let σ : ∆k → Hn be a straight singular k-simplex, and let Nσ be the maximal subset of Rk containing ∆k over which σ extends by Formula 11.6.2. Prove that Nσ is convex and open.

Solution: Let σ : Rk → Rn+1 be the map defined by σ(x) =

k Σ

xiσ(ei).

i=0

Then σ is affine, since k Σ

xi σ(ei) — σ(e0) .

σ(x) = σ(e0) + i=1

Let T+ be the set of all positive time-like vectors in Rn,1. Then T+ is a convex subset of Rn+1 by Theorem 3.1.2, and T+ is an open subset of Rn+1, since T+ = {x ∈ Rn,1 : xn+1 > |x|}.

The largest subset of Rk containing ∆k over which σ extends by Formula 11.6.2 is the set Nσ = σ−1(T+).

The set Nσ is convex and open, since σ is affine and T+ is convex and open.

272

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.6.3 Let σ : ∆k →Hn be a straight singular k-simplex. Prove that σ is C∞.

Solution: Let T+ be the set of all positive time-like vectors in Rn,1. Let Nσ be the convex open neighborhood of ∆k in Rk found in Exercise 11.6.2. Then the affine map σ : Nσ → T+ defined by σ(x) =

k Σ

xiσ(ei)

i=0

is C∞. The map ν : T+ → Hn, defined by , ,q ν(x) = x |||x||| = x x2n+1

— |x|2,

is C∞. Hence σ̂ : Nσ → Hn, defined by σ̂ = νσ, is C∞. As σ̂ extends σ, we have that σ is C∞.

Exercise 11.6.4 Let σ : ∆n → Hn be a straight singular n-simplex such that n σ(∆ ) is an n-simplex ∆ in Hn. Let Nσ be as in Exercise 11.6.2 and let σ̂ : Nσ →Hn be the extension of σ defined by Formula 11.6.2. Prove that σ̂ is a C∞ diffeomorphism onto either Hn or an open half-space of Hn containing ∆.

Solution: As σ(∆n) is an n-simplex in Hn, the vectors σ(e0), . . . , σ(en) are linearly independent. Let P be the affine hull of {σ(e0), . . . , σ(en)}. Then P is a hyperplane of Rn+1, since σ(e1) — σ(e0), . . . , σ(en) — σ(e0) are linearly independent. Moreover P does not contain 0, since σ(e0), . . . , σ(en) are linearly independent. Let P = P (a, t). Then t /= 0. As P (a, t) = P — ( a,—t), we may assume t > 0.

Assume first that a is nonspace-like. Then Ja is nonspace-like. Hence, we have a · x = Ja ◦ x /= 0 for all x in Hn by Theorem 3.1.1. As a · σ(e0) = t > 0, and the function f (x) = a · x is continuous, and Hn is connected, we conclude that a · x > 0 for all x in Hn. Let T+ be the set of all positive time-like vectors in Rn,1. Define φ : Hn → P ∩ T+ by φ(x) = sx for some positive scalar s. Now a · sx = t implies s = t/a· x. Hence φ(x) = tx/a· x. Let σ : Nσ → P ∩ T+ be the affine bijection defined by σ(x) =

k Σ

xiσ(ei)

i=0

Then σ̂ − 1 = σ−1φ. Let p : Hn →Rn be the vertical projection. As the map σ̂ − 1 = σ−1φp−1 is C∞, we conclude that σ̂ − 1 : Hn→ Nσ is C∞. Thus σ̂ : Nσ →Hn is a C∞ diffeomorphism.

Now assume a is space-like. Then Ja is space-like. Let Hσ = {x ∈ Hn : Ja ◦ x > 0}.

Then Hσ is an open half-space of Hn that contains ∆. By the same argument as above σ̂ − 1 : Hσ → Nσ is C∞. Hence σ̂ : Nσ → Hσ is a C∞ diffeomorphism.

273

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.6.5 Explain why the proof of Lemma 3 breaks down in the spherical case where Vn is replaced by Vol(Sn).

Solution: The proof of Lemma 3 breaks down in the spherical case because the straightening of a singular k-simplex σ in Sn is not well-defined because Σk i=0 xiσ(ei) may be 0.

Exercise 11.6.6 Prove that the abelianization of I(Hn) has order 2.

Solution: As I0(Hn) has index two in I(Hn), we have that [I(Hn), I(Hn)] c I0(Hn).

By Theorem 5.5.12, the group I0(Hn) has no nontrivial abelian quotient groups.

Therefore [I(Hn), I(Hn)] = I0(Hn). Thus I(Hn)ab has order 2.

11.7

Measure Homology

Exercise 11.7.1 Let M be a hyperbolic space-form, and let σ be in C∞(∆k, M ).

Prove that the definition of the set N (σ, r) does not depend on the choice of the lift σ̃ of σ.

Solution: Suppose σ˜ 1 is another lift of σ̃ with respect to π. Then there is an element g of Γ such that σ˜ 1 = g σ̃ . Observe that if τ˜1 is the lift of τ such that d(σ̃ 1 (e 0 ), τ˜1(e0)) < r, then d(σ̃ (e 0 ), g−1τ˜1(e0)) < r. As r < l, we know that π maps B(σ̃(e 0 ), r) bijectively onto B(σ(e0), r). Therefore g−1τ˜1(e0) = τ˜(e0), and so τ˜1 = gτ˜. Observe that if x is in ∆k and u is in Sn−1, then σ̃′ (x)u — Υτ˜(x),σ˜(x)τ˜′(x)u

= = =

gσ̃′ (x)u — gΥτ˜(x),σ˜(x)g−1gτ˜′(x)u σ̃ 1′ (x)u — Υgτ˜(x),gσ˜(x)τ˜1′ (x)u σ˜ 1′ (x)u — Υτ˜1(x),σ˜1(x)τ˜1′ (x)u .

Exercise 11.7.2 Let M = Hn/Γ be a space-form, let σ be in C∞(∆k, M ), and let σ̃ : ∆k → Hn be a lift of σ with respect to the quotient map π : Hn→ M . Let τ be in N (σ, r) for some r > 0, and let τ˜ be the lift of τ such that d(σ̃(e0 ), τ˜(e0)) < r. Prove that d(σ̃(x), τ˜(x)) < r for all x in ∆k.

Solution: On the contrary, suppose τ˜ is not in B (σ̃ , r). Now d(σ̃ (x), τ˜(x)) is a continuous function of x. Hence, by the intermediate value theorem, there is an x1 in ∆k such that d(σ̃ (x 1 ), τ˜(x1)) = r. Now d(σ(x1), τ (x1)) < r implies dist(σ̃ (x 1 ), Γτ˜(x1)) < r. Hence, there is a g in Γ such that g /= 1 and d(τ˜(x1), gτ˜(x1)) < 2r < l. But π maps B(τ˜(x1), l) bijectively onto B(τ (x1), l), and so we have a contradiction.

274

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.7.3 Let x and y be in Hn, let Υx,y be the Lorentzian matrix of the hyperbolic translation of Hn that translates x to y along its axis, let c be the center of Hn, and let Υx = Υc,x. Prove that Υx,y = Υ x Υ z Υ −1 x where z = Υ x−1 (y). −1 Solution: Observe that Υ−1 x Υ x,y Υ x = Υw,z where w = Υ x (x) = c and −1 −1 −1 z = Υ x (y). Hence Υx Υx,y Υ x = Υz, and so Υx,y = Υ x Υz Υx .

Exercise 11.7.4 Let x, y, z be noncollinear points of Hn and let α, β, γ be the angles of the triangleΔ (x, y, z) at x, y, z, respectively. Let τx,y be the hyperbolic translation of Hn that translates x to y along its axis. Prove that τz,xτy,zτx,y is the hyperbolic rotation of Hn by the angle π — (α + β + γ) about the point x in the 2-plane ⟨{x, y, z}⟩ of Hn. Solution: Let u be a point in the interior of the line segment [x, y]. Then τx,y translates [x, u] to a line segment [y, v] that makes an angle of π2 — β with the outward normal to the side [y, z] ofΔ at y. Next τy,z translates [y, v] to a line segment [z, w] that makes an angle π — β— γ with the line L(x, z) at z, since the outward normal to the side [y, z] of Δ at z makes an angle2 π— γ with L(x, z). Next τz,x translates [z, w] to a line segment [x, u′] that makes an angle π — α — β — γ with [x, u]. Thus τz,xτy,zτx,y is the rotation about x in the 2-plane ⟨{ x, y, z}⟩ by an angle of π— α— β— γ. Moreover τz,xτy,zτx,y fixes the (n —2)-plane in Hn that is orthogonal to ⟨{x, y, z}⟩ at x pointwise, since τx,y maps the hyperplane of Hn that is orthogonal to L(x, y) at x to the hyperplane of Hn that is orthogonal to L(x, y) at y with no rotation about the line L(x, y), and similarly for τy,z and τz,x.

Exercise 11.7.5 Let σ, τ, υ be in C∞(∆k, M ) with υ in N (σ, r)∩N (τ, s). Prove that there is a t > 0 such that N (υ, t) c N (σ, r) ∩ N (τ, s). Hint: Use Exercise 11.7.4 and Lemma 1 of §5.4.

Solution: Suppose t is a real number satisfying 0 < t ≤ min{r — d(σ, υ), s — d(τ, υ)}.

Then B(υ, t) c B(σ, r) ∩ B(τ, s), since if φ is in B(υ, t), then d(σ, φ) ≤ d(σ, υ) + d(υ, φ) < d(σ, υ) + r — d(σ, υ) = r and d(τ, φ) ≤ d(τ, υ) + d(υ, φ) < d(τ, υ) + s — d(τ, υ) = s.

Suppose φ is in N (υ, t). Let σ̃ be a lift of σ, and let υ˜ be the lift of υ such that d(σ̃ (e 0 ), υ̃ (e 0 )) < r. Let φ˜ be the lift of φ such that d(υ̃ (e 0 ), φ̃ (e 0 )) < t.

275

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Then d(σ̃ (e 0 ), φ̃ (e 0 )) < r as above and d(σ̃ (x), φ˜(x)) < r for all x in ∆k by Exercise 11.6.2. Let x be in ∆k and u be in Sn−1. Then we have σ̃′ (x)u — Υφ̃(x),σ̃(x) φ̃′ (x)u =

Υσ̃(x),φ̃(x) σ̃′ (x)u — φ̃ ′ (x)u

≤

Υσ̃(x),φ̃(x) σ̃′ (x)u — Υυ̃(x),φ̃(x) υ̃′ (x)u + Υυ̃(x),φ̃(x) υ̃′ (x)u — φ̃ ′ (x)u

=

Υφ̃(x),υ̃(x) Υσ̃(x),φ̃(x) σ̃′ (x)u — υ̃ ′ (x)u + υ̃ ′ (x)u — Υφ̃(x),υ̃(x) φ̃′ (x)u

≤

Υ φ̃(x),υ̃(x) Υσ̃(x),φ̃(x) σ̃′ (x)u — Υσ̃(x),υ̃(x) σ̃ ′ (x)u + Υσ̃(x),υ̃(x) σ̃′ (x)u — υ̃ ′ (x)u + υ̃ ′ (x)u — Υ φ̃(x),υ̃(x) φ̃′ (x)u

=

Υυ̃(x),σ̃(x) Υφ̃(x),υ̃(x) Υσ̃(x),φ̃(x) σ̃′ (x)u — σ̃ ′ (x)u + σ̃ ′ (x)u — Υυ̃(x),σ̃(x) υ̃′ (x)u + υ̃ ′ (x)u — Υφ̃(x),υ̃(x) φ̃′ (x)u .

Let R = max{ σ˜′(x)u — Υ υ̃ (x),σ̃ (x) υ̃ ′ (x)u : (x, u) ∈ ∆k × Sn−1}.

Then R < r. Let Υυ˜(x),σ˜(x)Υφ˜(x),υ˜(x)Υσ˜(x),φ˜(x) — I σ˜(x) = max{ (Υυ˜(x),σ˜(x)Υφ˜(x),υ˜(x)Υσ˜(x),φ˜(x) — I)v : v ∈ Tσ˜(x)(H n) and v = 1}, and let

Mσ = max{ σ˜′(x)u : (x, u) ∈ ∆k × Sn−1}.

Then, by Lemma 1 of §5.4 and Exercise 11.7.4, we have (Υυ˜(x),σ˜(x)Υφ˜(x),υ˜(x)Υσ˜(x),φ˜(x) — I)σ̃′ (x)u ≤

Υυ˜(x),σ˜(x)Υφ˜(x),υ˜(x)Υσ˜(x),φ˜(x) — I

= 2 sin

1 (π — α — β — γ) 2

σ˜(x) Mσ

Mσ

where α, β, γ are the angles of (σ̃ Δ(x), υ˜(x), φ˜(x)) at σ̃ (x), υ˜(x), φ˜(x), respectively.

Let a, b, c be the lengths of the sides ofΔopposite the angles α, β, γ, respectively. Now c = d(σ̃(x), υ˜(x)) is fixed. By the law of sines, we have (sinh a/ sinh c) = sin α/ sin γ. Hence α →0 as a = d(υ˜(x), φ˜(x)) → 0.

By Formula 3.5.4, we have cos α = — cos β cos γ + sin β sin γ cosh a.

Hence cos β cos γ — sin β sin γ = — cos α + sin β sin γ(cosh a — 1), and so cos(β + γ) = — cos α + sin β sin γ(cosh a — 1).

276

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Hence cos(β + γ) → —1 as a → 0. Therefore β + γ → π as a → 0. Hence π —(α + β + γ) →0 as a →0. Therefore, we can choose t sufficiently small so that 2 sin 12(π — α — β — γ) Mσ < (r — R)/2 and t < (r — R)/2. Then, we have σ̃ ′ (x)u — Υ φ̃(x),σ̃ (x) φ̃ ′ (x)u < (r — R)/2 + R + (r — R)/2 = r.

Thus φ is in N (σ, r). Likewise, we can choose t sufficiently small so that φ is in N (τ, s). Thus, we can choose t sufficiently small so that N (υ, t) c N (σ, r) ∩ N (τ, s).

Exercise 11.7.6 Let M be a hyperbolic space-form. Prove that the total variation is a norm on the vector space Ck(M ) for each k.

Solution: Let µ and ν be in Ck(M ). Then µ + ν = (µ+ + ν+) — (µ− + ν−).

By the minimality property of the Jordan decomposition, we have (µ + ν)+ ≤ µ+ + ν+ and (µ + ν)− ≤ µ− + ν−.

Hence, we have (µ + ν)+ + (µ + ν)− ≤ µ+ + µ− + ν+ + ν−, and so µ + ν ≤ µ + ν .

Let c ≥ 0. Then cµ = cµ+ — cµ−, and so (cµ)+ ≤ cµ+ and (cµ)− ≤ cµ−.

Hence (cµ)+ + (cµ)− ≤ c(µ+ + µ−), and so cµ ≤ c µ .

Let c < 0. Then cµ = —cµ− — (—cµ+), and so (cµ)+ ≤ —cµ− and (cµ)− ≤ —cµ+. Hence (cµ)+ + (cµ)− ≤ —c(µ+ + µ−), and so cµ ≤ —c µ . Thus, if c is in R, then cµ ≤ |c| µ .

Now if c /= 0, we have µ

1 1 = ¨ cµ¨ ≤ cµ , c |c|

and so |c| µ ≤ cµ . Thus cµ = |c| µ , and clearly this also holds if c = 0.

Finally if µ = 0, then µ+ = 0 and µ− = 0, and so µ = µ+ — µ− = 0. Thus, the total variation is a norm.

277

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.7.7 Let M be a hyperbolic space-form. Prove that the map mk : Sk∞(M ) → Ck(M ) is norm preserving for each k. Σ Solution: Let c = σ rσσ be a singular k-chain in M . Then we have Σ mk(c) = ¨ mk rσ σ ¨ = =

¨Σ σ

Σ

σ

rσµσ

¨

|rσ| µσ(C∞(∆k, M ))

σ

=

Σ

|rσ| =

c .

σ

Exercise 11.7.8 Let M be a hyperbolic space-form. Prove that the C1 topology on the set C∞(∆k, M ) is first countable for each k.

Solution: As C∞(∆0, M ) = C(∆0, M ) is metrizable, we may assume k > 0.

Let σ be in C∞(∆k, M ), and let l be a Lebesgue number of a covering of σ(∆k) by open subsets of M that are evenly covered by π : Hn → M . Let m be a positive integer such that 1/m < l/2. Then{N (σ, 1/i) i}∞= m is a countable basis for the C1 topology at σ. Thus C∞(∆k, M ) is first countable.

Exercise 11.7.9 Let M = Hn/Γ be a space-form, let σ be in C∞(∆k, M ), and let {σi} be an infinite sequence contained in N (σ, r) for some r > 0. Let σ̃ : ∆k → Hn be a lift of σ with respect to the quotient map π : Hn → M , and let σ̃ i : ∆k → Hn be the lift of σi with respect to π such that d(σ̃(e 0 ), σ̃i (e 0 )) < r for each i. Prove that σi → σ in C∞(∆k, M ) if and only if σi → σ in C(∆k, M ) and σ̃ i′ → σ̃ ′ in C(∆k, M(n + 1, k)) where M(n + 1, k) is the space of all real (n + 1) × k matrices with the Euclidean topology.

Solution: Suppose σi → σ in C∞(∆k, M ). Then σi → σ in C(∆k, M ) and σ̃ i → σ̃ in C(∆k, Hn) by Exercise 11.7.2. Now observe that σ̃′ (x)u — Υσ̃i (x),σ̃(x) σ̃′i(x)u =

Υσ˜(x),en+1 (σ̃ ′ (x)u — Υ σ̃i (x),σ̃(x) σ̃i′ (x)u)

= |Υσ˜(x),en+1 (σ̃ ′ (x)u — Υ σ̃ i (x),σ̃ (x) σ̃ i′ (x)u)| ≥

min

(x,Y )∈∆k ×Sn

|Υσ˜(x),en+1 v| |σ̃ ′ (x)u — Υ σ̃i (x),σ̃(x) σ̃i′ (x)u|

= m |σ̃ ′ (x)u — Υ σ̃i (x),σ̃(x) σ̃i′ (x)u| with m a positive constant. Hence Υσ˜i , σ̃ σ̃i ′ → σ̃ ′ in C(∆k, M(n + 1, k)).

Now, if x, y are in Hn, then Υx,y = Υ x Υ z Υ x−1 where z = Υ x− 1 (y) by Exercise k 11.7.3. Hence σ˜ i → σ̃ implies Υσ˜,σ˜i → I in C(∆ , M(n + 1, n + 1)). Now, the entries of Υσ˜,σ˜i (Υ σ̃ i ,σ̃ σ̃ i′ ) are polynomials in the entries of Υσ˜,σ˜i and of Υ σ̃ i ,σ̃ σ̃ i′ .

278

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

As C(∆k, R) is a topological ring, the entries of Υσ˜,σ˜ (Υσ˜ , σ̃ σ̃ ′ ) = σ̃ ′ converge to i

i

i

i

the entries of I σ̃ ′ = σ̃ ′ in C(∆k, R). Therefore σ̃ i′ → σ̃ ′ in C(∆k, M(n + 1, k)).

Conversely, suppose σi → σ in C(∆k, M ) and σ̃ i′ → σ̃ ′ in C(∆k, M(n + 1, k)).

Then σ̃ i → σ̃ in C(∆k, Hn) by Exercise 11.7.2, and so Υσ˜i ,σ˜ → I in C(∆k, M(n+ 1, n + 1)). The entries of Υ σ̃ i , σ̃ σ̃ i′ are polynomials in the entries of Υσ˜i,σ˜ and of σ̃ i′ . As C(∆k, R) is a topological ring, the entries of Υσ˜ , σ̃i σ̃ ′ iconverge to the entries of I σ̃ ′ = σ̃ ′ in C(∆k, R). Therefore Υσ˜ , σ̃ σ̃ ′ → σ̃ ′ in C(∆k, M(n + 1, k)). i

As

σ̃ ′ (x)u — Υσ̃i (x),σ̃(x) σ̃i′ (x)u

i

≤ |σ̃ ′ (x)u — Υσ̃i (x),σ̃(x) σ̃i′ (x)u|,

we deduce that σi → σ in C∞(∆k, M ).

Exercise 11.7.10 Let M be a hyperbolic space-form, let σ be in C∞(∆k, M ), and let {σi } be an infinite sequence in C∞(∆k, M ). Prove that σi→ σ in C∞(∆k, M ) if and only if σi→ σ in C(∆k, M ) and also T(σi)→ T(σ) in C(T(∆k), T(M )).

Solution: Suppose σi → σ in C∞(∆k, M ). Let σ̃ be a lift of σ with respect to π : Hn → M . We may suppose that {σi} is contained in N (σ, r) for some r > 0. Let σ̃ i be the lift of σi such that d(σ̃ (e 0 ), σ̃ i (e 0 )) < r for each i. Then σ̃ i → σ̃ in C∞(∆k, Hn) by Exercise 11.7.2 and σ̃ i′ → σ̃ ′ in C∞(∆k, M(n + 1, k))

by Exercise 11.7.9.

Define σ̂ : ∆k ×Rk → Hn by σ̂ (x, v) = σ(x). Then σ̂ i → σ̂ uniformly, and so σ̂ i → σ̂ in C(∆k × Rk, Hn). Define σ′ : ∆k × Rk → Rn+1 by σ′(x, v) = σ̃ ′ (x)v.

Then σ′i → σ′, since C(∆k ×Rk, Rn+1) is homeomorphic to C(∆k, C(Rk, Rn+1)).

Therefore T(σ̃ i ) → T( σ̃ ) in C(∆k × Rk, Hn × Rn+1). Hence T(σ̃ i ) → T(σ̃ ) in C(T(∆k), T(Hn)). Now π∗ : T(Hn) → T(M ) defined by π∗(x, v) = (π(x), [v]) is continuous. Hence T(σi) = π ∗ T(σ̃ i )→ π ∗ T(σ̃ ) = T(σ) in C(T(∆k), T(M )).

Conversely, suppose that σi→ σ in C(∆k, M ) and also T(σi)→ T(σ) in C(T(∆k), T(M )). Let l be a Lebesgue number for a covering of σ(∆k) by open subsets of M that are evenly covered by π. We may assume {σi} c B(σ, l/2).

Let σ̃ be a lift of σ with respect to π, and let σ̃ i be the lift of σi with respect to π such that d(σ̃ (e 0 ), σ̃i (e 0 )) < l/2. Then σ̃ i → σ̃ by Exercise 11.7.2. We claim that T(σ̃ i ) → T(σ̃ ) in C(T(∆k), T(Hn)).

The map π∗ : T(Hn) → T(M ) defined by π∗(x, v) = (π(x), [v]) is a cover ing projection. Given x in ∆k, the open set π∗ (B(σ̃ (x), l) × Rn+1) ∩ T(Hn) is evenly covered by π∗. As ∆k is compact, the open cover {σ̃ − 1 (B(σ̃(x), l/2)) : x ∈ ∆k} of ∆k has a finite subcover {σ̃ − 1 (B(σ̃(v j ), l/2))}mj=1. Suppose x is in σ̃ − 1 (C (σ̃(v j ), l/2)) and u is in Sn−1. Then d(σ̃ (x), σ̃(v j )) ≤ l/2. Now d(σ̃ i (x), σ̃ (x)) < l/2, and so d(σ̃ i (x), σ̃ (v j )) < l. Therefore T(σ̃i )(x, u) is in B(σ̃(v j ), l) × Rn+1 fo r each i. Now π ∗ T(σ̃ i ) = T(σ i), and so T(σi)(x, u) and T(σ)(x, u) are in π∗ (B(σ̃(v j ), l) × Rn+1) ∩ T(Hn) . As T(σi) → T(σ) in C(T(∆k), T(M )) and π∗ maps (B(σ̃(v j ), l) ×Rn+1) ∩ T(Hn) homeomorphically onto its image, we have that T(σ̃i ) → T(σ̃ ) uniformly on σ̃ −1 (C (σ̃ (v j ), l/2)) × Sn−1 for each j = 1, . . . , m. Therefore T(σ̃ i ) → T(σ̃ ) uniformly on ∆k × Sn−1.

Hence σ̃ i′ → σ̃ ′ uniformly on ∆k×Sn−1. Therefore σ̃ i′ → σ̃ ′ in C(∆k, M(n+1, k)).

Hence σi → σ in C∞(∆k, M ) by Exercise 11.7.9.

279

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.7.11 Let M = Hn/Γ be a space-form, and let π : Hn → M be the quotient map. Prove that π∗ : C∞(∆k, Hn) → C∞(∆k, M ) is a covering projection.

Solution: Let σ be in C∞(∆k, Hn), and let l be a Lebesgue number of the covering of πσ(∆k) by evenly covered open subsets of M with respect to π. Let r be such that 0 < r < l/2. We claim that π∗B(σ, r) = B(πσ, r). If τ is in B(σ, r), then d(σ(x), τ (x)) < r for all x in ∆k. Hence d(πσ(x), πτ (x)) < r for all x in ∆k. Therefore πτ is in B(πσ, r). Thus π∗B(σ, r)c B(πσ, r).

Let τ be in B(πσ, r), and let τ be the lift of τ with respect to π such that d(σ(e0), τ (e0)) < r. Then d(σ(x), τ (x)) < r for all x in ∆k by Exercise 11.7.2.

Therefore τ = πτ is in π∗B(σ, r). Thus π∗B(σ, r) = B(πσ, r).

We claim that B(πσ, r) is evenly covered by π∗. Observe that π∗N (σ, r) = N (πσ, r). Hence π∗ is an open continuous surjection. The set B(σ, r) is open in the C1 topology, since the C1 topology contains the compact-open topology. Now π∗ maps B(σ, r) bijectively onto B(πσ, r), and so π∗ maps B(σ, r) homeomorphically onto B(πσ, r). Now we have = ∪ B(gσ, r).

π∗−1 B(πσ, r)

g∈Γ

The sets {B(gσ, r) : g ∈ Γ} are pairwise disjoint by the triangle inequality, since 2r < l and d(g1σ(x), g2σ(x)) ≥ l for all g1 /= g2 in Γ. Hence B(πσ, r) is evenly covered by π∗. Thus π∗ is a covering projection.

Exercise 11.7.12 Prove that the C1 topology on Str(∆k, Hn) is the compactopen topology.

Solution:

Suppose σ is in Str(∆k, Hn). Then σ(x) =

k Σ

,

i=0

where x0 = 1 —

k Σ

xiσ(ei)

xiσ(ei) i=0

Σk

i=0 xi. Hence, we have

σ(x) =

σ(e0) + σ(e0) +

Σk

Σk i=1

xi σ(ei — σ(e0)

i=1 xi σ(ei) — σ(e0) i

.

∂σ Let σ = (σ1, . . . , σn+1), and let σ′(x) = ∂x (x) be the matrix of partial j derivatives. Let M(n + 1, k) be the space of real (n + 1)× k matrices. Then σ′ : ∆k → M(n + 1, k). Consider the map F : (Hn)k+1 × ∆k → M(n + 1, k) defined by F (v0, . . . , vk, x) = σ′(x) where σ(ei) = vi for each i = 0, 1, . . . , k.

Then F is continuous. Hence Fˆ : (Hn)k+1 →C(∆k, M(n + 1, k)) defined by Fˆ(v0, . . . , vk)(x) = F (v0, . . . , vk, x) is continuous.

Suppose σm → σ in Str(∆k, Hn) with respect to the compact-open topology.

Then σm(ei) → σ(ei) for each i = 0, . . . , k. Hence Fˆ(σm(e0), . . . , σm(ek)) → Fˆ(σ(e0), . . . , σ(ek)). Therefore σ m′ → σ′ in C(∆k, M(n + 1, k)). This implies

280

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

that σm →σ in Str(∆k, Hn) with respect to the C1 topology by Exercise 11.7.9.

Therefore, the compact-open topology on Str(∆k, Hn) is the C1 topology, since Str(∆k, Hn) with the C1 topology is first countable by Exercise 11.7.8, and so its topology is determined by its convergent sequences.

Exercise 11.7.13 Let i : e{0, . . . , ek } → ∆k be the inclusion map. Prove that the map i∗ : Str(∆k, Hn) → C({e0, . . . , ek}, Hn) is a homeomorphism. Conclude that the space Str(∆k, Hn) is homeomorphic to (Hn)k+1 for each k.

Solution: The function h : C({e0, . . . , ek}, Hn) → (Hn)k+1 defined by h(σ) = (σ(e0), . . . , σ(ek)) is a continuous bijection, since evaluation maps are continuous. Let Ui be an open subset of Hn for each i = 0, . . . , k and let N (ei, Ui) = {σ ∈ C({e0, . . . , ek}, Hn) : σ(ei) ∈ Ui}.

Then we have k

h ∩ N (e i, Ui )

= U 0 × · · · × Uk ,

i=0

and so h is open. Therefore h is a homeomorphism.

The function i∗ : Str(∆k, Hn) →C( e{0, . . . , ek }, Hn) is a continuous bijection. We now show that i∗ is open. Let K be a compact subset of ∆k, and let U be an open subset of Hn, and let N (K, U ) = {σ ∈ Str(∆k, Hn) : σ(K) c U }.

It suffices to show that i∗(N (K, U )) is open, since i∗ maps an intersection of sets to the intersection of the images of the sets. Given σ in C({e0, . . . , ek}, Hn), let σ̂ = (i∗)−1(σ). Define F : C({e0, . . . , ek}, Hn) × ∆k → Hn by , Σ k k Σ F (σ, x) = σ̂(x) = xiσ(ei) xiσ(ei) i=0

i=0

Σk

where x0 = 1 — i=0 xi. Then F is continuous, in view of the homeomorphism h : C({e0, . . . , ek}, Hn) → (Hn)k+1. Hence F −1(U ) is open.

Let σ be in i∗(N (K, U )). Then σ̂ (K ) c U , and so (σ, x) is in F −1(U ) for each x in K. Hence, for each x in K, there is an open subset Uσ,x of C({e0, . . . , ek}, Hn) of the form Uσ,x =

k

∩ N (ei, Ux,i)

i=0

where Ux,i is an open subset of Hn for each i = 0, . . . , k, and there is an open subset Vσ,x of ∆k such that (σ, x) ∈ Uσ,x × Vσ,x c F −1(U ).

281

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

As K is compact, there is a finite subset Kσ of K such that { Vσ,x : x ∈ Kσ } covers K. Let Uσ = ∩{Uσ,x : x ∈ Kσ} =

k

∩ N ei, ∩{Ux,i : x ∈ Kσ} .

i= 0

Then we have σ ∈ Uσ c i∗(N (K, U )).

Hence i∗(N (K, U )) is open in C( {e0, . . . , ek }, Hn). Thus i∗ is open, and so i∗ is a homeomorphism.

Exercise 11.7.14 Prove that the straightening function Strk : C∞(∆k, Hn) → Str(∆k, Hn) is continuous for each k.

Solution: Let i : {e0, . . . , ek} → ∆k be the inclusion map. Then i∗ : C∞(∆k, Hn) → C({e0, . . . , ek}, Hn) is continuous with respect to the compact-open topology. Now Strk : C∞(∆k, Hn) → Str(∆k, Hn) is the composite of i∗ : C∞(∆k, Hn) → C({e0, . . . , ek}, Hn) followed by the homeomorphism (i∗)−1 : C({e0, . . . , ek}, Hn) → Str(∆k, Hn) of Exercise 11.7.13. Therefore Strk is continuous for each k with respect to the compact-open topology.

By Exercise 11.7.12, the compact-open topology on Str(∆k, Hn) is the C1 topology. Therefore Strk is continuous with respect to the C 1 topology, since the C1 topology on C∞(∆k, Hn) contains the compact-open topology.

Exercise 11.7.15 Let M = Hn/Γ be a space-form. Prove that Str(∆k, M ) is homeomorphic to (Hn)k+1/Γ, where Γ acts diagonally on the left of (Hn)k+1 as a discontinuous group of isometries. Conclude that Str(∆k, M ) is a connected (k + 1)n-dimensional manifold for each k.

Solution: We have a homeomorphism H : Str(∆k, Hn) → (Hn)k+1 defined by H(σ) = (σ(e0), . . . , σ(ek)).

282

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

The group Γ acts on the left of Str(∆k, Hn) by composition, and acts diagonally on the left of (Hn)k+1. If g is in Γ and σ is in Str(∆k, Hn), then H(gσ) = (gσ(e0), . . . , gσ(ek)) =

g(σ(e0), . . . , σ(ek)) = gH(σ).

Hence H induces a homeomorphism H : Str(∆k, Hn)/Γ → (Hn)k+1/Γ.

The orbits of the action of Γ on Str(∆k, Hn) are the fibers of π∗ : Str(∆k, Hn) → Str(∆k, M ). Now π∗ is an open map by Exercise 11.7.11. Hence π∗ induces a homeomorphism π∗ : Str(∆k, Hn)/Γ → Str(∆k, M ). Therefore, the composition Hπ−∗1 : Str(∆k, M ) → (Hn)k+1/Γ is a homeomorphism.

Define a metric on (H n)k+1 by d(x, y) = max{d(xi, yi) : i = 1, . . . , k + 1}.

If g is in Γ, then d(gx, gy) = max{d(gxi, gyi) : i = 1, . . . , k + 1} = max{d(xi, yi) : i = 1, . . . , k + 1} = d(x, y).

Hence Γ acts via isometries. Moreover Γ acts freely and the orbits of Γ are closed and discrete, and so Γ acts discontinuously on (Hn)k+1 by Theorem 5.3.4. Now, the quotient map πk : (Hn)k+1 → (Hn)k+1/Γ is a covering projection by Theorem 8.1.3. Therefore (Hn)k+1/Γ is a connected (k + 1)n-manifold.

Exercise 11.7.16 Let σ be in Str(∆k, Hn). Prove that the definition of the measure Avg(σ) does not depend on the choice of the reflection ρ of Hn. Solution: Let ρ1 and ρ2 be reflections of Hn. By Lemma 8 of §11.7, we have Smr(ρ1σ) = Smr(ρ2ρ1−1ρ1σ) = Smr(ρ2σ).

Exercise 11.7.17 Let σ be in Str(∆k, Hn) and let Avg(σ) be the average of σ over M . Prove that Avg(σ) = Vol(M ).

Solution: We have 1 Smr(σ) — Smr(ρσ) .

2 Hence Avg(σ)+ = Smr(σ)/2 and Avg(σ)− = Smr(ρσ)/2. Therefore, we have 1 1 Smr(σ) + Smr(ρσ) Avg(σ) = 2 2 1 1 = Vol(M ) + Vol(M ) = Vol(M ).

2 2 Avg(σ) =

283

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

11.8

Mostow Rigidity

Exercise 11.8.1 Let k and l be the constants in the definition of a pseudoisometry of an unbounded metric space X. Prove that k ≥ 1 and l ≥ 0.

Solution: For each x, y in X, we have k−1d(x, y) — l ≤ d(f (x), f (y)) ≤ kd(x, y).

If x = y, then we have —l ≤ 0, and so l ≥ 0. If x /= y, then kd(x, y) ≥ d(f (x), f (y) ≥ 0, and so k > 0. Now k−1d(x, y) ≤ kd(x, y) + l implies that d(x, y) ≤ k2d(x, y) + kl. Hence, for x /= y, we have 1 ≤ k2 +

kl . d(x, y)

As X is unbounded, we deduce that 1 ≤ k2, and so k ≥ 1.

Exercise 11.8.2 Let X be an unbounded metric space. Prove that a function f :X → X is a pseudo-isometry if and only if there are constants k and b such that d(f (x), f (y)) ≤ kd(x, y) for all x, y in X and k−1d(x, y) ≤ d(f (x), f (y))

if d(x, y) ≥ b.

Solution: Suppose k and b are constants such that if x, y are in X, then d(f (x), f (y)) ≤ kd(x, y) and if d(x, y) ≥ b, then k−1d(x, y) ≤ d(f (x), f (y)).

As X is unbounded, we have k−1d(x, y) ≤ d(f (x), f (y)) ≤ kd(x, y) for some distinct x, y in X. Hence k ≥ 1. Let l = bk. If d(x, y) ≤ b, then d(x, y) — bk2 ≤ 0, whence k−1d(x, y) — k−1(bk2) ≤ 0, and so

k−1d(x, y) — l ≤ d(f (x), f (y)).

284

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Therefore, for all x, y in X, we have k−1d(x, y) — l ≤ d(f (x), f (y)) ≤ kd(x, y), and so f is a pseudo-isometry.

Conversely, suppose f is a pseudo-isometry. Then there are constants k and l such that k−1d(x, y) — l ≤ d(f (x), f (y)) ≤ kd(x, y).

By Exercise 11.8.1, we have that ≥ k 1 and l ≥ 0. Suppose d(x, y)≥ 2kl. Then we have 1 l d(x, y) — d(x, y) ≤ d(f (x), f (y)). k d(x, y) Hence, we have 1 l d(x, y) — d(x, y) ≤ d(f (x), f (y)). k 2kl Therefore 1 2k

d(x, y) ≤ d(f (x), f (y)) ≤ 2kd(x, y).

Exercise 11.8.3 Let L be a hyperbolic line of Hn and let ρ : Hn → L be the nearest point retraction. Prove that ρ does not increase distances.

Solution: We pass to the upper half-space model U n of hyperbolic space.

Without loss of generality, we may assume L is the nth axis of U n . Then ρ(x) = x| e|n by Exercise 4.6.3. That ρ does not increase distances follows from Exercise 4.6.4.

Exercise 11.8.4 Let L be a hyperbolic line of Dn passing through 0, and let ρ : Dn → L be the nearest point retraction. Prove that ρ is the Euclidean orthogonal projection of Dn onto L. Solution: If x is not on L, then the line determined by x and ρ(x) is the unique line passing through x and orthogonal to L. By Exercise 6.1.3, the hyperplane of Dn passing through ρ(x) that is orthogonal to L in Dn lies in the Euclidean hyperplane passing through ρ(x) that is orthogonal to L in En. Therefore ρ is the Euclidean orthogonal projection of Dn onto L. Exercise 11.8.5 Let ρ be as in Exercise 11.8.3, and let x, y, z be collinear points of Hn with y between x and z. Prove that ρ(y) is between ρ(x) and ρ(z).

Solution: We may assume L is the nth axis in Dn. Now x, y, z lie on Euclidean line segment [x, z], and so y = (1 — t)x + tz for some t in [0, 1]. Observe that ρ(y) = ynen = (1 — t)xn + tzn en = (1 — t)ρ(x) + tρ(z).

Hence ρ(y) is between ρ(x) and ρ(z).

285

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 11.8.6 Let a be a point on a hyperbolic line L of Hn and suppose that r > 0. Prove that the sphere S(a, r) is tangent to ∂N (L, r).

Solution: We may assume that L is the nth axis in U n . Then ∂N (L, r) has the equation cosh r = |x |/xn by Exercise 4.6.3. Therefore ∂N (L, r) is a Euclidean cone, with axis L, minus its cone point the origin. Let R be an open Euclidean ray from the origin that lies in ∂N (L, r). Then the nearest point retraction ρ : U n →L maps R bijectively onto L. Hence, there is a unique point x on R such that ρ(x) = a. Then d(a, x) = r. As B(a, r) cN (L, r), the ray R meets S(a, r) just at x. Hence R is tangent to S(a, r) at x. Therefore ∂N (L, r) is tangent to S(a, r).

Exercise 11.8.7 Let f : B2 → B2 be a pseudo-isometry. Prove that f∞ : S1 → S1 is a homeomorphism.

Solution: The map f∞ : S1 → S1 is a continuous injection, and so is an open map by Invariance of Domain. Therefore f∞ is surjective, since S1 is compact and connected. Thus f∞ is a homeomorphism.

Exercise 11.8.8 Let u0, . . . , un and v0, . . . , vn be the vertices of two regular ideal n-simplices in Bn. Prove that there is a unique Möbius transformation of g of Bn such that gui = vi for each i.

Solution: Assume first that un = vn. Then we may pass to the upper halfspace model U n and assume that un = vn = ∞. By Lemma 3 of §11.4, we deduce that u0, . . . , un−1 are the vertices of a regular Euclidean (n — 1)-simplex in En−1 and v0, . . . , vn−1 are the vertices of a regular Euclidean (n— 1)-simplex in En−1. Hence, there is a Euclidean similarity φ of En−1 such that φ(ui) = vi for i = 0, . . . , n — 1. Let φˆ : U n →U n be the Poincar´e extension of φ. Then φˆ is a Möbius transformation of Un such that φ̂(u i ) = vi for i = 0, . . . , n.

Now return to the general case in Bn. As O(n) acts transitively on Sn−1, there is a Möbius transformation ψ of Bn such that ψ(un) = un. Then the points ψ(u0), . . . , ψ(un) are the vertices of a regular ideal n-simplex in Bn, since ψ restricts to an isometry of Bn. By the first case, there is a Möbius transformation φ of Bn such that φ(ψ(ui)) = vi for i = 0, . . . , n. The points u0, . . . , un are the vertices of a regular Euclidean n-simplex by Theorem 6.5.19.

Hence u0, . . . , un are affinely independent. Therefore φψ is unique by Exercise 4.7.13.

Exercise 11.8.9 Let G be the group generated by the reflections in the sides of a regular ideal n-simplex in Bn. Prove that G is discrete if and only if n ≤ 3.

Solution: If n = 1, then G = 1{ .} If n = 2 or 3, then the dihedral angle of ∆ is 0 or π/3, respectively, and so G is discrete by Theorem 7.1.3.

Now assume n > 3 and on the contrary that G is discrete. We pass to U n and without loss of generality, we may assume that ∞ is a vertex of ∆. The link of ∞ in ∆ is a Euclidean regular n — 1-simplex ∆∞. The group H generated 286

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

by reflecting in the sides of ∆∞ is discrete, since the stabilizer subgroup G∞ of G is discrete. By the proof of Lemma 4 of §11.4, the dihedral angle θ of ∆∞ is arccos(1/(n — 1)) with n — 1 > 2. Hence 60○ < θ < 90○.

Assume first that n = 4. Without loss of generality, we may assume that the origin 0 is a vertex of ∆∞ and the link of 0 in ∆∞ is an equilateral triangleΔ 0 in S2 with dihedral angle θ. The group K generated by reflecting in the sides of Δ0 is a discrete subgroup of O(3), and so K is finite. From the classification of the finite subgroups of O(3), we conclude that θ = 72○. But arccos(1/3) < 72○ which is a contradiction.

Now assume n > 4. Let x be a point in the interior of an (n — 4)-face F of ∆∞. Let r > 0 be such that r is less that the distance from x to any side of ∆∞ not containing x. Then F∩ S(x, r) is a great (n —5)-sphere in S(x, r). Let Σ(x, r) be the great 2-sphere of S(x, r) that is pointwise orthogonal to F ∩S(x, r). Now ∆∞ Σ(x, ∩ r) is an equilateral triangle in Σ(x, r) whose dihedral angle is θ. Without loss of generality, we may assume that x = 0 and r = 1. Then the same argument as in the case n = 4 leads to a contradiction, since if n > 4, we have that arccos(1/(n — 1)) > 72○.

Exercise 11.8.10 Let Hn/Γ and Hn/H be compact, orientable, hyperbolic space-forms, and let ξ : Γ →H be an isomorphism. Prove that there is an element f of I(Hn) such that ξ(g) = fgf −1 for each g in Γ.

Solution: As Hn/Γ is aspherical, there is a homotopy equivalence φ : Hn/Γ → Hn/H such that φ∗ = ξ where φ∗ is as in the proof of Theorem 11.8.5. The proof of Theorem 11.8.5 shows that there is an element f of I(Hn) such that φ∗(g) = fgf −1 for each g in Γ.

287

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 12

Geometrically Finite n-Manifolds 12.1

Limit Sets

Exercise 12.1.1 Let G be a subgroup M(Bn) and let H be a subgroup of G of finite index. Prove that L(H) = L(G).

Solution: As H c G, we have L(H) c L(G). Let a be in L(G). Then there is a sequence {g i } i∞= 1 of elements of G such that limi→∞ gi0 = a. Now some coset Hg of H in G contains infinitely many of the elements of {g i } i∞= 1 . By passing to a subsequence, we may assume that gi is in Hg for each i. Then gi = hig for some hi in H. Now we have lim hi(g0) = lim gi0 = a. i→∞

i→∞

Therefore a is in L(H). Thus L(H) = L(G).

Exercise 12.1.2 Let G be a subgroup M(Bn) such that G has a hyperbolic element and let F be the set of all fixed points of hyperbolic elements of G. Prove that L(G) = F .

Solution: We have that F c L(G) be Theorem 12.1.1. As L(G) is closed, F c L(G). If a is a fixed point of a hyperbolic element h of G and if g is an element of G, then ga is a fixed point of the hyperbolic element ghg−1 of G. Hence, the set F is G-invariant, and so F is G-invariant. The proof of Theorem 12.1.3 shows that L(G) c F . Therefore L(G) = F .

Exercise 12.1.3 Let G be a subgroup of M(Bn). Prove that L(G) consists of a single point if and only if G is elementary of parabolic type and all the elements of G are either elliptic or parabolic.

288

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Suppose L(G) = {a }. As L(G) is G-invariant, Ga = {a }, and so G is elementary. The group G is not of elliptic type by Theorem 12.1.4. The group G does not contain a hyperbolic element by Theorem 12.1.1. Hence G is not of hyperbolic type by Theorem 5.5.6. Therefore G is elementary of parabolic type and all the elements of G are either elliptic or parabolic.

Conversely, suppose G is elementary of parabolic type and G has no hyperbolic elements. We pass to the upper half-space model U n . Then we may assume that G is a subgroup of I(En) that leaves En−1 invariant by Theorem 5.5.3 and Lemma 1 of §4.7. Hence G leaves invariant the horizontal horosphere Σ passing through en. Then we have L(G) = Gen ∩ Ê n− 1 c Σ ∩ Ê n− 1 = {∞}.

Now L(G) is nonempty by Theorem 12.1.4. Hence L(G) = {∞}.

Exercise 12.1.4 Let G be the subgroup of M(Un) generated by the parabolic translation f (x) = x + e1 and the hyperbolic translation h(x) = 2x. Prove that G is elementary of parabolic type and L(G) = Ê 1 .

Solution: The group G is clearly parabolic with fixed point ∞ . As hfh−1 = f 2, all the elements of G are of the form fkhA for some integers k and l. As fkhA(x) = 2Ax + ke1, we see that fkhA is hyperbolic for all l = 0 with fixed k points 2−l−1 e 1 and ∞. Let F be the set of fixed points of hyperbolic elements of G. Then L(G) = F by Exercise 12.1.2. Therefore L(G) = Re1 ∪ {∞} = Ê 1 .

Exercise 12.1.5 Let G be a subgroup of M(Bn). Prove that L(G) consists of two points if and only if G is elementary of hyperbolic type.

Solution: Suppose L(G) = a, { b }. Then Ga ca,{ b ,}and so G is elementary.

The group G is not of elliptic type by Theorem 12.1.4. As G { a, }b = {a, b}, the group G is not of parabolic type. Therefore G is of hyperbolic type.

Conversely, suppose G is elementary of hyperbolic type. Then there is a G-invariant hyperbolic line N of Bn by Theorem 5.5.6. Let x be a point of N and let with a and b be the endpoints of N . Then we have L(G) = Gx ∩ Sn−1 c N ∩ Sn−1 = {a, b}.

Now L(G) = {a, b} by Theorems 12.1.4 and 12.1.5.

12.2

Limit Sets of Discrete Groups

Exercise 12.2.1 Let Γ be a discrete subgroup of M(Bn) with a parabolic element. Prove that the set F of all fixed points of parabolic elements of Γ is a countable dense subset of L(Γ).

Solution: Assume first that Γ is elementary. Then Γ is of parabolic type and Γ has a unique fixed point a in Sn−1 by Theorem 5.5.3; moreover L(Γ) ={ a} by the proof of Theorem 12.2.1.

289

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Hence, we may assume that Γ is nonelementary. Each parabolic element of Γ fixes a unique point in Sn−1. Hence F is countable, since Γ is countable by Corollary 3 of §5.3.

If a is fixed by a parabolic element f of Γ and g is in Γ, then ga is fixed by the parabolic element gfg−1 of Γ. Hence F is a Γ-invariant subset of Sn−1.

Therefore F is a closed Γ-invariant subset of Sn−1. Hence L(Γ) c Fc L(Γ) by Theorem 12.1.3. Therefore L(Γ) = F . Thus F is a countable dense subset of L(Γ).

Exercise 12.2.2 Let Γ be a nonelementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn). Prove that Γ has an infinite number of hyperbolic elements, no two of which have a common fixed point.

Solution: Let F be the set of fixed points of hyperbolic elements of Γ. Then F = L(Γ) by Theorem 12.2.4. By Theorem 12.2.5, the set L(Γ) is perfect.

Hence L(Γ) is infinite, since L(Γ) has no isolated points. Therefore F is infinite.

Hence Γ has an infinite number of hyperbolic elements such that not two have the same fixed points; moreover, no two have a common fixed point by Theorem 5.5.4.

Exercise 12.2.3 Let g be an element of M(Bn) such that for some x in Sn−1 and radius r with 0 < r < 2, we have g(C(x, r) ∩ Sn−1) c B(x, r).

Prove that g is hyperbolic and that g fixes a point of B(x, r) ∩ Sn−1.

Solution: The transformation g maps the closed — (n 1)-ball C(x, ∩ r) Sn−1 n −1 n−1 into B(x, r) ∩S , and so g fixes a point of B(x, r)∩S

by Brouwer’s fixed point theorem.

We pass to the upper half-space model U n , and without loss of generality, we may assume that g fixes ∞. Then g is a Euclidean similarity of En by Theorem 4.4.4. Moreover g maps the (n — 2)-sphere Σ in En−1, corresponding to S(x, r) ∩ Sn−1, to a sphere containing Σ in its interior. Therefore g is not an isometry. Hence g is hyperbolic by Lemma 1 of §4.7.

Exercise 12.2.4 Let Γ be a nonelementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn) and let x, y be distinct limit points of Γ. Prove that for each r > 0, there is a hyperbolic element h of Γ such that B(x, r) contains one of the fixed points of h and B(y, r) contains the other. Hint: See Exercise 4.7.17.

Solution: By shrinking r, if necessary, we may assume that B(x, r) and B(y, r) are disjoint. By Theorem 12.2.4, there are hyperbolic elements p and q of Γ such that p fixes a point u of B(x, r) and q fixes a point v of B(y, r). If p fixes a point of B(y, r) or if q fixes a point of B(x, r), we are done, so assume otherwise. By replacing p or q with their inverses, if necessary, we may assume that u and v are attractive fixed points of p and q, respectively.

290

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

By Exercise 12.2.2, the is a hyperbolic element f of Γ such that f and p have no common fixed points. Let a be the attractive fixed point of f and let b be the repulsive fixed point of f . Choose l sufficiently large so that the attractive fixed point c = pAa of g = pAfp−A and the repulsive fixed point d = pAb of g are in B(x, r). Choose m sufficiently large so that qmc is in B(y, r). Set h = qm and e = hc. Choose positive radii s and t such that C(d, s) c B(x, r) and C(e, t) c B(y, r). As d /∈C(e, t), we have that gn→ c uniformly on C(e, t) as n → ∞. As h−1(B(e, t)) is an open neighborhood of c, we have for all sufficiently large n that gn(C(e, t))ch−1(B(e, t)), and so hgn(C(e, t)) c B(e, t). As e /∈C(d, s), we have that c /∈ h−1(C(d, s)). As g−n →d uniformly on h−1(C(d, s)) as n → ∞, we have for all sufficiently large n that g−n(h−1(C(d, s))) cB(d, s). Choose n sufficiently large so that hgn(C(e, t)) c B(e, t) and g−nh−1(C(d, s)) c B(d, s). Then hgn is a hyperbolic element of Γ with fixed points in B(e, t) and in B(d, s) by Exercise 12.2.3.

Exercise 12.2.5 Prove that a perfect subset of En is uncountable.

Solution: Let X be a perfect subset of En. On the contrary, suppose that X is countable. Now X is locally compact, since X is closed in En. For each x in X, let Ux = X — {x }. Then Ux is open in X and Ux is dense in X, since x is a limit point of X. As the intersection of any countable family of open dense subsets of a locally compact space is dense, ∅ =∩{ Ux : x∈ X } is dense in X, which is a contradiction. Therefore X is uncountable.

Exercise 12.2.6 Let Γ be a discrete subgroup of M(Bn) such that Bn/Γ is compact. Prove that Γ is of the first kind by a direct argument. Hint: Use Theorem 6.6.9.

Solution: Let P be a fundamental polyhedron for Γ containing 0. Then P is compact by Theorem 6.6.9. Hence δ = diam(P ) is finite. Let x be a point of Sn−1, and let P (x, r) be the hyperplane of Bn whose nearest point to 0 points in the direction of x and which is a distance r from 0. Let xi be a point in P (x, 3iδ) for each positive integer i. Then there is a gi in Γ such that xi is in giP . The polyhedra {giP } i∞= 1 are pairwise disjoint. Therefore, the elements ∞ g { i }i∞= 1 are distinct. The polyhedra {giP } i = 1 converge to x, and so the orbit n− 1 Γ0 accumulates at x. Thus L(Γ) = S .

Exercise 12.2.7 Let Γ be a nonelementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn), let P be an m-plane of Bn, with m > 1, and suppose that Γ leaves no l-plane of Bn invariant for all l < m. Prove that Γ leaves P invariant if and only if L(Γ) c P ∩ Sn−1.

Solution: Suppose Γ leaves P invariant. Let x be a point of P . By Theorem 12.1.2, we have L(Γ) = Γx ∩ Sn−1 c P ∩ Sn−1.

Conversely, suppose L(Γ) c P ∩ Sn−1. Then C(Γ) c P . As C(Γ) is Γ-invariant, ⟨C(Γ) ∩ Bn⟩ is Γ-invariant. As Γ leaves no l-plane of Bn invariant for l < m, we have that ⟨C(Γ) ∩ Bn⟩ = P . Thus Γ leaves P invariant.

291

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 12.2.8 Let K be a closed hyperbolic convex subset of Bn that contains a point of Bn and let ρK : Bn → K be the nearest point retraction. Prove that if x, y are in Bn, then d(ρK(x), ρK(y)) ≤ d(x, y).

Solution: Let ρ = ρK. By applying a Möbius transformation of Bn, we may assume, without loss of generality, that ρ(x) = 0. If ρ(y) = 0, then d(ρ(x), ρ(y)) ≤d(x, y), so assume ρ(y) =/ 0. As K is hyperbolic convex, the line segment [0, ρ(y)] is contained in K. If x = 0, the angle between [0, ρ(y)] and [0, x] is at least π/2, since otherwise the smallest sphere centered at x that meets K would meet the interior of [0, ρ(y)] at a point of K nearer to x than 0. Likewise, by moving ρ(y) to 0, we see that if ρ(y) = y, the angle between [0, ρ(y)] and [ρ(y), y] is at least π/2. Now let P and Q be the hyperplanes of Bn passing through 0 and ρ(y), respectively, that are perpendicular to [0, ρ(y)].

Then the points x and y are on opposite sides of the region between P and Q. Hence d(ρ(x), ρ(y)) ≤ d(x, y). See Figure 12.2.1 with x inside Bn. Exercise 12.2.9 Let K be a closed, nonempty, hyperbolic convex subset of Bn. Prove that the nearest point retraction ρK : Bn → K is continuous.

Solution: By Lemma 3 of 12.2, it suffices to prove that ρ = ρk is continuous § at x in Sn−1 ∩ K. Suppose x is in Sn−1∩ K. Then ρ(x) = x. If K = {x} , then ρ is constant, and so ρ is continuous. Assume K has another point. Then K contains a point of Bn. We pass to the upper half-space model U n , and we may assume, without loss of generality, that x = ∞ and en is in K. If r > 0, let N (∞, r) = U n — B(0, r). Suppose r > 0. We need to find s > 0 such that ρ(N (∞, s)) c N (∞, r). We may assume that r > 1.

Consider the horoball B based at se1 with s > 0, such that B is tangent to S(0, r) and to the vertical line (0, ∞). The Euclidean center of B is se1 + sen and the Euclidean radius of B is s. As B and S √ ( 0 , r) are invariant under the reflection of En in the hyperplane P ((—e1 + en)/ 2, 0) t√hat transposes e1 and en, we see that B and S(0, r) are tangent at r(e1 + en)/ 2. Hence r s— √ 2 and so

2

+ s—

r 2

2

= s2,

√ s2 — 2 2 rs + r2 = 0.

√ √ √ , 2 2r ± 8r2 — 4r2 2 = 2r ± r. √ As s > 1, we have s = 1 + 2 r.

We claim that ρ(N (∞, s)) c N (∞, r). Let y be in N (∞, s). Then |y| ≥ s.

If y is in the ray [en, ∞), then ρ(y) = y and y is in N (∞, r). Suppose y is in U n — [en, ∞). The point |y|en is the nearest point of (0, ∞) to y. Hence, the line segment [y, |y|en] is orthogonal to (0, ∞). Let t = d(y, |y|en). Then S(y, t) is tangent to [en, ∞) at |y|en. As |y|en is in K, we have that ρ(y) is in C(y, t).

Therefore

s =

292

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Let y′ be the point of En−1 so that the ray (y′,| y|en] extends [y,| y| en]. Then y| ′ |= y| | ≥ s. Let C(y′) be the closed horoball based at y′ that is tangent to (0, ∞ ) at | y| en. Then C(y, t) c C(y′) c N ( ∞, r). Hence ρ(y) is in N (∞ , r).

Now suppose y is in En−1. Let C(y) be the closed horoball based at y that is tangent to (0, ∞) at |y|en. As |y|en is in K, we have that ρ(y) is in C(y). As C(y) c N (∞, r), we have that ρ(y) is in N (∞, r). Thus ρ(N (∞, s)) c N (∞, r).

Therefore ρ is continuous at ∞.

Exercise 12.2.10 Let Γ be a discrete subgroup of M(Bn) and let U be an open subset of Sn−1 on which Γ acts discontinuously. Prove that O(Γ) contains U . Conclude that Bn ∪ O(Γ) is the largest open subset of Bn on which Γ acts discontinuously.

Solution: The set U does not contain a fixed point of a nonelliptic element of Γ, since Γ acts discontinuously on U . Hence U does not contain a limit point of Γ by Theorem 12.2.2. Therefore Uc O(Γ). Thus Bn ∪O(Γ) is the largest open subset of Bn on which Γ acts discontinuously.

Exercise 12.2.11 Let Γ be a discrete subgroup of M(Bn). Prove that a point x of Sn−1 is in O(Γ) if and only if there is an open neighborhood U of x in Sn−1 such that U ∩ gU /= ∅ for only finitely many g in Γ.

Solution: Suppose x in O(Γ). By Theorem 12.2.9, there is an open neighborhood U of x in O(Γ) such that for each g in Γ, either U ∩ gU = or gU = U and gx = x. If gx = x, then g is elliptic by Theorem 12.1.1. The stabilizer Γx is finite by Lemma 1 of§ 12.2. Therefore U∩ gU /= ∅ for only finitely many g in Γ.

Conversely, suppose U is an open neighborhood of x in Sn−1 such that U ∩gU =/ ∅ for only finitely many g in Γ. Then U does not contain a fixed point of a nonelliptic element of Γ. Hence U does not contain a limit point of Γ by Theorem 12.2.2. Therefore U c O(Γ), and so x is in O(Γ).

Exercise 12.2.12 Let P be a convex fundamental polyhedron for a discrete subgroup Γ of M(Bn). Prove that P ∩ Sn−1 — ∂P c O(Γ).

Solution: Let a be in P ∩ Sn− 1 — ∂P . As ∂P is closed in Bn, there is an r > 0 such that B(a, r) ∩ Bn c Bn — ∂P . As a is in P , there is a sequence {x i } i∞= 1 of distinct points of P converging to a. As a is not in ∂P , at most finitely many elements of{ xi}i∞= 1 are in ∂P . Hence, there is an i such that xi is in B(a, r) ∩ P ○. As B(a, r) ∩ Bn c Bn —∂P and B(a, r) ∩Bn is connected, we deduce that B(a, r)∩ Bn c P ○.

On the contrary, suppose a is a limit point of Γ. Then there is a sequence {g i } i∞= 1 of elements of Γ such that gi(0) → a. Now there is a j such that gi(0) is in B(a, r) ∩ Bn for all i ≥ j. As gi(0) = gig−j1gj(0), and P ○ ∩ gP ○ = ∅ for all g= / 1 in Γ, we conclude that gi = gj for all i ≥ j. Hence gi(0) →gj(0), which is a contradiction. Therefore a is in O(Γ).

293

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 12.2.13 Prove that the free group Γ′ in Example 5 is not a classical Schottky subgroup of M(B3).

Solution: The free group Γ′ is of the first kind. Let Γ be a classical Schottky subgroup of M(B3) of rank 2, and let P be a Schottky polyhedron for Γ with four sides. Now P ○ is a Γ-packing by the proof of Theorem 12.2.17. This implies that the interior (P ∩ S2)○ of P ∩ S2 in S2 is in O(Γ) by Exercise 12.2.11. Now (P ∩S2)○ is the complement in S2 of the four closed disks bounded by the sides of P . Therefore (P ∩S2)○ is nonempty. Hence Γ is of the second kind. Therefore Γ′ is not a classical Schottky subgroup of M(B3).

Exercise 12.2.14 Let g1, . . . , gm be nonelliptic elements of M(Bn) such that no two elements have a common fixed point. Prove that there are positive integers k1, . . . , km such that gk11 , . . . , gkmm generate a classical Schottky group of rank m.

Solution: Let x1, . . . , xA be the fixed points of g1, . . . , gm in the same order with repulsive fixed points of hyperbolic elements before attractive fixed points.

As x1, . . . , xA are distinct, there is an r > 0 with r < π/2 such that{ C(xi, r) }Ai=1 in Sn−1 are disjoint. Let xi be a repulsive fixed point of a hyperbolic element gj. Now S(xi, r) in Sn−1 bounds a hyperplane Sj of Bn. Choose kj sufficiently kj kj ′ large so that g j (S(xi, r)) c C(xi+1, r). Let Sj = gj (Sj).

Now let xi be a fixed point of a parabolic element gj. Let Pj be the hyperplane of Bn bounded by S(xi, r) in Sn−1. As r < π/2, we have that xi and 0 are on opposite sides of Pj. We pass to the upper half-space model U n and position xi at ∞ with en corresponding to 0. Then Pj is a hemispherical hyperplane of U n with 0 as Euclidean center and en inside Pj. Now gj acts as a fixed point free isometry of En by the proof of Theorem 4.7.2. By Theorem 5.4.1, there is a line L in En−1 on which gj acts as a nontrivial translation. Let Sj be a vertical hyperplane of U n which is normal to the line L, disjoint from Pj, with Pj on the side of Sj in the direction that gj translates L. Choose kj sufficiently large so that gkj (Sj) is disjoint from Pj, with Pj on the side of gkj (Sj) in the j

j

opposite direction that gj translates L. Let S′ = gkj (Sj). Then Pj lies in the j

j

region between Sj and Sj′ , and so en is in the region between Sj and Sj′ .

Now return to the conformal model Bn. Then the hyperplanes S1, . . . , Sm, ′ S1 , . . . , S m′ are disjoint and are disjoint from 0. Let P be the intersection of all the half-spaces of Bn bounded by S1, . . . , Sm, S1′ , . . . , S m′ that contain 0. Thenj P is a Schottky polyhedron with sides S1, . . . , Sm, S′ , . . . , S′ . The element gk 1

m

j

pairs side Sj to S′j with P ∩ gkj j (P ) = S′ jfor each j = 1, . . . , m, and so the group k1 km generated by g , . . . , g 1

m

is a classical Schottky group of rank m.

Exercise 12.2.15 Let Γ be a nonelementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn).

Prove that Γ contains a classical Schottky group of rank m for each m.

Solution: By Exercise 12.2.2, the group Γ has an infinite sequence {hi }i∞= 1 of hyperbolic elements such that no two have the same fixed points. By Ex294

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

ercise 12.2.14, for each m ≥ 1, there are positive integers k1, . . . , km such that hk1 , . . . , hkm generate a classical Schottky group of rank m.

1

12.3

m

Limit Points

Exercise 12.3.1 Let a be a conical limit point of a subgroup G of M(Bn).

Prove that ga is a conical limit point of G for each g in Γ.

Solution: Suppose there is a point x of Bn, a sequence g { i i}∞= 1 of elements of G, a hyperbolic ray R in Bn ending at a, and an r > 0 such that gix→ a within the r-neighborhood N (R, r) of R in Bn. Then ggix → ga within the r-neighborhood N (gR, r) of the hyperbolic ray gR in Bn ending at ga. Hence ga is a conical limit point of G. Exercise 12.3.2 Let a be a limit point of a subgroup G of M(Bn). Prove that a is a conical limit point of G if and only if there is a sequence {g i } i∞= 1 of elements of G such that{gi(0) i∞ }= 1 converges to a within a Euclidean hypercone C whose vertex is a and whose axis passes through 0.

Solution: Suppose a is a conical limit point of G. By Theorems 12.3.2 and 12.3.3, there is an r > 0 and a sequence { g i } i∞= 1 of elements of G such that gi(0) → a within N (R, r) where R = [0, a). By conjugating G be a rotation about 0, we may assume that a = en. Let L be the hyperbolic line — ( en, en) of Bn. Observe that N (L, r) is invariant under the antipodal map of Bn. Let η be the standard transformation from U n to Bn. Then η = σ√ρ where ρ is the reflection of Ê n in Ê n − 1 and σ is the inversion of Ê n in S(en, 2). We pass to U n via η−1 = ρσ. Then η−1 maps en to ∞, 0 to en, and —en to 0.

Now N = N (L, r) is the open solid cone with cone point 0 and axis L = (0, ∞) whose boundary satisfies the equation cosh r =| x | /xn by Exercise 4.6.3.

Let α be the angle between ∂N and its axis (0,∞). Then cosh r = csc α, and so sinh r = tan α. Now, the Euclidean rays from 0 on ∂N are transformed by η to open circular arcs in Bn from —en to en. As η is conformal, the tangent lines to these circular arcs at—en and at en from the angle α with L. Therefore N (L, r) in Bn is contained inside the Euclidean hypercone C whose vertex is a = en and whose axis is L = (—en, en), and whose angle between L and ∂C is α. Hence gi(0) → a within C. Now suppose { gi}i∞= 1 is a sequence of elements of G such that gi(0) → a within a Euclidean hypercone C whose vertex is a and whose axis passes through 0. By conjugating G by a rotation about 0, we may assume that a = en. The cone C intersects Sn−1 in an (n — 2)-sphere Σ whose (n — 1)-plane in En is normal to en. Pass to the upper half-space model U n . Then η−1 maps en to ∞ and 0 to en, and Σ transforms to a sphere S(0, k) in En−1. As η−1(∞) = —en, and η−1 transforms the Euclidean lines passing through en and ∞ to Euclidean lines passing through ∞ and —en, we see that η−1 transforms C to the Euclidean cone K from —en through the sphere S(0, k).

295

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Let r > 0. The set of all points that are a distance r from the line L = (0, ∞) in U n is the cone minus its cone point 0 that satisfies cosh r = |x|/xn by Exercise 4.6.3. Let α be the angle between x and en on this cone. Then cosh r = csc α, and so sinh r = tan α. Let β be the angle between K and its axis. If r is large enough so that sinh r > tan β, that is, if α > β, then ∂N (L, r) intersects K in a horizontal (n — 2)-sphere at height h > 0. Then all points x in K such that xn > h lie in N (L, r). Hence gien → ∞ within N ([hen, ∞), r) for all sufficiently large i.

Exercise 12.3.3 Let c be a cusped limit point of a discrete subgroup Γ of M(Un). Prove that gc is a cusped limit point of Γ for each g in Γ.

Solution: Let f be a parabolic element of Γ fixing c. Then gfg−1 is a parabolic element of Γ fixing gc. Let U be a cusped region for Γ based at c. Then there is an element h of M(Un) such that hc = ∞and hU is a cusped region for hΓh−1 based at∞. Now hg−1gc = ∞ and hU = hg−1gU is a cusped region for 1 1 − − hg Γgh based at ∞ . Hence gU is a cusped region for Γ based at gc. Thus gc is a cusped limit point of Γ.

Exercise 12.3.4 Let Γ be the elliptic modular subgroup of M(U 2) of all linear az+b fractional transformations g(z) = cz+d with a, b, c, d∈ Z and ad—bc = 1. Prove that the set of all cusped limit points of Γ is the set of extended rational numbers Q̂ = Q ∪ {∞}.

Solution: Let T be the generalized triangle in Figure 6.7.1. Then T is a fundamental polygon for Γ. Now ∞ is fixed by the parabolic element f (z) = z+1 of Γ and E1/Γ∞ is compact. Let r > 1, and let U (E1, r) = U 1 —N (E1, r). Then U (E1, r) is a horodisk based at ∞ at a height r above E1. As U (E1, r) c Γ∞T , we have that U (E1, r)∩gU (E1, r) = ∅for each g ∈ Γ —Γ∞. Therefore U (E1, r) is a cusped region for Γ based at∞ , and so∞ is a cusped limit point of Γ.

Let g(z) = az+b with a, b, c, d∈ Z and ad—bc = 1. Then gfg−1 is a parabolic cz+d element of Γ with fixed point g(∞). Therefore a/c is a cusped limit point of Γ by Exercise 12.3.3. As a and c can be any pair of relatively prime integers, we have that the set of cusped limit points of Γ contains Q̂ . From the proof of Exercise 4.7.1, every fixed point of a parabolic element of Γ is contained in Q̂ .

Therefore, the set of cusped limit points of Γ is Q̂ .

Exercise 12.3.5 Let Γ be a discrete subgroup of M(Un) with a cusped limit point. Prove that the set of all cusped limit points of Γ is a countable dense subset of L(Γ).

Solution: Assume first that Γ is elementary. Then Γ is of parabolic type and Γ has a unique fixed point a in Sn−1 by Theorem 5.5.3; moreover L(Γ) ={ a} by the proof of Theorem 12.2.1. Hence, we may assume that Γ is nonelementary.

Let C be the set of all cusped limit points of Γ. Then C is countable since Γ is countable and every element of C is the unique fixed point of a parabolic element of Γ.

296

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

The set C is Γ-invariant by Exercise 12.3.3. Hence C is a closed Γ-invariant subset of Sn−1. Therefore L(Γ) c C cL(Γ) by Theorem 12.1.3. Hence C = L(Γ). Thus C is a countable dense subset of L(Γ).

Exercise 12.3.6 Prove directly that a cusped limit point of Γ is not a conical limit point.

Solution: Let c be a cusped limit point of Γ, and on the contrary, suppose c is also a conical limit point of Γ. We pass to the upper half-space model U n , and by conjugating Γ, we may assume that c = ∞. Let U (Q, r) be a cusped region for Γ based at ∞. There is an s > 0 and a sequence {g i } i∞= 1 of elements of Γ such that gien → ∞ within N ([2ren, ∞), s). If g is in Γ — Γ∞, then gU (Q, r) c N (Q, r).

As gi2ren → ∞ within N ([2ren, ∞), s), there is an index j such that the nth coordinate of gi2ren is greater than r for all i > j. As gi2ren is in U (Q, r) for all i > j, we deduce that gi is in Γ∞ for each i > j. By Theorem 5.5.5, we have that Γ∞ is a subgroup of I(En) that leaves En−1 invariant. Hence, the nth coordinate of gi2ren is 2r for all i > j; but this contradicts the fact that gi2ren → ∞ within N ([2ren, ∞), s). Thus c is not a conical limit point of Γ.

Exercise 12.3.7 Let P be a polyhedral wedge in En. Prove that the intersection of all the sides of P is an m-plane of En. Solution: Let E be the intersection of all the sides of P . Then E is an m-face of P for some m by Theorem 6.3.15. The polyhedron E has no sides by Theorem 6.3.13(4). Therefore E is an m-plane of En. Exercise 12.3.8 Let P be a polyhedral wedge in En with at least two sides.

Prove that every side of P is a polyhedral wedge.

Solution: Let E be the intersection of all the sides of P . Then E is an m-plane of En with m < n —1, since P has at least two sides. By Theorem 6.3.13(4), the set E is contained in every face of P . Let S be a side of P . Then Ec S. As m < n — 1, we have that E c∂S. Therefore S has a side containing E by Theorem 6.2.6. As E is contained in the intersection of all the sides of S, we conclude that S is a polyhedral wedge.

Exercise 12.3.9 Let P be an n-dimensional convex polyhedron in U n of finite volume. Prove that every cusp point of P is an ideal vertex.

Solution: Let c be a cusp point of P . We may assume, without loss of generality, that c =∞. Then there is an r > 0 such that B(0, r) contains all the nonvertical sides of P . Let B ={ x ∈U n : xn > r . }From the proof of Theorem 6.4.8, we have 1 Vol(P ∩ B) = Vol(ν(P ∩ ∂B)) (n — 1)rn−1 where ν : U n → En−1 is the vertical projection. Hence ν(P∩ ∂B) has finite volume. Therefore ν(P ∩∂B) is compact by Exercise 6.3.6. Hence P∩ ∂B is compact, and so c is an ideal vertex of P .

297

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

12.4

Geometrically Finite Discrete Groups

Exercise 12.4.1 Let P be a finite-sided, exact, convex, fundamental polygon for a discrete subgroup Γ of M(B2). Prove that a cusp point c of P is a cusped limit point of Γ if and only if every element of [c] is a cusp point of P .

Solution: Let c be a cusp point of P . Suppose c is a cusped limit point of Γ. Then every element of Γc is a cusped limit point of Γ by Exercise 12.3.3.

By Theorem 12.4.3, we have [c] = P ∩Γc. Therefore, every element of [c] is a cusped limit point of Γ. Hence, every element of [c] is a bounded parabolic limit point of Γ by Corollary 2 of 12.3.

By Theorem 12.3.8, every element of [c] is a § cusp point of the polygon P .

Conversely, suppose every element of [c] is a cusp point of P . By Theorem 12.4.4, we know that c is either an ordinary point or a cusped limit point of Γ.

On the contrary, suppose c is an ordinary point of Γ. By Theorem 12.2.10, there is an r > 0 such that B(c, r) meets only finitely many members of {gP : g ∈ Γ}, say g1P, . . . , gmP . By shrinking r, if necessary, we may assume that giP is incident with c for each i = 1, . . . , m. Now c in giP implies gi −1c is in P . Hence gi−1c is in P ∩ Γc = [c]. Therefore g−i1c is a cusp point of P . Hence c is a cusp point of giP . Therefore giP has two sides incident with c for each i. Reindex so that giP and gi+1P share a common side for i = 1, . . . , m — 1. Then g1P and gmP can only have one side incident with c, which is a contradiction. Thus c is a cusped limit point of Γ.

Exercise 12.4.2 Let P be a finite-sided, exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron of finite volume for a discrete subgroup Γ of M(Bn). Prove that every ideal vertex of P is a cusped limit point of Γ.

Solution: By Theorem 12.4.4, every ideal point of P is either an ordinary point or a cusped limit point of Γ. Let v be an ideal vertex of P . On the contrary, suppose that v is an ordinary point of Γ. By Theorem 12.2.10, there is an r > 0 such that B(v, r) meets only finitely many members of {gP : g ∈ Γ}, say g1P, . . . , gmP . By shrinking r, if necessary, we may assume that giP is incident with v for each i = 1, . . . , m. Now each ideal point of giP is an ideal vertex of giP by Theorems 6.4.6 and 6.4.8. Hence v is an ideal vertex of giP for each i = 1, . . . , m. Let Σ be a horosphere based at v such that Σ c B(v, r).

Then we have Σ = B(v, r) ∩ Σ =

m

m

i= 1

i=1

∪ giP ∩ Σ =

∪ (giP ∩ Σ).

Now giP ∩Σ is compact for each i. Hence Σ is compact, which is a contradiction.

Thus v is a cusped limit point.

Exercise 12.4.3 Let P be a geometrically finite, exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron for a discrete subgroup Γ of M(Bn). A cusp of P is said to be thin if the link of its cusp point does not contain a Euclidean hypercone. Prove that a cusp point c of P is a cusped limit point of Γ if and only if every element of [c] is a cusp point of a thin cusp of P .

298

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let c be a cusp point of P . Suppose c is a cusped limit point of Γ.

Then every element of Γc is a cusped limit point of Γ by Exercise 12.3.3. By Theorem 12.4.3, we have that [c] = P ∩ Γc. Therefore, every element of [c] is a cusped limit point of Γ. Hence, every element of [c] is a bounded parabolic limit point of Γ by Corollary 2 of 12.3.

By Theorem 12.3.8, every element of § [c] is a cusp point of the polygon P .

Let b be in [c], and let Σ be a horosphere based at b such that Σ meets just the sides of P incident with b. We pass to the upper half-space model U n , and we may assume that b =∞. As b is a cusped limit point, b is the fixed point of a parabolic element f of Γ. The polyhedra {fkP ∩ Σ } i∞= 1 = {fk(P ∩ Σ ) } i∞= 1 have disjoint interiors in Σ. Hence, by the same argument as in the proof of Lemma 3 of §12.3, the polyhedron P ∩ Σ does not contain a Euclidean hypercone.

Therefore P ∩ Σ is the link of a thin cusp of P . Thus b is the cusp point of a thin cusp of P .

Conversely, suppose that every point of [c] is the cusp point of a thin cusp of P . By Theorem 12.4.4, we know that c is either an ordinary point or a cusped limit point of Γ. On the contrary, suppose that c is an ordinary point of Γ. By Theorem 12.2.10, there is an r > 0 such that B(c, r) meets only finitely many members of {gP : g ∈ Γ}, say g1P, . . . , gmP . By shrinking r, if necessary, we may assume that giP is incident with c for each i = 1, . . . , m. Now c in giP implies gi−1c is in P . Hence gi−1c is in P ∩ Γc = [c]. Therefore gi−1c is a cusp point of a thin cusp of P . Hence c is a cusp point of a thin cusp of giP for each i = 1, . . . , m. Let Σ be a horosphere based at c such that Σ c B(c, r). Then we have m m Σ = B(c, r) ∩ Σ = ∪ giP ∩ Σ = ∪ (giP ∩ Σ). i= 1

i=1

By Theorem 12.4.2, the polyhedron giP ∩ Σ is finite-sided for each i = 1, . . . , m.

We pass to the upper half-space model U n , and we may assume that c = ∞.

Consider the finite set S of hyperplanes of Σ that are spanned by a side of giP for some i. At the visual (n — 2)-sphere Σ∞ of Σ at infinity, the planes in S project to a finite number of great (n — 3)-spheres. Hence, there is a closed ball B in Σ∞ contained in the complement of the union of these finite number of great (n — 3)-spheres.

Let x be a point of Σ, and let C be the Euclidean hypercone in Σ from x to ∂B. The planes in Smeet C only in a bounded set. Hence, we can radially translate C from x towards the center of B to a Euclidean hypercone C′ that is disjoint from the planes in S. Let i be the index such that giP contains the cone point of C′. Then C′ c giP ∩ Σ, since C′ does not meet any sides of giP .

Hence, the cusp of giP , with cusp point c, is not thin, which is a contradiction.

Therefore c is a cusped limit point of Γ.

Exercise 12.4.4 Prove that a discrete subgroup Γ of M(Bn) is geometrically finite if and only if every limit point of Γ is either conical or cusped.

299

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Suppose Γ is geometrically finite. Then Γ has a geometrically finite, exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron P . By Corollary 3 of §12.4, we have that P ∩ L(Γ) is a finite set of cusped limit points of Γ, say c1, . . . , cm. Let Bi be a proper horocusped region for ci for each i as in the proof of (1) implies (2) of Theorem 12.4.5, and let V = π(B1 ∪ · · · ∪ Bm). Then V is a finite union of proper horocusps of M with disjoint closures such that C(M ) — V is compact.

All the points of Γc1 ∪ · · · ∪ Γcm are cusped limit points of Γ by Exercise 12.3.3.

Let a be a limit point of Γ that is not cusped. Then a is a conical as in the proof of (2) implies (3) of Theorem 12.4.5. Thus, every limit point of Γ is either conical or cusped.

Conversely, if every limit point of Γ is either conical or cusped, then every limit point of Γ is either conical or bounded parabolic, whence Γ is geometrically finite by Theorem 12.4.5.

Exercise 12.4.5 Let P be a convex fundamental polyhedron for a discrete subgroup Γ of M(Bn) and let a be a point of P ∩ Sn−1 for which there is no r > 0 such that B(a, r) meets just the sides of P incident with a. Prove that a is a limit point of Γ that is neither conical nor bounded parabolic.

Solution: For each r > 0, the open ball B(a, r) meets infinitely many sides of P , otherwise we could shrink r so that B(a, r) would meet just the sides of P incident with a. By Theorem 12.2.10, we conclude that a is a limit point of Γ.

As a is in P , we have that a is not a conical limit point of Γ by Theorem 12.3.4.

Moreover a is not a bounded parabolic limit point of Γ by Theorem 12.3.8. Thus a is a limit point of Γ that is neither conical nor bounded parabolic.

Exercise 12.4.6 Let Γ be a geometrically finite discrete subgroup of M(Bn).

Prove that every convex fundamental polyhedron for Γ is geometrically finite.

Solution: Let P be a convex fundamental polyhedron for Γ. By Theorem 12.4.5, every limit point of Γ is either conical or bounded parabolic. Hence P is geometrically finite by Exercise 12.4.5.

Exercise 12.4.7 Prove that every elementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn) is geometrically finite.

Solution: Let Γ be an elementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn). Assume that Γ is of elliptic type. Then Γ is finite by Theorem 5.5.2. Let P be an exact convex fundamental polyhedron for Γ. For each side S of P , there is a unique element gS of Γ such that S = P ∩gSP by Theorem 6.7.5. As Γ is finite, P has only finitely many sides. Therefore Γ is geometrically finite.

Next, assume that Γ is of parabolic type. Then Γ fixes a unique point a of Sn−1. We pass to the upper half-space model U n . By Theorem 5.5.5, we may conjugate Γ so that Γ is a discrete subgroup of I(En) that leaves U n and En−1 invariant. Let Q be an exact convex fundamental polyhedron in En−1 for the action of Γ, and let ν : U n→ En−1 be the vertical projection. Then the vertical prism P = ν−1(Q) is a convex polyhedron in U n with sides {ν−1(S) : S is a side of Q}.

300

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Moreover P is an exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron for Γ, since Γ acts vertically on U n . The polyhedron P is geometrically finite in U n , since the set of sides of Q is locally finite in En−1 and every side of P is incident with∞ .

Therefore Γ is geometrically finite.

Now, assume that Γ is of hyperbolic type. Then Γ contains an infinite cyclic subgroup H of finite index generated by a hyperbolic translation h. Let L be the axis of h, and let [a, b] be a fundamental segment for the action of Γ on L. Let S and T be the hyperplanes of Bn orthogonal to L at a and b, and let P be the convex polyhedron bounded by S and T . Then P is an exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron for H with just two sides S and T . Therefore H is geometrically finite. Hence Γ is geometrically finite by Theorem 12.4.8.

Exercise 12.4.8 Prove that every nonelementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn) contains a subgroup that is not geometrically finite.

Solution: Let Γ be a nonelementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn). By Exercise 12.2.15, the group Γ contains a classical Schottky group H of rank two. Then H is a free group of rank two. The commutator subgroup [H, H] of H is a free group of infinite rank, and so [H, H] is not finitely generated. Therefore [H, H] is not geometrically finite by Theorem 12.4.12.

Exercise 12.4.9 Let D(u) be the Dirichlet polyhedron in Example 6 with u in B and ν(u) not in R. Prove that D(u) has infinitely many vertical sides.

Solution: By Theorem 12.4.5, we have that D(u) is geometrically finite.

Hence, there is a horoball B′ based at∞ such that B′ meets just the vertical sides of D(u). If S is a side of D(u), let HS be the closed half-space of U 4 that contains D(u) such that ∂HS = ⟨S⟩. Let P (u) be the Dirichlet polyhedron for Γ∞ centered at u. Then D(u) = P (u) ∩ ∩{HS : S is nonvertical}.

As P (u) has infinitely many sides, all of which are vertical, and B′ meets just the vertical sides of D(u), we have that D(u) has infinitely many vertical sides.

Exercise 12.4.10 Let x be an irrational number. Prove that there is a sequence {d n /c n } ∞ n=1 of distinct rational numbers such that |x — dn/cn| = O(c −2 n ).

Solution: Let Γ be the elliptic modular group. Then Γ is a geometrically finite discrete subgroup of M(U 2) of the first kind. If g is in Γ, then there are az+b a, b, c, d in Z such that ad — bc = 1 and g(z) =cz+d . Now g(z) = z if and only if az + b = cz2 + dz, that is, cz2 + (d— a)z — b = 0. If g is parabolic, then its fixed point is (a — d)/(2d) which is either rational or ∞ . Hence x is a conical limit point of Γ by Theorem 12.4.5.

Let R be the ray (x, x + i] in U 2. By Theorem 12.3.3, there is a sequence { g n } n∞= 1 of distinct elements of Γ and a compact subset K of U 2 such that 301

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

K ∩ gnR /= ∅ for all n. Hence, there is a real number yn in (0, 1] such that gn(x + iyn) is in K for each n. Hence, there is an h > 0 such that for all n, we have Im(gn(x + iyn)) ≥ h.

Let an, bn, cn, dn in Z such that andn — bncn = 1 and g (z) = n

anz + bn

.

cnz + dn

Then cn and dn are relatively prime. Let f (z) = z + 1. Now K ∩ f k R /= ∅ for only finitely many integers k. Hence, we may assume that gn /∈ ⟨f ⟩ for each n.

Then cn /= 0 for each n.

Suppose cm = cn and dm = dn. Then we have an cn

bn dn

am cn

bm dn

−1

=

an bn cn dn

dn —cn

—bm am

=

1 ∗ 0 1

,

and so gn = fkgm for some integer k. Now K ∩ fkgmR /= ∅ for only finitely many k. Hence, for each m, there are only finitely many n such that cm = cn and dm = dn. Therefore, by passing to a subsequence of {g n } n∞= 1 , we may assume that {dn/cn }n∞=1 is a sequence of distinct rational numbers. Now we have gn(x + iyn) an(x + iyn) + bn = cn(x + iyn) + dn anx + bn + ianyn cnx + dn — icnyn = cnx + dn + icnyn cnx + dn — icnyn (anx + bn)(cnx + dn) + ancny2n + i(anyn(cnx + dn) — cnyn(anx + bn)) = (cnx + dn)2 + (cnyn)2 (anx + bn)(cnx + dn) + ancny2n+ i(andn — bncn)yn = (cnx + dn)2 + (cnyn)2 (anx + bn)(cnx + dn) + ancnyn2 + iyn = (cnx + dn)2 + (cnyn)2 Therefore, we have

yn ≥ h. (cn x + dn )2 + (cnyn )2

As the geometric mean is less than or equal to the arithmetic mean of two positive number, we have yn 2 1 . ≤ |cnx + dn | |cn yn | ≤ (cn x + dn)2 + (cn yn ) 2 2h Hence, we have x + dn c2 ≤ 1 , cn n 2h 302

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

and so x+ Thus

dn cn

≤

1 −2 c , 2h n

x + dn = O(c−2). n cn

12.5

Nilpotent Groups

Exercise 12.5.1 A group G is said to be locally discrete if every finitely generated subgroup of G is discrete. Prove that Q is an abelian, nondiscrete, locally discrete subgroup of R. Solution: Let a1 , . . . , an be rational numbers, and let b = b1 · · · bn. As b1

bn

ai aib1 · · · ˆbi · · · bn = , bi b we have that abii is in

1 b

for each i. Hence, we have a1 an ,..., b1 bn

c

1 . b

Therefore, the group ba11 , . . . , abnn is cyclic, and therefore, discrete. Thus Q is locally discrete. Now Q is not finitely generated, since Q is not cyclic. Therefore Q is nondiscrete by Theorem 5.3.2.

Exercise 12.5.2 Let H =

cos πx sin πx

— sin πx cos πx

:x∈Q .

Prove that H is an abelian, nondiscrete, locally discrete subgroup of O(2).

Solution:

Now we have H = {A(πx) : x ∈ Q}

where A(πx) is the rotation about 0 by an angle πx. Therefore H is abelian. As πx assumes positive values arbitrarily close to 0, we have that H is nondiscrete.

Let a1 , . . . , an be rational numbers, and let b = b1 · · · bn. As b1

bn

a1 b1

we have

,...,

an bn

c

1

,

b

D a1 an π E ,...,A π c A . b b1 bn Now A(π/b) has order 2b, and so H is locally finite cyclic, and therefore H is locally discrete.

A π

303

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 12.5.3 Let H be the group in Exercise 12.5.2, let K be a nonelementary discrete subgroup of O +(2, 1), and let G=

A 0

0 B

:A∈H B∈K .

Prove that G is a nonelementary, nondiscrete, locally discrete subgroup of O+(4, 1).

Solution: Let K̂ =

I 0 0 B

:B∈K .

Then K̂ is a nonelementary subgroup of G, and so G is nonelementary. Let Ĥ =

A 0 0 I

:A∈H .

Then Ĥ is a nondiscrete subgroup of G, and so G is nondiscrete. Suppose that the matrices An 0 A1 0 ,..., 0 B1 0 Bn are in G. Then we have An 0 A1 0 ,..., 0 B1 0 Bn I 0 I 0 A1 0 , . . . , An 0 ,..., , c 0 B1 0 I 0 Bn 0 I A 0 I 0 n A1 0 , . . . , I 0 ,..., = , × 0 I 0 I 0 B1 0 Bn which is discrete, since the first factor is finite and the second factor is discrete.

Therefore G is locally discrete. Thus G is a nonelementary, nondiscrete, locally discrete subgroup of O+(4, 1).

12.6

The Margulis Lemma

Exercise 12.6.1 Let Γ be an elementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn) of parabolic type, with fixed point a, all of whose nonelliptic elements are parabolic translations. Prove that V (Γ, r) is a horoball in Bn based at a for each r > 0.

Solution: We pass to the upper half-space model U n and conjugate Γ so that a = ∞ . Let g be a nonelliptic element of Γ. Then g is of parabolic type

by Exercise 5.5.2. Hence, there is an v = 0 in En−1 such that gx = x + v.

Therefore, we have |x — gx|2 2x2n 2 |v| = 1+ .

2x2n

cosh d(x, gx) = 1 +

304

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Hence V (Γ, r) is the horoball B(∞, s) = x{ ∈ U n : xn > s }where s > 0 satisfies the equation |v |2 cosh r = 1 + 2 2s and |v| is as small as possible.

Exercise 12.6.2 Let Γ be an elementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn) of hyperbolic type, and let l be the smallest length that a hyperbolic element of Γ translates along the axis of Γ. Prove that V (Γ, r) is nonempty if and only if r > l.

Solution: Every nonelliptic element of Γ is hyperbolic and there is a hyperbolic element h of Γ such that every hyperbolic element of Γ is a power of h by Theorem 5.5.8. Let L be the axis of Γ and let l be the length that h translates along L. Suppose V (Γ, r) is nonempty. By the proof of Lemma 3 of §12.6, we have that L c V (Γ, r). Therefore l < r. Conversely, if l < r, then L c V (Γ, r).

Exercise 12.6.3 Let Γ be an elementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn) of hyperbolic type with axis L. Prove that V (Γ, r) is invariant under any of hyperbolic translation of Bn with axis L. Solution: Suppose x is in V (Γ, r). Then there is a nonelliptic element g of Γ such that d(x, gx) < r. Let h be any hyperbolic translation of Bn with axis L. Then gh = hg, and so d(hx, ghx) = d(hx, hgx) = d(x, gx) < r.

Thus hx is in V (Γ, r), and so V (Γ, r) is invariant under h.

Exercise 12.6.4 Let Γ be an elementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn) of hyperbolic type, with axis L, all of whose nonelliptic elements are hyperbolic translations, and let l be as in Exercise 12.6.2. Prove that for each r > l, there is an s > 0 such that V (Γ, r) = N (L, s).

Solution: Suppose x is in V (Γ, r). Then there is a nonelliptic element g of Γ such that d(x, gx) < r. Let f be any element of M(Un) that fixes L pointwise.

As g is a hyperbolic translation, gf = fg. Hence d(fx, gfx) = d(fx, fgx) = d(x, gx) < r.

Thus fx is in V (Γ, r), and so V (Γ, r) is symmetric with respect to L. As V (Γ, r) is also invariant under any hyperbolic translation of U n with axis L by Exercise 12.6.3, we conclude that V (Γ, r) = N (L, s) for some s > 0.

Exercise 12.6.5 Let Γ be an elementary discrete subgroup of M0(B3) of hyperbolic type with axis L, and let l be as in Exercise 12.6.2. Prove that for each r > l, there is an s > 0 such that V (Γ, r) = N (L, s).

305

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: We pass to the upper half-space model U 3 and conjugate Γ so that L = (0, ∞ ). Suppose x is in V (Γ, r). Then there is a nonelliptic element g of Γ such that d(x, gx) < r. Let f be any element of M0(U 3) that fixes L pointwise.

As g is a hyperbolic element with axis L that preserves orientation, g is the composite of a hyperbolic translation with axis L and a rotation with axis L. Therefore gf = fg. Hence d(fx, gfx) = d(fx, fgx) = d(x, gx) < r.

Thus fx is in V (Γ, r), and so V (Γ, r) is symmetric with respect to L. As V (Γ, r) is also invariant under any hyperbolic translation of U 3 with axis L by Exercise 12.6.3, we conclude that V (Γ, r) = N (L, s) for some s > 0.

Exercise 12.6.6 Let Γ be an elementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn) of hyperbolic type with axis L. Prove that for each r > 0, there is an s > 0 such that we have V (Γ, r) c N (L, s).

Solution: We pass to the upper half-space model U n and conjugate Γ so that L = (0, ∞). Suppose x is in V (Γ, r). Then there is a nonelliptic element g of Γ such that d(x, gx) < r. Now g is hyperbolic by Exercise 5.5.1. Hence, there is a positive constant k, with k /= 1, and an A in O(n —1) such that g = k à . As d(x, gx) = d(g−1x, x), we may replace g with g−1, if necessary. Hence, we may assume that k > 1. By Theorem 4.6.1, we have |x — k Ãx| 2 cosh d(x, gx) = 1 +

2kx2n

.

Now we have |x — k Ãx| 2

= |x|2 — 2x · k à x + |kà x| 2 ≥ |x|2 — 2|x| |kà x| + k2|x|2 =

|x|2 — 2k|x|2 + k2|x|2

= (k — 1)2|x|2.

Hence, we have cosh d(x, gx) ≥ 1 +

(k — 1)2 2k

|x| xn

2

.

Let θ be the angle between the vector x and L. Then cos θ = xn/ |x .| Hence, we have (k — 1)2 sec2 θ. cosh d(x, gx) ≥ 1 + 2k 2

Note that (k−2k1) is an increasing function of k for k > 1. Let k 1be the smallest value of k, with k > 1, and let l be as in Exercise 12.6.2. Then we have cosh l = 1 + 306

(k1 — 1)2 2k1

.

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

By Exercise 12.6.2, we may assume that r > l. Then we have (k1 — 1)2 . cosh r > 1 + 2k1 Hence, there is an angle θ1, with 0 < θ1 < π/2, such that cosh r = 1 +

(k1 — 1)2 sec2 θ1.

2k1

As cosh d(x, gx) < cosh r, we have (k 1 — 1)2

(k1 — 1)2 sec2 θ1.

2k1 2k1 Therefore θ < θ1. Let s > 0 be such that cosh s = sec θ1. Then x is in N (L, s)

by Exercise 4.6.3. Therefore V (Γ, r) c N (L, s).

1+

sec2 θ < 1 +

Exercise 12.6.7 Let Γ be an elementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn) of parabolic type with fixed point a. Prove that for each r > 0, there is a horoball Br based at a such that V (Γ, r) c Br. Solution: We pass to the upper half-space model U n and conjugate Γ so that a = ∞. By Theorem 5.4.6, the group Γ has a free abelian subgroup H of rank m and finite index and there is a Γ-invariant m-plane Q of En−1 such that H acts effectively on Q as a discrete group of translations. Let l be the smallest length that a nonidentity element of H translates in Q. As H has finite index in Γ, there is a positive integer k such that gk is in H for all g in Γ.

Let g be a nonelliptic element of Γ. Then g is parabolic by Exercise 5.5.2.

As g leaves Q invariant, there is a line L in Q along which g acts as a translation

by Theorem 5.4.1. Let lg be the length that g translates along L. As gk is in H, we have that klg ≥ l, and so lg ≥ l/k. By Theorem 4.6.1, we have |x — gx|2 cosh d(x, gx) = 1 +

2x2n

.

Now |x — gx| ≥ lg ≥ l/k. Hence, we have cosh d(x, gx) ≥ 1 + Let s > 0 be such that cosh r = 1 +

(l/k)2

.

2xn2

(l/k)2 2s2

.

If x is in V (Γ, r) and d(x, gx) < r, then (l/k)2 1+

2xn2

(l/k)2 < 1+

2s2

,

and so xn > s. Hence x is in the horoball B(∞, s) = {y ∈ U n : yn > s}.

Thus V (Γ, r) c B(∞, s).

307

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 12.6.8 Let Γ be an infinite, elementary, discrete subgroup of M(Bn), and suppose V (Γ, r) in nonempty. Prove that V (Γ, r) ∩ Sn−1 = L(Γ).

Solution: Suppose Γ is of parabolic type. Let a be the fixed point of Γ. Then there is a horoball Br based at a such that V (Γ, r)c Br by Exercise 12.6.7.

Hence, we have V (Γ, r) ∩ Sn−1 c Br ∩ Sn−1 = {a}.

Now a is in V (Γ, r) ∩ Sn−1 by Lemma 2 of §12.6. Therefore, we have V (Γ, r) ∩ Sn−1 = {a} = L(Γ).

Now suppose Γ is of hyperbolic type. Let a and b be the endpoints of the axis L of Γ. Then there is an s > 0 such that V (Γ, r) c N (L, s) by Exercise 12.6.6. Hence V (Γ, r) ∩ Sn−1 c N (L, s) ∩ Sn−1 = {a, b}.

Now L c V (Γ, r) by the proof of Lemma 3. Hence {a, b} c V (Γ, r). Therefore V (Γ, r) ∩ Sn−1 = {a, b} = L(Γ).

Exercise 12.6.9 Let Γ be a discrete subgroup of M(Bn) with a parabolic translation f that fixes the point a of Sn−1. Prove that there is a horocusped region B(a) for Γ based at a.

Solution: We pass to the upper half-space model U n and conjugate Γ so that a= ∞ . Then f = v + I for some v = / 0 in En−1. Let V (Γa, r) be a Margulis region for Γ based at a. By Theorem 4.6.1, we have cosh d(x, fx) = 1 + = 1+

|x — fx|2 2x2n |v|2 .

2x2n

Hence, for xn sufficiently large, x is in V (Γa, r). Therefore V (Γa, r) contains a horoball B(a) based at a. If g is in Γ — Γa, then B(a) ∩ gB(a) c V (Γa, r) ∩ gV (Γa, r) = ∅.

Therefore B(a) is a horocusped region for Γ based at a.

Exercise 12.6.10 Let Γ be a geometrically finite discrete subgroup of M(B2).

Prove that Γ has only finitely many conjugacy classes of primitive parabolic elements.

308

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let f be a parabolic element of Γ. We pass to the upper halfplane model U 2, and by conjugating Γ, we may assume that f fixes ∞. Then f is a horizontal translation of E2. Now Γ∞ is the Poincar´e extension of an infinite discrete subgroup of I(E1). Hence, either Γ∞ is an infinite cyclic group generated by a horizontal translation g or Γ∞ is an infinite dihedral group whose translation group is generated by a horizontal translation g, in which case the translation subgroup of Γ∞ has index 2 and Γ∞ is generated by g and a reflection in a line orthogonal to E1. The parabolic element f is primitive if and only if f = g±1.

The maximal elementary subgroups of Γ of parabolic type are the stabilizers of the fixed points of parabolic elements of Γ. Two stabilizers Γa and Γb of fixed points of parabolic elements of Γ are conjugate in Γ if and only if a generator of the translation subgroup of Γa is conjugate to a generator of the translation subgroup of Γb. Therefore Γ has only finitely many conjugacy classes of primitive parabolic elements by Theorem 12.6.7.

Exercise 12.6.11 Let Γ be an infinite discrete subgroup of I(En). Prove that Γ has infinitely many conjugacy classes of parabolic elements. Hint: See Exercise 7.5.3.

Solution: By Theorem 5.4.6, the group Γ has a free abelian subgroup H of rank m and of finite index, and there is an m-plane Q of En such that H acts effectively on Q as a discrete group of translations, and Γ leaves Q invariant. The group H is infinite, since [Γ : H] < ∞. Hence m > 0, since H acts effectively on Q. Therefore, each nonidentity element of H is parabolic, since H acts effectively on Q by translations.

Let K be the normal subgroup of Γ consisting of all elements of Γ that act trivially on Q. Then K is a finite group by Theorems 5.3.4 and 5.3.5. The group KH/K is a free abelian subgroup of Γ/K of rank m and of finite index that acts effectively on Q as a discrete group of translations. Therefore KH/K acts effectively on Q as a crystallographic group of isometries by Theorem 7.5.2. The group Γ/K acts effectively on Q as a discrete group of isometries by Lemma 8 of §5.4. Hence Γ/K acts effectively on Q as a crystallographic group of isometries

by Lemma 1 of §7.5.

Let h ∈H. Then Kh has only finitely many conjugates in Γ/K, say Kg1, . . . , KgA by Exercise 7.5.3. Suppose∈g Γ. Then Kghg−1 = KgKh(Kg)−1 = Kgi for some index i. Hence ghg−1 = kgi for some k∈ K. Therefore h has only finitely many conjugates in Γ. As H is infinite, the elements of H must fall into infinitely many conjugacy classes of Γ. Therefore Γ has infinitely many conjugacy classes of parabolic elements.

Exercise 12.6.12 Let Γ be a discrete subgroup of M(Bn) that contains a parabolic element. Prove that Γ has infinitely many conjugacy classes of parabolic elements.

Solution: Let f be a parabolic element of Γ with fixed point c. The stabilizer subgroup Γc of Γ is elementary of parabolic type. Hence Γc is isomorphic to an 309

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

infinite discrete subgoup of I(En−1) by Theorem 5.5.5. The parabolic elements of Γc are characterized as the elements of infinite order. Therefore Γc has infinitely many conjugacy classes of parabolic elements by Exercise 12.6.11.

Suppose f1, f2 are parabolic elements of Γc and g ∈ Γ such that gf1g−1 = f2.

Then gf1g−1 fixes the point g(c). Hence g(c) = c, and so g ∈ Γc. Thus f1 and f2 are conjugate in Γc if and only if they are conjugate in Γ. Thus Γ has infinitely many conjugacy classes of parabolic elements.

Exercise 12.6.13 Let Γ be a discrete subgroup of M(Bn) that contains a hyperbolic element h. Prove that h is a power of a primitive hyperbolic element of Γ.

Solution: If h is primitive, then we are done; otherwise, there is an element h1 of Γ and an integer k1 > 1 such that h = hk11 . The element h1 is hyperbolic, since otherwise h would not be hyperbolic. Moreover h and h1 have the same axis L. Let l be the translation length of h. Then the translation length of h1 is l/k1.

If h1 is primitive, then we are done; otherwise, there is an element h2 of Γ and an integer k2 > 1 such that h1 = h2k2 . Then as before h2 is hyperbolic and h1 and h2 have the same axis L and the translation length of h2 is l/(k1k2) and h = hk21k2 .

We continue in this way. This process must terminate in a primitive hyperbolic element hm, since for any point x on L, the geodesic segment [x, h(x)] of length l has the property that [x, h(x)] ∩ g[x, h(x)] /= ∅ for only finitely many g ∈ Γ, since Γ is discontinuous. Finally, we have that h = hkm with k = k1 · · · km.

Exercise 12.6.14 Let k be a real number greater than 1, and let Γ be the elementary discrete subgroup of M(Un), of hyperbolic type, generated by the hyperbolic translation kI and an orthogonal transformation A of order 2. Prove that Γ has infinitely many conjugacy classes of primitive hyperbolic elements. m

Solution: For each positive integer m, let hm = k2 A. Then hm is a hyperbolic element of Γ. We claim that hm is a primitive element of Γ. On the contrary, suppose that there is an element g of Γ and an integer p > 1 such that hm = gp.

The group Γ is abelian, since kI and A commute. Hence g is either of the form kqI or kqA for some integer q. As hm is not a hyperbolic translations, we must have g = kqA. Then gp = kpqAp. Hence, we must have pq = 2m and p is odd, which is a contradiction, since 2m has no odd divisors greater than 1. Therefore hm is primitive for each m. Thus Γ has infinitely many primitive hyperbolic elements. As Γ is abelian, Γ also has infinitely many conjugacy classes of primitive hyperbolic elements.

Exercise 12.6.15 Let Γ be a nonelementary discrete subgroup of M(Bn).

Prove that Γ has infinitely many conjugacy classes of primitive hyperbolic elements. Hint: See Exercise 12.2.4.

310

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: By Theorem 12.2.3, the group Γ has a hyperbolic element h. Let a and b be the fixed points of h in Sn−1. By Theorem 12.2.1, the group Γ has a third limit point c ∈ Sn−1. By Exercise 12.2.4, we can construct an infinite sequence of hyperbolic elements {h i } i∞= 1 of Γ with fixed points ai and bi and attractive fixed point ai such that ai → a and bi → c and bi /= b for each i. By Theorem 5.5.4, we have that ai /= a for each i. By passing to a subsequence, we may assume that ai /= aj for i < j. Hence, the elements of {h i } i∞= 1 are distinct.

By Exercise 12.6.13, we may replace each hi by a primitive root.

On the contrary, assume that there are only finitely many conjugacy classes of primitive hyperbolic elements of Γ. Then infinitely many of the primitive hyperbolic elements {h i } i∞= 1 fall into one conjugacy class. Hence, by passing to a subsequence, we may assume that all the elements of {h i } i∞= 1 are conjugate.

Hence, there exists gi ∈ Γ such that hi = gih1gi −1 for each i. Therefore, all the elements of { h i } i∞= 1 have that same translation length l.

Let Li be the axis of hi for each i, and let L∞ be the hyperbolic line of Bn joining the point a to the point c. The endpoints of Li are ai and bi. Hence, the sequence of lines {L i } i∞=1 converges to the line L∞. By conjugating Γ, we may assume that L∞ is a Euclidian diameter of Bn. Let C be the Euclidean cylinder with axis L∞ of radius r = (e—1)/(e + 1). Then the closed ball C(0, 1) in Bn has the same radius as C by Exercise 4.5.1. There is a positive integer m such that |ai — a| < r and |bi — c| < r for all i > m. The region C ∩ Bn is hyperbolically convex by Exercise 5.2.17. Hence Li c C ∩ Bn for all i > m. As C(0, 1) separates C ∩ Bn and Li is connected, Li contains a point xi of C(0, 1) for all i > m. As hixi ∈ C(0, 1 + l) for all i > m, we have that C(0, 1 + l) ∩ hiC(0, 1 + l) /= ∅ for all i > m, which is a contradiction, since Γ is discontinuous. Therefore Γ has infinitely many conjugacy classes of primitive hyperbolic elements.

12.7

Geometrically Finite Manifolds

Exercise 12.7.1 Let M be a nonelementary hyperbolic space-form. Prove that C(M ) is a strong deformation retract of M .

Solution: Let ρ : Bn → C(Γ) ∩ Bn be the nearest point retraction. Then ρ is continuous by Lemma 3 of §12.2. As ρ is Γ-equivariant, ρ induces a continuous retraction ρM : M → C(M ).

Let x, y be points of Bn, and let [x, y] be either {x} if x = y or the geodesic segment from x to y if x /= y. Let γx,y : [0, 1] →[x, y] be the parameterization of [x, y] so that for all t in [0, 1], we have d(x, γx,y(t)) = td(x, y).

Define F : B × B × [0, 1] → Bn by F (x, y, t) = γx,y(t). To see that F is continuous, we pass to the hyperboloid model Hn. If x /= y, then n

n

γx,y(t) = cosh(td(x, y))x + sinh(td(x, y))x′ 311

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

where x′ =

y + (x ◦ y)x . y + (x ◦ y)x

Hence F is obviously continuous at (x, y, t) when x /= y.

Now x ◦ x′ = 0 and x′ = 1. Hence, we have 1. x ◦ x′ = 0, 2. x · x′ — xn+1x′n+1 = 0, 3. xn+1x′n+1 = x · x′, 2 4. x 2n+1 x′n+1 = (x · x′)2, 2 2 ′ 5. x n+1 xn+1 ≤ |x|2 |x′|2, 2 6. x 2n+1 x′n+1 ′2 ), ≤ |x|2(1 + xn+1 7. x′2 (x2 — |x|2) ≤ |x|2, n+1

n+1

2 8. x′n+1 ≤ |x|2 ≤ |x|2.

Therefore, we have ′2 |x′|2 = |x′|2 + xn+1 ′2 ′2 + 2xn+1 = |x′|2 — xn+1 2 ′ = 1 + 2xn+1 .

Hence |x′ | 2 ≤1 + 2 x| 2| . Therefore, if x varies over a bounded subset of Rn+1, then x′ varies over a bounded subset of Rn+1 that is independent of y. Hence, if {(xi, y i )} i∞= 1 is an infinite sequence in Hn ×H n converging to (x, x) with xi /= yi for each i, then sinh(td(xi, yi))x′i converges to 0 for each t in [0, 1]. Therefore F is continuous at (x, x, t), and so F is continuous.

Define D : Bn× [0, 1]→Bn by D(x, t) = γx,ρ(x)(t). Then D is a strong deformation retraction of Bn onto C(Γ). If g is in Γ, then g[x, ρ(x)] = [gx, gρ(x)] = [gx, ρ(gx)] and d(gx, gγx,ρ(x)(t)) = d(x, γx,ρ(x)(t)) = td(x, ρ(x)) = td(gx, gρ(x)) = td(gx, ρ(gx)).

Hence gγx,ρ(x) = γgx,ρ(gx). Therefore gD(x, t) = D(gx, t) for all (x, t). Thus D induces a map DM : M × [0, 1] → M defined by DM (Γx, t) = ΓD(x, t). Then DM is a strong deformation retraction of M onto C(M ) with DM (u, 1) = ρM (u) for all u in M .

312

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 12.7.2 Let M0 be the submanifold of M in Theorem 12.7.4. Show that ∂M0 is naturally a Euclidean (n — 1)-manifold. Prove that the Euclidean similarity type of ∂M0 is an isometry invariant of M .

Solution: The manifold M has only finitely many components, and so we may assume that M is connected. By Theorem 8.5.9, we may assume that M is a space-form Bn/Γ of finite volume. By Theorem 12.7.4, we have that M — M0 is a finite union of proper cusps V1, . . . , Vm with disjoint closures. For each i, there is a proper horocusp region Bi based at ai such that if Γi is the stabilizer of ai in Γ, then the inclusion of Bi in to Bn induces a homeomorphism ηi : Bi/Γi → Vi for each i. Moreover, if Ci = Bi — {ai}, then the inclusion of Ci into Bn induces a homeomorphism ηi : Ci/Γi → V i for each i.

Let Si = Ci — Bi for each i. Then the inclusion of Si into Bn induces a homeomorphism ∂ηi : Si/Γi →∂Vi for each i. The horosphere Si has a natural Euclidean metric so that Si is isomorphic to En−1. Hence Si/Γi is naturally a closed Euclidean (n — 1)-manifold.

We define a metric on ∂Vi so that ∂ηi is an isometry from the Euclidean (n — 1)-manifold Si/Γi to ∂Vi for each i. Thus ∂M0 = ∂V1 ∪ · · · ∪ ∂Vm is naturally a Euclidean (n — 1)-manifold.

The Euclidean similarity type of ∂M0 is determined by the Euclidean similarity types of ∂V1, . . . , ∂Vm. The Euclidean similarity type of ∂Vi is determined by the Euclidean similarity type of Bi/Γi for each i, which is determined by the conjugacy class of Γi in M(Bn) for each i. The horocusp Vi determines Γi up to conjugacy in Γ. Hence, the Euclidean similarity type of ∂M0 is determined by the conjugacy classes in Γ of the maximal elementary parabolic subgroups of Γ.

Now suppose M is isometric to a hyperbolic n-manifold N . Then N is connected, complete, open, and of finite volume. Hence, we may assume that N is a space-form Bn/H of finite volume. Then Γ and H are conjugate in M(Bn)

by Theorem 8.1.5. Hence, the conjugacy classes in Γ of the maximal elementary parabolic subgroups of Γ determined the same conjugacy classes in M(Bn) as the conjugacy classes in H of the maximal elementary parabolic subgroups of H. Therefore ∂M0 and ∂N0 are similar Euclidean (n — 1)-manifolds. Thus, the Euclidean similarity type of ∂M0 is an isometry invariant of M .

Exercise 12.7.3 Prove that the submanifold M 0 of M in Theorem 12.7.6 is a strong deformation retract of M .

Solution: Let ρ : Bn ∪ O(Γ) → (Bn ∪ O(Γ))0 be the retraction in the proof of Theorem 12.7.6. Then ρ is continuous by Lemma 3 of §12.2. As ρ is Γequivariant, ρ induces a continuous retraction ρM : M → M 0.

Let x, y be points of En, and let [x, y] be either {x} if x = y or the line segment from x to y if x /= y. Define γx,y : [0, 1] → [x, y] by γx,y(t) = (1 — t)x + ty.

Then F : En × En × [0, 1] → Bn defined by F (x, y, t) = γx,y(t) is continuous.

313

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Let ρ : U n — {∞} → N (Q, r) ∩ U n — {∞} be the retraction of Lemma 1 of §12.7. Define D : U n — {∞} × I → U n — {∞}

by D(x, t) = γx,ρ(x)(t). Then D is a strong deformation retraction of U n — {∞} onto N (Q, r) ∩ Un — {∞} with D(x, 1) = ρ(x) for each x. Now if g is in Γ∞, then g is a Euclidean isometry of En, and so D(gx, t) = γgx,ρ(gx)(t) = γgx,gρ(x)(t) = gγx,ρ(x)(t) = gD(x, t).

Let C be the set of cusped limit points of Γ. Choose a representative c for each Γ-orbit in C, and let Dc : Bn — {c} × [0, 1] → Bn — {c} be the strong deformation retraction of Bn — {c} onto Bn — {c} — U (c) with Dc(x, 1) = ρc(x) for each x, corresponding to the strong deformation retraction D∞ : U n — {∞} × I → U n — {∞} that we just defined. For each g in Γ, define a strong deformation retraction Dgc : Bn — {gc} × [0, 1] → Bn — {gc}, of Bn — {gc} onto Bn— { gc } — U (gc), by Dgx(x, t) = gDc(g−1x, t). Then Dgc is well defined, since f Dc(f −1x, t) = Dc(x, t) for each f in Γc. Hence, we have a strong deformation retraction D : Bn ∪ O(Γ) × [0, 1] → Bn ∪ O(Γ) of Bn ∪ O(Γ) onto Bn ∪ O(Γ) 0that agrees with Dc on U (c)— {c} ×[0, 1] for each c in C. The map D is continuous, since Dc is continuous for each c and { U (c) — {c} × [0, 1] : c ∈ C} n is a locally finite family of closed subsets of B∪ O(Γ) ×[0, 1]. Moreover D(x, 1) = ρ(x) for each x. As D(gx, t) = gD(x, t) for all (x, t), the map D induces a strong deformation retraction DM : M × [0, 1] → M of M onto M 0 with DM (u, 1) = ρM (u) for each u in M .

Exercise 12.7.4 Let Hn/Γ be a geometrically finite space-form. Prove that for all sufficiently small values of r, we have V (Γ, r) = ∪{V (Γa, r) : a is a fixed point of a parabolic element of Γ}.

Solution: By Theorem 12.7.8, there is a closed geodesic in M of minimal length l. Let cn be the Margulis constant. If r satisfies 0 < r≤ cn and r ≤ l, then V (Γ, r) = ∪{V (Γa, r) : a is a fixed point of a parabolic element of Γ}

by Theorem 12.6.2 and Exercise 12.6.2.

314

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

12.8

Arithmetic Hyperbolic Groups

Exercise 12.8.1 Let H1 and H2 be commensurable subgroups of a group G, and let h ∈ H1. Prove that there is a positive integer m such that hm ∈ H2.

Solution: The group H1 ∩H2 contains a normal subgroup N of H1 by Exercise 7.6.1. As the group H1/N is finite, there is a positive integer m such that hm ∈ N .

Exercise 12.8.2 Let U be a nonidentity unipotent matrix in GL(n, C). Prove that U has infinite order, and every power of U is unipotent.

Solution: On the contrary, suppose that U has finite order m. Then U is conjugate in GL(n, C) to an element of U (n) by Lemma 9 of §7.5. Hence U is conjugate in GL(n, C) to a diagonal matrix D. The diagonal entries of D are mth roots of unity, and at least one entry must be a primitive mth root of unity.

However, all the eigenvalues of U are 1 by Lemma 5 of §12.8, and so we have a contradiction. Thus U must have infinity order.

The matrix U is conjugate in GL(n, C) to a matrix all of whose entries below the diagonal are 0 and whose diagonal entries are 1 by a basic result in Linear Algebra. The same is true for U p for each positive integer p, and so all the eigenvalues of U p are 1. Hence, each power of U is unipotent by Lemma 5 of §12.8.

Exercise 12.8.3 Let f be a quadratic form in n variables over R, let R be a subring of R, and let c be a nonzero real number. Prove that O(cf, R) = O(f, R).

Solution: Let T ∈ GL(n, R). Then f (Tx) = f (x) for all x ∈ Rn if and only if cf (Tx) = cf (x) for all x ∈ Rn. Hence O(cf, R) = O(f, R).

Exercise 12.8.4 Prove that O+(f2, Z) is a cyclic group of order 2.

Solution: Suppose that a b c d

∈ O+(f2, Z).

Then a2 —c2 = 1 and b2 — d2 = —1 by Theorem 3.1.4(2). Hence a = ± 1 and c = 0. As d2 —b2 = 1, we have that d = ±1 and b = 0. In fact d = 1, since the matrix is positive. Therefore O+(f2, Z) has only two elements.

Exercise 12.8.5 Let f be an admissible quadratic form in 2 variables over Q. Prove that f is isotropic if and only if f is Q-equivalent to cf2 for some c > 0 in Q. Solution: Suppose that f is isotropic. By the theory of quadratic forms over a field, f is Q-equivalent to a diagonal form cx2 + dy2 over Q. As the signature of

315

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

f is (1, 1), we have that cd < 0. The form cx2 + dy2 is Q-equivalent to dx2 + cy2, since c 0 d 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 d 1 0 = 0 c .

Hence, we may assume that c > 0 and d < 0. The form cx2 + dy2 is also isotropic, and so there exists rational numbers r and s, no both zero, such that cr2 + ds2 = 0. As c and d are nonzero, r and s must both be nonzero.

Let b = r/s. Then d = —cb2. Hence cx2 + dy2 = cx2 — cb2y2. The form 2 cx — cb2y2 is Q-equivalent to cx2 — cy2, since 1 0 0 b−1

1 0 0 b−1

c 0 0 —cb2

=

c 0 0 —c

.

Therefore f is Q-equivalent to cf2 with c > 0.

Conversely, suppose that f is Q-equivalent to cf2 with c > 0. The form cf2 is clearly isotropic, and so f is isotropic.

Exercise 12.8.6 Prove the case n = 1 of Theorem 12.8.9. Hint: Use the theory of Pell’s equation.

Solution: As in the solution of Exercise Ex:12.8.5, the form f is Q-equavalent to the form f ′(x, y) = cx2 + dy2 with c > 0 and d < 0. The orbit space O+(f, Z) \O+(f, R) is compact if and only if O+(f ′, Z) \O+(f ′, R) is compact by Lemma 6. Now O+(c−1f ′, Z) = O+(f ′, Z) by Exercise 12.8.3. Write d/c = a/b with a, b ∈ Z. The form x2 + ab−1y2 is Q-equavalent to the form x2 + aby2.

Let m be a positive integer, and let f (m) be the form x2 — my2. It suffices to 2 + (m) + (m) show that O (f2 , Z)\O (f 2 , R) is compact if and only if f 2(m) is anisotropic.

Let M = diag(1, m−1/2). Then f 2(m)(Mv) = f2(v) for all v ∈ R2. The group Γ = M −1O+(f (m) , Z)M acts faithfully on H1 as a discrete group of isome2 tries. The following are equivalent: (1) O+(f2(m), Z)\O+(f2(m), R) is compact, (2) Γ\O+(1, 1) is compact, (3) Γ\H1 is compact (by Lemma 4), (4) Γ is infinite, (5) O+(f (m) 2 , Z) is infinite. + (m) Suppose that O+(f2(m), Z)\O+(f (m) 2 , R) is compact. Then O (f2 , Z) is m infinite. Therefore f2 is not Q-equavalent to cf2 for some c > 0 by Lemma 6 and Exercises 12.8.3 and 12.8.4. Hence f2m is anisotropic by Exercise 12.8.5.

Conversely, suppose f2m is anisotropic. Then m is not a square in Z, and so Pell’s equation x2 — my2 = 1 has infinitely many solutions in Z2. Each solution v in Z2 determines a reflection ρY in O+(f (m) 2 , Z) defined by Formula 12.8.4.

Therefore O+(f2(m), Z) is infinite. Hence O+(f2(m), Z)\O+(f 2(m), R) is compact.

Exercise 12.8.7 Prove that the rational quadratic form x2 + x2 — 3x2 is aniso1

2

3

tropic.

Solution: On the contrary, suppose a, b, c are rational numbers not all 0 such that a2 + b2 — 3c2 = 0. By clearing out denominators, we may assume 316

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

that a, b, c are integers. By dividing out by a power of 4, if necessary, we may assume that a, b, c are not all even. Then a and b are not both even, and so a2 + b2 ≡ 1, 2 mod 4, whereas 3c2 ≡ 0, 3 mod 4 which is a contradiction.

Therefore x21 + x2 2— 3x23 is anisotropic.

Exercise 12.8.8 Prove that the rational quadratic form x2 + x2 + x2 — 7x2 is 1

2

3

4

anisotropic.

Solution: On the contrary, suppose a, b, c, d are rational numbers not all 0 such that a2 + b2 + c2 —7d2 = 0. By clearing out denominators, we may assume that a, b, c, d are integers. By dividing out by a power of 4, if necessary, we may assume that a, b, c, d are not all even. Then a, b, c are not all even, and so a2 + b2 + c2 ≡ 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 mod 8, whereas 7c2 ≡ 0, 4, 7 mod 8, which is a contradiction. Therefore x12 + x22 + x23— 7x24 is anisotropic.

Exercise 12.8.9 Let A be the standard Gram matrix of an orthotetrahedron T in H3, with angles π/5, π/3, π/5, defined by Formula 10.4.1.

1. P r √ o v e that A is the matrix of an admissible quadratic form f over K = Q[ 5]. Hint: Compute the eigenvalues of A and Aσ.

2. Let B be the 4 × 4 matrix with Lorentz unit column vectors v1, . . . , v4 such that A = (vi ◦ vj). Prove that Bx ◦ By = ⟨x, y⟩ for all x, y in R4.

3. Let ρYi be defined as in Exercise 3.1.14, and for the standard basis vectors e1, . . . , e4 of R4, let ρe i be defined by Formula 12.8.4. Prove that Bρe iB−1 = ρY ifor each i.

4. Conclude that the subgroup Γ of O+(3, 1), generated by the reflections in the sides of T , is arithmetic of the simplest type defined over K. √ Solution: Let τ = (1 + 5)/2 be the golden ratio. Then we have that , 1 —τ/2 0 0 . —τ/2 .

1 —1/2 0 A= .

0 —1/2 1 —τ/2 0 0 —τ/2 1 √ Therefore A is over K = Q[ 5]. √ √ √ √ (1) The eigenvalues of A are 5 ± 7 + 2 5 /4 and 3 ± 7 + 2 5 /4.

Three of the eigenvalues which are positive and one is negative. Therefore A has signature (3, 1).

The field K is totally real of degree 2. The nonidentity field embedding σ : √ √ √ √ K →R is given by σ( 5) = — 5. The eigenvalues of Aσ are 5± 7— 2 5 /4 √ √ and 3 ± 7 — 2 5 /4. All of these eigenvalues are positive. Therefore f σ is positive definite. Thus f is an admissible quadratic form over K. (2) Let e1, . . . , e4 be the standard basis vectors of R4. Then we have that Bei ◦ Bej = vi ◦ vj = eitAej = ⟨ei, ej⟩.

317

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

As Bx ◦ By and x,⟨ y are ⟩ bilinear functions of x and y, we have that Bx ◦By = ⟨x, y ⟩ for all x, y in R4.

(3) Observe that Bρei (x) = B(x — 2⟨x, ei⟩ei) = Bx — 2(Bx ◦ vi)vi = ρYi (Bx). t

Therefore Bρei = ρYi B for each i = 1, . . . , 4. As A = B JB, we have that (det B)2 = — det A, and so B is invertible. Hence Bρie B−1 = ρY i for each i = 1, . . . , 4.

4) From (2) we have that f3(Bx) = Bx ◦ Bx = ⟨x, x⟩ = f (x).

Let M = B−1. Then f (Mx) = f3(x) for all x in R4. Now τ is an algebra integer. Hence 2A is over RK. This implies that the matrices of the reflections ρei are over RK for each i = 1, . . . , 4. Observe that f (ρei (x)) = f3(Bρei (x)) = f3(ρYi (Bx)) = f3(Bx) = f (x).

Hence ρei ∈ O(f, RK) for each i = 1, . . . , 4. The reflection ρei has eigenvalues —1 and 1 and the eigenspace of —1 is spanned by ei. Therefore ρei ∈ O+(f, RK) for each i = 1, . . . , 4 by Lemma 7(2).

The vectors v1, . . . , v4 are Lorentz unit normal vectors for T . Hence Γ is generated by ρY , . . . , ρY . By (3), we have that MρY M −1 = ρe for each 1

i

4

i

i = 1, . . . , 4. Therefore M ΓM −1 is a subgroup of O+(f, RK).

We have that Γ\ H3 is compact, since T is compact. Hence Γ\ H3 has finite volume. Now O+(f, RK) \O+(f ) has finite Haar measure by Theorem 12.8.3. Hence M −1O+(f, RK)M \O+(3, 1) has finite Haar measure, and so M −1O+(f, RK)M H \ 3 has finite volume by Lemma 3. Therefore Γ has finite index in M −1O+(f, RK)M by Theorem 6.7.3. Hence M ΓM −1 has finite index in O+(f, RK), and so M ΓM −1 and O+(f, RK) are commensurable. Therefore Γ is an arithmetic subgroup of O+(3, 1) of the simplest type defined over K. Exercise 12.8.10 Prove that the Seifert-Weber dodecahedral spa√ce is an arithmetic hyperbolic 3-manifold of the simplest type defined over Q[ 5].

Solution: Let T be the orthotetrahedron in Exercise 12.8.9. Then T is part of the barycentric subdivision of a regular dodecahedron P in H3 whose dihedral angles are 2π/5. Let Γ be the subgroup of O+(3, 1) generated by the reflections ρY1 , . . . , ρY4 in the sides of T . Let Φ be the side-pairing of P , defined in Example 3 of §10.1, that glues up the Seifert-Weber dodecahedral space M . The side-pairing maps in Φ are elements of Γ, since they are the composition of a symmetry of P followed by a reflection in a side of P . The symmetry group of P is generated by three of the reflections ρY1 , . . . , ρY4 , and the reflections in the sides of P are conjugate to the fourth reflection by a symmetry of P .

Let Γ0 be the group generated by the side-pairing maps in Φ. Then P is an exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron for Γ and the inclusion of P into H3

318

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

induces an isometry from M to H3/Γ0 by Theorem 11.2.1. The dodecahedron P is subdivided into 120 copies of T , and so Vol(P ) = 120Vol(T ). Hence, the index of Γ0 in Γ is 120 by Theorem 6.7.3. The group Γ is an arithmetic subgroup of O+(3, 1) of the simplest type defined over K by Exercise 12.8.9(4), and so Γ0 is also, since Γ0 has finite index in Γ.

319

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Chapter 13

Geometric Orbifolds 13.1

Orbit Spaces

Exercise 13.1.1 Let Γ be a discrete group of isometries of a geometric space X and let x be a point of X. The point Γx of X/Γ is called a ordinary point of X/Γ if Γx = 1{ ,}otherwise Γx is called a singular point of X/Γ. Prove that the set of all ordinary points of X/Γ is a connected, open, dense subset of X/Γ.

Solution: Let Ω(X/Γ) be the set of ordinary points of X/Γ. Suppose Γx is in Ω(X/Γ). Let D(x) be the Dirichlet domain for Γ with center x. Then D(x) is a locally finite fundamental domain for Γ by Theorem 6.6.13. Let X→ X/Γ be the quotient map. Then π(D(x)) is an open neighborhood of Γx such that π(D(x)) cΩ(X/Γ). Hence Ω(X/Γ) is open.

As π is continuous, we have that π D(x) c π(D(x)).

As π D(x) = X/Γ, we have that π(D(x)) is a connected dense subset of X/Γ.

Therefore Ω(X/Γ) is a connected dense subset of X/Γ.

Exercise 13.1.2 A metric space X is said to be locally geodesically connected if for each point x of X, there is an r > 0 such that any two distinct points in B(x, r) are joined by a geodesic segment in X. Let X be a connected, locally geodesically connected, metric space. Prove that ρ(x, y) = inf{|γ| : γ is a curve in X from x to y} defines a metric on X, called the path metric of X. Solution: Define a relation on X by x ~ y if and only if x and y are joined by a rectifiable curve in X. Clearly, this is an equivalence relation on X. The equivalence classes are open, since X is locally geodesically connected. As X is connected, there is only one equivalence class. Therefore ρ is well defined.

320

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

If x is in X, then ρ(x, x) = 0, since the constant curve at x has zero length.

If γ is a curve in X from x to y, then d(x, y) ≤ |γ |, and so ρ(x, y) = 0 implies d(x, y) = 0 whence x = y. Thus ρ(x, y) = 0 if and only if x = y.

As |γ−1 |= γ| , |we deduce that ρ(x, y) = ρ(y, x) for all x, y in X. Thus ρ is symmetric. If α : [a, b]→ X is a curve from x to y and β : [b, c]→ X is a curve from y to z, then γ = αβ is a curve from x to y and| γ| = | α| + |β | by Theorem 1.5.1. Hence ρ(x, z) ≤ρ(x, y) + ρ(y, z). Thus ρ satisfies the triangle inequality.

Therefore ρ is a metric on X. Exercise 13.1.3 Let (X, d) be a connected, locally geodesically connected, metric space X, and let ρ be the path metric of (X, d). Prove that d(x, y)≤ ρ(x, y) with equality if x and y are joined by a geodesic segment in X. Conclude that the identity map ι : X → X is a local isometry from (X, d) to (X, ρ).

Solution: Let γ be a curve in X from x to y. Then d(x, y) ≤ |γ |, and so d(x, y) ≤ρ(x, y). If x and y are joined by a geodesic segment in X, then there is a geodesic arc α in X from x to y, whence d(x, y) = α| ,|and therefore d(x, y) = ρ(x, y). As X is locally geodesically connected, we conclude that the identity map ι : X → X is a local isometry from (X, d) to (X, ρ).

13.2

(X, G)-Orbifolds

Exercise 13.2.1 Let φ : U → X/Γ be a chart for an (X, G)-orbifold M and let g be an element of G. Show that the function g : X/Γ → X/gΓg−1, defined by g(Γx) = gΓg−1gx, is a similarity and that gφ : U → X/gΓg−1 is a chart for M .

Solution: Suppose Γx = Γy. Then there is an f in Γ such that y = fx. Then gΓg−1gx = gΓg−1gf −1y = gΓf −1y = gΓy = gΓg−1gy.

Hence g is well defined.

Let k be the scale factor of g. Then dist(g(Γx), g(Γy))

= dist(gΓg−1gx, gΓg−1gy) = dist(gΓx, gΓy) = k dist(Γx, Γy).

Therefore g is a similarity with scale factor k.

Now U is an open connected subset of M and gΓg−1 is a discrete group of isometries of X. The function gφ maps U homeomorphically onto an open subset of X/gΓg−1, since φ maps U homeomorphically onto an open subset of X/Γ and g is a homeomorphism.

321

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Suppose ψ : V → X/H is a chart for M such that U and V overlap. Then ψφ−1 : φ(U ∩ V ) → ψ(U ∩ V ) is a coordinate change, and so if x and y are points of X such that ψφ−1(Γx) = Hy, there is an element f of G such that fx = y and ψφ−1(Γw) = Hfw for all w in a neighborhood of x. To see that ψφ−1g−1 : gφ(U ∩ V ) → ψ(U ∩ V ) is a coordinate change, suppose x and y are points of X such that ψφ−1g−1(gΓg−1gx) = Hy. Then ψφ−1(Γx) = Hy, and so there is an element f of G such that fx = y and ψφ−1(Γw) = Hfw for all w in a neighborhood of x. Then fg−1(gx) = y and ψφ−1g−1(gΓg−1gw) = Hfg−1gw for all gw in a neighborhood of gx. Thus g : U → X/gΓg−1 is a chart for M .

Exercise 13.2.2 Let M be an (X, G)-orbifold. Prove that the (X, G)-orbifold structure of M contains a unique (X, G)-manifold structure for Ω(M ).

Solution: Let Φ be the set of all charts for M of the form φ : U → X. Then each point of U has order 1, and so Uc Ω(M ). If u is in Ω(M ), then there is a chart φ : U →X for (M, u) by Theorem 13.2.3. Hence Φ is an (X, G)-manifold atlas for Ω(M ).

Let φ : U → X be a chart for Ω(M ), and let φi : Ui → X/Γi be a chart for M such that Ui and U overlap. Consider the coordinate change φφi −1 : φi(Ui ∩ U ) → φ(Ui ∩ U ). −1(Γix) = y. Then Γx = { 1}.

Suppose x and y are points of X such that φφ i

By Theorem 13.2.3, there is a neighborhood V of u = φi−1(Γix) such that φi restricted to V lifts to a chart ψ : V → X for (M, u). Then ψ is in Φ.

As φψ−1(x) = y, there is a g in G such that φψ−1(w) = gw for all w in a neighborhood of x. Then φφi −1(Γiw) = gw for all w in a neighborhood of x.

Hence φ is a chart for M . Therefore φ is in Φ. Hence Φ is an (X, G)-manifold structure for Ω(M ). The structure Φ is unique, since it contains all charts for Ω(M ) that are charts for M .

Exercise 13.2.3 Prove that all the possible solutions χ(X/Γ) and (n1, . . . , nk; m1, . . . , mA) of Equation 13.2.2, when X = E2, are described in Example 7.

322

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let M = E2/Γ. As χo(M ) = 0, Formula 13.2.2 implies that χ(M ) ≥ 0, and so χ(M ) = 0, 1, 2 by Formulas 9.1.4-6. Hence M is homeomorphic to either S2, P 2, the closed 2-disk D2, the annulus A or the Möbius band B by Theorems 9.1.2-3.

Suppose M ~ = S2. Then M has no mirror points, and therefore, no corner points. By Formula 13.2.2, we have that k Σ 0 = 2 — (1 — 1/ni). i=1

As 1 — 1/ni ≥ 1/2, we have that k ≤ 4. Now as k—2=

k Σ

1/ni,

i=1

we have that k > 2. If k = 4, then we have that 2 = n11 + n12 + n13 + n14 , and so M is of type (2, 2, 2, 2). If k = 3, then we have that 1 = n11 + n12 + n13 , and so M is of type (2, 3, 6), (2, 4, 4) or (3, 3, 3).

Suppose M ~ = P 2. Then M has no mirror points and therefore, no corner points. By Formula 13.2.2, we have that k Σ 0 = 1 — (1 — 1/ni). i=1

As 1 — 1/ni ≥ 1/2, we have that k ≤ 2. Now as k—1=

k Σ

1/ni,

i=1

we have that k > 1, and so k = 2. Hence 1 = n11 + n12 , and so M is of type (2, 2).

Suppose M ~ = D2. Then M has mirror points. By Formula 13.2.2, we have that k A Σ Σ 1 0 = 1 — (1 — 1/ni) — (1 — 1/mi).

2

i=1

i=1

As 1 —1/ni ≥ 1/2, we have that k ≤ 2. If k = 2, then M is of type (2, 2; ). If k = 1, then we have that 1 n1

= 12

ΣA (1 — 1/mi). i=1

323

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

As 1 —1/mi ≥ 1/2, we have that l ≤ 2. If k = 1, and l = 2, we deduce that M is of type (2; 2, 2). If k = 1, and l = 1, then we have that 1 n1

= 1 (1 — 1/m1).

2

Hence 1 1 1 n1 + n1 + m1 = 1,

and so M is of type (3; 3) or (4; 2). Assume that k = 0. Then we have that 1= 1 2

ΣA (1 — 1/mi). i=1

As 1 — 1/mi ≥ 1/2, we have that l ≤ 4. Now as l—2=

A Σ 1/mi, i=1

we have that l ≥ 3. If l = 4, then M is of type ( ; 2, 2, 2, 2). If l = 3, we have 1=

1 m1

+

1 m2

+

1 , m3

and so M is type ( ; 2, 3, 6), ( ; 2, 4, 4) or ( ; 3, 3, 3).

If M ~ = T 2, K, A or B, then χ(M ) = 0, and so Formula 13.2.2 implies that M has no cone points and no corner points, and so M is of type ( ) or ( ; ). Thus, all the possible solutions χ(X/Γ) and (n1, . . . , nk; m1, . . . , mA) of Equation 13.2.2, when X = E2, are described in Example 7.

Exercise 13.2.4 An orbit space X/Γ is said to be orientable if every element of Γ is orientation-preserving. Suppose that Γ has an orientation-reversing element. Let Γ0 be the subgroup of all orientation-preserving elements of Γ. Then X/Γ0 is called the orientable double cover of X/Γ. For each nonorientable orbit space X/Γ in Example 6 and 7, identify its orientable double cover.

Solution: The orientable double cover of P 2 or a hemisphere of type ( ; ) is S2.

The orientable double cover of a projective football of type (n), a lune of type ( ; n, n) or a cone of type (n; ) is a football of type (n, n). The orientable double cover of a spherical triangle of type ( ; a, b, c) is a turnover of type (a, b, c). The orientable double cover of a cone of type (2; m) is a turnover of type (2, 2, m).

The orientable double cover of a cone of type (3; 2) is a turnover of type (2, 3, 3).

The orientable double cover of a projective pillow of type (2, 2), a rectangle of type ( ; 2, 2, 2, 2), a cone of type (2; 2, 2), or a pillowcase of type (2, 2; ) is a pillow of type (2, 2, 2, 2). The orientable double cover of a Euclidean triangle of type ( ; a, b, c) is a turnover of type (a, b, c). The orientable double cover of a cone of type (3; 3) is a turnover of type (3, 3, 3). The orientable double cover of a cone of type (4; 2) is a turnover of type (2, 4, 4). The orientable double cover of a Klein bottle of type ( ), an annulus of type ( ; ) or a Möbius band of type ( ; ) is a torus of type ( ).

324

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 13.2.5 Let Γ and H be a discrete groups of isometries of X = Sn, En, or Hn such that X/Γ and X/H are isometric. Prove that Vol(X/Γ) = Vol(X/H).

Solution: Now, by Theorem 13.2.7, there is an isometry f of X such that f Γf −1 = H. Then Vol(X/Γ) = Vol(X/H) by Exercise 6.7.1.

Exercise 13.2.6 Let γ : [a, b] →M be a curve in a metric (X, G)-orbifold.

Prove that the X-length of γ is the same as the length of γ with respect to the induced metric.

Solution: Since the X-length and the length of a curve are additive, we may assume that γ([a, b]) is contained in a coordinate neighborhood U of a chart φ : U → X/Γ for M . Then γ = |φγ| by definition. Now φ is a local isometry

by Theorem 13.2.14. Hence |φγ| = |γ|. Thus γ = |γ|.

Exercise 13.2.7 Let Γ be a discrete group of isometries of a geometric space X. Prove that Ω(X/Γ) is a geodesically connected subset of X/Γ.

Solution: Let Γx and Γy be distinct points of Ω(X/Γ). Let D be the Dirichlet domain for Γ centered at x. As X = ∪{ gD : g ∈ Γ} . There is a g in Γ such that gy is in D. By Theorem 6.6.14, we have that d(x, gy) = dist(x, Γy). Let α : [a, b]→ X be a geodesic arc from x to gy. Then πα : [a, b]→ X/Γ is a geodesic arc from Γx to Γy by the proof of Theorem 13.1.5. As α([a, b))c D by the proof of Theorem 6.6.13, we have that πα([a, b])c Ω(X/Γ). Thus Ω(X/Γ) is geodesically connected.

Exercise 13.2.8 Let Γ be a discrete group of isometries of a geometric space X. Show that the induced metric on X/Γ and Ω(X/Γ) is the orbit space metric dΓ. Conclude that X/Γ is the metric completion of the metric (X, Γ)-manifold Ω(X/Γ).

Solution: The induced metric on X/Γ is the path metric ρ of X/Γ. Now X/Γ is geodesically connected by Theorem 13.1.5. Hence ρ = dΓ by Exercise 13.1.3.

Now Ω(X/Γ) is a geodesically connected subset of X/Γ by Exercise 13.2.7.

If γ : [a, b] → Ω(X/Γ) is a curve from Γx to Γy. Then dΓ(Γx, Γy) ≤ |γ|, where |γ| is the length of γ in X/Γ, and |γ| = γ by Exercise 13.2.7. Hence d(Γx, Γy) = dΓ(Γx, Γy). Thus, the induced metric d on Ω(X/Γ) is the restriction of the metric dΓ on X/Γ. Hence Ω(X/Γ) is isometrically embedded as a dense subset of X/Γ by Exercise 13.1.1. Therefore X/Γ is the metric completion of the metric (X, Γ)-manifold Ω(X/Γ).

Exercise 13.2.9 Let Γ be a discrete group of isometries of X = Sn, En, or Hn. Define F = ∪{Fix(g) : g /= 1 in Γ}. Prove that F is a closed Γ-invariant subset of X and Σ(X/Γ) = F/Γ. Prove that dim Σ(X/Γ) = max{dim Fix(g) : g /= 1 in Γ}.

Solution: If g is in Γ, then Fix(g) is either empty or an m-plane of X for some integer m with 0 ≤ m ≤ n. Hence Fix(g) is a closed subset of X. As Γ

325

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

acts discontinuously on X, the family { Fix(g) : g ∈ Γ } is locally finite. Hence F = ∪{Fix(g) : g =/ 1 in Γ }is a closed subset of X. If f and g are in Γ, then f Fix(g) = Fix(fgf −1). Therefore F is Γ-invariant.

Now we have Σ(X/Γ)

= {Γx : |Γx| > 1} = {Γx : x ∈ F } = F/Γ.

We prove that dim Σ(X/Γ) = max{dim Fix(g) : g /= 1 in Γ} by induction on n. This is clear if n = 1, so suppose n > 1 and the claim is true in dimension n— 1. Let x be a point of X. By Theorem 13.1.1, there is an r > 0 such that the quotient map π : X →X/Γ induces an isometry from C(x, r)/Γx to C(π(x), r). By the induction hypothesis, dim Σ(S(X, r)/Γx) = max{dim Fix(g) — 1 : g /= 1 in Γx}.

Hence dim Σ(X/Γ) ∩ C(π(x), r) = max{dim Fix(g) : g /= 1 in Γx}.

Therefore dim Σ(X/Γ) = max{dim Fix(g) : g /= 1 in Γ}.

13.3

Developing Orbifolds

Exercise 13.3.1 Let M be a connected (X, G)-orbifold. Prove that there is an (X, G)-path over M from any (x, φ) to any (y, ψ).

Solution: By Theorem 13.1.1 and Lemma 1 of §13.1, there is a path γ : [0, 1] → M from φ−1(Γx) to ψ−1(Hy), a partition {s0, . . . , sm} of [0, 1], and a family of charts {φi : Ui → X/Γi}mi=1for M such that γ([si−1, si]) c Ui for each i and φiγi is a piecewise geodesic curve in X/Γi where γi is the restriction of γ to [si−1, si].

Let xi be a point of X such that Γixi = φiγ(si−1) for each i = 1, . . . , m. By Theorem 13.1.7, we have that φiγi lifts to a curve αi : [si−1, si] → X such that αi(si−1) = xi for each i = 1, . . . , m.

Now we have φφ1−1(Γ1x1) = φγ(0) = Γx, and so there is a g0 in G such that g0x1 = x and g0 lifts φφ1−1 in a neighborhood of x1. Also −1 Γi+1αi+1(si) = φiγ(si) = Γiαi(si), φiφ i+1

326

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

−1 in a and so there is a gi in G such that giαi+1(si) = αi(si) and gi lifts φiφi+1 neighborhood of αi+1(si) for each i = 1, . . . , m — 1. Moreover

φmψ−1(Hy) = φmγ(1) = Γmαm(1), and so there is a gm in G such that gmy = αm(1) and gm lifts φmψ−1 is a neighborhood of y. Then {g0, α1, φ1, g1, . . . , gm−1, αm, φm, gm} is an (X, G)-path over M from (x, φ) to (y, ψ).

Exercise 13.3.2 Let Γ be a discrete group of isometries of a geometric space X and let ι : X/Γ → X/Γ be the identity map. Define a function ζ : π1(X, x) → π1o(X/Γ, x, ι) by ζ([α]) = [ 1,{α, ι, 1 ].} Prove that ζ is a homomorphism and that the following sequence is exact: ζ

o

η

1 —→ π1 (X, x) —→ π1 (X/Γ, x, ι) —→ Γ —→ 1.

Solution: Let [α], [β] be in π1(X, x). Then ζ [α][β]

= ζ [αβ] = [{1, αβ, ι, 1}] = [{1, α, ι, 1, β, ι, 1}] = [{1, α, ι, 1}{1, β, ι, 1}] =

[ {1, α, ι, 1 }][{1, β, ι, 1 }]

=

ζ [α] ζ [β] .

Hence ζ is a homomorphism.

Observe that ηζ [α] = η [1, α, ι, 1] = 1, and so Im(ζ) c ker(η). Now let A = {g0, α1, φ1, g1, . . . , gm−1, αm, φm, gm} be an (X, Γ)-path over X/Γ from (x, ι) to (x, ι) such that g0 argument in the proof of Theorem 13.3.2, we have that

· · · gm = 1. By the

A ' {1, (g0α1)(g0g1α2) · · · (g0 · · · gm−1αm), ι, 1}.

Hence, we have [A] = ζ [(g0α1)(g0g1α2) · · · (g0 · · · gm−1αm)] .

Thus ker(η) c Im(ζ). Therefore Im(ζ) = ker(η).

It remains to show that ζ is injective. Suppose [A] is in ker(η) and A = {g0, α1, φ1, g1, . . . , gm−1, αm, φm, gm} 327

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Define ρ : ker(η) → π1(X, x) by ρ [A] = [(g0α1)(g0g1α2) · · · (g0 · · · gm−1αm)].

We need to show that ρ is well defined. Suppose [A] = [B] and B = {h0, β1, ψ1, h1, . . . , hn−1, βn, ψn, hn} We prove that (g0α1)(g0g1α2) · · · (g0 · · · gm−1αm) ' (h0β1)(h0h1β2) · · · (h0 · · · hn−1βn) by induction on the number of operations that take A to B. By the induction hypothesis we may assume that one operation takes A to B. For each of the five operations, we have (g0α1)(g0g1α2) · · · (g0 · · · gm−1αm) ' (h0β1)(h0h1β2) · · · (h0 · · · hn−1βn).

Hence ρ is well defined. Now ρζ [α] = ρ [{1, α, ι, 1}] = [α].

Hence ρζ is the identity. Therefore ζ is injective.

Exercise 13.3.3 Let M̃ be the universal orbifold covering space based at (x, φ) of an (X, G)-orbifold M and let κ : M̃ → M be the universal orbifold covering projection. Let A be an (X, G)-path over M from (x, φ) to (y, ψ) and let N be an open neighborhood of κ(⟨A⟩) in M . Prove that κ(⟨A, N ⟩) is the connected component of N containing κ(⟨A⟩).

Solution: By definition ⟨A, N ⟩ is the set of all equivalence classes of the for m ⟨A B⟩ where B is an (X , G)-path over M starting at (y, ψ) such that B [0, 1] c N . Hence κ ⟨AB⟩ = AB(1) = B(1) is in the component N1 of N containing B(0) = A(1) = κ ⟨A⟩ . Therefore κ ⟨A, N ⟩ c N1.

Let u be a point of N1. By Theorem 13.1.1 and Lemma 1 of §13.1, there is a path γ : [0, 1] → N1 from A(1) to u, a partition {t1, . . . , tn} of [0, 1], and a family of charts {ψi : Vi → X/Γi}n i=1 for M such that γ([ti−1, ti]) c Vi for each i, and ψiγi is a piecewise geodesic curve in X/Γi where γi is the restriction of γ to [ti−1, ti] for each i. As in Exercise 13.3.1, there is an (X, G)-path B = {h0, β1, ψ1, h1, . . . , hn−1, βn, ψn, hn} over M from (y, ψ) to (βn(1), ψn) such that B = γ. Then κ ⟨AB⟩ = B(1) = u.

Therefore κ ⟨A, N ⟩ = N1.

Exercise 13.3.4 Let Γ be a discontinuous group of homeomorphisms of a locally compact Hausdorff space X that acts freely on X. Prove that the quotient map π : X → X/Γ is a covering projection.

328

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Solution: Let x be a point of X. As X is locally compact, there is an open neighborhood U of x in X such that U is compact. As U∪ { x} is compact, U meets only finitely many elements of Γx. Hence V = U— (Γ— {1 })x is an open neighborhood of x. Let W be an open neighborhood of x such that W c V . Then W ∩ Γx = {x}. As W is compact, W meets only finitely many members o f {gW : g ∈ Γ}. If g /= 1 in Γ, then x /∈ gW , since g−1x /∈ W . Hence N = W — Γ — {1} W is an open neighborhood of x. If g /= 1 in Γ, then N ∩ gN c N ∩ gW = ∅.

Now π(N ) is open in X/Γ, since π−1 π(N ) = ∪{gN : g ∈ Γ }. Moreover π maps gN homeomorphically onto π(N ) for each g in Γ. Hence π(N ) is evenly covered by π. Thus π is a covering projection.

Exercise 13.3.5 Let κ : M̃ → M be as in Exercise 13.3.3 with M connected.

Prove that κ restricts to a covering projection κ1 : κ−1(Ω(M )) → Ω(M ).

Solution: Now M̃ is a locally compact Hausdorff space by Lemmas 5 and 6 of §13.3. As Ω(M ) is open in M , we have that κ−1(Ω(M )) is open in M̃ . Therefore κ−1(Ω(M )) is a locally compact Hausdorff space. The group πo1(M, x, φ) acts freely, discontinuously, and via homeomorphisms on κ−1(Ω(M )) by Theorem 13.3.4. Hence, the quotient map from κ−1(Ω(M )) to κ−1(Ω(M ))/π1o(M, x, φ) is a covering projection by Exercise 13.3.4. Hence κ restricts to a covering projection κ1 : κ−1(Ω(M )) → Ω(M ) by Theorem 13.3.4.

Exercise 13.3.6 Prove that a connected (X, G)-orbifold M is complete if and only if every (or some) developing map δ : M̃→ X for M is a covering projection.

Solution: Suppose that a developing map δ : M̃ → X for M is a covering projection. Then M̃ is geodesically complete by Theorem 8.5.6. Hence M̃ is a complete metric space by Theorem 8.5.7. Then every universal orbifold covering space of M is a complete metric space by the argument in the last paragraph of the proof of Theorem 13.3.8. Thus M is complete.

Conversely, suppose M is complete. Let M̃ be the universal orbifold covering space of M based at (x, φ). Then M̃ is a complete metric space. Hence M̃ is geodesically complete by Theorem 8.5.7. Therefore, the developing map δ : M̃ → X is a covering projection by Theorem 8.5.6.

13.4

Gluing Orbifolds

Exercise 13.4.1 Let Φ be a G-side-pairing for a finite set of disjoint, n-dimensional, compact, convex polyhedra of X. Prove that Φ has finite cycles.

Solution: Let Pbe the finite set of polyhedra, and let Π =∪{P ∈ P} . Let x be a point of Π, and let P be the polyhedron in P that contains x. Let F be the k-face of P that contains x in its interior. If x′ is in [x], then x′ is in the 329

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

interior of a k-face F ′ of a polyhedron P ′ in P with F congruent to F ′. As F is compact, there are only finitely many congruences from F to F ′, and so there are only finitely many possibilities for x′ in F ′. As each P inP is compact, P has only finitely many k-faces for each P inP. Therefore, there are only finitely many possibilities for x′. Thus, the cycle [x] is finite.

Exercise 13.4.2 Let P be an exact fundamental polyhedron for a discrete group Γ of isometries of X. Prove that the side-pairing of P determined by Γ is subproper.

Solution: Let [x] = {x1, . . . , xm} be a ridge cycle with x = x1 ' x2 ' · · · ' xm.

Let R be the ridge of P containing x, and let S be a side of P containing R such that if m > 1, then x2 is in S′. Let { S i } i∞= 1 be the sequence of sides of P determined by R and S. Then xi is in Si for each i = 1, . . . , m. By Theorem 6.8.7, there is a least positive integer l and a positive integer k such that 1. Si+A = Si for each i, Σ 2. ki=1 θ(Si′, Si+1) = 2π/k, and 3. the element gA = gS1 gS2 · · · gSl has order k.

Now gsi xi+1 = xi for i = 1, . . . , m — 1. Suppose [x] is cyclic. Then xm ' x1.

Hence Sm+1 = S1 and gSm x1 = xm by Theorem 13.4.1. Therefore, the element gm = gS1 gS2 · · · gSm fixes x and gm is in the cyclic group ⟨gA⟩. Let q be the order of the stabilizer of x in ⟨gA⟩. Then q divides k. Now ⟨gk/q A ⟩ = ⟨gA⟩x, since ⟨gA⟩ has a unique subgroup of order q. Therefore gm = gAk/q, and so m = (k/q)l. Hence, we have θ[x] =

m Σ

θ(P, xi)

i=1

=

kΣ θ(Si′, S i+1 ) q i=1

=

k q

A

2π k

=

2π . q

Now suppose [x] is dihedral. Then S m′ = Sm and gSm xm = xm by Theorem 13.4.1. Hence Sm+1 = S m′ −1 and gsm+1 xm−1 = xm, Sm+2 = S m′ −2 and gSm+2 xm−2 = xm−1, . . . , S2m−1 = S1′ and gs2m−1 x1 = x2, and R = S2m ∩ S1, and S2m' = S2m and gS2m x1 = x1. Finally S2m+1 = S1 by Theorem 13.4.1.

Hence, the element g2m = gS1 gS2 · · · gS2m 330

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

fixes x and g2m is in the cyclic group ⟨gA⟩. As before g2m = gAk/q, and so 2m = (k/q)l. Hence, we have 2θ[x] =

2m Σ

θ(P, xi)

i=1

=

kΣ θ(Si′, S i+1 ) q i=1

=

k q

A

2π k

=

2π , q

and so θ[x] = π/q. Thus, the side-pairing of P determined by Γ is subproper.

Exercise 13.4.3 Prove directly that the space obtained by gluing together the sides of the quadrilateral in Example 2 is a Euclidean similarity 2-orbifold.

Solution: Let q be a point of Q, and let δ(q) be as in the proof of Theorem 13.4.2. Let k be the scale factor of gS. We may assume that k ≥ 1. Let r be a radius such that 0 < r < δ(q)/(4k). We construct a chart φq : U (q, r) → B(q, r)/Γq for (M, π(q)), where π : Q → M is the quotient map, as follows: If q is in Q○, then U (q, r) = π(B(q, r)), Γq = {1} and φq(π(p)) = p.

If q is in L○ (or R○), then U (q, r) = π(Q ∩ B(q, r)), Γq = ⟨gL⟩ (or ⟨gR⟩), and φq(π(p)) = Γqp.

If q is in S○ and gS(q′) = q, then U (q, r) = π (Q ∩ B(q, r)) ∪ (Q ∩ B(q′, r/k)) , Γq = {1}, and φq(π(p)) =

p if p ∈ Q ∩ B(q, r), gS(p) if p ∈ Q ∩ B(q′, r/k).

If q is in T ○ and gT (q′) = q, then U (q, r) = π (Q ∩ B(q, r)) ∪ (Q ∩ B(q′, kr)) , Γq = {1}, and φq(π(p)) =

p if p ∈ Q ∩ B(q, r), gT (p) if p ∈ Q ∩ B(q′, kr).

If q = w (or x), then U (q, r) = π (Q ∩ B(q, r)) ∪ (Q ∩ B(q′, r/k)) , Γq = ⟨gL⟩ (or ⟨gR⟩), and φq(π(p)) =

Γqp if p ∈ Q ∩ B(q, r), ΓqgS(p) if p ∈ Q ∩ B(q′, r/k).

331

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

If q = y (or z), then U (q, r) = π (Q ∩ B(q, r)) ∪ (Q ∩ B(q′, kr)) , Γq = ⟨gR⟩ (or ⟨gL⟩), and φq(π(p)) =

Γqp if p ∈ Q ∩ B(q, r), ΓqgT (p) if p ∈ Q ∩ B(q′, kr).

Then the same argument as in the proof of Theorem 13.4.2 shows that {φq : U (q, r) → B(q, r)/Γq : q ∈ Q and 0 < r < δ(q)/(4k)} is an (E2, S(E2))-atlas for M .

Exercise 13.4.4 Prove that the Euclidean similarity orbifold in Example 2 is complete if and only if α = β.

Solution: Suppose α = β. Then Q is a rectangle, and so gS and gT are translations. Therefore M is a Euclidean 2-orbifold. Hence M is a complete metric space, since M is compact. Therefore M is complete by Theorem 13.3.8.

Conversely, suppose M is complete. Let q be the midpoint of S, and let φq : U (q, r) →B(q, r) be a chart for (M, π(q)) constructed as in the solution of Exercise 13.4.3. Let η : π1o(M, q, φq) →S(E2) be the holonomy of M determined by (q, φq). Then Im(η) is a subgroup of I(E2) by Theorem 13.3.10. Let q′ = gT (q), and let α : [0, 1] → Q be the path from q to q′ defined by α(t) = (1 —t)q + tq′. Then α projects to a closed path πα in M . Hence α determines an element [A] of π1o(M, q, φq) with A = πα and A = {1, α1, φq, 1, . . . , 1, αm, φq' , gT }.

As η([A]) = gT , we conclude that gT is an isometry. Hence Q is a rectangle, and so α = β.

Exercise 13.4.5 Position the quadrilateral Q in Example 2 in C so that the similarity gS is multiplication by a positive real number. Let C∗ be a metric space so that the exponential map exp : C→ C∗ induces an isometry from C/2πiZ to C∗. Find all the values of the angle α of Q so that the side-pairing Φ generates a discrete group Γ of isometries of C∗ with fundamental polygon Q. See Exercise 10.5.2.

Solution: Let gS(z) = kz with k > 0. Then k /= 1. As gS(y) = x, we have x = ky. As gS(z) = w, we have w = kz. Hence, the lines ⟨ R⟩ and ⟨L ⟩ intersect at the origin. Therefore, the reflections gR and gL are isometries of C∗

by Exercise 10.5.2.

Suppose Φ generates a discrete group of isometries with fundamental polygon Q. Then gR and gL generate a discrete group of isometries of C∗ with fundamental polygon P the region containing Q bounded by the two rays from 332

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

0 determined by R and S. Hence ⟨gR, gL ⟩is a finite dihedral group and the acute angle θ between⟨ R⟩ and ⟨L ⟩is π/n for some integer n > 1.

Assume k > 1. Then Q lies below 0 in C and Δ(y, z, 0) has angles α, α, θ at y, z, 0, respectively. Hence 2α + θ = π, and so π—θ π π = — .

2 2 2n Now assume k < 1. Then Q lies above 0 in C and Δ(w, x, 0) has angles β, β, θ at w, x, 0, respectively. Hence 2β + θ = π, and so α=

π—θ 2

α=π—β =π—

=

π π + .

2 2n

Thus, in both cases, α = π2 ± π2nfor some integer n > 1. All cases occur, since Q tessellates P , and P tessellates C∗.

Exercise 13.4.6 Generalize Theorem 10.5.6 so that the conclusion is as follows: The metric completion M is a hyperbolic 3-orbifold if and only if the image of the holonomy η˜ for the link L of the cusp point of M contains 2πi.

Solution: Suppose Im(η˜) contains 2πi. Then Im(η) is a discrete subgroup of C∗ and the developing map δ : L̃→ C∗ induces a (C∗, C∗)-equivalence from L to C∗/Im(η) by Theorem 10.5.5. We now modify the proof of Theorem 10.5.6.

Let Γ = j Im(η) and let Γ̃ = ˜j Im(η˜) . As η = exp η˜, the projection of C˜0 onto C0 induces an isometry from C˜ 0 / Γ̃ to C0/Γ. Hence N is isometric to C0/Γ.

The metric completion of C0 is C, since C is the closure of C0 in the complete metric space U 3. The group Γ is generated by a hyperbolic transformation of U 3, whose axis is the core A of C, and a rotation about A by an angle 2π/n where n is the largest integer such that Im(η˜) contains 2πi/n. Therefore Γ acts discontinuously on C. Hence C/Γ is a metric space homeomorphic to a solid torus. As C/Γ is compact, C/Γ is complete. Hence C/Γ is the metric completion of C0/Γ in C/Γ, since C/Γ is the closure of C0/Γ in C/Γ. Thus, the metric completion N of N is isometric to C/Γ.

Observe that the hyperbolic structure of the interior of C0/Γ extends to a hyperbolic orbifold structure on the interior of C/Γ with singular set the circle A/Γ each of whose points has order n. Hence, the hyperbolic structure of N ○ extends to a hyperbolic orbifold structure on N ○. As M—N ○ is compact, the metric completion of M is (M—N ) ∪N , which is a hyperbolic 3-orbifold with singular set the circle corresponding to A/Γ each of whose points has order n.

Conversely, suppose that M is a hyperbolic 3-orbifold. Let δ :˜ M → U 3 be the developing map for M that is consistent with the developing map δ : M̃ → U 3 for M . Let η : π1o(M ) →I(U 3) be the holonomy determined by δ. Then we have a commutative diagram π(L) η↓ C∗

i — → j — →

π1(M ) → π1o(M ) ↓ ηˆ I0(U 3) 333

↓η →

I(U 3).

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

By Theorem 13.3.10, we have that Im(η) is a discrete subgroup of I(U 3). Therefore Γ = j(Im(η)) is a discrete subgroup of I0(U 3) and Im(η) is a discrete subgroup of C∗. By Theorem 13.3.10, the map δ :˜M → U 3 induces an isometry from M to U 3/Im(η). Consequently δ induces an isometry from S to ∂C/Γ.

This implies that δ : L̃ → C∗ induces a (C∗, C∗)-equivalence from L to C∗/Im(η).

By Theorem 10.5.5, we have that 2πi is in Im(η˜).

Exercise 13.4.7 Generalize Theorem 10.5.8 so that the conclusion is as follows: The metric completion M is a hyperbolic 3-orbifold if and only if the Dehn surgery invariant of M is a pair (p, q) of integers.

Solution: By Exercise 13.4.6, the metric completion M is a hyperbolic 3orbifold if and only if 2πi is in Im(η˜) which is the case if and only if there are integers p and q such that η˜(pm + ql) = 2πi, that is, p η˜(m) + q η˜(l) = 2πi.

Thus, the metric completion M is a hyperbolic 3-orbifold if and only if the Dehn surgery invariant of M is a pair (p, q) of integers.

Exercise 13.4.8 Generalize Theorem 10.5.9 so that the greatest common divisor d of p and q may be greater than one and the conclusion is as follows: The metric completion M is a hyperbolic 3-orbifold homeomorphic to the 3-manifold M(p/d,q/d) obtained from Ê 3 by (p/d, q/d)-Dehn surgery on K. Solution: Suppose that the Dehn surgery invariant of M is a pair of integers (p, q). Then the metric completion M is a hyperbolic 3-orbifold by Exercise 13.4.7. From the solution of Exercise 13.4.6, we have that M = (M — N ○)∪ N , where N is a solid torus isometric to C/Γ. The group Γ = j(Im(η)) is generated by a hyperbolic transformation h, which is the Poincar´e extension of '→ z kz with |k |> 1, and a rotation f which is the Poincar´e extension of z'→ uz where u is an nth root of unity.

Let F be the frustrum in U 3 bounded by ∂C and the horospheres x3 = 1, |k | as in Figure 10.5.15. Then f leaves F invariant, and F ○ is a fundamental domain for the action of h on C. The orbit space C/Γ is homeomorphic to the solid torus V = F/Γ that is glued to M —N ○ to give M . Now M —N ○ is homeomorphic to the complement in Eˆ 3 of an open tubular neighborhood of K. Therefore M is homeomorphic to a 3-manifold obtained from Eˆ 3 by Dehn surgery on K. Let ρ be the curve around the bottom rim of F as in Figure 10.5.15, and let σ be the initial (1/n)th part of ρ that parameterizes (1/n)th of the bottom rim of F . Then σ represents a meridian of V , and σ corresponds to the rotation f by the angle 2π/n around the axis A of C. As the Dehn surgery invariant of M pq is (p, q), the curve of π1(∂N ). Let σ represent ' 'ρ represents the element m l the element mp lq of π1 (∂N ). As [ρ] = n[σ] in π 1(∂N ), we have p = np′ and q = nq′. Therefore σ represents the element mp/nlq/n of π1(∂N ). Now since p η˜(m) + q η˜(l) = 2πi 334

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

and n is the largest integer such that 2πi/n is in Im(η˜), we deduce that n is the greatest common divisor d of p and q. Thus M is homeomorphic to M(p/d,q/d).

Exercise 13.4.9 Generalize Theorem 10.5.10 so that the greatest common divisor d of p and q may be greater than one and the conclusion is as follows: M(p/d,q/d) has a hyperbolic 3-orbifold structure whose singular set is a simple closed curve all of whose points have order d when d > 1.

Solution: Let p, q be integers such that |p| > 4 or |q| > 1 and the greatest common divisor d of p and q satisfies d > 1. Then M(p/d,q/d) has a hyperbolic 3-orbifold structure by Exercises 13.4.7 and 13.4.8. By the solution of Exercise 13.4.6, the singular set of M(p/d,q/d) is a circle all of whose points have order d.

Exercise 13.4.10 Prove that if d > 4, then S3 has a hyperbolic 3-orbifold structure whose singular set is a figure-eight knot all of whose points have order d.

Solution: Let d > 4. Then (d, 0) is in the image of the Dehn surgery invariant map d : W →Ê 2 . See Figure 10.5.17. Hence, there is an incomplete hyperbolic 3-manifold M obtained by properly gluing together two ideal tetrahedrons according to the gluing pattern for the figure-eight knot complement whose Dehn surgery invariant is (d, 0). By Exercises 13.4.7 and 13.4.8, the metric completion M is a hyperbolic 3-orbifold homeomorphic to the 3-manifold M(1,0) obtained from Ê 3 by (1, 0)-Dehn surgery on K. Now M(1,0) is homeomorphic to Ê 3 .

Moreover, the singular set of M is a circle, corresponding to K, all of whose points have order d. Therefore S3 has a hyperbolic 3-orbifold structure whose singular set is a figure-eight knot all of whose points have order d.

Exercise 13.4.11 Prove that if d > 4, then the d-fold cyclic branched covering of S3, along the figure-eight knot in Exercise 13.4.10, has a hyperbolic 3-manifold structure.

Solution: By Exercise 13.4.10, we have that S3 has a hyperbolic 3-orbifold structure whose singular set is a figure-eight knot K all of whose points have order d. Let π : M → S3 be the d-fold cyclic branched covering of S3 along K. Now π restricts to a d-fold cyclic covering π0 on π−1(S3— K). Hence, 3 the hyperbolic 3-manifold structure on S— K lifts to a hyperbolic 3-manifold 1 − structure on M— π (K).

The knot K has a tubular neighborhood N (K, r) in S3 with respect to the orbifold metric such that π−1(N (K, r)) is a tubular neighborhood of π−1(K).

The hyperbolic 3-orbifold structure on N (K, r) lifts to a hyperbolic 3-manifold structure on π−1(N (K, r)) that extends the hyperbolic 3-manifold structure on M —π−1(K) to M . In particular, M is the metric completion of M —π−1(K).

Note that a covering transformation of the d-fold cyclic covering π0 : M — π−1(K) → S3 — K, of order d, extends to an isometry φ of M such that φ acts as a rotation in π−1(N (K, r)), with axis π−1(K), by an angle of 2π/d. Finally, π : M → S3 induces an isometry from M/⟨φ⟩ to the hyperbolic 3-orbifold S3.

335

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

13.5

Poincaré’s Theorem

Exercise 13.5.1 Show that Theorem 13.5.3 does not hold for X = S1 but does hold for X = E1 or H1.

Solution: Suppose X = S1. Let P be a geodesic arc in S1 of length θ such that θ/π is irrational. Then the side-pairing map g has infinite order, and so ⟨g⟩ is not discrete. Therefore, Theorem 13.5.3 does not hold for X = S1.

Suppose X = E1 or H1. If P = X, then Φ = ∅, and Γ = {1}. If P is a closed ray with side S, then Φ = { g}S with gS a reflection. Hence Γ =⟨ gS⟩ is discrete, P is an exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron for Γ, and (S; S2) is a presentation for Γ.

Now suppose P is a closed geodesic segment with sides S and T . Then Φ = {gS, gT } with gS either a translation or a reflection. If gS is a translation, then gT = gS−1, and Γ = ⟨gS⟩ is a discrete infinite cyclic group. If gS is a reflection, then gT is also a reflection, and Γ = ⟨ gS, gT⟩ is a discrete infinite dihedral group. In both cases P is an exact, convex, fundamental polyhedron for Γ. If gS is a translation, then Γ has the presentation (S, T ; ST ). If gS is a reflection, then Γ has the presentation (S, T ; S2, T 2). Thus, theorem 13.5.3 holds for X = E1 or H1.

Exercise 13.5.2 Find a presentation for the discrete group of isometries of H2 corresponding to the hyperbolic orbifold in Example 6 of §13.4.

Solution: Let R, L, S be the sides of the generalized triangle Δ in Figure 13.4.6. The triangle Δhas only one cycle of actual vertices. By Theorem 13.5.3, the group Γ generated by the side-pairing ofΔ has the presentation with generators R, L, S, side-pairing relators RL and S2, and vertex cycle relator R3.

On eliminating the generator L and the side-pairing relator RL, we have that Γ has the presentation (R, S; S2, R3).

Exercise 13.5.3 Find a presentation for the discrete group of isometries of E3 corresponding to the Euclidean orbifold in Example 4 of §13.4.

Solution: Let A, B, C be the sides of the cube P containing e1, e2, e3, respectively, and let D, E, F be the sides of P containing , e2,—e3, re— e1— spectively. By Theorem 13.5.3, the group Γ generated by the side-pairing of P has the presentation with generators A, B, C, D, E, F , side-pairing relators A2, B2, C2, D2, E2, F 2, and edge cycle relators AEAB, BFBC, CDCA, DEDB, EFEC, FDFA. The relator AEAB is determined by side A and the edge with vertices (1, 1, ±1). The relator BFBC is determined by side B and the edge with vertices (±1, 1, 1). The relator CDCA is determined by side C and the edge with vertices (1, ±1, 1). The relator DEDB is determined by side D and the edge with vertices (—1, 1, ±1). The relator EFEC is determined by side E and the edge with vertices (±1, —1, 1). The relator FDFA is determined by side F and the edge with vertices (1, ±1, —1).

336

Solutions Manual for Foundations of Hyperbolic Manifolds 3rd Edition by John G. Ratcliffe

Exercise 13.5.4 Find a presentation for the discrete group of isometries of H3 corresponding to the hyperbolic orbifold in Example 5 of §13.4.

Solution: Label the side opposite A′ by E. Then E′ is the side opposite A. Label the side opposite B′ by F . Then F ′ is the side opposite B. By Theorem 13.5.3, the group Γ generated by the side-pairing of P has the presentation with generators A, A′, B, B′, C, C′, D, D′, E, E′, F, F ′, side-pairing relators AA′, BB′, CC ′ , DD′, EE′, FF ′, and edge cycle relators A4, B4, C4, D4, E4, F 4, AFA′B′, BCB′D′, CEC′A′, DED′A′, EFE ′ B ′ , FCF ′D′.

The relator AFA′B′ is determined by side A and edge A ∩ B. The relator BCB′D′ is determined by side B and edge ∩ B D. The relator CEC′A′ is determined by side C and edge C∩ A. The relator DED′A′ is determined by side D and edge D∩ A. The relator EFE ′ B ′ is determined by side E and edge E ∩ B. The relator FCF ′D′ is determined by side F and edge F∩ D. Eliminating the prime generators gives the presentation with generators A, B, C, D, E, F and relators A4, B4, C4, D4, E4, F 4, AFA−1B−1, BCB−1D−1, CEC−1A−1, DED−1A−1, EFE−1B−1, FCF −1D−1.

Exercise 13.5.5 Find a presentation for the discrete group of isometries of H3 corresponding to the hyperbolic orbifold in Example 7 of §13.4.

Solution: Label the top side of P containing α, β, γ, δ by A, B, C, D, respectively. By Theorem 13.5.3, the group Γ generated by the side-pairing of P has the presentation with generators A, A′, B, B′, C, C′, D, D′, side-pairing relators AA′, BB′, CC ′ , DD′, and edge cycle relators A4, B4, C4, D4, (AB′)2, (BC′)2, (CD′)2, (DA′)2.

Eliminating the prime generators gives the presentation with generators A, B, C, D and relators A4, B4, C4, D4, (AB−1)2, (BC−1)2, (CD−1)2, (DA−1)2.

337